JP2016209741A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine with an enhanced amusement.SOLUTION: Even in a case of a special symbol variation game where a button introduction animation 1 is performed, or even in a case of a special symbol variation game where a button introduction animation 2 of which presentation mode is different from the button introduction animation 1 is performed, for an amid button reception animation to be performed successively, an amid button reception animation 1 with the same presentation mode is performed in both cases. In this way, even if the presentation mode of the amid button reception animation to be performed in each of a plurality of special symbol variation games is the same, the presentation mode of the button introduction animation to be performed prior to the amid button reception animation is different for each special symbol variation game. Therefore, a player's consciousness can be directed to a difference of the presentation mode of the button introduction animation to be performed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a spinning machine (slot machine).

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a game machine that can display an image that prompts an operation to an operation means.

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, the conventional game machine has a problem that only one type of image that prompts an operation to the operation means is displayed.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine with improved interest.

The above purpose is
A symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display;
Display means capable of performing multiple types of display;
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of display is a display (hereinafter, referred to as “pre-reception display”) performed before the operation reception by the player.
The display means is a means capable of displaying one image showing the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “first operation part image”),
The display means is a means capable of displaying one image showing the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “second operation part image”),
The first operation unit image and the second operation unit image are different display modes,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a first pre-reception animation including a first scene as the pre-reception display,
The first pre-reception animation may include a second scene,
The first scene is a scene in which the first operation unit image is displayed and the second operation unit image is not displayed.
The second scene is a scene in which the second operation unit image is displayed and the first operation unit image is not displayed.
This is achieved by a game stand characterized by that.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by performing various displays.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 according to a first embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part of pachinko machine 100 by a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 1, (b) shows the stop display symbol of special figure 2 (C) is an example of a decorative symbol, and (d) is a diagram illustrating an example of a normal stop display symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main process of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. (A) is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the special figure prefetch process in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. (B)-(d) is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result memory | storage part for special figures 1 and the special figure 2 with which the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention was equipped. is there. It is a figure which shows the determination table for common use in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, and the example of symbol distribution and the operation at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of the determination table for the special figure in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol distribution table for the special figure 1 in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention, and operation | movement at the time of big hit. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol distribution table for the special figure 2 in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention, and the operation | movement at the time of big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) Shows the flow of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, (c) shows the flow of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) shows the flow of the image control process. It is a figure explaining the electric long opening effect performed by the effect control process of the main process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. (A) shows the flow of the electric long opening effect, and (b) shows an example of the electric long opening effect on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 2nd sub control part main process, (b) Shows the flow of the second sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, and (c) shows the flow of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process. It is a figure which shows the table which shows the display mode of the chance button image used with the button introduction animation of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention, and the button reception animation. It is FIG. (The 1) which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-1 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is FIG. (The 2) which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-1 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is FIG. (The 1) which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-2 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is FIG. (The 2) which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-2 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is FIG. (The 1) which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-3 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is FIG. (The 2) which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-3 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is FIG. (The 1) which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is FIG. (The 2) which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is FIG. (The 1) which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-1 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is FIG. (The 2) which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-1 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is FIG. (The 3) which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-1 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is FIG. (The 1) which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-2 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is FIG. (The 2) which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-2 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is FIG. (The 1) which shows the example of the effect display in Example 4 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is FIG. (The 2) which shows the example of the effect display in Example 4 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 5 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is FIG. (The 1) which shows the example of the effect display in Example 6 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is FIG. (The 2) which shows the example of the effect display in Example 6 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 7 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the production in Example 1 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (The 1) which shows the example of the effect in Example 2-1 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (2) which shows the example of the production in Example 2-1 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (1) which shows the example of the effect in Example 2-2 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (2) which shows the example of the effect in Example 2-2 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (1) which shows the example of the production in Example 3 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (2) which shows the example of the effect in Example 3 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the production in Example 4 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (1) which shows the example of the effect in Example 5 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (2) which shows the example of the effect in Example 5 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the production in Example 6 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is the schematic front view which looked at the slot machine as a game stand by the modification of one embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a figure which shows the game machine by the modification of one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the casino machine 2000, (b) is a portable provided with the memory | storage part which memorize | stores the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention. A telephone 3000 is shown, (c) shows a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) has a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. A home video game machine 5000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 6000 storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine concerning a 3rd embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board from the front. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 is shown. (B) An example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2 is shown. (C) An example of a stop symbol form of a decorative symbol is shown. (D) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a special figure prefetch process. The prefetch result information etc. are illustrated in the state where the prefetch result memory | storage part was memorize | stored. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure 1 related lottery process. (A) It is an example of the table used for the decision | availability determination of special figure 1 when a special figure probability is a special figure low probability state. (B) It is an example of the table used for the success / failure determination of the special figure 1 when the special figure probability is in the special figure high probability state. (C) It is an example of the table used for the success / failure determination of special figure 2 when the special figure probability is in a special figure low probability state. (D) It is an example of the table used for the decision | availability determination of special figure 2 when a special figure probability is a special figure low probability state. (A) Special figure 1 It is an example of a special figure determination table in the variable game. (B) Special figure 2 It is an example of a special figure determination table in the variable game. It is an example of the special figure 1 fluctuation | variation display time determination table used in order to determine the fluctuation | variation time of special figure 1. FIG. It is an example of the special figure 2 fluctuation display time determination table used in order to determine the fluctuation time of special figure 2. FIG. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU of a 1st sub control part performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of a 1st sub control part. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of a 1st sub control part. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU of a 2nd sub control part performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of a 2nd sub control part. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of a 2nd sub control part. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of an operation means image display process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a notice lottery process. It is an example of a notice lottery table. (A)-(d) It is an example of a notice table. (A)-(b) It is an example of a notice table. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 1 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 2 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 3 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 4 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 5 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 6 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 7 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 8 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 9 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 10 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 11 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 12 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the modification of Example 12 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 13 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 13 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the modification of Example 13 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 14 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 15 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 16 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 17 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 18 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 19 in time series. It is the figure which showed the modification of the operation means image, the elapsed time alert image, and the remaining time alert image. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol aspect which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure, (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a decoration symbol, (c ) Shows an example of a normal symbol stop symbol mode. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the main control part which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of the main control part which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the 1st sub control part which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) is a flowchart of a main process, (b) is a flowchart of a command reception interruption process, (c) is a timer allocation. (D) is a flowchart of the image control process. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the 2nd sub control part which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) is a flowchart of a main process, (b) is a flowchart of a command reception interruption process, (c) is a timer allocation. It is a flowchart of a loading process. It is a change time determination table used by the special figure related lottery process of the main control part concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the notice lottery process of the 1st sub control part which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is an alerting | reporting mode determination table used by the notice lottery process which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a time chart which shows the button reception period of Example 1 of the notification mode of the remaining time of this invention, the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period, and the time change of a notice. It is a schematic diagram which shows the effect image displayed on a decoration symbol display apparatus in each time of FIG. It is a time chart which shows the button reception period of Example 2 of the notification aspect of the remaining time of this invention, the notification aspect of the remaining time of the button reception period, and the time change of a notice. FIG. 107 is a schematic diagram showing effect images displayed on the decorative symbol display device at each point in FIG. 107. It is a time chart which shows the time change of the button reception period of Example 3 of the notification aspect of the remaining time of this invention, and the notification aspect of the remaining time of the button reception period. FIG. 110 is a schematic diagram showing a part of the effect image displayed on the decorative symbol display device at each point in FIG. 109. It is a time chart which shows the time change of the button reception period of Example 4 of the notification aspect of the remaining time of this invention, and the notification aspect of the remaining time of the button reception period. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of effect image displayed on a decoration symbol display apparatus at each time of FIG. It is a time chart which shows the time change of the button reception period of Example 5 of the notification aspect of the remaining time of this invention, and the notification aspect of the remaining time of the button reception period. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of effect image displayed on a decoration symbol display apparatus at each time of FIG. It is a time chart which shows the time change of the button reception period of Example 6 of the notification aspect of the remaining time of this invention, and the notification aspect of the remaining time of the button reception period. 115 is a schematic diagram showing effect images displayed on the decorative symbol display device at each point in FIG. 115. FIG. It is a time chart which shows the time change of the button reception period of Example 7 of the notification aspect of the remaining time of this invention, and the notification aspect of the remaining time of the button reception period. FIG. 118 is a schematic diagram showing effect images displayed on the decorative symbol display device at each point in FIG. 117. It is a table which determines the content of the production | presentation which concerns on the notification aspect of the remaining time of a button reception period, and the notification performed before and behind a button reception period used in Example 7 of the notification aspect of the remaining time of this invention. It is a time chart which shows the time change of the button reception period of Example 8 of the notification aspect of the remaining time of this invention, and the notification aspect of the remaining time of the button reception period. FIG. 121 is a schematic diagram showing an effect image displayed on the decorative symbol display device when the chance button is not operated at each time point in FIG. 120. It is a schematic diagram which shows the effect image after the time of (j) of FIG. 120 displayed on a decoration symbol display apparatus when a chance button is operated at the time of (j) and (k) of FIG. It is a table which determines the alerting | reporting aspect of the remaining time of each button reception period used in Example 8 of the alerting | reporting aspect of the remaining time of this invention. It is a figure which concerns on Example 9 of the alerting | reporting aspect of the remaining time of this invention, Comprising: It is a schematic diagram which shows the detail of the alerting | reporting aspect of the remaining time of the button reception period displayed on a decoration symbol display apparatus at each time. FIG. 10 is a schematic front view showing an example in which the gaming machine of the present invention is a slot machine. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on 1st Example of 5th Embodiment of this invention from the front side (player side). It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 from the front side (player side). The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect (second symbol aspect) of the special figure, and (b) is a table summarizing the characteristics of the special figure shown in (a). (A) shows an example of the stop symbol mode (first symbol mode) of the usual figure, and (b) shows an example of the usual figure decoration symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) is a figure which shows the table | surface which put together the operation | movement aspect of the common figure electric accessory 252, (b) is a figure which shows the low probability table for a common figure decision | availability determination, (c) is a figure for a common figure decision decision. It is a figure which shows a high probability table. (A) is a figure which shows the low probability per unit table for usual figure change period determination, (b) is a figure which shows the low probability lose table for usual figure change period determination, (c) is for figure change period decision. It is a figure which shows the losing table per high probability, (d) is a figure which shows the high probability losing table for usual figure change period determination. (A) is a figure which shows the low probability table for special figure success / failure determination, (b) is a figure which shows the high probability table for special figure success / failure determination, (c) is a figure which shows the special figure determination table for big hits It is. (A) is a figure which shows the jackpot table for determining the special figure fluctuation period at the time of normal figure high probability, (b) is a figure which shows the jackpot table for determining the special figure fluctuation period at the time of low figure probability, (c) It is a figure which shows the special figure fluctuation | variation period determination loss table at the time of a usual high probability, (d) is a figure which shows the special figure fluctuation | variation period determination loss table at the time of a usual low probability. (A) is a flowchart of the main process which CPU404 of the 1st sub control part 400 performs, (b) is a flowchart which shows the flow of the presentation control process shown to the same figure (a), (c). 4 is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400, and (d) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400. It is a flowchart which shows a part of flow of the game in the pachinko machine 100. It is a figure which shows the screen of the decoration symbol display apparatus in the flow of the game shown in FIG. 139 in steps. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the game flow shown in FIG. 139. FIG. It is a figure which shows the screen of the decoration symbol display apparatus in case a first hit is a big hit without a probability change in steps. It is a figure which shows the modification of the extra chance shown in FIG.142 (c). It is a time chart of regular symbol variation production and award ball appearance. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a usual symbol change production and a prize ball payment appearance. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a common figure reservation increase production | presentation and a prize ball paying appearance in the state in which the regular symbol fluctuation production | generation is performed. It is a time chart in which the usual symbol variation effect changes to a prize ball appearance. It is a figure which shows the specific example which changes from a usual symbol change effect to a prize ball payment appearance. It is a figure which shows the specific example in which a general figure holding | maintenance increase production changes in the state in which the general symbol change production is performed. It is a figure which shows the example which returns to a usual figure hold increase production after a production change from a usual figure hold increase production to a prize ball payment appearance. It is a figure which shows the example in which a prize ball payout appearance is started a little behind from the timing when the game ball passed through the central general winning opening 226. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of 2nd Example from the front. (A) shows an example of a special symbol stop symbol (second symbol), (b) shows an example of a special symbol decorative symbol, and (c) shows an ordinary symbol. An example of the stop symbol pattern (first symbol pattern) is shown, and (d) shows an example of the usual decorative pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process in 2nd Example. (A) is a flowchart which shows the flow of the special figure prefetching process which CPU304 of the main-control part 300 performs, (b) is a figure which shows the table for special figure appropriateness prior determination, (c) is a special figure. It is a figure which shows the table for figure prior determination. (A) is a figure which shows the table set selection table memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main control part 300, (b) is a figure which shows the timer number determination table memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main control part 300. (C) is a diagram showing the relationship between the timer number and the symbol variation display time. (A) is a figure which shows the table for normality determination determination memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main control part 300, (b) is a figure which shows the table for common figure determination memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main control part 300 It is. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a normal symbol change effect, a special symbol change effect, and a prefetch notice effect. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a general symbol change effect and a prefetch notice effect. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a general symbol fluctuation production and a special figure reservation increase production. It is a figure which shows the specific example in which a normal symbol change effect itself changes. It is the simplified front view which looked at the game board 200 of 3rd Example from the front. (A) shows an example of a stop symbol mode (second symbol mode) of a special symbol that is stopped and displayed after the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214. (B) is a diagram showing an example of a decorative figure of a special figure, and (c) is a figure of a common figure that is stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display of the symbol in the common figure display device 210. It is the figure which showed an example of the stop symbol aspect (1st symbol aspect), (d) is the figure which showed the stop symbol aspect of the usual decoration pattern. (A) is a figure which shows the low probability table for a normal figure determination, (b) is a figure which shows the high probability table for a normal figure determination, (c) shows the low probability table for a common figure determination. It is a figure and (d) is a figure which shows the high probability table for common figure determination. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the opening / closing pattern of the electric chew in the pachinko machine of 3rd Example, (b) is the illustration of the usual drawing in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine of 3rd Example. It is a figure for demonstrating a few examples. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a usual drawing effect determination process. (A) is a figure which shows the high probability table for the success / failure determination of the special figure, (b) is a figure which shows the low probability table for the success / failure judgment of the special figure, and (c) is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. It is a figure which shows the table for the small hits determination memorize | stored, (d) is a figure which shows the special figure determination table memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main-control part 300. FIG. It is a figure showing the 1/5 part of the specific example of the effect in 3rd Example. It is a figure showing 2/5 part of the specific example of the effect in 3rd Example. It is a figure showing 3/5 part of the specific example of the effect in 3rd Example. It is a figure showing 4/5 part of the specific example of the effect in 3rd Example. It is a figure showing 5/5 part of the specific example of the effect in 3rd Example. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which mixed the prefetch effect in 3rd Example in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which jackpot notice mixed in the common figure effect in 3rd Example in steps. FIG. 165 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a normal display effect of the variable display pattern shown in FIG. 165 (b) is performed step by step. It is a figure showing an example of other productions. (A) is a figure which shows the success / failure determination table of the special figure 1 in 4th Example, The same figure (b) is a figure which shows the success / failure determination table of the special figure 2. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the special figure 1 non-presence judgment table used when pre-determining by pre-reading the starting information of special figure 1, (b) is a figure which shows the starting information of special figure 2 It is a figure which shows the special figure 2 non-presence judgment table used when pre-reading and making a prior judgment, (c) is a figure which shows the special figure prior judgment table. (A) is a figure which shows the table for determining whether or not a common figure is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, (b) is a figure showing a table for determining a common figure, and (c) is a figure showing a universal figure determination table. It is a figure which shows a figure timer table. (A) is a figure which shows the table for common figure pre-judgment prior judgment used when pre-determining by pre-reading the starting information of a common figure, (b) is a figure which shows the table for common figure advance judgment It is. (A) is a flowchart which shows the flow of the common drawing effect determination process in 4th Example, (b) is a flowchart which shows the flow of the predetermined area | region notice effect determination process in 4th Example. It is a time chart showing an example of the production in the 4th example. FIG. 183 is a diagram showing a state of a decorative symbol display device and the like for each important point in the time chart shown in FIG. 182. FIG. 183 is a time chart illustrating a continued flow of the example illustrated in FIG. 182. It is a figure which shows the mode of the decoration symbol display apparatus etc. for every important point in the time chart shown in FIG. It is a time chart which shows the modification of a 2nd general drawing effect. It is a time chart which shows the example when a predetermined condition turns into a non-established state from an established state. It is a figure which shows an example of a common figure prefetch notice. It is a figure which shows the example which performs the jackpot notice effect of a special figure in the common figure effect area | region 283 of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example which performs the advance notice effect to the specific effect of a special figure in the general drawing effect area | region 283 of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example in which the common figure production | presentation area | region 283 of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 functions as a display area | region of a reserved digest production | presentation. 1 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure which shows the symbol aspect which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2, (C) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a decoration symbol, (d) has shown an example of the stop symbol aspect of a normal symbol. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 20 which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 21 which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 22 which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 23 which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 24 which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 24 which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 24 which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 24 which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 24 which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 25 which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 26 which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 27 which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 28 which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 29 which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 30 which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 31 which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 31 which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 32 which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 33 which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 34 which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 35 which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 36 which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 37 which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 37 which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 38 which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 39 which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 40 which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 41 which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of 6th Embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of 6th Embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of 6th Embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of 6th Embodiment in time series. It is a schematic diagram explaining the example of a display of the 2nd display of 6th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram explaining the example of a display of the 2nd display of 6th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram explaining the 1st state of 6th Embodiment, and a 2nd state. It is a figure which shows the modification of the meter display of 6th Embodiment.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden or metal frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales office. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so as to be inside thereof. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The front frame door 106 can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “balls”) in a portion below the opening 116 and guide the game balls to the launching device 110. The upper plate 126 is provided, the lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 by the player's operation are discharged to the lower plate 128. A ball release button 130, a ball discharge lever 132 for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 128 by a player's operation to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box), and a player's operation to the launcher 110. The ball launching handle 134 that launches the guided game ball to the game area 124 of the game board 200, and the chance to change the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (not shown in FIG. 1) by the player's operation. To the button 136, a chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light, a setting operation unit 137 that can be set by a setting person (for example, a player or a game clerk), and a card unit (CR unit) A ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending, a return operation button 142 for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance, and a ball lending display section for displaying the player's balance and card unit status ( (Not shown). In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The setting operation unit 137 is a push button type switch that can be pressed by the setter, and a confirm (OK) button, an upper button positioned above the confirm button, a lower button positioned below the confirm button, and confirm A right button positioned to the right of the button, a left button positioned to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button positioned further to the right of the right button. The setting operation unit 137 includes an operation unit sensor that detects the pressing of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of this example has a unit structure in which buttons and operation unit sensors are integrated. At least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 functions as a chance button that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the player's operation when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It may be.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding a ball that has passed through the communicating hole and dropped to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is provided.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is displayed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout controller 600 (see FIG. 4). The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, the main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and the production based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs the control process and the first sub-board 160 that houses the first sub-board 160 that includes the rotary volume control switch 161 that adjusts the volume output from the pachinko machine 100 by the operation of the game shop clerk. A second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 that performs a control process related to the production based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400; An error release switch that constitutes a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls and that releases an error by the operation of a game store clerk 68, a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170, a launch board case 176 for housing a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 for performing control processing relating to the launch of a game ball, and a power source for various electric gaming machines. And a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk and an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on. A power board case 184 that houses the power board 182, a CR interface unit 186 that transmits and receives signals between the dispensing control unit 600 and the card unit, and a main board for outputting information of the pachinko machine 100 to an external hall computer or the like 156, the first sub-board 160, etc. and the hall computer, etc. It is provided with a relay substrate 188, the to relay.

  The main board 156, the first sub board 160, the second sub board 164 and the like are provided on the back surface of the game board 200 because they need to be changed for each model, and the payout board 170, the launch board 174, the power board 182 and the like are provided. Since it is used in common by a plurality of models, the outer frame 102 is provided.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 at substantially the center. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The game board 200 in this example is a game board for a so-called right-handed machine. In the right-handed machine, by changing the launch strength of the game ball by operating the ball launching handle 134, the falling path of the game ball is divided into a right path on the right side from the effect device 206 and a left path on the left side from the effect device 206. be able to. In this example, to a normal symbol starting port 228, a normal symbol starting port 229, a first special symbol starting port 230, a second special symbol starting port 232 (open state), variable winning ports 234, 235 (open state), etc., which will be described later. The ease of entering the ball differs between a game ball that falls on the right path and a game ball that falls on the left path.

  For each of the normal symbol start port 229, the second special symbol start port 232 and the variable winning port 235, the normal symbol start port 229, the second special symbol start port 232 and the variable winning port 235 are arranged on the right path. Therefore, it is relatively easy to enter a game ball falling on the right path, and it is relatively difficult or impossible to enter a game ball falling on the left path. On the other hand, for each of the normal symbol starting port 228, the first special symbol starting port 230, and the variable winning port 234, a game that falls on the left path due to the influence of the arrangement pattern of the game nails 238, the warp device 242, and the like. It is relatively easy to enter a ball, and it is relatively difficult to enter a game ball that falls on the right path. In the present embodiment, a right-handed machine is taken as an example, but a right-handed machine may be used.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for displaying decorative images and various images (moving images or still images) used for production. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into five display regions, a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c, a fourth symbol display region 208e, and an effect display region 208d. The middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, the fourth symbol display area 208e displays the fourth symbol, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d, and 208e can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the display position of the fourth symbol display area 208 e is fixed at the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 3, one fourth symbol display area 208e corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is provided (two in total), but the first special symbol and the second special symbol Only one common fourth symbol display area 208e corresponding to both special symbols may be provided. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  Below the gaming area 124, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, and a second special symbol hold lamp 220 A normal symbol holding lamp 216 and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, the special symbol as “special symbol”, the first special symbol as “special symbol 1”, and the second special symbol as “special symbol 2”.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying the special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in the present embodiment.

  The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of universal figure floating games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In the present embodiment, up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of universal figure floating games. It is possible to hold. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games that are held (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, the special figure variable games are predetermined. It is possible to hold up to a number (for example, 4). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a normal start port 228, 229, a special view 1 start port 230, and a special view 2 start port 232, are variable around the rendering device 206. Winning ports 234 and 235 are arranged.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are provided on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the present embodiment, the game balls are paid out to the player as a consideration for winning (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “prize balls”) and balls lent to the player (hereinafter referred to as “rental balls”). May be included).

  The general map start port 228 and the general map start port 229 are configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124. In the embodiment, one general-purpose start port 228 is disposed on the left path of the game board 200, and one general-purpose start port 229 is disposed on the right path. Unlike the ball that entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the ordinary drawing starting port 228 or the universal drawing starting port 229 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map start port 228 or the general map start port 229, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one special figure 1 starting port 230 is provided at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 1 starting port 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126. Then, the special figure variable game (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “special figure 1 variable game”) by the special figure 1 display device 212 is started. Note that the ball that has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The special figure 2 starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electrical chew), and in this embodiment, only one is provided on the right path. The special figure 2 starting port 232 is provided with a pair of blade members 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the blade members 232a are closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 2 232, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. Then, a special figure variable game (hereinafter, also referred to as “special figure 2 variable game”) by the special figure 2 display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are called a large winning opening or an attacker. In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is provided below the center of the game board 200, and the variable winning opening 235 is on the right path. Only one is provided. The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are each provided with a door member that can be freely opened and closed, and a ball cannot be entered while the door member is closed. If the special figure display device stops and displays the jackpot symbol after winning the special figure variation game, for example, one door member of the variable prize opening 234, 235 is closed at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time) It opens and closes at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) for a time of 1.5 seconds. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as a winning ball. The balls that have entered the variable winning openings 234 and 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are made to pass through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 by the 146 and the launcher 148 and are launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the direction of travel by the batting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc. Wins at the starting port (Special Figure 1 starting port 230, Special Figure 2 starting port 232), or wins without winning any of the winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal starting ports 228, 229 Reach mouth 240.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the stage device 206, a warp device 242 (242a, 242b) and a front stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is placed in the area where the game ball cannot roll. It is arranged. In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter may be referred to as a door or a shutter) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the front stage 244, and the effect movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the front stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The front stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball carried by a nail of the game board 200, and the passed ball is in the center of the front stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry to 230.

  The effect movable body 224 of this example includes a horizontally long flat panel on which the model name of the pachinko machine 100 and the like are displayed. The effect movable body 224 is movable by a stepping motor (not shown) so that the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be moved in a vertical direction within a plane substantially parallel to the display screen.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good. The shielding device 246 of this example is configured to expose the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 even when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed. As a result, the fourth symbol display area 208e located at the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is visible regardless of the open / closed state of the shielding device 246.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 performs the game ball launch control, and the power supply control unit 660 controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. .

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a time And a counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in the program processing. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 has a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (a counter circuit) 318 (used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit includes two counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, or opening the front frame door A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 322, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device such as the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214, and a predetermined figure A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the display device, for example, the general map display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, the general map hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, the high Driving circuit 330 for performing display control of the center lamp 222 and the like, and various movable members such as a blade member 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and door members of the variable winning ports 234 and 235 are opened and closed. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the solenoid 332 is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the 1 sub control part 400 and the payout control part 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is a one-way communication. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 may be performed by bidirectional communication.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based mainly on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency. It is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138). A driving circuit 432 for controlling the driving of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 for detecting the pressing of the chance button 136, and an output from the speaker 120. A volume adjustment switch 161 (not shown in FIG. 4) for adjusting the volume to be operated, an operation unit sensor (not shown) for detecting depression of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and detection signals from these sensors An image stored in the ROM 406 based on a sensor circuit 428 output to the basic circuit 402 and a signal from the CPU 404 Are connected to the VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 which generates display image using a work area of VRAM436 reads over data or the like to display an image on the decorative pattern display unit 208, a.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives a control command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and wins or rents a ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Based on a control signal instructing the launch intensity according to the amount, control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the ball from the upper plate 126 to the launcher 110 I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to the unit 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  Next, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed using FIGS. The types of figures and ordinary drawings will be described. FIG. 5 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of FIG. 1, and FIG. 5 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of FIG. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 indicates that the ball has entered 2 The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the start sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs “variable display of special figure 2” by repeating all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. . These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display in the present embodiment. When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation in FIG. 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1 and the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation starts in the special figure 2. After the elapse, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol fluctuation stop display referred to in the present embodiment, the stop symbol mode of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after the "fluctuation display of special figure 1 or 2" is started. A series of displays until this is done is referred to as symbol variation stop display. The symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 5 (a) shows seven types of special charts, "Special Figure A" to "Special Figure G", as the stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of Special Figure 1. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is turned off, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are turned on. "Special Figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, "Special Figure B" is a 7R special jackpot symbol, and "Special Figure C" is a 7R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not a special big hit is determined and the number of rounds are determined by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is a special figure variation game after the jackpot game ends, and the difference in probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot). Hereinafter, a state with a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure certain change” or simply “probable change”), and a state with a low probability is specially designated. This is called a low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends, after the 7R special jackpot game ends and after the 7R jackpot game ends, the state shifts to the time-saving state (electric support state). Although the short time will be described in detail later, the short time state is referred to as a normal high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the non-short time state is referred to as a general low probability state. “Special Figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B”, which is a 7R special jackpot symbol, are symbols that become a special figure high probability common figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends, and are 7R jackpot symbols. “Special figure C” is a symbol that becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the end of the big hit game. These “special drawing A”, “special drawing B”, and “special drawing C” are symbols that have a relatively large advantage over the player.

  "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a symbol that becomes a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R and “Special Figure B” which is 7R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation. As will be described later, when “Special Figure E” is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state (so-called “open” time 100 ms × 2R) ends. If the special figure E is stopped and displayed in a state other than the low probability state, the special figure high probability will be displayed after the big hit game (opening time 29000 ms × 2R). Transition to the high probability state shown in FIG. 11 (see FIGS. 11A and 11B). In other words, the “special figure E” indicates that the action during the big hit game and the game state to be shifted thereafter are determined according to the game state when the stop display is made (in this example, whether or not the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). It is a different design.

  “Special figure F” is a small hit symbol, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. Further, the “special chart G” is an off-line symbol, and is a symbol that is relatively less advantageous to the player.

  FIG. 5 (b) shows four types of special figures “Special figure a” to “Special figure d” as stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of Special figure 2. “Special figure a” is a 15R special jackpot symbol, “Special figure b” is a 7R special jackpot symbol, “Special figure c” is a 7R jackpot symbol, and “Special figure d” is a missing symbol. In the present embodiment, seven types of special maps (of which five types are big hits) are used as the special symbol 2 as the special symbols 1 to 7 as shown in FIG. As the stop symbol pattern, four types of special maps (three of which are big hits) are used. By configuring in this way, there is a case where it is possible to provide a difference between the advantages of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 without changing the probability of being a big hit and the probability of being probable among the big wins. In this example, the big hit of Special Figure 1 includes sudden probability changes and latent probability changes that hardly give out balls, whereas the big hit of Special Figure 2 does not include sudden probability changes and latent probability changes. The advantage of special figure 2 is higher than that of special figure 1.

  FIG. 5 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 9” and “Decoration 10” represent the numbers “1” to “9” and “0”, respectively. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... → “decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”.

  And then, "Special Figure A" 15R special jackpot, "Special Figure B" 7R special jackpot, "Special Figure C" 7R big jackpot, "Special Figure a" 15R special jackpot, "Special Figure b" 7R special jackpot When the 7R jackpot of “special drawing c” is notified, a combination of symbols in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration 1” or “decoration 2— Display “decoration 2—decoration 2”). When the 15R special jackpot of “Special Figure A” and the 15R special jackpot of “Special Figure a” are explicitly notified, a combination of three symbols with the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “Decoration 3-Decoration 3- “Decoration 3”, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when notifying 2R big hit called “special drawing E” latent probability change (hidden probability change) or “special drawing F” small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. To do. When a 2R jackpot called “sudden change” of “special drawing D” is notified, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying of the difference between “special drawing G” and “special drawing d”, symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 5C are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG.5 (d) shows an example of the usual stop display symbol. In this embodiment, there are three types of stop-display modes for normal maps: “general map A” and “general map B” which are hit symbols, and “general map C” which is a misplaced symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the general map start port 228 and the general map start port 229, the general map display device 210 turns on all seven segments and displays one in the center. Repeatedly turn on the segment of “Usual change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” or “special figure B” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure C” is stopped and displayed. To do. Also in FIG. 5D, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is extinguished, and the black portions indicate the location of the segments where the light is illuminated.

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  First, in step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Enable operation, set initial values, etc. In this embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 subsequent to step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. When it is less than (9 V in this example), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a second output port, etc.) 1) a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  In step S109 subsequent to step S107, it is determined whether or not the state before power interruption (before power interruption) is restored. If the state before power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is changed). In the case of initializing), the process proceeds to initialization processing (step S113). Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when an RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 is operated by a store clerk or the like is on (indicating that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 is added to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0. Thus, the checksum is calculated, and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power interruption. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later, the first sub control unit 400 Sent to.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, the command setting transmission process (in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300) ( In step S233), the data is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115 subsequent to step S113, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this basic random number initial value update process, the initial values of the four random number counters for generating the normal winning random number, the normal random number, the special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 2 random value are generated. The four initial value generation random number counters and the two random number counters for generating each of the normal figure variation time determination random value and the special figure variation time determination random value are updated. For example, if the numerical value range that can be taken as the random number value for determining the normal time variation is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random value for determining the normal time variation time provided in the RAM 308 and acquired. Then, 1 is added to the obtained value and stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in a basic random number initial value update process (step S207) described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this example, about once every 2 ms). At a predetermined cycle.

  First, in step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT 314 is periodically updated so that the WDT 314 count value exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this example) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). Therefore (in this example, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt).

  In step S205 subsequent to step S203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interruption process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms is started several times while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed in step S205. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the sphere detection sensor, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal.

  In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is pre-determined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal present, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning opening 226, the variable winning openings 234, 235, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 2 starting opening 232, or the ordinary drawing starting opening 228. 229, it is determined that there was a passage. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been received at these winning ports 226, 234, 235 and the starting ports 230, 232, 228, 229. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before, no previous detection signal, no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 subsequent to step S205, a basic random number initial value update process is performed, and in the next step S209, a basic random number update process is performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the initial value generation random number counter updated in step S115 is updated, and then used in the main control unit 300. Four random number counters for generating the random value, the special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made a round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the random number counter storage area Set to.

  For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating a normal winning random value has made one round next, in addition to setting the random number counter for generating a winning random value Keep it. In addition to the above initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, the random number counter for generating the random number value for the normal value, generating the random number value for the special figure 1 The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for use and the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random number value have made one round each. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the special figure 1 random value and the counter for acquiring the special figure 2 random value are provided separately, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213 following step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 and the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 are counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer, Special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the special figure 2 display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined time Various timers including a timer for counting the closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215 subsequent to step S213, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when the winning holes 226, 234, 235 and the starting holes 230, 232, 228, 229 have been won, a prize ball provided in the RAM 308 for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value in the number storage area is read out, and 1 is added to set the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217 following step S215, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a prize at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting ports 228 and 229, and the variable winning ports 234 and 235. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  When the special figure 1 starting port 230 is won and the corresponding special figure 1 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 starting port 230 of the random number generation circuit (hard random number circuit) 318 A special figure 1 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on a value stored in a corresponding built-in counter value storage register is acquired, and a special figure is generated from a special figure 1 random number generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308. One random value is acquired and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The special figure 1 winning random number values and the special figure 1 random number values in the special figure 1 random value storage area are stored in the same number as the special figure 1 reservation number stored in the special figure 1 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 1 random value storage area, each time the special figure 1 holding number decreases, the data of the combination of the special figure 1 winning random number and the special figure 1 random value having the highest holding order (first) is deleted. At the same time, processing is performed so that the data holding order of the remaining special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random value group is incremented by one. Also, each time the special figure 1 holding number increases, a new special figure 1 is added to the next holding order of the data of the combination of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value having the lowest (last) holding order. The data of a set of winning random numbers and special figure 1 random values is written.

  When the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won and the corresponding special figure 2 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a built-in counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 of the random number generation circuit 318 The special figure 2 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the value storage register is acquired, and the special figure 2 random number value is acquired from the special figure 2 random value generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308. Then, they are stored in the special figure 2 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The special figure 2 winning random number values and the special figure 2 random number values in the special figure 2 random number storage area are stored in the same number as the special figure 2 reservation number stored in the special figure 2 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 2 random value storage area, each time the special figure 2 hold number decreases, the data of the combination of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value with the highest holding order is deleted, and the remainder The special ranking 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value set data are processed so that the holding order is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 hold number increases by one, a special special figure 2 winning random number value is added to the next holding rank of the data of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value group having the lowest holding order. And special figure 2 random value set data is written.

  Also, special figure 1 starting information (a pair of special figure 1 winning random value and special figure 1 random value) or special figure 2 starting information (a pair of special figure 2 winning random value and special figure 2 random value) has been newly acquired. In this case, the special figure prefetching process is executed using the start information. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later.

  If there is a winning at the general chart start port 228 or the general map start slot 229, and the corresponding general map hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is automatically displayed from the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal chart. Obtained as a winning random number value, obtains a regular random number value from a random number counter for generating a regular random number value provided in the RAM 308, and stores it in a regular random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The number of combinations of the random numbers and the common random numbers in the random number value storage area is stored in the same number as the number of reserved general numbers stored in the general number hold number storage area. In the standard random number storage area, each time the number of pending charts decreases by one, the data of the combination of the random number value and the random number value with the highest ranking (first) in the ranking is deleted and the remaining Is processed so that the holding order of the data of the pair of the common figure winning random number and the common figure random number is incremented by one. In addition, each time the number of pending orders increases by one, a new winning figure random number value and a new standing figure winning random number value in the next holding rank of the data of the combination of the random number value and the random number value with the lowest ranking (last) Data of a set of regular random numbers is written. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening 234. When a winning is made at the variable winning opening 235, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 235 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening 235.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221 following step S219, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the general diagram state update process in the middle of the normal map change display (the value of the above-mentioned general map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the general map display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the general map display device 210 performs normal variable display (normal map variable game).

  Also, in the general state update process at the timing when the normal map change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general map display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), When the 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is turned on / off to control the display mode, and the normal-map hit flag is off, the general-purpose display is displayed so that the display mode of the off symbol is displayed. The 7 segment LED constituting the device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the general-purpose display device 210 is either one of the winning symbols (the common diagram A or B shown in FIG. 5D) and the off symbol (the common diagram C shown in FIG. 5D). The final symbol is displayed. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), A normal operation is set in the setting area, and a predetermined open period (for example, 2 seconds), a solenoid for driving to open / close the blade member 232a of the special opening 2 232 (a part of various solenoids 332), A signal for holding 232a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing driving, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), in the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal state is not operating is set. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out of place, the usual figure flag is turned off. In the case where the usual figure hit flag is off, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the special map 2 start port 232 is not performed (the state of the normal map is inactive), and the number of the general map variable games that are on hold Is set to be 1 or more, and is executed using a pair of the first ordinary winning random number value and the ordinary random number value in the ordinary random number value storage area.

  The main control unit 300 obtains the normal start information (a combination of the normal winning random number and the normal random number) from the earliest (most recently stored) holding position in the normal random number storage area. On the basis of the obtained normal figure winning random number value in the obtained ordinary figure starting information, the value of the ordinary figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, etc., the determination table for the success / failure stored in the ROM 306 (FIGS. 9A and 9B described later). (Ref.) Is used to determine whether or not to win or not (determination of success / failure). Next, the main control unit 300, based on the general random number value in the acquired general map start information and the determined success / failure determination result, etc., the general map determination table stored in the ROM 306 (the hit shown in FIG. 9C). The symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the normal variation display is determined using the hour action table). Next, the main control unit 300, for example, selects various tables (for example, timer number selection (not shown)) stored in the ROM 306 based on the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the acquired random number for determining the normal time change time, and the like. The normal fluctuation display time (timer number) is determined using a table, and the fluctuation display time is stored in the normal figure fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal figure fluctuation display time.

  The main control unit 300 extracts the earliest general chart start information from the normal random number value storage area, erases the earliest general chart start information from the normal random number value storage area, and Decrease the number of reserved maps in the area by 1. At this time, the general chart start information taken out from the standard random number storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned determination is made based on the general chart start information stored in the temporary area. Also good.

  The main control unit 300 sets the common figure flag provided in the RAM 308 to ON when the determination result is successful (winning), and sets the common figure flag to OFF when not successful.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeatedly turn on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 7R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. . These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the stop symbol determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on 5 (b) shows that the special figure a, the 7R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure b, the 7R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off. When the special flag c and the off flag are turned on, the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the special figure d is displayed. 2 is set to indicate that the stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs a fixed display of any one of the special figures a to d.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number. If not, turn off the time flag. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Also, if the probability variation number stored in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the probability variation number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability variation flag Turn off.

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 is set. In order to set a special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that a big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. In addition, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning holes 234, 235) solenoids for opening / closing the door members of the variable winning holes 234, 235 (part of various solenoids 332) In addition, a signal for holding the door member in the opened state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member of the variable prize opening 234, 235 (a part of various solenoids 332), and a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is used. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 15 rounds or 7 rounds in the case of Special Figure 2, 15 rounds, 7 rounds or 2 rounds in the case of Special Figure 1), and the control is finished. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period in which an image for notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the effect standby period is set in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the hour / hour number (for example, 100 times) is set in the hour / hour number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the short time flag. Note that if the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the number of time reductions is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, the normal figure high probability state (normal figure certain change) is established. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than in the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electrical chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The state in which any one of these ordinary figure change, universal figure change, and electric Chu extension is set is referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning holes 234 and 235 will be placed in the special figure 2 start opening 232 during the big hit game until a game ball enters. There is a problem that game balls enter and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem.

  If the special figure probability variation flag is set to ON, the probability variation number (for example, 10,000 times) is set in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-game flag is turned on. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. However, in this example, since the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is different from the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2, the timing at which the special figure 1 variable display time has elapsed (the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer becomes 1 to 0) The special figure 1 state update process starting at the same time) is different from the special figure 2 state update process. In the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on and the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure A shown in FIG. When the figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure B, the 7R big hit flag is on, when the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure C, the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, When the figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and when the common figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure E, the small hit flag is on The special segment F is controlled to turn on / off the 7-segment LED constituting the special diagram 1 display device 212 so that the special flag F is turned on and the special flag G is turned on. Special figure 1 stop table To set indicating that it is in. By performing this control in the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs a fixed display of any one of the special figures A to G. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the floating game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is not performed, and the state of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both inactive and is held. The game is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area, starting from the fact that the number of variable games is 1 or more. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the state of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive, and is suspended. The game is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area as a starting condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

  Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the special symbol variable game success / failure determination by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special symbol 2 starting port 232 is notified. Priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the present embodiment, a special figure variable game with a high advantage (in this example, special figure 2 variable game) is given priority over a low special figure variable game (in this example, special figure 1 variable game). . For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special) from the first (most recently stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. 2), and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information, the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, and the like. Is used as a big hit or a small hit (in this example, the small hit can be selected only in FIG. 1) using the determination table (see FIGS. 10 (a) to 10 (d) described later). Or whether it is determined to be out of place (judgment determination). Next, the main control unit 300, based on the special figure 2 random value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined success / failure determination result, etc., the special figure determination table (FIG. 11 (a), Using the symbol distribution table shown in FIG. 12A, the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the variation display of the special diagram 2 is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the determination, the acquired special figure variation time determination random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) in FIG. 2 is determined using various tables (for example, a timer number selection table not shown).

  After fetching the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 deletes the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 is subtracted from the reserved figure number 2 in the reserved number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in the temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started in preference to the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the special figure 2 hold is prioritized over the special figure 1 hold. Special figure 2 priority fluctuation is given as an example, but special figure 1 variable game with low advantage is started over special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and special figure 1 suspension is The special figure 1 priority fluctuation | variation digested preferentially over hold may be sufficient. In addition, priority is not given to special figure 2 variable game and special figure 1 variable game, and the start opening prize is started in the order in which the special figure variable games related to the holding of each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are held at the start opening. It may be a forward variation. In the starting order winning order fluctuation, the upper limit number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, and compared with the priority fluctuation in which the upper limit number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2. In some cases, the substantial upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of the special figure, but the invention is not limited to this, and the special figure state update described above is not performed. The process and the special figure related lottery process may be performed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided, and the lottery results may be displayed separately, or the lottery results of a plurality of special drawings may be displayed in one area. In addition, when fluctuations related to a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure that stopped the fluctuation may affect the lottery result of the special figure that stops the fluctuation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command Information that can specify the type of command, etc.), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type). Further, in the present embodiment, a symbol variation start command and a symbol variation stop command related to a common symbol are also included as command types.

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. In addition, if the command type is a special symbol design change start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability fluctuation flags, and special drawing related lottery processing. In the case of the symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command, including information indicating the timer number selected in, including the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. In the case of a start command and an end production start command, information including the value of a special figure probability variation flag, etc., and in the case of a jackpot round number designation command, information indicating the value of a special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. Is included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232, winning in the variable winning ports 234 and 235 Contains information indicating presence or absence. In the case of a prefetch result information command, information indicating the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the prefetch number stored in the prefetch number storage area described later, the stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit, etc. Included.

  In addition, if the command type is a normal symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes values such as a universal symbol per unit flag, a general symbol deviation flag, a general symbol probability variation flag, etc. Information that includes information about the determined stop symbol and variation time, and in the case of a regular symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command, information indicating the value of the universal symbol per unit flag, the usual symbol deviation flag, the common symbol probability variation flag, etc. Is included.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the command data includes values such as various big hit flags, small hit flags, off-set flags, and special figure probability variation flags stored in the RAM 308, special figure 1 related lottery processes, and special figures. Information indicating the timer number selected in the FIG. 2 related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, loss flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game, etc. that are held is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates.

  In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a bottom pan full error is monitored. . When a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating whether there is a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize winning ports 234 and 235, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special figure 1 display via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the various status display unit 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  FIG. 8A is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetching process executed in the winning acceptance process (step S217). In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the increased start information (newly acquired start information) in each of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and pre-stops the stop symbol before the success / failure determination process. The pre-determination result (special drawing prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308 (see FIGS. 8B to 8D).

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 prefetch result and the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are specially displayed. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetching result with the highest rank (first) is erased and the remaining special figure 1 prefetching result Are processed so that the rank of the data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 1 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 1 prefetch result data of the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 prefetch result and the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are stored in the special figure 2 prefetch. A special figure 2 pre-reading number storage area for storing numbers is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetching result having the highest rank is deleted and the order of the remaining special figure 2 prefetching result data Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 2 prefetch data having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is made, for example, by referring to the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. The comparison is made with the number of pre-reads in FIG. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased when the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 hold number is equal to the special figure 2 prefetch number. It is determined that the starting information in Fig. 2 has not increased. When it is determined that the start information of FIG. 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and when it is determined that the start information of FIG. 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a special figure 2 winning random value and a set of special figure 2 random values) is displayed before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). FIG. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information and the determination table for special determination 2 and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S305 subsequent to step S303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of FIG. 1 has increased. The determination as to whether or not the start information of FIG. 1 has increased is made, for example, in the same way as in FIG. This is done by comparing the special figure 1 pre-reading number stored in. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. Return to the winning acceptance process (step S217).

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-electric support is in progress. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined in step S309 whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a special figure 1 winning random value and a pair of special figure 1 random value) is processed before the success determination process in the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231). FIG. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the determination table for special determination and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected as the special figure 1 related lottery. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetching process is terminated, and the process returns to the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In step S315, the pre-read result for the special figure 1 in the RAM 308 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the stop symbol information instead of pre-reading the increased special figure 1 start information and indicating that the start information is not pre-read. Stored in the earliest free area of the copy. Thereafter, the special figure prefetching process is terminated, and the process returns to the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-read result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetching results in the section may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400.

  In the present embodiment, pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of Special Figure 2, and pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of Special Figure 1 except during the electric support. Further, it may be determined by lottery whether to pre-read the starting information of the increased special figure 1 and special figure 2. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may determine whether or not to execute the lottery and effect using the pre-read result.

  8B to 8D illustrate a state in which prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 8B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 8B, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 1 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 8B, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special chart G” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage area “hold 2” stores “special chart G” as stop symbol information. "(Out of line)" is stored, "Special Figure F" (small hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 3", and "Special Figure A" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 4" (15R special jackpot) is stored.

  FIG. 8C shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 8C, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 2 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 8C, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing d” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4” have stop symbols. Information is not stored. In FIG. 8C, the state where the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 8 (d) shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 8D, “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “hold 1” instead of the stopped symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

  In the above description, an example is given in which only stop symbols are determined in advance and only stop symbol information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit. Information may be stored in the prefetch result storage unit and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as prefetch result information.

  Next, various tables used in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. Various tables shown in FIGS. 9 to 12 are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example.

  FIGS. 9A and 9B show an example of the success / failure determination table used when the success / failure determination is performed in the common drawing related lottery process (step S223). The success / failure determination table shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B includes items of “normal probability”, “random number range”, and “correction result”. The item “normal figure probability” indicates the normal figure probability (ordinary figure low probability or common figure high probability) at the time of determination of success or failure. The item “Random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired normal winning random number value. Here, the possible range of the normal winning random number in this example is 0 to 99 (the range of the numerical range is 100).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 9A is a normal / failure determination table used when the probability of normalization at the time of determination of success / failure is low. As shown in FIG. 9A, when this success / failure determination table is used, the winning probability is 1/100 (that is, 1%), and the probability of losing is 99/100.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 9B is a normal / failure determination table used in the case where the normal probability at the time of determination is high. As shown in FIG. 9B, when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of winning is about 100/100 (that is, 100%), and the probability of loss is 0%. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 9A, the winning probability is 100 times. In this way, it is possible to design so that only the hit is selected in the usual high probability state (during short-time operation). Further, the probability of deviation may be higher than 0% at the time of short-time operation, but the probability of hit selection being higher at the time of short-time operation than at the time of short-time operation (ordinary low probability state).

  FIG. 9C shows a table for symbol allocation and hit operation for ordinary use. The numerical value in the “distribution” column in the table is the random number range distribution rate for each symbol (that is, the symbol of each symbol, which is compared with the general random number value when the stop symbol is determined in the general symbol related lottery process (step S223)). Equal to selection probability). As shown in FIG. 9 (c), in the case where the result of determining whether or not the normal-game variable game is successful, the allocation ratio of each winning symbol is 50% for the normal-game A and 50% for the normal-game B. Normal maps A and B are symbols in which the electric chew release operation is executed after the normal variable game. It should be noted that when the determination result is out of order, only one out of the ordinary figure C is selected as the out of order symbol, so in the case of out of place, the ordinary figure C is selected with a probability of 100%. When the general figure C is selected, the electric chew release operation is not executed after the universal figure variable game.

  As shown in FIG. 9C, after the general map A is stopped and displayed, the opening operation of the special figure 2 starting port (electrical chew) 232 is executed. When the game state at the time of the stop display of FIG. To do. When the game state at the time of the stop display in FIG. A is short-time operation, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is first opened for 1800 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, then opened again for 1800 ms, It closes for about 2000 ms and opens again for 1800 ms.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9C, after the general map B is stopped and displayed, the opening operation of the special figure 2 starting port (electrical chew) 232 is executed. When the game state at the time of the stop display in FIG. When the game state at the time of the stop display in FIG. B is short-time operation, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is first opened for 2400 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, then opened for about 1450 ms, and again It closes for about 2000 ms and opens again for 1450 ms.

  FIGS. 10A to 10D show an example of the determination table used when determining whether or not the lottery process is related to the special figure 2 lottery process (step S229) or the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231). Yes. The success / failure determination table shown in FIGS. 10A to 10D includes items of “special figure probability”, “random number range”, and “correction determination result”. The item “special figure probability” indicates a special figure probability (special figure low probability or special figure high probability) at the time of determination of success or failure. The item “random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired special figure 2 winning random value or the special figure 1 winning random value. Here, the possible range of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 1 winning random value of this example is 0 to 65535 (the range of the numerical value range is 65536).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (a) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 1 used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is low. As shown in FIG. 10A, when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/299 (= 219/65536), and the small hit probability is about 1/399 (= 165 / 65536).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (b) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 1 used when the special figure probability at the time of the validity determination is high. As shown in FIG. 10B, when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/30 (= 2185/65536), and the small hit probability is about 1/399. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10A, the big hit probability is about 10 times, and the small hit probability is the same.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (c) is the success / failure determination table for special figure 2 used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is low. As shown in FIG. 10C, when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/299 and the small hit probability is zero.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (d) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 2 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is high. As shown in FIG. 10D, when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/30 and the small hit probability is zero. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (c), the probability of jackpot is about 10 times.

  Fig.11 (a) has shown the symbol distribution table for the special figure 1. FIG. The numerical value in the “distribution” column in the table is a distribution ratio of random numbers for each symbol (that is, each symbol) compared with the special symbol 1 random value when determining the stop symbol in the special symbol 1 related lottery process (step S231). It is equal to the symbol selection probability). As shown in FIG. 11 (a), when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is the big hit, the special symbol A (15R special big hit) is 30%, and the special figure B (7R special big hit) is 25%, special figure C (7R big hit) is 25%, special figure D (sudden probability big hit) is 10%, special figure E (latent probability big hit) is 10% is there. Special drawings A, B, D, and E, excluding special drawing C, are symbols for which the probability change is activated after the big hit game ends. The ratio of probability variation jackpots (special drawings A, B, D, E) in the jackpot of the special figure 1 variable game, that is, the probability variation probability is 75%.

  Special illustrations A, B, and D are the gaming state (special figure high probability, special figure low probability, normal figure high probability (during short-time operation), normal figure low probability (due to short-time inactive) at the time of determination of success / failure (during symbol stop display) Regardless of the time)), the time is shortened (no time reduction is set) after the big hit game ends. The special figure C is a symbol in which the time is shortened (the number of time reductions is 100 times) after the big hit game is finished, regardless of the game state at the time of the determination of success or failure. The special figure E is a symbol in which the short time is activated after the big hit game is completed only when the gaming state at the time of the determination is a special figure high probability state or a normal figure high probability state. That is, when special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the time reduction does not operate after the big hit game ends. For example, when special figure E is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol continuously several times from a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the time reduction does not operate after the first stop display (special figure high probability normal figure) However, after the second and subsequent stops, the short time is activated (the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state is entered). In the special figure 1 variable game jackpot, the probability of time reduction is 90% in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state and 100% in the other game states.

  In this example, there is only one kind of small hits symbol and off symbol in the special figure 1 variable game. Therefore, when the result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined to be a small hit, the special figure F is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random value, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined. If it is out of place, the special figure G is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random value. However, a plurality of types of small hit symbols and outlier symbols may be provided in the same manner as the big hit symbols, and may be determined by lottery using special figure 1 random numbers.

  FIG.11 (b) has shown the example of the operation | movement at the time of the big hit in each symbol of the special figure 1. FIG. As shown in FIG. 11B, in the jackpot game after the special figure A is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released for 15R at 29000 ms per 1R. Similarly, in the jackpot game after special figure B or special figure C is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released for 7R at 29000 ms per 1R, and in the jackpot game after special figure D is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released. Is performed 2R at 29000 ms per 1R.

  As for special figure E, the operation of the big hit game differs depending on the game state at the time of the symbol stop display. In the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the attacker is released 2R at 100 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, it is difficult to enter a game ball because the opening time is short. On the other hand, in the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in a game state other than the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, 2R is played at 29000 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, it is easy to enter a game ball because the opening time is relatively long.

  In the small hit game after the special figure F is stopped and displayed, the 100 ms attacker release is performed twice in one release opportunity. That is, the attacker operates in the same manner in the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state and the small hit game after the special figure F is stopped and displayed.

  Fig.12 (a) has shown the symbol distribution table for the special figure 2. FIG. The numerical value in the “distribution” column in the table is the distribution ratio of the random number range for each symbol (that is, each symbol) that is compared with the special symbol 2 random value when determining the stop symbol in the special symbol 2 related lottery process (step S229). It is equal to the symbol selection probability). As shown in FIG. 12 (a), in the case where the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the distribution ratio of each big hit symbol is 70% for the special figure a (15R special big hit), and the special figure b (7R special big hit) is 5%, special figure c (7R big hit) is 25%. Special figures a and b are symbols for which the probability change is activated after the big hit game ends. The ratio of probability variation jackpots (special figures a and b) in the special figure 2 variable game jackpot, that is, the probability variation probability is 75%, which is the same as the probability variation probability of the special figure 1 variable game.

  Special illustrations a and b indicate the game state at the time of the success / failure determination (design stop display) (special figure high probability, special figure low probability, normal figure high probability (during short-time operation), normal figure low probability (during short-time inactive) Regardless of the), the time is shortened (no time reduction setting is set) after the big hit game ends. The special figure c is a symbol in which the time is shortened (the number of time reductions is 100 times) after the big hit game is finished, regardless of the game state at the time of determination of success / failure. The probability that the time is given in the big hit of the special figure 2 variable game is 100% regardless of the game state.

  In this example, there is only one type of outlier symbol in the special figure 2 variable game. Accordingly, when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is correct is out of order, the special figure d is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 2 random value. However, a plurality of types of missing symbols may be provided in the same manner as the jackpot symbol, and may be determined by lottery using special figure 2 random values.

  FIG.12 (b) has shown the example of the operation | movement at the time of the big hit in each symbol of the special figure 2. FIG. As shown in FIG. 12B, in the jackpot game after the special figure a is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released for 15R at 29000 ms per 1R, and after the special figure b or the special figure c is stopped and displayed. In the big hit game, the attacker is released 7R at 29000ms per 1R.

  As shown in FIG. 11 and FIG. 12, the special figure 2 has a higher probability of being given a shorter time than the special figure 1 and has a longer open time of the attacker (or a larger R number). Therefore, it can be considered that the special figure 2 is more advantageous than the special figure 1.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14. FIG. 13A is a flowchart showing a flow of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 13A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. Among the various processes executed in the effect control process, the electric long open effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S411 following step S409, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, when the pressing of the chance button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 136.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 13C is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Run in cycles. In step S601 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 following step S601, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S421) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other random number values for effects are updated. Etc.

  FIG. 13D is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process (step S413) of the first sub-control unit main process. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Sets an instruction to start data transfer The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S705. Wait for the input signal to be input.

  In step S705, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S707 following step S705, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S709 following step S707, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S711. Waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  FIG. 14A shows the flow of the electric long opening effect process executed in the effect control process of the main process in the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 14 (b) shows an example of an electric long open effect on the decorative symbol display device 208. The electric-chu-long opening effect is an effect that can be executed during a normal-game variable game, and the special-image 2 start opening (electric-chu) 232 is opened for a long time and / or multiple times (hereinafter referred to as a multi-game variable game). This may be referred to as long open). It should be noted that, even after the normal fluctuation stop, the electric-chu-long opening effect (for example, a notification effect such as “electric-chu-opening!”) May be continued based on the normal signal stop symbol.

  The electric long-long opening effect process shown in FIG. 14 (a) is a normal symbol change start from the main control unit 300 in the command process (step S407) of the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 in FIG. 13 (a). This is executed when a (start rotation) command is received.

  First, sub-control unit 400 first determines whether or not the electric long opening effect execution restriction flag for restricting the execution of electric long opening effect is off (step S801). The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the electric long open effect execution restriction flag stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 408 and determines whether or not the execution of the electric long open effect is restricted. For example, even when the electric tulong release effect is executed during display darkness in which the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is black, the player cannot visually recognize the effect and the effect of the electric chew long release effect cannot be obtained. . Therefore, in such a case, the electric long-long opening effect execution restriction flag is turned on based on the effect based on the determination result of the special figure fluctuation game during display darkening. In addition, when the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is not dark-displayed and the fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation game is long enough to execute the electric-chu-long opening effect, It is possible to perform an electric Chulong opening effect that can entertain the user. Therefore, in such a case, the electric long-long opening effect execution restriction flag is turned off based on the effect or demonstration effect based on the determination result of the special figure fluctuation game.

  If the electric-chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is on in step S801, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the electric-chu-long opening effect is restricted, and controls the electric-chu-long opening effect. Other control processes are executed, this process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process effect control process (step S409).

  If the electric-chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is off in step S801, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the electric-chu long opening effect can be executed, and proceeds to step S803 to start the usual symbol variation (start rotation). It is determined whether or not the result of determining whether or not the normal-game variable game is successful by referring to information about the normal-game hit flag and the normal-use flag from the command data of the command.

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S803 that the result of determining whether or not the normal figure variation game is successful, the process proceeds to step S805, where the first sub-control unit 400 determines the normal figure from the command data of the normal symbol change start (rotation start) command. With reference to the information regarding the stop symbol, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol of the normal figure variable game is the normal symbol A.

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S805 that the stop symbol of the usual figure variable game is the usual figure A, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S807, selects the effect whose effect type is “success pattern”, and opens the electric tulong. Set as production. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric long open effect based on the “success pattern”, ends this processing, and effects control of the main processing The process returns to the process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S805 that the usual variable game is not the usual figure A, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S811, selects an effect whose effect type is “failure pattern A”, and releases the electric long. Set as production. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric-chu-long opening effect based on “failure pattern A”, ends this processing, and produces the main processing effect. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S803 that the result of determining whether or not the normal game is a winning game is not successful, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S815 and executes an electric tulong opening false (gasse) effect execution lottery process. In the electric long open false effect execution lottery process, a random value is extracted from the random counter for electric long open false effect execution lottery provided in the RAM 408, and the electric long open false effect execution lottery table stored in the ROM 406 is stored. Is used to determine whether or not the random number value is a hit.

  The first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not to execute the electric long open false effect based on the result of the determination in step S815 (step S817).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S817 to execute the electric-chu-long opening false effect, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S821, selects an effect whose effect type is “failed pattern B”, and sets it as an electric-chu-long opening effect. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric-chu-long opening effect based on “failure pattern B”, ends this processing, and produces the main processing effect. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S817 that the electric-chu-long opening false effect is not executed, the first sub-control unit 400 executes another control process for not executing the electric-chu-long opening effect, ends this processing, and performs the main processing. The process returns to the effect control process (step S409).

  In the process of the electric-chu-long opening effect shown in FIG. 14, when the electric-chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is off, the electric-chu-long opening effect is always performed if it is a win. The lottery may be performed in the same manner as when the game is off, and the presentation may be performed only when the lottery is won. Also, in this example, when the electric chew is open for a short time (short open) (general figure B), the production of “failure pattern A” is set, and when the electric chew is not released (general figure C), “failure pattern A” is set. The effect “B” is set, but the same effect may be performed with a deviation (common figure B) from the hit (normal figure B).

  FIG. 14B shows an example of the electric tulong opening effect. FIG. 14B shows a display effect being executed in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire surface of the image display area becomes the effect display area 208d, and for example, a background effect named “Land Stage” is executed. In the front of the background effect, the decoration display of the decoration pattern in which “decoration 1” to “decoration 10” sequentially move from top to bottom in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). Is running. A change icon display area a is arranged on the lower left side in the effect display area 208d, and a change icon of a pattern imitating a car is displayed. On the right side of the fluctuation icon display area a, a special figure hold display area c for displaying special figure hold is arranged, and a hold icon b having a pattern imitating an automobile is displayed. On the lower right side in the effect display area 208d, an electric long open effect area d is arranged. An ordinary figure display device 210 (not shown) starts the ordinary figure variation game, the execution of the electric-chu-long opening effect is not restricted, and the electric-chu-long opening effect area d is executed. As an electric Chu-long opening effect, an image of a samurai character operating the lottery machine is displayed along with a display of “help chance drawing”, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 is won by winning the ordinary figure variable game. There is a roaring effect that makes the player expect that it may be released long. As shown in FIG. 14 (b), a part of the right symbol display area 208c is hidden by the electric tulong opening effect. In addition, a part of the right side area of the special figure hold display area c is also hidden. As described above, when the electric-chu-long opening effect may make it difficult to confirm at least part of the decorative symbol variation display, or when the decorative symbol variation display makes it difficult to confirm at least part of the electric-chu long opening effect. There may be.

  Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S901 in FIG. 15A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S901. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S903 following step S901, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S905. . In step S905, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S907 following step S905, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S909 following step S907, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S907, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S911 following step S909, lamp control processing is performed. For example, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S913 following step S911, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S903.

  FIG. 15B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S1001 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 15C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Run in cycles. In step S1101 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S903 of the second sub-control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Therefore, in step S903, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1103 following step S1101, an effect random number update process or the like is performed.

  Next, in the special figure variable game executed by the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a characteristic that is executed in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 when the player is permitted to press the chance button 136. The production will be described. First, during the button reception period during which the player can accept pressing of the chance button 136, the button reception animation is executed. The button accepting animation is an animation that prompts the player to press the chance button 136. Further, the button introduction animation is executed before the execution of the button receiving animation is started. The button introduction animation is an animation for notifying that the button accepting animation is displayed before the execution of the button accepting animation is started. In addition, the animation after the button reception is executed following the execution of the button reception animation. The animation after button reception is an animation displayed when the chance button 136 is pressed during the button reception period. Further, following the execution of the button-received animation, a so-called cut-in notice image (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “cut-in notice image”) is displayed. The cut-in notice image is an image for notifying the result of the special figure fluctuation game. It should be noted that the animation after button reception and the cut-in preview image are displayed in the effect display area 208d only when the chance button 136 is pressed during the button reception period. In addition, while the button accepting animation is being executed, the chance button 136 is pressed, but the button introduction animation is being executed, the button accepting animation is being executed, and the chance button is being displayed during the cut-in preview image display period. Pressing 136 is not accepted.

  There are four types of basic effects of button introduction animation, for example. In the present embodiment, an image simulating the chance button 136 from the start of the animation (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “chance button image” or “chance button”) is almost the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. A button introduction animation 1 which is an effect displayed in the center, and an image imitating a plurality of villagers (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “villagers”) appearing from the edge of the screen carrying a chance button and moving to the center A button introduction animation 2 and a chance button image appear from the top of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and move to the center, and then the button introduction is an effect that the image display area is displayed black (darkening effect). Animation 3 and the image of the tape that was pasted on the chance button image from the beginning of the animation Sometimes referred to as-flops image "or" tape ") is, there is a button introduction animation 4, which is a production which will be gradually removed from the chance button image.

  There are, for example, three types of basic effects of the button accepting animation. In the present embodiment, the button button animation 1 which is an effect displayed in the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the start of the animation and the dark display effect of the image display area. Button reception animation 2 which is an effect in which a chance button image is displayed at the center, and a button reception which is an effect in which the chance button 136 is displayed to be urged repeatedly as the tape attached to the chance button image is gradually peeled off. There is medium animation 3.

  FIG. 16 shows a display mode of a chance button image used in the button introduction animation and the button receiving animation. FIG. 16A is a table illustrating a display mode of a chance button image used in the button introduction animation. The table shown in FIG. 16A includes items of “name”, “display mode”, “big hit reliability”, and “remarks”. “Name” is a convenient name for identifying the chance button image. “Display mode” indicates the display mode of the chance button image. The “big hit reliability” indicates the possibility that the result of the special figure variable game will be a big hit when the chance button image is displayed. “Remarks” indicates a noteworthy item in the chance button image.

  The display mode of the chance button image with the name “default” is a display mode simulating a state in which the circular opening and the cylindrical chance button 136 protruding from the circular opening are viewed obliquely from above. The characters “CHANCE” are displayed on the pressed surface. The jackpot reliability when the “default” chance button image is displayed is set to be the lowest.

  The display mode of the chance button image with the name “? (Hatena mark)” is a display mode simulating a state in which the circular opening and the cylindrical chance button 136 projecting from the circular opening are viewed obliquely from above. The letter “?” Is displayed on the pressing surface of the chance button. The jackpot reliability when the “?” Chance button image is displayed is higher than the “default”, but the jackpot reliability is lower than the “default” unless promoted to the “heat” chance button image described later. Is set to

  The display mode of the chance button image with the name “heat” is a display mode simulating a state in which the circular opening and the cylindrical chance button 136 protruding from the circular opening are viewed obliquely from above. “Heat” is displayed on the pressed surface. The setting that the jackpot reliability when the “hot” chance button image is displayed is higher than “?”, And that the chance button image used in the button accepting animation is confirmed to be promoted to “heat” or higher. It has become.

  The display mode of the chance button image with the name “sake” is a display mode simulating a state where the circular opening and the chance button in the shape of the sake barrel protruding from the inside of the circular opening are viewed obliquely from above, on the side of the sake barrel Is displayed with the word “push”. When the chance button image of “alcohol” is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than “heat”, and it is determined that a specific reach effect is executed in the target special figure variable game. Yes.

  The display mode of the chance button image with the name “family crest” is a display mode simulating a state in which the circular opening and the cylindrical chance button protruding from the circular opening are viewed obliquely from above. On the bottom surface, an image of a pattern imitating a “monkey crest” is displayed, and on the side of the chance button, a character “General Yatsushiro” is displayed. The jackpot reliability when the “family crest” chance button image is displayed is the highest, and is set to 100%, for example. The “family crest” is displayed only at 15R special big hit.

  FIG. 16B is a table illustrating a display mode of a chance button image used in the button accepting animation. The table shown in FIG. 16B includes items of “name”, “display mode”, “big hit reliability”, and “remarks”. “Name” is a convenient name for identifying the chance button image. “Display mode” indicates the display mode of the chance button image. The “big hit reliability” indicates the possibility that the result of the special figure variable game will be a big hit when the chance button image is displayed. “Remarks” indicates a noteworthy item in the chance button image.

  The display mode of the chance button image with the name “default” is a display mode simulating a state in which the circular opening and the cylindrical chance button 136 protruding from the circular opening are viewed obliquely from above. The characters “CHANCE” are displayed on the pressed surface. The “default” chance button image shown in FIG. 16B has the same display mode as the “default” chance button image shown in FIG. The jackpot reliability when the “default” chance button image is displayed is set to be the lowest.

  The display mode of the chance button image with the name “heat” is a display mode simulating a state in which the circular opening and the cylindrical chance button 136 protruding from the circular opening are viewed obliquely from above. “Heat” is displayed on the pressed surface. The “hot” chance button image shown in FIG. 16B is the same display form as the “hot” chance button image shown in FIG. The jackpot reliability when the “hot” chance button image is displayed is set to be higher than “default”.

  The display mode of the chance button image with the name “sake” is a display mode simulating a state where the circular opening and the chance button in the shape of the sake barrel protruding from the inside of the circular opening are viewed obliquely from above, on the side of the sake barrel Is displayed with the word “push”. The chance button image of “Sake” shown in FIG. 16B is the same display form as the chance button image of “Sake” shown in FIG. When the chance button image of “sake” is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than “heat”, and “sake” is set to be displayed only during super reach.

  The display mode of the chance button image with the name “family crest” is a display mode simulating a state in which the circular opening and the cylindrical chance button protruding from the circular opening are viewed obliquely from above. On the bottom surface, an image of a pattern imitating a “monkey crest” is displayed, and on the side of the chance button, a character “General Yatsushiro” is displayed. The chance button image of “family crest” shown in FIG. 16B is the same display form as the chance button image of “family crest” shown in FIG. The jackpot reliability when the “family crest” chance button image is displayed is the highest, and is set to 100%, for example. The “family crest” is displayed only at 15R special big hit.

  For example, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not it is correct using a determination table (see FIGS. 10A to 10D) stored in the ROM 306, and includes a special design including information on the determination result. A variation start command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 executes command processing for the received command in step S407, and then executes effect control processing in step S409. Specifically, first, the basic effect mode of the button introduction animation is determined. In this case, a random number value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for button introduction animation (not shown) stored in the RAM 408, and lottery processing is performed with reference to a lottery table for button introduction animation (not shown) stored in the ROM 406. One of the four basic effect modes is determined as the basic effect mode. Next, the basic effect mode of the button accepting animation is determined. In this case, a value is obtained from a random number counter storage area for an animation during button reception (not shown) stored in the RAM 408, and lottery processing is performed with reference to a lottery table for animation during button reception (not shown) stored in the ROM 406. It is determined to be one of the three types of basic effects. The same lottery process is performed for the animation after the button is received and the cut-in notice image to determine the production mode. In the lottery process, when either the button introduction animation 1 or the button introduction animation 2 is selected, the button receiving animation 1 is set to be selected. At this time, the probability of selecting the button introduction animation 1 is 80% and the probability that the button introduction animation 2 is selected is 20%. Also good. In addition, when the result of determining whether or not the special figure variation game is successful is a big hit, the probability that the button introduction animation 1 is selected may be set higher than the button introduction animation 2. If the result of the game success / failure determination is out of place, the probability that the button introduction animation 2 is selected may be set higher than the button introduction animation 1. With this setting, the player may be able to pay more attention to the button introduction animation. In addition, when the button introduction animation 3 is selected in the lottery process described above, the button accepting animation 2 is set to be uniquely selected. When the button introduction animation 4 is selected, The button accepting animation 3 is set to be selected uniquely.

  Further, in the effect control process of step S409, the first sub-control unit 400 determines the display mode of the chance button image used in the button introduction animation, and then determines the display mode of the chance button image used in the button accepting animation. . When determining the display mode of the chance button image used in the button introduction animation, first, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the special figure variable game is a 15R special big hit. A lottery is performed using an appearance rate table (not shown) including all of the five types of display modes shown in FIG. 5) to determine the display mode of the chance button image used in the button introduction animation. When the display mode of the chance button image used in the button introduction animation is “default”, “sake”, or “family crest”, all of the four types of display modes shown in FIG. 16B are included. A lottery is performed using an appearance rate table (not shown), and the display mode of the chance button image used in the button accepting animation is determined.

  When the display mode of the chance button image used in the button introduction animation is “?”, A lottery is performed using an appearance rate table (not shown) including all four types of display modes shown in FIG. If the displayed display mode is “default”, it is decided not to display the chance button image in the button accepting animation, and if it is a display mode other than “default”, the chance button image used in the button accepting animation is displayed. It determines as an aspect.

  When the display mode of the chance button image used in the button introduction animation is “heat”, the appearance (not shown) including three types of display modes other than “default” among the four types of display modes shown in FIG. A lottery is performed using the rate table, and the display mode of the chance button image used in the button accepting animation is determined.

  In addition, when the result of determining whether or not the special figure variation game is successful is not 15R special big hit, the appearance (not shown) including four types of display modes excluding “family crest” among the five types of display modes shown in FIG. A lottery is performed using the rate table, and the display mode of the chance button image used in the button introduction animation is determined. Then, when the display mode of the chance button image used in the button introduction animation is either “default” or “sake”, three types excluding “family crest” among the four types of display modes shown in FIG. A lottery is performed using an appearance rate table (not shown) including the display mode of and the display mode of the chance button image used in the button accepting animation is determined.

  When the display mode of the chance button image used in the button introduction animation is “?”, An appearance (not shown) including three display modes excluding “family crest” among the four display modes shown in FIG. A lottery is performed using the rate table. If the determined display mode is “default”, the button button animation is determined not to display the chance button image. If the display mode is other than “default”, the button is displayed. The display mode of the chance button image used in the on-reception animation is determined.

  When the display mode of the chance button image used in the button introduction animation is “heat”, two types of display modes other than “default” and “family crest” are included among the four types of display modes shown in FIG. A lottery is performed using an appearance rate table (not shown), and the display mode of the chance button image used in the button accepting animation is determined.

  Next, specific examples of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

(Example 1-1)
FIGS. 17 and 18 show examples of effect display in Example 1-1 of this embodiment in time series. In FIG. 17 and FIG. 18 and each figure described later, the variation of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is represented by a thin white arrow pointing downward. In FIG. 17 and each figure to be described later, the relative arrangement relationship of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and the special figure 1 display device 212 is shown differently from the illustration of FIG. In FIG. 17 and each figure to be described later, a special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is shown at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a special figure 1 display device 212 is shown below it. Further, the extinguishing portions of the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special fig. 1 holding lamp 218 are shown in white, and the lighting parts are shown in black. In addition, the state in which all segments are represented in white in the special figure 1 display device 212 indicates that the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is being performed. Further, the illustration of the fourth pattern is omitted.

  FIG. 17A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 indicates that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is 2 by turning on the first and second LEDs from the left.

  In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, as a background effect, a character image (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “爺”) 700 of a samurai pattern and a character image of a Yoshimune image (hereinafter referred to as “Yoshimune”). 710) is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner.爺 700 is arranged on the left side of the image display area, and Yoshimune 710 is arranged on the right side of the image display area. In addition, since the heel 700 is displayed on the rear side of the left symbol display area 208a, a part of the heel 700 is hidden and invisible, and the Yoshimune 710 is located on the rear side of the right symbol display area 208c. Since it is displayed, a part of Yoshimune 710 is hidden and invisible.

  Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 17A, the first sub-control unit 400 first performs a lottery process on the button introduction animation in the effect control process of step S409. Executes a button introduction animation 1 (hereinafter, referred to as “button introduction animation 1 in which the chance button image is“ default ”)” that displays the “default” chance button image 740 shown in FIG. 16A as an effect. Decide what to do. Next, a lottery process is performed for the button accepting animation. In this embodiment, the button accepting animation 1 (hereinafter referred to as “chance button image”) that displays the “default” chance button image 740 shown in FIG. May be referred to as “default button accepting animation 1”). Further, a lottery process is performed on the post-button reception animation that is displayed after the execution of the button reception animation 1 whose chance button image is “default”. In this embodiment, the button reception animation 1 whose chance button image is “default”. It is determined to execute the animation after receiving the button for displaying the chance button image 740 displayed in the above. Further, a lottery process is performed on the cut-in notice image displayed after the completion of the execution of the animation after the button is received, and in this embodiment, it is determined to display an image including the character string “Opportunity”.

  FIG. 17B shows a state in which the reach effect is started during the special figure 1 variable game. “Decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol is variably displayed, but in the effect display area 208d, an image 720 including the character string of “reach” (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “reach image”) 720 is temporarily left middle right symbol. A part of “decoration 7” displayed in front of the display areas 208a to 208c and temporarily stopped by the reach image 720 in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c and the decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b The entire variable display is hidden and cannot be seen.

  In FIG. 17C, the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the display of the reach image 720 has disappeared, so that “decoration 7” temporarily displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c is displayed. "Can be visually recognized, and the entire variation display of the decorative symbols displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b is visible.

  FIG. 17D shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the execution of the button introduction animation 1 in which the chance button image is “default” is started. An effect image (hereinafter also referred to as “effect image”) 730 appears in the effect display area 208d. The effect image 730 is displayed in front of the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and a part of “decoration 7” temporarily displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c by the effect image 730 and the middle symbol display. The entire decorative symbol variation display displayed in the area 208b is hidden and cannot be visually recognized.

  FIG. 17E shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the button introduction animation 1 having the chance button image “default” is being executed. The transmittance of the effect image 730 gradually increases and the size of the effect image 730 gradually decreases, so that the entire “decoration 7” temporarily displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c is clearly visually recognized. In addition, the entire chance button image 740 displayed in front of the symbol display area 208b is visible. Most of the variation display of the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display area 208b is hidden by the chance button image 740, and most of the variation display is not visible.

  FIG. 17F shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the button introduction animation 1 having the chance button image “default” is being executed. The transmittance of the effect image 730 is further increased, and the size of the effect image 730 is further reduced, so that the entire chance button image 740 can be clearly seen and the decorative symbol displayed in the symbol display area 208b is displayed. A part of the variable display is further visible.

  FIG. 17G shows a state where the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, the effect image 730 is completely disappeared, and the button introduction animation 1 with the “default” chance button image is ended. . The entire chance button image 740 is completely visible, and a part of the variation display of the decorative symbol displayed in the symbol display area 208b is completely visible.

  FIG. 17 (h) shows that the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the button accepting animation 1 in which the chance button image is “default” immediately after the end of the button introduction animation 1 in which the chance button image is “default”. This shows the state where the execution of is started. When the execution of the button accepting animation 1 whose chance button image is “default” is started, the button accepting period of the chance button 136 is also started. In the effect display area 208d, a chance button image 740, an image including a character string “PUSH !!” (hereinafter, may be referred to as “PUSH image”) 750, and a push of the chance button 136 below the PUSH image 750 are displayed. An image of a white arrow pointing downward indicating the direction is displayed. Further, a gauge image (hereinafter, also referred to as a “gauge image”) 760 indicating a button reception period during which the chance button 136 can be pressed is displayed to prompt the player to press the chance button 136. Yes. In the present embodiment, the gauge image 760 does not constitute part of the button accepting animation, but may constitute part of the button accepting animation. The same applies to the following embodiments.

  FIG. 18A shows a state continued from FIG. In the effect display area 208d, a chance button image 740 in a pressed state is displayed. The gauge image 760 displays the remaining time of the button reception period of the chance button 136 with the length of the white portion. The length of the white portion is shorter than the start of execution of the button receiving animation 1 in FIG. 17H, indicating that the remaining time of the button receiving period is shorter than the initial time.

  FIG. 18B shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the button accepting animation 1 in which the chance button image is “default” is being executed. In the button receiving animation 1 with the “default” chance button image, the pressed chance button image 740 (see FIG. 18A) and the protruding chance button image 740 (see FIG. 18B). ) Alternately to make the chance button image 740 more prominent and further prompt the player to press the chance button 136. The gauge image 760 indicates that the length of the white portion indicating the remaining time of the button reception period of the chance button 136 is further shortened, and the remaining time of the button reception period is further decreased.

  FIG. 18C shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the execution of the animation after receiving the button is started. Prior to execution of the animation after button reception, the button reception animation 1 whose chance button image is “default” is ended by the player pressing the chance button 136 within the button reception period. In the animation after button reception, the chance button image 740 is lit in a pressed state.

  FIG. 18D shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, the transparency of the chance button image 740 gradually increases and then disappears, and the animation after the button reception ends. .

  FIG. 18E shows a state after the animation after the button is received. When the player presses the chance button 136 during the button reception period, a cut-in notice image including the character string “Opportunity” is displayed in the effect display area 208d as a notice of the result of the special figure 1 variable game success / failure determination result. Has been. In this way, the button introduction animation, the button receiving animation, the button receiving animation, and the cut-in notice are performed.

  In the present embodiment, the first period (button introduction animation execution period shown in FIGS. 17D to 17G) and the second period (FIG. 17H to FIG. 18B animation during button reception). The button introduction animation may be executed again in the third period that is a period after the execution period. Furthermore, the button receiving animation may or may not be displayed in the fourth period, which is the period after the third period. That is, the button introduction animation may be executed twice during one special figure variable game.

  In the third period, while displaying a button introduction animation that raises interest in the chance button 136, in the fourth period, by accepting or not accepting the pressing of the chance button 136, the player In some cases, interest in the chance button 136 may be further increased.

(Example 1-2)
19 and 20 show examples of effect display in Example 1-2 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 19A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is executed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 indicates that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is 2 by turning on the first and second LEDs from the left.

  In the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208, 爺 700 and Yoshimune 710 are displayed as background effects. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner.爺 700 is arranged on the left side of the image display area, and Yoshimune 710 is arranged on the right side of the image display area. In addition, since the heel 700 is displayed on the rear side of the left symbol display area 208a, a part of the heel 700 is hidden and invisible, and the Yoshimune 710 is located on the rear side of the right symbol display area 208c. Since it is displayed, a part of Yoshimune 710 is hidden and invisible.

  Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 19A, the first sub-control unit 400 first performs a lottery process on the button introduction animation in the effect control process of step S409. Execute the button introduction animation 2 (hereinafter, referred to as “button introduction animation 2 where the chance button image is“ default ”)” which displays the “default” chance button image 740 shown in FIG. 16A as an effect. Decide what to do. Next, a lottery process is performed for the button accepting animation, and in this embodiment, it is determined to execute the button accepting animation 1 whose chance button image is “default”. Further, a lottery process is performed on the post-button reception animation that is displayed after the execution of the button reception animation 1 whose chance button image is “default”. In this embodiment, the button reception animation 1 whose chance button image is “default”. It is determined to execute the animation after receiving the button for displaying the chance button image 740 displayed in the above. Further, a lottery process is performed on the cut-in notice image displayed after the completion of the execution of the animation after the button is received, and in this embodiment, it is determined to display an image including the character string “Opportunity”.

  FIG. 19B shows a state in which the reach effect is started during the special figure 1 variable game. “Decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol is variably displayed, but in the effect display area 208d, the reach image 720 is temporarily displayed in front of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and the reach image 720 displays the left and right symbol display areas. A part of “decoration 7” temporarily stopped and displayed on 208a and 208c and the entire variation display of the decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b are hidden and cannot be visually recognized.

  In FIG. 19C, the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the display of the reach image 720 has disappeared. Therefore, the “decoration 7” temporarily displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. "Can be visually recognized, and the entire variation display of the decorative symbols displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 19D shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the execution of the button introduction animation 2 in which the chance button image is “default” is started. A villager 770 carrying a chance button 740 appears at the left hand end of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and shows a state in which the villager 770 is moving near the center of the image display area. The chance button image 740 and the villager 770 are displayed in front of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and the “decoration 7” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a by the chance button image 740 and the villager 770. "Is hidden and is no longer visible.

  FIG. 19 (e) shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the button introduction animation 2 with the chance button image “default” is being executed. The villager 770 carrying the chance button 740 has moved further to the vicinity of the center of the image display area, and the villager 780 carrying the chance button 740 appears from the back of the villager 770 at the left hand end of the image display area. Most of the “decoration 7” that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a is hidden by the chance button image 740, the villager 770, and the villager 780 and cannot be seen. In addition, about half of the variation display of the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display area 208b is hidden by the villagers 770 and is not visible. The execution period of the button introduction animation 2 is not the button reception period, but when the chance button 136 is pressed during the execution period of the button introduction animation 2, the color of the chance button image 740 is changed to, for example, red. Alternatively, the chance button image 740 may be changed to a pressed state.

  FIG. 19 (f) shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the button introduction animation 2 with the chance button image “default” is being executed. The villagers 770 and 780 carrying the chance button 740 have moved to almost the center of the image display area, so that most of the “decoration 7” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a can be visually recognized. It is in a state.

  FIG. 19 (g) shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the button introduction animation 2 having the chance button image “default” is being executed. A villager 770 and a villager 780 who move while carrying the chance button 740 arrive at almost the center of the image display area and face each other with the symbol display area 208b interposed therebetween. Most of the variable display of the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display area 208b is visible. Further, since the villagers 770 and 780 have moved to almost the center of the image display area, the entire “decoration 7” temporarily displayed in the left and right symbols display area 208a can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 19 (h) shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the button introduction animation 2 having the chance button image “default” is being executed. A state in which the villagers 770 and 780 are throwing the chance button 740 toward the upper center of the image display area is displayed.

  FIG. 20 (a) shows the state continued from FIG. 19 (h). After throwing the chance button 740, the villager 770 goes to the right hand side of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, A state in which the villager 780 goes to the left hand side in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. Since the villager 770 has moved to the right hand side of the image display area, most of the “decoration 7” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c is hidden by the villager 770, and most of it cannot be seen. Yes. In addition, since the villager 780 has moved to the left hand side of the image display area, most of the “decoration 7” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a is hidden by the villager 780 so that most of it can be visually recognized. It is gone. In the button introduction animation 2, the villager 770 and the villager 780 who took the chance button 740 and appeared from the left end of the image display area stop near the center of the image display area, and throw the chance button 740 upward without throwing the chance button 740 upward. There may be an effect that leaves the image display area from the left end to the right end while carrying 740. In this case, the pressing of the chance button 136 may not be accepted.

  FIG. 20B shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the button introduction animation 2 in which the chance button image is “default” ends. The chance button 740 thrown to the upper center of the image display area descends and stops at a predetermined position. Since the villager 770 has left the right end of the image display area and the villager 780 has left the left end of the image display area, the entire “decoration 7” temporarily displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c is clearly visible. It has become. Since the button introduction animation 2 in which the chance button image displayed from FIG. 19D to FIG. 20B is “default” includes at least a part of the chance button image, the chance button executed later It may be possible to emphasize to the player during the execution of the button introduction animation that the button valid period starts in the button accepting animation 1 whose image is “default”.

  FIG. 20 (c) shows that the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the button 1 during the reception of the button with the “default” chance button image immediately after the end of the button introduction animation 2 with the “default” chance button image. This shows the state where the execution of is started. In the effect display area 208d, a chance button image 740 that protrudes upward, a push image 750, a downward white arrow image indicating the pressing direction of the chance button 136 below the push image 750, and a chance button A gauge image 760 indicating a button reception period during which the pressing of 136 can be received is displayed to prompt the player to press the chance button 136. When the execution of the button accepting animation 1 whose chance button image is “default” is started, the button accepting period of the chance button 136 is also started.

  FIG. 20D shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the button accepting animation 1 having the “default” chance button image is being executed. In the effect display area 208d, a chance button image 740 in a pressed state is displayed. The gauge image 760 displays the remaining time of the button reception period of the chance button 136 with the length of the white portion. The length of the white portion is shorter than the start of execution of the button receiving animation 1 in FIG. 20C, indicating that the remaining time of the button receiving period is shorter than the initial time.

  FIG. 20 (e) shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the button accepting animation 1 having the “default” chance button image is being executed. In the button reception animation 1 with the “default” chance button image, the pressed chance button image 740 (see FIG. 20D) and the protruding chance button image 740 (see FIG. 20E). ) Alternately to make the chance button image 740 more prominent and further prompt the player to press the chance button 136. The gauge image 760 indicates that the length of the white portion indicating the remaining time of the button reception period of the chance button 136 is further shortened, and the remaining time of the button reception period is further decreased.

  FIG. 20 (f) shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the execution of the animation after the button reception is started. Prior to execution of the animation after button reception, the button reception animation 1 whose chance button image is “default” is ended by the player pressing the chance button 136 within the button reception period. In the animation after button reception, the chance button image 740 is lit in a pressed state. It should be noted that the button introduction animation 2 with the chance button image “default” is being displayed, the button acceptance animation 1 with the chance button image “default” is being displayed, the chance button 136 is being pressed, and the animation after the button is being displayed. In any of these cases, the mode (appearance) of the chance button image 740 displayed may be different, all may be common, or some may be common.

  FIG. 20 (g) shows a state where the reach effect in the special figure 1 floating game is being executed, the transparency of the chance button image 740 gradually increases and then disappears, and the animation after the button reception ends. .

  FIG. 20H shows a state after the animation after the button is received. When the player presses the chance button 136 during the button reception period, a cut-in notice image including a character string “Opportunity” is displayed in the effect display area 208d as a notice of the success / failure determination result of the special figure 1 variable game. ing. When the chance button image 740 is gradually deleted based on pressing of the chance button 136, the chance button image 740 may be hidden by the cut-in notice image before the chance button image 740 is completely deleted. In this way, the button introduction animation, the button receiving animation, the button receiving animation, and the cut-in notice are performed.

As described above, regarding the button introduction animation, the button introduction animation 1 is executed in the embodiment (1-1) as shown in FIGS. On the other hand, in the embodiment (1-2), the button introduction animation 2 is executed as shown in FIGS. 19 (d) to 20 (b). That is, the embodiment (1-1) and the embodiment (1-2) are different in the effect mode of the button introduction animation to be executed.
On the other hand, regarding the button receiving animation, the button receiving animation 1 having the same effect mode is executed in both the embodiment (1-1) and the embodiment (1-2) (FIG. 17 (h) to FIG. 17). 18 (b), see FIGS. 20 (c) to (e)). That is, in the embodiment (1-1) and the embodiment (1-2), the effect mode of the button reception animation to be executed is the same.
In this way, even if the effect mode of the button reception animation executed in each of the plurality of special figure variable games is the same, the effect mode of the button introduction animation executed prior to the execution of the button reception animation is the same. Since it differs for each special figure variable game, attention can be paid to the fact that the player's consciousness can be directed to the difference in the effect of the button introduction animation to be executed, and further that the acceptance of pressing the chance button 136 is started. There is a case that can be made.

Further, after displaying the button introduction animation 1 whose chance button image is “default”, the probability that the button reception animation 1 whose chance button image is “default” is displayed is set to 40%, for example. After displaying the button introduction animation 2 “”, the probability of displaying the button accepting animation 1 with the “default” chance button image may be set to 30%, for example.
Thus, after the button introduction animation 1 with the chance button image “default” is displayed, the probability that the chance button image “default” button acceptance animation 1 is displayed, and the chance button image has the “default” button. After the introduction animation 2 is displayed, the period from the start of the button introduction animation until the button reception animation is displayed by biasing the probability that the chance button image displays the “default” button reception animation 1 In some cases, the player can be more noticed.

Also, if the result of determining whether or not the special figure variation game is successful is a big hit, the button introduction animation 1 whose chance button image is “default” is more than the probability that the button introduction animation 2 whose chance button image is “default” is executed. The probability that the probability is displayed may be higher, and if the result of the determination of whether or not the special figure variable game is successful is out of place, the probability that the button introduction animation 1 with the “default” chance button image is executed The probability that the button introduction animation 2 whose chance button image is “default” is displayed may be higher.
In this way, when the button introduction animation 1 having the “default” chance button image is displayed, it is more likely to be a big hit than when the button introduction animation 2 having the “default” chance button image is displayed. Also good. Depending on the lottery result, the button introduction animation is rendered differently, and the button acceptance animation that is displayed after the button introduction animation is performed is set as a common production mode, but the result of determining whether the special figure variation game is successful is different. Thus, there are cases where the player can be more surprised when the determination result is displayed.

  In the example (1-1) and the example (1-2), the post-button reception animation executed after the button reception animation and the cut-in notice image have the same effect mode (FIG. 18 ( c) to (e) and FIGS. 20 (f) to (h)). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, either the after-button animation and / or the cut-in notice image may be rendered differently.

  Further, in the example (1-1) and the example (1-2), the effect display is performed using the button introduction animation, the button receiving animation, and the button receiving animation. An effect display may be performed using an image.

  In Example (1-1) and Example (1-2), the length of time that button introduction animation 1 is executed may be the same as the length of time that button introduction animation 2 is executed, It may be different.

As described above, regarding the button introduction animation, the button introduction animation 1 is executed in the embodiment (1-1) as shown in FIGS. On the other hand, in the embodiment (1-2), the button introduction animation 2 is executed as shown in FIGS. 19 (d) to 20 (b). That is, the embodiment (1-1) and the embodiment (1-2) are different in the effect mode of the button introduction animation to be executed.
On the other hand, with regard to the special figure 1 variable game executed prior to the execution of the button introduction animation 1 or the button introduction animation 2, both the embodiment (1-1) and the embodiment (1-2) have the same effect mode. The special figure 1 variable game is being executed (see FIGS. 17A to 17C and FIGS. 19A to 19C). In this way, even if the effect mode of the button introduction animation executed in each of the plurality of special figure variable games is different, the effect mode of the special figure 1 variable game executed prior to the execution of the button introduction animation is the same. Therefore, when a button introduction animation with a different production mode is displayed, the player may be surprised more.

(Example 1-3)
21 and 22 show examples of effect display in Example 1-3 of this embodiment in time series. FIG. 21A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is executed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 indicates that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is 2 by turning on the first and second LEDs from the left.

  In the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208, 爺 700 and Yoshimune 710 are displayed as background effects. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner.爺 700 is arranged on the left side of the image display area, and Yoshimune 710 is arranged on the right side of the image display area. In addition, since the heel 700 is displayed on the rear side of the left symbol display area 208a, a part of the heel 700 is hidden and invisible, and the Yoshimune 710 is located on the rear side of the right symbol display area 208c. Since it is displayed, a part of Yoshimune 710 is hidden and invisible.

  Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 21 (a), the first sub-control unit 400 first performs a lottery process on the button introduction animation in the effect control process of step S409. Then, it is determined to execute the button introduction animation 2 whose chance button image is “default”. Next, a lottery process is performed for the button accepting animation, and in this embodiment, the button accepting animation 1 (hereinafter referred to as “chance button image”) that displays the “sake” chance button image 790 shown in FIG. May be referred to as “Sake” button accepting animation 1 ”). Further, a lottery process is performed for the post-button-receiving animation that is displayed after the execution of the button-receiving animation 1 whose chance button image is “Sake”. In this embodiment, a button-receiving animation 1 whose chance button image is “Sake”. It is determined that the animation after the button reception for displaying the chance button image 790 displayed in is executed. Further, a lottery process is performed on the cut-in preview image displayed after the execution of the animation after the button is received, and in this embodiment, it is determined to display an image including the character string “hot”.

  FIG. 21B shows a state in which the reach effect is started during the special figure 1 variable game. “Decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol is variably displayed, but in the effect display area 208d, the reach image 720 is temporarily displayed in front of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and the reach image 720 displays the left and right symbol display areas. A part of “decoration 7” temporarily stopped and displayed on 208a and 208c and the entire variation display of the decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b are hidden and cannot be visually recognized.

  In FIG. 21C, the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the display of the reach image 720 has disappeared. Therefore, “decoration 7” temporarily displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. "Can be visually recognized, and the entire variation display of the decorative symbols displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 21D shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the execution of the button introduction animation 2 in which the chance button image is “default” is started. A villager 770 carrying a chance button 740 appears at the left hand end of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and shows a state in which the villager 770 is moving near the center of the image display area. The chance button image 740 and the villager 770 are displayed in front of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and the “decoration 7” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a by the chance button image 740 and the villager 770. "Is hidden and is no longer visible.

  FIG. 21 (e) shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the button introduction animation 2 whose chance button image is “default” is being executed. The villager 770 carrying the chance button 740 has moved further to the vicinity of the center of the image display area, and the villager 780 carrying the chance button 740 appears from the back of the villager 770 at the left hand end of the image display area. Most of the “decoration 7” that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a is hidden by the chance button image 740, the villager 770, and the villager 780 and cannot be seen. In addition, about half of the variation display of the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display area 208b is hidden by the villagers 770 and is not visible.

  FIG. 21 (f) shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the button introduction animation 2 with the chance button image “default” is being executed. The villagers 770 and 780 carrying the chance button 740 have moved to almost the center of the image display area, so that most of the “decoration 7” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a can be visually recognized. It is in a state.

  FIG. 21 (g) shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the button introduction animation 2 having the chance button image “default” is being executed. A villager 770 and a villager 780 who move while carrying the chance button 740 arrive at almost the center of the image display area and face each other with the symbol display area 208b interposed therebetween. Most of the variable display of the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display area 208b is visible. Further, since the villagers 770 and 780 have moved to almost the center of the image display area, the entire “decoration 7” temporarily displayed in the left and right symbols display area 208a can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 21H shows a state where the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the button introduction animation 2 with the chance button image “default” is being executed. A state in which the villagers 770 and 780 are throwing the chance button 740 toward the upper center of the image display area is displayed.

  FIG. 22A shows a state continued from FIG. 21H, and after throwing the chance button 740, the villager 770 leaves to the right hand side of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which the villager 780 goes to the left hand side in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. Since the villager 770 has moved to the right hand side of the image display area, most of the “decoration 7” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c is hidden by the villager 770, and most of it cannot be seen. Yes. In addition, since the villager 780 has moved to the left hand side of the image display area, most of the “decoration 7” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a is hidden by the villager 780 so that most of it can be visually recognized. It is gone.

  FIG. 22B shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the button introduction animation 2 in which the chance button image is “default” ends. The chance button 740 thrown to the upper center of the image display area descends and stops at a predetermined position. Since the villager 770 has left the right end of the image display area and the villager 780 has left the left end of the image display area, the entire “decoration 7” temporarily displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c is clearly visible. It has become. Since the button introduction animation 2 in which the chance button image displayed from FIG. 21D to FIG. 22B is “default” includes at least a part of the chance button image, the chance button executed later It may be possible to emphasize to the player during the execution of the button introduction animation that the button effective period starts in the button accepting animation 1 whose image is “sake”.

  FIG. 22 (c) shows that the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the button reception animation 1 in which the chance button image is “alcohol” immediately after the end of the button introduction animation 2 in which the chance button image is “default”. This shows the state where the execution of is started. In the effect display area 208d, a chance button image 790 of “Liquor” shown in FIG. 16B, a push image 750, and a downward white arrow image indicating the pressing direction of the chance button 136 below the push image 750. Then, a gauge image 760 indicating a button reception period during which the chance button 136 can be received is displayed, and the player is prompted to press the chance button 136. When the execution of the button accepting animation 1 whose chance button image is “sake” is started, the button accepting period of the chance button 136 is also started. In this embodiment, after the button introduction animation 2 whose chance button image is “default” is finished executing, the button reception animation 1 whose chance button image is “alcohol” is started immediately. For example, an effect image that hides the chance button image 740 is displayed after the execution of the button introduction animation 2 whose chance button image is “default” is finished, and a button whose chance button image is “Sake” is being received thereafter. The execution of the animation 1 may be started.

  FIG. 22D shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the button accepting animation 1 in which the chance button image is “alcohol” is being executed. In the effect display area 208d, a chance button image 790 is displayed in a state where the lid of the sake barrel is broken and alcohol is popping out from inside. The gauge image 760 displays the remaining time of the button reception period of the chance button 136 with the length of the white portion. The length of the white portion is shorter than when the execution of the button receiving animation 1 shown in FIG. 22C is started, indicating that the remaining time of the button receiving period is shorter than the initial time.

  FIG. 22 (e) shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the button accepting animation 1 in which the chance button image is “alcohol” is being executed. Button reception animation 1 with the chance button image “Sake” is a chance button image 790 (see FIG. 22D) in a state where the lid of the sake barrel is cracked and alcohol is popping out from inside, and a lid is attached to the sake barrel. By alternately displaying the chance button images 790 (see FIG. 22 (e)) in a state of being displayed, the chance button images 790 are made more conspicuous, and the player is further prompted to press the chance button 136. The gauge image 760 indicates that the length of the white portion indicating the remaining time of the button reception period of the chance button 136 is further shortened, and the remaining time of the button reception period is further decreased. In addition, in the present embodiment, the embodiment (1-1), and the embodiment (1-2), the display mode of the chance button image among the effect modes of the button accepting animation 1 that prompts the player to press the chance button 136. Are different, but the length of the button reception period may be the same or different.

  FIG. 22 (f) shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the execution of the animation after the button reception is started. Prior to execution of the animation after button reception, the button reception animation 1 whose chance button image is “alcohol” is ended by the player pressing the chance button 136 within the button reception period. The size of the chance button image 790 is slightly increased, and the character image “push” displayed on the side surface is changed to a character image “sake”. The jackpot reliability may be different depending on the color of the displayed character image of “sake”.

  FIG. 22 (g) shows a state where the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, the chance button image 790 gradually decreases in size and then disappears, and the animation after the button reception ends. .

  FIG. 22 (h) shows a state after the animation after the button is received. When the player presses the chance button 136 during the button reception period, a cut-in notice image including the character string “Intense heat” is displayed in the effect display area 208d as a notice of the result of the determination on the special figure 1 variable game. Has been. The jackpot reliability of the cut-in notice of “extreme heat” displayed in the present embodiment is larger than the jackpot reliability of “opportunity” displayed in the embodiment (1-1) and the embodiment (1-2). Is also high.

As described above, regarding the button introduction animation, the button introduction animation 2 having the same effect mode is executed in both the embodiment (1-2) and the embodiment (1-3) (FIGS. 19D to 20). (B), see FIG. 21 (d) to FIG. 22 (b)). That is, in the embodiment (1-2) and the embodiment (1-3), the effect mode of the button introduction animation to be executed is the same.
On the other hand, as for the button accepting animation, in the example (1-2), as shown in FIGS. 20C to 20E, the button accepting animation 1 with the chance button image “default” is executed. On the other hand, in the embodiment (1-3), as shown in FIGS. 22C to 22E, the button accepting animation 1 in which the chance button image is “alcohol” is executed. That is, in the embodiment (1-2) and the embodiment (1-3), the effect mode of the button reception animation to be executed is different.
In this way, even if the effect mode of the button introduction animation executed in each of the plurality of special figure variation games is the same, the effect mode of the button receiving animation executed following the button introduction animation is the special figure variation. Since it is different for each game, the player's consciousness can be directed to the difference in the presentation mode of the button reception animation to be executed, and further attention should be paid to the fact that the reception of pressing of the chance button 136 is started. May be possible.

  Further, by making a plurality of effects of the button reception animation 1 started after the execution of the same button introduction animation 2, the button reception animation 1 contrary to the player's expectation may be executed. Can be surprised.

  In addition, for the effect mode of the button receiving animation that is continuously executed after the button introduction animation is executed, the execution probabilities of the plurality of effect modes may be the same or different. By doing in this way, the player may be able to pay more attention to the button accepting animation.

Further, after the execution of the button introduction animation 2 whose chance button image is “default”, the probability that the button receiving animation 1 whose chance button image is “alcohol” may be executed may be 20%, for example. After the execution of the button introduction animation 2 whose image is “default”, the probability that the button receiving animation 1 whose chance button image is “default” will be executed may be 40%, for example.
Thus, after the completion of the button introduction animation 2 with the chance button image “default”, the probability that the button 1 animation with the chance button image “liquor” being accepted and the button with the chance button image “default” being accepted The probability that the animation 1 is performed may be different from each other. By accepting the probability that button 1 animation with the chance button image “Liquor” will be received and the probability that button 1 animation with the chance button image “default” will be performed, the button reception will start from the start of the button introduction animation display. In some cases, the player can be more focused during the period until the middle animation is displayed.

In addition, when the result of the determination of whether or not the special figure variation game is successful is a big hit, the button accepting animation whose chance button image is “alcohol” than the probability that the button accepting animation 1 whose chance button image is “default” is executed. The probability that 1 is executed may be higher, and if the result of determining whether or not the special figure variation game is successful is out of play, the button accepting animation 1 with the chance button image “sake” is executed. The probability that the button accepting animation 1 whose chance button image is “default” is executed may be higher than the probability that
In this way, the probability that the big hit is higher when the button accepting animation 1 with the chance button image “sake” is executed may be increased. Depending on the result of the lottery, the presentation mode of the button reception animation is changed, and the button introduction animation is displayed in a common production mode, so that when the button reception animation with a different production mode is displayed, more games Can be surprised.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect display is performed using the button introduction animation, the button receiving animation, and the button receiving animation, but the effect display may be performed using a still image instead of these animations.

As described above, regarding the button accepting animation, in the example (1-2), as shown in FIGS. 20C to 20E, the button accepting animation 1 in which the chance button image is “default” is executed. The On the other hand, in the embodiment (1-3), as shown in FIGS. 22C to 22E, the button accepting animation 1 in which the chance button image is “alcohol” is executed. That is, in the embodiment (1-2) and the embodiment (1-3), the effect mode of the button reception animation to be executed is different.
On the other hand, in the embodiment (1-2) and the embodiment (1-3), as shown in FIG. 19A and FIG. 21A, a special chart executed prior to the button receiving animation. The production mode of the one variation game is the same. In this way, even if the effect mode of the animation during button reception executed in each of the plurality of special figure 1 variable games is different, the effect mode of special figure 1 variable game executed prior to the animation during button reception is the same. Therefore, there are cases where the player can be surprised more when the button-in-progress animation 1 with different effects is displayed.

  In this embodiment, the first period (the button introduction animation execution period shown in FIGS. 21D to 22B) and the second period (the buttons receiving animation shown in FIGS. 22C to 22E). The button introduction animation may be executed again in the third period which is a period after the execution period. Furthermore, the button receiving animation may or may not be displayed in the fourth period, which is the period after the third period. That is, the button introduction animation may be executed twice during one special figure variation game.

  While displaying the button introduction animation that increases interest in the chance button 136 in the third period, the player can accept or not accept the pressing of the chance button 136 in the fourth period. In some cases, interest in the chance button 136 can be further increased.

  In the present embodiment (1-3) and the embodiment (1-2), the buttons executed in the first period and the third period in the fifth period, which is the period after the fourth period. You may perform the button introduction animation from which at least one part of production | generation aspects differs from an introduction animation. Furthermore, in the sixth period, which is a period after the fifth period, at least one of the button accepting animations executed in the second period may or may not be executed. That is, even when a button introduction animation that is different from the button introduction animation executed in the first period and the third period is executed in the fifth period, the button introduction animation is executed in the second period in the sixth period. An animation while accepting a button may be executed.

  Even if the button introduction animation executed in the fifth period is different from the button introduction animation executed in the first period and the third period, the button reception executed in the sixth period The middle animation is the same as the animation during button reception executed in the second period, so that the player can be surprised, and the player is in both the button introduction animation execution period and the button reception animation execution period. Can be noticed.

(Example 2)
FIG. 23 and FIG. 24 show examples of effect display in Example 2 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 23A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 indicates that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is 2 by turning on the first and second LEDs from the left.

  In the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208, 爺 700 and Yoshimune 710 are displayed as background effects. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner.爺 700 is arranged on the left side of the image display area, and Yoshimune 710 is arranged on the right side of the image display area. In addition, since the heel 700 is displayed on the rear side of the left symbol display area 208a, a part of the heel 700 is hidden and invisible, and the Yoshimune 710 is located on the rear side of the right symbol display area 208c. Since it is displayed, a part of Yoshimune 710 is hidden and invisible.

  Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 23 (a), the first sub-control unit 400 first performs a lottery process for the button introduction animation in the effect control process of step S409. , Button introduction animation 3 (hereinafter, referred to as “button introduction animation 3 with“ chance button image ”as a“ family crest ”)” is executed, which displays the “family crest” chance button image 800 shown in FIG. 16A as an effect. Decide what to do. Next, a lottery process is performed for the button accepting animation. In this embodiment, the button accepting animation 2 (hereinafter referred to as “chance button image”) that displays the chance button image 800 of “family crest” shown in FIG. May be referred to as “Receiving animation 2 of“ family crest ”button”). Further, a lottery process is performed for the post-button reception animation displayed after the completion of execution of the button reception animation 2 whose chance button image is “family crest”, and it is determined to execute the post-button reception animation. Further, it is determined not to display the cut-in preview image after the completion of the execution of the animation after receiving the button.

  FIG. 23B shows a state in which the reach effect is started during the special figure 1 variable game. “Decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol is variably displayed, but in the effect display area 208d, the reach image 720 is temporarily displayed in front of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and the reach image 720 displays the left and right symbol display areas. A part of “decoration 7” temporarily stopped and displayed on 208a and 208c and the entire variation display of the decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b are hidden and cannot be visually recognized.

  FIG. 23 (c) shows a state in which an image imitating a cocoon (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a “cocoon image”) is displayed over almost the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the heel is closed. Is shown. The character image “Yatsushiro” is displayed in vertical writing on the right side image, and the character image “General” is displayed in vertical writing on the left side image. Since the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced in the upper right corner of the image display area and displayed in front of the bag image, the decorative symbol variation display in the special figure 1 variation game can be visually recognized. It has become.

  FIG. 23 (d) shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. When the bag image is opened, the bag 700 arranged on the left side of the image display area and the Yoshimune 710 arranged on the right side of the image display area are visible. Samurai 700 looks surprised at something, and Yoshimune 710 looks surprised at something.

  FIG. 23 (e) shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the execution of the button introduction animation 3 is started. A part of the chance button image 800 is displayed at the upper center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the chance button image 800, the pressing surface of the “family crest” chance button image shown in FIG. In the chance button image 800, the spear 700 is surprised, and Yoshimune 710 has a surprised expression.

  FIG. 23 (f) shows a state where the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the button introduction animation 3 is being executed. The chance button image 800 is further lowered to the lower left side of the image display area. Most of the chance button image 800 is visible.

  FIG. 23 (g) shows a state where the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the button introduction animation 3 is being executed. The chance button image 800 is further lowered to the lower right side of the image display area. The entire chance button image 800 is completely visible.

  FIG. 23 (h) shows a state where the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the button introduction animation 3 is being executed. The chance button image 800 descends further to the lower left side of the image display area and stops near the lower center.

  FIG. 24A shows a state continued from FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a darkening effect in which most of the image display area is displayed in black is displayed. During the darkening effect, it is not possible to visually recognize the samurai 700, Yoshimune 710, and the like. In the image display area where the chance button image 800 is displayed even during the darkening effect, it is displayed that the button introduction animation 3 is being executed. Even during the darkening effect, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c indicate that the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed.

  FIG. 24B shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the button introduction animation 3 is being executed. The chance button image 800 is displayed in a state of being compressed up and down with the side face directed to the player side.

  FIG. 24C shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the button introduction animation 3 ends. The chance button image 800 gradually protrudes upward, and the character image of “Yatsushiro Shogun” displayed on the side surface is visible. The chance button image of “family crest” shown in FIG. 16A is visible.

  FIG. 24D shows a state where the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the execution of the button accepting animation 2 is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a darkening effect is being executed. A white character image “seriously” is displayed vertically on the right side of the chance button image 800, and a “button” is displayed on the left side of the chance button image 800. A white text image of “Please press” is displayed in vertical writing. A gauge image 760 is displayed below the chance button image 800 to prompt the player to press the chance button 136. When the execution of the button reception animation 2 is started, the button reception period of the chance button 136 is also started. As a display for prompting the operation of the chance button 136, the button accepting animation 2 is displayed. The button accepting animation 2 is executed only after the button introduction animation 3 is displayed.

  FIG. 24 (e) shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the button accepting animation 2 is being executed. The chance button image 800 shows a state of rotating counterclockwise. The gauge image 760 displays the remaining time of the button reception period of the chance button 136 with the length of the white portion. The length of the white portion is shorter than when the execution of the button accepting animation 2 in FIG. 24D is started, indicating that the remaining time of the button accepting period is shorter than the initial time.

  FIG. 24F shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the execution of the animation after receiving the button is started. Prior to the execution of the animation after button reception, the button reception animation 2 is ended by the player pressing the chance button 136 within the button reception period. In the decorative symbol display device 208, after the chance button image 800 and the character image disappear, a white character image “Wagashi is Yatsushiro Shogun” is displayed vertically in two columns.

  FIG. 24G shows a state in which the character image of the pattern of Yoshimune screaming “Yoshimune is!” Is displayed in the effect display area 208d after the darkening effect is finished, and the animation after the button reception is finished. The reach effect is finished, and the symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” for notifying the 15R special big hit is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 24 (h) shows a state where the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the special figure 1 display device 212, special figure A (15R big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed, and “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It is notified that the special figure 1 variable game is a 15R special jackpot. When the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c with a display size larger than that during the reach effect. In this way, the button introduction animation, the button receiving animation, and the button receiving animation notification are performed.

Also, if the result of the special figure variable game success / failure determination is a big hit, if the chance button image executes the button introduction animation 3 with “family crest” and the result of the special figure variable game success / failure determination is out of place The button introduction animation 3 in which the chance button image is “family crest” may not be executed.
Thus, the button introduction animation 3 with the chance button image “family crest” may be a premier display that is displayed only when the jackpot is confirmed. Whether or not the special figure variation game is successful is determined as a common presentation mode for the button introduction animation 3 whose chance button image is “family crest” and the button acceptance animation displayed after the other button introduction animation is performed. Due to the different results, there are cases where the player can be made to pay more attention to the determination result.

  In this embodiment, the button introduction animation 3 (see FIGS. 23 (e) to 24 (c)) is executed before the button receiving animation 2 (see FIGS. 24 (d) to (e)) is executed. Yes. Since the animation 2 during button reception is executed only when the special figure 1 variable game is a 15R special jackpot, it can be said that the animation 2 during button reception itself is a notice of the 15R special jackpot confirmation. Further, since the button introduction animation 3 is always executed when the button accepting animation 2 is executed, it can be said that the button introduction animation 3 itself is a 15R special jackpot confirmation notice. In this embodiment, the button accepting animation 2 is executed after the button introduction animation is executed, but the button accepting animation 2 may not be executed after the button introduction animation 3 is executed. However, the button accepting animation 2 is always executed after the button introduction animation 3 is displayed.

Also, if the result of the special figure variable game success / failure determination is a big hit, the button accepting animation 2 with the chance button image “family crest” is executed and the result of the special figure variable game success / failure determination result is out of place. Does not need to execute the button accepting animation 2 whose chance button image is “family crest”.
In this way, the button accepting animation 2 whose chance button image is “family crest” may be a premier display that is displayed only when the jackpot is confirmed. By making a common mode for the button introduction animation 2 that is displayed before the button reception animation 2 whose chance button image is “family crest” and the other button reception animation is performed, the player can be made more common. Can be noticed.

  Button introduction animation (see FIG. 23 (e) to FIG. 24 (c)) for notifying the jackpot decision executed in the second embodiment and the jackpot executed in the first embodiment (1-1) to the first embodiment (1-3). Other than the confirmation, the button introduction animations (see FIGS. 17 (d) to (g), FIGS. 19 (d) to 20 (b), and FIGS. 21 (d) to 22 (b)) have different effects. However, the display mode of the special figure 1 variable game displayed before the execution of the button introduction animation is the same (FIGS. 23A to 23B, FIGS. 17A to 17B, and FIG. 19A). )-(B), FIG. 21 (a)-(b) reference).

  In this way, although the effect mode of the button introduction animation is different depending on the result of determining whether or not the special figure variable game is successful, the display mode during execution of the special figure 1 variable game displayed before the button introduction animation is the same. In some cases, the player can be more focused on the button introduction animation.

(Example 3-1)
25 to 27 show examples of effect display in Example 3-1 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 25 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 indicates that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is 2 by turning on the first and second LEDs from the left.

  In the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208, 爺 700 and Yoshimune 710 are displayed as background effects. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner.爺 700 is arranged on the left side of the image display area, and Yoshimune 710 is arranged on the right side of the image display area. In addition, since the heel 700 is displayed on the rear side of the left symbol display area 208a, a part of the heel 700 is hidden and invisible, and the Yoshimune 710 is located on the rear side of the right symbol display area 208c. Since it is displayed, a part of Yoshimune 710 is hidden and invisible.

  Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 25 (a), the first sub-control unit 400 first performs a lottery process on the button introduction animation in the effect control process of step S409. Then, it is determined to execute the button introduction animation 2 whose chance button image is “default”. Next, a lottery process is performed for the button accepting animation. In this embodiment, a button accepting animation 1 (hereinafter referred to as “chance button image”) that displays the “hot” chance button image 835 shown in FIG. May be referred to as “Hot” button accepting animation 1 ”). Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether to execute a promotion animation. The promotion animation is an animation that expects the display mode of the chance button image used in the button introduction animation to be promoted to the display mode of the chance button image with higher jackpot reliability in the button receiving animation. In this example, the first sub-control unit 400 determines to execute the promotion animation together with the button introduction animation 2 by a predetermined lottery process. Furthermore, the first sub-control unit 400 determines to execute the promoted animation together with the execution of the button accepting animation 1 by a predetermined lottery process. Further, a lottery process is performed on the post-button reception animation displayed after the completion of the execution of the button reception animation 1 whose chance button image is “heat”. In this embodiment, the button reception animation 1 whose chance button image is “heat” is displayed. It is determined that the animation after the button reception for displaying the chance button image 835 displayed in is executed. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 determines to execute the post-promotion animation together with the post-button reception animation. Further, a lottery process is performed on the cut-in preview image displayed after the execution of the animation after the button is received, and in this embodiment, it is determined to display an image including the character string “Burning”.

  FIG. 25B shows a state where the reach effect is started during the special figure 1 variable game. “Decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol is variably displayed, but in the effect display area 208d, the reach image 720 is temporarily displayed in front of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and the reach image 720 displays the left and right symbol display areas. A part of “decoration 7” temporarily stopped and displayed on 208a and 208c and the entire variation display of the decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b are hidden and cannot be visually recognized.

  In FIG. 25C, the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the display of the reach image 720 has disappeared. Therefore, “decoration 7” temporarily displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. "Can be visually recognized, and the entire variation display of the decorative symbols displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 25D shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the execution of the button introduction animation 2 in which the chance button image is “default” is started. A villager 770 carrying a chance button 740 appears at the left hand end of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and shows a state in which the villager 770 is moving near the center of the image display area. The chance button image 740 and the villager 770 are displayed in front of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and the “decoration 7” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a by the chance button image 740 and the villager 770. "Is hidden and is no longer visible.

  FIG. 25 (e) shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the button introduction animation 2 having the chance button image “default” is being executed. The villager 770 carrying the chance button 740 has moved further to the vicinity of the center of the image display area, and the villager 780 carrying the chance button 740 appears from the back of the villager 770 at the left hand end of the image display area. Most of the “decoration 7” that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a is hidden by the chance button image 740, the villager 770, and the villager 780 and cannot be seen. In addition, about half of the variation display of the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display area 208b is hidden by the villagers 770 and is not visible.

  FIG. 25 (f) shows a state where the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the button introduction animation 2 with the chance button image “default” is being executed. The villagers 770 and 780 carrying the chance button 740 have moved to almost the center of the image display area, so that most of the “decoration 7” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a can be visually recognized. It is in a state.

  FIG. 25G shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the button introduction animation 2 having the chance button image “default” is being executed. A villager 770 and a villager 780 who move while carrying the chance button 740 arrive at almost the center of the image display area and face each other with the symbol display area 208b interposed therebetween. Most of the variable display of the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display area 208b is visible. Further, since the villagers 770 and 780 have moved to almost the center of the image display area, the entire “decoration 7” temporarily displayed in the left and right symbols display area 208a can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 25 (h) shows a state where the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the button introduction animation 2 with the chance button image “default” is being executed. A state in which the villagers 770 and 780 are throwing the chance button images 740 toward the upper center of the image display area is displayed.

  FIG. 26 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 25 (h). After throwing the chance button 740, the villager 770 goes to the right-hand side of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and A state in which the villager 780 goes to the left hand side in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. Since the villager 770 has moved to the right hand side of the image display area, most of the “decoration 7” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c is hidden by the villager 770, and most of it cannot be seen. Yes. In addition, since the villager 780 has moved to the left hand side of the image display area, most of the “decoration 7” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a is hidden by the villager 780 so that most of it can be visually recognized. It is gone.

  FIG. 26B shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the button introduction animation 2 in which the chance button image is “default” is being executed. The chance button 740 thrown to the upper center of the image display area descends and stops at a predetermined position. Since the villager 770 has left the right end of the image display area and the villager 780 has left the left end of the image display area, the entire “decoration 7” temporarily displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c is clearly visible. It has become.

  FIG. 26C shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In addition, the execution of the promotion animation is started simultaneously with the execution of the button introduction animation 2 in which the chance button image is “default”. As the promotion animation starts, Yoshimune 810 appears from the right end of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The Yoshimune 810 is displayed in front of the right symbol display area 208c, and most of the “decoration 7” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208c by the Yoshimune 810 is hidden and cannot be seen. In the subsequent button introduction animation 2, the same effects as the effects shown in FIG. 26B are repeated until the button introduction animation 2 reaches the state shown in FIG.

  FIG. 26D shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the button introduction animation 2 in which the chance button image is “default” is being executed. Yoshimune 810 in the promotion animation stands with a smiley face, carrying the image of a thousand carton box (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “thousand carton box image” or “thousand carton box”) 820, and facing the chance button image 740. Yes.

  FIG. 26 (e) shows a state where the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the button introduction animation 2 having the chance button image “default” is being executed. Yoshimune 810 in the promotion animation is trying to throw a thousand box 820 to the chance button 740.

  FIG. 26F shows that the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the button introduction animation 2 in which the chance button image is “default” is executed. In the promotion animation, there is an effect in which the thousand box 820 thrown by Yoshimune 810 is flying in the direction of the chance button image 740.

  FIG. 26 (g) shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the button introduction animation 2 having the chance button image “default” is being executed. In the promotion animation, an effect image 830 is generated after the thousand box 820 hits the chance button 740, and the chance button image 740 is not visible. In the effect image 830, a character image “docker” is displayed.

  FIG. 26 (h) shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the button introduction animation 2 and the promotion animation in which the chance button image is “default” are finished. At the end of the promotion animation, the effect image 830 disappears and a large number of small images (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “small images” or “small images”) 837 are placed on the chance button image 740, and the center The figure shows a state in which a boxed box image 837 on which a character image “push” is displayed is placed. In addition, Yoshimune 810 has a guts pose and has a good face (success pattern). With such a promotion animation, when the acceptance period of the chance button 136 is started, an expectation that the “default” chance button image 740 may be promoted to a display mode of a chance button image with a higher jackpot reliability. There are cases where players can be held.

  FIG. 27 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 26 (h), and the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the button receiving animation 1 in which the chance button image is “thermal” is executed. Indicates a state where is started. Also, an animation during promotion will be started. In the promoted animation, Yoshimune 810 leaves the right end of the image display area, and the entire “decoration 7” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c is clearly visible. Also, in this embodiment, the display mode of the chance button image of the animation 1 during button reception is hidden by a large number of oval images 837 due to the promoted animation, but the chance button image has a “default” button. The “default” chance button image 740 displayed in the introductory animation 2 is promoted to a “hot” chance button image 835 shown in FIG. By making the chance button image 835 a little scattered with the chance button image 835 scattered to make the chance button image 835 stand out, and further displaying a gauge image 760 indicating a button reception period during which the chance button 136 can be pressed. The user is prompted to press the chance button 136. When the execution of the button reception animation 1 whose chance button image is “heat” is started, the button reception period of the chance button 136 is also started.

  FIG. 27B shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the button receiving animation 1 in which the chance button image is “hot” is being executed. In the promoted animation, the oval 837 is further scattered to make the chance button image 835 more noticeable, and the player is prompted to press the chance button 136. The mode in which the oval 837 is scattered may be changed according to the jackpot reliability of the display mode of the chance button image. The gauge image 760 displays the remaining time of the button reception period of the chance button 136 with the length of the white portion. The length of the white part is shorter than the start of execution of the button receiving animation 1 in FIG. 27A, indicating that the remaining time of the button receiving period is shorter than the initial time.

  FIG. 27C shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, the execution of the animation after the button reception is started, and the execution of the animation after the promotion is started. Prior to the execution of the post-button reception animation and the post-promotion animation, the button reception animation 1 in which the chance button image is “hot” is ended by the player pressing the chance button 136 within the button reception period. Corresponding to the player pressing the chance button 136, in the post-promotion animation, a large number of oval 837 are scattered here and there, and the chance button image 835 and the thousand box image 820 disappear. The effect corresponding to the player pressing the chance button 136 is not limited to this, and for example, the sound or the light emission mode of the lamp may be changed. The chance button image 835 disappears, and the execution of the animation ends after the button is received.

  FIG. 27D shows a state after the animation after the button is received. When the player presses the chance button 136 during the button reception period, a cut-in notice image including the character string “Scorching” is displayed in the effect display area 208d as a notice of the success / failure determination result of the special figure 1 variable game. ing. In this way, button introduction animation, promotion animation, button reception animation, promotion animation, button reception animation, promotion animation, and cut-in notice are performed.

In this embodiment, the promotion animation, the promotion animation, and the post-promotion animation operate separately from the button introduction animation, the button reception animation, and the button reception animation, respectively. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the promotion animation may be configured as a part of the button introduction animation, the promotion animation may be configured as a part of the button reception animation, or the post-promotion animation may be received as a button reception. Of course, it may be configured as part of the post-animation.
In the above embodiment, the button acceptance animation starts immediately after the button introduction animation ends. However, after the button introduction animation ends, the promotion animation starts, and after the promotion animation ends, the button acceptance animation starts. Of course, it may be configured to start.

(Example 3-2)
28 and 29 show examples of effect display in Example 3-2 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 28A is the same as the state shown in FIG. 26A of Example 3-1, and shows the state after the effects shown in FIGS. 25A to 25H have already been executed. . Also in the present embodiment, prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 25A, the first sub-control unit 400 first performs a lottery process on the button introduction animation in the effect control process of step S409. In this embodiment, it is determined to execute the button introduction animation 2 in which the chance button image is “default”. Next, a lottery process is performed for the button accepting animation, and in this embodiment, it is determined to execute the button accepting animation 1 whose chance button image is “default”. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether to execute a promotion animation. In this example, the first sub-control unit 400 determines to execute the promotion animation together with the button introduction animation 2 by a predetermined lottery process. Further, a lottery process is performed on the post-button reception animation that is displayed after the execution of the button reception animation 1 whose chance button image is “default”. In this embodiment, the button reception animation 1 whose chance button image is “default”. It is determined to execute the animation after receiving the button for displaying the chance button image 740 displayed in the above. Further, a lottery process is performed on the cut-in notice image displayed after the completion of the execution of the animation after the button is received, and in this embodiment, it is determined to display an image including the character string “Opportunity”.

  FIG. 28 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 25 (h). After throwing the chance button 740, the villager 770 goes to the right hand side of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, A state in which the villager 780 goes to the left hand side in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. Since the villager 770 has moved to the right hand side of the image display area, most of the “decoration 7” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c is hidden by the villager 770, and most of it cannot be seen. Yes. In addition, since the villager 780 has moved to the left hand side of the image display area, most of the “decoration 7” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a is hidden by the villager 780 so that most of it can be visually recognized. It is gone.

  FIG. 28B shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the button introduction animation 2 having the chance button image “default” is being executed. The chance button 740 thrown to the upper center of the image display area descends and stops at a predetermined position. Since the villager 770 has left the right end of the image display area and the villager 780 has left the left end of the image display area, the entire “decoration 7” temporarily displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c is clearly visible. It has become.

  FIG. 28C shows a state where the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In addition, the execution of the promotion animation is started simultaneously with the execution of the button introduction animation 2 in which the chance button image is “default”. As the promotion animation starts, Yoshimune 810 appears from the right end of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The Yoshimune 810 is displayed in front of the right symbol display area 208c, and most of the “decoration 7” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208c by the Yoshimune 810 is hidden and cannot be seen. In the subsequent button introduction animation 2, the same effects as the effects shown in FIG. 28B are repeated until the button introduction animation 2 reaches the state shown in FIG.

  FIG. 28D shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the button introduction animation 2 in which the chance button image is “default” is being executed. Yoshimune 810 in the promotion animation stands smiling with the chest box 820 on his shoulder and turning his body toward the chance button image 740.

  FIG. 28E shows a state where the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the button introduction animation 2 with the chance button image “default” is being executed. Yoshimune 810 in the promotion animation is trying to throw a Thousand Box 820 to the chance button image 740.

  In FIG. 28F, the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the button introduction animation 2 in which the chance button image is “default” is executed. In the promotion animation, there is an effect in which the thousand box 820 thrown by Yoshimune 810 is flying in the direction of the chance button image 740.

  FIG. 28G shows a state where the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the button introduction animation 2 with the chance button image “default” is being executed. In the promotion animation, an effect image 830 is generated after the thousand box 820 hits the chance button 740, and the chance button image 740 is not visible. In the effect image 830, a character image “docker” is displayed.

  FIG. 28H shows a state where the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the button introduction animation 2 with the chance button image “default” is being executed. In the promotion animation, the effect image 830 disappears, and a state where several ovals 837 are spilled from the thousand box 820 left in the vicinity of the chance button image 740 is shown. No oval 837 is shown. Yoshimune 810 is nodded (failure pattern).

  FIG. 29 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 28 (h), the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the button introduction animation 2 and the promotion animation in which the chance button image is “default”. Indicates a state in which is terminated. Yoshimune 810 is nodded and leaves the right end of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the promotion animation ends. Depending on whether the promotion animation executes a success pattern or a failure pattern, the execution time of the button introduction animation may be varied. In this embodiment, since the failure pattern is executed and a display indicating that Yoshimune 810 is depressed is necessary, the time required for executing the button introduction animation 1 is made longer than the success pattern (see Example 3-1). . Further, when executing a failure pattern, accepting the pressing of the chance button 136 may be stopped.

  FIG. 29B shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the execution of the button accepting animation 1 whose chance button image is “default” is started. In the effect display area 208d, a chance button image 740, a PUSH image 750, an image of a downward white arrow indicating a pressing direction of the chance button 136, and a gauge image 760 are displayed below the PUSH image 750. The player is prompted to press the chance button 136. When the execution of the button accepting animation 1 whose chance button image is “default” is started, the button accepting period of the chance button 136 is also started.

  FIG. 29C shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the execution of the button accepting animation 1 whose chance button image is “default” is started. In the effect display area 208d, a chance button image 740 in a pressed state is displayed. The gauge image 760 displays the remaining time of the button reception period of the chance button 136 with the length of the white portion. The length of the white portion is shorter than the start of execution of the button receiving animation 1 in FIG. 29B, indicating that the remaining time of the button receiving period is shorter than the initial time.

  FIG. 29 (d) shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the button accepting animation 1 in which the chance button image is “default” is being executed. The button accepting animation 1 whose chance button image is “default” includes the pressed chance button image 740 (see FIG. 29C) and the protruding chance button image 740 (see FIG. 29D). ) Alternately to make the chance button image 740 more prominent and further prompt the player to press the chance button 136. The gauge image 760 indicates that the length of the white portion indicating the remaining time of the button reception period of the chance button 136 is further shortened, and the remaining time of the button reception period is further decreased.

  FIG. 29 (e) shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the execution of the animation after the button reception is started. Prior to execution of the animation after button reception, the button reception animation 1 whose chance button image is “default” is ended by the player pressing the chance button 136 within the button reception period. In the animation after button reception, the chance button image 740 is lit in a pressed state.

  FIG. 29 (f) shows a state where the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, the transparency of the chance button image 740 gradually increases and then disappears, and the animation after the button reception ends. .

  FIG. 29G shows a state after the animation after the button is received. When the player presses the chance button 136 during the button reception period, a cut-in notice image including the character string “Opportunity” is displayed in the effect display area 208d as a notice of the result of the special figure 1 variable game success / failure determination result. Has been. In this way, button introduction animation, promotion animation, button reception animation, button reception animation, and cut-in notice are performed.

  The promotion animation may have a plurality of types, and the probability of successful promotion of the display mode of the chance button image and the display mode of the chance button image to be promoted may be different depending on the type of the promotion animation. Depending on the type of promotion animation, there may be a promotion animation that is 100% successful and a promotion animation that is 100% unsuccessful.

Example 4
30 and 31 show examples of effect display in Example 4 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 30 (a) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 18 (b) of Example 1-1, and shows the state after the effects shown in FIGS. 17 (a) to 18 (a) have already been executed. ing. Also in this embodiment, prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 17A, the first sub-control unit 400 first performs a lottery process on the button introduction animation in the effect control process of step S409. In this embodiment, it is determined to execute the button introduction animation 1 in which the chance button image is “default”. Next, a lottery process is performed for the button accepting animation, and in this embodiment, it is determined to execute the button accepting animation 1 whose chance button image is “default”. Further, a lottery process is performed on the post-button reception animation that is displayed after the execution of the button reception animation 1 whose chance button image is “default”. In this embodiment, the chance button 136 is pressed within the button reception period. Is determined to execute the post-button-receiving animation for displaying the chance button image 740 displayed with the button-receiving animation 1 whose chance button image is “default”. If the chance button 136 is not pressed within the button reception period, it is determined to execute a predetermined animation after receiving the button. Further, a lottery process is performed on the cut-in preview image displayed after the execution of the animation after the button is received, and in this embodiment, when the chance button 136 is pressed during the button reception period, the character string “Opportunity” is displayed. It is determined to display an image including. If the chance button 136 is not pressed during the button reception period, it is determined not to display the cut-in notice image. Further, FIG. 30A is the same as the state shown in FIG. 18B of the example 1-1 and can be said to be the same as the state shown in FIG. 20E of the example 1-2. Accordingly, when FIG. 30A shows a state after the effects shown in FIGS. 19A to 20D have already been executed, the button receiving animation, the button receiving animation, and the cut-in The notice image is as described above, but for the button introduction animation, it is determined by the lottery process that the button introduction animation 2 having the “default” chance button image is executed.

  FIG. 30 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 18 (a). The button accepting animation 1 whose chance button image is “default” includes a pressed chance button image 740 (see FIG. 18A) and a protruding chance button image 740 (see FIG. 30A). ) Alternately to make the chance button image 740 more prominent and further prompt the player to press the chance button 136. The gauge image 760 indicates that the length of the white portion indicating the remaining time of the button reception period of the chance button 136 is further shortened, and the remaining time of the button reception period is further decreased.

  FIG. 30B shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the button accepting animation 1 with the “default” chance button image is ended. In this embodiment, the button reception period ends without pressing the chance button 136 within the button reception period.

  FIG. 30C shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the execution of the animation after the button is received is started. The push image 750 and the gauge image 760 disappear together with the end of the button accepting animation 1 whose chance button image is “default”.

  FIG. 30 (d) shows a state where the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, the animation after button reception is executed, and the chance button 740 is about to separate from the circular opening.

  FIG. 30 (e) shows an image of a spring in which a reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, an animation after button reception is executed, and the chance button 740 is protruding from the circular opening (hereinafter referred to as “spring image”). ”Or“ spring ”(which may be referred to as“ spring ”) 840 is pushed to the left of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 30F shows that the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, the animation after the button reception is executed, and the chance button 740 is further moved to the left of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the spring 840. The state where it is pushed out is shown.

  FIG. 30G shows that the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, the animation after the button reception is executed, and the chance button 740 is further moved to the left side of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the spring 840. The state where it is pushed out is shown. A part of the chance button 740 protrudes out of the image display area and cannot be visually recognized.

  FIG. 30H shows that the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, the animation after the button reception is executed, and the chance button 740 is pushed out to the right of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the spring 840. It shows the status. Half of the chance buttons 740 are out of the image display area and cannot be visually recognized.

  FIG. 31A shows a state continued from FIG. 30H, and shows a state where the chance button image 740 has deviated from the spring image 840 and flew on the right side of the image display area. The chance button image 740 is displayed in front of the right symbol display area 208c, and a part of “decoration 7” temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c by the chance button image 740 is hidden and cannot be visually recognized. Yes.

  FIG. 31B shows that the reach effect in the special figure 1 floating game is being executed, the transmittance of the spring image 840 and the image of the circular opening gradually rises and then disappears, and the animation after receiving the button ends. Indicates the state.

  FIG. 31C shows a state after the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the animation after the button reception is finished.

  FIG. 31D shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is finished and the special figure G (out of symbol) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” for notifying the discontinuity is stopped and displayed to inform that the special figure 1 variable game is disjoint. When the chance button 136 is not pressed within the button reception period, the animation after the button reception is performed in this way. As described above, the post-button reception animation is an animation that is displayed when the chance button 136 is pressed during the button reception period, and this embodiment is illustrated as a modification of the embodiment (1-1). ing.

  The time required for executing the animation after button reception when the chance button 136 is not pressed during the button reception period is the time required for executing the animation after button reception when the chance button 136 is pressed during the button reception period. It may be the same length as time or different. Further, the animation after button reception when the chance button 136 is not pressed within the button reception period is not limited to that illustrated in the present embodiment, and there may be a plurality of types (patterns). Further, the distribution of the jackpot reliability may be made different for each of a plurality of types (patterns) of the post-button reception animation, and the type to be displayed may be selected according to the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game. Moreover, the animation after button reception may have a type that becomes a big hit or a type that is determined to be out of place.

(Example 5)
FIG. 32 shows an example of effect display in Example 5 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 32A shows a state where the reach effect is being executed during the special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 indicates that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is 2 by turning on the first and second LEDs from the left.

  In the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208, 爺 700 and Yoshimune 710 are displayed as background effects. “Decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol is variably displayed, but in the effect display area 208d, the reach image 720 is temporarily displayed in front of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and the reach image 720 displays the left and right symbol display areas. A part of “decoration 7” temporarily stopped and displayed on 208a and 208c and the entire variation display of the decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b are hidden and cannot be visually recognized.

  Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 32 (a), the first sub-control unit 400 first performs a lottery process on the button introduction animation in the effect control process of step S409. Executes the button introduction animation 4 (hereinafter, referred to as “button introduction animation 4 with“ chance button image is “default” ”) that displays the“ default ”chance button image 740 shown in FIG. Decide what to do. Next, a lottery process is performed for the button accepting animation, and the “default” chance button image 740 shown in FIG. 16B is displayed as an effect. It is determined to execute (sometimes referred to as “button receiving animation 3”).

  FIG. 32 (b) shows a state in which the cocoon image is displayed over almost the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the cocoon image is closed. The character image “Yatsushiro” is displayed in vertical writing on the right side image, and the character image “General” is displayed in vertical writing on the left side image. The left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed at the upper right corner of the image display area. Since the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed in front of the bag image, the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is visible.

  FIG. 32C shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the execution of the button introduction animation 4 in which the chance button image is “default” is started. When the 襖 image is opened, an image including a character string of “shooting reach” (hereinafter also referred to as “shooting reach image”) 855 arranged above the image display area, and an image display area The Yoshimune 850 arranged on the lower left side, the character image of the Echigoya picture (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “Echigoya”) 860 arranged on the lower right side of the image display area, and the center of the image display area The arranged character image “Defeat Echigoya with repeated button strokes!” And the chance button image 740 arranged in the lower center of the image display area are visible. In addition, the chance button image 740 is made visible by the increase in the transmittance of the effect image 857 displayed in front of the chance button image 740, and the character image “not yet” is displayed on the chance button image 740. It is possible to visually recognize a state in which the two tape images on which are displayed are pasted in an X shape.

  FIG. 32D shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the execution of the button introduction animation 4 in which the chance button image is “default” is started. In the button introduction animation 4 where the chance button image is “default”, the effect that the tape attached to the chance button image 740 is gradually peeled off is displayed, and “READY?” Is displayed near the center of the image display area. Is displayed to the player that the start of the acceptance period of the chance button 136 is approaching.

  FIG. 32E shows a state where the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the button introduction animation 4 with the chance button image “default” is being executed. In the button introduction animation 4 in which the chance button image is “default”, a chance button is displayed by displaying an effect in which one of the tapes attached to the chance button image 740 is completely peeled off and the other tape is gradually peeled off. It shows the player that the acceptance period of 136 will start soon.

  FIG. 32F shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the button introduction animation 4 with the chance button image “default” ends. In the button introduction animation 4 in which the chance button image is “default”, the button introduction animation 4 in which the chance button image is “default” is displayed by displaying an effect in which both of the tapes attached to the chance button image 740 are completely peeled off. Is completed, and the player is informed that the acceptance period of the chance button 136 is started immediately after.

  FIG. 32G shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the execution of the button accepting animation 3 whose chance button image is “default” is started. When the execution of the button accepting animation 3 whose chance button image is “default” is started, the button accepting period of the chance button 136 is also started. A character image “GO!” Is displayed near the center of the image display area, and three downward bold white arrow images indicating the pressing direction of the chance button 136 are displayed below the character image. Further, by displaying a character image “continuous hit” on the pressing surface of the chance button image 740, lighting the pressing surface, and displaying a gauge image 760 indicating a button reception period during which the pressing of the chance button 136 can be received, The player is prompted to repeatedly hit the chance button 136.

  FIG. 32 (h) shows a state where the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the button accepting animation 3 in which the chance button image is “default” is being executed. The button accepting animation 3 whose chance button image is “default” is displayed on the pressing surface of the chance button image 740 by alternately displaying on and off the pressing surface of the chance button image 740 (see FIG. 32G). The displayed character image of “continuous hit” is made more conspicuous to prompt the player to hit the chance button 136 further. The gauge image 760 indicates that the length of the white portion indicating the remaining time of the button reception period of the chance button 136 is shorter than the initial time, and the remaining time of the button reception period is reduced. As described above, in this embodiment, the button introduction animation that prompts the user to press the chance button 136 repeatedly is exemplified.

(Example 6)
33 and 34 show examples of effect display in Example 6 of the present embodiment in time series. 33A to 34K, the lower left area of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variation icon display area 870. In the variation icon display area 870, one variation icon 880 can be displayed, and whether or not the variation is appropriate can be notified with a predetermined reliability according to the display mode of the variation icon 880 (the variation notification). The fluctuation icon 880 may be displayed in a display size (for example, a display size larger than the hold icon 900) different from the hold icon 900 displayed in the hold icon display area 890 described later. This may facilitate identification of the variation icon and the hold icon.

  Further, a horizontally long area below the effect display area 208d and adjacent to the right side of the variable icon display area 870 is a hold icon display area 890. In the hold icon display area 890, one or more hold icons can be displayed. In the hold icon display area 890, it is possible to notify the hold number of the special figure variable game according to the number of hold icons. Furthermore, it is possible to notify (pre-reading notice) whether or not the suspension is appropriate with a predetermined reliability by the display mode of each suspension icon. The hold icon display area 890 of the present embodiment can display a maximum of four hold icons, and is roughly divided into four areas of the first area, the second area, the third area, and the fourth area from the left to the right. I know. The first to fourth areas correspond to the first to fourth holding ranks, respectively. That is, a hold icon corresponding to the earliest (most recently stored) hold 1 can be displayed in the first area, and similarly, the 2nd to 4th hold 2 in the second to fourth areas. The hold icons corresponding to -4 can be displayed. In this embodiment, numbers 1 to 4 are displayed in the first to fourth areas of the hold icon display area 713, respectively, and the positions of the first to fourth areas are clearly indicated by the displayed numbers. The location of the first to fourth regions may be omitted. In the hold icon display area 890 of the present embodiment, only the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed, but the hold icon of the special figure 2 may be displayed together.

  This embodiment is characterized in that the execution of another predetermined animation is temporarily stopped during the execution of the button introduction animation. In this example, the “bound animation” is executed before the execution of the button introduction animation is started, and when the execution of the button introduction animation is started, the bound animation is temporarily stopped. In bound animation, a spherical ball such as rubber falls vertically downward and collides with a transparent plate surface. After the ball is crushed and deformed into a flat shape, it is repelled by elasticity and moved vertically upward from the plate surface. A jumping up effect is performed. The bound animation is an animation that displays a notice regarding the determination result of the special figure variation game.

  FIG. 33A shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. The left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed at the upper right corner of the image display area. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 indicates that the holding number of the special figure 1 is 1 by turning on the first LED from the left. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, the execution of the bound animation has started, and an image of a spherical ball (hereinafter referred to as “ball”) in which a character image of “heat” is displayed. There is an effect that 910 is falling toward the hold icon display area 890.

  Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 33 (a), the first sub-control unit 400 first performs a lottery process for the button introduction animation in the effect control process of step S409. Then, it is determined to execute the button introduction animation 2 whose chance button image is “default”. Next, a lottery process is performed for the button accepting animation, and in this embodiment, it is determined to execute the button accepting animation 1 whose chance button image is “default”. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 determines to execute the bound animation by a predetermined lottery process. Further, a lottery process is performed for the post-button reception animation displayed after the execution of the button reception animation 1 with the chance button image “default”. In this embodiment, the chance button image 740 is separated from the circular opening. Decide to execute the animation after receiving the button. Further, it is determined not to display the cut-in preview image after the completion of the execution of the animation after receiving the button.

  FIG. 33B shows a state where the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the bound animation is being executed. In the bound animation, the state at the moment when the ball 910 falls toward the vicinity of the center of the image display area and the outer periphery of the ball 910 contacts the transparent plate surface is displayed.

  FIG. 33 (c) shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the bound animation is being executed. In the bound animation, a state where the ball 910 colliding with the transparent plate surface is crushed up and down and deformed into a flat shape is displayed.

  FIG. 33 (d) shows a state where the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the bound animation is being executed. In the bound animation, a state in which the ball 910 colliding with the transparent plate surface is further crushed up and down and deformed into a flat shape is displayed.

  FIG. 33 (e) shows a state where the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the bound animation is being executed. In the bound animation, a state in which the crushed ball 910 repels due to elasticity and the degree of flatness is reduced is displayed.

  FIG. 33 (f) shows a state where the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the bound animation is being executed. In the bound animation, the outer shape of the ball 910 is restored to its original spherical shape due to elasticity, and the state immediately before jumping vertically upward from the plate surface due to the repulsive force (restoring force) in the state where the outer periphery contacts the transparent plate surface. Is displayed.

  FIG. 33 (g) shows a state where the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the bound animation is being executed. The bound animation shows a state in which the ball 910 has left the plate surface and jumped up vertically.

  FIG. 33 (h) shows a state where the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the bound animation is being executed. In the bound animation, there is an effect in which the ball 910 is falling again toward the transparent plate surface on the hold icon display area 890.

  FIG. 33 (i) shows a state at the start of the button introduction animation 2 in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the chance button image is “default”. At the start of the button introduction animation 2 whose chance button image is “default”, the villager 770 who carried the chance button 740 has not yet appeared. In addition, the bound animation is paused when the button introduction animation 2 whose chance button image is “default” is started, and the brightness of the entire image display area is slightly lowered. In the present embodiment, the pause of the bound animation and the decrease in the brightness of the entire image display area are continued from the start of execution of the button introduction animation 2 whose chance button image is “default” until the end of the execution of the animation after button reception. In the present embodiment, the brightness of the entire image display area is reduced when the button introduction animation 2 is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the brightness may be increased or the color may be changed. May be. Further, the display of the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, etc. during the symbol variation display is not paused, but may be paused.

  FIG. 33 (j) shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the button introduction animation 2 in which the chance button image is “default” is being executed. In the button introduction animation 2 in which the chance button image is “default”, there is an effect in which the villager 770 is closer to the center of the image display area. In addition, the pause of the bound animation is ongoing, and the brightness of the entire image display area remains lowered.

  FIG. 33 (k) shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the button introduction animation 2 having the chance button image “default” is being executed. In the button introduction animation 2 in which the chance button image is “default”, the villager 770 carrying the chance button 740 moves further to the center of the image display area, and the villager 780 carrying the chance button 740 from behind the villager 770 An effect appearing at the left hand end of the display area is performed. In addition, the pause of the bound animation is ongoing, and the brightness of the entire image display area remains lowered.

  FIG. 33 (l) shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the button introduction animation 2 having the chance button image “default” is being executed. In the button introduction animation 2 in which the chance button image is “default”, there is an effect in which the villagers 770 and 780 who carry the chance buttons 740 are moving further to the center of the image display area. In addition, the pause of the bound animation is ongoing, and the brightness of the entire image display area remains lowered.

  FIG. 34 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 33 (l). In the button introduction animation 2 in which the chance button image is “default”, the villager 770 and the villager 780 arriving near the center of the image display area throw the chance button 740 toward the upper center of the image display area. It has been broken. In addition, the pause of the bound animation is ongoing, and the brightness of the entire image display area remains lowered.

  FIG. 34B shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the button introduction animation 2 in which the chance button image is “default” is being executed. In the button introduction animation 2 in which the chance button image is “default”, after throwing the chance button 740, the villager 770 leaves to the right hand side of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the villager 780 displays the decorative symbol display device. An effect of leaving to the left hand side in the image display area 208 is performed. In addition, the pause of the bound animation is ongoing, and the brightness of the entire image display area remains lowered.

  FIG. 34C shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the execution of the button introduction animation 2 in which the chance button image is “default” is finished. After the villagers 770 and 780 have left the image display area and the chance button 740 gradually descends and stops at a predetermined position, the execution of the button introduction animation 2 with the chance button image “default” ends. In the effect display area 208d, the chance button image 740 is displayed in front of the circular image 910, and the lower half of the circular image 910 is hidden by the chance button image 740 and cannot be viewed. In addition, the pause of the bound animation is ongoing, and the brightness of the entire image display area remains lowered.

  FIG. 34D shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the execution of the button accepting animation 1 whose chance button image is “default” is started. In the effect display area 208d, a chance button image 740 projecting upward, a push image 750, and a downward white arrow image indicating the pressing direction of the chance button 136 are displayed below the push image 750. ing. Further, a gauge image 760 indicating a button reception period during which the chance button 136 can be received is displayed to prompt the player to press the chance button 136. When the execution of the button accepting animation 1 whose chance button image is “default” is started, the button accepting period of the chance button 136 is also started. In the present embodiment, the pause of execution of the bound animation is ongoing, but the pause of the bound animation may be canceled when the button introduction animation 2 whose chance button image is “default” ends.

  FIG. 34 (e) shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the button accepting animation 1 having the chance button image “default” is being executed. The gauge image 760 displays the remaining time of the button reception period of the chance button 136 with the length of the white portion. The length of the white portion is shorter than when the execution of the button receiving animation 1 in FIG. 34D is started, indicating that the remaining time of the button receiving period is shorter than the initial time. In addition, the pause of the bound animation is ongoing, and the brightness of the entire image display area remains lowered.

  FIG. 34 (f) shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the execution of the animation after the button reception is started. Prior to execution of the animation after button reception, the button reception animation 1 whose chance button image is “default” is ended by the player pressing the chance button 136 within the button reception period. The chance button image 740 is in a pressed state. Also, in this embodiment, the pause of the bound animation is continuing, but the pause of the bound animation may be canceled when the animation of accepting the button ends or the animation after accepting the button starts, or the chance button The pause of the bound animation may be canceled when 136 is pressed. When the pause of the bound animation is released, the bound animation before the pause may be continued, the animation may be changed to another animation, or the animation display may be stopped.

  FIG. 34 (g) shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, the animation after button reception is executed, and the chance button 740 is being separated from the circular opening. In addition, the pause of the bound animation is ongoing, and the brightness of the entire image display area remains lowered.

  In FIG. 34 (h), the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, the animation after the button reception is executed, and the chance button 740 is pushed out to the left of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the spring 840. It shows the status. In addition, the pause of the bound animation is ongoing, and the brightness of the entire image display area remains lowered.

  FIG. 34 (i) shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the execution of the animation after the button reception is finished. The chance button 740 is released from the spring 840 and flies to the right side of the image display area. After the transmittance of the spring image 840 and the image of the circular opening gradually rises and disappears, the animation after receiving the button ends. In this embodiment, the pause of the bound animation is canceled when the animation after the button is received, and the decrease in the brightness of the entire image display area is also released.

  FIG. 34 (j) shows a state after the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the execution of the animation after the button reception is finished. In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the pause of the bound animation is released when the animation after the button is received is released, and the ball 910 is flying to the left side of the image display area.

  FIG. 34 (k) shows a state where the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure G (offset symbol) is stopped and displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a symbol combination other than the symbol for notifying the winning combination “decoration 7-decoration 6- Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. When the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c with a display size larger than that during the reach effect. In this way, the bound animation, button introduction animation, button reception animation, and button reception animation are performed.

(Example 7)
FIG. 35 shows an example of effect display in Example 7 of the present embodiment in time series. The state shown in FIG. 35A corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 25E of Example 3-1, and the state after the effects shown in FIGS. 25A to 25D have already been executed. Is shown. Also in the present embodiment, prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 25A, the first sub-control unit 400 first performs a lottery process on the button introduction animation in the effect control process of step S409. In this embodiment, it is determined to execute the button introduction animation 2 in which the chance button image is “default”. Next, a lottery process is performed for the button accepting animation, and in this embodiment, it is determined to execute the button accepting animation 1 whose chance button image is “default”. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 determines to execute three effects of the button introduction animation 2 with the chance button image “default” by performing a predetermined lottery process. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 determines to execute three effects of the button accepting animation 1 whose chance button image is “default” by a predetermined lottery process.

  FIG. 35 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 25 (d), in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the button introduction animation 2 in which the chance button image is “default” is executed. It shows the state being done. In this embodiment, three button introduction animations 2 are executed with overlapping display periods. Villagers 770a and 780a carrying the chance button 740a, villagers 770b and 780b carrying the chance button 740b, and villagers 770c and 780c carrying the chance button 740c appear. The villagers 770a and 780a carrying the chance button 740a, the villagers 770b and 780b carrying the chance button 740b, and the villagers 770c and villagers 780c carrying the chance button 740c are all left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Since it is displayed in front, a part of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c is hidden and cannot be visually recognized. When two or three displays of the three button introduction animations 2 are overlapped, any one of them may hide the remainder and be invisible. The button introduction animation 2 may be displayed in a predetermined priority order, or the button introduction animation 2 previously executed may be displayed in front. In this embodiment, the three button introduction animations 2 are the button introduction animations 2 having the same production mode, but button introduction animations having different production modes may be used.

  FIG. 35B shows that the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, the button introduction animation 2 with the “default” chance button image is completed, and the button receiving animation with the “default” chance button image. 1 shows a state in which it is executed. In this embodiment, three button receiving animations 1 are executed with overlapping display periods. In the effect display area 208d, a chance button image 740a protruding upward, a push image 750a, and a downward white arrow image indicating the pressing direction of the chance button 136 are displayed below the push image 750a. ing. Further, a gauge image 760a indicating a button reception period during which the chance button 136 can be pressed is displayed to prompt the player to press the chance button 136. Below that, a chance button image 740b that protrudes upward, a push image 750b, and a downward white bold arrow image indicating the pressing direction of the chance button 136 are displayed below the push image 750b. . Further, a gauge image 760b indicating a button reception period during which the push of the chance button 136 can be received is displayed to prompt the player to press the chance button 136. Below that, a chance button image 740c projecting upward, a push image 750c, and a downward white bold arrow image indicating the pressing direction of the chance button 136 are displayed below the push image 750c. . Further, a gauge image 760c indicating a button reception period during which the press of the chance button 136 can be received is displayed to prompt the player to press the chance button 136. By displaying three chance button images (chance button images 740a, 740b, and 740c), the user is prompted to press the chance button 136 three times during the button reception period. The button reception periods of the three button reception animations 1 may be started at the same time, or may be started with a time difference. In addition, the button reception periods of the three button reception animations 1 may all end at the same time, or may end with a time difference. That is, the three button reception periods may be linked or may be independent of each other.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 35 again.
(1-1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is
Display means capable of displaying at least one of the plurality of displays (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
An operation means (for example, a chance button 136) at least operable by the player;
Accepting means (for example, a chance button sensor 426) capable of accepting at least an operation to the operating means;
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the plurality of displays is a first display (for example, a button introduction animation 2 in which the chance button image is “default” and a button introduction animation 3 in which the chance button image is “family crest”),
At least one of the plurality of displays is a second display (for example, a button accepting animation 1 with a chance button image “Liquor” and a button accepting animation 2 with a chance button image “family crest”),
At least one of the plurality of displays is a third display (for example, a button accepting animation 1 in which the chance button image is “default”),
At least a part of the display mode of the third display (for example, the display mode of the button accepting animation 1 in which the chance button images shown in FIGS. 20C to 20E are “default”) is the second display. (E.g., the chance button image shown in FIGS. 22C to 22E is the “Sake” button reception animation 1), the chance button images shown in FIGS. 24D to 24E are “ At least a portion of the “family crest” button accepting animation 2 presentation mode) is a different display mode,
The first display is a period before the period when the accepting means can accept at least an operation to the operating means (hereinafter referred to as “first period”) (for example, FIG. 19D). In the period when the button introduction animation 2 in which the chance button image shown in FIG. 20B is “default” is displayed, the button introduction animation in which the chance button image shown in FIGS. 21D to 22B is “default” 2 is displayed, and the chance button image shown in FIGS. 23 (e) to 24 (c) is a display that can be displayed at least during the period when the button introduction animation 3 of “family crest” is displayed),
The second display indicates a period during which the accepting unit can accept at least an operation on the operating unit (hereinafter referred to as “second period”) (for example, the chances shown in FIGS. 20C to 20E). The period during which the button acceptance animation 1 whose button image is “default” is displayed, the period during which the button acceptance animation 1 whose chance button image is “Sake” shown in FIGS. 22C to 22E is displayed, FIG. The chance button images shown in (d) to (e) are displayable at least during the period during which the “family crest” button accepting animation 2 is displayed),
The third display is a display that can be displayed at least in the second period.
It is characterized by that.

(1-2) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is
Display means capable of displaying at least one of the plurality of displays (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
An operation means (for example, a chance button 136) at least operable by the player;
Accepting means (for example, a chance button sensor 426) capable of accepting at least an operation to the operating means;
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the plurality of displays is a first display (for example, a button introduction animation 2 in which the chance button image is “default” and a button introduction animation 3 in which the chance button image is “family crest”),
At least one of the plurality of displays is a second display (for example, a button accepting animation 1 with a chance button image “Liquor” and a button accepting animation 2 with a chance button image “family crest”),
At least one of the plurality of displays is a third display (for example, a button accepting animation 1 in which the chance button image is “default”),
The display means displays a first period (for example, a period in which the button introduction animation 2 in which the chance button image shown in FIGS. 19D to 20B is “default” is displayed, FIGS. 21D to 21D. During the period when the button introduction animation 2 whose chance button image is “default” shown in 22 (b) is displayed, the button introduction animation 3 whose chance button image is “family crest” shown in FIGS. 23 (e) to 24 (c) is displayed. Display means capable of starting display of at least the first display during the display period)
The display means displays a second period (for example, a period during which the button accepting animation 1 in which the chance button image shown in FIGS. 20C to 20E is “default” is displayed, FIGS. 22C to 22E. ) During the period when the button accepting animation 1 with the chance button image “Liquor” is displayed, the button accepting animation 2 with the chance button image “family crest” shown in FIGS. 24D to 24E is displayed. Display means capable of starting display of at least the second display in the period),
The display means is display means capable of starting display of at least the third display in the second period,
The second display is a display prompting the player to at least operate the operation means,
The third display is a display that prompts the player to at least operate the operation means,
At least a part of the display mode of the third display (for example, the display mode of the button accepting animation 1 in which the chance button images shown in FIGS. 20C to 20E are “default”) is the second display. (E.g., the chance button image shown in FIGS. 22C to 22E is the “Sake” button reception animation 1), the chance button images shown in FIGS. 24D to 24E are “ At least a portion of the “family crest” button accepting animation 2 presentation mode) is a different display mode,
The second period is a period during which the accepting unit can accept at least an operation to the operation unit.
The second period is a period at least after the first period.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, an image for notifying that the operation is promoted is displayed before displaying an image that prompts the player to perform the operation. Since there are a plurality of patterns in the image that prompts the operation to be displayed after this image is displayed, it is possible to improve the interest of the game table by performing various displays. By performing the first display, the player may be able to detect in advance that the acceptance of the operation to the operation means is started. In addition, it is possible to surprise the player who thought that the second display was displayed after the first display, and to the player who thought that the third display was displayed after the first display. You may be able to

(2) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display is a display including at least an animation;
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, since the operation to the operation means is not accepted during the first period, the player may easily carry the hand. By displaying the display as an animation, the player's hand-held wing may be reduced. Further, by displaying the animation in which the display mode continuously changes, it may be possible to keep the player paying attention to the display means until the start of the second period.

(3) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display is a display that can at least notify that at least one of the second display and the third display is displayed.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having this configuration, the first display is a display for notifying that the second display or the third display is displayed. By displaying the first display, it may be more emphasized that the acceptance of the operation to the operation means is started.

(4) The pachinko machine 100,
The second period is a period immediately after the first period.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the concentration power of the player who is paying attention to the display means may be transferred to the operation means as it is without interrupting the concentration power of the player. There are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored by performing the performance continuously.

(5) The pachinko machine 100,
The display means is display means capable of starting display of at least the second display with a first probability (for example, 20%) in the second period,
The display means is a display means capable of starting display of the third display at least with a second probability (for example, 40%) in the second period,
The first probability is a probability that is at least different from the second probability.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the probability that the second display or the third display is performed after the first display is displayed is different. By biasing the probability that the second display or the third display will be displayed, more players will be allowed during the period from the start of the display of the first display to the display of the second display or the third display. Sometimes it can be noticed.

(6) The pachinko machine 100,
At least one of a plurality of symbol variation displays, a symbol display means capable of displaying at least (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a special symbol display device 212, a special symbol 2 display device 214);
An attacker capable of entering at least a game ball (for example, variable prize opening 234, 235);
With
At least one of the plurality of symbol variation displays is a first symbol variation display (for example, a special symbol variation display by the special diagram 1 display device 212),
At least one of the plurality of symbol variation displays is a second symbol variation display (for example, a special symbol variation display by the special diagram 1 display device 212),
The symbol display means is a symbol display means capable of displaying at least a first symbol (for example, a jackpot symbol of a special symbol) after displaying the first symbol variation display,
The symbol display means is a symbol display means capable of displaying at least a second symbol (for example, a special symbol off symbol) after displaying the second symbol variation display,
The attacker is an attacker capable of taking at least an open state after the first symbol is displayed on the symbol display means.
The attacker is an attacker who does not take the open state after the second symbol is displayed on the symbol display means.
In the case where the first symbol fluctuation display is displayed on the symbol display means, the display means is more likely to display the second symbol fluctuation display than the case where the second symbol fluctuation display is displayed on the symbol display means. Display means for displaying the display with high probability,
In the case where the second symbol variation display is displayed on the symbol display unit, the display unit is more likely to display the third symbol variation display than the case where the first symbol variation display is displayed on the symbol display unit. Display means for displaying the display with high probability,
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the case where the second display is displayed is likely to be a big hit. While changing the display mode according to the lottery result, the first display displayed before the second display or the third display is made common so that the second display or the different display mode When the third display is displayed, the player may be surprised more.

(7) The pachinko machine 100,
When the first symbol variation display is displayed on the symbol display unit, the display unit can display at least the second display (for example, the button accepting animation 2 in which the chance button image is “family crest”). Display means,
The display unit is a display unit that does not display the second display when the second symbol variation display is displayed on the symbol display unit.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having this configuration, the second display is a premier display that is displayed only when the jackpot is confirmed. In some cases, it is possible to make the player pay more attention by sharing the second display that is determined to be a big hit and the first display that is displayed before the other display is performed.

(8) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display is a chance button in which at least a part of the operation means is displayed (for example, the chance button image shown in FIGS. 19D to 20B is displayed as the “default” button introduction animation 2). Image 740, a chance button image 740 in which the chance button images shown in FIGS. 21 (d) to 22 (b) are displayed as the “default” button introduction animation 2, and shown in FIGS. 23 (e) to 24 (c). The chance button image is a display including at least a chance button image 800) displayed by the button introduction animation 3 of “family crest”.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having this configuration, the first display includes at least a part of the operation means. Emphasizing that the acceptance of the operation to the operation means is started by intentionally displaying at least a part of the operation means in the first display that is displayed in the first period in which the operation to the operation means is not accepted. There are cases where it is possible.

(9) The pachinko machine 100,
The first period is a period in which the accepting unit does not accept an operation to the operating unit.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having this configuration, an operation on the operation means is not accepted in the first period in which the first display is displayed. In some cases, during a period in which an operation to the operation unit is not accepted, notification that raises interest in the operation unit may be performed to prevent an erroneous operation or the like during a period in which an operation to the operation unit is actually accepted. By adopting a configuration that prompts an erroneous operation during a period in which the operation is not accepted and failing in advance, there is a case where the subsequent operation becomes cautious, and an erroneous operation can be prevented in the period in which the operation is actually accepted.

(10) The pachinko machine 100,
The display means can at least start displaying the first display in a third period (for example, a period in which the accepting means does not accept an operation to the operating means and a period at least after the second period). Display means,
The display means is a display means that does not start display of the second display in the fourth period,
The display means is a display means that does not start display of the third display in the fourth period,
The fourth period is a period in which the accepting unit does not accept an operation to the operating unit,
The fourth period is a period at least after the third period.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the second display and the third display may not be displayed even though the first display is displayed. While the display that increases the interest in the operation means is performed, the period for actually operating the operation means is not generated, and further, the display regarding the operation means is not displayed. It may be possible to increase interest.

(11) The pachinko machine 100,
The display means is a display capable of at least starting display of the fourth display in a fifth period (for example, a period in which the accepting means does not accept an operation to the operating means and a period at least after the fourth period). Means,
The display means is display means capable of starting display of at least one of the second display and the third display in a sixth period,
The fourth display is a display different from the first display in at least a part of the display mode,
The sixth period is a period during which the accepting unit can accept at least an operation to the operation unit,
The sixth period is a period at least later than the fifth period.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the second display or the third display may be displayed even after a display other than the first display is displayed. Although the display mode of the display displayed in the foreground is different, the display during the period in which the operation to the operation means is accepted is common, so that it is possible to surprise the player mainly. In some cases, the player can be focused on both the period in which no operation is accepted and the period in which an operation on the operation means is accepted.

(12-1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is
Display means capable of displaying at least one of the plurality of displays (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
An operation means (for example, a chance button 136) at least operable by the player;
Accepting means (for example, a chance button sensor 426) capable of accepting at least an operation to the operating means;
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the plurality of displays is a first display (for example, a button introduction animation 1 in which the chance button image is “default” and a button introduction animation 3 in which the chance button image is “family crest”),
At least one of the plurality of displays is a second display (for example, a button introduction animation 2 in which the chance button image is “default”),
At least one of the plurality of displays is a third display (for example, a button accepting animation 1 with a chance button image “default” and a button accepting animation 2 with a chance button image “family crest”),
The display mode of the first display (for example, the display mode of the button introduction animation 1 in which the chance button image shown in FIGS. 17D to 17G is “default”, FIGS. 23E to 24C). At least a portion of the button introduction animation 3 in which the chance button image shown is “family crest” is a display mode of the second display (for example, the chance button image shown in FIGS. 19D to 20B). Is a display mode that is at least different from at least a portion of the button introduction animation 2 of “default”.
The first display is a period before the period when the accepting means can accept at least an operation to the operating means (hereinafter referred to as “first period”) (for example, FIG. 17D). The button introduction animation 2 with the chance button image “default” shown in FIGS. 19D to 20B is displayed during the period when the button introduction animation 1 with the chance button image “default” shown in FIG. The display can be started at least during the display period, the chance button image shown in FIG. 23 (e) to FIG.
The second display is a display that can be displayed at least during the first period,
The third display is a period during which the accepting means can accept at least an operation on the operating means (hereinafter referred to as “second period”) (for example, in FIGS. 17H to 18B). A period during which the button accepting animation 1 whose chance button image is “default” is displayed, a period during which the button accepting animation 1 whose chance button image is “default” shown in FIGS. The chance button images shown in FIGS. 24D to 24E are displays that can be displayed at least during the period during which the “family crest” button accepting animation 2 is displayed).

(12-2) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment
Display means capable of displaying at least one of the plurality of displays (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
An operation means (for example, a chance button 136) at least operable by the player;
Accepting means (for example, a chance button sensor 426) capable of accepting at least an operation to the operating means;
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the plurality of displays is a first display (for example, a button introduction animation 1 in which the chance button image is “default” and a button introduction animation 3 in which the chance button image is “family crest”),
At least one of the plurality of displays is a second display (for example, a button introduction animation 2 in which the chance button image is “default”),
At least one of the plurality of displays is a third display (for example, a button accepting animation 1 with a chance button image “default” and a button accepting animation 2 with a chance button image “family crest”),
The display means displays a first period (for example, a period during which the button introduction animation 1 in which the chance button image shown in FIGS. 17D to 17G is “default” is displayed, FIGS. During the period when the button introduction animation 2 whose chance button image is “default” shown in b) is displayed, the button introduction animation 3 whose chance button image is “family crest” shown in FIGS. 23 (e) to 24 (c) is displayed. Display means capable of starting display of at least the first display,
The display means is display means capable of starting display of at least the second display in the first period,
The display means displays a second period (for example, a period during which the button accepting animation 1 in which the chance button image shown in FIGS. 17 (h) to 18 (b) is “default” is displayed, FIGS. During the period when the button accepting animation 1 whose chance button image is “default” shown in (e) is displayed, the button accepting animation 2 whose chance button image is “family crest” shown in FIGS. 24D to 24E is displayed. Display means capable of starting display of the third display at least during the period
The third display is a display that prompts the player to at least operate the operation means,
The display mode of the first display (for example, the display mode of the button introduction animation 1 in which the chance button image shown in FIGS. 17D to 17G is “default”, FIGS. 23E to 24C). At least a portion of the button introduction animation 3 in which the chance button image shown is “family crest” is a display mode of the second display (for example, the chance button image shown in FIGS. 19D to 20B). Is a display mode that is at least different from at least a portion of the button introduction animation 2 of “default”.
The second period is a period during which the accepting unit can accept at least an operation to the operation unit.
The second period is a period at least after the first period.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, there are a plurality of types (patterns) displayed before an image prompting the player to operate the operation means is displayed. The interest of the stand can be improved. Since there are a plurality of displays before the operation reception is started, the player may be able to draw attention to the display and the operation reception itself.

(13) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display is a display including at least an animation,
The second display is a display including at least an animation.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, during the first period, an operation to the operation means is not accepted, so that the player is likely to be hand-held. In this period, the player may be able to reduce hand holding by displaying the first display as an animation. Further, by displaying the animation in which the display mode continuously changes, it may be possible to keep the player paying attention to the display means until the start of the second period.

(14) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display is a display capable of at least notifying that the third display is displayed,
The second display is a display capable of at least notifying that the third display is displayed.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the first display and the second display are displays for notifying that the third display is displayed. By displaying the first display and the second display, it may be possible to further emphasize that the acceptance of the operation to the operation means is started.

(15) The pachinko machine 100,
The second period is a period immediately after the first period.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the concentration power of the player who is paying attention to the display means may be transferred to the operation means as it is without interrupting the concentration power of the player. There are cases where the player is not bored by performing the performance continuously.

(16) The pachinko machine 100,
The probability that the display means displays the third display after displaying the first display is a first probability (for example, 40%),
The probability that the display means displays the third display after displaying the second display is a second probability (for example, 30%),
The first probability is at least different from the second probability.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the probability that the third display is displayed after the first display is different from the probability that the third display is displayed after the second display. By biasing the probability that the third display will be displayed after the first display and the probability that the third display will be displayed after the second display, the first display or the second display In some cases, the player can be more focused during the period from the start to the third display.

(17) The pachinko machine 100,
At least one of a plurality of symbol variation displays, a symbol display means capable of displaying at least (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a special symbol display device 212, a special symbol 2 display device 214);
An attacker capable of entering at least a game ball (for example, variable prize opening 234, 235);
With
At least one of the plurality of symbol variation displays is a first symbol variation display (for example, a special symbol variation display by the special diagram 1 display device 212),
At least one of the plurality of symbol variation displays is a second symbol variation display (for example, a special symbol variation display by the special diagram 1 display device 212),
The symbol display means is a symbol display means capable of displaying at least a first symbol (for example, a jackpot symbol of a special symbol) after displaying the first symbol variation display,
The symbol display means is a symbol display means capable of displaying at least a second symbol (for example, a special symbol off symbol) after displaying the second symbol variation display,
The attacker is an attacker capable of taking at least an open state after the first symbol is displayed on the symbol display means.
The attacker is an attacker who does not take the open state after the second symbol is displayed on the symbol display means.
In the case where the first symbol variation display is displayed on the symbol display unit, the display unit is more likely to display the first symbol variation display than the case where the second symbol variation display is displayed on the symbol display unit. Display means for displaying the display with high probability,
In the case where the second symbol variation display is displayed on the symbol display unit, the display unit is more likely to display the second symbol variation display than the case where the first symbol variation display is displayed on the symbol display unit. Display means for displaying the display with high probability,
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the case where the first display is displayed is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the second display is displayed. The third display that is displayed after the first display or the second display is performed while changing the display mode of the first display and the display mode of the second display according to the lottery result is common. Although it is set as a display mode, when the determination result of the special figure variation game is different, the player may be surprised more when the determination result is displayed.

(18) The pachinko machine 100,
The display means can display at least the first display (for example, the button introduction animation 3 in which the chance button image is “family crest”) when the first symbol variation display is displayed on the symbol display means. Display means,
The display unit is a display unit that does not display the first display when the second symbol variation display is displayed on the symbol display unit.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having this configuration, the first display is a premier display that is displayed only when the jackpot is confirmed. While determining the success / failure determination result of the special figure variable game as a common display mode for the first display that is determined to be the big hit and the third display that is displayed after the other display is performed, There is a case where the player can be more noticed.

(19) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display is a chance button image 740 in which at least a part of the operation means is displayed (for example, a chance button image 740 in which the chance button images shown in FIGS. 17D to 17G are “default”). 23 (e) to FIG. 24 (c) is a display including at least a chance button image 800) displayed with the button introduction animation 3 of “family crest”.
The second display is a display of at least a part of the operation means (chance button image 740 in which the chance button image shown in FIG. 19D to FIG. 20B is displayed as the “default” button introduction animation 2. )
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the first display and the second display include at least a part of the operation means. By accepting at least a part of the operation means in the first display or the second display that is displayed in the first period in which an operation to the operation means is not accepted, acceptance of the operation to the operation means is started. Sometimes it can be emphasized.

(20) The pachinko machine 100,
The first period is a period in which the accepting unit does not accept an operation to the operating unit.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the first display or the second display is displayed during a period in which an operation to the operation unit is not accepted, and notification is made to increase interest in the operation unit. Thus, there may be a case where an erroneous operation or the like during a period in which an operation to the operation means is actually accepted can be prevented. By adopting a configuration that prompts an erroneous operation during a period in which the operation is not accepted and failing in advance, there is a case where the subsequent operation becomes cautious, and an erroneous operation can be prevented in the period in which the operation is actually accepted.

(21) The pachinko machine 100,
The display means can at least start displaying the first display in a third period (for example, a period in which the accepting means does not accept an operation to the operating means and a period at least after the second period). Display means,
The display means is display means capable of starting display of at least the second display in the third period,
The display means is a display means that does not start display of the third display in the fourth period,
The fourth period is a period in which the accepting unit does not accept an operation to the operating unit,
The fourth period is a period at least after the third period.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the third display may not be displayed after the first display or the second display is displayed. On the contrary, the player's operation means can be displayed by increasing the interest in the operation means while not generating a period for actually operating the operation means and further displaying no display relating to the operation means. May increase your interest in.

(22) The pachinko machine 100,
The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the first display over a first time (for example, 1 second) in the first period,
The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the second display over a second time (for example, 2 seconds) in the first period,
The first time is at least different from the second time.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having this configuration, the first display and the second display have different display scales (required display time). Thereby, the interest may be improved.
(A1)
A symbol display means (for example, the special symbol 1 display device 212) capable of executing symbol variation display;
Display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing a plurality of types of display;
Operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, a chance button 136);
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of display is a display (hereinafter referred to as “pre-reception display” (for example, button introduction animation)) performed before the player receives an operation.
One of the plurality of types of display is a display that is performed during operation reception by the player (hereinafter referred to as “display during reception” (for example, animation during button reception)),
The display means refers to an image showing the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “first operation part image” (for example, “default” chance button image shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B)). Displayable means,
The display means refers to one image indicating the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “second operation part image” (for example, a “sake” chance button image shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B)). Displayable means,
The first operation unit image and the second operation unit image are different display modes,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a first pre-reception animation including a first scene (for example, the button introduction animation 1 shown in FIGS. 17 (e) to (g)) as the pre-reception display,
The display means can display, as the pre-reception display, a second pre-reception animation including the first scene (for example, button introduction animation 2 shown in FIGS. 19D to 20B). And
The first pre-reception animation may include a second scene,
The first pre-reception animation may not include the second scene,
The second pre-reception animation may include the second scene,
The second pre-reception anime may not include the second scene,
One effect display in the second pre-acceptance animation (for example, an effect display in which a plurality of villagers shown in FIG. 19D to FIG. 20B appear from the screen edge and move to the center with a chance button) , A production display that is not performed in the first pre-reception animation,
The first scene is a scene in which the first operation unit image is displayed and the second operation unit image is not displayed.
The second scene is a scene in which the second operation unit image is displayed and the first operation unit image is not displayed.
When the second scene is displayed as the pre-reception display, the second scene is displayed after the first scene is displayed (for example, FIG. 25 (d) ) To FIG. 26 (h), after the first scene in which the “default” chance button image 740 is displayed, the second scene in which the oval 837 is placed on the chance button image 740 is displayed. )
The probability that the second pre-reception animation including the second scene is displayed is higher than the probability that the first pre-reception animation including the second scene is displayed (for example, the second pre-reception animation including the second scene). The probability that the button introduction animation 2 in which the display mode of the chance button image includes “sake” is displayed in the second scene is higher than the button introduction animation 1 in which the display mode of the chance button image includes “sake” in the scene. High (the display probabilities of the button introduction animations 1 and 2 displayed before the button receiving animation 1 may be biased (see paragraph “0271”)))
When the pre-reception display that does not include the second scene is performed, the display including the first operation unit image (hereinafter referred to as “first reception display”) (for example, FIG. 17). (H) -chance button image shown in FIG. 18 (b) is referred to as “default button accepting animation 1)”).
When the pre-reception display including the second scene is performed, the display including the second operation unit image (hereinafter referred to as “second reception display”) (for example, FIG. 22 ( c) to (e) are referred to as “Sake” button accepting animation 1). ”(see, for example, FIGS. 26 (h) to 27 (a)). ,
In the symbol variation display, the second receiving display is displayed and the first receiving display is displayed rather than the case where the first receiving display is displayed and the second receiving display is not displayed. In the case where it is not displayed, the big hit symbol pattern is more easily confirmed and displayed after the symbol variation display (for example, as shown in FIG. 16B, button accepting animation 1 in which the chance button image is “default”). The game table is characterized in that the jackpot symbol pattern is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the button button animation “Sake” is received than when the chance button image is displayed.
(A2)
The game stand according to A1 above,
When the second scene is displayed as the pre-reception display, after the first scene is displayed, another one or more scenes are displayed, and then the second scene is displayed. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 25 (d) to 26 (h), after the first scene in which the “default” chance button image 740 is displayed, Yoshimune 810 is a box of thousands. Another scene that throws 820 on the chance button image 740 is displayed, followed by a second scene in which an oval 837 is placed on the chance button image 740),
A game stand characterized by that.
(A3)
A gaming table according to A1 or A2, above.
The in-reception display is a display performed immediately after the pre-reception display (see, for example, FIGS. 17G to 17H, paragraph “0244”).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A4)
The game stand according to any one of A1 to A3 above,
The display means refers to an image showing the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “third operation section image” (for example, a “family crest” chance button image shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B)). Displayable means,
The first operation unit image and the third operation unit image are different display modes,
The second operation unit image and the third operation unit image are different display modes.
A game stand characterized by that.
(A5)
The game stand according to A4 above,
The display means uses a third pre-reception animation that does not include the first scene as the pre-reception display (for example, a button whose chance button image shown in FIGS. 23E to 24C is “family crest”) It is a means that can display the introductory animation 3),
The third pre-acceptance animation is an animation including the third operation unit image.
A game stand characterized by that.
(A6)
The game stand according to A5 above,
When the third pre-acceptance animation is displayed, the display including the third operation unit image as the in-reception display (hereinafter, “third in-reception display” (for example, FIG. 24D) ~ (E), the chance button image is called “family crest” button accepting animation 2))).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A7)
The game stand according to A6 above,
The third in-reception display is a display that is performed only when the third pre-reception animation is displayed (see, for example, paragraph “0325”, FIGS. 16A and 16B).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A8)
The game stand according to any one of A4 to A7 above,
The third operation part image is an image including a part of the operation means (for example, see paragraphs “0215” and “0221”).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A9)
The game stand according to any one of A1 to A8 above,
The first operation unit image is an image including a part of the operation means (for example, see paragraphs “0215” and “0221”),
The second operation part image is an image including a part of the operation means (for example, see paragraphs “0215” and “0221”).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A10)
The game stand according to any one of A1 to A9,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A11)
The game stand according to any one of A1 to A9,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1000).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B1)
A symbol display means (for example, the special symbol 1 display device 212) capable of executing symbol variation display;
Display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing a plurality of types of display;
Operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, a chance button 136);
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of display is a display (hereinafter referred to as “pre-reception display” (for example, button introduction animation)) performed before the player receives an operation.
The display means refers to an image showing the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “first operation part image” (for example, “default” chance button image shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B)). Displayable means,
The display means refers to one image indicating the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “second operation part image” (for example, a “sake” chance button image shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B)). Displayable means,
The first operation unit image and the second operation unit image are different display modes,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a first pre-reception animation including a first scene (for example, the button introduction animation 1 shown in FIGS. 17 (e) to (g)) as the pre-reception display,
The first pre-reception animation may include a second scene,
The first scene is a scene in which the first operation unit image is displayed and the second operation unit image is not displayed.
The second scene is a scene in which the second operation unit image is displayed and the first operation unit image is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(B2)
A gaming table according to B1,
The operation means indicated by the first operation portion image and the operation means indicated by the second operation portion image are the same operation means (for example, the chance button 136).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B3)
A gaming table according to B2,
One of the plurality of types of display is a display that is performed during operation reception by the player (hereinafter referred to as “display during reception” (for example, animation during button reception)),
The display means can display, as the pre-reception display, a second pre-reception animation including the first scene (for example, button introduction animation 2 shown in FIGS. 19D to 20B). And
The first pre-reception animation may not include the second scene,
The second pre-reception animation may include the second scene,
The second pre-reception anime may not include the second scene,
One effect display in the second pre-reception animation (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19D to 20A), a plurality of villagers carry chance buttons and appear from the screen edge and move to the center. Display) is an effect display that is not performed in the first pre-reception animation,
When the second scene is displayed as the pre-reception display, the second scene is displayed after the first scene is displayed (for example, FIG. 25 (d) ) To FIG. 26 (h), after the first scene in which the “default” chance button image 740 is displayed, the second scene in which the oval 837 is placed on the chance button image 740 is displayed. )
The probability that the second pre-reception animation including the second scene is displayed is higher than the probability that the first pre-reception animation including the second scene is displayed (for example, the second pre-reception animation including the second scene). The probability that the button introduction animation 2 in which the display mode of the chance button image includes “sake” is displayed in the second scene is higher than the button introduction animation 1 in which the display mode of the chance button image includes “sake” in the scene. High (the display probabilities of the button introduction animations 1 and 2 displayed before the button receiving animation 1 may be biased (see paragraph “0271”)))
When the pre-reception display that does not include the second scene is performed, the display including the first operation unit image (hereinafter referred to as “first reception display”) (for example, FIG. 17). (H) -chance button image shown in FIG. 18 (b) is referred to as “default button accepting animation 1)”).
When the pre-reception display including the second scene is performed, the display including the second operation unit image (hereinafter referred to as “second reception display”) (for example, FIG. 22 ( The chance button images shown in c) to (e) are called “Liquor” button accepting animation 1).)
In the symbol variation display, the second receiving display is displayed and the first receiving display is displayed rather than the case where the first receiving display is displayed and the second receiving display is not displayed. In the case where it is not displayed, the big hit symbol pattern is more easily confirmed and displayed after the symbol variation display (for example, as shown in FIG. 16B, button accepting animation 1 in which the chance button image is “default”). If the chance button image is the “Sake” button accepting animation 1 is displayed, the jackpot symbol pattern is more likely to be confirmed and displayed)
A game stand characterized by that.
(B4)
A gaming table according to B3,
The in-reception display is a display performed immediately after the pre-reception display (see, for example, FIGS. 17G to 17H, paragraph “0244”).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B5)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B4,
When the second scene is displayed as the pre-reception display, after the first scene is displayed, another one or more scenes are displayed, and then the second scene is displayed. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 25 (d) to 26 (h), after the first scene in which the “default” chance button image 740 is displayed, Yoshimune 810 is a box of thousands. Another scene that throws 820 on the chance button image 740 is displayed, followed by a second scene in which an oval 837 is placed on the chance button image 740),
A game stand characterized by that.
(B6)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B5,
The first operation unit image is an image including a part of the operation means (see, for example, paragraphs “0216” and “0222”),
The second operation part image is an image including a part of the operation means (for example, see paragraphs “0219” and “0224”).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B7)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B6,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by that.
(B8)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B6,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1000).
A game stand characterized by that.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be made.
For example, a specific operation (for example, a hidden command) by the player may be accepted while the button introduction animation is displayed. Specifically, operation A (normal pressing) is not accepted, but operation B (for example, “normal pressing is performed three times and then long press is performed once for 5 seconds”) is accepted as a hidden command. The operation corresponding to the operation B may be performed.

  Further, the button introduction animation may be notified as a pre-reading notice. In addition, the button introduction animation may be displayed over a plurality of special figure variable games.

  In addition, at least a part of the display mode of the first display displayed in the first period in which the operation to the operation unit is not accepted is displayed in the second period in which the operation to the operation unit is accepted. May be shared with at least a part of the display mode of the third display.

  Further, at least one of the second display and the third display may not be displayed by animation. For example, the display when the operation is not accepted may be an animation, and the display when the operation is accepted may not be an animation. Further, after the fourth display is displayed, only one of the second display and the third display may be displayed and the other may not be displayed.

  In addition, the execution period of the button introduction animation may be longer than the operation effective period of the operation means.

  Further, there may be a case where a plurality of operation means can be operated after the display of one button introduction animation. For example, a plurality of operations by continuous hits as shown in FIG. 32 may be performed, or a plurality of images imitating the operation means are displayed at the time of displaying the button introduction animation, and as many operation means as the number displayed during the operation effective period are displayed. It may be possible to operate.

  In addition, even when the number of times of operating the operation means during the operation effective period is different, the same button introduction animation may be displayed, or when the number of times of operating the operation means is different during the operation effective period, A different button introduction animation may be displayed for each number of times. Moreover, when prompting the operation of the operation means a plurality of times during the same operation effective period, the production mode may be varied for each number of times.

  Further, even when an operation means that is not prompted to be operated is operated during the operation effective period, the same operation as when the operation means is operated may be performed. For example, even though there are a plurality of operation means for which the operation is valid during the operation valid period, the button introduction animation and the operation acceptance display only display for one operation means, and do not display for the other operation means. You may do it.

Further, at least one of the first display, the second display, the third display, etc., any one or more, or all of them may be a display that prompts the player to operate the operation means. May be displayed as long as it is displayed during at least a part of the period during which the message can be received. Alternatively, it may be a display that is displayed at least during the entire period during which the operation means can accept the operation. The first display may be displayed during a period other than the period during which the operation means can accept the operation. For example, the display may be configured to be displayed before the period when the operation means can accept the operation, or after the period when the operation means can accept the operation ends. It may be configured.
At least one of the first display, the second display, the third display, etc., any of the plurality, or all of them may be a display that is displayed during a period that does not include a period during which the operation means can accept the operation. There is a case.

  In addition, at least one of the first display, the second display, the third display, etc., any one of the plurality, or all of them may be a display including an image of the operation means. For example, if the operation means is a push button type, the display including the button image may be the display. If the operation means is the lever type, the display may include the lever image. At this time, the color and shape of the operation means may be different from part or all of the color and shape of the display (for example, an image of a button or an image of a lever).

[Second Embodiment]
Next, a pachinko machine 100 according to a second embodiment of the present invention will be described. About the structure of the pachinko machine 100 by this Embodiment, since it is the same as that of the pachinko machine 100 by 1st Embodiment, description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a button introduction animation is displayed as a notice of a special figure change game (for example, a notice of change, a pre-read notice). Further, the button introduction animation notifies that an operation reception period (button reception period, operation valid period) during which the operation of the chance button 136 is received is started thereafter. In the operation acceptance period, a button acceptance animation is displayed that prompts the player to operate (press) the chance button 136. When the chance button 136 is pressed (operated) while the button accepting animation is being executed (during the operation accepting period), an animation after receiving the button and a cut-in effect (button notice) are executed. As with the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment performs a lottery process for the button introduction animation, the button receiving animation, and the button receiving animation.

  Next, a specific example of the special figure variable game effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The gaming state shown in FIGS. 36 to 46 is a special figure low probability state and a normal figure low probability state (non-electric support state).

Example 1
FIG. 36 shows an example of effects produced by Example 1 of the present embodiment in time series. In FIG. 36 and each figure described later, the relative arrangement relationship of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and the special figure 2 display device 214 is illustrated. 3 is shown differently. 36 and each figure to be described later, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are shown side by side on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and below that, the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure are displayed. Two display devices 214 are shown side by side. In addition, the extinguishing portions of the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are shown in white, and the lighting portions are shown in black. In addition, the state in which all segments are represented in white in the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214 indicates that the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is performed.

  A square variation icon display area 870 is provided at the lower left of the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the variation icon display area 870, one variation icon can be displayed, and the determination result of the special figure variation game (the variation) is notified with a predetermined reliability (the variation notification) according to the display mode of the variation icon. It is possible. The variation icon may be displayed in a display size (for example, a display size larger than the hold icon) different from the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 890 described later. This may facilitate identification of the variation icon and the hold icon.

  Further, a horizontally long area below the effect display area 208d and adjacent to the right side of the variable icon display area 870 is a hold icon display area 890. In the hold icon display area 890, one or more hold icons can be displayed. In the hold icon display area 890, it is possible to notify the hold number of the special figure variable game according to the number of hold icons. In addition, depending on the display mode of each hold icon, it is possible to notify (pre-reading advance notice) the determination result of whether or not the special figure variation game is held with a predetermined reliability. In the present embodiment, the hold icon display area 890 can display a maximum of four hold icons, and the four areas of the first area, the second area, the third area, and the fourth area from left to right. It is roughly divided. Each area of the first area to the fourth area corresponds to the first to fourth hold orders, respectively. That is, the first area can display a hold icon corresponding to the earliest (most recently stored) hold 1, and similarly, the second to fourth areas have the second to fourth hold. The hold icons corresponding to 2 to 4 can be displayed. In the present embodiment, numerals 1 to 4 are displayed in the first area to the fourth area of the hold icon display area 890, respectively, and the positions of the first area to the fourth area are clearly indicated by the displayed numbers. However, the location of the first region to the fourth region may be omitted. Further, in the hold icon display area 890 of the present embodiment, only the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed, but the hold icon of the special figure 2 may be displayed together.

  A circular fourth symbol display area 912 capable of displaying the fourth symbol is provided at the lower right corner of the image display area (on the right side of the hold icon display area 890). The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating whether or not a special figure variable game is being executed. During the execution of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 variable game, the 4th symbol of the white circle and the 4th symbol of the black circle are alternately displayed as if the 4th symbol display area 912 is flashing (hereinafter, “ In addition, in the present embodiment, whether or not a special figure variable game is successful can be notified in the fourth symbol display area 912. When the determination result is a big hit, the fourth symbol display area 912 is displayed in a red circle, and the fourth symbol display area 912 is displayed when the determination result of the special figure variation game is out of place. The fourth blue circle pattern is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 36A shows a state after the end of the special figure 1 variable game. As shown in FIG. 36 (a), the special figure G (offset symbol) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. The special figure 2 display device 214 displays a special figure d (out-of-order symbol) that is a stop symbol of the latest special figure 2 variable game. In addition, the first and second LEDs from the left of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 are respectively turned on to notify that the number of the active holding balls in the special figure 1 (the number of holdings in the special figure 1) is two. It is informed that all the LEDs of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are turned off and the number of the operation holding balls in the special figure 2 (the number of holdings in the special figure 2) is zero.

  In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination “decoration 3- "Decoration 8-Decoration 5" is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 912 is a blue fourth symbol (indicated by a right-up hatching in the figure) for notifying the deviation. On hold icon display area 890, hold icons 900 and 902 are displayed, respectively. The display mode of the hold icons 900 and 902 is a white circular display mode. In the present embodiment, the white circular display mode is set as the default display mode. In the variation icon display area 870, a deletion animation of the variation icon 880 is executed. For example, a mode in which the transmittance (transparency) of the variable icon gradually increases is set as the default mode of the erase animation. In FIG. 36A, the variation icon 880 is deleted in the default mode.

  FIG. 36B shows a state in which the hold 1 has been consumed and the special figure 1 variable game has started. The special symbol 1 display device 212 executes the special symbol 1 variation display, the left middle right symbol display regions 208a to 208c execute the decorative symbol variation display, and the fourth symbol display region 912 displays the fourth symbol variation display. It is running. In FIG. 36 and each figure to be described later, the variation of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c is represented by a downward bold white arrow. Further, the second LED from the left of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is turned off, and it is notified that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has decreased by 1 and the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has become 1. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 notifies that the special figure 1 holding has decreased almost simultaneously with the start of the special figure 1 variable game.

  When the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the movement between the hold / fluctuation icons is performed in the variable icon display area 870 and the hold icon display area 890 of the decorative symbol display device 208. Animation, animation of moving hold icon is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 900 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 890 becomes the change icon 882 and moves to the change icon display area 870. In the present embodiment, the hold icon 900 becomes the change icon 882 simultaneously with the start of the change display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the fluctuation icon 882 is a white circle like the hold icon 900. In the hold icon moving animation, the hold icon 902 displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 890 gradually moves to the first area.

  Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 36B, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the following processing. First, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a lottery process for the button introduction animation in the effect control process of step S409, and in this embodiment, the chance button image of “sake” shown in FIG. Decide to run the button introduction animation to display as Next, a lottery process is performed for the button accepting animation, and in this embodiment, it is determined to execute the button accepting animation that displays the chance button image of “sake” shown in FIG. In addition, a lottery process is performed for the post-button reception animation that is displayed after the execution of the button-in-progress animation. In this embodiment, the chance button image is displayed with the chance button image of “Sake” with the letters “Sake” attached. Decide to execute the animation after receiving the button. Furthermore, a lottery process is performed on the cut-in image displayed in the cut-in effect (button notice) executed after the completion of the animation after the button is received. In this embodiment, “Sake” with the letters “Sake” is attached. It is determined to display a cut-in image including the chance button image, the princess character image, and the character string “Drink and cheer up!”.

  FIG. 36 (c) shows a state in which the super reach effect is started during the special figure 1 variable game. When the super reach effect is started, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c have a relatively small display area and move to the right corner in the image display area. In the state shown in FIG. 36C, the fluctuation icon 882 has completed the movement into the fluctuation icon display area 870, and the hold icon 902 has completed the movement of the hold icon display area 890 to the first area. The movement animation between the hold / variation icons and the movement animation of the hold icons are finished.

  In this embodiment, when the super reach production is started, the button introduction animation is first started. A character image of Yoshimune who runs looking for a treasure chest (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “Yoshimune”) is displayed on the right side of the effect display area 208d. Yoshimune finds a treasure chest after a lapse of time from the start of the button introduction animation. FIG. 36C shows a state where Yoshimune has found an image of a treasure chest (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “treasure chest”) displayed on the center left side of the effect display area 208d. In addition, the button introduction animation of this embodiment is displayed as a notice about the special figure 1 variable game (notice of the change).

  FIG. 36D shows a state where a treasure box discovered by Yoshimune is opened and a chance button image 930 of “sake” has popped out of the treasure box. When Yoshimune finds a treasure box, as shown in FIG. 36 (e), Yoshimune with a chance button image 930 of “Sake” is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d, and “Sake Button” is displayed on the right side of Yoshimune. "Is displayed, and the character string" GET! "Is displayed on the left side of Yoshimune. Thereby, the player is notified that the item's sake button has been obtained. In addition, when the sake button is obtained, the opportunity display area 208d has the same display mode as the chance button image displayed within the operation reception period of the chance button 136 to be started thereafter (while the button reception animation is displayed). A button image may be displayed, or an image reminiscent of liquor (for example, an image such as a bottle of sake or a sake bottle) or a character string “Liquor button GET!” May be displayed. In this embodiment, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is not started, but a chance button image 930 of “sake” is displayed. Further, since the operation reception period of the chance button 136 has not started, a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the operation reception period is not displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the liquor button obtained by the button introduction animation is stocked as an item. FIG. 36 (f) shows a state where the chance button image 930 of “alcohol” is moving in a white rectangular frame provided at the upper right of the effect display area 208 d while shining brightly. At this time, the chance button image 930 of “alcohol” may be temporarily invisible.

  FIG. 36G shows a state in which the button introduction animation has been completed. The movement of the “Liquor” chance button image 930 is completed, and the “Liquor” chance button image 930 is displayed in the white rectangular frame at the upper right of the effect display area 208d. Is displayed, and it is notified that the item's sake button is stocked. Further, a sparkling effect image is displayed around a chance button image 930 of “sake” indicating that the item's sake button is stocked. This may make it easier to understand that the item's “liquor” button is stocked.

  In addition, the chance button image 930 of “Liquor” and the character string “During Liquor GET” are used as operation means for notifying that the operation acceptance period of the chance button 136 is started during execution of the special figure 1 variable game. This is a notice indication. Further, the chance button image 930 of “Liquor” and the character string “During Liquor GET” are also a notice for the special figure 1 variable game (notice of the change).

  The “Liquor” chance button image 930 indicating the stock of the liquor button and the character string “Liquor GET in” start the operation reception period in which the “Liquor” chance button image is displayed in the target special figure variable game. This is a notice display relating to the operation means for giving a notice of being performed. The “Liquor” chance button image 930 and “Liquor GET in progress” are notice displays for the special figure 1 variable game related to the hold 1. Further, while the liquor button is stocked, it is an operation invalid period in which the operation acceptance period of the chance button 136 is not started. The size of the notice display related to the operation means during the operation invalidation period may be different from or the same as the size of the image (chance button image) related to the operation means displayed during the operation reception period. .

  In FIG. 36 (h), “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the character string “reach” is displayed in the effect display area 208d below the middle symbol display area 208b. This shows a state in which the reach production in the variable display is started. At the start of reach production in the decorative symbol display, the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c return to their original positions and sizes, and “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The Note that the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed in a vertically swinging manner (sway fluctuation display).

  In this embodiment, the chance button image 930 indicating the stock of the liquor button is displayed on the front side of the “decoration 7” so as to overlap the “decoration 7” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. ing. In this way, other displays (for example, decorative symbols) may be hidden by the notice display (for example, the chance button image 930) related to the operation means.

  In the super reach production of the present embodiment, after the start of the reach production with the decorative design, as shown in FIG. 36 (i), almost the entire image display area of the decorative design display device 208 temporarily changes to black, and then As the specific reach production, a confrontation production (swordsman confrontation) between Yoshimune and the swordsman shown in FIGS. 36 (j) to (q) is started. As shown in FIG. 36 (i), once almost the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 changes to black, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c have a relatively small display area. Moving to the right corner in the image display area, the change icon display area 870 and the hold icon display area 890 disappear, and the change icon 882 and the hold icon 902 are deleted. On the other hand, the chance button image 930 of “Liquor” indicating the stock of the liquor button and the variation display of the fourth pattern are continuously displayed. Further, although the character string “During Liquor GET” displayed below the chance button image 930 of “Sake” continues to be displayed, it is displayed in black, and thus cannot be visually recognized. The “Liquor” chance button image 930 indicating the stock of the liquor button may be continuously displayed even when it is difficult to visually recognize other effects such as the change icon and the hold icon.

  FIG. 36 (j) shows a state in which a confrontation effect (swordsman confrontation) between Yoshimune and the swordsman has started. At the start of the confrontation production, first, as shown in FIG. 36 (j), a swordsman character image (hereinafter referred to as “swordsman”) and a character string “swordsman see!” Are displayed. As shown in FIG. 36 (k), an up image of Yoshimune's face is displayed above the effect display area 208d, and an up image of the swordsman's face is displayed below it. An animation of the confrontation scene is displayed.

  During the execution of the confrontation effect, the chance button image 930 of “alcohol” and the character string “during alcoholic GET” are continuously displayed. The chance button image 930 of “sake”, which is a notice display relating to the operation means, and the character string may be continuously displayed until the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is started. On the other hand, during the execution of the confrontation effect, the change icon display area 870 and the hold icon display area 890 disappear, and the change icon 880 and the hold icon 902 are hidden. Thus, at the time of execution of the confrontation effect, the change icon and all the hold icons are hidden.

  FIG. 36 (l) shows a state after the animation of the confrontation scene between Yoshimune and Swordsman is displayed. The fallen Yoshimune is displayed on the right side of the effect display area 208d, and the swordsman with the sword in the sheath is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d.

  After a predetermined time elapses after the confrontation scene ends, as shown in FIG. 36 (m), an effect image in which the entire chance button image 930 of “sake” shines is displayed, and the operation acceptance period is started and stocked. It is suggested that the liquor button is used.

  FIG. 36 (n) shows a state in which the operation acceptance period of the chance button 136 is started. When the operation accepting period of the chance button 136 is started, the execution of the button accepting animation in which the chance button image is “sake” is started. A chance button image 932 of “alcohol” is displayed at substantially the center of the effect display area 208d. The “sake” chance button image 932 is displayed in place of the “sake” chance button image 930. The display mode of at least a part of the “sake” chance button image 930 displayed during the operation invalid period is the same as the display mode of at least a part of the “sake” chance button image 932 displayed during the operation reception period. ing. In this embodiment, the display mode of the “Liquor” chance button image 930 displayed in the operation invalid period is completely the same as the display mode of the “Liquor” chance button image 932 displayed in the operation reception period. Yes. In this way, the display mode of the notice display related to the operation means displayed in the operation invalid period (in this example, the chance button image 930 of “alcohol”) is the notice display related to the operation means displayed in the operation acceptance period ( For example, what is necessary is just to be related with the display mode of the chance button image 932) of “alcohol”.

  When the “Liquor” chance button image 932 is displayed in place of the “Liquor” chance button image 930, the “Liquor” chance button image 930 continuously changes to the “Liquor” chance button image 932. Such a mode may be displayed. In this case, an animation (third display) may be displayed as if the chance button image 930 of “sake” is gradually moving toward the center of the effect display area 208d.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 36 (n), above the chance button image 932 of “alcohol”, a PUSH image 750 and a downward white arrow indicating the pressing direction of the chance button 136 below the PUSH image 750 are displayed. Are displayed. Further, below the chance button image 932, a gauge image 760 indicating an operation reception period during which the operation of the chance button 136 can be received is displayed. These images are displayed to prompt the player to press the chance button 136. The gauge image 760 is an image that is displayed only during the operation reception period of the chance button 136. In this way, there may be an image that is displayed only during the operation reception period of the chance button 136. In addition, when the execution of the button accepting animation whose chance button image is “sake” is started, an animation in which the lid of the sake barrel is broken and alcohol is popping out from inside is displayed.

  FIG. 36 (o) shows a state immediately after the chance button 136 is operated within the operation reception period of the chance button 136. When the chance button 136 is operated during the operation reception period and the operation is received, an animation is started after the button is received, and the “push” character of the chance button image 932 of “alcohol” is changed to “alcohol”. A chance button image 934 of “Sake” is displayed. In this way, the word “push” is displayed on the chance button image 932 displayed during the operation reception period, and the word “sake” is displayed until the chance button image 934 is deleted after the operation is received. The Thus, the player may be notified that the operation to the chance button 136 has been received by changing the display mode of the notice display relating to the operation means after the operation is received. In addition, a chance button image 932 of “Sake” during the operation reception period, which is an operation promotion display of the chance button 136, and a chance of “Sake” after reception of an operation, which is an effect display displayed based on the operation of the chance button 136. The button image 934 may have at least a part of the same display mode. In the present embodiment, the “sake” chance button image 932 and the “sake” chance button image 934 have a common sake barrel pattern other than characters. As described above, the display mode of the chance button image 932 of “Liquor” which is an operation promotion display of the chance button 136 and the display of the chance button image 934 of “Liquor” displayed based on the operation of the chance button 136. The aspect may be related.

  FIG. 36 (p) shows a state in which the cut-in effect is executed based on the operation of the chance button 136. In the cut-in effect of the present embodiment, the chance button image 934 of “Sake” is on the left side of the effect display area 208d, the character image of the princess is on the right side, and the characters “Drink and cheer up!” A cut-in image 920 (first notification) including a column is displayed.

  Thus, the decorative symbol display device 208 can display at least the cut-in image 920 as the first notification when the operation of the chance button 136 is received during the operation reception period. Further, the pachinko machine 100 may output not only the cut-in image 920 but also a predetermined sound or sound effect from the speaker 120 as the first notification.

  As described above, in this embodiment, based on the operation of the chance button 136 during the operation reception period, the sake button stocked as an item is used for Yoshimune, and Yoshimune once lost in the confrontation with the swordsman is revived. As a result, as shown in FIG. 36 (q), an animation of the scene where the revived Yoshimune wins the swordsman (revival effect) is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and “decoration 7” is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. A temporary stop is displayed, and it is suggested that a win is won in the special figure 1 variable game.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the super reach effect ends, and the special figure 1 variable game ends. When the special figure 1 variable game is ended, as shown in FIG. 36 (r), the special figure A (15R special big hit symbol) is stopped on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed. Returns to the initial position and size of the fluctuation, and “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Thereby, it is notified that 15R special big hit was won in the special figure 1 variable game. Further, in the fourth symbol display area 912, a red fourth symbol (indicated by a right-downward hatching in the figure) is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the big win is won in the special figure 1 variable game. Further, when the special figure 1 variable game is ended, the change icon 882 is deleted. In this example, the variation icon 882 is deleted in a default manner in which the transmittance (transparency) of the variation icon gradually increases.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has at least one of a plurality of displays as a display means capable of displaying at least a decorative symbol display device 208 and at least one of a plurality of notifications capable of at least notification. A decorative symbol display device 208, a speaker 120, a chance button 136 as an operation means that can be operated at least by the player, and a first sub-control unit 400 as a reception means capable of receiving at least an operation on the operation means. ing.

  At least one of the plurality of displays is a chance button image 930, and at least one of the plurality of displays is a chance button image 932. The chance button image 930 is the first display, and the chance button image 932 is the second display. At least one of the plurality of notifications is a first notification. The first notification is a cut-in effect including the cut-in image 920. The decorative design display device 208 can display at least the first display in the first period shown in FIGS. 36D to 36M, and the decorative design display device 208 can display the first display shown in FIG. In the second period, at least the second display can be displayed. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 does not notify the first notification when the first sub-control unit 400 receives an operation on the chance button 136 in the first period. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 can at least start the first notification when the first sub-control unit 400 receives an operation on the chance button 136 in the second period. The second period is an operation reception period in which the first sub-control unit 400 can receive at least an operation on the chance button 136.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the player is made aware of the position and operation method of the operation means by intentionally performing the first display regarding the operation means during a period in which the operation with respect to the operation means is not accepted. May be possible.

  The special figure 1 display device 212 can display at least one of a plurality of symbol variation displays. One of the plurality of symbol variation displays is a second symbol variation display. The second symbol variation display is the special diagram 1 variation game shown in FIGS. 36 (b) to 36 (r). The second period is a period during which the special figure 1 display device 212 displays the second symbol variation display, and the first display is a display displayed as a notice of the second symbol variation display. is there.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, by displaying the first display as a notice of the symbol variation display, it is possible to simultaneously increase the player's interest regarding the operation means and the player's interest regarding the symbol variation display. There are cases where it is possible.

(Example 2-1)
FIGS. 37 and 38 show examples of effects in Example 2-1 of this embodiment in time series. FIG. 37 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure G (offset symbol) is stopped and displayed, and in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, symbol combinations other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit “decoration 6—decoration 1—decoration” are displayed. 7 ”is stopped and the fourth symbol display area 912 is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 912 to notify that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is wrong. The special figure 2 display device 214 displays a special figure d (out-of-order symbol) that is a stop symbol of the latest special figure 2 variable game. In addition, the first to third LEDs from the left of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 are turned on to notify that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is 3, and all the LEDs of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are informed. Is turned off, and it is reported that the number of holds in FIG. 2 is zero.

  Also, hold icons 900, 902, and 904 are displayed in the hold icon display area 890, respectively. The display mode of the hold icons 900 and 902 is a default white circular display mode. The display mode of the hold icon 904 is a blue (indicated by a right-upward hatching) circular display mode.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute a prefetch notice by changing the color of the hold icon. In the prefetch notice with the hold icon, the jackpot reliability is set for each color of the hold icon. The big hit reliability is set to increase in the order of blue, green and red, for example. The default display color white may be a display color that is selected when the prefetching notice is not executed, or a display color that is selected when the prefetching notice is executed with a big hit reliability lower than blue. It may be.

  In the variation icon display area 870, a deletion animation of the variation icon 880 is executed. In FIG. 37A, the variation icon 882 is erased in a default mode in which the transmittance (transparency) of the variation icon gradually increases.

  FIG. 37 (b) shows a state in which the hold 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. The special symbol 1 display device 212 executes the special symbol 1 variation display, the left middle right symbol display regions 208a to 208c execute the decorative symbol variation display, and the fourth symbol display region 912 displays the fourth symbol variation display. It is running. Further, the third LED from the left of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is turned off, and it is notified that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has decreased by 1 and the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has become 2.

  When the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the movement between the hold / fluctuation icons is performed in the variable icon display area 870 and the hold icon display area 890 of the decorative symbol display device 208. Animation, animation of moving hold icon is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 900 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 890 becomes the change icon 882 and moves to the change icon display area 870. In the present embodiment, the hold icon 900 becomes the change icon 882 simultaneously with the start of the change display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the fluctuation icon 882 is a white circle like the hold icon 900. In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icon 902 displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 890 gradually moves to the first area, and the hold icon 904 displayed in the third area gradually. Move to the second area.

  Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 37B, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a lottery process for the button introduction animation in the effect control process of step S409. It is determined to execute the button introduction animation for displaying the “hot” chance button image shown in FIG.

  In this embodiment, the button introduction animation is displayed as a pre-reading notice about the special figure variable game related to the hold 2 indicated by the hold icon 904. In this embodiment, the lottery process for the button introduction animation is executed when the hold order indicated by the hold icon 904 becomes hold 2, but may be executed when the hold is stored. However, it may be executed every time the special figure variable game is started. In addition, in the lottery process for the button introduction animation, information on the prefetch result included in the command sent from the main control unit 300 is used.

  FIG. 37 (c) shows a state in which the button introduction animation is started during the special figure 1 variable game. In the button introduction animation, which button is stocked is notified. When the button introduction animation is started, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c have a relatively small display area and move to the right corner in the image display area. In the state shown in FIG. 37C, the fluctuation icon 882 has completed the movement into the fluctuation icon display area 870, and the hold icon 902 has completed the movement of the hold icon display area 890 to the first area. The hold icon 904 has completed the movement to the second area, and the movement animation between the hold and change icons and the movement animation of the hold icon are finished.

  In this embodiment, when the button introduction animation is started, a character image of Yoshimune who runs looking for a treasure chest is displayed on the right side of the center of the effect display area 208d. Yoshimune finds a treasure chest after a lapse of time from the start of the button introduction animation. FIG. 37 (c) shows a state where Yoshimune has found an image of a treasure box displayed on the left side of the center of the effect display area 208d (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “treasure box”).

  FIG. 37D shows a state in which the treasure box discovered by Yoshimune is opened and a chance button image 936 of “heat” has popped out of the treasure box. When Yoshimune finds a treasure chest, as shown in FIG. 37 (e), Yoshimune with a chance button image 936 of “Heat” is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d, and on the right side of Yoshimune, "Is displayed, and the character string" GET! "Is displayed on the left side of Yoshimune. This informs the player that he has obtained the item's thermal button. In this embodiment, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is not started, but the “hot” chance button image 936 is displayed. Further, since the operation reception period of the chance button 136 has not started, a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the operation reception period is not displayed.

  In this embodiment, the thermal buttons obtained by the button introduction animation are stocked as items. Further, the “heat” button image 936 indicating the heat button is displayed as a pre-reading notice for the special figure variable game related to the hold 2. In addition, the pre-reading notice may be executed not only for the “heat” chance button image 936 but also for other displays as the notice display related to the operation means for the special figure variable game related to the hold 2. For example, the prefetch notice may be executed by displaying the hold icon 904 indicating the hold 2 in a display mode imitating the chance button 136.

  FIG. 37 (f) shows a state where the “hot” chance button image 936 is moving in a white rectangular frame provided at the upper right of the effect display area 208 d while shining brightly. At this time, the chance button image 936 of “heat” may be temporarily invisible.

  FIG. 37 (g) shows a state where the button introduction animation is finished. The movement of the “hot” chance button image 936 is completed, and the “hot” chance button image 936 is displayed in a white rectangular frame provided at the upper right of the effect display area 208d. A character string “medium” is displayed to notify that the thermal button of the item is stocked. A sparkling effect image is displayed around the “hot” chance button image 936.

  In addition, the “heat” chance button image 936 and the character string “in the heat GET” that are the notice display related to the operation means start the operation reception period of the chance button 136 during execution of the special figure variable game related to the hold 2 It is informed that it will be done. Further, the “heat” chance button image 936 and the character string “during heat GET” are also pre-reading notices for the special figure variation game related to the hold 2.

  In addition, while the heat button is being stocked, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is an operation invalid period. The size of the notice display relating to the operation means during the operation invalid period may be different from or the same as the size of the chance button image displayed during the operation reception period.

  FIG. 37 (h) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. The special symbol G (displaced symbol) is stopped and displayed on the special symbol 1 display device 212, the left middle right symbol display regions 208a to 208c return to the initial positions and sizes of the fluctuations, and the left middle right symbol display regions 208a to 208c. “Decoration 4—decoration 9—decoration 10” is stopped and displayed, and the fourth symbol display area 912 is displayed in a blue circle. As a result, it is notified that there has been a shift in the special figure 1 variable game.

  In addition, “decoration 10” in the right symbol display area 208c overlaps with the “hot” chance button image 936 and the character string “in hot GET”, and the “hot” chance button image 936 and “in hot GET”. It is displayed behind the string. In other words, the chance button image 936 of “heat” and the character string “during heat GET” overlap with “decoration 10” in the right symbol display area 208c and are displayed in front of the “decoration 10”. As a result, most of the “decoration 10” is hidden by the “hot” chance button image 936 and cannot be visually recognized.

  As described above, the “hot” chance button image 936 and the character string “in hot GET”, which are the notice display related to the operation means, may be displayed with priority over other displays (for example, decorative symbols). . In addition, the “hot” chance button image 936 displayed in the white rectangular frame is displayed with a relatively high degree of visibility, and the character string “in hot GET” overlaps with “decoration 10”. The visibility is relatively low. In this way, the visibility of one of the notice displays related to the operating means may be displayed high, and the other visibility may be displayed low.

  Further, when the special figure 1 variable game is ended, the change icon 882 is deleted. In this example, the variation icon 882 is deleted in a default manner in which the transmittance (transparency) of the variation icon gradually increases.

  FIG. 37 (i) shows a state in which the hold 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. The special symbol 1 display device 212 executes the special symbol 1 variation display, the left middle right symbol display regions 208a to 208c execute the decorative symbol variation display, and the fourth symbol display region 912 displays the fourth symbol variation display. It is running. Further, the second LED from the left of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is turned off, and it is notified that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has decreased by 1 and the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has become 1.

  When the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the movement between the hold / fluctuation icons is performed in the variable icon display area 870 and the hold icon display area 890 of the decorative symbol display device 208. Animation, animation of moving hold icon is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icon, the hold icon 902 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 890 becomes the change icon 884 and moves to the change icon display area 870. In the present embodiment, the hold icon 902 becomes the change icon 884 simultaneously with the start of the change display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the fluctuation icon 884 is a white circle as with the hold icon 902. The fluctuation icon 884 notifies the fluctuation with the same jackpot reliability as the hold icon 902. In the hold icon moving animation, the hold icon 904 displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 890 gradually moves to the first area.

  Also, prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 37 (i), the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not to execute a promotion animation. The promotion animation is an animation that expects a hold icon or a chance button image to be promoted to a display mode with higher jackpot reliability. In this embodiment, a promotion animation is executed, the hold icon 904 is promoted to a higher-hit display mode, and the “heat” chance button image 936 is promoted to a higher-hit chance button image display mode. It is decided.

  In this embodiment, the promotion animation is displayed as a pre-reading notice about the special figure variable game related to the hold 1 indicated by the hold icon 904. Further, in this embodiment, the lottery process for promotion of the promotion animation, the chance button image, and the promotion of the hold icon is executed when the hold order indicated by the hold icon 904 becomes hold 1, but the hold is performed. May be executed at the start of the special figure variation game. In addition, the lottery processing for promotion of promotion animation, chance button image and hold icon promotion uses information of a prefetch result included in a command sent from the main control unit 300.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 37 (i), the decorative symbol variation display in the right symbol display area 208 c overlaps with the “heat” chance button image 936 and the character string “during heat GET” and “heat”. The chance button image 936 and the character string “During heat GET” are displayed behind the character string. In other words, the chance button image 936 of “heat” and the character string “during heat GET” are displayed on the front side of the variation display of the decorative symbol in a manner overlapping the variation display of the decorative symbol in the right symbol display area 208c. ing. As a result, most of the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the “hot” chance button image 936 and the character string “during hot GET” and cannot be visually recognized.

  In the state shown in FIG. 37 (i), a promotion animation for the hold icon 904 is executed. In the promotion animation of the hold icon of the present embodiment, the effect image 950 is displayed so as to hide the entire hold icon 904 so as to overlap the near side of the hold icon 904. In the center of the effect image 950, a character string “POW” is displayed. The effect image 950 is displayed so as to move together with the hold icon 904 that is moving to the first area. As a result, the hold icon 904 is hidden by the effect image 950, and the entire hold icon 904 becomes invisible.

  FIG. 37 (j) shows a state in which the promotion animation for the hold icon has been completed. The display mode of the hold icon 904 is changed from a blue circle to a green circle (indicated by cross hatching in the drawing). As a result, the hold icon 904 is displayed in green, which has a higher hit reliability than blue. Further, in this embodiment, after the hold icon 904 completes moving to the first area and the hold icon moving animation is finished, the promotion animation for the hold icon is finished and the effect image 950 disappears and changes to green. The held icon 904 is visible. On the other hand, while the hold icon 904 is moving to the first area (in the middle of the hold icon moving animation), the promotion animation for the hold icon ends, the effect image 950 disappears, and the hold icon 904 During movement, the hold icon 904 that has turned green may be visible. In FIG. 37 (j), the variation icon 884 has completed the movement of the variation icon display area 870, and the movement animation between the hold / variation icons has ended.

  In the state shown in FIG. 37 (j), a promotion animation for the chance button image is started. In the promotion animation for the chance button image of the present embodiment, an animation in which the thousand box 820 flies from the upper left of the effect display area 208d toward the “hot” chance button image 936 is displayed. In the present embodiment, when the promotion animation for the chance button image is started, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are relatively small in display area and moved to the right corner in the image display area. To do.

  FIG. 37 (k) shows a state in which the promotion animation for the chance button image is being executed. FIG. 37 (k) shows a state after the thousand-car box 820 collides with the “hot” chance button image 936. When the thousand box 820 collides with the chance button image 936 of “heat”, an effect image 952 including a character string “Docker!” Is started to be displayed. The effect image 952 is displayed so as to overlap the “hot” chance button image 936 so as to hide the “hot” chance button image 936. As a result, the entire chance button image 936 becomes invisible. The effect image 952 is displayed so as not to overlap with the character string “during heat GET”. Thus, even if the visibility of the “hot GET” character string, which is one of the notice displays related to the operation means, is displayed high, and the visibility of the “hot” chance button image 936 is displayed low, Good.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 37 (k), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c return to the initial positions and sizes of the fluctuations, and “decoration 4” is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a as a temporary stop display (swaying). (Variable display). Also, the decorative symbol variation display in the right symbol display area 208 c is displayed on the rear side of the effect image 952. As a result, part of the decorative symbol variation display in the right symbol display area 208c is hidden by the effect image 952, and the visibility of the variation variation of the decoration symbol is reduced.

  When the effect image 952 disappears, the promotion animation for the chance button image ends, and as shown in FIG. 37 (l), a large number of oval frames are displayed in the white rectangular frame at the upper right of the effect display area 208d. Then, a chance button image 938 is displayed in which a thousand boxes with the characters “push” are placed on the pressed surface. The chance button image 938 is in a form of appearance that has a higher reliability than the chance button image 936 of “heat”. As a result, the item's thousand boxes box is stocked, and a character string “in a thousand boxes GET” is displayed below the chance button image 938.

  Further, FIG. 37 (l) shows a state in which “decoration 4” is temporarily stopped (shaking fluctuation display) in the right symbol display area 208c and the reach effect is started. The character string “reach” is displayed in the effect display area 208d below the middle symbol display area 208b, and the reach effect in the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  The “decoration 4” that is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c overlaps with the chance button image 938 and the character string of “Thousand boxes GET”, and after the chance button image 938 and the character string of “Hot GET”. Is displayed on the side. In other words, the chance button image 938 and the character string “in the box” are displayed in front of the “decoration 4” overlapping the “decoration 4” in the right symbol display area 208c. Thereby, most of the “decoration 4” is hidden by the chance button image 938 and cannot be visually recognized. In addition, the chance button image 938 displayed in the white rectangular frame is displayed with a relatively high visibility, and the character string “in the box” gets relatively overlapped with “decoration 4”. The visibility is displayed low. In this way, the visibility of one of the notice displays related to the operating means may be displayed high, and the other visibility may be displayed low.

  The chance button image 938 and the character string “in the 1000-carton box GET” notify the advance notice that the operation acceptance period of the chance button 136 is started during the execution of the special figure variable game related to the hold 1. In addition, the chance button image 938 and the character string “in the 1000-carton box GET” are also a pre-reading notice for the special figure variable game related to the hold 1.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the reach effect, the movement (rotation) speed of the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b becomes slow. As shown in FIG. 37 (m), in the middle symbol display area 208b, “decoration 3” moves downward and “decoration 4” moves downward from above. In the effect display area 208d, a character image of Yoshimune is displayed so as to overlap with the lower left of “Decoration 4” in the right symbol display area 208c. The character image of Yoshimune is displayed in front of “decoration 4” in the right symbol display area 208c, and is displayed so that Yoshimune stares at the variation display of the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b. As a result, the effect of encouraging that “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b is executed.

  Further, instead of the character string “Thousand boxes in GET” below the chance button image 938, a character string “Thousand boxes” may be displayed. A character string indicating which button is stocked may be displayed below the chance button image 938. In addition, instead of the character string “Getting Thousand Boxes”, a character string “Thousand Boxes?” Is displayed to notify that it is not confirmed that the Thousand Box buttons are stocked. (In this example, the chance button image of the thousand boxes may not be displayed in the special figure 1 variable game related to the hold 1 indicated by the hold icon 904. In this case, the chance button image 938 and the character string “Thousand boxes?” Are displayed as a chance button image of a thousand boxes due to the change in the target of the pre-reading notice, so that the operation acceptance period may start. Production.

  FIG. 37 (n) shows a state in which “decoration 5” is temporarily stopped (swaying fluctuation display) in the middle symbol display area 208b. Thereby, in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 4 -decoration 5 -decoration 4” is temporarily stopped (swing fluctuation display). In FIG. 37 (n), the left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the left and right arrows on the left side of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c indicate that “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 4” sways in the up-down direction. Yes.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 37 (n), the character image of Yoshimune has been changed to a disappointed expression display mode. This suggests that there will be a shift in the special figure 1 variable game.

  FIG. 37 (o) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure G (out of symbol) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In the region 912, the fourth blue circle symbol is stopped and displayed. As a result, it is notified that there has been a shift in the special figure 1 variable game.

  In addition, “decoration 4” in the right symbol display area 208c is displayed behind the chance button image 938 and the character string “in the 1000 boxes GET”, overlapping the chance button image 938 and the character string “in the 1000 boxes GET”. ing. In other words, the chance button image 938 and the character string “in the box” are displayed in front of the “decoration 4” overlapping the “decoration 4” in the right symbol display area 208c. Thereby, most of the “decoration 4” is hidden by the chance button image 938 and cannot be visually recognized.

  In this way, the chance button image 938 which is a notice display relating to the operation means and the character string “in the box” can be displayed with priority over other displays (for example, decorative symbols). In addition, the chance button image 938 displayed in the white rectangular frame is displayed with a relatively high visibility, and the character string “in the box” gets relatively overlapped with “decoration 4”. The visibility is displayed low. In this way, the visibility of one of the notice displays related to the operating means may be displayed high, and the other visibility may be displayed low.

  Further, when the special figure 1 variable game is ended, the change icon 884 is deleted. In this example, the variation icon 884 is deleted in a default manner in which the transmittance (transparency) of the variation icon gradually increases.

  FIG. 37 (p) shows a state in which the hold 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. The special symbol 1 display device 212 executes the special symbol 1 variation display, the left middle right symbol display regions 208a to 208c execute the decorative symbol variation display, and the fourth symbol display region 912 displays the fourth symbol variation display. It is running. Further, the first LED from the left of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is turned off, and it is notified that the holding number of the special figure 1 has decreased by 1 and the holding number of the special figure 1 has become zero. Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 37 (p), the first sub-control unit 400 draws the button introduction animation, the button receiving animation, and the button receiving animation in the effect control process (step S409). Process.

  When the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, a movement animation between the hold and variable icons is displayed in the variable icon display area 870 of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 904 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 890 becomes the change icon 886 and moves to the change icon display area 870. In this embodiment, the hold icon 902 becomes the change icon 886 simultaneously with the start of the change display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the fluctuation icon 886 is a green circle like the hold icon 904. The variation icon 886 provides a notice of the variation with the same jackpot reliability as the hold icon 904. Further, the movement animation of the hold icon is not displayed because the hold number is zero.

  Further, the special figure 1 variable game is a target change of the notice display related to the operation means. For this reason, in the special figure 1 variable game, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is started. In this embodiment, the super reach production is started prior to the start of the operation reception period. FIG. 37 (q) shows a state in which the super reach effect is started. In the super reach effect of the present embodiment, a dark effect is performed in which most of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in black. FIG. 37 (q) shows a state in which the darkening effect is started. When the darkening effect is started, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c have a relatively small display area and move to the right corner in the image display area. Further, the fluctuation icon display area 870 and the hold icon display area 890 disappear, and the fluctuation icon 880 is deleted. In addition, the chance button image 938 and the character string “in the 1000-carton box GET”, which are the notice display related to the operation means, are continuously displayed. Since the chance button image 938 is displayed in a white rectangular frame, the visibility is maintained high even when the darkening effect is started. In addition, since the character string “in the box” is displayed in black, it cannot be visually recognized when the darkening effect is started. In addition, although the variation display of the fourth symbol in the fourth symbol display area 912 is continued, as shown in FIG. 37 (q), when the black circular fourth symbol is displayed, the fourth symbol display becomes invisible. Note that the variation display of the fourth symbol may be displayed so as to be always visible even during execution of the darkening effect.

  FIG. 37 (r) shows a state where the button introduction animation is started. The button introduction animation notifies that the operation acceptance period will start soon. When the button introduction animation is started, the display of the “default” chance button image 940 shown in FIG. 16 is started approximately at the center of the effect display area 208d. As a result, it is predicted that the operation acceptance period of the chance button 136 will start soon. In the present embodiment, the “default” chance button image 940 having a low jackpot reliability is displayed in the operation invalid period immediately before the start of the operation reception period. After that, when the operation reception period starts, A high chance button image is displayed.

  FIG. 38 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 37 (r). As shown in FIG. 38 (a), a sparkling effect image is displayed around the chance button image 938 to notify the user that the stock box button is used.

  FIG. 38 (b) shows a state in which the item box box button is used. For this reason, the chance button image 938 and the character string “in the 1000-carton box GET” are erased, and it is notified that the stocked car-house box button has been used. In addition, when a thousand-thousand box button is used, a promotion animation for the chance button image is executed, and instead of the chance button image 940, a large number of oval with higher hit reliability and the letters "push" are added. A chance button image 942 is displayed in which a thousand boxes are on the pressed surface. Further, a white image 954 is displayed behind the chance button image 942. Thereby, the button introduction animation including the chance button image 942 during the darkening effect, the button receiving animation, and the promotion animation can be easily understood.

  FIG. 38C shows a state in which the button introduction animation is finished and the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is started. When the operation reception period is started, an animation during button reception is started, and an animation in which an oval is scattered around the chance button image 942 is displayed. Also, below the chance button image 942, a gauge image 760 indicating the remaining time of the operation reception period is displayed.

  The display mode of the chance button image 938 displayed during the operation invalid period and the display mode of the chance button image 942 displayed during the operation reception period are common. Therefore, the chance button image 938 is a display for notifying that the chance button image 942 is displayed during the operation reception period. Further, since the button accepting animation is selected based on the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game and the prefetch result, the chance button image 938 is also a prefetch notice for the special figure 1 variable game. In the target change of the prefetch notice, the chance button image 942 having the same display mode as the chance button image 938 that is the prefetch notice is displayed.

  In addition, even if the result of whether or not the pre-reading notice subject change is a big hit, the chance button image 942 for which the chance button image 938 is forewarned is not always displayed in the operation reception period in the case of the change. Then, the variation time of the special figure variation game may be prefetched, and the type of effect content corresponding to the variation time may be prefetched. In addition, the mode of the button accepting animation displayed in the operation acceptance period may be set to correspond to the variation time, or the lottery process for determining the mode of the button accepting animation at the start of the prefetch target variation is executed. May be.

  FIG. 38 (d) shows a state in which almost half of the operation reception period has elapsed. For this reason, almost half of the gauge image is displayed in black and the rest is displayed in white. Further, an animation in which the oval around the chance button image 942 is scattered is displayed.

  FIG. 38E shows a state immediately after the chance button 136 is operated within the operation reception period. When the chance button 136 is operated, the animation during button reception ends, and the animation after button reception is displayed as the first notification. When the button accepting animation ends, the chance button image 942 and the gauge image 760 are deleted.

  When the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted during the operation accepting period, the decorative symbol display device 208 can display at least an animation after accepting the button in which the oval is scattered in all directions. The pachinko machine 100 not only displays an animation in which the oval is scattered in all directions but also outputs a predetermined sound or sound effect (for example, an effect sound in which the oval is scattered) from the speaker 120 as the first notification. May be.

  FIG. 38 (f) shows a state where the darkening effect is finished. In the effect display area 208d, a character image of Yoshimune with a guts pose is displayed, and a character string “Ohban behavior” is displayed around it, suggesting that the special figure 1 variable game will win a big hit. .

  In FIG. 38 (g), the super reach effect is finished, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c return to the initial positions and sizes of the fluctuations, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c display “decoration 7-decoration”. "7-decoration 7" indicates a state where temporary stop display (swing fluctuation display) is performed. In FIG. 38 (g), the left and right right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the left and right arrows indicating the up and down directions indicate that “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is shaking in the up-down direction. Yes.

  In addition, the character image of Yoshimune and the character string “Ohban behavior” overlap with “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c and are displayed on the rear side. For this reason, the character image of Yoshimune and the character string “Ohban behavior” are partially hidden in “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. As described above, the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern may be displayed with priority over other effect displays (for example, character images and character strings).

  FIG. 38 (h) shows a state where the special figure 1 variable game is finished. The special figure A (15R special big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Thereby, it is notified that 15R special big hit was won in the special figure 1 variable game. In addition, the fourth symbol display area 912 stops and displays the fourth symbol in a red circle, and notifies that the big win is won in the special figure 1 variable game. Further, at the time of jackpot notification, the fluctuation icon display area 870 and the hold icon display area 890 may remain disappeared, and the change icon and the hold icon may not be displayed.

  In this embodiment, at least one of the plurality of displays is chance button images 936 and 938, and at least one of the plurality of displays is a chance button image 942. The chance button images 936 and 938 are the first display, and the chance button image 942 is the second display. At least one of the plurality of notifications is a first notification. The first notification is an animation after button reception shown in FIG. The decorative symbol display device 208 can display at least the first display in the first period shown in FIGS. 37 (b) to 37 (o). The decorative symbol display device 208 can display the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIGS. The second display can be displayed at least in the second period shown in FIG. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 does not notify the first notification when the first sub-control unit 400 receives an operation on the chance button 136 in the first period. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 can at least start the first notification when the first sub-control unit 400 receives an operation on the chance button 136 in the second period. The second period is an operation reception period in which the first sub-control unit 400 can receive at least an operation on the chance button 136.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, by displaying the first display as a notice of the symbol variation display, it is possible to simultaneously increase the player's interest regarding the operation means and the player's interest regarding the symbol variation display. There are cases where it is possible.

  One of the plurality of symbol variation displays is a first symbol variation display. The first symbol variation display is a special diagram 1 variation game shown in FIGS. 37 (b) to (h) or FIGS. 37 (i) to (o). The second symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that is displayed at least after the first symbol variation display, and is the special symbol 1 variation game shown in FIGS. 37 (p) to 38 (h). The first period is a period during which the special figure 1 display device 212 displays the first symbol variation display, and the first display is a display displayed as a pre-reading notice of the second symbol variation display. It is.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the first display regarding the operation means is performed during the period in which the operation to the operation means in the first symbol variation display is not accepted, and the first display is displayed as a pre-reading notice. As a result, the player may be more interested in the operation means.

(Example 2-2)
FIG. 39 and FIG. 40 show examples of effects in Example 2-2 of this embodiment in time series. FIG. 39A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game has been completed. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure G (offset symbol) is stopped and displayed, and in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, symbol combinations other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit “decoration 6—decoration 1—decoration” are displayed. 7 ”is stopped and the fourth symbol display area 912 is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 912 to notify that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is wrong. The special figure 2 display device 214 displays a special figure d (out-of-order symbol) that is a stop symbol of the latest special figure 2 variable game. In addition, the first to third LEDs from the left of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 are turned on to notify that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is 3, and all the LEDs of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are informed. Is turned off, and it is reported that the number of holds in FIG. 2 is zero.

  Also, hold icons 900, 902, and 904 are displayed in the hold icon display area 890, respectively. The display mode of the hold icons 900 and 902 is a default white circular display mode. The display mode of the hold icon 904 is a blue (indicated by a right-upward hatching) circular display mode.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute a prefetch notice by changing the color of the hold icon. In the prefetch notice with the hold icon, the jackpot reliability is set for each color of the hold icon. The big hit reliability is set to increase in the order of blue, green and red, for example. The default display color white may be a display color that is selected when the prefetching notice is not executed, or a display color that is selected when the prefetching notice is executed with a big hit reliability lower than blue. It may be.

  In the variation icon display area 870, a deletion animation of the variation icon 880 is executed. In FIG. 39A, the variation icon 882 is erased in a default mode in which the transmittance (transparency) of the variation icon gradually increases.

  FIG. 39 (b) shows a state in which the hold 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. The special symbol 1 display device 212 executes the special symbol 1 variation display, the left middle right symbol display regions 208a to 208c execute the decorative symbol variation display, and the fourth symbol display region 912 displays the fourth symbol variation display. It is running. Further, the third LED from the left of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is turned off, and it is notified that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has decreased by 1 and the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has become 2.

  When the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the movement between the hold / fluctuation icons is performed in the variable icon display area 870 and the hold icon display area 890 of the decorative symbol display device 208. Animation, animation of moving hold icon is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 900 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 890 becomes the change icon 882 and moves to the change icon display area 870. In the present embodiment, the hold icon 900 becomes the change icon 882 simultaneously with the start of the change display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the fluctuation icon 882 is a white circle like the hold icon 900. In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icon 902 displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 890 gradually moves to the first area, and the hold icon 904 displayed in the third area gradually. Move to the second area.

  Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 39B, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a lottery process on the button introduction animation in the effect control process of step S409. It is determined to execute a button introduction animation that displays a chance button image of “?” Shown in 16 (a) as an effect.

  In this embodiment, the button introduction animation is displayed as a pre-reading notice about the special figure variable game related to the hold 2 indicated by the hold icon 904. In this embodiment, the lottery process for the button introduction animation is executed when the hold order indicated by the hold icon 904 becomes hold 2, but may be executed when the hold is stored. However, it may be executed every time the special figure variable game is started. In addition, in the lottery process for the button introduction animation, information on the prefetch result included in the command sent from the main control unit 300 is used.

  FIG. 39 (c) shows a state where the button introduction animation is started during the special figure 1 variable game. In the button introduction animation, which button is stocked is notified. When the button introduction animation is started, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c have a relatively small display area and move to the right corner in the image display area. In the state shown in FIG. 39C, the fluctuation icon 882 has completed the movement into the fluctuation icon display area 870, and the hold icon 902 has completed the movement of the hold icon display area 890 to the first area. The hold icon 904 has completed the movement to the second area, and the movement animation between the hold and change icons and the movement animation of the hold icon are finished.

  In this embodiment, when the button introduction animation is started, a character image of Yoshimune who runs looking for a treasure chest is displayed on the right side of the center of the effect display area 208d. Yoshimune finds a treasure chest after a lapse of time from the start of the button introduction animation. FIG. 39 (c) shows a state where Yoshimune has found an image of a treasure box (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “treasure box”) displayed on the left side of the center of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 39D shows a state in which a treasure box discovered by Yoshimune is opened and a chance button image 944 of “?” Has popped out of the treasure box. When Yoshimune finds a treasure chest, as shown in FIG. 39 (e), Yoshimune holding a “?” Chance button image 944 is displayed in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d, and the “? "Is displayed, and the character string" GET! "Is displayed on the left side of Yoshimune. This gives the player an item? You will be informed that you got the button. The “?” Chance button image is an image that is displayed only during the invalid operation period. When the “?” Chance button image is displayed in the operation invalid period, the chance button image having a higher hit reliability is more easily displayed in the operation reception period than when the “default” chance button image is displayed. In the invalid operation period, the chance button image is more easily promoted when the “?” Chance button image is displayed than when the “default” chance button image is displayed. In this embodiment, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is not started, but a “hot” chance button image 936 is displayed. Further, since the operation reception period of the chance button 136 has not started, a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the operation reception period is not displayed.

  In this example, did you get the button introduction animation? Buttons are stocked as items. Also,? A chance button image 944 of “?” Indicating a button is displayed as a pre-reading notice about the special figure variable game related to the hold 2. In addition, regarding the special figure variable game related to the hold 2, the pre-reading notice may be executed not only on the “?” Chance button image 944 but also on other displays as the notice display related to the operation means. For example, the prefetch notice may be executed by displaying the hold icon 904 indicating the hold 2 in a display mode imitating the chance button 136.

  FIG. 39 (f) shows a state where the “?” Chance button image 944 is moving in a white rectangular frame provided at the upper right of the effect display area 208 d while shining brightly. At this time, the chance button image 944 of “?” May be temporarily invisible.

  FIG. 39 (g) shows a state where the button introduction animation is finished. The movement of the “?” Chance button image 944 is completed, and a “?” Chance button image 944 is displayed in a white rectangular frame provided at the upper right of the effect display area 208d. The string “inside” is displayed and the item It is informed that the button is stocked.

  In addition, the “?” Chance button image 944 and the “? GET in progress” character string, which are notice displays related to the operation means, start the operation reception period of the chance button 136 during execution of the special figure variable game related to the hold 2 It is informed that it will be done. In addition, the “?” Chance button image 944 and the “? GET” character string are also pre-reading notices for the special figure variable game related to the hold 2.

  Also,? While the buttons are stocked, an operation invalid period in which the operation acceptance period of the chance button 136 has not started. The size of the notice display relating to the operation means during the operation invalid period may be different from or the same as the size of the chance button image displayed during the operation reception period.

  FIG. 39 (h) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special symbol G (displaced symbol) is stopped and displayed on the special symbol 1 display device 212, the left middle right symbol display regions 208a to 208c return to the initial positions and sizes of the fluctuations, and the left middle right symbol display regions 208a to 208c. “Decoration 4—decoration 9—decoration 10” is stopped and displayed, and the fourth symbol display area 912 is displayed in a blue circle. As a result, it is notified that there has been a shift in the special figure 1 variable game.

  In addition, the “decoration 10” in the right symbol display area 208c overlaps the “?” Chance button image 944 and the “? GET” character string, and the “?” Chance button image 944 and “? GET” are displayed. It is displayed behind the string. In other words, the “?” Chance button image 944 and the “? GET” character string overlap the “decoration 10” in the right symbol display area 208c and are displayed in front of the “decoration 10”. As a result, most of the “decoration 10” is hidden by the chance button image 944 of “?” And cannot be visually recognized.

  As described above, the “?” Chance button image 944 and the “? GET” character string, which are the notice display related to the operation means, may be displayed with priority over other displays (for example, decorative symbols). . The “?” Chance button image 944 displayed in the white rectangular frame is displayed with relatively high visibility, and the “? GET” character string overlaps with “decoration 10”. The visibility is relatively low. In this way, the visibility of one of the notice displays related to the operating means may be displayed high, and the other visibility may be displayed low.

  Further, when the special figure 1 variable game is ended, the change icon 882 is deleted. In this example, the variation icon 882 is deleted in a default manner in which the transmittance (transparency) of the variation icon gradually increases.

  FIG. 39 (i) shows a state in which the hold 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. The special symbol 1 display device 212 executes the special symbol 1 variation display, the left middle right symbol display regions 208a to 208c execute the decorative symbol variation display, and the fourth symbol display region 912 displays the fourth symbol variation display. It is running. Further, the second LED from the left of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is turned off, and it is notified that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has decreased by 1 and the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has become 1.

  When the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the movement between the hold / fluctuation icons is performed in the variable icon display area 870 and the hold icon display area 890 of the decorative symbol display device 208. Animation, animation of moving hold icon is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icon, the hold icon 902 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 890 becomes the change icon 884 and moves to the change icon display area 870. In the present embodiment, the hold icon 902 becomes the change icon 884 simultaneously with the start of the change display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the fluctuation icon 884 is a white circle as with the hold icon 902. In the hold icon moving animation, the hold icon 904 displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 890 gradually moves to the first area.

  Further, prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 39 (i), the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not to execute the promotion animation. The promotion animation is an animation that expects a hold icon or a chance button image to be promoted to a display mode with higher jackpot reliability. In this embodiment, the promotion animation is executed, the hold icon 904 is promoted to a display mode with a higher jackpot, and the chance button image 944 of “?” Is not promoted to a display mode of a chance button image with a higher jackpot reliability. It is decided.

  In this embodiment, the promotion animation is displayed as a pre-reading notice about the special figure variable game related to the hold 1 indicated by the hold icon 904. Further, in this embodiment, the lottery process for promotion of the promotion animation, the chance button image, and the promotion of the hold icon is executed when the hold order indicated by the hold icon 904 becomes hold 1, but the hold is performed. May be executed at the start of the special figure variation game. In addition, the lottery processing for promotion of promotion animation, chance button image and hold icon promotion uses information of a prefetch result included in a command sent from the main control unit 300.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 39 (i), the decorative symbol variation display in the right symbol display area 208c overlaps the “?” Chance button image 944 and the “? Are displayed behind the chance button image 944 and the character string “? GET”. In other words, the chance button image 944 for “?” And the character string “? GET” are displayed on the front side of the variation display of the decorative symbol, overlapping the variation display of the decorative symbol in the right symbol display area 208c. ing. As a result, most of the variation display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the “?” Chance button image 944 and the character string “?

  Further, in the state shown in FIG. 39 (i), a promotion animation for the hold icon 904 is executed. In the promotion animation of the hold icon of the present embodiment, the effect image 950 is displayed so as to hide the entire hold icon 904 so as to overlap the near side of the hold icon 904. In the center of the effect image 950, a character string “POW” is displayed. The effect image 950 is displayed so as to move together with the hold icon 904 that is moving to the first area. As a result, the hold icon 904 is hidden by the effect image 950, and the entire hold icon 904 becomes invisible.

  FIG. 39 (j) shows a state in which the promotion animation for the hold icon has been completed. The display mode of the hold icon 904 is changed from a blue circle to a green circle (indicated by cross hatching in the drawing). As a result, the hold icon 904 is displayed in green, which has a higher hit reliability than blue. Further, in this embodiment, after the hold icon 904 completes moving to the first area and the hold icon moving animation is finished, the promotion animation for the hold icon is finished and the effect image 950 disappears and changes to green. The held icon 904 is visible. On the other hand, while the hold icon 904 is moving to the first area (in the middle of the hold icon moving animation), the promotion animation for the hold icon ends, the effect image 950 disappears, and the hold icon 904 During movement, the hold icon 904 that has turned green may be visible. In FIG. 39 (j), the variation icon 884 has completed the movement of the variation icon display area 870, and the movement animation between the hold / variation icons has ended.

  In the state shown in FIG. 39 (j), the promotion animation for the chance button image is started. In the promotion animation for the chance button image of the present embodiment, an animation in which the thousand boxes 820 fly from the upper left of the effect display area 208d toward the chance button image 944 of “?” Is displayed. In the present embodiment, when the promotion animation for the chance button image is started, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are relatively small in display area and moved to the right corner in the image display area. To do.

  FIG. 39 (k) shows a state in which the promotion animation for the chance button image is being executed. FIG. 39 (k) shows a state where the thousand box 820 disappears at the right end of the image display area without colliding with the chance button image 936 of “?”.

  In this embodiment, the promotion animation for the chance button image is executed, but the chance button image is not promoted. For this reason, the promotion animation is a gaze effect that encourages the promotion of the chance button image. Thus, even if the promotion animation is executed, the big hit reliability of the effect display may not increase.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 39 (k), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c return to the initial positions and sizes of the fluctuations, and “decoration 4” is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a as a temporary stop display (swaying). (Variable display). In addition, the decorative symbol variation display in the right symbol display area 208c is displayed on the rear side of the chance button image 944 of "?" Thereby, a part of the variation display of the decoration symbol in the right symbol display area 208c is hidden by the “?” Chance button image 944 and the thousand box 820, and the visibility of the variation display of the decoration symbol is lowered.

  When the display of the thousand-thousand box 820 is erased, as shown in FIG. 39 (l), the chance button image 944 of “?” Continues to be displayed in the white rectangular frame at the upper right of the effect display area 208d. The character string “? Button GET” continues to be displayed below. Thereby, it is notified that the jackpot reliability of the notice display relating to the operation means has not increased.

  Further, FIG. 39 (l) shows a state in which “decoration 4” is temporarily stopped (swing fluctuation display) in the right symbol display area 208c and the reach effect is started. The character string “reach” is displayed in the effect display area 208d below the middle symbol display area 208b, and the reach effect in the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  “Decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c overlaps with the “?” Chance button image 944 and the “? GET” character string to overlap the chance button image 944 and “? GET”. It is displayed behind the string. In other words, the chance button image 944 and the character string “? GET” are displayed on the front side of the “decoration 4” overlapping the “decoration 4” in the right symbol display area 208c. Thereby, most of the “decoration 4” is hidden by the “?” Chance button image 944 and cannot be visually recognized. The “?” Chance button image 944 displayed in the white rectangular frame is displayed with relatively high visibility, and the “? GET” character string overlaps “decoration 4”. The visibility is relatively low. In this way, the visibility of one of the notice displays related to the operating means may be displayed high, and the other visibility may be displayed low.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the reach effect, the movement (rotation) speed of the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b becomes slow. As shown in FIG. 39 (m), in the middle symbol display area 208b, “decoration 3” moves downward and “decoration 4” moves downward from above. In the effect display area 208d, a character image of Yoshimune is displayed so as to overlap with the lower left of “Decoration 4” in the right symbol display area 208c. The character image of Yoshimune is displayed in front of “decoration 4” in the right symbol display area 208c, and is displayed so that Yoshimune stares at the variation display of the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b. As a result, the effect of encouraging that “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b is executed.

  FIG. 39 (n) shows a state in which “decoration 5” is temporarily stopped (swaying fluctuation display) in the middle symbol display area 208b. Thereby, in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 4 -decoration 5 -decoration 4” is temporarily stopped (swing fluctuation display). In FIG. 39 (n), the left and right symbols in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the double arrows pointing to the up and down directions indicate that “decoration 4 -decoration 5 -decoration 4” sways in the up and down direction. Yes.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 39 (n), the character image of Yoshimune has changed to a disappointed expression display mode. This suggests that there will be a shift in the special figure 1 variable game.

  FIG. 39 (o) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure G (out of symbol) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In the region 912, the fourth blue circle symbol is stopped and displayed. As a result, it is notified that there has been a shift in the special figure 1 variable game.

  Also, “decoration 4” in the right symbol display area 208c overlaps with the “?” Chance button image 944 and the “? GET” character string, and the “?” Chance button image 944 and “? GET” are displayed. It is displayed behind the string. In other words, the “?” Chance button image 944 and the “? GET” character string overlap “decoration 4” in the right symbol display area 208c and are displayed in front of the “decoration 4”. Thereby, most of the “decoration 4” is hidden by the chance button image 944 of “?” And cannot be visually recognized.

  As described above, the “?” Chance button image 944 and the character string “? GET” may be displayed with priority over other displays (for example, decorative symbols), which are advance notices related to the operation means. The “?” Chance button image 944 displayed in the white rectangular frame is displayed with relatively high visibility, and the “? GET” character string overlaps “decoration 4”. The visibility is relatively low. In this way, the visibility of one of the notice displays related to the operating means may be displayed high, and the other visibility may be displayed low.

  Further, when the special figure 1 variable game is ended, the change icon 884 is deleted. In this example, the variation icon 884 is deleted in a default manner in which the transmittance (transparency) of the variation icon gradually increases.

  FIG. 39 (p) shows a state in which the hold 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. The special symbol 1 display device 212 executes the special symbol 1 variation display, the left middle right symbol display regions 208a to 208c execute the decorative symbol variation display, and the fourth symbol display region 912 displays the fourth symbol variation display. It is running. Further, the first LED from the left of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is turned off, and it is notified that the holding number of the special figure 1 has decreased by 1 and the holding number of the special figure 1 has become zero. Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 39 (p), the first sub-control unit 400 draws the button introduction animation, the button receiving animation, and the button receiving animation in the effect control process (step S409). Process.

  When the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, a movement animation between the hold and variable icons is displayed in the variable icon display area 870 of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 904 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 890 becomes the change icon 886 and moves to the change icon display area 870. In this embodiment, the hold icon 902 becomes the change icon 886 simultaneously with the start of the change display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the fluctuation icon 886 is a green circle like the hold icon 904. The variation icon 886 provides a notice of the variation with the same jackpot reliability as the hold icon 904. Further, the movement animation of the hold icon is not displayed because the hold number is zero.

  Further, the special figure 1 variable game is a target change of the notice display related to the operation means. For this reason, in the special figure 1 variable game, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is started. In this embodiment, the super reach production is started prior to the start of the operation reception period. FIG. 39 (q) shows a state in which the super reach production is started. In the super reach effect of the present embodiment, a dark effect is performed in which most of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in black. FIG. 39 (q) shows a state in which the darkening effect is started. When the darkening effect is started, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c have a relatively small display area and move to the right corner in the image display area. Further, the fluctuation icon display area 870 and the hold icon display area 890 disappear, and the fluctuation icon 886 is deleted. In addition, the “?” Chance button image 944 and the “? Since the chance button image 944 is displayed in a white rectangular frame, the visibility is maintained high even when the darkening effect is started. In addition, since the character string “? GET” is displayed in black, it is not visible when the darkening effect is started. Further, the variation display of the fourth symbol in the fourth symbol display area 912 is continued. However, as shown in FIG. 39 (q), when the black circular fourth symbol is displayed, the fourth symbol display becomes invisible. Note that the variation display of the fourth symbol may be displayed so as to be always visible even during execution of the darkening effect.

  In addition, after the notice display relating to the operation means (in this embodiment, the “?” Chance button image 944 and the “? Button GET” character string) starts to be displayed, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is started. It does not have to be. Further, the notice display relating to the operation means may be erased before the operation reception period starts.

  FIG. 39 (r) shows a state where the button introduction animation is started during the darkening effect, and the “default” chance button image 940 shown in FIG. 16 is started to be displayed at the approximate center of the effect display area 208d. The button introduction animation notifies that the operation reception period of the chance button 136 will start soon.

  FIG. 40 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 39 (r). As shown in FIG. 40 (a), a smoke effect image 956 is displayed so as to hide the “?” Chance button image 944 and the “? Button GET in progress” character string, and the “?” Chance button image 944 is displayed. And the character string of “? Button GET” is deleted. Was this stocked? It is notified that the button is not used. in this way,? The button may not be used.

  FIG. 40B shows a state in which the button introduction animation is finished and the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is started. When the operation acceptance period is started, the button acceptance animation is started, the chance button image 940 is displayed in the white image 954, and the push image 750 is present in the white image 954 and above the chance button image 940. A gauge image 760 indicating the remaining time of the operation reception period is displayed below the chance button image 942. As in the present embodiment, the “default” chance button image 940 having a display mode different from the “?” Chance button image 944, which is a notice display relating to the operation means displayed before the start of the operation reception period, is within the operation reception period. May be displayed. Further, the “default” chance button image 944 during the operation acceptance period is an image having the lowest jackpot reliability among the chance button images as shown in FIG.

  In this embodiment, the “?” Chance button image 944 and the “? Button GET” character string are erased before the start of the operation reception period. For this reason, the item? The button cannot be used, and the jackpot reliability of the chance button image during the animation display while accepting the chunk button is not increased. As described above, there is a case where the display mode of the chance button image does not change even if the notice display relating to the operation means is displayed before the operation reception period starts. In addition, when the chance button image 944 of “?” Is displayed before the operation reception period starts, the display mode of the chance button image changes immediately before or during the start of the button reception animation, and the chance button image is displayed. The jackpot reliability may increase.

  Further, the chance button image displayed during the operation reception period is displayed in a display mode that is equal to or higher than the jackpot reliability of the notice display related to the operation means displayed before the operation reception period starts. For this reason, the chance button image displayed during the operation reception period is displayed in a display mode that is equal to or higher than the jackpot reliability of the notice display related to the operation means displayed before the operation reception period starts. It should be noted that the chance button image displayed during the operation reception period may be displayed in a display mode lower than the jackpot reliability of the notice display relating to the operation means displayed before the operation reception period starts.

  FIG. 40 (c) shows a state where the operation acceptance period has passed half or more. For this reason, more than half of the gauge image is displayed in black, and the rest is displayed in white.

  FIG. 40D shows a state immediately after the chance button 136 is operated within the operation reception period. When the chance button 136 is operated, the animation during button reception ends, and the animation after button reception is displayed as the first notification. In the present embodiment, a smoke effect image is displayed so as to hide the chance button image 940, the PUSH image 750, and the gauge image 760 while the circular white image 954 is concentrically reduced. This suggests that there will be a shift in the special figure 1 variable game.

  FIG. 40 (e) shows a state in which the darkening effect is finished. In the effect display area 208d, the character image of Yoshimune with a crying face is displayed, “Lost” is displayed on the left side of Yoshimune, “Lost” is displayed on the right side of Yoshimune, and it may be out of place in the special figure 1 variable game. It is suggested.

  In FIG. 40 (f), the super reach effect is finished, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c return to the initial position and size of the change, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed as “decoration 7-decoration”. “8-decoration 7” indicates a state where temporary stop display (swing fluctuation display) is performed. In FIG. 40 (f), the left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c on the left side of the left and right symbols indicate the up and down direction, and “decoration 7—decoration 8—decoration 7” sways in the up and down direction. Yes. In addition, the characters “lost” and “losing” displayed in FIG. 40E are deleted. The character image of Yoshimune with a crying face is displayed on the back side of the “decoration 8” overlapping the “decoration 8” in the middle symbol display area 208b. In this way, the decorative design may be displayed with priority over other effect displays (for example, character images).

  FIG. 40 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure G (offset symbol) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and “decoration 7-decoration 8-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In the area 912, the fourth blue circle symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the shift is won in the special figure 1 variable game. Further, at the time of the deviation after the super reach effect, the change icon display area 870 and the hold icon display area 890 may remain disappeared, and the change icon and the hold icon may not be displayed.

  In this embodiment, at least one of the plurality of displays is a chance button image 944, and at least one of the plurality of displays is a chance button image 940. The chance button image 944 is a first display, and the chance button image 940 is a second display. At least one of the plurality of notifications is a first notification. The first notification is an animation after button reception shown in FIG. The decorative symbol display device 208 can display at least the first display in the first period shown in FIGS. 39B to 39O, and the decorative symbol display device 208 can display the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIGS. The second display can be displayed at least in the second period shown in FIG. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 does not notify the first notification when the first sub-control unit 400 receives an operation on the chance button 136 in the first period. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 can at least start the first notification when the first sub-control unit 400 receives an operation on the chance button 136 in the second period. The second period is an operation reception period in which the first sub-control unit 400 can receive at least an operation on the chance button 136.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, by displaying the first display as a notice of the symbol variation display, it is possible to simultaneously increase the player's interest regarding the operation means and the player's interest regarding the symbol variation display. There are cases where it is possible.

  One of the plurality of symbol variation displays is a first symbol variation display. The first symbol variation display is the special diagram 1 variation game shown in FIGS. 39 (b) to (h) or FIGS. 39 (i) to (o). The second symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that is displayed at least after the first symbol variation display, and is the special symbol 1 variation game shown in FIGS. 39 (p) to 40 (g). The first period is a period during which the special figure 1 display device 212 displays the first symbol variation display, and the first display is a display displayed as a pre-reading notice of the second symbol variation display. It is.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the first display regarding the operation means is performed during the period in which the operation to the operation means in the first symbol variation display is not accepted, and the first display is displayed as a pre-reading notice. As a result, the player may be more interested in the operation means.

Example 3
41 and 42 show examples of effects in Example 3 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 41 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure G (offset symbol) is stopped and displayed, and in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, symbol combinations other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration” are displayed. “6” is stopped and the fourth symbol display area 912 is displayed with the fourth symbol in a blue circle to notify that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is wrong. The special figure 2 display device 214 displays a special figure d (out-of-order symbol) that is a stop symbol of the latest special figure 2 variable game. Further, it is informed that all the LEDs of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 are turned on, and that the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is four, and all the LEDs of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are turned off. It is reported that the number of holds in FIG. 2 is zero.

  In the hold icon display area 890, hold icons 900, 902, 904, and 906 are displayed, respectively. The display mode of the hold icon 900 is a red (indicated by a right-down hatching in the drawing) circular display mode. The hold icon 900 is a pre-reading notice display of the special figure 1 variable game related to the hold 1. In addition, the display mode of the hold icons 902, 904, and 906 is a default white circular display mode. In the variation icon display area 870, a deletion animation of the variation icon 880 is executed. In FIG. 41A, the variation icon 880 is erased in such a manner that the transmittance (transparency) of the variation icon gradually increases.

  FIG. 41 (b) shows a state in which the hold 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. The special symbol 1 display device 212 executes the special symbol 1 variation display, the left middle right symbol display regions 208a to 208c execute the decorative symbol variation display, and the fourth symbol display region 912 displays the fourth symbol variation display. It is running. Further, the fourth LED from the left of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is turned off, and it is notified that the holding number in the special figure 1 has decreased by 1 and the holding number in the special figure 1 has become three.

  When the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the movement between the hold / fluctuation icons is performed in the variable icon display area 870 and the hold icon display area 890 of the decorative symbol display device 208. Animation, animation of moving hold icon is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 900 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 890 becomes the change icon 882 and moves to the change icon display area 870. In the present embodiment, the hold icon 900 becomes the change icon 882 simultaneously with the start of the change display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the fluctuation icon 882 is a red circle like the hold icon 900. The change icon 882 provides a notice of the change with the same jackpot reliability as the hold icon 900. In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icon 902 displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 890 gradually moves to the first area, and the hold icon 904 displayed in the third area gradually. Moving to the second area, the hold icon 906 displayed in the fourth area gradually moves to the third area.

  Further, prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 41 (b), the first sub-control unit 400 performs the button introduction animation, the button receiving animation, and the button receiving animation in the production control process (step S409). The lottery process is performed.

  FIG. 41 (c) shows a state in which the super reach effect is started during the special figure 1 variable game. When the super reach effect is started, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c have a relatively small display area and move to the right corner in the image display area. In the state shown in FIG. 41 (c), the fluctuation icon 882 completes the movement into the fluctuation icon display area 870, and the hold icon 902 completes the movement of the hold icon display area 890 to the first area. The icon 904 has completed the movement to the second area, the hold icon 906 has completed the movement to the third area, and the movement animation between the hold and change icons and the movement animation of the hold icon have ended.

  In this embodiment, when the super reach production is started, the button introduction animation is first started. In the button introduction animation, which button is stocked is notified. In the center of the effect display area 208d, a character string “button get chance” is displayed, and it is informed that an effect in which an item button can be obtained is started. In addition, the button introduction animation of this embodiment is displayed as a notice about the special figure 1 variable game (notice of the change). Further, in this embodiment, the change icon 882 and all the hold icons continue to be displayed even during the super reach production.

  In the button introduction animation in the present embodiment, an animation in which Yoshimune shoots an arrow toward the target is displayed. First, as shown in FIG. 41 (d), a target image (hereinafter referred to as “target”) 958 is displayed on the right side of the effect display area 208d, and the “Hit Mat button” is displayed on the upper left of the effect display area 208d. A character string “GET” is displayed, and it is notified that a button shot by an arrow is available.

  The target 958 has a circular shape and is divided into four in a fan shape. In the upper right of the target 958, “Lose” is displayed, in the lower right is a “hot” chance button image, in the upper left is a “?” Chance button image, and in the lower left is a “family crest” chance. The button image is displayed. Thus, if you shoot the upper right area of the target 958 with an arrow, you will not get the item button, if you shoot the lower right area of the target 958 with an arrow, you will get the item thermal button, and the upper left of the target 958 with the arrow. Shoot for items? When you get the button and shoot the lower left of the target 958 with an arrow, you will be notified that you will get the item's crest button. Also, the chance button image is displayed at the time shown in FIG. 41 (d), but since the operation of the chance button 136 is invalid, even if the chance button 136 is operated, the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. There is no change, and there is no change in the production mode of the other various production devices 206, the speaker 120, and the like.

  FIG. 41 (e) shows a state in which an animation in which Yoshimune shoots an arrow is started. A character image of Yoshimune holding an arrow is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d, and a target 958 that rotates at high speed around the left is displayed on the right side of the effect display area 208d. Further, in the button introduction animation of this embodiment, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is started. Therefore, an operation promotion image 960 including a “default” chance button image, a PUSH image, a gauge image, and a white arrow indicating the chance button image is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d. In addition, a character string “beginning” is displayed above the operation promotion image 960 to notify that the operation reception period has started.

  In this embodiment, when the chance button 136 is operated within the button introduction animation operation reception period, an animation in which Yoshimune shoots the target 958 is displayed. FIG. 41 (f) shows a state immediately after the chance button 136 is operated by the player. Yoshimune fired an arrow, and the released arrow hit the target 958.

  When the arrow hits the target 958, as shown in FIG. 41 (g), the rotation of the target 958 stops, and it is notified which button has been obtained. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 41 (g) and 41 (h), the arrow hits the “family crest” area of the target 958. The character image of Yoshimune with a guts pose is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d, and “family crest button get!” Is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d, and the item crest button has been obtained. Is notified, and the button introduction animation ends once.

  Also, in this embodiment, the target 958 shown in FIGS. 41 (g) to 41 (i) after the arrow is released is not a chance button image but a “heat”, “ ? "And" family crest "are displayed. Thus, the display mode of the target 958 may be changed before and after the button introduction animation.

  In this embodiment, after the item button is obtained, the button introduction animation is temporarily ended, and “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c as shown in FIG. 41 (j). In the effect display area 208d, the reach image 720 is temporarily displayed in front of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The reach image 720 temporarily displays the “decoration 7” in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. ”And the entire decorative symbol variation display displayed in the middle symbol display area 208 b are hidden and cannot be visually recognized.

  When the reach design of the decorative symbol is started, an animation of closing the heel is displayed, and when the heel is closed, as shown in FIG. 41 (k), the 襖 is displayed on almost the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed. The character image “Yatsushiro” is displayed in vertical writing on the right side image, and the character image “General” is displayed in vertical writing on the left side image. Since the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced in the upper right corner of the image display area and displayed in front of the bag image, the decorative symbol variation display in the special figure 1 variation game can be visually recognized. It has become.

  When the bag opens, the button introduction animation resumes. As shown in FIG. 41 (l), when the bag image is opened, the bag 700 arranged on the left side of the image display area and the Yoshimune 710 arranged on the right side of the image display area are visible. . Samurai 700 looks surprised at something, and Yoshimune 710 looks surprised at something.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 41 (m), a part of the chance button image 800 is displayed at the upper center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The chance button image 800 is shown in FIG. The crest button image of the “family crest” is descending with the pressed surface facing forward. In the chance button image 800, the spear 700 is surprised, and Yoshimune 710 has a surprised expression.

  FIG. 41 (n) shows a state where the button introduction animation is being executed. The chance button image 800 is further lowered to the lower left side of the image display area. Most of the chance button image 800 is visible.

  FIG. 41 (o) shows a state in which the button introduction animation is being executed. The chance button image 800 is further lowered to the lower right side of the image display area. The entire chance button image 800 is completely visible.

  FIG. 41 (p) shows a state where the button introduction animation is being executed. The chance button image 800 descends further to the lower left side of the image display area and stops near the lower center.

  When the chance button image 800 stops near the center, as shown in FIG. 41 (q), a darkening effect is started. During the darkening effect, it is not possible to visually recognize the samurai 700, Yoshimune 710, and the like. In the image display area where the chance button image 800 is displayed even during the darkening effect, it is displayed that the button introduction animation is being executed. Even during the darkening effect, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c indicate that the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. Further, during the darkening effect of the present embodiment, the change icon 882 and all the hold icons are displayed.

  FIG. 41 (r) shows a state where the darkening effect is being executed and the button introduction animation is being executed. The chance button image 800 is displayed in a state of being compressed up and down with the side face directed to the player side.

  FIG. 42 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 41 (r). The reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the button introduction animation is finished. The chance button image 800 gradually protrudes upward, and the character image of “Yatsushiro Shogun” displayed on the side surface is visible. The chance button image of “family crest” shown in FIG. 16A is visible.

  FIG. 42B shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, the operation reception period is started, and the execution of the button reception animation is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a darkening effect is being executed. A white character image “seriously” is displayed vertically on the right side of the chance button image 800, and a “button” is displayed on the left side of the chance button image 800. A white text image of “Please press” is displayed in vertical writing. A gauge image 760 is displayed below the chance button image 800 to prompt the player to press the chance button 136. Further, the gauge image 760 is displayed on the back side of the change icon display area 870, the change icon 882, and the hold icons 902, 904, and 906, overlapping with each other. For this reason, a part of the gauge image 760 is hidden. Note that the gauge image 760 may be displayed on the near side of the variation icon or the hold icon.

  FIG. 42 (c) shows a state where the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the button receiving animation is being executed. The chance button image 800 shows a state of rotating counterclockwise. The gauge image 760 displays the remaining time of the operation reception period of the chance button 136 with the length of the white portion.

  FIG. 42 (d) shows a state in which the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the execution of the animation after button reception is started as the first notification. Prior to the execution of the animation after button reception, the button reception animation is ended by the player pressing the chance button 136 within the operation reception period. In the decorative symbol display device 208, after the chance button image 800 and the white character image disappear, the white character image “Wagashi Yatsushiro Shogun” is displayed vertically in two columns.

  FIG. 42 (e) shows a state in which the darkening effect is finished, the character image of Yoshimune screaming “Yoshimune is!” Is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the animation after the button reception is finished. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” for notifying the 15R special big hit is temporarily stopped (swing fluctuation display).

  After a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the super reach effect ends, and the special figure 1 variable game ends. When the special figure 1 variable game is finished, as shown in FIG. 42 (f), the special figure A (15R special big hit symbol) is stopped on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed. "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Thereby, it is notified that 15R special big hit was won in the special figure 1 variable game. In addition, the fourth symbol display area 912 stops and displays the fourth symbol in a red circle, and notifies that the big win is won in the special figure 1 variable game. Moreover, the change icon 882 and all the hold icons may be displayed at the time of jackpot notification.

  In this embodiment, at least one of the plurality of displays is a target 958, and at least one of the plurality of displays is a chance button image 800. The target 958 includes a plurality of chance button images as shown in FIG. The target 958 is the first display, and the chance button image 800 is the second display. At least one of the plurality of notifications is a first notification. The first notification is an animation after button reception shown in FIGS. 42 (d) and 42 (e). The decorative symbol display device 208 can display at least the first display in the first period shown in FIGS. 41 (d) to 41 (i). The decorative symbol display device 208 can display the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIGS. The second display can be displayed at least in the second period shown in FIG. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 does not notify the first notification when the first sub-control unit 400 receives an operation on the chance button 136 in the first period. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 can at least start the first notification when the first sub-control unit 400 receives an operation on the chance button 136 in the second period. The second period is an operation reception period in which the first sub-control unit 400 can receive at least an operation on the chance button 136.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, by displaying the first display as a notice of the symbol variation display, it is possible to simultaneously increase the player's interest regarding the operation means and the player's interest regarding the symbol variation display. There are cases where it is possible.

Example 4
FIG. 43 shows an example of effects in Example 4 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 43A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game has been completed. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure G (offset symbol) is stopped and displayed, and in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, symbol combinations other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration” are displayed. “4” is stopped and the fourth symbol display area 912 displays the fourth symbol in a blue circle to notify that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is wrong. The special figure 2 display device 214 displays a special figure d (out-of-order symbol) that is a stop symbol of the latest special figure 2 variable game. In addition, the first and second LEDs of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 are turned on to notify that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is two, and all the LEDs of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are turned off. Thus, it is informed that the number of holds in FIG. 2 is zero.

  On hold icon display area 890, hold icons 900 and 902 are displayed, respectively. The display mode of the hold icon 900 is a default white circular display mode. The display mode of the hold icon 902 is a green (indicated by cross-hatching in the figure) circular display mode. The hold icon 902 is a pre-reading notice display of the special figure 1 variable game related to the hold 2. In the variation icon display area 870, a deletion animation of the variation icon 880 is executed. In FIG. 43A, the variation icon 880 is deleted in such a manner that the transmittance (transparency) of the variation icon gradually increases.

  In addition, “decoration 4” in the right symbol display area 208c is displayed behind the chance button image 938 and the character string “in the 1000 boxes GET”, overlapping the chance button image 938 and the character string “in the 1000 boxes GET”. ing. As a result, it is informed that the item's box box button is stocked. It should be noted that the chance button image 938 which is a notice display relating to the operation means and the character string “in the box of 000 boxes” are pre-read notice notices regarding the special figure variable game related to the hold 2 indicated by the hold icon 902.

  FIG. 43B shows a state in which the hold 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. The special symbol 1 display device 212 executes the special symbol 1 variation display, the left middle right symbol display regions 208a to 208c execute the decorative symbol variation display, and the fourth symbol display region 912 displays the fourth symbol variation display. It is running. Further, the second LED from the left of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is turned off, and it is notified that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has decreased by 1 and the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has become 1.

  When the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, a movement animation between the hold and variable icons is displayed in the variable icon display area 870 of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 900 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 890 becomes the change icon 882 and moves to the change icon display area 870. In the present embodiment, the hold icon 900 becomes the change icon 882 simultaneously with the start of the change display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the fluctuation icon 882 is a white circle like the hold icon 900. In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icon 902 gradually moves to the first area of the hold icon display area 890.

  Further, prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 43 (b), the first sub-control unit 400 performs a pre-reading notice lottery process in the effect control process (step S409), and executes a conversation notice as the pre-reading notice. Decide what to do. This conversation advance notice is a prefetch notice display for the special figure variable game related to the hold 1 indicated by the hold icon 902. In the pre-reading notice lottery process, information on the pre-reading notice result transmitted from the main control unit 300 is used. The lottery process for the pre-reading notice may be executed when the hold 1 is stored.

  FIG. 43 (c) shows a state in which the conversation notice is started. In the conversation notice of the present embodiment, an effect display in which Yoshimune and Tsuji are conversing is executed. First, as shown in FIG. 43 (c), Yoshimune 962 is displayed on the lower right side of the effect display area 208d, and a balloon image of Yoshimune 962 is displayed on the left side of Yoshimune. The text “Which button is hot?” Is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 43C, the fluctuation icon 882 has completed the movement into the fluctuation icon display area 870, and the hold icon 902 has completed the movement of the hold icon display area 890 to the first area. The movement animation between the hold / variation icons and the movement animation of the hold icons are finished.

  FIG. 43D shows a state in which the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is started during the execution of the conversation notice. On the upper left side of the effect display area 208d, a bag 964 is displayed. A balloon image of 爺 964 is displayed on the right side of 爺, and an operation promotion image 960 including a “default” chance button image, a PUSH image, a gauge image, and a white arrow pointing to the chance button image in the balloon image. Is displayed and the player is prompted to operate the chance button 136. The operation promotion image 960 starts to be displayed with the start of the operation reception period. In the state shown in FIG. 43 (d), the display relating to the two operation means of the chance button image 938 and the operation promotion image 960 is simultaneously displayed on one screen.

  In addition, 爺 964 is displayed on the near side overlapping the decorative display variation display in the left symbol display area 208a, and the balloon image of the 爺 964 overlaps the decorative display variation display in the middle symbol display area 208b. Is displayed on the front side. For this reason, a part of the decorative symbol variation display in the left middle symbol display areas 208a and 208b is hidden and cannot be visually recognized.

  FIG. 43 (e) shows a state immediately after the chance button 136 is operated by the player. The conversation announcement in this embodiment proceeds when the chance button 136 is operated by the player. In the balloon image of 爺 964, instead of the operation promotion image 960, a character string “The buttons are hot in the order of [CHANCE <? <Heat <alcohol <family crest]! The lower half of the character string “family crest” and the portion of “not attention” are hidden by the chance button image 938 and are not visible. In addition, the character string is a reply line to the Yoshimune 962 line, and is also a tutorial display for explaining the jackpot reliability of the button. Note that the operation reception period started in FIG. 43 (d) is an operation reception period for the conversation notice, and thus is not a reception period for the stock box boxes. For this reason, even if the chance button 136 is operated, the chance button image 938 is continuously displayed without changing the display mode, as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 43 (f) shows a state in which the conversation notice is finished and the special figure 1 variable game is finished. The special symbol G (out of symbol) is stopped and displayed on the special symbol 1 display device 212, and “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 8” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In the region 912, the fourth blue circle symbol is stopped and displayed. As a result, it is notified that there has been a shift in the special figure 1 variable game.

  In addition, “decoration 8” in the right symbol display area 208c is displayed behind the chance button image 938 and the character string of “Thousand boxes GET”, overlapping the chance button image 938 and the character string of “Thousand boxes GET”. ing. In other words, the chance button image 938 and the character string “in the box” are displayed in front of the “decoration 8” so as to overlap the “decoration 8” in the right symbol display area 208c. Thereby, most of the “decoration 8” is hidden by the chance button image 938 and cannot be visually recognized.

  Further, when the special figure 1 variable game is ended, the change icon 882 is deleted. In this example, the variation icon 882 is deleted in a default manner in which the transmittance (transparency) of the variation icon gradually increases.

  FIG. 43 (g) shows a state in which the hold 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. The special symbol 1 display device 212 executes the special symbol 1 variation display, the left middle right symbol display regions 208a to 208c execute the decorative symbol variation display, and the fourth symbol display region 912 displays the fourth symbol variation display. It is running. Further, the first LED from the left of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is turned off, and it is notified that the holding number of the special figure 1 has decreased by 1 and the holding number of the special figure 1 has become zero. Also, prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 43 (g), the first sub-control unit 400 draws the button introduction animation, the button receiving animation, and the button receiving animation in the effect control process (step S409). Process.

  When the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the movement between the hold / fluctuation icons is performed in the variable icon display area 870 and the hold icon display area 890 of the decorative symbol display device 208. An animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icon, the hold icon 902 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 890 becomes the change icon 884 and moves to the change icon display area 870. In the present embodiment, the hold icon 902 becomes the change icon 884 simultaneously with the start of the change display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the fluctuation icon 884 is a green circle as with the hold icon 902. In addition, since the number of reserved special game fluctuations is 0, the movement animation of the hold icon is not displayed.

  Further, the special figure 1 variable game is a target change of the notice display related to the operation means. For this reason, in the special figure 1 variable game, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is started. In this embodiment, the super reach production is started prior to the start of the operation reception period. FIG. 43 (h) shows a state in which the super reach effect has been started. In the super reach effect of the present embodiment, a dark effect is performed in which most of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in black. FIG. 43 (h) shows a state in which the darkening effect is started. When the darkening effect is started, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c have a relatively small display area and move to the right corner in the image display area. Further, the fluctuation icon display area 870 and the hold icon display area 890 disappear, and the fluctuation icon 884 is deleted. In addition, the chance button image 938 and the character string “in the 1000-carton box GET”, which are the notice display related to the operation means, are continuously displayed. Since the chance button image 938 is displayed in a white rectangular frame, the visibility is maintained high even when the darkening effect is started. In addition, since the character string “in the box” is displayed in black, it cannot be visually recognized when the darkening effect is started. In addition, although the variation display of the fourth symbol in the fourth symbol display area 912 is continued, as shown in FIG. 43 (h), when the black circular fourth symbol is displayed, the fourth symbol display becomes invisible. Note that the variation display of the fourth symbol may be displayed so as to be always visible even during execution of the darkening effect.

  FIG. 43 (i) shows a state in which the button introduction animation is started. When the button introduction animation is started, the display of the “default” chance button image 940 shown in FIG. 16 is started approximately at the center of the effect display area 208d. This suggests that the operation acceptance period of the chance button 136 will start soon. In the present embodiment, the “default” chance button image 940 having a low jackpot reliability is displayed in the operation invalid period immediately before the start of the operation reception period. After that, when the operation reception period starts, A high chance button image is displayed.

  FIG. 43 (j) shows a state in which the button introduction animation is being executed. As shown in FIG. 43 (j), a sparkling effect image is displayed around the chance button image 938 to inform the user that the stock box button is used.

  FIG. 43 (k) shows a state where the item's box box button is used during the button introduction animation. For this reason, the chance button image 938 and the character string “in the 1000-carton box GET” are erased, and it is notified that the stocked car-house box button has been used. The chance button image 938 and the character string “in senryoku GET” are displayed in an operation reception period (FIG. 43D) that is different from the display of the button reception animation (FIGS. 43L to 43M) that starts thereafter. ) And disappears based on the start of the operation acceptance period in the button accepting animation that the user has foretold.

  In addition, when a thousand-thousand box button is used, during the button introduction animation, a promotion animation for the chance button is executed, and instead of the chance button image 940, a large number of oval with higher hit reliability and "push" A chance button image 942 is displayed in which a thousand boxes with letters are placed on the pressed surface. Further, a white image 954 is displayed behind the chance button image 942. This makes it easy to understand the button introduction animation including the chance button image 942 and the button receiving animation during the darkening effect.

  FIG. 43 (l) shows a state where the button introduction animation has ended and the operation reception period of the chance button 136 has started. When the operation reception period is started, an animation during button reception is started, and an animation in which an oval is scattered around the chance button image 942 is displayed. Also, below the chance button image 942, a gauge image 760 indicating the remaining time of the operation reception period is displayed.

  The display mode of the chance button image 938 displayed during the operation invalid period and the display mode of the chance button image 942 displayed during the operation reception period are common. Therefore, the chance button image 938 is a display for notifying that the chance button image 942 is displayed during the operation reception period. Further, since the button accepting animation is selected based on the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game and the prefetch result, the chance button image 938 is also a prefetch notice for the special figure 1 variable game. In the target change of the prefetch notice, the chance button image 942 having the same display mode as the chance button image 938 that is the prefetch notice is displayed.

  In addition, even if the result of whether or not the pre-reading notice subject change is a big hit, the chance button image 942 for which the chance button image 938 is forewarned is not always displayed in the operation reception period in the case of the change. Then, the variation time of the special figure variation game may be prefetched, and the type of effect content corresponding to the variation time may be prefetched. In addition, the mode of the button accepting animation displayed in the operation acceptance period may be set to correspond to the variation time, or a lottery process for determining the mode of the button accepting animation at the start of variation of the prefetch target. May be executed.

  FIG. 43 (m) shows a state in which almost half of the operation reception period has elapsed. For this reason, almost half of the gauge image is displayed in black and the rest is displayed in white. Further, an animation in which the oval around the chance button image 942 is scattered is displayed. Note that the animation is an animation that is displayed only when a chance button image of a thousand boxes is displayed.

  FIG. 43 (n) shows a state immediately after the chance button 136 is operated within the operation reception period. When the chance button 136 is operated, the animation during button reception ends, and the animation after button reception is displayed as the first notification. When the button accepting animation ends, the chance button image 942 and the gauge image 760 are deleted.

  When the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted during the operation accepting period, the decorative symbol display device 208 can display at least an animation after accepting the button in which the oval is scattered in all directions. The pachinko machine 100 not only displays an animation in which the oval is scattered in all directions but also outputs a predetermined sound or sound effect (for example, an effect sound in which the oval is scattered) from the speaker 120 as the first notification. May be.

  FIG. 43 (o) shows a state in which the darkening effect is finished. In the effect display area 208d, a character image of Yoshimune with a guts pose is displayed, and a character string “Ohban behavior” is displayed around it, suggesting that the special figure 1 variable game will win a big hit. .

  In FIG. 43 (p), the super reach effect is finished, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c return to the initial position and size of the change, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed as “decoration 7-decoration”. "7-decoration 7" indicates a state where temporary stop display (swing fluctuation display) is performed. In FIG. 43 (p), the left and right symbols in the left, middle and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the double-pointed arrows pointing to the vertical direction indicate that “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” sways in the vertical direction. Yes.

  In addition, the character image of Yoshimune and the character string “Ohban behavior” overlap with “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c and are displayed on the rear side. For this reason, the character image of Yoshimune and the character string “Ohban behavior” are partially hidden in “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. As described above, the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern may be displayed with priority over other effect displays (for example, character images and character strings).

  FIG. 43 (q) shows a state where the special figure 1 variable game is finished. The special figure A (15R special big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Thereby, it is notified that 15R special big hit was won in the special figure 1 variable game. In addition, the fourth symbol display area 912 stops and displays the fourth symbol in a red circle, and notifies that the big win is won in the special figure 1 variable game. Further, at the time of jackpot notification, the fluctuation icon display area 870 and the hold icon display area 890 may remain disappeared, and the change icon and the hold icon may not be displayed.

  In this embodiment, the operation promotion image 960 is displayed during the display of the notice display relating to the operation means. Further, the operation promotion image 960 is displayed in an operation reception period different from the operation reception period targeted by the notice display related to the operation means. Further, at least one of the plurality of notifications is a second notification. The second notification is a conversation notice shown in FIG. The decorative symbol display device 208 can at least start the second notification when the first sub-control unit 400 accepts an operation on the chance button 136 in the first period shown in FIG.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the player may be able to perform various effects by operating the chance button 136 even in the first period.

(Example 5)
44 and 45 show examples of effects in Example 5 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 44 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure G (offset symbol) is stopped and displayed, and in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, symbol combinations other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration” are displayed. “4” is stopped and the fourth symbol display area 912 displays the fourth symbol in a blue circle to notify that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is wrong. The special figure 2 display device 214 displays a special figure d (out-of-order symbol) that is a stop symbol of the latest special figure 2 variable game. In addition, the first and second LEDs of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 are turned on to notify that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is two, and all the LEDs of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are turned off. Thus, it is informed that the number of holds in FIG. 2 is zero.

  On hold icon display area 890, hold icons 900 and 902 are displayed, respectively. The display mode of the hold icon 900 is a default white circular display mode. The display mode of the hold icon 902 is a green circular display mode. The hold icon 902 is a pre-reading notice display of the special figure 1 variable game related to the hold 2. In the variation icon display area 870, a deletion animation of the variation icon 880 is executed. In FIG. 44 (a), the variation icon 880 is erased in such a manner that the transmittance (transparency) of the variation icon gradually increases.

  Further, “decoration 4” in the right symbol display area 208c is displayed in front of the chance button image 938 and the character string “in the 1000 boxes GET”, overlapping the chance button image 938 and the character string “in the 1000 boxes GET”. ing. In this way, the final display of the decorative symbol is displayed with priority over other effect displays (for example, a notice display relating to the operation means, in this embodiment, the chance button image 938 and the character string “in the box”). May be. In addition, the chance button image 938 and the character string “getting in a thousand box GET” notify that the item's box box is being stocked. It should be noted that the chance button image 938 which is a notice display relating to the operation means and the character string “in the box of 000 boxes” are pre-read notice notices regarding the special figure variable game related to the hold 2 indicated by the hold icon 902.

  FIG. 44 (b) shows a state in which the hold 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. The special symbol 1 display device 212 executes the special symbol 1 variation display, the left middle right symbol display regions 208a to 208c execute the decorative symbol variation display, and the fourth symbol display region 912 displays the fourth symbol variation display. It is running. Further, the second LED from the left of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is turned off, and it is notified that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has decreased by 1 and the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has become 1.

  When the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, in the variable icon display area 870 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and the movement of the hold icon are displayed. An animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 900 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 890 becomes the change icon 882 and moves to the change icon display area 870. In the present embodiment, the hold icon 900 becomes the change icon 882 simultaneously with the start of the change display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the fluctuation icon 882 is a white circle like the hold icon 900. In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icon 902 gradually moves to the first area of the hold icon display area 890.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), the chance button image 938 and the character string “in the box” are displayed on the near side of the decorative symbol variation display in the right symbol display area 208c. In this way, the notice display relating to the operating means may be displayed with priority over the decorative symbol variation display.

  In FIG. 44 (c), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped (shake fluctuation display) in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the character string “reach” is displayed in the effect display area 208d below the middle symbol display area 208b. The state where the reach effect is displayed with the display of variation of the decorative symbol displayed is shown.

  In this embodiment, the chance button image 938 is displayed in front of the “decoration 2” so as to overlap the “decoration 2” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this way, other displays (for example, decorative symbols) may be hidden by the notice display (for example, chance button image 938) related to the operation means.

  In the super reach production of the present embodiment, a confrontation production (swordsman confrontation) between Yoshimune and the swordsman is started. FIG. 44 (d) shows a state in which a confrontation effect (swordsman confrontation) between Yoshimune and the swordsman has started. At the start of this confrontation effect, first, as shown in FIG. 44 (d), a swordsman character image (hereinafter referred to as “swordsman”) and a character string “swordsman see!” Are displayed. In addition, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are relatively small in display area, move to the right corner in the image display area, the change icon display area 870 and the hold icon display area 890 disappear, and change. The icon 882 and the hold icon 902 are deleted.

  Further, in the present embodiment, during the super reach effect, a notice display relating to the operation means is displayed. For this reason, when the confrontation effect, which is a super reach effect, is started, the chance button image 938 and the character string “in the box” are deleted. The notice display relating to the operation means may be displayed across a plurality of variations (a plurality of special figure variation games). That is, the period from the start of the notice display related to the operation means to the end of the button receiving animation (operation promotion display) in the operation receiving period may span a plurality of variations. In addition, when the notice display related to the operation means is temporarily hidden, the period from the start of the notice display related to the operation means to the end of the button accepting animation (operation promotion display) within the operation acceptance period is within one variation. It is desirable to be within (one special figure variation game), but it may be over a plurality of variations.

  Also, in this other finalizing effect, as shown in FIG. 44 (e) following FIG. 44 (d), an image of Yoshimune's face up above the effect display area 208d, and the swordsman's face below it. An image of the upside up is displayed, and an animation of the confrontation scene between Yoshimune and Kengo is displayed.

  FIG. 44 (f) shows a state after the animation of the confrontation scene between Yoshimune and Swordsman is displayed. Subsequent to FIG. 44 (f), as shown in FIGS. 44 (g) and (h), an animation in which Yoshimune falls is displayed. In FIG. 44 (h), “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. (Swing fluctuation display) This suggests that the special figure variation game will be out of play.

  FIG. 44 (i) shows a state in which the super reach effect has ended. The left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c return to the initial position and size of the fluctuation start, and “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” is temporarily stopped (swing fluctuation) in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Displayed). In FIG. 44 (i), the left and right symbols in the left, middle and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the double-pointed arrows pointing to the vertical direction indicate that “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is shaking in the vertical direction. Yes.

  In addition, since the super reach effect is ended, the display of the chance button image 938 which is a notice display relating to the operation means and the character string “in the garage box” is resumed. In addition, the chance button image 938 and the character string “in the box” are displayed on the front side of the “decoration 2” so as to overlap the “decoration 2” in the right symbol display area 208c. As described above, the notice display relating to the operation means may be displayed with priority over the decorative symbol before the final display (during temporary stop display).

  FIG. 44 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure G (out of symbol) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In the region 912, the fourth blue circle symbol is stopped and displayed. As a result, it is notified that there has been a shift in the special figure 1 variable game.

  In addition, “decoration 2” in the right symbol display area 208c is displayed on the near side of the chance button image 938 and the character string “getting in a thousand box GET”, overlapping the chance button image 938 and the character string “in a thousand box GET”. ing. In this way, the final display of the decorative symbol is displayed with priority over other effect displays (for example, a notice display relating to the operation means, in this embodiment, the chance button image 938 and the character string “in the box”). May be.

  Further, when the special figure 1 variable game is ended, the change icon 882 is deleted. In this example, the variation icon 882 is deleted in a default manner in which the transmittance (transparency) of the variation icon gradually increases.

  FIG. 44 (k) shows a state in which the hold 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. The special symbol 1 display device 212 executes the special symbol 1 variation display, the left middle right symbol display regions 208a to 208c execute the decorative symbol variation display, and the fourth symbol display region 912 displays the fourth symbol variation display. It is running. Further, the first LED from the left of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is turned off, and it is notified that the holding number of the special figure 1 has decreased by 1 and the holding number of the special figure 1 has become zero. Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 44 (k), the first sub-control unit 400 draws the button introduction animation, the button receiving animation, and the button receiving animation in the effect control process (step S409). Process.

  When the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the movement between the hold / fluctuation icons is performed in the variable icon display area 870 and the hold icon display area 890 of the decorative symbol display device 208. An animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icon, the hold icon 902 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 890 becomes the change icon 884 and moves to the change icon display area 870. In the present embodiment, the hold icon 902 becomes the change icon 884 simultaneously with the start of the change display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the fluctuation icon 884 is a green circle as with the hold icon 902. In addition, since the number of reserved special game fluctuations is 0, the movement animation of the hold icon is not displayed.

  Further, the special figure 1 variable game is a target change of the notice display related to the operation means. For this reason, in the special figure 1 variable game, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is started. In this embodiment, the super reach production is started prior to the start of the operation reception period. FIG. 44 (l) shows a state in which the super reach effect is started. In the super reach effect of the present embodiment, a dark effect is performed in which most of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in black. FIG. 44 (l) shows a state in which the darkening effect is started. When the darkening effect is started, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c have a relatively small display area and move to the right corner in the image display area. Further, the fluctuation icon display area 870 and the hold icon display area 890 disappear, and the fluctuation icon 884 is deleted. In addition, the chance button image 938 and the character string “in the 1000-carton box GET”, which are the notice display related to the operation means, are continuously displayed. Since the chance button image 938 is displayed in a white rectangular frame, the visibility is maintained high even when the darkening effect is started. In addition, since the character string “in the box” is displayed in black, it cannot be visually recognized when the darkening effect is started. In addition, although the variation display of the fourth symbol in the fourth symbol display area 912 is continued, as shown in FIG. 44 (l), when the black circular fourth symbol is displayed, it is not visible. Note that the variation display of the fourth symbol may be displayed so as to be always visible even during execution of the darkening effect.

  FIG. 44 (m) shows a state where the button introduction animation is started. When the button introduction animation is started, the display of the “default” chance button image 940 shown in FIG. 16 is started approximately at the center of the effect display area 208d. This suggests that the operation acceptance period of the chance button 136 will start soon. In the present embodiment, the “default” chance button image 940 having a low jackpot reliability is displayed in the operation invalid period immediately before the start of the operation reception period. After that, when the operation reception period starts, A high chance button image is displayed.

  FIG. 44 (n) shows a state in which the button introduction animation is being executed. As shown in FIG. 44 (n), a sparkling effect image is displayed around the chance button image 938 to inform the user that the stock box button is used.

  FIG. 44 (o) shows a state where the item's box box button is used during the display of the button introduction animation. For this reason, the chance button image 938 and the character string “in the 1000-carton box GET” are erased, and it is notified that the stocked car-house box button has been used.

  In addition, when a thousand-thousand box button is used, a promotion animation for a chance button is executed during the display of the button introduction animation, and instead of the chance button image 940, a large number of oval with higher hit reliability and “push”. A chance button image 942 is displayed in which a thousand boxes with the characters are placed on the pressed surface. Further, a white image 954 is displayed behind the chance button image 942. This makes it easy to understand the button introduction animation including the chance button image 942 and the button receiving animation during the darkening effect.

  FIG. 44 (p) shows a state in which the button introduction animation has ended and the operation reception period of the chance button 136 has started. When the operation reception period is started, an animation during button reception is started, and an animation in which an oval is scattered around the chance button image 942 is displayed. Also, below the chance button image 942, a gauge image 760 indicating the remaining time of the operation reception period is displayed.

  The display mode of the chance button image 938 displayed during the operation invalid period and the display mode of the chance button image 942 displayed during the operation reception period are common. Therefore, the chance button image 938 is a display for notifying that the chance button image 942 is displayed during the operation reception period. Further, since the button accepting animation is selected based on the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game and the prefetch result, the chance button image 938 is also a prefetch notice for the special figure 1 variable game. In the target change of the prefetch notice, the chance button image 942 having the same display mode as the chance button image 938 that is the prefetch notice is displayed.

  In addition, even if the result of whether or not the pre-reading notice subject change is a big hit, the chance button image 942 for which the chance button image 938 is forewarned is not always displayed in the operation reception period in the case of the change. Then, the variation time of the special figure variation game may be prefetched, and the type of effect content corresponding to the variation time may be prefetched. In addition, the mode of the button accepting animation displayed in the operation acceptance period may be set to correspond to the variation time, or a lottery process for determining the mode of the button accepting animation at the start of variation of the prefetch target. May be executed.

  FIG. 44 (q) shows a state in which almost half of the operation reception period has elapsed. For this reason, almost half of the gauge image is displayed in black and the rest is displayed in white. Further, an animation in which the oval around the chance button image 942 is scattered is displayed. Note that the animation is an animation that is displayed only when a chance button image of a thousand boxes is displayed.

  FIG. 44 (r) shows a state immediately after the chance button 136 is operated within the operation reception period. When the chance button 136 is operated, the animation during button reception ends, and the animation after button reception is displayed with the first notification. When the button accepting animation ends, the chance button image 942 and the gauge image 760 are deleted.

  When the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted during the operation accepting period, the decorative symbol display device 208 can display at least an animation after accepting the button in which the oval is scattered in all directions. The pachinko machine 100 not only displays an animation in which the oval is scattered in all directions but also outputs a predetermined sound or sound effect (for example, an effect sound in which the oval is scattered) from the speaker 120 as the first notification. May be.

  FIG. 45 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 44 (r). The darkening effect is finished, and the character image of Yoshimune with a guts pose is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the character string “Ohban behavior” is displayed around it, and the special figure 1 variable game wins the big hit It is suggested to do.

  In FIG. 45 (b), the super reach effect is finished, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c return to the initial positions and sizes of the fluctuations, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed as “decoration 7-decoration”. "7-decoration 7" indicates a state where temporary stop display (swing fluctuation display) is performed. In FIG. 45 (b), the left and right right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the left and right arrows indicating the vertical direction indicate that “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is shaking in the vertical direction. Yes.

  In addition, the character image of Yoshimune and the character string “Ohban behavior” overlap with “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c and are displayed on the rear side. For this reason, the character image of Yoshimune and the character string “Ohban behavior” are partially hidden in “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. In this way, the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol at the time of the big hit may be displayed with priority over other effect display (for example, a character image or a character string).

  FIG. 45 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure A (15R special big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Thereby, it is notified that 15R special big hit was won in the special figure 1 variable game. In addition, the fourth symbol display area 912 stops and displays the fourth symbol in a red circle, and notifies that the big win is won in the special figure 1 variable game. Further, at the time of jackpot notification, the fluctuation icon display area 870 and the hold icon display area 890 may remain disappeared, and the change icon and the hold icon may not be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the chance button image 938 as the first display is hidden during the super reach effect. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, attention is paid to the super reach production during the super reach production, and the first display is displayed during the other periods, thereby improving the fun of the game. There is a case that can be made.

(Example 6)
FIG. 46 shows an example of effects in Example 6 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 46A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. The special symbol 1 display device 212 executes the special symbol 1 variation display, the left middle right symbol display regions 208a to 208c execute the decorative symbol variation display, and the fourth symbol display region 912 displays the fourth symbol variation display. It is running. The special figure 2 display device 214 displays a special figure d (out-of-order symbol) that is a stop symbol of the latest special figure 2 variable game. Further, all the LEDs of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 are turned off, and it is informed that the holding number of the special figure 1 is zero. Further, all the LEDs of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are turned off, and it is informed that the holding number of the special figure 2 is zero.

  Further, a fluctuation icon 880 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 870. The fluctuation icon 880 is displayed in a default white circular display mode. Further, since the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 0, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 890.

  During the execution of the special figure 1 variable game, one game ball enters the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the number of holdings in the special figure 1 increases by one. The LED lamp at the left end of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is turned on to notify that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has become one. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 notifies that the hold has increased almost simultaneously with the increase in the hold. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 208 does not notify the increase in the hold almost simultaneously with the increase in the hold.

  When the number of special figure hold increases, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure prefetch process shown in FIG. 8A, and the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the increased hold is special figure A. Read ahead. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a lottery process based on the information of the prefetch result transmitted from the main control unit 300, and determines the display mode of the hold icon indicating the increased hold as the display mode of “family crest”. . In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 determines by lottery that an effect including the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is executed in the special figure 1 variable game related to the increased holding. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a lottery process for the button introduction animation, the button accepting animation, and the button accepting animation executed in the special figure 1 variable game related to the increased holding. In this embodiment, it is determined that the button introduction animation including the chance button image of “family crest”, the button receiving animation, and the button receiving animation are executed.

  In this embodiment, when the special figure hold increases, a hold increase animation is displayed. The hold increase animation is an animation representing a state in which a hold icon indicating the number of holds increases. As shown in FIG. 46 (c), a hold increase animation in which the hold icon 908 gradually rises is displayed from below the first area of the hold icon display area 890.

  FIG. 46 (d) shows a state in which the pending increase animation is being executed. In FIG. 46D, two-thirds of the hold icon 908 is displayed. FIG. 46 (e) shows a state in which a pending increase animation is being executed. In FIG. 46E, the entire hold icon 908 is displayed, and the hold icon 908 continues to move toward the first area of the hold icon display area 890.

  FIG. 46 (f) shows a state in which the hold increase animation is finished. The hold icon 908 has completed the movement of the hold icon display area 890 to the first area. Further, the hold icon 908 is displayed in the same display mode as the “family crest” chance button image shown in FIG. 16. The hold icon 908 is displayed as a prefetch notice of the special figure 1 variable game related to the hold 1. The jackpot reliability of the hold icon in the “family crest” display mode is higher than that in the red circular display mode. Further, since the hold icon 908 is displayed in the display mode of the chance button, it is also a notice display related to the operation means. Therefore, the number of holds and the jackpot reliability of the special figure 1 variable game related to the hold 1 are high, the operation of the chance button 136 becomes effective in the special figure variable game related to the hold 1, and during the operation reception period The hold icon 908 informs the display mode of the chance button image in the displayed button accepting animation. Although the hold icon 908 is displayed in the display mode used in the chance button image, the display mode of the hold icon 908 does not change even if the chance button 136 is operated because the operation is disabled.

  FIG. 46 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure G (out of symbol) is stopped on the special figure 1 display device 212, and “decoration 3-decoration 1-decoration 5” is stopped on the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In the region 912, the fourth blue circle symbol is stopped and displayed. As a result, it is notified that there has been a shift in the special figure 1 variable game.

  Further, when the special figure 1 variable game is ended, the change icon 880 is deleted. In this example, the variation icon 880 is deleted in a default manner in which the transmittance (transparency) of the variation icon gradually increases.

  FIG. 46 (h) shows a state in which the hold 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. The special symbol 1 display device 212 executes the special symbol 1 variation display, the left middle right symbol display regions 208a to 208c execute the decorative symbol variation display, and the fourth symbol display region 912 displays the fourth symbol variation display. It is running. Further, the first LED from the left of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is turned off, and it is notified that the holding number of the special figure 1 has decreased by 1 and the holding number of the special figure 1 has become zero.

  When the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the movement between the hold / fluctuation icons is performed in the variable icon display area 870 and the hold icon display area 890 of the decorative symbol display device 208. An animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold / change icon, the hold icon 908 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 890 becomes the change icon 888 and moves to the change icon display area 870. In this embodiment, the hold icon 908 becomes the change icon 888 simultaneously with the start of the decorative symbol change display. The display mode of the fluctuation icon 888 is “family crest” as with the hold icon 902. The fluctuation icon 888 provides a notice of the fluctuation with the same jackpot reliability as the hold icon 908. In addition, since the number of reserved special game fluctuations is 0, the movement animation of the hold icon is not displayed.

  In addition, the change icon 888 indicates that the operation of the chance button 136 is valid in the special figure 1 variable game and that the chance button image is displayed in the button reception animation displayed during the operation reception period. But there is. Further, the variation icon 888 is displayed in the display mode used in the chance button image, but since it is an operation invalid period, the display mode of the variation icon 888 does not change even if the chance button 136 is operated.

  FIG. 46 (i) shows a state where a moving animation between the hold / change icons is being executed. The variation icon 888 continues to move toward the variation icon display area 870.

  In this embodiment, after the change icon 888 completes the movement to the change icon display area 870 and the movement animation between the hold and change icons ends, the darkening effect is started as shown in FIG. The Also, the button introduction animation is started simultaneously with the start of the darkening effect. When the button introduction animation is started, a chance button image 800 is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d. Further, during the darkening effect of the present embodiment, the fluctuation icon display area 870, the fluctuation icon 888, and the hold icon display area 890 are deleted. Note that if the hold is 1 or more, the hold icon is also deleted. The button introduction animation may be started after the start of the darkening effect, or the darkening effect may be started after the start of the button introduction animation.

  FIG. 46 (k) shows a state where the darkening effect is being executed and the button introduction animation is being executed. The chance button image 800 is displayed in a state of being compressed up and down with the side face directed to the player side.

  FIG. 46 (l) shows a state where the button introduction animation ends. The chance button image 800 gradually protrudes upward, and the character image of “Yatsushiro Shogun” displayed on the side surface is visible. The chance button image of “family crest” shown in FIG. 16A is visible.

  FIG. 46 (m) shows a state in which the operation reception period is started and the execution of the button reception animation is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a darkening effect is being executed. A white character image “seriously” is displayed vertically on the right side of the chance button image 800, and a “button” is displayed on the left side of the chance button image 800. A white text image of “Please press” is displayed in vertical writing. A gauge image 760 is displayed below the chance button image 800 to prompt the player to press the chance button 136.

  The display mode of the chance button image 800 displayed during the operation reception period is the same as the display mode of the hold icon 908. Thus, the display related to the operation means displayed during the operation reception period (for example, the chance button image 800) is the same display mode as the advance notice display related to the operation means displayed during the operation invalid period (for example, the hold icon 908). May be displayed in part, may be displayed in the same display form as the notice display related to the operation means displayed in the operation invalid period, or may be displayed in the same manner as the notice display related to the operation means displayed in the operation invalid period It may be displayed in a completely different display mode. The notice display related to the operation means displayed in the operation invalid period may be a display mode that recalls the display related to the operation means displayed in the operation reception period.

  FIG. 46 (n) shows a state where the reach effect in the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the button receiving animation is being executed. The chance button image 800 shows a state of rotating counterclockwise. The gauge image 760 displays the remaining time of the operation reception period of the chance button 136 with the length of the white portion.

  FIG. 46 (o) shows a state in which execution of the animation after button reception is started as the first notification. Prior to the execution of the animation after button reception, the button reception animation is ended by the player pressing the chance button 136 within the operation reception period. In the decorative symbol display device 208, after the chance button image 800 and the white character image disappear, a white character image “Wagashi Yatsushiro Shogun” is displayed vertically in two columns.

  FIG. 46 (p) shows a state where the character effect image of Yoshimune who screams “Yoshimune is!” Is displayed in the effect display area 208d and the animation after the button reception ends. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” for notifying the 15R special big hit is temporarily stopped (swing fluctuation display). In FIG. 46 (p), the left and right symbols in the left, middle and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the double arrows pointing to the up and down directions indicate that “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7” is shaking in the up and down direction. Yes.

  FIG. 46 (q) shows a state in which the animation after the button reception is finished. The left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c return to the initial position and size of the fluctuation start, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c display “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” temporarily stopped (sway fluctuation). Displayed). In FIG. 46 (q), the left and right symbols in the left, middle and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the double arrows pointing to the up and down directions indicate that “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7” sways in the up and down direction. Yes.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 46 (q), the display of the fluctuation icon display area 870, the fluctuation icon 888, and the hold icon display area 890 is resumed. The variation icon 888 is displayed in the same display form as the chance button image of “family crest” shown in FIG. As described above, after the operation reception period of the chance button 136 ends, there are cases where the display of a chance button image or a variation icon having the same display mode as the chance button image remains. If the number of holds is 1 or more, the display of the hold icon may be resumed.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the special figure 1 variable game ends. When the special figure 1 variable game is finished, as shown in FIG. 46 (r), the special figure A (15R special big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed. "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Thereby, it is notified that 15R special big hit was won in the special figure 1 variable game. In addition, the fourth symbol display area 912 stops and displays the fourth symbol in a red circle, and notifies that the big win is won in the special figure 1 variable game. In the variation icon display area 870, the deletion animation of the variation icon 888 is executed. In FIG. 46 (r), the variation icon 888 is erased in a default mode in which the transmittance (transparency) of the variation icon gradually increases.

  In the present embodiment, the first display is a hold icon 908. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the first display is displayed as a hold icon, so that the special display variable game in which the operation reception period starts is clearly notified, and the player's first display is displayed. You may be able to pay attention.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 1 to 16 and FIGS. 36 to 46.

(1-1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is
Display means capable of displaying at least one of the plurality of displays (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
At least one of a plurality of notifications, at least notification means capable of notification (for example, the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display means 208, the speaker 120),
An operation means (for example, a chance button 136) at least operable by the player;
Accepting means (for example, chance button sensor 426, chance button control process (step S411), first sub-control unit 400) capable of accepting at least an operation to the operation means;
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the plurality of displays is a first display (for example, a notice display relating to the operation means, a chance button image 930 for “alcohol”, a chance button image 936 for “heat”, a chance button image 938, for example. , “?” Chance button image 944, target 958, hold icon 908, change icon 888, button introduction animation)
At least one of the plurality of displays is a second display (for example, a chance button image 932 of “Liquor”, a chance button image 942, a chance button image 940, a chance button image 800, an animation during button reception). ,
At least one of the plurality of notifications is a first notification (for example, cut-in image 920, animation after button reception, sound, sound effect),
The informing means receives the first informing when the accepting means accepts an operation to the operating means before a period in which the accepting means can accept at least an operation on the operating means is started. Is a means not to notify
The first display is a period before the period when the accepting means can accept at least an operation to the operating means (hereinafter referred to as “first period”) (for example, FIG. 36D). 36 (m), the period shown in FIGS. 37 (d) to 38 (a), the period shown in FIGS. 39 (d) to 39 (r), and FIGS. 41 (d) to 41 (i). ), Periods shown in FIGS. 41 (m) to 42 (a), periods shown in FIGS. 43 (a) to 43 (j), periods shown in FIGS. 44 (a) to 44 (c), 44 (i) to (n), the period shown in FIGS. 46 (a) to 46 (i)), at least the display can be started.
The second display can be displayed at least during a period in which the accepting unit can accept at least an operation to the operating unit (hereinafter referred to as a “second period”) (for example, an operation accepting period of the chance button 136). Display
It is characterized by that.

(1-2) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is
Display means capable of displaying at least one of the plurality of displays (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
At least one of a plurality of notifications, at least notification means capable of reporting (for example, the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, the speaker 120),
An operation means (for example, a chance button 136) at least operable by the player;
Accepting means (for example, chance button sensor 426, chance button control process (step S411), first sub-control unit 400) capable of accepting at least an operation to the operation means;
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the plurality of displays is a first display (for example, a notice display relating to the operation means, a chance button image 930 for “sake”, a chance button image 936 for “heat”, a chance button image 938, “ ? "Chance button image 944, target 958, hold icon 908, change icon 888, button introduction animation)
At least one of the plurality of displays is a second display (for example, a chance button image 932 of “Liquor”, a chance button image 942, a chance button image 940, a chance button image 800, an animation during button reception). ,
At least one of the plurality of notifications is a first notification (for example, cut-in image 920, animation after button reception, sound, sound effect),
The display means includes a first period (for example, a period shown in FIGS. 36D to 36M, a period shown in FIGS. 37D to 38A, and FIGS. 39D to 39). The period shown in (r), the period shown in FIGS. 41 (d) to 41 (i), the period shown in FIGS. 41 (m) to 42 (a), and shown in FIGS. 43 (a) to 43 (j). 44 (a) to 44 (c), periods shown in FIGS. 44 (i) to (n), periods shown in FIGS. 46 (a) to 46 (i)) Is a means that can start displaying at least,
The display means is means capable of starting display of at least the second display in a second period (for example, an operation reception period of the chance button 136),
The notification unit is a unit that does not notify the first notification when the reception unit receives an operation to the operation unit in the first period,
The notification means is a means capable of starting at least notification of the first notification when the reception means receives an operation to the operation means in the second period;
The second period is a period during which the accepting unit can accept at least an operation to the operation unit.
The second period is a period at least after the first period,
The first display is a display including at least a display related to the operation means (for example, a chance button image shown in FIG. 16A),
The second display is a display including at least a display related to the operation means (for example, a chance button image shown in FIG. 16B).
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the player is made aware of the position and operation method of the operation means by performing the first display regarding the operation means in a period in which the operation on the operation means is not accepted. There are cases where it is possible. In addition, no matter how much the player operates the operation means during a period when the operation is not accepted, the operation is not effective. Therefore, there are cases where the operation of the operation means can be practiced until the player is satisfied. In addition, after the first period, since a second period in which an operation on the operation unit is accepted is started, an operation error or the like in the second period may be prevented. In addition, since the first display displayed in the first period during which no operation is accepted is a display related to the operation means, it is intuitively easy to understand that the start of the second period during which the operation of the operation means is accepted is near. In some cases, a sense of expectation for operation of the operation means can be obtained.

(2) The pachinko machine 100,
A symbol display means (for example, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214) capable of displaying at least one of a plurality of symbol variation displays;
One of the plurality of symbol variation displays is a second symbol variation display (for example, the special diagram 1 variation game shown in FIGS. 36B to 36R, FIGS. 41B to 42F). Special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 46, special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 46 (h) to FIG. 46 (r),
The second period is a period during which the symbol display means displays the second symbol variation display,
The first display is a display displayed as a notice of the second symbol variation display (for example, a notice display of the variation).
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the first display is displayed as a notice of the symbol variation display, thereby simultaneously increasing the player's interest regarding the operation means and the player's interest regarding the symbol variation display. May be possible. In particular, since the determination result or the like is related to the symbol variation display, the interest in the first display may be increased. In particular, since the determination result is directly related to the profit of the game, the player may be able to easily pay attention to the first display. In addition, there may be a case where the player's interest in the operating means can be increased by performing the first display regarding the wearing means including information that is easily noticed by the player, such as the result of the determination of success / failure.

(3) The pachinko machine 100,
One of the plurality of symbol variation displays is a first symbol variation display (for example, the special symbol 1 variation game shown in FIGS. 37 (b) to 37 (h), FIG. 39 (b) to FIG. 39 (). h) special figure 1 variable game shown in FIGS. 43 (b) to 43 (f), special figure 1 variable game shown in FIGS. 44 (a) to 44 (j), and special figure 1 variable game). ,
The second symbol variation display (for example, the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIGS. 37 (i) to 38 (h), the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIGS. 39 (i) to 40 (g), FIG. (G) to FIG. 43 (q) special figure 1 variable game, and FIG. 44 (k) to FIG. 44 (r) special figure 1 variable game) are at least later than the first symbol fluctuation display. , The displayed symbol variation display,
The first period is a period during which the symbol display means displays the first symbol variation display,
The first display is a display that is displayed as a prefetch notice (for example, a prefetch notice display) of the second symbol variation display.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the symbol variation display period is different from the symbol variation display in which the operation to the operation unit is accepted, and further, the operation to the operation unit in the symbol variation display is not accepted. In some cases, the player may be more interested in the operation means by performing the first display regarding the operation means during the period and displaying the first display as a pre-reading notice. In addition, by executing the symbol variation display in which the operation is not accepted in spite of the first display relating to the operation means being performed, the player's expectation regarding the symbol variation display is deliberately reduced. There is a case where the expected feeling of being added can be added to the symbol variation display including the period in which the operation is subsequently accepted.

(4) The pachinko machine 100,
The display mode of the first display (for example, the display mode shown in FIG. 16A, the display mode of target 958, characters such as “?”, “Heat” and “family crest”) is the same as that of the second display. It is a display mode that suggests a display mode (for example, the display mode shown in FIG. 16B).
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the display mode of the first display is changed to the display mode that suggests the display mode of the second display, thereby further improving the player's expectation in the second period. There is a case that can be made. In addition, since it becomes possible to determine whether or not to operate the operating means in the second period before the start of the second period, the player performs a wasteful operation with a low expectation with his own intention. You may be able to choose not to.

(5) The pachinko machine 100,
At least a part of the display mode of the first display is the same display mode as at least a part of the display mode of the second display.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the display mode of the first display and the display mode of the second display are the same, so that a plurality of displays are related displays. Can be easily communicated to the player.

(6) The pachinko machine 100,
The display means is means capable of starting display of at least the second display instead of the first display.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the first display is displayed in relation to the second display by continuously displaying the first display and the second display. In some cases, it is possible to make it easier for a player to communicate something.

(7) The pachinko machine 100,
At least one of the plurality of notifications is a second notification (for example, a notification of conversation shown in FIG. 43 (e), notification based on input of a hidden command),
The notification unit is a unit capable of starting at least notification of the second notification when the reception unit receives an operation on the operation unit in the first period.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, there is a case where it is possible to surprise the player who thought that there was no meaning even if the operation was performed by the second notification. In some cases, the player can find an operation reception period (a so-called hidden command) when the display relating to the operation means is not performed.

(8) The pachinko machine 100,
The display means is means for continuing to display the first display over the first period,
The display means is means for continuing to display the second display over the second period.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, when an operation on the operation unit is not accepted, the operation unit operation error in the second period can be prevented by intentionally displaying the operation unit. There is.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be made.
In the pachinko machine 100 according to the above embodiment, the chance button 136 is provided as an operation means, but the pachinko machine 100 may include a plurality of operation means. In the operation reception period of the operation means, operations of a plurality of operation means may be received. Further, the operation promotion display (button reception animation) during the operation reception period includes a display mode that suggests one operation means among a plurality of operation means. That is, this operation may be accepted even if an operation means whose operation is not promoted by the operation promotion display is operated. In addition, the operation for the second operation unit during the operation promotion display of the first operation unit is valid, but the operation for the first operation unit during the operation promotion display of the second operation unit may be invalid. There may be.

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to rescue a player who misses the operation of the operation means. In addition, in spite of the fact that there are a plurality of operation means that can accept operations during the operation acceptance period, only the display related to one operation means is intentionally performed during the operation invalid period, so that the player can select any operation means at the start of the operation acceptance period. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent the operation acceptance period from ending while wondering whether or not to operate.

  The operation means is a means capable of changing appearance (shape change / light emission availability / light emission mode change). The display mode of the first display and the display mode of the second display include a mode corresponding to the appearance of the operation means.

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to reliably operate the operating means whose appearance has changed.

  Although the operation promotion display (button receiving animation, PUSH image, gauge image, chance button image, white arrow indicating the chance button image) is not displayed, there is a hidden command input valid period in which the operation of the operation means is validated. During the hidden command input valid period, there may be a case where an advance operation advance display for another button effect is displayed, and in the overlap period where the hidden command input valid period and another button effect operation acceptance period overlap, When the hidden command is input by operating, the input of the hidden command is accepted. Even when the notification operation based on the input of the hidden command is performed, the operation promotion advance display is continuously displayed.

  According to this configuration, the player who has seen the operation promotion advance display may be able to accidentally find a hidden command by operating the operation means.

  The display mode of the operation promotion advance display (button introduction animation) may be any mode as long as the player can recall the start of the operation reception period. In the operation promotion advance display, for example, an explanation by characters may be displayed, or only a part of the operation promotion display may be displayed, or a display in which the operation promotion display is translucent may be displayed. The operation promotion advance display may be displayed in the same display mode as the operation promotion display.

  The first display and the second display may be animation display instead of fixed display (still image). In this case, the first display and the second display may be different from each other in at least one display (one frame) among a plurality of displays (a plurality of frames) displayed as an animation.

  With the first display, a hold display such as a hold icon or a notice display may be hidden. Further, at least a part of the first display may be hidden by a hold display or a notice display.

  The period during which the first display is displayed may be longer or shorter than the period during which the second display is displayed. Further, the period during which the first display is displayed and the period during which the second display is displayed may be the same length.

  The first display and the second display may hide at least a part of the decorative design being confirmed. A third display that fills the display difference between the first display and the second display may be displayed. For example, a third display that changes from the first display to the second display may be displayed. The third display may be displayed as an animation.

  The first display may be smaller or larger than the second display. The first display and the second display may be the same size.

  The second display may be displayed without displaying the first display. When the second display is displayed, the first display may be displayed before the second display.

  In the first period, an operation promotion display different from the second display (for example, the operation promotion image 960 shown in FIGS. 41E and 43D) may be displayed.

  A plurality of first displays may be displayed in the first period, or a plurality of second displays may be displayed in the second period.

  When the display mode of the first display is the same as the display mode of the second display, another display (such as “Press the button!”) Indicating that the operation reception period (second period) is in progress. , PUSH image 750, gauge image 760, etc.) are displayed with the second display.

  The first display and the second display are displays including at least a display imitating an operation means (for example, a chance button 136).

  For example, the above embodiment can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in a game machine. For example, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine. The enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball, The ball payout may be executed by electronic display.

  Note that the items described in the above detailed description, in particular, the items described in the examples and the modifications can be combined.

In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine 1000 as shown in FIG.
The game machine according to the present invention corresponds to each reel shown in FIG. 47, “a plurality of types of reels 1002 which are rotated and driven, a start lever 1004 for instructing the rotation of the reels”. A stop button 1006 for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, lottery means (lottery prize internal lottery) for determining whether or not internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is successful, and a lottery result of the lottery means The combination of symbols displayed by the reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) that performs stop control for stopping the rotation of the reels and the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the winning combination. And a determination means (winning determination process) for determining whether or not the symbol combination is predetermined, and when the symbol stop mode is a predetermined winning mode, it corresponds to the predetermined winning mode In addition to payout control means (medal payout process 1008) for performing game medium payout processing for paying out game media to be played, effect means 1010 for executing effects based on the lottery result of the lottery means is provided. A launching device 1014 that launches a ball into the game area 1012, a winning opening 1016 configured to be able to enter a ball launched from the launching device, a detection means 1018 that detects a ball that has entered the winning opening 1016, A payout means 1020 for paying out a ball when the detection means 1018 detects a ball, a variable display device 1022 for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a shutter 1024 movable to a position for shielding the variable display device 1022 And a movable body 1026 that operates in a predetermined operation mode, and the variable display device 1022 displays a symbol when the game ball enters the winning opening and wins. And the stopped displayed After moving, are also suitable for the slot machine 1000 "is a rendering device 1010, such as to produce a game.

  The game table according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 48 (a). “Insert a bill into the bill insertion slot 2002, execute a lottery based on the bet 2004 and start 2006 operation, and display the lottery result on the lottery result display device 2008. Then, at the time of winning, the number of bonus coins is added to the remaining credit number, and when cashout 2009 is selected, the casino machine 2000 issues a receipt from the receipt issuing machine 2010 with a code corresponding to the remaining credit number. It may be.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5B, the cellular phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing the electronic data for realizing the present invention, and the electronic data for realizing the present invention as shown in FIG. The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing the video data and a home video game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 5B includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game through a mobile phone line, and acquired data about the game (this book And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 4000 in FIG. 6C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data related to the game (the present invention). And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The home video game machine 5000 in FIG. 6D includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data ( And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5E, the present invention may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data for realizing the present invention. In some cases, the electronic data for realizing the present invention is downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG.

  In addition, a game can be executed by applying the present invention to a game program that simulates the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine for a home game machine. In that case, a DVD-ROM, CD-ROM, FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used as a recording medium for recording the game program.

  Furthermore, the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko machine and a slot machine as examples of game machines, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a ball ball game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

The present invention according to the above embodiment can be summarized as follows.
(Appendix 1)
Display means capable of displaying at least one of the plurality of displays;
An operation means at least operable by the player;
Accepting means capable of accepting at least an operation to the operating means;
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the plurality of displays is a first display,
At least one of the plurality of displays is a second display,
At least one of the plurality of displays is a third display,
At least a part of the display mode of the third display is a display mode at least different from at least a part of the display mode of the second display,
The first display is a display that can be displayed at least during a period before the period during which the accepting unit can accept at least an operation on the operating unit (hereinafter referred to as “first period”). Yes,
The second display is a display that can be displayed at least during a period in which the accepting unit can accept at least an operation to the operation unit (hereinafter referred to as a “second period”).
The third display is a display that can be displayed at least in the second period.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2)
The game machine according to appendix 1,
The first display is a display including at least an animation;
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 3)
A game machine according to appendix 1 or 2,
The first display is a display that can at least notify that at least one of the second display and the third display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 3,
The second period is a period immediately after the first period.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,
The display means is display means capable of starting display of at least the second display with a first probability in the second period,
The display means is display means capable of starting display of at least the third display with a second probability in the second period,
The first probability is a probability that is at least different from the second probability.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 5,
At least one of a plurality of symbol variation displays, at least a symbol display means capable of displaying;
An attacker that can enter at least a game ball,
With
At least one of the plurality of symbol variation displays is a first symbol variation display,
At least one of the plurality of symbol variation displays is a second symbol variation display,
The symbol display means is a symbol display means capable of displaying at least the first symbol after displaying the first symbol variation display,
The symbol display means is a symbol display means capable of displaying at least a second symbol after displaying the second symbol variation display,
The attacker is an attacker capable of taking at least an open state after the first symbol is displayed on the symbol display means.
The attacker is an attacker who does not take the open state after the second symbol is displayed on the symbol display means.
In the case where the first symbol fluctuation display is displayed on the symbol display means, the display means is more likely to display the second symbol fluctuation display than the case where the second symbol fluctuation display is displayed on the symbol display means. Display means for displaying the display with high probability,
In the case where the second symbol variation display is displayed on the symbol display unit, the display unit is more likely to display the third symbol variation display than the case where the first symbol variation display is displayed on the symbol display unit. Display means for displaying the display with high probability,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 7)
A game machine as set forth in appendix 6,
The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the second display when the first symbol variation display is displayed on the symbol display means.
The display unit is a display unit that does not display the second display when the second symbol variation display is displayed on the symbol display unit.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 7,
The first display is a display including at least a display of at least a part of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 8,
The gaming table according to claim 1, wherein the first period is a period in which the accepting unit does not accept an operation to the operating unit.
(Appendix 10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 9,
The display means is display means capable of starting display of at least the first display in a third period,
The display means is a display means that does not start display of the second display in the fourth period,
The display means is a display means that does not start display of the third display in the fourth period,
The fourth period is a period in which the accepting unit does not accept an operation to the operating unit,
The fourth period is a period at least after the third period.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 10,
The display means is display means capable of starting display of at least a fourth display in a fifth period,
The display means is display means capable of starting display of at least one of the second display and the third display in a sixth period,
The fourth display is a display different from the first display in at least a part of the display mode,
The sixth period is a period during which the accepting unit can accept at least an operation to the operation unit,
The sixth period is a period at least later than the fifth period.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 12)
Display means capable of displaying at least one of the plurality of displays;
An operation means at least operable by the player;
Accepting means capable of accepting at least an operation to the operating means;
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the plurality of displays is a first display,
At least one of the plurality of displays is a second display,
At least one of the plurality of displays is a third display,
At least a part of the display mode of the first display is a display mode different from at least a part of the display mode of the second display,
The first display is a display that can be displayed at least during a period before the period during which the accepting unit can accept at least an operation on the operating unit (hereinafter referred to as “first period”). Yes,
The second display is a display that can be displayed at least during the first period,
The third display is a display that can be displayed at least in a period during which the accepting unit can accept at least an operation on the operating unit (hereinafter referred to as a “second period”).
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 13)
The gaming machine according to appendix 12,
The first display is a display including at least an animation,
The second display is a display including at least an animation.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 14)
The game stand according to appendix 12 or 13,
The first display is a display capable of at least notifying that the third display is displayed,
The second display is a display capable of at least notifying that the third display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 15)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 12 to 14,
The second period is a period immediately after the first period.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 16)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 12 to 15,
The probability that the display means displays the third display after displaying the first display is the first probability,
The probability that the display means displays the third display after displaying the second display is the second probability,
The first probability is at least different from the second probability.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 17)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 12 to 16,
At least one of a plurality of symbol variation displays, at least a symbol display means capable of displaying;
An attacker that can enter at least a game ball,
With
At least one of the plurality of symbol variation displays is a first symbol variation display,
At least one of the plurality of symbol variation displays is a second symbol variation display,
The symbol display means is a symbol display means capable of displaying at least the first symbol after displaying the first symbol variation display,
The symbol display means is a symbol display means capable of displaying at least a second symbol after displaying the second symbol variation display,
The attacker is an attacker capable of taking at least an open state after the first symbol is displayed on the symbol display means.
The attacker is an attacker who does not take the open state after the second symbol is displayed on the symbol display means.
In the case where the first symbol variation display is displayed on the symbol display unit, the display unit is more likely to display the first symbol variation display than the case where the second symbol variation display is displayed on the symbol display unit. Display means for displaying the display with high probability,
In the case where the second symbol variation display is displayed on the symbol display unit, the display unit is more likely to display the second symbol variation display than the case where the first symbol variation display is displayed on the symbol display unit. Display means for displaying the display with high probability,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 18)
The gaming machine according to appendix 17,
The display means is display means capable of displaying at least the first display when the first symbol variation display is displayed on the symbol display means.
The display unit is a display unit that does not display the first display when the second symbol variation display is displayed on the symbol display unit.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 19)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 12 to 18,
The first display is a display including at least a display of at least a part of the operation means;
The second display is a display including at least a display of at least a part of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 20)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 12 to 19,
The gaming table according to claim 1, wherein the first period is a period in which the accepting unit does not accept an operation to the operating unit.
(Appendix 21)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 12 to 20,
The display means is display means capable of starting display of at least the first display in a third period,
The display means is display means capable of starting display of at least the second display in the third period,
The display means is a display means that does not start display of the third display in the fourth period,
The fourth period is a period in which the accepting unit does not accept an operation to the operating unit,
The fourth period is a period at least after the third period.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 22)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 12 to 21,
The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the first display over a first time in the first period,
The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the second display over a second time in the first period,
The first time is at least different from the second time.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 23)
Display means capable of displaying at least one of the plurality of displays;
At least one of a plurality of notifications, at least notification means capable of notification;
An operation means at least operable by the player;
Accepting means capable of accepting at least an operation to the operating means;
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the plurality of displays is a first display,
At least one of the plurality of displays is a second display,
At least one of the plurality of notifications is a first notification,
The informing means receives the first informing when the accepting means accepts an operation to the operating means before a period in which the accepting means can accept at least an operation on the operating means is started. Is a means not to notify
The first display is a display that can be displayed at least during a period before the period during which the accepting unit can accept at least an operation on the operating unit (hereinafter referred to as “first period”). Yes,
The second display is a display that can be displayed at least during a period in which the accepting unit can accept at least an operation to the operating unit (hereinafter referred to as a “second period”).
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 24)
The game stand according to appendix 23,
A symbol display means capable of displaying at least one of the plurality of symbol variation displays;
One of the plurality of symbol variation displays is a second symbol variation display,
The second period is a period during which the symbol display means displays the second symbol variation display,
The first display is a display displayed as a notice of the second symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 25)
The gaming machine according to appendix 24,
One of the plurality of symbol variation displays is a first symbol variation display,
The second symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that is displayed at least later than the first symbol variation display.
The first period is a period during which the symbol display means displays the first symbol variation display,
The first display is a display displayed as a pre-reading notice of the second symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 26)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 23 to 25,
The game table characterized in that the display mode of the first display is a display mode that suggests the display mode of the second display.
(Appendix 27)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 23 to 26,
At least a part of the display mode of the first display is the same display mode as at least a part of the display mode of the second display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 28)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 23 to 27,
The display means is means capable of starting display of at least the second display instead of the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 29)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 23 to 28,
At least one of the plurality of notifications is a second notification,
The notification unit is a unit capable of starting at least notification of the second notification when the reception unit receives an operation on the operation unit in the first period.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 30)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 23 to 29,
The display means is means for continuing to display the first display over the first period,
The display means is means for continuing to display the second display over the second period.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix A1)
A symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display;
Display means capable of performing multiple types of display;
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of display is a display (hereinafter, referred to as “pre-reception display”) performed before the operation reception by the player.
One of the plurality of types of display is a display that is performed during operation reception by the player (hereinafter referred to as “display during reception”).
The display means is a means capable of displaying one image showing the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “first operation part image”),
The display means is a means capable of displaying one image showing the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “second operation part image”),
The first operation unit image and the second operation unit image are different display modes,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a first pre-reception animation including a first scene as the pre-reception display,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second pre-reception animation including the first scene as the pre-reception display,
The first pre-reception animation may include a second scene,
The first pre-reception animation may not include the second scene,
The second pre-reception animation may include the second scene,
The second pre-reception anime may not include the second scene,
The one effect display in the second pre-reception animation is an effect display that is not performed in the first pre-reception animation,
The first scene is a scene in which the first operation unit image is displayed and the second operation unit image is not displayed.
The second scene is a scene in which the second operation unit image is displayed and the first operation unit image is not displayed.
When the second scene is displayed as the pre-reception display, the second scene is displayed after the first scene is displayed,
The probability that the second pre-reception animation including the second scene is displayed is higher than the probability that the first pre-reception animation including the second scene is displayed.
When the pre-reception display that does not include the second scene is performed, a display including the first operation unit image (hereinafter referred to as a “first reception display”) is performed as the reception display. Is configured to be
When the pre-reception display including the second scene is performed, a display including the second operation unit image (hereinafter, referred to as “second reception in progress”) is performed as the reception display. Is configured as
In the symbol variation display, the second receiving display is displayed and the first receiving display is displayed rather than the case where the first receiving display is displayed and the second receiving display is not displayed. A game table characterized in that, when not displayed, the jackpot symbol form is more easily displayed after the symbol variation display.
(Appendix A2)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix A1,
When the second scene is displayed as the pre-reception display, after the first scene is displayed, another one or more scenes are displayed, and then the second scene is displayed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix A3)
A gaming machine according to appendix A1 or A2,
The display during reception is a display performed immediately after the display before reception.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix A4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A1 to A3,
The display means is a means capable of displaying one image showing the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “third operation part image”),
The first operation unit image and the third operation unit image are different display modes,
The second operation unit image and the third operation unit image are different display modes.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix A5)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix A4,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a third pre-reception animation that does not include the first scene as the pre-reception display,
The third pre-acceptance animation is an animation including the third operation unit image.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix A6)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix A5,
When the third pre-reception animation is displayed, a display including the third operation unit image (hereinafter referred to as “third reception display”) may be performed as the reception display. Configured to be,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix A7)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix A6,
The display during the third reception is a display that is performed only when the display of the third pre-reception animation is performed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix A8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A4 to A7,
The third operation part image is an image including a part of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix A9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A1 to A8,
The first operation unit image is an image including a part of the operation means,
The second operation section image is an image including a part of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix A10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A1 to A9,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix A11)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A1 to A9,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix B1)
A symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display;
Display means capable of performing multiple types of display;
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of display is a display (hereinafter, referred to as “pre-reception display”) performed before the operation reception by the player.
The display means is a means capable of displaying one image showing the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “first operation part image”),
The display means is a means capable of displaying one image showing the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “second operation part image”),
The first operation unit image and the second operation unit image are different display modes,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a first pre-reception animation including a first scene as the pre-reception display,
The first pre-reception animation may include a second scene,
The first scene is a scene in which the first operation unit image is displayed and the second operation unit image is not displayed.
The second scene is a scene in which the second operation unit image is displayed and the first operation unit image is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix B2)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix B1,
The operation means indicated by the first operation part image and the operation means indicated by the second operation part image are the same operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix B3)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix B2,
One of the plurality of types of display is a display that is performed during operation reception by the player (hereinafter referred to as “display during reception”).
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second pre-reception animation including the first scene as the pre-reception display,
The first pre-reception animation may not include the second scene,
The second pre-reception animation may include the second scene,
The second pre-reception anime may not include the second scene,
The one effect display in the second pre-reception animation is an effect display that is not performed in the first pre-reception animation,
When the second scene is displayed as the pre-reception display, the second scene is displayed after the first scene is displayed,
The probability that the second pre-reception animation including the second scene is displayed is higher than the probability that the first pre-reception animation including the second scene is displayed.
When the pre-reception display that does not include the second scene is performed, a display including the first operation unit image (hereinafter referred to as a “first reception display”) is performed as the reception display. Is configured to be
When the pre-reception display including the second scene is performed, a display including the second operation unit image (hereinafter, referred to as “second reception in progress”) is performed as the reception display. Is configured as
In the symbol variation display, the second receiving display is displayed and the first receiving display is displayed rather than the case where the first receiving display is displayed and the second receiving display is not displayed. If it is not displayed, it is easier to confirm the jackpot symbol form after the symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix B4)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix B3,
The display during reception is a display performed immediately after the display before reception.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix B5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices B1 to B4,
When the second scene is displayed as the pre-reception display, after the first scene is displayed, another one or more scenes are displayed, and then the second scene is displayed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix B6)
The game stand according to any one of appendices B1 to B5,
The first operation unit image is an image including a part of the operation means,
The second operation section image is an image including a part of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix B7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices B1 to B6,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix B8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices B1 to B6,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

  <Third Embodiment>

Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as the pachinko machine 100 or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to the third embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. 49 to 92 are used only in the description of the third embodiment in principle, and even in the case where overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, in the description of the present embodiment. The reference numerals shown in FIGS. 49 to 92 are given priority.
<Overall configuration>

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 includes, as an external structure, an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface. The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is attached to the front side of the main body 104 via a hinge portion 112 so that the inside Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor 109 that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and is provided with a door-side ball passage unit that guides the game balls to the launching device. An upper plate 126, a lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation. , A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 by the player's operation to a game ball collecting container (common name, dollar box), and a game guided to the launching device 110 by the player's operation The ball launching handle 134 that launches the ball to the game area 124 of the game board 200, the chance button 136 that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 by the player's operation, and the chance button 136 are illuminated. Provided that the chance button lamp 138, a. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The setting operation unit 137 is a push button type switch that can be pressed by a setting person (for example, a player or the like), a confirmation (OK) button, an upper button located above the confirmation button, and a lower part of the confirmation button. , A right button located to the right of the confirm button, a left button located to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button located further to the right of the right button. Yes. In addition, the setting operation unit 137 includes an operation unit sensor 427 (see FIG. 52) that detects the pressing operation of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of the present embodiment has a unit structure in which buttons and operation unit sensors are integrated. It should be noted that at least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 may be configured to have the same function as the chance button 136 described above.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.
<Back of pachinko machine>

  FIG. 50 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 49 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is located below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 storing the payout board 170 having 168, launch base constituting the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball A launch board case 176 that houses 174, a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game store clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.
<Front of game board>

  FIG. 51 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In this embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. It is possible to do. The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. In this embodiment, the special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general prize opening 226, a general start port 228, a first special view start port 230, a second special view start port 232, around the effect device 206. A variable winning opening 234 is provided.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detecting sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning is sometimes referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player is sometimes referred to as “rental ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper plate 126. The special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu). In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is disposed directly below the first special figure starting port 230. The second special figure starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and displays the symbol stopped, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a large winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. This variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be opened and closed. When the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special figure display device stops the big hit symbol when the special figure variable game is won. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) and at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable prize opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, After guiding a ball that has not won any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening is provided for discharging to the game island side.

The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and Further, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and driven into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc. (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.
<Directing device 206>

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b simulating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means shields the inner end portions thereof so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.
<Control unit>

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes.
<Main control unit>

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a counter circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, front frame door opening sensor, and inner frame opening sensor. And a sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a lower plate full sensor and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result or a reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device For example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, a predetermined symbol display device, A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general-purpose display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general-purpose reservation lamp 216, a first special figure reservation lamp 218, a second special figure reservation lamp 220, a high-probability medium) A drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the lamp 222 and the like, and various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232, a door member 234a of the variable winning port 234, and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the above is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the counter circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the counter circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the counter circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the second special figure starting port 232 has won a ball, the counter circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started).

The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.
<Sub control unit>

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and for measuring time, frequency, etc. The counter timer 412 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 for detecting depression of the chance button 136, and pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137 An operation unit sensor 427 that detects an operation, a sensor circuit 428 that outputs detection signals from the shielding device sensor 430, chance button detection sensor 426, and operation unit sensor 427 to the basic circuit 402, and a ROM 406 based on a signal from the CPU 404. Read stored image data, etc. It is connected to generate a display image using the rear for displaying an image on the decorative pattern display apparatus 208 VDP434 a (video display processor), a.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.
<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Based on a control signal instructing the launch intensity according to the amount, control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the ball from the upper plate 126 to the launcher 110 I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the dispensing device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.
<Type of design>

  Next, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed using FIGS. 53 (a) to 53 (c). The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described. FIG. 4A shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display according to the present invention.

  Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the variation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the special symbol form of the special figure 1. When the variation time determined before the start of variation 2 (this also corresponds to the variation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special diagram 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as symbol variation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. In FIG. 10A, 10 types of special figures from “Special figure A” to “Special figure F” and “Special figure a” to “Special figure d” are shown as the stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display. In the figure, the white portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  “Special figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  “Special figure a” is a 16R special jackpot symbol, and “Special figure b” is an 8R special jackpot symbol, both of which are in a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. “Special figure c” is a 8R jackpot symbol, which is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure C" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state. “Special figure D” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure B” which is 15R. "Special figure E" is a small hit symbol, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. In addition, “special drawing F” and “special drawing d” are out-of-order symbols, and are the symbols in which the profit amount given to the player is relatively small.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, symbols other than “Special Illustration A” are prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 53B shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed.

  For example, when the 15R jackpot of “Special Figure B” is notified, a symbol combination in which three same decorative symbols corresponding to the 15R jackpot are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration”). 1 ”or“ decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2 ”). When notifying the 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A”, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”). Etc.) is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying of the difference between “special drawing F” and “special drawing d”, symbol combinations other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 5B are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

FIG. 53 (c) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes for ordinary maps, “general diagram A” which is a winning symbol and “general symbol B” which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the usual figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 5C, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is turned off, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are turned on.
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, a main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value. In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 9v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and the state before power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the power-off state. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. In addition, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter, the ordinary figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer, respectively. Two random number counters for generating each random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a normal timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.
<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle. In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT is periodically updated (so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interruption process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms is started several times while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 52, winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed.

  In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of FIG. 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value of FIG. 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226, 234 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. When a winning is made at the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is stored in the special counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random value as a special figure 1 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area. When a winning is made to the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is sent from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 to the special figure 2 winning random number value. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value as a special figure 2 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a win at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is obtained as a normal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random value storage area. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either the winning symbol (general symbol A shown in FIG. 53 (c)) or the off symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 53 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 232a is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), in the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal state is not operating is set. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the off-normal flag is on, the normal state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing at which the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step S224, special figure prefetch processing is performed for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 (details will be described later). Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed in accordance with the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

  In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 controls the turning on / off of the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214, and then confirms the special diagram 2 using the second special symbol display device 214. Display. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 234a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 until a winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable prize opening 234. In addition to outputting a signal to be held at the same time, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and a closing period is stored in a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information indicating. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the time reduction number 100 is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the time reduction number is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. The time saving here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a normal high probability state. There is a higher probability of hitting a general-purpose variable game in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game and the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game are shorter in the normal figure high probability state than in the normal figure low probability state. Further, in the normal high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be longer than in the normal low probability state. In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a large number of games will be placed in the second special figure starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls are entered during the big win game. There is a problem that a ball enters and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of the way, the off flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 is notified. However, it is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the first special figure starting port 230.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In this embodiment, command types such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command are specified. Possible information), bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol change start command, the command data includes the big hit flag and small hit flag values, the special figure probability fluctuation flag value, the special figure stop symbol selected in the special drawing related lottery process, and the timer number. In the case of a symbol variation stop command, including a value for a special symbol variation time, including a value of a big hit flag, a small hit flag, a value of a special symbol probability variation flag, etc., a winning effect command and an end effect start In the case of a command, the value of a special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of a jackpot round number designation command, the value of a special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, winning of the variable winning port 234 Includes presence or absence.

  In the above rotation start setting transmission process, the big hit flag and the small hit flag value, the special figure probability variation flag value, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related lottery stored in the RAM 308 as command data. Information indicating the timer number selected in the process, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the big hit flag, the small hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described large winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In the above-mentioned big winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a full tray error is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display via the display circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to.

On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. Then, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit described above.
<Special figure look-ahead processing>

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special chart prefetch process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the starting information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol before the success / failure judgment process, and obtains a preliminary decision result (special The figure prefetching result) is stored in a prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308 (see FIGS. 57A to 57C).

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 prefetch result and the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are specially displayed. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetching result with the highest rank (first) is erased and the remaining special figure 1 prefetching result Are processed so that the rank of the data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 1 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 1 prefetch result data of the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 prefetch result and the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are shown in FIG. A special figure 2 prefetch number storage area for storing the prefetch number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetching result having the highest rank is deleted and the order of the remaining special figure 2 prefetching result data Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 2 prefetch data having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the starting information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S251). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Special figure 2 Compared with the number of pre-reads. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased when the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 hold number is the special figure 2 prefetch number. If they are equal, it is determined that the starting information in FIG. 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S252. If it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S254.

  In step S252, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a special figure 2 winning random value and a pair of special figure 2 random value) is obtained before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). FIG. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information and the determination table for special determination 2 and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S253 following step S252, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S254.

  In step S254, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information in FIG. 1 has increased. Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 holding number stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area and the special figure 1 pre-reading number storage as in the special figure 2. The comparison is made with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 1 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S255, and if it is determined that the starting information of FIG. Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S255, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-electric support is being performed. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S256, and if it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed (ordinary high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S258. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S256, the increased special figure 1 starting information (special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random value pair) is processed before the success determination process in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). FIG. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the determination table for special determination and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected as the special figure 1 related lottery. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S257 following step S256, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In step S258, the pre-read result for pre-Fig. 1 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the stop symbol information instead of pre-reading the start-up information without pre-reading the increased special-Fig. 1 start information. Stored in the earliest free area of the copy. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-read result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetching results in the section may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400.

In addition, pre-reading is always executed for the starting information of the increased special figure 2, and pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of the special figure 1 except during the electric support. It may be determined by lottery whether or not to pre-read the starting information in FIG. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to perform lottery and presentation using the pre-read result. Further, the start information and the prefetch result of each special figure may be stored in one start information and the prefetch result storage unit without providing an area for storing the start information and the prefetch result for each special figure. good.
<Prefetch result information>

  FIG. 57 illustrates a state in which prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 6A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 6A, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 1 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 5A, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing E” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage area “hold 2” stores “special drawing E” as stop symbol information. ”(Out of line) is stored,“ Special Figure D ”(small hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area“ Hold 3 ”, and“ Special Figure A ”is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area“ Hold 4 ”. (15R special jackpot) is stored.

  FIG. 5B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 6B, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (4 in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 2 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 5B, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing d” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4” have stop symbols. Information is not stored. In FIG. 5B, the state where the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is expressed as “none”.

  FIG. 6C shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 5C, “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “hold 1” instead of the stopped symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

In the above description, an example is given in which only stop symbols are pre-determined and only stop symbol information is stored in the pre-read result storage unit. However, the determination result, variable timer number (variable time), timer group to be described later, etc. The information may be determined and stored in the prefetch result storage unit, and may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as prefetch result information.
<Special drawing 1 related lottery processing>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58, a special drawing 1 related lottery process in the main control unit timer interrupt process will be described. In addition, the figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure 1 related lottery process.

  In step S281, it is determined whether or not the special symbol or special electric accessory is in operation, that is, whether or not the special figure 1 variable game or big hit game is in progress, and if applicable, the process is terminated. If not, the process proceeds to step S282. In step S282, it is determined whether or not there is a special figure 1 variable game on hold. If there is no special figure 1 variable game on hold, the process ends. If there is a hold, the process proceeds to step S283.

  In step S283, it is determined whether the above-mentioned special figure probability variation flag is ON or OFF. If the special figure probability variation flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S284, and a high probability table for success / failure determination to be described later [see FIG. ] Using the lottery data, the big hit determination (big hit determination) and the small hit determination (small hit determination) are performed, and if the special figure probability variation flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step S285 to determine the success described later. Using the lottery data of the determination low probability table [special figure 1], big hit determination (big hit determination) and small hit determination (small hit determination) are performed.

  In step S286, it is determined whether or not the big hit determination result is a big win. If yes, the process proceeds to step S287, and if not, the process proceeds to step S288. In step S287, a symbol lottery is performed based on the jackpot success / failure determination result and the symbol random number value, and the jackpot symbol (in this embodiment, in the case of Special Figure 1, any one of Special Figure A to Special Figure D, Special Figure 2). In this case, after any of the special drawings a to c is determined, the process proceeds to step S291.

  In step S288, it is determined whether or not the small hitting result is a small hit. If yes, the process proceeds to step S289, and if not, the process proceeds to step S290. In step S 289, a symbol lottery is performed based on the above-described small hit / no-go determination result and the symbol random number value, and the small hit symbol (in this embodiment, in the case of special figure 1, special figure E and special figure 2 are small hits). After determining (none), the process proceeds to step S291.

  In step S290, a symbol lottery is performed based on the random number value of the symbol, and after determining the off symbol (in this embodiment, the special symbol F in the case of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol d in the case of the special symbol 2), Proceed to step S291. In step S291, a variation type lottery is performed on the basis of the type of special figure stop symbol determined in steps S286 to S290 and the number of currently stored memory (at the start of fluctuation of special figure 2) to determine the fluctuation pattern and special figure fluctuation time. To do.

In the above-described special figure 2 related lottery process, a lottery process related to special figure 2 is performed. Of the special figure 1 related lottery processes shown in FIG. The table [Special Figure 1] is replaced with a high probability table for determination of success / failure [Special Figure 2], and the low probability table for determination of success / failure [Special Figure 1] is replaced with a low probability table for determination of success / failure [Special Figure 2]. Since the process is the same as the process without the determination, the description thereof is omitted.
<Data table of main control unit>

Next, a data table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.
<Win / fail judgment table>

  The failure determination low probability table [Special Figure 1] shown in FIG. 59A is an example of a table used for the determination of special figure 1 when the special figure probability is in the special figure low probability state. It is the table which linked | related and memorize | stored the numerical value range and the success / failure result of FIG. Moreover, the high probability table for success / failure determination [Special Figure 1] shown in FIG. 5B is an example of a table used for the success / failure determination of Special Figure 1 when the special figure probability is in the special figure high probability state. It is the table which linked | related and stored the range of the winning random number value, and the success / failure result of FIG.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 refers to the success / failure determination low probability table [Special Figure 1] when the special figure probability is in the special figure low probability state, and based on the acquired special figure winning random number value, Judgment whether special figure 1 variable game is won (big hit), special figure 1 variable game is won (small hit), or wrong (missed) In the case where the special figure 1 is in the special figure high probability state, the special figure winning random number value (details will be described later) is obtained by referring to the high probability table for success / failure determination [special figure 1]. The big hit judgment or the small hit judgment of FIG. 1 is performed.

  For example, when the special figure probability is in the special figure low probability state and the acquired special figure winning random number value is 10001 to 10219, it is determined that the special figure 1 variable game is won (big hit) and the big hit provided in the RAM 308 Information indicating that it is a big hit in the flag storage area is set (hereinafter, setting the big hit information in the big hit flag storage area is referred to as “setting the big hit flag on”).

  Further, when the special figure probability is in the special figure low probability state and the acquired special figure winning random number value is 10220 to 10383, it is determined that the special figure 1 variable game is won (small hit) and is provided in the RAM 308. Information indicating that the small hit flag is stored in the small hit flag storage area is set (hereinafter, the setting of the small hit information in the small hit flag storage area is referred to as “setting the small hit flag ON”).

  In the case where the special figure probability is in the special figure low probability state, if the acquired special figure winning random number value is 0 to 10000 or 10384 to 65535, it is determined that the special figure 1 variable game is lost, and The information indicating that there is a shift in the storage area for the big hit flag and the small hit flag is set (hereinafter referred to as setting the big hit flag to OFF) Setting the deviation information in the small hit flag storage area is referred to as “setting the small hit flag off”).

  The failure determination low probability table [Special Figure 2] shown in FIG. 6C is an example of a table used for the determination of special figure 2 when the special figure probability is in the special figure low probability state. It is the table which linked | related and memorize | stored the numerical value range and the success / failure result of FIG. Further, the high / bad determination probability table [Special Figure 2] shown in FIG. 4D is an example of a table used for the determination of special figure 2 when the special figure probability is in the special figure high probability state. It is the table which linked | related and stored the range of the winning random number value, and the success / failure result of FIG.

When the special figure probability is in the special figure low probability state, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 refers to the low probability table for special determination [Special figure 2], and acquires the special figure winning random number value (details will be described later). ) To determine whether the special figure 2 variable game is won (big hit) or wrong (missed) (special figure 2 big hit judgment). In such a case, the jackpot determination of special figure 2 is performed based on the acquired special figure winning random number value (details will be described later) with reference to the high probability table for determination of success / failure [special figure 2]. Note that the special figure 2 variable game is configured not to win a small hit.
<Special figure determination table>

  The special figure determination table [Special Figure 1] and the special figure determination table [Special Figure 2] shown in FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b) include the above-described big hit flag and small hit flag (result of determination of success / failure), It is the data table which linked | related and stored the random value and the kind of special figure stop symbol by the 1st, 2nd special figure display apparatuses 212 and 214. FIG.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table, the above jackpot determination result (the value of the big hit flag), the small hit determination result (the value of the big hit flag), and the acquired symbol random value. Based on this, a special symbol lottery for determining the type of the special symbol stop symbol is performed. When the big hit flag is on, the obtained big hit symbol random number value is used as the symbol random number value, and when the big hit flag is on, the small bonus symbol generated from the above special figure winning random number value is used. Use the random number value as the design random number value, and if the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off (when the big hit judgment result and the small hit judgment result are out of date), use the acquired off-set design random number value as the design random number value. To do.

  In the present embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable game, referring to the special figure determination table [special figure 1] in FIG. 10A, when the big hit flag is on (when the determination result is a big hit), When the acquired symbol random number value is 0-24, the special symbol A has a probability of 25/100, and when the acquired symbol random number value is 25-49, the special symbol B has the probability of 25 /. Is 50 to 54, the special figure C is selected with a probability of 5/100, and when the acquired symbol random number is 55 to 99, the special figure D is selected with a probability of 45/100. In addition, when the small hit flag is on (when the determination result is a small hit), the special figure E (small hit) is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the design random number, and the big hit flag and the small hit flag are set. When it is off (when the determination result is out of date), the special figure F (out) is selected with a probability of 100/100 (100%) regardless of the design random number value.

Also, in the special figure 2 variable game, when the big hit flag is on (when the determination result is a big hit), the special figure a has a probability of 70/100 when the acquired symbol random number is 0 to 69. When the acquired symbol random value is 70 to 74, the special symbol b is selected with a probability of 5/100, and when the acquired symbol random value is 75 to 99, the special symbol c is selected with a probability of 25/100. In the special figure 2 variable game, when the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off (when the result of the determination is wrong), the special figure d (missed) is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the design random number value. To do. In the special figure 2 variable game, unlike the special figure 1 variable game, the probability that the small hit is selected is set to 0%.
<Variable display time determination table>

  61 is an example of a special figure 1 fluctuation display time determination table used for determining the fluctuation time of FIG. 1, and FIG. 62 is a special figure 2 fluctuation used for determining the fluctuation time of FIG. It is an example of a display time determination table.

  The variable display time determination table is a table in which the above-described special figure stop symbol type, special symbol variable time, the effect performed using the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time of special graphic variation, and a random value are stored in association with each other. It is. The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 performs a variation pattern lottery for determining the variation time of the special figure and the effect of the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the variation display time determination table and the acquired random value.

For example, when determining the fluctuation time of special figure 1, refer to the special figure 1 fluctuation display time determination table shown in FIG. 61, the special figure stop symbol type is special figure A or special figure B, and When the numerical value range is 1001 to 20000, the variation time is 45000 ms, and the decoration design display device 208 is selected as per super reach A. Further, when determining the fluctuation time of the special figure 2, the special figure stop symbol types are special figures a to c with reference to the special figure 2 fluctuation display time determination table shown in FIG. 62. When the numerical value range is 20001 to 65535, the fluctuation time is 65000 ms, and the decoration pattern display device 208 is selected as per super reach B.
<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>

  Next, the processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when update of the effect data is necessary, effect data update processing is performed. In step S311, when the pressing of the operation means such as the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137 is detected, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to effect data corresponding to the pressing of the operation means. In step S313, if there is a command to VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420. In step S319, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 432. In step S321, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). Execute in the cycle.

  In step S501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. To do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S503 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, a control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S319, an effect random number value is updated, and the like.

  Next, the image control process in step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Sets an instruction to start data transfer The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. If not, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S605, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

In step S607, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404. In step S609, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is determined. Wait for input. In step S611, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.
<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>

  Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S701 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed. In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705.

  In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S707, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. In step S <b> 711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step S713, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S703.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and a timer interrupt process is performed in response to this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle.

In step S901 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.
<Operation means image display processing>

  Next, the operation unit image display process executed in the image control process (step S313) of the first sub control unit main process described above will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the operation means image display process.

  In step S1001, it is determined whether the start timing of the reception period of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137) has arrived. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1002, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1002. The process proceeds to S1004. The operation means according to the present invention is not limited to the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137, and includes, for example, a ball launch handle 134 and the like as long as it can be operated by the player. Further, the “operation means reception period” is a period during which it is possible to determine that the operation is valid and to execute a process corresponding to the operation when an operation of the operation means is detected.

  In addition, the condition for determining that “the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation means has arrived” is not particularly limited. For example, when winning a big hit or a small win of a special figure variable game in the special figure prefetching process, a predetermined number of games When a ball is paid out, if the gaming state transitions from the first gaming state to the second gaming state advantageous to the player (or the third gaming state disadvantageous to the player), after the big hit game For example, when a special figure variation game is performed a predetermined number of times, or when a predetermined lottery is won.

  In step S1002, in order to display the operation means image (details will be described later, for example, an image imitating the chance button 136) on the decorative symbol display device 208, effect data corresponding to the operation means image is read from the ROM 406. The process proceeds to step S1003. In step S1003, an elapsed time notification image for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation means (including an elapsed time notification image that also serves as an operation means image to be described later, and an elapsed time notification image accompanied by display of the operation means image is included. In the same manner, the effect data corresponding to the elapsed time notification image is read from the ROM 406 and the effect data is updated when the effect data needs to be updated. To finish the process.

  For example, when an elapsed time notification image that also serves as an operation means image (an operation means image that can be understood that some operation is necessary for the operation means. For example, a progress information notification image that simulates the operation means) is displayed. The effect data corresponding to the elapsed time notification image is read from the ROM 406, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. Also, an elapsed time notification image that does not include information related to the operation means (an elapsed time notification image in which it is not possible to grasp that the operation of the operation means is necessary. For example, an elapsed time notification image consisting only of a number representing the elapsed time) is displayed. If there is, the effect data corresponding to the operation means image is read from the ROM 406, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. In this embodiment, an example in which an elapsed time notification image (for example, an image of a meter scale) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in each of the examples to be described later, but the elapsed time notification image is not displayed. May be. If not displayed, the process ends without performing the process of step S1003.

  In step S1004, it is determined whether or not the operation means image is being displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. If not, the process ends. If it is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S1005. In this step S1005, it is determined whether or not the operation of the operation means corresponding to the operation means image (for example, the chance button 136 when the operation means image is an image imitating the chance button 136) is accepted, and the operation is accepted. If YES in step S1007, the process advances to step S1007. If no operation is accepted, the process advances to step S1006.

  In step S1006, it is determined whether the display end timing of the operation means image has arrived. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1007, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1008. Here, the condition for determining that “the display end timing of the operation means image has arrived” is not particularly limited. For example, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the operation means in step S1002, the gaming state is different. The case where it transfers to a gaming state etc. is mentioned.

  In step S1007, the operation means images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (including an operation means image that also serves as an elapsed time notification image and an operation means image that accompanies the display of the elapsed time notification image; the same applies hereinafter) are deleted. The display of the operation means image is terminated. In step S1008, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation means coincides with a predetermined time (T seconds) set in advance, the process proceeds to step S1009 if applicable, and to step S1010 if not applicable. move on.

  In step S1009, in order to switch the operation means image to a specific image when the elapsed time of the operation means reception period coincides with a predetermined time (T seconds) set in advance, the effect data corresponding to the specific image is changed. Processing such as reading from the ROM 406 is performed. On the other hand, in step S1010, in order to continue the display of the operation means image, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the operation means image is read from the ROM 406. If the effect data needs to be updated, image data update processing is performed. I do.

For example, an operation unit image that also serves as an elapsed time notification image (an operation unit image that can grasp the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation unit. For example, display mode (color, size, shape, font of characters according to the elapsed time) In order to continue the display of the operation means image, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the operation means image from the ROM 406 is performed. When the data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. In addition, an operation unit image that does not include information related to the elapsed time (an operation unit image in which the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation unit cannot be grasped. For example, an operation unit image including only an image imitating the operation unit, When an operation means image consisting only of character information representing a name (for example, a chance button) is displayed, the effect data corresponding to the operation means image is stored in the ROM 406 in order to continue displaying the operation means image. When the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.
<Notice lottery processing>

  Next, the notice lottery process executed in the image control process (step S313) of the first sub control unit main process described above will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the notice lottery process.

  In step S1101, with reference to the value of the big hit flag included in the command received from the main control unit 300 (for example, symbol variation start command), if the value of the big hit flag is on, it is determined that the big hit is won, step S1102 If the value of the big hit flag is OFF, it is determined that the big hit is not won, and the flow advances to step S1103. In step S1102, after performing the lottery using a lottery value corresponding to “big hit (15R series)”, “big hit (sudden probability change)” or “big hit (latency probability change)” of the notice lottery table described later, step S1106 is performed. Proceed to

In step S1103, the value of the small hit flag included in the command received from the main control unit 300 (for example, the symbol variation start command) is referred to. In step S1104, if the value of the small hit flag is OFF, it is determined that the small hit is not won, and the flow advances to step S1105. In step S1104, the lottery value corresponding to “small hit” in the notice lottery table, which will be described later, is used, and then the process proceeds to step S1106. In step S1105, the lottery value corresponding to “miss” in the notice lottery table, which will be described later, is used, and then the process proceeds to step S1106. In step S1106, the process is terminated after a command including information on the lottery result of the advance notice lottery is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500.
<Data table of first sub-control unit>

Next, a data table stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS.
<Notice lottery table>

  The notice lottery table shown in FIG. 67 is an example of a table used for the notice lottery performed in the notice lottery process described above. It is a table in which numerical ranges are associated and stored.

  In the basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400, when the big hit flag is on, the item of “symbol type” in the notice lottery table is “big hit (15R series)”, “big hit (sudden probability change)”, or “big hit ( With reference to the lottery value corresponding to “latency probability change”, a lottery (preliminary lottery) for selecting any one of the notice tables 1 to 5 is performed based on the acquired random number value for the notice lottery.

  For example, when the jackpot flag is on, the symbol type of special figure 1 is special figure A or special figure B, and the fluctuation time of special figure 1 is 15000 ms, the item of “symbol type” in the notice lottery table is “big hit (15R System) ”and“ variation time ”items refer to the lottery value corresponding to“ 15000 ms ”, and when the obtained random number for preliminary lottery is 0 to 9, the preliminary announcement table 2 is selected and the preliminary lottery randomness acquired When the numerical value is 10 to 29, the advance notice table 3 is selected, when the obtained advance notice lottery random number value is 30 to 94, the advance notice table 4 is selected, and when the obtained advance notice lottery random number value is 95 to 99, The notice table 5 is selected.

In the present embodiment, when the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off (disconnected) and the fluctuation time of the special figure is 1500 ms, 3000 ms, or 8000 ms, the notice table 1 is stored regardless of the random number value for the notice lottery. select. The notice table 5 is selected when the jackpot flag is on and the symbol type of special figure 1 is special figure A or special figure B (or the special symbol type of special figure 2 is special figure a to special figure c). Only if. Further, the lottery value when the big hit flag is on and the symbol type of special figure 1 is special figure D (latency probability change) and the lottery value when the small hit flag is on are set to be the same. In the present embodiment, the lottery is a lottery with a table for small hits, but the lottery may be performed with the same table as the table for big hits.
<Notice table>

  The notice table shown in FIG. 68 (a) is an example of the notice table 4 among the notice tables described above, and is a table that stores the notice mode and the numerical range of the lottery value in association with each other.

  The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the notice table 4 when the notice table 4 is selected in the notice lottery described above, and determines the notice mode of the notice table 4 based on the acquired random number value. The notice mode lottery is performed. For example, when the acquired random number value is 0 to 9, “button press (one time) notice” is selected, the acquired mode is determined, and when the acquired random number value is 10 to 24, “button press (two times) ) Select "Notice", select "Conversation notice" when the acquired random number is 25-39, select "Open door" when the acquired random value is 40-59, When the numerical value is 60 to 74, “Treasure box selection notice” is selected. When the obtained random number value is 75 to 89, “Step up notice” is selected. When the obtained random number value is 90 to 99, “Title box notice” is selected. Select "Notice".

  68 (b) to 68 (d) and FIGS. 69 (a) to 69 (b) are subdivided contents of the “open the door notice”, for example, the first notice. When “open door notice” is selected in the lottery, the table corresponding to “open door notice” shown in FIG. 68 (b) is referred to, and the meter color is changed based on the obtained random number value. The lottery for the second notice mode to be decided is performed. Next, in the second notice mode lottery, for example, when “meter color blue → red” is selected, a table corresponding to “meter color blue → red” shown in FIG. 68C is referred to. Based on the acquired random number value, the third notice mode lottery for determining the mode of the character (princess) is performed.

Next, in the third notice mode lottery, for example, when “Princess“ Chance! ”” Is selected, the table corresponding to “Princess“ Chance! ”” Shown in FIG. Based on the random number value, the fourth notice mode lottery for determining the next notice mode is performed. Next, in the fourth notice mode lottery, for example, when “signboard“ reach may ”” is selected, the table corresponding to “signboard“ reach may ”” shown in FIG. Based on the random number value, the fifth notice mode lottery for determining the next notice mode is performed. Next, in the fifth notice mode lottery, for example, when “Princess of a princess (Hanamaru)” is selected, a table corresponding to “Princess of a princess (Hanamaru)” shown in FIG. With reference to the obtained random number value, the sixth notice mode lottery for determining the next notice mode is performed.
<Example 1 of operation means image display>

  Next, Embodiment 1 of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 1 in time series.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6A corresponds to the first operation of the chance button 136 when the start timing of the first operation acceptance period (6 seconds in this example) of the chance button 136 has arrived. The first operating means image BG1 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) is displayed in the left display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, at the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1, the second operation means image BG2 (in this example, an image imitating the chance button) corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 is displayed as a decoration pattern. It is displayed in the right display area of the display device 208.

  Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 9A, the start timing of the second operation acceptance period of the chance button 136 (6 seconds in this example) has not arrived, but two operations on the chance button 136 are performed. In order to prompt the player, the second operation means image BG2 is displayed at the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1, and the display of the character information “Press the chance button!” Is displayed in the lower center. doing.

  Also, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. An image in which the scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136 is displayed below the first operation means image BG1.

  Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 9A, the start timing of the second operation acceptance period of the chance button 136 has not arrived, but the same image TG2 ′ as the initial image of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is displayed. The second operation means image BG2 is displayed below.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B has passed a predetermined time (2 seconds in this example) from the timing shown in FIG. 5A, and the start timing of the acceptance period for the second operation of the chance button 136 has arrived. Timing is shown. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but a predetermined time (2 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136. As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image for displaying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has passed 2 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 4 seconds) is displayed.

  At this timing, since the start timing of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has arrived, the image TG2 ′ displayed below the second operation means image BG2 at the timing shown in FIG. To the second elapsed time notification image TG2 for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, according to the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136) The scale of the meter (filled area) is gradually reduced).

  The timing shown in FIG. 7C shows the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136. As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, a moving image for displaying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has passed 4 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed. . At this timing, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continuously displayed, but a predetermined time (2 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image for notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has passed 2 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 4 seconds) is displayed. Yes.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D shows the timing when a predetermined time (in this example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but since a predetermined time (5 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image for displaying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 5 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 1 second) is displayed. Further, at this timing, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continuously displayed, but a predetermined time (3 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image for notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 3 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 3 seconds) is displayed. Yes.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but since a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image for displaying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 6 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds) is displayed. Further, at this timing, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continuously displayed, but a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image for notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 4 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed. Yes.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5F shows the timing when a predetermined time (8 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (8 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the first operation acceptance period of the chance button 136, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are displayed. Erasing. Further, at this timing, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continuously displayed, but a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 6 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds) is displayed. Yes. In this example, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased at the timing shown in FIG. 5F, but the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time are deleted. The display of the notification image TG1 may be continued.

  According to the operation means image display according to the first embodiment, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players.

  In this embodiment, the timing shown in FIG. 5A is the start timing of the first operation acceptance period (6 seconds in this example) of the chance button 136, and the timing shown in FIG. ) Is the start timing of the second operation acceptance period of the chance button 136 (in this example, 6 seconds), but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, FIG. The timing shown in a) is the start timing of the first operation reception period (for example, 6 seconds) of the chance button 136, and the start timing of the second operation reception period (for example, 8 seconds) of the chance button 136. It is good. That is, the start timings of the N-th operation (N is a positive integer) operation reception period of the operation means may be set to the same timing (the same applies to other embodiments).

In addition, when the start timing of the first operation reception period (for example, 6 seconds) of the chance button 136 and the start timing of the second operation reception period (for example, 8 seconds) of the chance button 136 are set to the same timing. Even when each reception time is different, the notification start timing of the elapsed time may be different. In this example, the reception time of the second operation of the chance button 136 after two seconds have elapsed from the start of the operation reception. The elapsed time may be notified.
<Example 2 of operation means image display>

  Next, a second embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 2 in time series. In addition, since the display shown to the same figure (a)-the same figure (f) is the same as the display example shown to the said FIG.70 (a)-(f), the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 71 (g) shows the state shown in FIGS. 71 (a) to (d), that is, the state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136. The timing at which the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed is shown. At this timing, since the first operation of the chance button 136 has been performed, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, and instead of the image display, a decorative symbol display device A character image (donor) is displayed in the left display area 208.

  The timing shown in (h) of the figure shows the timing when a predetermined time (8 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (a) of the figure. At this timing, the display of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continued, but a predetermined time (6 seconds) from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. Has elapsed, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is notified that the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 6 seconds (the remaining time of the acceptance period is 0 seconds). The image to be displayed is displayed.

  The timing shown in (i) of the figure shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (b) of the figure. At this timing, since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the second operation acceptance period of the chance button 136, the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 are displayed. Erasing. When a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the reception period for the second operation of the chance button 136, the second operation means image BG2 and the second operation means image BG2 are displayed as shown in FIG. A character image (時間) may be displayed instead of the display of the elapsed time notification image TG2. In the state where the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed, the operation of the chance button 136 is performed during the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 ((g) in this example). In addition, as shown in FIG. 6J, a character image (爺) may be displayed instead of displaying the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2. The timing shown in FIG. 10 (k) shows the timing when the second operation of the chance button 136 is accepted immediately after a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has passed since the timing shown in FIG. Yes. At this timing, since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the first operation acceptance period of the chance button 136, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are displayed. Since the second operation of the chance button 136 has been performed, the character image (爺) is displayed instead of the display of the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2. doing. In the state where the first operation of the chance button 136 is not performed, the operation of the chance button 136 is performed during the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 ((g) in this example). In addition, as shown in FIG. 8J, a character image (don and niece) may be displayed instead of displaying the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2.

  The timing shown in (l) of FIG. 4 indicates the timing immediately after a predetermined time (8 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (a) of FIG. At this timing, a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136, and the first and second operations of the chance button 136 have not been performed. The second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 are deleted.

According to the operation means image display according to the second embodiment, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players.
<Third embodiment of operation means image display>

  Next, a third embodiment of the operation unit image display performed by the above-described operation unit image display process will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 3 in time series.

  In the third embodiment, a third elapsed time notification image TG3 is applied instead of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 in the first embodiment. The third progress information notification image TG3 is an image for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, and also an image suggesting the success / failure result of the special figure variation game. . With such a configuration, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the progress information notification image, and thus it may be possible to prompt the operation of the operation means.

  In this example, the result of the success / failure determination is suggested using an elapsed time notification image that notifies the elapsed time of the first operation acceptance period of the chance button 136, but in addition to this (or in addition to this) Instead, the result of the determination of success / failure may be suggested using an elapsed time notification image that notifies the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136, and there may be three or more progress information notification images. In this case, the determination result may be suggested using at least one progress information notification image.

  Further, in addition to suggesting the result of the success / failure determination using the progress information notification image, the result of the determination of the success / failure may be suggested in another display area. Further, in this example, the display of the third elapsed time notification image TG3 is started when the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has come, but the display is performed at other timings. For example, the display of the third elapsed time notification image TG3 may be started after the elapse of a predetermined time after the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has arrived. The display of the third elapsed time notification image TG3 may be started at the timing when the operation of the chance button 136 is performed (for example, the timing when the first or second operation is performed).

According to the operation means image display according to the third embodiment, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players.
<Example 4 of operation means image display>

  Next, a fourth embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 4 in time series.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6A, the first operation corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 is triggered by the arrival timing of the first and second operation acceptance periods of the chance button 136. The means image BG1 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) and the second operation means image BG2 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 are displayed at the same timing. It is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Also, a first elapsed time notification for notifying the elapsed time (in this example, 6 seconds) of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. An image TG1 (in this example, an image in which the scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the first operation acceptance period of the chance button 136) is displayed on the first operation means image BG1. Shown below.

  Further, a second elapsed time notification for notifying the elapsed time (6 seconds in this example) of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the second operation means image BG2. An image TG2 (in this example, an image in which the scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the second operation means image BG2. Shown below.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B shows the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136. As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image for displaying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 4 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed.

  Further, at this timing, the display of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is also continued, but a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image for notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 4 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed. Yes.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7C shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but since a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image for displaying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 6 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds) is displayed.

  Further, at this timing, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continuously displayed, but a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 6 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds) is displayed. Yes.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D shows the timing when a predetermined time (8 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (8 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the first operation reception period of the chance button 136, the predetermined time from the start timing of the first operation reception period of the chance button 136. Immediately after (6 seconds) have elapsed, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, and the state continues.

  At this timing, since a predetermined time (8 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the second operation reception period of the chance button 136, the start timing of the second operation reception period of the chance button 136 is Immediately after the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed, the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 are deleted, and the state is continued.

  FIG. 8E shows the state shown in FIG. 7B, that is, the state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the first and second operation acceptance periods of the chance button 136. The timing at which the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed is shown. At this timing, since the first operation of the chance button 136 has been performed, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, a decorative symbol display is displayed instead of the image display. A character image (donor) is displayed in the left display area of the device 208.

  FIG. 5F shows the state of the chance button 136 in the state shown in FIG. 5E, that is, in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the second operation acceptance period of the chance button 136. The timing at which the second operation is performed is shown. At this timing, since the second operation of the chance button 136 has been performed, after the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 are erased, a decorative symbol display is displayed instead of the image display. In the right display area of the device 208, a character image (爺) different from the character image (donor) is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 5E, the second operation of the chance button 136 is not performed and the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation. The display shown in f) may be performed.

  FIG. 4G shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation without the second operation of the chance button 136 being performed. At this timing, since the second operation of the chance button 136 is not performed and a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation, the second operation means image BG2 and the second operation means image BG2 The elapsed time notification image TG2 is deleted.

According to the operation means image display according to the fourth embodiment, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players.
<Example 5 of operation means image display>

  Next, a fifth embodiment of the operation unit image display performed by the above-described operation unit image display process will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 5 in time series.

  In the fifth embodiment, a fourth elapsed time notification image TG4 is applied instead of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 in the fourth embodiment. The fourth progress information notification image TG4 is an image for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136, and also an image suggesting the success / failure result of the special figure variation game. . With such a configuration, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the progress information notification image, and thus it may be possible to prompt the operation of the operation means.

  In this example, the result of the success / failure determination is suggested using an elapsed time notification image that notifies the elapsed time of the first operation acceptance period of the chance button 136, but in addition to this (or in addition to this) Instead, the result of the determination of success / failure may be suggested using an elapsed time notification image that notifies the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136, and there may be three or more progress information notification images. In this case, the determination result may be suggested using at least one progress information notification image.

  Further, in addition to suggesting the result of the success / failure determination using the progress information notification image, the result of the determination of the success / failure may be suggested in another display area. In this example, the display of the fourth elapsed time notification image TG4 is started when the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has arrived. For example, the display of the fourth elapsed time notification image TG4 may be started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has arrived. The display of the fourth elapsed time notification image TG4 may be started at the timing when the operation of the chance button 136 is performed (for example, the timing when the first or second operation is performed).

According to the operation means image display according to the fifth embodiment, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players.
<Operation Means Image Display Example 6>

  Next, Embodiment 6 of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 6 in time series.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the operation means image display, a notice effect by the notice lottery process described above is performed. For example, in the case of hitting special figure 1 by big hit determination, special figure stop figure of special figure 1 is decided to special figure A by special figure lottery, and the fluctuation time of special figure is decided to be 45000 ms by fluctuation pattern lottery, The first sub-control unit 400 receives the command from the main control unit 300 based on the fact that the jackpot flag value is ON, the special figure stop symbol is special figure A, and the special figure variation time is 45000 ms. The notice lottery is performed using the lottery value corresponding to the fluctuation time of 45,000 ms of the “big hit (15R system)” in the notice lottery table shown in 67. In this notice lottery, if it is assumed that the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 30 to 94, the notice table 4 is selected.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the notice table 4 shown in FIG. 68A, and performs the first notice mode lottery for determining the notice mode of the notice table 4 based on the acquired random number value. For example, if it is assumed that the acquired random number value is in a numerical value range of 40 to 59, “open door notice” is selected. Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the notice table corresponding to the “open door notice” shown in FIG. 68 (b), and determines the color of the meter based on the obtained random number value for the second time. For example, assuming that the obtained random number value is in a numerical value range of 50 to 64, “meter color blue → red” is selected.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the notice table corresponding to “meter color blue → red” shown in FIG. 68 (c), and based on the acquired random number value, the character (princess) mode For example, if it is assumed that the acquired random number value is in a numerical range of 30 to 59, the princess “chance!” Is selected. In the sixth embodiment, the notice effect is executed according to the notice effect form determined by the notice lottery or the notice form lottery.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 75 (a), the first operation means corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 is triggered by the arrival timing of the operation period for the operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, 6 seconds). An image BG1 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) is displayed in the right display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 5A, in order to prompt the player to perform an operation on the chance button 136, the display of the character information “Open the door !!” is displayed above the left display area.

  In addition, a first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 (in this example, a chance opportunity) for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at almost the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. An image in which the scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the operation period for the operation of the button 136) is displayed in the first operation means image BG1 in the first color (blue in this example). It is displayed below.

  In addition, at the same timing as the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1, an image corresponding to the notice effect of the above-mentioned "open the door notice" (in this example, the characters "open the door !!") A display and an image simulating a door) are displayed in the right display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the present embodiment, the first elapsed time notification for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136 for a part of the image of the notice effect (in this example, an image simulating a door). It also serves as the image TG1-2.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7B shows the timing when a predetermined time (1 second in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (1 second) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. Displays an image for notifying that 1 second has passed (the remaining time of the reception period is 5 seconds). On the other hand, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 also serving as a notice effect is not changed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7C shows the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. Displays an image for informing that 1 second has elapsed (that the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds). At this timing, the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 is set to the first color (in this example, blue) as the image corresponding to the notice effect of “meter color (blue → red)”. ) To the second color (in this example, red).

  Further, at this timing, the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 is changed, and at the same time, the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 is changed from the third color (in this example, white) to the first. The color is changed to 4 (red in this example). With such a configuration, it may be possible to strongly urge the player to perform an operation.

  Here, by changing the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 and the color of the second elapsed time notification image TG1-2, a predetermined time from the start timing of the operation button reception period of the chance button 136 is obtained. Although it is informed that (4 seconds) has elapsed, the change in the color may be configured to suggest, for example, the result of the special figure variation game.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. Displays an image for informing that 6 seconds have elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds). On the other hand, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 also serving as a notice effect is not changed.

  FIG. 5E shows the timing when the chance button 136 is operated in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136. At this timing, since the chance button 136 is operated, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification images TG1-1 and TG-2 are erased, the above-mentioned princess “chance!” The image corresponding to the notice effect (in this example, the character display of “chance!” And the character image (princess)) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. This notice effect may be displayed when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation acceptance period without the operation of the chance button 136 being performed.

  FIG. 5F shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation acceptance period without the operation of the chance button 136 being performed. At this timing, since the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed and a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the first operation reception period, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification After erasing the images TG 1-1 and TG-2, the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The display may be performed after the display shown in FIG. FIG. 5G is a diagram showing an example of reach display in the decorative symbol variation display, and the reach display is performed after any of the states shown in FIGS. Is displayed.

According to the operation means image display according to the sixth embodiment, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players. In the present embodiment, the lottery is also performed for the display of the elapsed time notification image (meter color) in the notice table, but the lottery may not be performed in the notice table for the elapsed time notice image. In this case, the elapsed time notification image notifies only the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation means, and changes the display mode after a predetermined time (for example, the color of the meter changes when T seconds elapse). There may be. Further, the elapsed time notification image may be a notification that only notifies the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation means and does not change the display mode (color, size, shape, character font, etc.) with the passage of time. .
<Operating Means Image Display Example 7>

  Next, a seventh embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described using FIG. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 7 in time series. In this embodiment, in addition to the operation means image display, a notice effect by the notice lottery process described above is performed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6A, the first operation corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 is triggered by the arrival timing of the operation period for the operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, 6 seconds). The operation means image BG1 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) is displayed in the central display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In addition, a first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 (in this example, a chance opportunity) for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at almost the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. An image in which the scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the operation period for the operation of the button 136) is displayed in the first operation means image BG1 in the first color (blue in this example). It is displayed below.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7B shows the timing when a predetermined time (1 second in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (1 second) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. Displays an image for notifying that 1 second has passed (the remaining time of the reception period is 5 seconds).

  The timing shown in FIG. 5C shows the timing when a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (3 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. An image for informing that 3 seconds have passed has been displayed. Further, at this timing, the remaining time notification image TG1-2 (not shown) for notifying the remaining time (3 seconds in this example) of the operation button reception period of the chance button 136 above the first operation means image BG1. In the example, an image of numerical information) is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D shows the timing when a predetermined time (in this example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (5 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. Is displaying an image notifying that 5 seconds have elapsed. Further, at this timing, an image for notifying that the remaining time of the operation of the chance button 136 is 1 second is displayed as the remaining time notification image TG1-2.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. Is displaying an image notifying that 6 seconds have elapsed. At this timing, as the remaining time notification image TG1-2, the remaining operation time of the chance button 136 is 0 seconds (a predetermined time (6 seconds from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136). ) Has been displayed.

  FIG. 5F is a diagram showing an example of a failure display when the result of the special figure variable game is out of play, and FIG. 8G is a jackpot display when the result of the special figure variable game is a big hit. It is the figure which showed an example. In these missed display or jackpot display, the operation of the chance button 136 is performed in a state (during the operation reception period) before a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136. Or when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation acceptance period without the operation of the chance button 136 being performed.

According to the operation means image display according to the seventh embodiment, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players.
<Operating Means Image Display Example 8>

  Next, an eighth embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 8 in time series. In this embodiment, in addition to the operation means image display, a notice effect by the notice lottery process described above is performed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6A, the right of the setting operation unit 137 is triggered by the start timing of the right button and left button operation reception period (in this example, 6 seconds). The first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the button operation (in this example, an image imitating a treasure box; white) is used for the right display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and for the left button operation of the setting operation unit 137. The corresponding second operation means image BG2 (in this example, an image imitating a treasure box, white) is displayed in the left display area. At the timing shown in FIG. 6A, the left side of the character information display “Select a treasure chest that can be opened with the direction key!” Is displayed to prompt the player to operate the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137 It is displayed above the area.

  Further, at the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1 and the second operation means image BG2, the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137 is notified. First elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, an image in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137) Are displayed in the central display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the first color (blue in this example).

  The timing shown in FIG. 7B shows the timing when a predetermined time (1 second in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (1 second) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation period for the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137, the setting operation unit TG1 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the reception period of the operation of the right button and the left button of 137 has passed 1 second (the remaining time of the reception period is 5 seconds) is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7C shows the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the right button and left button operation reception period of the setting operation unit 137, the setting operation unit TG1 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the reception period of the operation of the right button and the left button of 137 has elapsed for 1 second (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed. At this timing, the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is changed from the first color (blue in this example) to the second as the image corresponding to the notice effect of “treasure box color (blue → red)”. (In this example, it is red).

  At this timing, the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 is changed, and at the same time, the color of the second operation means image BG2 is changed from the third color (white in this example) to the fourth color. (In this example, it is red). Here, by changing the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 and the color of the second operation means image BG2, the start timing of the reception period of the operation of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137 is changed. Although it is informed that the predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed, for example, it may be configured to suggest a result of the special figure variation game.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation period for the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137, the setting operation unit TG1 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the reception period of the operation of the right button and the left button of 137 has elapsed for 6 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 second) is displayed. On the other hand, the display of the second operation means image BG2 that also serves as a notice effect is not changed.

  FIG. 6E shows that the right button of the setting operation unit 137 is operated in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation period for the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137. The timing performed is shown. At this timing, since the right button of the setting operation unit 137 has been operated, the first operation unit image BG1, the second operation unit image BG2, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are deleted. An image corresponding to the next notice effect (in this example, an image showing a book popping out from the treasure chest) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  On the other hand, FIG. 6F shows the left button of the setting operation unit 137 in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period for the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137. The timing at which the operation was performed is shown. At this timing, since the left button of the setting operation unit 137 has been operated, the first operation unit image BG1, the second operation unit image BG2, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are deleted. An image corresponding to the next notice effect (in this example, an image showing a book popping out from the treasure chest) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the notice effects shown in (e) and (f) of FIG. Further, when the determination result of the special figure variable game is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 6G, a notice effect with higher reliability and expectation is performed than the notice effect shown in FIG. It may be configured.

  FIG. 11H shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period without the operation of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137 being performed. At this timing, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is erased since a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period without the operation of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137 being performed. ing. Note that the first operation means image BG1 and the second operation means image BG2 may be deleted in accordance with the deletion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1.

According to the operation means image display according to the seventh embodiment, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players.
<Example 9 of operation means image display>

  Next, a ninth embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described using FIG. In addition, the figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 9 in time series. In this embodiment, in addition to the operation means image display, a hold icon and a change icon are displayed.

  Here, the hold icon refers to an animation of a texture image representing the number of hold of the special figure variable game. As an animation related to the hold icon, for example, when the hold increases and a new hold icon is displayed. The animation to be executed (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “pending icon increase animation”), the order of the hold changes due to the digestion of the previous hold, and the hold icon changes to another display position (for example, the position on the left side) ) Animation executed when moving to () (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “pending icon movement animation”), animation executed when the display state of the holding icon changes based on the pre-read result, etc. (hereinafter “ Hold icon change animation ”), the hold is consumed and the hold icon Animation to be executed when left (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “pending icon erasing animation”), non-priority side special icon hold icon when priority side special figure hold increases in priority change aircraft There is an animation (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “pending icon save animation”) executed when the icon is saved. In addition to the above animation, an animation that can be executed independently during a period other than the execution of the animation (for example, a period in which there is no increase / decrease of the hold or change of the hold icon) and that can be executed redundantly with the animation ( Hereinafter, it may be referred to as “standby icon standby animation”. There may be a case where a plurality of animations for increasing, moving, changing, erasing, saving, and waiting for the hold icon are executed in duplicate.

  In addition, after the suspension is digested and the special figure variable game is started, one variable icon corresponding to the special figure variable game may be displayed. The variation icon has a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon, for example, and is displayed as a texture image animation in the same manner as the hold icon. Depending on the display mode, the change icon can be notified about the validity of the change (the change notice), and is basically erased at the timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the change icon can be considered as a kind of hold icon in the sense that the notification of the result of the special figure change game is held.

  For animations related to both the hold icon and the variable icon, the earliest hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is moved to a different area from the hold icon display area when the hold is consumed. Animation that moves as a fluctuation icon (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “moving animation between hold and change icons”) and animation that changes from the hold icon display form to the change icon display form (hereinafter “between hold and change icons” Sometimes called “change animation”. These animations may be combined and executed at the same time. When the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the change icon are the same, the execution of the change animation between the hold / change icon can be omitted.

  Examples of the animation related to the fluctuation icon include an animation executed during execution of the special figure variable game (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “variable icon standby animation”), and a fluctuation icon after the special figure variable game ends. Animation that is executed when the icon is deleted (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “variable icon deletion animation”), animation that is executed when the display mode of the variable icon is changed in the middle (hereinafter referred to as “variable icon change”) There are cases where it is called “animation”). These animations may be executed at the same time in combination with each other. In addition, the variation icon standby animation may be executed at the same time in combination with the movement animation or the change animation between the hold / variation icons.

  FIG. 5A shows the timing when the special figure variable game is finished and the decorative symbols are stopped. At this timing, four hold icons (circular images in this example) PI1 to PI4 are displayed below the decorative symbol display device 208 to indicate that there are four special figure variable games on hold.

  FIG. 4B shows the timing when the reserved special figure variable game is started and the special figure variable game hold is reduced from 4 to 3. At this timing, after the change animation for changing the first (first) hold icon PI1 displayed in the hold icon display area to the change icon CI is performed, the change icon is displayed in the central display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. CI is stopped and displayed. The variation icon CI is a variation icon for suggesting the success / failure result of the special figure variation display corresponding to the earliest hold icon PI1. In this example, the variation icon CI is represented by character information “chance” and a star-shaped figure. It is composed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6C, the first operation means corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 is triggered by the arrival timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136 (in this example, 6 seconds). An image BG1 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) is displayed behind the variation icon CI. That is, in this example, at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 is covered with the change icon CI, so that at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 is invisible or difficult to see. .

  Also, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, the chance button 136 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. The scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the operation reception period of the first operation) in the first color (blue in this example) below the first operation means image BG1. And displayed behind the variation icon CI. That is, in this example, at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the variation icon CI, so that at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to view. ing.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D shows the timing when a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (3 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is 3 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 3 seconds) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the variation icon CI, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to view.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is 6 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 second) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the variation icon CI, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to view.

  FIG. 5F shows the state in which the operation of the chance button 136 is performed in the state shown in FIG. 5C, that is, in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136. The timing performed is shown. At this timing, since the chance button 136 has been operated, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, the information indicating the success / failure result of the special figure change (this In the example, “Leach is!” Is displayed behind the variation icon CI. That is, in this example, a part of the information that suggests whether or not the special figure change is correct is covered with the change icon CI, so that a part of the information is invisible or difficult to see.

  If the operation of the chance button 136 is performed before a predetermined time has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the first operation means image is displayed as shown in FIG. After erasing BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1, information suggesting whether or not the special figure change is correct may be displayed in front of the change icon CI. Although not shown in the figure, after the change icon CI is erased in addition to the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1, information indicating the result of the special figure change is displayed. Good.

  Further, when the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period without the operation of the chance button 136, the display of FIG. FIG. 11H is a diagram showing an example of the variation display of the decorative symbol. The variation display is displayed after any of the states (e), (f), and (g). Also good.

According to the operation means image display of the ninth embodiment, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where the display mode hidden by the player can be focused and concentrated on the game.
<Example 10 of operation means image display>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 79, a description will be given of a tenth embodiment of operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 10 in time series. In this embodiment, in addition to the operation means image display, a hold icon and a notice effect are displayed.

  FIG. 5A shows the timing when the special figure variable game is finished and the decorative symbols are stopped. At this timing, four hold icons (circular images in this example) PI1 to PI4 are displayed below the decorative symbol display device 208 to indicate that there are four special figure variable games on hold.

  FIG. 4B shows the timing when the reserved special figure variable game is started and the special figure variable game hold is reduced from 4 to 3. At this timing, an erase animation for erasing the earliest hold icon PI1 displayed in the hold icon display area is performed, and the first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 (chance in this example) Button).

  Also, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, the chance button 136 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. The scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the operation reception period of the first operation) in the first color (blue in this example) below the first operation means image BG1. Is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7C shows the timing when a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, based on the result of whether or not the special figure variation game is successful, a notice effect is displayed (in this example, an image in which an upside-down character image (dono) has a signboard with “Leach may”) is displayed). Yes.

  At this timing, since a predetermined time (3 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. Is displayed on the screen to notify that 3 seconds have elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 3 seconds). However, since all of the first operation means image BG1 and all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are covered with the image of the notice effect, all of the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image are displayed. All of TG1 is invisible. Note that at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 or at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 may be invisible or difficult to view.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D shows the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is 4 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed. However, since all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the image of the notice effect, all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is 6 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 second) is displayed. However, since all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the image of the notice effect, all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible.

  FIG. 5F shows the timing when the chance button 136 is operated in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136. At this timing, since the chance button 136 has been operated, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, the information indicating the success / failure result of the special figure change (this In the example, “character information“ It's super hot !! ”) is displayed behind the fluctuation icon CI. In other words, in this example, a part of the information that suggests whether or not the special figure change is correct is covered with the image of the notice effect, so that a part of the information is invisible.

  If the operation of the chance button 136 is performed before a predetermined time has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the first operation means image is displayed as shown in FIG. After erasing BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and the notice effect, information suggesting whether or not the special figure has changed may be displayed.

  Further, when the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period without the operation of the chance button 136, the display of FIG. FIG. 11H is a diagram showing an example of the variation display of the decorative symbol. The variation display is displayed after any of the states (e), (f), and (g). Also good.

According to the operation means image display of the tenth embodiment, it may be possible to prompt the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where the display mode hidden by the player can be focused and concentrated on the game.
<Example 11 of operation means image display>

  Next, Example 11 of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 11 in time series. In the present embodiment, in addition to the operation means image display, it is configured to display the notice change effect based on the normal map change display and the determination of whether or not the normal figure change display is correct.

  FIG. 4A shows the timing when the general map variation display is started during the special map variation display, and the production accompanying the general map variation display is started. At this timing, the base map change display is started in the base map change display area 208s, the notice effect is performed based on the determination of whether or not the base map change display is appropriate, and the first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 is performed. (In this example, an image simulating a chance button) is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, whether or not the normal figure variable game is successful is determined using a general figure determination table shown in FIG. 157 described later, and the normal figure control state has a low probability, and the obtained random number value is 90 to 99. Therefore, an example in which the symbol 2 per ordinary figure (the ordinary decoration 2 shown in FIG. 153 (d) described later) is selected is shown. Note that details of the determination of whether or not the common figure variable game is successful using the general figure determination table of FIG. 157 will be described in a third example of the fifth embodiment.

  Also, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, the chance button 136 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. The scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the operation reception period of the first operation) in the first color (blue in this example) below the first operation means image BG1. Is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7B shows the timing when a predetermined time (1 second in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, a notice effect (in this example, a character image (princess) appears from below) is performed based on the normal map change display and whether or not the normal map change game is successful.

  At this timing, since a predetermined time (1 second) has elapsed since the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. Displays an image for notifying that 1 second has passed (the remaining time of the reception period is 5 seconds). However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the character image (princess) of the notice effect, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is not visible. In addition to this (or in place of it), at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 may be invisible or difficult to visually recognize (the same applies to the following in this embodiment).

  The timing shown in FIG. 7C shows the timing when a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the announcement effect based on the result of the normal-game variable game is continued, and, as the first elapsed time notification image TG1, the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 has passed 3 seconds (the remaining period of the reception period) An image informing that the time is 3 seconds) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the character image (princess) of the notice effect, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is not visible.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is 6 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 second) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the character image (princess) of the notice effect, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible.

  FIG. 4E shows the timing when the usual stop display is performed. At this timing, after erasing the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1, information indicating the result of the normal fluctuation (in this example, the character image (princess) has a fan) Image). Further, as described above, since the symbol 2 per universal symbol is selected in the common variable game, the universal symbol decorative symbol corresponding to the “general symbol decoration 2” is displayed in the general symbol variation display area 208s.

  FIG. 5F shows the timing when the chance button 136 is operated in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136. At this timing, since the chance button 136 has been operated, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, the information indicating the success / failure result of the special figure change (this In the example, the text information “is it a chance?” Is displayed. When a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the operation reception period without the operation of the chance button 136, the display shown in FIG.

According to the operation means image display of the eleventh embodiment, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where the display mode hidden by the player can be focused and concentrated on the game.
<Example 12 of operation means image display>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 81, a description will be given of Embodiment 12 of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 12 in time series. In this embodiment, in addition to the operation means image display, a hold icon and a notice effect are displayed.

  FIG. 5A shows the timing when the special figure variable game is finished and the decorative symbols are stopped. At this timing, three hold icons PI1 to PI3 are displayed below the decorative symbol display device 208 to indicate that there are three special figure variable games on hold. In this example, by displaying a character image (savohani) as the third hold icon PI3, the result of the prefetch of the third special figure variable game is suggested.

  FIG. 4B shows the timing when the reserved special figure variable game is started and the special figure variable game hold is reduced from 3 to 2. At this timing, an erase animation for erasing the first hold icon PI1 displayed in the hold icon display area is performed, and the second hold icon PI2 and the third hold icon PI3 are moved to the positions of the adjacent hold icons. There is a moving animation to move to.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5C shows the timing when the moving animation of the hold icons PI2 and PI3 is completed. At this timing, the first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, an image imitating the chance button) is displayed.

  Also, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, the chance button 136 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. The scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the operation reception period of the first operation) in the first color (blue in this example) below the first operation means image BG1. Is displayed. However, since the first operation means image BG1 is displayed behind the hold icon PI3, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the hold icon PI3 and cannot be seen. In addition to this (or in place of it), at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 may be invisible or difficult to view with the hold icon PI3 (the same applies in the present embodiment).

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D shows the timing when a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (3 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is 3 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 3 seconds) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the hold icon PI3, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is not visible.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is 6 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 second) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the hold icon PI3, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is not visible.

  FIG. 5F shows the state in which the operation of the chance button 136 is performed in the state shown in FIG. 5B, that is, in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136. The timing performed is shown. At this timing, since the chance button 136 is operated, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, and then the special figure change after the special figure change (in this example, A notice (in this example, the character information “After two revolutions is hot!”) Indicating the success / failure result of the special figure fluctuation after two revolutions is displayed. Note that the advance notice is an example of a “prefetching advance notice” that indicates the result of the special figure change after the special figure change.

  In this example, the display of the hold icons PI2 and PI3 is not erased, but it may be erased simultaneously with the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1. Further, when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation acceptance period without the operation of the chance button 136, the display of FIG. FIG. 5G is a diagram showing an example of the decorative symbol variation display, and the variation display may be displayed after any of the states shown in FIGS.

  According to the operation means image display of the twelfth embodiment, it may be possible to prompt the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where the display mode hidden by the player can be focused and concentrated on the game.

  FIG. 82 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the modified example of the twelfth example in time series. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 3C to 3E, the first operation means image BG1 is displayed in front of the hold icon PI3, so that all of the first elapsed time notification images TG1 are held icons PI3. It is in a visible state without being covered with.

According to the operation means image display of the modified example of the twelfth embodiment, the player may be further prompted to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where the display mode hidden by the player can be focused and concentrated on the game.
<Example 13 of operation means image display>

  Next, a thirteenth embodiment of operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 84 are diagrams showing the operation means image display of the thirteenth embodiment in time series. In the present embodiment, a part of one of the two operation means images is configured to be covered with the variation icon.

  FIG. 83 (a) shows the timing when the special figure variable game is finished and the decorative symbols are stopped. At this timing, four hold icons (circular images in this example) PI1 to PI4 are displayed below the decorative symbol display device 208 to indicate that there are four special figure variable games on hold.

  FIG. 4B shows the timing when the reserved special figure variable game is started and the special figure variable game hold is reduced from 4 to 3. At this timing, after performing a change animation for changing the first (first) hold icon PI1 displayed in the hold icon display area to the change icon CI, the change icon is displayed in the left display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. CI is stopped and displayed. The variation icon CI is a variation icon for suggesting the success / failure result of the special figure variation display corresponding to the earliest hold icon PI1. In this example, the variation icon CI is represented by character information “chance” and a star-shaped figure. It is composed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 5C, the first operation corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 is triggered by the arrival timing of the first operation acceptance period (6 seconds in this example) of the chance button 136. The operation means image BG1 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) is displayed behind the variation icon CI in the left display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, in this example, at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 is covered with the change icon CI, so that at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 is invisible or difficult to see. .

  Further, at the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1, the second operation means image BG2 (in this example, an image imitating the chance button) corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 is displayed as a decoration pattern. It is displayed in the right display area of the display device 208. In this example, the second operation means image BG2 is not covered with the change icon CI, and all of the second operation means image BG2 is visible.

  Also, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, the chance button 136 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. The scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the operation reception period of the first operation) in the first color (blue in this example) below the first operation means image BG1. , And behind the change icon CI. That is, in this example, at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the variation icon CI, so that at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to view. ing.

  At this timing, the start timing of the second operation acceptance period of the chance button 136 has not arrived, but the same image TG2 ′ as the initial image of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is displayed as the second operation means. It is displayed below the image BG2.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D is a predetermined time (2 seconds in this example) from the timing shown in FIG. 4C, and the start timing of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has arrived. Timing is shown. At this timing, since a predetermined time (2 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is 2 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 4 seconds) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the variation icon CI, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to view.

  At this timing, since the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has arrived, the still image TG2 displayed below the second operation means image BG2 at the timing shown in FIG. 'Is a second elapsed time notification image TG2 for notifying the elapsed time of the second operation reception period of the chance button 136 (in this example, the elapsed time of the second operation reception period of the chance button 136 At the same time, the scale of the meter (filled part) is switched to an image that gradually decreases).

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136. As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image for displaying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 4 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the variation icon CI, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to view.

  At this timing, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continuously displayed, but a predetermined time (2 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image for notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has passed 2 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 4 seconds) is displayed. Yes.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5F shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but since a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image for displaying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 6 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the variation icon CI, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to view.

  Further, at this timing, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continuously displayed, but a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image for notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 4 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed. Yes.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6G shows the timing when a predetermined time (in this example, 8 seconds) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (8 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the first operation acceptance period of the chance button 136, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are displayed. Erasing. Further, at this timing, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continuously displayed, but a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 6 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds) is displayed. Yes.

  The timing shown in (h) of the figure shows the timing when a predetermined time (in this example, 10 seconds) has elapsed from the timing shown in (c) of the figure. At this timing, since a predetermined time (8 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the second operation acceptance period of the chance button 136, the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG1 are displayed. Erasing.

  FIG. 84 (i) shows the timing at which the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136. Show. At this timing, since the first operation of the chance button 136 has been performed, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, a decorative symbol display is displayed instead of the image display. A character image (donor) is displayed in the left display area of the device 208. However, since a part of the character image (dono) is covered with the change icon CI, a part of the character image (dono) is invisible or difficult to see. (J) to (k) in FIG. 6 are the chance buttons before the predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 after the display in FIG. A display example when the second operation of 136 is not performed is shown.

  FIG. 11 (l) shows the timing when the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Show. At this timing, since the second operation of the chance button 136 has been performed, after the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 are erased, a decorative symbol display is displayed instead of the image display. A character image (爺) is displayed in the right display area of the device 208. Even when the second operation of the chance button 136 is not performed and a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation, the display shown in FIG. Good. FIG. 6 (m) shows a display example after the character image (donor) is deleted after a predetermined time has elapsed after the display of FIG. 1 (l).

  FIG. 85 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the modified example of Example 13 in time series. In this example, similar to the fourth embodiment, the chance button 136 is triggered by the arrival timing of the first and second operation acceptance periods of the chance button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. The first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the first operation and the second operation means image BG2 corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 are displayed on the decorative design display device 208 at the same timing.

  In addition, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 at the same timing as the first operation means image BG1 and the second operation means image BG2. A second elapsed time notification image TG2 for displaying the elapsed time of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 is displayed. And it comprises so that a part of 1st elapsed time alerting | reporting image TG1 may be covered with the fluctuation | variation icon CI.

  That is, one of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 that notifies the same elapsed time (in this example, the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is displayed by the variation icon CI. Since it is covered, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to view.

  According to the operation means image display of the thirteenth embodiment, it may be possible to prompt the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where the display mode hidden by the player can be focused and concentrated on the game.

  Note that the position at which the variation icon CI is displayed is not limited to the above, and is at least one of the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image. May be displayed at a position covered by the change icon, and only one of the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image is displayed. May be displayed at a position covered by the change icon, and at least two or more of the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image. The image may be displayed at a position covered by the variation icon.

  Further, only two images of the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image are displayed at the positions covered with the change icons. Well, at least one of the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image is displayed at a position not covered by the variation icon. Alternatively, only one of the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image is displayed at a position that is not covered by the variation icon. Alternatively, the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image may be displayed at a position covered by the variation icon.

Further, the image displayed at the position covered by the variation icon may be at least partly covered, only partly covered, or all covered. .
<Embodiment 14 of operation means image display>

  Next, Example 14 of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is a figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 14 in time series.

In this embodiment, one of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 75) (in this example, the first By covering the elapsed time notification image TG1-1) with images of the notice effect shown in FIGS. 11B to 11D, a part of the one image (first elapsed time notification image TG1-1) is obtained. It is configured so as to be invisible or difficult to view. Further, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 is covered with the character image (dono) at the timing shown in FIG. 5B, and the character image (princess) is covered with the timing shown in FIG. A part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 is covered. Further, in the present embodiment, the notice lottery process using FIGS. 67 to 21 is performed in the same manner as in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 75). Since other displays are the same as those in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 75), description thereof is omitted.
<Embodiment 15 of operation means image display>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 87, a description will be given of a fifteenth embodiment of operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 15 in time series.

In the present embodiment, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 and the remaining time notification TG1-2 in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 76) and all of the first operation means image BG1 are shown in FIG. By covering with the image of the notice effect shown in (d), all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 and the remaining time notification image TG1-2 and the first operation means image BG1 are not visible or visible. It is configured to be in a difficult state. Since other displays are the same as those in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 76), the description thereof is omitted.
<Example 16 of operation means image display>

  Next, Example 16 of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 16 in time series.

In this embodiment, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 in Embodiment 8 (see FIG. 77), as shown in FIGS. The first elapsed time notification image TG1 is partly invisible or difficult to view by covering with an image of a notice effect that suggests. Since other displays are the same as those in the eighth embodiment (see FIG. 77), description thereof is omitted.
<Example 17 of operation means image display>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 89, a description will be given of a seventeenth embodiment of operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 17 in time series.

  In the present embodiment, the first timing corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 is triggered by the arrival timing of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. The operation means image BG1 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) is displayed above the left display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 5B, a second operation means image BG2 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136, a part of which is the first. Are displayed so as to overlap the operation means image BG1. That is, in this embodiment, a part of the first operation means image BG1 is covered with the second operation means image BG2, so that a part of the first operation means image BG1 becomes invisible or difficult to see. It is configured.

  Further, in the state shown in FIG. 5B, when the first operation and the second operation of the chance button 136 are not performed and a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the operation reception period, When the decorative symbol variation display shown in (c) is performed and the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed, the first operation means image BG1 is used instead of the first operation means image BG1 as shown in FIG. When the character image (dono) is displayed and the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed, the character image (ｅ) is replaced with the second operation means image BG2 as shown in FIG. Is displayed.

In the present embodiment, when two operations are urged, two operation means images that are the same as the number of operations are displayed. However, for example, when three or more operations are urged, the operation is performed. The same number of operation means images as the number of times may be displayed. When prompting one operation, a larger number of operation means images than the number of operations may be displayed. In this case, the player may be strongly urged to perform one operation.
<Example 18 of Operation Means Image Display>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 90, a description will be given of Embodiment 18 of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 18 in time series.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6D, an increase animation of the hold icon is triggered when a new hold of the special figure variable game occurs, and the second hold icon PI2 after the increase (in this example, the chance icon A part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 and a part of the adjacent first hold icon PI1 are covered with an icon imitating the button 136 and a star-shaped figure). . That is, in the present embodiment, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 and a part of the hold icon PI1 are not visible by covering the first elapsed time notification image TG1 and the hold icon PI1 with the hold icon PI2. It is configured to be in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize.

  With such a configuration, since it is possible to attract the player's attention to the elapsed time notification image or the hold icon that has become invisible or difficult to visually recognize, the player can be prompted to operate the operation means, Since the game will be more concentrated than before, there may be a case where the operating rate of the game table can be increased.

  The hold icon PI2 also serves as an operation means image corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136. When the chance button 136 is operated within a predetermined reception time, as shown in FIG. The display mode of the hold icon PI2 is an image that suggests whether or not the special figure variable game corresponding to the hold icon PI2 is successful from the operation means image (an icon that imitates the chance button 136 and a star-shaped figure). In this example, it is configured to change to a character image (savohani) that suggests that the success / failure result by prefetching the special figure variable game is a big hit.

  With such a configuration, the game information can be obtained by the hold icon that is changed by the operation of the operation means, so that the operation of the operation means can be further promoted and the interest of the game can be enhanced. is there.

  In this example, both the image before the change of the hold icon PI2 (the image imitating the chance button 136 and the icon combining the star-shaped figure) and the image after the change (character image (savohani)) are the first. Although it is configured so as to cover a part of the elapsed time notification image TG1, the image after the change may be configured not to cover a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1.

  With such a configuration, there is a case where the second operation of the operation means can be surely performed after prompting the first operation of the operation means, and a decrease in game motivation can be prevented.

Further, in the first operation of the chance button 136, as shown in (f) of the figure, a notice effect regarding the change is started, and in the second operation of the chance button 136, as shown in (g) of the same figure. By configuring the display mode of the hold icon to be changed, the display related to the change may be given priority over the display related to the hold. In this case, the roles of the first operation and the second operation of the chance button 136 may be reversed. Further, at least one of the first operation and the second operation of the chance button 136 may be changed to an operation by another operation means (for example, the setting operation unit 137). Moreover, you may comprise so that both the notice effect regarding the said change and the display aspect of a hold icon may be changed by operating the chance button 136 once.
<Embodiment 19 of operation means image display>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 91, a nineteenth embodiment of operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described. In addition, the figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 19 in time series.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 4A and 4B, a special symbol 1 and a fourth symbol display area 208e and a special symbol 2 and a fourth symbol display area 208f are provided in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. Provided. The special figure 1 4th symbol display area 208e displays the result of special figure 1 variable game, and the special figure 2 4th symbol display area 208f displays the result of special figure 2 variable game. For example, during a special figure change game (during special figure change), a diamond-shaped figure is displayed blinking.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5C shows the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the reception start timing of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. At this timing, the right door 246b of the shielding device 246 is moved in the closing direction, and the first operation means image BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and a part of the hold icon are displayed on the right door 246b. By covering all of the decorative designs in the inside, the first operating means image BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and a part of the hold icon, and all of the changing decorative designs are invisible or difficult to see. It is configured to be in a state.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the operation means image, the elapsed time notification image, the hold icon, and the decorative symbol that are invisible or difficult to see, and thus prompt the operation of the operation means. In addition, since the player is more concentrated on the game than before, the operating rate of the game table may be increased. The shielding device 246 may cover all of the first operation means image BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and the hold icon, or may cover a part of the decorative pattern that is changing. Also good.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4D, the display position of the decorative symbol may be changed to a visible position in conjunction with the movement of the right door 246b of the shielding device 246, or the shielding device A notch part may be formed in a part of 246, and the special figure 1 4th symbol display area 208e and the special figure 2 4th symbol display area 208f may be visible through the notch part. .

  With such a configuration, it is possible to surely grasp game information important to the player as in the decorative symbol and the fourth symbol, and therefore, it may be possible to prevent a decrease in game motivation.

  <Modifications of operation means image, elapsed time notification image, and remaining time notification image>

  FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a modification of the operation means image, the elapsed time notification image, and the remaining time notification image. In the figure, as an example of the operation means image, the elapsed time notification image, and the remaining time notification image, the reception start image displayed when the reception start timing of the operation means arrives and the reception time of the operation means are halved. An image for the passage of half of the acceptance period displayed when it has elapsed, and an image for completion of acceptance displayed when the acceptance end timing of the operating means has arrived.

  The figure (a) employs an image imitating the design of the operation means as the operation means image, and displays an elapsed time notification image (or remaining time notification image) according to the elapsed time of the operation reception period. An image is used in which the scale (filled part) gradually decreases. Further, FIG. 5B employs an image obtained by simplifying the operation means as the operation means image, and matches the elapsed time of the operation reception period as the elapsed time notification image (or remaining time notification image). The image that the scale (filled part) of the meter divided into plurals gradually decreases is adopted. Further, FIG. 4C adopts an image obtained by simplifying the operation means as the operation means image, and matches the elapsed time of the operation reception period as the elapsed time notification image (or remaining time notification image). An image representing a state in which lamps (including those by light emitting means such as LEDs and those by display means such as LCD) are gradually turned off is adopted.

  FIG. 4D is configured to count down the remaining time of the operation reception period as the remaining time notification image, and FIG. 4E illustrates the elapsed time notification image (or remaining time notification image). The color of the image is gradually lightened in accordance with the elapsed time (or remaining time) of the operation reception period, and the image is erased immediately before the reception period. FIG. The notification image (or remaining time notification image) is configured to gradually darken the color of the image in accordance with the elapsed time (or remaining time) of the operation reception period. These operation means images, elapsed time notification images, and remaining time notification images may be applied to any of the above embodiments.

  As described above, the gaming table (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the third embodiment has operating means (for example, the chance button 136, the setting operation unit 137) provided at least at a position where the player can operate. ) And display means capable of executing at least a plurality of displays (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first sub-control unit 400), and at least one of the plurality of displays Is a first display (for example, the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 shown in FIGS. 76A to 76E), and at least one of the plurality of displays is a second display. (For example, the remaining time notification image TG1-2 shown in FIGS. 76 (c) to 76 (e)), and the first display is a display related to the operation of the operation means (for example, an operation reception period of the chance button 136). When The second display is a display related to the operation of the operation means (for example, a remaining time notification image for notifying the remaining time of the operation button reception period of the chance button 136). The display means is capable of displaying at least the second display during display of the first display, and the display means is capable of displaying at least one of the plurality of displays. The display mode can be changed (for example, an image in which the scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, and an operation reception period of the chance button 136 is displayed. Display related to the operation means by counting down the remaining time, such as display related to the operation means, announcement effect, normal symbol variation display, hold icon, etc. At least partially hide) ones, it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  According to the gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the player may be strongly urged to operate the operating means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players.

  Further, the first display is a notification according to the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period for accepting the operation of the operation means (for example, a meter scale (e.g., a meter scale corresponding to the elapsed time of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136) The second display is a notification according to an elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period (for example, an operation of the chance button 136). The remaining time of the reception period may be counted down).

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players.

  In addition, at least one of the first and second displays changes to a different display mode when a specific time has elapsed since the start of acceptance of the operation of the operation means (for example, FIG. 75). As shown in (c), the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 may be changed from the first color (blue) to the second color (red).

  With such a configuration, various displays can be performed, and the player may be prevented from getting bored. Further, since the player can determine the operation timing by looking at the display, it may be easy for the player to participate in the game.

  The first display (for example, a meter) may be a display mode different from the second display (for example, a number).

  With such a configuration, there are cases where the player can be more strongly urged to operate the operation means by various display notifications. Further, there are cases where the player can be entertained by notification with various displays.

  In addition, the first and second displays may be terminated (for example, the elapsed time notification image or the remaining time notification image is deleted) when at least the reception period ends.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players.

  In addition, it is provided with an appropriateness determination means (for example, special drawing related lottery processing, general drawing related lottery processing) capable of executing the determination of the validity when the determination condition is satisfied, and at least one of the first and second displays. One of them may indicate the result of the determination (for example, a third elapsed time notification image TG3 shown in FIG. 72).

  With such a configuration, there are cases where various displays can be performed. In addition, there are cases where the choice of how to play by the player increases and the interest of the game can be further improved.

  Further, a third display (for example, the first operation means image BG1 (chance button shown in FIGS. 76 (a) to 76 (e)) for notifying that the operation reception period of the operation means is displayed on the plurality of displays. The third display does not notify the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period for accepting the operation of the operating means, and the third display is during the reception period, It may be executable at least during execution of at least one of the first and second displays.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game by encouraging the player to operate more than necessary. In addition, the display may be sharpened to make the player more entertaining.

  Note that a third display for notifying only that it is the operation acceptance period for the operation means may be displayed, or that at least a third display for notifying that the operation means is being accepted for operation is displayed. Good.

  The third display may not notify only the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period during the reception period, or at least the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period during the reception period. It may be one that does not notify, may notify at least the elapsed time after a specific time from the start of the reception period, and only notifies the elapsed time after a specific time from the start of the reception period It may be a thing.

  The third display may be at least executable during execution of the first display, may be at least executable only during execution of the first display, It may be at least executable during execution of the second display, or may be at least executable only during execution of the second display. The third display may be at least executable during the execution of both the first and second displays, or only during the execution of both the first and second displays. It may be executable.

  In addition, the third display is displayed on at least one of the first display and the second display when at least part (or only part or all) of the operation reception period overlaps ( Alternatively, the operation reception result may be reflected in only one display or both displays.

  The third display is at least the third display when at least a part (or only a part or all) of the operation acceptance period overlaps at least one of the first and second displays. The operation reception result may be reflected on (or only the third display or all the first to third displays).

  The plurality of displays include a fourth display (for example, a first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 shown in FIG. 75C) displayed when a specific time has elapsed, and the fourth display Is displayed in accordance with the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period (for example, the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 is changed from the third color (white) to the fourth color (red). ) At least. With such a configuration, it may be possible to strongly urge the player to perform an operation.

  Note that the fourth display may be a notification only according to the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period, or at least a notification (or only a notification) indicating the result of the determination of success / failure. It is also possible that at least (or only the advance notice) is not made to suggest the result of the determination.

  Further, the gaming table (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the third embodiment includes at least operating means (for example, a chance button 136 and a setting operation unit 137) provided at a position where the player can operate. And a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first sub-control unit 400) capable of displaying at least one of the plurality of displays. At least one of the plurality of displays is a second display, and the first display is a display related to the operation means (first operation means image BG1, second operation means). Image BG2, elapsed time notification images TG1, TG2, TG1-1.TG1-2), and the display means passes through a third display (for example, an operation acceptance period of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 78). At least a part of the elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying the time), and the display means displays at least a fourth display (for example, a part of the variation icon CI shown in FIG. 78). The display means gives priority to the fourth display over the third display when the display position of the third display matches the display position of the fourth display. The third display is at least part of one of the first display and the second display, and the fourth display. Is a gaming table that is at least a part of the other display of the first display and the second display.

  According to the gaming machine according to the third embodiment, it may be possible to prompt the player to operate the operating means. Further, there are cases where the display mode hidden by the player can be focused and concentrated on the game.

  Further, the first display is a notification according to the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period for accepting the operation of the operation means (for example, a meter scale (e.g., a meter scale corresponding to the elapsed time of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136) It is also possible to display at least an image in which the filled portion) gradually decreases.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where the display mode hidden by the player can be focused and concentrated on the game.

  In addition, the third display (for example, part or all of the elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 78, the first operation shown in FIG. 89). The means image BG1 (part or all of the image imitating the chance button) is at least a part of the first display, and the fourth display (for example, the variation icon CI shown in FIG. 78, FIG. 89). The second operation means image BG2 (part or all of the image imitating the chance button) shown may be at least part of the second display.

  With such a configuration, it may be difficult to see the notification of the reception period, and the player's operation may be further urged.

  In addition, the display unit displays a fifth display (for example, the first operation unit image BG1 (chance button shown in FIG. 78) when a specific time has elapsed since the start of reception of the operation of the operation unit. At least when the display position of the fourth display and the display position of the fifth display coincide with each other. The fourth display is preferentially displayed (for example, displayed in front), and the fifth display is at least a part of one of the first display and the second display. It may be.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. In some cases, the player can focus more on the display mode hidden by the player and concentrate on the game.

  Further, the third display (for example, the elapsed time notification image TG1 shown in FIG. 78) may have a display mode different from the fourth display (for example, the change icon CI shown in FIG. 78). Note that different display modes may indicate different shapes, may indicate different transmittances, may indicate different colors, or may indicate different sizes. In addition, at least one of the third displays (shape, color, transparency, size, etc.) may be used as long as they have the same shape or different display forms as long as they have different colors. The display mode may be different as long as a part (at least one of shape, color, transparency, size, etc.) of the first display and the fourth display is different.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to focus attention on the display mode hidden by the player and concentrate on the game.

  In addition, a part of the third display (at least one of shape, color, transmissivity, size, etc.) so that the colors may be different or the same shape and the same display mode may be used. And a portion of the fourth display (at least one of shape, color, transparency, size, etc., that matches a portion of the third display) The same display mode may be used.

  Further, the third display (for example, the elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 78) is at least a part of the second display. The fourth display (for example, the change icon CI shown in FIG. 78) may be at least a part of the first display.

  With such a configuration, it may be easy to see the notification of the reception period and allow the player to perform the operation reliably. In some cases, the player may be urged to press a button. In some cases, the player can concentrate on the game to prevent the player from getting bored.

  (A) In addition, it is provided with a go / no-go determination means (for example, special drawing related lottery processing, general drawing related lottery processing) capable of executing the go / no-go determination when the pass / fail determination condition is satisfied, and a second display (for example, notice) The display of the effect) may be a notice that suggests the result of the determination.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where various displays can be performed. Further, there are cases where the player can be made to pay more attention to the reception period of the operation means.

  (B) Further, it is provided with a go / no-go determination means (for example, special drawing related lottery processing, general drawing related lottery processing) capable of executing the go / no-go determination when the pass / fail determination condition is satisfied, and a first display (related to the operation means). The display) may be a notice suggesting the result of the determination.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where various displays can be performed. In some cases, the player can be more focused on the notice.

  In the case of (A) and (B) above, at least one of the first display and the second display (or only one display, or both displays) suggests the result of the determination. A notice may be included, and the first display and the second display may be the same (or different) notice showing the result of the determination. For example, both of them may be the determination results of special drawings, or both may be the determination results of ordinary drawings. In addition, one may be a result of whether or not a special figure is determined, and the other may be a result of normal or not, or one may be a result of determining whether or not the change is correct and the other is a result of determining whether or not the next time is correct (Prefetching) may be used, or both may be the determination results of the different fluctuations (special / standard prefetching).

  (C) Further, if at least a part of at least one of the first, second, and third displays is hidden by a plurality of other displays, the hidden display is made more noticeable. May be possible. Note that only a part (or all) of at least one of the first, second, and third displays may be hidden by a plurality of other displays.

  (D) Further, if at least one of the first, second, and third displays hides a plurality of other displays, the hidden display may be more noticed. In some cases, the hidden display can be more noticed. In addition, at least one part (or only part or all) of one of the plurality of other displays is hidden by the one display, and the other display is at least partly ( Alternatively, only a part or all) may be hidden.

In the case of (C) and (D) above, the third display may be a notice that at least suggests the result of the determination (or only a notification that suggests the result of the determination), The third display may be a notification of at least the reception period of the operation means (or only the notification of the reception period of the operation means), a notice that suggests the result of the determination, and the reception period of the operation means. At least one of the notifications (or only one of the two, or at least both, or both) may be performed. The display means may be a notification means, and the display may be a notification.
<Fourth embodiment>

Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. 93 to 125 are used only in the description of the fourth embodiment in principle, and even in the case where overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, in the description of the present embodiment. The reference numerals shown in FIGS. 93 to 125 are given priority.
<Overall configuration>

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 includes, as an external structure, an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface. The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a game machine installation business store.

  The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a vertical rectangular gaming table base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is attached to the front side of the main body 104 via a hinge portion 112 so that the inside Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player 200 ball launching handles 134 for launching into the game area 124, chance buttons 136 for changing the effects of the various effects devices 206 by the player's operation, and the chance button 136 to emit light. Sub button lamp 138, ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and return operation button for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance 142, and a ball rental display unit 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 94 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is located below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400 An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 storing the payout board 170 having 168, launch base constituting the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball A launch board case 176 that houses 174, a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game store clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.

  FIG. 95 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In this embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. It is possible to do. The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. In this embodiment, the special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general prize opening 226, a general start port 228, a first special view start port 230, a second special view start port 232, around the effect device 206. A variable winning opening 234 is provided.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detecting sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning is sometimes referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player is sometimes referred to as “rental ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper plate 126. The special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu). In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is disposed directly below the first special figure starting port 230. The second special figure starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and displays the symbol stopped, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a large winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. This variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be opened and closed. When the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special figure display device stops the big hit symbol when the special figure variable game is won. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) and at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable prize opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, After guiding a ball that has not won any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening is provided for discharging to the game island side.

The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and Further, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and driven into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc. (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.
<Directing device 206>

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b simulating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means shields the inner end portions thereof so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.
<Control unit>

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes.
<Main control unit>

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a counter circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, front frame door opening sensor, and inner frame opening sensor. And a sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a lower plate full sensor and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result or a reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device For example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, a predetermined symbol display device, A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general-purpose display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general-purpose reservation lamp 216, a first special figure reservation lamp 218, a second special figure reservation lamp 220, a high-probability medium) A drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the lamp 222 and the like, and various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232, a door member 234a of the variable winning port 234, and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the above is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the counter circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the counter circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the counter circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the second special figure starting port 232 has won a ball, the counter circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started).

The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.
<First sub-control unit>

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and for measuring time, frequency, etc. The counter timer 412 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, a shielding device sensor 430, and a chance button detection sensor The sensor circuit 428 that outputs the detection signal from the 426 to the basic circuit 402, and the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 are read, and the display image is generated using the work area of the VRAM 436 to decorate A VDP 434 (image) that displays an image on the symbol display device 208. Are connected Oh and display processor), the.
<Second sub-control unit>

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.
<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Based on a control signal instructing the launch intensity according to the amount, control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the ball from the upper plate 126 to the launcher 110 I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the dispensing device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.
<Type of design>

  Next, using FIGS. 97A to 97C, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described. FIG. 4A shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display according to the present invention. Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the variation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the special symbol form of the special figure 1. When the variation time determined before the start of variation 2 (this also corresponds to the variation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special diagram 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as symbol variation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. FIG. 10A shows 10 types of special drawings from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure J” as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation stop display, and the white portions in the figure are turned off. The location of the segment to be displayed is shown, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment to be lit.

  “Special figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  “Special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. “Special figure D” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure B” which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. These “special drawing E” and “special drawing F” are both 2R and are in a state in which they do not shift to the time-saving state.

  “Special figure G” is the first small hit symbol, and “Special figure H” is the second small hit symbol, both of which are in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here corresponds to the same as the big hit with no short time at 2R. That is, “Special Figure G” and “Special Figure H” are in the same state as “Special Figure F”, but the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different in both cases. By providing “G”, “Special Figure H”, and “Special Figure F”, the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, “Special Figure I” is a first off symbol, and “Special Figure J” is a second off symbol, and the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, symbols other than “Special Illustration A” are prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 97 (b) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed. When the 15R jackpot of “special drawing B” is notified, a symbol combination (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration”) corresponding to the 15R jackpot corresponding to the 15R jackpot in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. 1 ”or“ decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2 ”). When notifying the 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A”, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”). Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the 2R big hit called “hidden probability change” of “special drawing E”, the 2R big hit called “special drawing F” suddenly normal, or the first small hit of “special drawing G”, “special drawing H” When notifying the second small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in order to notify the 2R jackpot called “sudden change” of “special drawing C” or the 2R jackpot called “sudden time reduction” of “special drawing D”, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is set. Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of “Special Figure I” and the second deviation of “Special Figure J”, the symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 5B is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

FIG. 97 (c) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of “normal map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 5C, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is turned off, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are turned on.
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, a main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input resets by a reset interrupt and executes the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. 98 according to the control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value. In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 9v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and the state before power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the power-off state. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. In addition, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter, the ordinary figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer, respectively. Two random number counters for generating each random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a normal timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.
<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT is periodically updated (so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interruption process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms is started several times while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 96 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of FIG. 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value of FIG. 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated. In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226, 234 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. When a winning is made at the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is stored in the special counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random value as a special figure 1 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area. When a winning is made to the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is sent from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 to the special figure 2 winning random number value. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value as a special figure 2 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a win at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is obtained as a normal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random value storage area. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol display mode When the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so as to display the off symbol when the hit flag is off. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the winning symbols (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 97 (c)) and the off symbol (the universal symbol B shown in FIG. 97 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 232a is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), in the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal state is not operating is set. To do. Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is out of play, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure off flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable time is stored as a normal map variable time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Next, in step S225 and step S227, special figure state update processing for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. First, special figure state update processing (special figure 2 state update process) for special figure 2 is performed. This is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed in accordance with the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

  In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first off flag, a second off flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a normal figure. A flag for each probability variation flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag 97, the special figure A and 15R jackpot flags shown in FIG. 97 (a) are on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on. Special figure B, 2R jackpot flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and special figure probability fluctuation flag is on. Special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, general figure probability When the fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, and when the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure E, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability Fluctuation flag is off When the fluctuation flag is also off, special figure F, when the first small hit flag is on, special figure G, when the second small hit flag is on, special figure H, when the first off flag is on The special segment I and the second off-set flag are turned on, the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on / off so that the respective modes of the special diagram I are turned on. Is set to indicate that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a sudden probability variation symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time-short symbol symbol (special symbol). D), hidden probability variation (special E), suddenly normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small hit (special H), first off symbol (special) Any one of the symbols I) and the second off-set symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 234a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 until a winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable prize opening 234. In addition to outputting a signal to be held at the same time, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and a closing period is stored in a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information indicating. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the time reduction number 100 is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the time reduction number is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. The time saving here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a normal high probability state. There is a higher probability of hitting a general-purpose variable game in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game and the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game are shorter in the normal figure high probability state than in the normal figure low probability state. Further, in the normal high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be longer than in the normal low probability state. In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a large number of games will be placed in the second special figure starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls are entered during the big win game. There is a problem that a ball enters and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place, the out-of-game flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed as step S229 and step S231. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 is notified. However, it is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the first special figure starting port 230. The special drawing related lottery process will be described in detail later.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In this embodiment, command types such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command are specified. Possible information), bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information such as the value of the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, and the like. In the case of the symbol variation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, and the like are included. In the case of a jackpot round number designation command, the value of the special variation probability flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, winning of the variable winning port 234 Includes presence or absence.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the value of the 15R big hit flag or 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related are stored in the RAM 308 as command data. Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described large winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In the above-mentioned big winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increasing process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a full tray error is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display via the display circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, the interrupt permission is set, and the like. Thereafter, the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to.

On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. Then, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.
<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>

The process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4C is a flowchart of the timer variable interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.
<First sub-control unit main process>

  First, in step S301 of the main process of the first sub control unit 400, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when update of the effect data is necessary, effect data update processing is performed.

In step S311, the chance button detection sensor 426 that detects the pressing of the chance button 136 is monitored. When the pressing of the chance button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 136. Perform the change process. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a button reception period is provided in which the pressing operation of the chance button 136 can be received during the variable display of the special figure and the decorative symbol. In this button reception period, it is assumed that time measurement is started when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of fluctuation (for example, when t ₀ seconds in FIG. 105B have elapsed).

  Further, at the start of this button reception period, effect data for notifying the player that the pressing operation of the chance button 136 can be received is prepared, and in the image control process described later, for example, FIG. ) (In this example, display of an image simulating the chance button 136) is performed. Further, when it is detected that the chance button 136 is pressed during the button reception period, effect data for making a notice is prepared, and in an image control process described later, for example, as shown on the right side of FIG. A notice is made (in this example, the text “Gekiatsu!” Is displayed). Then, after the button reception period (for example, 6 seconds) elapses, the time measurement is ended, and a process for deleting the notification of the button reception period and the notice is performed.

  In step S313, if there is a command to VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to VDP 434 (details will be described later). In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S317, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420. In step S319, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

In step S321, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303.
<First sub-control unit command reception interrupt process>

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.
<First sub-control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). Execute in the cycle.

In step S501 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In subsequent step S503, transmission of a control command to second sub-control unit 500 set in step S319, update processing of a random number value for production, and the like are performed.
<First Sub-Control Unit Image Control Process>

  Next, the image control process in step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Sets an instruction to start data transfer The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. If not, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it.

  In step S605, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

In step S607, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404. In step S609, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is determined. Wait for input. In step S611, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.
<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>

The processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.
<Second sub-control unit main process>

  First, in step S701 of the main process of the second sub control unit 500, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S707, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S <b> 711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step S713, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S703.
<Second sub-control unit command reception interrupt process>

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.
<Second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and a timer interrupt process is performed in response to this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle.

In step S901 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.
<Data table of main control unit 300>

  Next, a data table stored in advance in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 and a special drawing related lottery process will be described.

  FIG. 102 is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 1 fluctuation time determination table for determining the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 and a special figure 2 fluctuation time determination table for determining the fluctuation time of the special figure 2. . These special figure 1 variation time determination table and special figure 2 variation time determination table include a special symbol stop symbol, a special symbol variation time, a random number selection range, an effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a table. It is the data table which linked | related and memorize | stored the number.

  The main control unit 300 refers to the special figure 1 variation time determination table in the special figure 1 related lottery process described above, and selects a table number based on the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game. For example, if the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a big hit and the special figure A or the special figure B is selected as the stop symbol of the special figure 1, the table 1 is selected as the table number. Subsequently, the main control unit 300 selects a specific variation time by lottery using a random value from one or a plurality of variation times corresponding to the selected table. For example, when the table number is Table 1 and the acquired random number value is 500, the variation time 15000 ms (per normal reach) corresponding to the random number selection range 0 to 1000 is selected.

Further, the main control unit 300 refers to the special figure 2 variation time determination table in the special figure 2 related lottery process described above, and selects a table number based on the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game. For example, when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is successful and the special figure I or special figure J is selected as the stop symbol of the special figure 2, for example, the table 9 is selected as the table number. Subsequently, the main control unit 300 selects a specific variation time by lottery using a random value from one or a plurality of variation times corresponding to the selected table. For example, when the table number is Table 9 and the acquired random number value is 55000, a fluctuation time of 10,000 ms (normal reach deviation) corresponding to the random number selection range 50001 to 60000 is selected.
<Notice production>

  Next, details of the effect (a series of notice effects related to the notice) displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208 in accordance with the determination result of the special figure related lottery process (steps S229 and S231) will be described. This effect includes a predetermined effect (hereinafter also referred to as “notice”) that suggests to the player the result of the determination of success / failure during the display of the decorative symbols. Further, this effect includes a predetermined effect (hereinafter also referred to as “notification”) that prompts the player to operate the chance button 136 in order to make the above notice. That is, in the series of notice effects displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect (notification) that prompts the player to operate the chance button 136 is first performed, and when the chance button 136 is operated by the player, the decorative symbol is displayed. During the fluctuation display, the result is changed to an effect (notice) that suggests the result of the success / failure determination to the player. At this time, an effect (notification) that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 may be set according to the result of the success / failure determination, thereby fulfilling a function (notice function) that suggests the result of the success / failure determination to the player. The chance button 136 is set so that the operation becomes effective when operated within a predetermined reception period. The button reception period is notified to the player in various notification modes.

  Specifically, the main control unit 300 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on in the special drawing related lottery processing (steps S229 and S231). When the big hit flag is ON, one symbol is determined from a plurality of big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, special drawings A to F). If the big hit flag is not on, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on. When the small hit flag is ON, one symbol is determined from a plurality of small hit symbols (in the present embodiment, special drawings G to F). When neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is on, one symbol is determined from a plurality of missed symbols (in this embodiment, special diagrams I to J). When the stop symbol of the special figure is determined, the change time is determined by the above-described special figure change time determination table (see FIG. 102) according to the stop symbol. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), a symbol change start command including at least information on the determination result (stop symbol of the special symbol) and the variation time is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, in the above-described effect control process (step S309), the determination result (the special symbol stop symbol) included in the symbol variation start command received from the main control unit 300 and the variation time, The notice lottery processing is executed based on the notification mode determination table stored in advance in the ROM 406 for each stop symbol and variation time of the special figure and the random number value obtained from a predetermined random number counter.

  For example, when the 15R big hit symbol (special figure B) and the fluctuation time for super reach A (45000 ms) are received from the main control unit 300, the table number 2 is selected from the plurality of notification mode determination tables shown in FIG. The notification form determination table for Super Reach A is selected, and the notice lottery process is executed. Next, using the selected notification mode determination table, it is determined which effect is to be performed by random number lottery. For example, if the random number value is 29 in the super reach A per notification mode determination table, a notification mode whose mode changes from notification B to D is selected. Further, for example, when the first deviation symbol (special symbol I) and the super reach A deviation time (40000 ms) are received from the main control unit 300, a table is selected from the plurality of notification mode determination tables shown in FIG. The super reach A of No. 12 selects the notification mode determination table for deviation, and executes the notice lottery process. Next, using the selected notification mode determination table, it is determined which effect is to be performed by random number lottery. For example, if the random number is 29 in the notification mode determination table for super reach A deviation, the notification mode in which the mode of notification F continues and the mode does not change in the middle is selected.

  Specifically, the first sub-control unit 400 executes a notice lottery process as shown in FIG. First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the determination result obtained from the main control unit 300 is a big hit (whether the stop symbol is a special symbol A to F). If it is a big hit, the process proceeds to step S1003, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1005.

In step S1003, the lottery of the notification mode is performed based on the jackpot table in the notification mode determination table. The notification mode determination table is determined based on the jackpot symbol received from the main control unit 300 and the variation time. For example, the jackpot table of table number 2 in the notification mode determination table shown in FIG. 104 is a notification mode determination table for Super Reach A selected in the special figure 1 variation time determination table of FIG. In the case of reach, details are omitted, but a notification mode determination table is prepared in the same manner. Furthermore, in step S1003, the lottery of the notification mode of the remaining time of the notice button reception period is performed based on the notification mode determination table for super reach A in FIG. That is, in the case of a big hit through Super Reach A, when the random number value is 0 to 4, the “mode of continuing the notification F (mode in which the notification does not change)” is selected as the notification mode, and the random value is 5 to 19 Select “mode switching from notification A to notification E”, select “mode switching from notification B to notification D” when the random number is 20 to 49, and select “notification” when the random number is 50 to 99 A mode of switching from C ₁ to notification C ₂ is selected. In this embodiment, since the numerical value range of the random number value is set to 0 to 99, for example, the probability of selecting “mode of continuing notification F” as the notification mode is 1/20 (= 5/100). Yes, when the determination result of the special figure is a big hit, the probability that “the mode in which the notification F is continued” is most selected among all the notification modes is low.

  In step S1005, it is determined whether it is a predetermined fluctuation time. If so, the process proceeds to step S1007, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1009. The predetermined fluctuation time here is a lottery using a special figure determination result (stop symbol) and a random number value in the numerical range of 0 to 65535 based on the table shown in FIG. 102 in the special figure related lottery process. It means the variation time of the special figure determined by. In the present embodiment, in the next step S1007, a lottery of the notification mode is limited to a case where an effect relating to a loss, a normal reach failure, a super reach A departure or a super reach B departure is performed. It has come to be. In the present embodiment, when the stop symbol of the special figure is a small hit, the notification mode is determined from the loss table.

In step S1007, the lottery of the notification mode is performed based on the deviation table in the notification mode determination table. For example, the outlier table of the table number 12 in the notification mode determination table shown in FIG. 104 is a super reach A selection mode for determination of deviation in the special figure 1 variation time determination table in FIG. Similarly to the case of, a notice mode determination table for notice is also prepared in the case of other reach or loss. Further, in step S1007, lottery of notification modes for the remaining time of the button reception period for notice is performed based on the notification mode determination table for super reach A in FIG. That is, in the case of deviation from Super Reach A, when the random number value is 0 to 49, “notification F is continued” is selected as the notification mode, and when the random number value is 50 to 79, “notification from notification A” is selected. "Mode switching to E" is selected. When the random number value is 80 to 94, "Mode switching from notification B to notification D" is selected. When the random number value is 95 to 99, "Notification C ₁ to Notification C ₂ " is selected. “Mode to be switched” is selected. Note that the probability of selecting “mode switching from notification C ₁ to notification C ₂ ” as the notification mode is 1/20 (= 5/100), and if the determination result of the special figure is not a big hit, “notification C ₁ probability aspect switched to notification C ₂ "is the most selective of all the notification manner from is low. In step S1009, a command is transmitted to various devices that execute a notice (for example, VDP 434 that controls the display image of the decorative symbol display device 208), and this control flow ends.

Of the notification modes described above, in the notification mode that switches from notification X to notification Y, the first notification mode is referred to as the first notification mode, and the notification mode that switches thereafter is referred to as the second notification mode. Moreover, at least the notification period is set in each aspect of the above-described notifications A to F. For example, the broadcast A is one second broadcasting period, informing B is broadcast period 2 seconds, the notification C ₁ and C ₂ are broadcasting period is 3 seconds, the notification D is broadcasting period is 4 seconds, the notification E is broadcasting period is 5 seconds The notification F is set such that the notification period is 6 seconds. And when winning the mode switched from the first notification mode to the second notification mode, a notification period according to the first notification mode (hereinafter also referred to as a first notification period) and a notification period according to the second notification mode (hereinafter referred to as the first notification mode). , Which is also referred to as a second notification period) is set to coincide with the button reception period.

Further, although not shown in particular, in the advance notice lottery process, the details of the advance notice are determined based on the determination result received from the main control unit 300, the predetermined advance notice lottery table stored in the ROM 406 in advance, and the random number described above. (For example, if the button is pressed, the character display of “It ’s hot!” Or “...” is displayed).
<Example 1 of notification mode of remaining time>

  Example 1 of the notification mode of the remaining time of the reception period of the chance button 136 notified by the decorative symbol display device 208 as a result of the notice lottery process will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106. FIG. Here, when the determination result is 15R big hit (special figure B) and the fluctuation time is 45000 ms (per super reach A), in the notification form determination table for super reach A of table number 2 shown in FIG. An example will be described in which a notification mode that switches from “B” (first notification mode) to “B” (second notification mode) is won.

  As described above, the chance button 136 is enabled to accept operations only during a preset period (button reception period). The button reception period is displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a format that shows the remaining time (here, a rectangular meter), and the length of the remaining time of the button reception period is notified by the remaining amount of the meter. The The notification mode can be set in various modes using the notification period, meter color, initial amount of meter at the start of notification, reduction amount per unit time (decrease rate), and the like as parameters.

In the notification B mode in the first embodiment, the meter is displayed in the reference color (for example, blue) during the notification period of T ₂ seconds (for example, 2 seconds). For example, as shown in FIGS. 106 (b) to 106 (d), the meter is displayed in a state where it partially overlaps the front of the fluctuating decorative symbol. For example, as shown in FIG. 106 (b), the meter is displayed as full when the notification starts in the notification B mode, and gradually decreases as time elapses. The decreasing speed of the meter is set to coincide with the actual decreasing speed during the button reception period (actual decreasing speed of the remaining time).

In the notification D mode, the meter is displayed in a special color (for example, red) during the notification period of T ₄ seconds (for example, 4 seconds). The meter is displayed partially overlapping the front of the changing decorative symbol. At the notification start time point according to the notification D mode, the remaining amount of the meter immediately before (the notification end time point according to the notification B mode) is maintained, and gradually decreases as time passes. The decrease rate of the meter is set to coincide with the actual decrease rate during the button reception period.

  In FIGS. 105 and 106, (a) is the time when the special symbol and decorative symbol change start, (b) is the time when the button reception period starts, and (c) is the remaining time during the button reception period. This is the time when the notification mode changes, and (d) is the time when the reception of the button reception period ends.

In this example, as a first notification mode, the meter is displayed in a reference color during a notification period of T ₂ seconds (for example, 2 seconds). The meter is displayed partially overlapping the front of the changing decorative symbol. At the start of reception, the meter is full and gradually decreases with time. The rate of decrease of the meter matches the actual rate of decrease during the button acceptance period. That is, for example, when the button reception period is 6 seconds, the meter decreases to 2/3 when 2 seconds have elapsed since the start of reception.

When the notification period according to the first notification mode ends, the mode is switched to the second notification mode, and the meter is displayed in a special color during the subsequent notification period of T ₄ seconds (for example, 4 seconds). The rate of decrease of the meter is the same as in the first notification mode. Therefore, the decrease rate is constant over the entire button reception period. However, in the notification D mode, the remaining amount of the meter at the time immediately before the switching is continued, so that the remaining time notification starts from a state where the remaining amount of the meter is 2/3.

  When the button reception period ends, the meter display disappears, and the display returns to the state in which the changing decorative symbol is displayed on the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  When the player operates the chance button 136 while notifying the button reception period by the meter, the meter disappears and a notice as shown on the right side of FIG. 106 is displayed. In this case, the letters “It ’s super hot!” Suggesting that the determination result is a big hit. By giving a notice that “It ’s super hot !!”, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the big hit.

  In detail, in the first embodiment, when an operation of the chance button 136 by the player is accepted, any one of “...”, “Super hot?”, Or “Super hot !!” is displayed. Is set to be. For example, when the mode of notification B → D is selected, the case classification based on the random number value is further divided. For example, when the random number value is 20 to 24, “....” Is displayed, and the random value is 25 to 25. In the case of 34, “Gekiatsu ??” is displayed, and in the case where the random number value is 35 to 49, “Gekiatsu !!” is displayed. Note that the same setting is performed when a notification mode other than the notification B → D is selected.

  According to such a notification mode of the first embodiment, the player can grasp the remaining time of the button reception period, and may or may not press the chance button 136 at a desired timing. Is possible. In particular, when the notification mode is changed halfway with the passage of time (for example, in the case of the notification mode in which the random number is won at 5 to 99 for 15R big hit, the notification is won at the random number of 50 to 99 at the time of loss. As for the timing of pressing the chance button 136, “Press immediately after the reception becomes valid”, “Press when the notification mode changes”, “Press at any timing of the player”, “Press There is an advantage that the range of choices such as “No” is widened and the game becomes diverse. In other words, since the execution of the notice depends on the player's operation of the chance button 136, the range of the game is particularly widened in this respect, and the interest of the game may be further enhanced.

  In addition, it is possible to increase the interest of the game by amplifying the player's sense of expectation for the big hit by switching the notification mode. Further, there are cases where it is possible to reduce the operation of the useless chance button 136 by the player and increase the durability of the chance button 136. Further, if the meter color is changed before and after the notification mode is changed, the range of effects is widened, and an effect of prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 may be expected.

Also, as shown in FIG. 104, the probability of winning each notification mode is set differently between the case where the result of the success / failure determination is different from the case where the result is a big hit, so the expectation given to the player in the case of a big win On the other hand, the probability that the feeling is increased is increased, while the probability that the feeling of expectation given to the player is decreased in the case of a loss is increased, and a difference is produced between the two. In this respect, the interest of the game can be further enhanced.
<Example 2 of notification mode of remaining time>

  Next, Example 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 and 108. FIG. Similarly to the first embodiment, in the second embodiment, in the notice table shown in FIG. 104, the determination result is 15R big hit (special figure B) and the fluctuation time is 45000 ms (per super reach A). The case where the notification mode that switches from “1 notification mode)” to “notification D (second notification mode)” is won will be described as an example. However, in the second embodiment, the notifications when the buttons are pressed are displayed separately in the notification period (first notification period) according to the first notification mode and the notification period (second notification period) according to the second notification mode. This is different from the first embodiment in that it is set to.

  In FIGS. 107 and 108, (a) is a decorative symbol change start time, (b) is a reception start time of a button reception period, and (c) is a notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period. (D) is the reception end point of the button reception period.

In this example, as a first notification mode, the meter is displayed in a reference color (for example, blue) during a notification period of T ₂ seconds (for example, 2 seconds). The meter is displayed partially overlapping the front of the changing decorative symbol. At the start of reception, the meter is full and gradually decreases with time. The decrease rate of the meter is set to coincide with the actual decrease rate during the button reception period. That is, for example, when the button reception period is 6 seconds, the meter decreases to 2/3 when 2 seconds have elapsed since the start of reception. When the chance button 136 is operated during the first notification period, a notice (first notice) “...” is displayed. Thereafter, the notice continues until the end of the button acceptance period, and the notice disappears at the end of acceptance.

If the chance button 136 is not operated during the first notification period, the second notification mode is switched when the first notification period ends, and the meter is turned on during the subsequent notification period of T ₄ seconds (for example, 4 seconds). Display in a special color (for example, red). The speed at which the meter decreases is the same as in the first notification mode. When the chance button 136 is operated during the second notification period, a notice “second notice” is displayed. Thereafter, the notice continues until the button reception period ends, and the notice display disappears at the end.

  If the chance button 136 is not operated even during the second notification period, the meter display continues until the button reception period ends, and the meter display disappears when the button reception period ends, and the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The display returns to the state in which all the decorative symbols that are changing are displayed. That is, if the chance button 136 is not operated over the first and second notification periods, the advance notice is not performed.

  It should be noted that the first notice of “...” And the second notice of “Gekiatsu !!!!” are the aforementioned notice lottery based on the determination result and the variation time obtained from the main control unit 300. It is set by processing. The first notice gives the player low expectations, while the second notice gives the player high expectations.

  In detail, in the second embodiment, in the same manner as in the first embodiment, when an operation of the chance button 136 by the player is accepted, “...”, “Super hot?”, “Super hot!” "Is set to be displayed. For example, when the mode of notification B → D is selected, the case classification by the random number values 20 to 49 is further finely divided. For example, when the random number value is 20 to 24, “...” is displayed when an operation is received at the time of notification B, while “Super hot !!” is displayed when the operation is received at the time of notification D. Is set to When the random number is 25 to 34, “Gekiatsu ??” is displayed when an operation is accepted at the time of notification B, while “Gekiatsu!” Is displayed when the operation is accepted at the time of notification D. Has been. When the random number value is 35 to 49, it is set so that “super hot !!” is displayed when an operation is accepted for both the notification B and the notification D. Note that the same setting is made when another notification mode is selected.

  In the second embodiment, the meter is displayed in the reference color in the first notification period, and the set notification has a lower or equivalent expectation than the notification in the second notification period. On the other hand, in the second notification period, the meter is displayed in a special color, and the set notice has a higher or equivalent expectation than the notice in the first notice period. As the display color of the meter, the special color has a greater impact on the player than the reference color. That is, in each notification period, the expectation suggested by the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period is associated with the expectation suggested by the notice. Thereby, the expectation given to the player can be adjusted by a combination of the notification mode and the notice, and there is an advantage that the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

Further, the player may be able to grasp the contents of the notice without operating the chance button 136 by understanding that the remaining time notification mode corresponds to the contents of the notice. That is, the player who is making a big hit may not be able to press the chance button 136 because he / she is conscious of paying out the game ball (moving the game ball to the box). Further, there may be a disadvantage such as spilling a ball paid out when the chance button 136 is operated. However, if the remaining time notification mode also functions as a notice that suggests the result of the success / failure determination, and the content of the notice can be inferred without pressing the chance button 136, the player can pay out the game ball. You may be able to concentrate and increase your expectations for the next game.
<Example 3 of notification mode of remaining time>

  Next, Example 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 and 110. The third embodiment is an example of a notification mode in which the meter is temporarily stopped. In the table shown in FIG. 104, the determination result is 15R big hit (special figure B) and the fluctuation time is 45000 ms (per super reach A). An explanation will be given by taking as an example a case where the notification mode that switches from “notification A (first notification mode)” to “notification E (second notification mode)” is won. The button reception period is set to a predetermined number of seconds (here, 6 seconds). 109 and 110, (a) is the reception start time of the button reception period, (b) is the time when the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period is changed, and (g) is the button reception period. This is the end of acceptance.

  In the notification A mode, the notification period is 1 second, a full-fill meter is displayed in a reference color (for example, blue), and the button reception period (apparent reception period) for notifying the player is the actual button reception period. Half of this (here 3 seconds). Here, by making the rate of decrease of the meter twice the rate of decrease in the actual button reception period, it is possible to make the player have the illusion that it is shorter than the normal button reception period. As a premise of this, in normal times, the amount of decrease per unit time (decrease rate) of the meter that is initially filled up is set to match the decrease rate of the actual button reception period, and the game is repeated. It is preferable that the player can recognize that the button reception period is normally set to a fixed length (here, 6 seconds). According to BGM, the player may be able to recognize sensuously that the button reception period is normally about 6 seconds. If there is such a precondition, even if the actual button acceptance period is set to 6 seconds, it is normal to reduce the full meter by 1/6 per second, for example 1 second. If it is decreased by 1/3, the player can be given the illusion that the current button reception period is 3 seconds. Further, if the time is decreased by 1/5 per second, the player can be given an illusion that the current button reception period is 5 seconds.

  In the mode of the notification E, the notification period is 5 seconds, a meter with an arbitrary remaining amount is displayed in a reference color (for example, blue), and the meter is temporarily stopped for a predetermined time (here, 3 seconds) immediately after the notification is started. After that, in order to match the bottom of the book, the decrease speed of the meter is faster than the normal button reception period (speed that decreases by 1/6 per second) (here, speed that decreases by 1/3 per second) Decrease and report remaining time.

  That is, first, when the notification starts in the first notification mode, a full tank meter is displayed in the reference color. Next, during the first notification period, the meter is decreased by 1/3 in 1 second.

  When the first notification period ends, the second notification mode is switched. In the second notification mode, the reduction of the meter for the first 3 seconds is stopped. Therefore, the meter remains in the state of 2/3 remaining until 4 seconds elapse from the reception start time of the button reception period. Next, when 4 seconds elapse, the meter starts decreasing again, and decreases by 1/3 per second. Accordingly, the remaining amount of the meter is reduced to 1/3 when 5 seconds have elapsed, and the remaining amount of the meter becomes 0 when 6 seconds have elapsed, that is, at the end of the button reception period. In the third embodiment, in order to make up for the temporary stoppage of the meter, the decrease rate of the meter is made faster than the decrease rate of the normal button reception period, particularly in the second notification period.

  Thus, in the third embodiment, the actual remaining time length of the button reception period and the remaining time length suggested by the meter are set differently. Accordingly, by switching from the first notification mode to the second notification mode, the decrease in the meter is temporarily stopped, and the player can be illusioned that the remaining time has increased, thereby amplifying the expectation and being surprised. There are cases where there is an effect that the interest of the game can be enhanced by giving.

In addition, even if the remaining time of the button reception period different from the actual one is notified in either one of the first and second notification modes, the book bottom can be adjusted in the other notification mode, so the effects related to various notices Can be done. In the third embodiment, when the chance button 136 is operated during the button reception period, for example, it is preferable that a notice similar to that in the first embodiment is given.
<Example 4 of notification mode of remaining time>

  Next, Example 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fourth embodiment, as in the first and second embodiments, in the notification mode determination table for notice shown in FIG. 104, the determination result is 15R big hit (special figure B) and the fluctuation time is 45000 ms (per super reach A). An explanation will be given by taking as an example a case where a notification mode switching from “notification B (first notification mode)” to “notification D (second notification mode)” is won. However, the contents of the notifications A to F are different from those of the first and second embodiments, and the fourth embodiment is an example in which the remaining amount of the meter increases when the notification mode is switched. The button reception period is set to a predetermined number of seconds (here, 6 seconds). 111 and 112, (a) is the reception start time of the button reception period, (c) is the time when the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period is changed, and (g) is the button reception period. This is the end of acceptance.

  In the notification B mode of the fourth embodiment, the notification period is 2 seconds, the full tank meter is displayed in a reference color (for example, blue) at the time of notification start, and the button reception period for notification to the player (apparent reception) Period) is half of the actual button reception period (here, 3 seconds). Here, as in the third embodiment, by making the rate of decrease of the meter double the rate of decrease of the actual button reception period, the player is given the illusion that the button reception period is shorter than the actual button reception period. It is like that.

  In the notification D mode, the notification period is 4 seconds, and when the notification starts, a full tank meter is displayed in a reference color (for example, blue), and the player receives the illusion that the meter has recovered after returning to the original button reception period. Let Thereafter, the rate of decrease of the meter is set slower than the rate of decrease in the mode of notification B, and the remaining time is notified.

  That is, first, when the notification starts in the first notification mode, a full tank meter is displayed in the reference color. Next, during the notification period of the first notification mode, the meter is decreased by 1/3 per second. This allows the player to recognize that the current button reception period is 3 seconds. When the first notification period ends, the mode is switched to the second notification mode. At this time, return the meter to full. Then, the full meter is decreased by 1/4 per second. This allows the player to recognize that the remaining time of the button reception period after switching to the second notification mode has increased to 4 seconds. The remaining amount of the meter becomes 0 at the end of the reception of the button reception period.

  According to the notification in the notification mode of the fourth embodiment, the remaining amount of the meter increases at the time of switching from the first notification mode to the second notification mode, and the decrease rate of the meter in the second notification mode is Since it is slower than the rate of decrease in the first notification mode, it is possible to make the player have the illusion that the remaining time of the button reception period has increased, to amplify the expectation, and to give a surprise and enhance the interest of the game There is an effect that can be.

  In addition, since the rate of decrease in the button reception period is different between the first notification mode and the second notification mode, even if the notification of the button reception period different from the actual is performed in either one of the first and second notification modes. In the other notification mode, the bottom of the book can be adjusted and various notices can be made.

In the above example, the meter display is returned to full when the notification mode is switched. However, if the remaining amount of the meter immediately after switching is greater than the remaining amount of the meter immediately before switching, The remaining amount of the meter (in other words, the initial amount of the meter in the second notification mode) is not limited to a full tank. Further, in the fourth embodiment, when the chance button 136 is operated during the button reception period, for example, it is preferable that a notice similar to that in the first embodiment is given.
<Example 5 of notification mode of remaining time>

  Next, Example 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 and 114. Similarly to the first, second, and fourth embodiments, in the notification mode determination table shown in FIG. 104, the determination result is 15R big hit (special figure B) and the fluctuation time is 45000 ms (per super reach A). An explanation will be given by taking as an example a case where a notification mode switching from “notification B (first notification mode)” to “notification D (second notification mode)” is won. However, the contents of the notifications A to F are different from those of the above-described embodiment, and the fifth embodiment is an example in which the remaining amount of the meter is increased when the notification mode is switched and the color is changed and displayed. is there. The button reception period is set to a predetermined number of seconds (here, 6 seconds).

  113 and 114, (a) is the reception start time of the button reception period, (c) is the time when the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period is changed, and (g) is the button reception period. This is the end of acceptance.

  The color of the meter is associated with the sense of expectation for the big hit, and the expectation is low for the reference color (for example, blue), and the expectation is high for the special color (for example, red). This is the same as in the second embodiment.

  In the notification B mode of the fifth embodiment, while the notification period is set to 2 seconds, a fully-filled meter is displayed in the reference color at the start of notification, and then the game is performed while gradually reducing the remaining amount of the meter. It is set so as to correctly notify the remaining time of the actual button reception period to the user. Here, by making the rate of decrease of the meter equal to the rate of decrease in the actual button reception period (that is, the rate at which the meter decreases by 1/6 per second), the player can correctly set the actual button reception period. It is supposed to be recognized.

  In the notification D mode, the notification period is set to 4 seconds, the full meter is displayed in a special color at the start of the notification, and then the actual button is displayed to the player while gradually reducing the remaining amount of the meter. It is set so that the remaining time of the reception period is notified correctly. In this case, the remaining time is reported at the same rate as the actual button reception period (that is, the rate at which the meter decreases by 1/4 per second).

  That is, first, when the notification starts in the first notification mode, a full meter is displayed in the reference color. Next, during the notification period of the first notification mode, the meter is reduced by 1/6 per second. When the notification period of the first notification mode ends, the mode is switched to the second notification mode. At this time, the meter is returned to the full state and the color of the meter is changed from the reference color to the special color. Then, the full meter is decreased by 1/4 per second. Accordingly, the remaining amount of the meter becomes 0 at the end of the reception of the button reception period.

  Even with the notification as in the fifth embodiment, the remaining amount of the meter increases when switching from the first notification mode to the second notification mode, so that the player has an illusion that the remaining time of the button reception period has increased. It is possible to amplify a sense of expectation and to give a surprise and enhance the interest of the game.

  In addition, since the rate of decrease in the button reception period is different between the first notification mode and the second notification mode, even if the notification of the button reception period different from the actual is performed in either one of the first and second notification modes. Since the other information mode can be adjusted to the bottom of the book, it is possible to make various notices.

  Further, the meter color is changed from the reference color to the special color, so that the expectation for the big hit is increased.

In the above-described example, the meter display is returned to full when the notification mode is switched. However, as in the fourth embodiment, the remaining amount of the meter immediately after the switching is greater than the remaining amount of the meter immediately before the switching. If so, the remaining amount of the meter immediately after switching (in other words, the initial amount of the meter in the second notification mode) is not limited to full. In the fifth embodiment, when the chance button 136 is operated during the button reception period, for example, it is preferable that the same notice as in the second embodiment is given.
<Embodiment 6 of notification mode of remaining time>

  Next, Example 6 will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 and 116. In the notification mode determination table shown in FIG. 104 as well, the result of the determination is that the determination result is 15R big hit (special figure B) and the fluctuation time is 45000 ms (per super reach A). “Notification B (first notification mode)” An example in which a notification mode that switches to “notification D (second notification mode)” is won will be described as an example. The sixth embodiment is an example in which the remaining amount of the meter increases when the notification mode is switched, and the operation condition of the chance button 136 for displaying the notice is displayed in the first notification period and the second notification period. Are set differently. In addition, although the content of each alerting | reporting AF is preferable if it is set similarly to the thing of Example 4, it does not restrict to this in particular.

  In FIGS. 115 and 116, (a) is the time when the special figure and decorative symbol change start, (b) is the time when the button reception period starts, and (c) is the remaining time during the button reception period. This is the time when the notification mode changes, and (d) is the time when the reception of the button reception period ends.

Aspects of the notification B of Example 6, with the notification period is set to T _B seconds (e.g. 2 seconds), the full meter by the broadcast start time is displayed in the reference color (e.g. blue), then meter It is set so that the remaining amount of the actual button reception period is properly notified to the player while gradually decreasing the remaining amount. Here, by making the decrease rate of the meter equal to the decrease rate of the actual button reception period, the player can correctly recognize the actual button reception period.

Aspects of the notification D, together with the notification period is set to T _D s (e.g. 4 seconds), the full meter by the broadcast start time is displayed in the reference color, then, while gradually decreasing the remaining amount of the meter The player is set to correctly notify the remaining time of the actual button reception period. Here, the remaining time is reported at the same speed as the actual remaining time.

First, a full meter is displayed in a reference color at the start of notification in the first notification mode. Next, during the notification period of the first notification mode, the meter is decreased by [1 / (T _B + T _D )] by a predetermined amount per second. When the notification period of the first notification mode ends, the mode is switched to the second notification mode. At this time, return the meter to full. Thereafter, the full meter is decreased by a predetermined amount (by 1 / T _D ) per second, and the remaining amount of the meter is set to 0 at the end of the reception of the button reception period.

  In the first notification period, the operation condition of the chance button 136 is a single operation. If the chance button 136 is not operated once during the first notification period, the second notification mode is switched when the first notification period ends, and the meter is displayed in the reference color during the second notification period. At the same time, the operation condition of the chance button 136 is switched to continuous hitting (a plurality of continuous operations). The decreasing rate of the meter is faster than that in the first notification mode. During the second notification mode, the contents of the effect screen are selected according to the number of operations of the chance button 136 and the random value. When the operation screen of the chance button 136 is received and the effect screen is displayed, the effect screen is continuously displayed until the button reception period ends. Then, at the end of the button reception period, the screen returns to the state in which the changing decorative symbol is displayed on all the screens of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The selection of the effect screen during the second notification period will be described in detail. For example, in the notification mode determination table shown in FIG. 104, if the random number value is 20 to 49 and the notification B → D mode is won, When the numerical value is 20 to 39, when the chance button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times or more (for example, 10 times or more), an effect screen “success!” Is displayed, while the chance button 136 is displayed once or more. If the operation is performed less than a predetermined number of times, an effect screen “Sorry ...” is displayed. When the random number is 40 to 49, if the chance button 136 is operated one or more times, an effect screen “Sorry ...” is displayed.

  If the chance button 136 is not operated even during the second notification period, the meter display continues until the button reception period ends, and the meter display disappears when the button reception period ends, and the decorative symbol display device The screen returns to the state in which the decorative pattern being changed is displayed on all the screens 208.

  The notification as in the sixth embodiment also has the effect of giving the player the illusion that the button reception period has increased for a moment. In addition, since the operation condition of the chance button 136 changes with time, there is an advantage that the range of games is widened.

In addition, since the operation conditions of the chance button 136 differ with the passage of time, the range of games can be expanded and the interest of the game can be enhanced.
<Seventh Embodiment of Notification Mode of Remaining Time>

  Next, Example 7 will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 119. The seventh embodiment is an example in which the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period is determined in combination with other notices executed before and after the button reception period.

  In the seventh embodiment, the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period and the content of the notice executed before and after the button reception period are a table stored in advance in the ROM 406 and a random number value obtained by a predetermined random number lottery. To be determined.

  For example, when the determination result is a big hit and the fluctuation time of FIG. 1 is the fluctuation time for Super Reach A, a decorative pattern is stored using a table stored in the ROM 406 in advance as shown in FIG. The outline (basic matter) of the contents of the effect relating to the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period displayed on the display device 208 and the advance notice before and after the button reception period is determined. For example, when the random number value 27 is acquired by a predetermined random number lottery in the table, the notice C corresponding to the random number selection range “20 to 49” is selected. The notice C includes information for changing the notification mode of the button reception period from the notification B mode as the first notification mode to the notification D mode as the second notification mode. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. The same applies to other tables.

  Next, a lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range in the above table. For example, based on a table stored in advance in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. 119 (b) and a random number value obtained by a predetermined random number lottery. Thus, the detailed contents of the notice (hereinafter also referred to as “preceding notice”) to be performed before the button reception period are determined. For example, when the random number 22 included in the random number selection range “10 to 54” in the table is acquired, an effect screen with a balloon “?” On the character image of the princess is selected. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range.

  Next, a lottery is performed in detail for each random number selection range in the above table. For example, based on a table stored in the ROM 406 in advance as shown in FIG. 119 (c) and a random number value obtained by a predetermined random number lottery. Then, the detailed contents of the first notification mode are determined. For example, when the random number value 73 included in the random number selection range “0 to 89” in the table is acquired, a mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is selected as the mode of the notification B. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. Further, the table is set so that the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is more easily selected than the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color).

  Next, a lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range in the above table. For example, based on a table stored in the ROM 406 in advance as shown in FIG. 119 (d) and a random number value obtained by a predetermined random number lottery. Thus, the detailed content of the second notification mode is determined. For example, when the random number value 61 included in the random number selection range “20 to 99” in the table is acquired, a mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is selected as the mode of the notification D. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. Further, the table is set so that the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is more easily selected than the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color).

  Next, a lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range in the above table. For example, based on a table stored in the ROM 406 in advance as shown in FIG. 119 (e) and a random value obtained by a predetermined random lottery. Thus, the detailed contents of the notice (hereinafter also referred to as “follow-up notice”) to be performed after the button reception period are determined. For example, when a random number value 35 included in the random number selection range “10 to 99” in the table is acquired, an effect screen that displays “Gekiatsu !!” as the reach character display notice after the button reception period is selected. Is done. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. In addition, the table is set so that the effect screen displayed as “Gekiatsu !!” is more easily selected than the effect screen displayed as “reach”.

  More specifically, for example, if the determination result is a big hit, the fluctuation time of FIG. 1 is the fluctuation time for Super Reach A, and the notice C is won in the table shown in FIG. A series of effects as shown in 117 and FIG. 118 are performed.

117 and 118, the period from t _{2 to} t ₄ is set as the button reception period. In the button reception period, the remaining time of the button reception period is notified in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

First, the advance notice is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the period from t ₁ to t ₂ before the button reception period. The content of the preceding notice is such that an effect screen with a balloon “?” On the character image of the princess is displayed as a notice with low expectation for the big hit. Next, the button acceptance period begins. Here, as notification manner of the remaining time of the button acceptance period it has won notification manner of switching from the first notification manner at the time of t ₃ to the second notification manner. And in a 1st alerting | reporting aspect, the meter of a full tank is displayed in blue (reference | standard color) with a low expectation to jackpot at the time of alerting | reporting, and a meter is gradually reduced as time passes. In the second notification mode that follows, the meter is displayed in red (special color) with a high expectation for a big hit, and the meter is gradually reduced as time passes.

  When the button acceptance period ends, the meter display disappears and the decorative symbol is in a reach state, and at this time, a subsequent notice is displayed. Here, the content of the subsequent notice is displayed as “Gekiatsu !!” as a notice with high expectation for the big hit.

  In the first notification mode, since the meter is displayed in a reference color of blue, the expectation of jackpot is low. On the other hand, in the second notification mode, since the meter is displayed in a special color of red, the expectation of big hit is high. That is, in this example, the first notification mode is easily set to a low-expectation notification mode and the second notification mode is a sense of expectation in association with the jackpot expectation feeling before and after the button reception period. It is easy to set to a high notification mode.

  Note that at least the following five patterns are conceivable when the notification mode during the button reception period is associated with the notice before and after the button reception period.

  In the first pattern, setting is made so that the notice before the button reception period (expectation; low) → during the button reception period (expectation; low → low) → the notice after the button reception period (expectation; low) . In the second pattern, it is set so that the notice before the button reception period (expectation; low) → during the button reception period (expectation; low → low) → the notification after the button reception period (expectation; high) . In the third pattern, setting is made so that the notice before the button reception period (expectation; low) → during the button reception period (expectation; low → high) → the notice after the button reception period (expectation; high) .

  In the fourth pattern, it is set so that the notice before button reception period (expectation; high) → during button reception period (expectation; high → high) → notice after button reception period (expectation; low) . In the fifth pattern, it is set so that the notice before the button reception period (expectation; high) → during the button reception period (expectation; low → low) → the notice after the button reception period (expectation; high) .

  According to the first pattern, the player's expectation for jackpot may be lowered, and the difference from when the expectation for jackpot is high may be made clearer. In addition, when a big hit occurs when the expectation is low, the player may be able to amplify the joy of the player. According to the second and third patterns, the player's sense of expectation for jackpot may be gradually increased. According to the fourth pattern, there is a case where the player's feeling of expectation for the big hit is not raised too much, and the disappointment when the big hit is not made can be reduced. According to the fifth pattern, since the player's expectation for jackpot is lowered and then increased, the player's expectation for jackpot may be raised and lowered, and eventually the expectation can be further increased. is there.

In the example shown in FIGS. 117 and 118 of the seventh embodiment, the notification before and after the button reception period is performed using the decorative symbol display device 208. However, for example, the effect movable body 224 or an arbitrary lamp is used. It is good also as what is performed by other production | presentation apparatuses. In this case, however, the expectation suggested by the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period and the expectation suggested by the notice are set in association with each other.
<Eighth embodiment of notification mode of remaining time>

  Next, Example 8 will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 to 123. First, the preconditions of Example 8 will be described. When the determination result is a 15R special big hit (probability big hit), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208 with a symbol combination indicating 15R big hit (normal big hit). After that, there is a case where a re-lottery effect is made to change to a combination of decorative symbols indicating a 15R special jackpot (however, since it is determined internally whether it is probabilistic or non-probable, actually re-drawing Not.) At this time, the period from when the decorative symbol starts to change until it stops is divided into, for example, three periods: (1) before the change starts to reach, (2) during reach, and (3) during redraw. It is possible to make a separate notice for each of these three periods. In addition, as shown in FIG. 102, in the re-lottery, the fluctuation time is set longer for 5000 ms than the reach of each reach. This is because the winning variation time includes the time for performing the re-lottery regardless of the probability change or non-change probability.

  In Example 8, when notifying the remaining time of a button reception period in any two or more of each said period (1)-(3), the alerting | reporting aspect in each period (1)-(3) or At least two or more expectations given to the player by the notice are related. Further, in the eighth embodiment, the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period and the content of the notice executed before and after the button reception period are a random number value obtained by a table stored in advance in the ROM 406 and a predetermined random number lottery. It is determined based on.

  For example, when the determination result is a big hit and the fluctuation time of FIG. 1 is a fluctuation time for Super Reach A (for example, 45000 ms), a table stored in the ROM 406 in advance as shown in FIG. 123 (a) is used. Thus, the outline (basic matters) of the contents of the effects relating to the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the notices performed before and after the button reception period are determined. For example, when the random number value 27 is acquired by a predetermined random number lottery in the table, the notice C corresponding to the random number selection range “20 to 49” is selected. The notice C includes information for changing the notification mode of the button reception period from the notification a mode as the first notification mode to the notification b mode as the second notification mode before reaching the period (1). Information to change from the notification c mode as the first notification mode to the notification d mode as the second notification mode during the reach of (2), as the first notification mode during the re-lottery of the period (3) The information to be changed from the notification e mode to the notification f mode as the second notification mode is included. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. Although not shown in particular, a table corresponding to each case such as a table in the case where the result of the determination is a big hit and the fluctuation time in FIG. Is remembered.

  Next, a lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range in the above table. For example, based on a table stored in the ROM 406 in advance as shown in FIG. 123 (b) and a random number value obtained by a predetermined random number lottery. Thus, the detailed contents of the first notification mode before reach in period (1) are determined. For example, when the random number value 22 included in the random number selection range “0 to 49” in the table is acquired, a mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is selected as the mode of the notification a. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. In the table, the probability that the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is selected and the probability that the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) are selected are set to be the same.

  Next, a lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range in the above table. For example, based on a table stored in the ROM 406 in advance as shown in FIG. 123C and a random number value obtained by a predetermined random lottery. Then, the detailed content of the 2nd alerting | reporting aspect before reach | attainment of a period (1) is determined. For example, when the random number value 13 included in the random number selection range “10 to 39” in the table is acquired, a mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) and the meter is increased by a predetermined amount as the mode of notification b. Selected. As an aspect of the notification b, the aspect that “the meter increases by a predetermined amount” is set so that the expectation given to the player is slightly higher than the aspect that “the meter does not increase”. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. Further, the table is set so that the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is more easily selected than the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color).

  Next, a lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range in the above table. For example, based on a table stored in the ROM 406 in advance as shown in FIG. 123 (d) and a random number value obtained by a predetermined random number lottery. Thus, the detailed contents of the first notification mode during the reach of period (2) are determined. For example, when the random number value 61 included in the random number selection range “0 to 89” in the table is acquired, a mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is selected as the mode of the notification c. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. Further, the table is set so that the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is more easily selected than the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color).

  Next, a lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range in the above table. For example, based on a table stored in the ROM 406 in advance as shown in FIG. 123 (e) and a random number value obtained by a predetermined random number lottery. Thus, the detailed contents of the second notification mode during the reach of period (2) are determined. For example, when the random number value 35 included in the random number selection range “30 to 99” in the table is acquired, a mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is selected as the mode of the notification d. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. Further, the table is set so that the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is more easily selected than the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color).

  Next, a lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range in the above table. For example, based on a table stored in the ROM 406 in advance as shown in FIG. 123 (f) and a random number value obtained by a predetermined random number lottery. Thus, the detailed contents of the first notification mode during the re-lottery of period (3) are determined. For example, when the random number value 35 included in the random number selection range “20 to 99” in the table is acquired, a mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is selected as the mode of the notification e. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. Further, the table is set so that the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is more easily selected than the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color).

  Next, a lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range in the above table. For example, based on a table stored in the ROM 406 in advance as shown in FIG. 123 (g) and a random number value obtained by a predetermined random number lottery. Thus, the detailed contents of the second notification mode during the re-lottery of period (3) are determined. For example, when the random number value 35 included in the random number selection range “0 to 49” is acquired in the above table, a mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is selected as the mode of the notification f. On the other hand, for example, when the random value 70 included in the random number selection range “50 to 99” in the table is acquired, a mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is selected as the mode of the notification f. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. In the table, the probability that the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is selected and the probability that the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) are selected are set to be the same.

  More specifically, for example, if the determination result is a big hit, the fluctuation time of FIG. 1 is the fluctuation time for Super Reach A, and the notice C is won in the table shown in FIG. A series of effects as shown in 120 and FIG. 121 is performed.

In the example shown in FIGS. 120 and Fig. 121, the period before 0 to t ₃ seconds reach _(1), t 3 ~t ₇ seconds duration in reach _{(2), t} 7 _{~t 11} seconds redrawing The middle period (3), t ₁₁ seconds and later is set as the period during the big hit round. In addition, the button reception period is notified in all periods, and the expectation feelings suggested are set in association with each other. Basically, one game is a game from the start of the change until the change is stopped and the symbol is fixed. However, if the game is a big hit, one game is taken until the big hit round ends.

  First, in the first button reception period before the decorative symbol stops, the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) in the first notification mode, and the meter color continues to be blue (reference color in the second notification mode). ) And the remaining amount of the meter is increasing. That is, although the expectation level has increased from a low level to a low level, the expectation of the big hit given to the player is still low. If the chance button 136 is operated during this button reception period, for example, a notice “...” Shown in FIG.

In addition, when the chance button 136 is operated during the first notification period of t _{0 to} t ₁ seconds and when the chance button 136 is operated during the second notification period of t _{1 to} t ₂ seconds. As described in the second embodiment, the content of the notice may be different. For example, when the chance button 136 is operated during the first notification period of t _{0 to} t ₁ second, “...” is displayed, and the chance is displayed during the second notification period of t _{1 to} t ₂ seconds. When the button 136 is operated, “Super hot!” May be displayed.

During the second button reception period during reach, when t ₅ seconds elapses, the first notification mode changes to the second notification mode, and the meter color changes from blue to red (special color). As a result, the expectation for the big hit shifts from a slightly low state to a high state. When the determination result is 15R special big hit (probable big hit) or 15R big hit (ordinary big hit), a combination of decorative patterns for big hits determined in advance at time t ₇ seconds (for example, “decoration 2-decoration” 2-decoration 2 "combination), and in other cases, it stops at a predetermined combination of decorative symbols for removal (for example, the combination of" decoration 2-decoration 1-decoration 2 "). When the determination result is 15R special jackpot or 15R jackpot, a re-lottery is performed, and the third button reception period starts.

  Note that, during the second button reception period, for example, as in the first embodiment, the content of the notice that is given when the chance button 136 is operated during the first notification period and the chance button during the second notification period. The content of the notice to be performed when 136 is operated may be set to be the same. Alternatively, similar to the second embodiment, different contents may be set. Further, the 15R special jackpot and the 15R jackpot are the determination results of whether or not the profit amount given to the player is a relatively large profit amount.

In the third button reception period, when the time t ₉ seconds elapses, the first notification mode is switched to the second notification mode. At this time, when the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue is selected as the second notification mode in the table shown in FIG. 123 (g), the display shown on the right side of FIG. Is displayed in red, the display shown on the left side of FIG. 121 (k) is performed.

  After that, regardless of which mode is selected, if the chance button 136 is not operated during the button reception period, the effect image shown in FIG. 120 (l) is displayed, and after that, the 15R special jackpot is won. If it is, a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a combination of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”) in which the decorative symbol indicates 15R special jackpot, or a predetermined symbol combination (for example, “decoration 2” -Stop at the combination of “decoration 2—decoration 2”. On the other hand, if the 15R jackpot is won, the game stops with a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a combination of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”) in which the decoration symbol represents 15R jackpot. Even if the 15R special jackpot is won, the decorative symbol may not stop at the symbol combination indicating the 15R special jackpot at this time, but may stop at the symbol combination indicating the 15R jackpot. In that case, a special change promotion effect is made during the big hit round or at the end of the big hit round, or the special figure change game enters the special change state of the special figure high-precision normal figure high-precision after the big hit round without performing the positive change promotion production. It is set to be.

In the period during redrawing (3), if the chances button 136 is operated during a first broadcasting period of t ₈ ~t ₉ seconds, redrawing in from the time of accepting the operation of chance buttons 136 Until the period (3) is completed, any combination of decorative symbols (for example, a combination of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” indicating 15R special jackpot if 15R special jackpot is won, or When the 15R jackpot is won, a combination of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” indicating the 15R jackpot) is performed (see the left side of FIG. 122 (k)). On the other hand, when the chance button 136 is not operated, as described above, when t ₉ seconds elapses, the button reception period is switched from the first notification mode to the second notification mode (FIG. 122 ( k) See center or right side).

Chance button 136 is not operated during the first broadcasting period, when the chance button 136 is operated during a second broadcast period t ₉ ~t ₁₀ seconds, from the time of accepting the operation of chance buttons 136 Any combination of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” indicating 15R special jackpot if 15R special jackpot is won, etc.) If the winning combination is 15R jackpot, a combination of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” indicating 15R jackpot, etc.) is performed to stop display.

  Since the time for performing the re-lottery is fixed at 5000 ms as described above, the time when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in an arbitrary combination is appropriately adjusted according to the timing of the operation of the chance button 136.

  In this way, when notifying the remaining time of a plurality of times in one game, it is possible to variously change the sense of expectation for the big hit given to the player. In particular, the expectation given to the player can be adjusted in detail by appropriately setting the notification mode of each period or the expectation based on the notice in association with each other.

  In other words, for example, when all of the notices are low expectations for the player, the player's expectation for the big hit (especially 15R special big hit) is lowered and the distinction from the case where the expectation is high is clarified. There are cases where it is possible. In addition, when a big hit (especially a 15R special big hit) is achieved with a low expectation, the player's joy may be further amplified.

In addition, when a notice changes from a low expectation to a high notice for a player, the player's expectation for a big hit (especially a 15R special big hit) may be gradually increased. In addition, if the player changes from a high-anticipation notice to a low-anticipation notice, the player's expectation for the big hit may not be raised too much, and the disappointment when the big hit is not possible may be reduced. . Further, if all the notices are highly anticipated for the player, the player's expectation for the big hit (especially the 15R special big hit) may be further increased.
<Others>

  It should be noted that the game table of the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is needless to say that various changes can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention.

  For example, the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period may be a notification mode as shown in FIG. In this example (Embodiment 9), a full-filled meter is initially displayed only in a reference color (for example, blue). For example, when the button reception period is 6 seconds, the meter is decreased by 1/6 per second. Go.

  When one second has elapsed from the start of notification, a partial area of the meter is changed to a special color (for example, red). The position of the special area changed to the special color is also moved as the meter decreases with the passage of time.

  The player presses the chance button 136 at the timing when the base end portion (here, the left end portion) of the meter is the reference color [timing (b), (c), (d) and (f) in FIG. 124]. In such a case, a notice with a low expectation (for example, a notice "..." shown in FIG. 106) is displayed. On the other hand, when the player presses the chance button 136 at the timing when the base end of the meter is in a special color (timing (e) in FIG. 124), a notice with a high expectation (for example, FIG. "Advance notice!" Is displayed. In this way, there are cases where the range of games can be expanded by setting the notification mode so that a highly anticipated notice cannot be seen unless the chance button 136 is pressed in a timely manner.

  The first mode of displaying a meter with only the reference color is referred to as a first notification mode, and the mode of displaying a meter having a special color special area is referred to as a second notification mode.

  In this example, as shown in (c-1) or (c-2) of FIG. 124, the size of the special area changed to the special color can be arbitrarily set. Furthermore, as shown in (c-3) of FIG. 124, the position of the special area at the time of changing to the special color can be reset to an arbitrary position. As a result, the timing at which the player presses the Chang button 136 can be changed.

  Moreover, Examples 1-9 of the notification mode of the above-mentioned remaining time can be combined appropriately. Further, for example, in the first to ninth embodiments of the notification mode of the remaining time described above, the level of expectation to the big hit given to the player is changed by changing the color of the meter. Thus, the level of expectation to the big hit may be changed by changing the blinking mode and displaying. Further, for example, in the first to ninth embodiments of the above-described remaining time notification mode, the notification is performed by accepting the operation of the chance button 136, but the operation of the operation means other than the chance button 136 is accepted. A notice may also be made. Moreover, you may provide the aspect which switches from the 1st alerting | reporting aspect to the 2nd alerting | reporting aspect, and also the 3rd alerting | reporting aspect as a notification aspect of the remaining time of a button reception period. That is, as a notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period, at least a pattern in which the notification mode does not change with the passage of time and a pattern in which the notification mode is switched in two stages of the first to second notification modes are provided. What is necessary is just to exclude the structure further provided with the pattern which a notification aspect switches in three steps or more.

  Further, in the first to ninth embodiments of the notification mode of the remaining time described above, it is described that the meter is decreased by a predetermined amount per second. However, the unit time may be decreased by a predetermined amount per unit time. It is not limited to 1 second. Furthermore, in Examples 1 to 9 of the notification mode of the remaining time described above, the remaining time of the button reception period is expressed in the form of a rectangular meter. For example, the form in which the hands of the clock advance or the form in which the sand of the hourglass falls Of course, it may be expressed in other formats.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 125, the gaming table according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels 1002 that are provided with a plurality of types of symbols and are driven to rotate, and a start lever 1004 that instructs rotation of the reels. A stop button 1006 for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, lottery means (lottery prize internal lottery) for determining whether or not a plurality of types of internal winnings are successful, and lottery means The combination of symbols displayed by the reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) for stopping the stop of the rotation of the reel based on the lottery result and the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means Determining means (winning determination process) for determining whether or not the symbol combination is predetermined corresponding to the winning combination, and predetermined if the symbol stopping mode is a predetermined winning mode In addition to payout control means (medal payout process 1008) for performing game medium payout processing for paying out game media corresponding to the winning mode, the effect means 1010 for executing effects based on the lottery result of the lottery means is provided. The means detects a launch device 1014 that launches a ball into a predetermined game area 1012, a winning port 1016 configured to be able to enter a ball launched from the launch device, and a ball that has entered the winning port 1016 Means 1018, payout means 1020 for paying out a ball when detecting means 1018 detects a ball, variable display device 1022 for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and moving to a position where variable display device 1022 is shielded The variable display device 10 includes a possible shutter 1024 and a movable body 1026 that operates in a predetermined operation mode, and when a game ball enters the winning opening and wins. 22 is also suitable for a slot machine 1000 ”which is a production device 1010 that produces a game by stopping and displaying after changing the symbol.

That is, the gaming machine of the present invention has at least a result determination result (for example, the main control unit 300) for determining whether or not the game is correct when a predetermined condition for determining whether or not the condition is satisfied, and the result of the determination on whether the result is correct. In the case of a determination result (for example, big hit), the second advantage is higher than the first advantage from the first control state where the advantage for the player is the first advantage. Control state transition means (for example, the main control unit 300) that shifts the control state to the second control state, operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, the chance button 136), and the result of the success / failure determination Notice means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 and the decorative symbol display device 208) for performing an effect including a notice, and the notice means enables the player to accept the operation of the operation means. The remaining time notifying means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 and the decorative symbol display device 208) for notifying the remaining time of the reception period in a predetermined notification mode, and the operation by the player during the reception period Specific notice means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 and the decorative symbol display device 208) for making a predetermined notice suggesting the result of the determination of success or failure when an operation of the means is accepted, The notification mode has a first notification mode and a second notification mode different from the first notification mode, and the remaining time notification means has a predetermined time and the remaining time is predetermined. The remaining time is notified in the first notification mode until the length is reduced, and the predetermined condition is not satisfied after the predetermined time has elapsed (for example, the notification shown in FIG. 104). Aspect determination table When “notification F” is won, the first notification mode is continued to notify the remaining time, while when the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, in the notification mode determination table shown in FIG. 104, “ “Notification A → E” or “Notification B → D” or “Notification C ₁ → C ₂ ” is selected to notify the remaining time by switching from the first notification mode to the second notification mode. If it is.

  In the above gaming machine, the first notification mode and the second notification mode are set according to the result of the determination of success or failure and function as a notification similar to the notification performed by the specific notification means. Is preferred.

  Further, in the above gaming machine, the remaining time notification means indicates the remaining time to be notified in each of the first notification mode and the second notification mode according to a result of the determination of success / failure ( For example, when the determination result is determined based on the notification mode determination table and the result of the determination is the specific determination result, the remaining time to be notified by each of the first notification mode and the second notification mode is determined. It is preferable to make a determination based on a specific table (for example, a jackpot table of the notification mode determination table) among the predetermined tables.

  In the above gaming machine, the operation means can accept at least one of a single operation and a plurality of consecutive operations by the player, and the specific notice means is the predetermined notice means. Until the predetermined time elapses, and a notice is given on the condition that the one-time operation is accepted, and after the predetermined time elapses, the notice is given on the condition that the plurality of consecutive operations are accepted. Preferably it is done.

  Further, in the above gaming machine, the remaining time notification means makes the remaining time notified by at least one of the first notification mode and the second notification mode different from the actual length of the remaining time. It is preferable.

  At this time, the remaining time notifying means sets the predetermined length as the first length, and when the remaining time to be notified in the first notification mode is reduced to the first length, When the condition is satisfied, the first notification mode is switched to the second notification mode, and the remaining time to be notified in the second notification mode is longer than the first length. It is preferable to increase it.

  Further, the remaining time notifying means notifies the remaining time by the remaining amount of the meter, and notifies the meter decreasing speed to be notified by the second notification mode by the first notification mode. It is preferable to make it faster than the decrease rate.

  Note that the jackpot referred to in the present invention means that the next special figure fluctuation game is a special figure high-precision ordinary figure high-precision [for example, 15R special big hit (see special figure A in FIG. 97 (a)), 2R big hit (sudden probability change; FIG. 97 (See special figure C in (a))], special figure high-precision normal figure low accuracy [eg 2R big hit (hidden probability change; see special figure E in Fig. 97 (a)]], special figure low-precision normal figure high accuracy [eg 15R big hit (see special figure B in Fig. 97 (a)), 2R big hit (sudden time reduction; see special figure D in Fig. 97 (a))], and special figure low-precision normal figure low-precision [eg 2R big hit (sudden normal) ; Refer to the special figure F of FIG. 97 (a))].

In addition, the miss in the present invention is that the next special figure variation game is a special figure low probability normal figure low accuracy and does not apply to the above (for example, small hits (see special figures G and H in FIG. 97 (a)) and Misplacement (see special figures I and J in FIG. 97 (a))].
<Fifth Embodiment>

Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. The reference numerals shown in FIGS. 126 to 192 are used only in the description of the fifth embodiment in principle, and even in the case where the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the description of the present embodiment is omitted. The codes shown in FIGS. 126 to 192 are prioritized.
<Overall configuration>

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 to which the present invention can be applied will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. . The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A store clerk of the store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 is opened is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 100 through a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inside Is a door member having an opening 116. The store clerk of the amusement store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 1061 for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In the description here, a light source that uses an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be locked and openable. The door 108 with the ball storage tray is opened by pressing an opening lever 1081 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. Further, a door sensor with ball storage tray 1082 for detecting that the door with ball storage tray 108 is opened is also provided. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player The ball launching handle 134 for launching into the game area 124, the effect button 136 for changing the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 128) by the player's operation, and the effect button 136 An effect button lamp 138 that causes the effect button 136 to emit light, a ball lending operation button 140 that gives a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and a return of the player's balance to the card unit A return operation button 142 for giving an instruction, and a ball rental display unit 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit are provided. Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a lower plate full tank detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is filled with game balls. Furthermore, a cross key 141 is also provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously being fired by the player, the launching device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every time a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses. Fire towards.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. In FIG. 126, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  127 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 126 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is located below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The payout device 152 is detachable and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152. In other words, the payout device 152 is a kind of a ball feeding device that applies a driving force to a game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined grant. Based on the establishment of the condition, the player is given (paid out) with an amount of game value (game ball) corresponding to the grant condition.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, the main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 129) that performs overall game control processing, and the processing information generated by the main control unit 300 are shown. Based on the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 129) that performs control processing related to the effects, and the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control section 500 (see FIG. 129) that performs control processing related to the effects, and the payout control section 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls ( 129) and a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by an operation of a game clerk, A launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control section 630 (see FIG. 129) that performs control processing related to the launch of a sphere, and a power management section 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines (see FIG. 129). And a power supply board 182 that includes a power supply switch 178 that turns on and off the power supply by an operation of a game clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on. The board case 184 and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit are provided.

  FIG. 128 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200 shown in FIG. 128, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are provided, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. In the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center, and a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol display device 212, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided around the decorative symbol display device 208. Is arranged. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is an image display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the pachinko machine 100, a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) is used. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, in the pachinko machine 100, as will be described later, the 4th symbol of the usual figure and the 4th symbol of the special figure are displayed in the left corner of the effect display area 208d. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the pachinko machine 100. The special figure display device 212 is a display device for displaying a special figure. In the pachinko machine 100, the special figure display device 212 is constituted by a 7-segment LED. These general map display device 210 and special map display device 212 correspond to an example of a notification means.

  In addition, the display area (here, the size of 7 segments is equivalent) of the ordinary figure display device 210 and the special figure display device 212 (notification means) and the display area (here, display) of the decorative symbol display device 208 (symbol display means) The display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is larger. Further, in the pachinko machine 100, the general map display device 210 and the special figure display device 212 cannot display moving images, whereas the decorative symbol display device 208 can display moving images.

  The general figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of a predetermined first variable game (a general figure variable game to be described later in detail) that is being held. In the pachinko machine 100, a predetermined number of general figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

  The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-probability lamp 222 is configured so as to give a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on until the start of the big hit game, and thereafter does not notify the current symbol control state. Yes. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is turned off is restored.

  In addition, a general prize opening 226, two ordinary drawing start gates 251 and 253, an ordinary figure electric accessory 252, a special figure starting opening 230, and a variable winning opening 234 are arranged around the production device 206. doing.

  126. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 126, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are provided on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detecting sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (general) When the winning opening 226 is won), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 127 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. 126 as winning balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the pachinko machine 100, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for a prize may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”. Of the plurality of general winning ports 226, only one general winning port 226 is disposed below the usual start gate 251. That is, the general winning opening 226 is disposed between the normal start gate 251 and the variable winning opening 234 provided at the lower center of the game board. Hereinafter, the general winning award 226 will be referred to as a central general winning award 226 when distinguished from other general award winning holes 226. Further, when the general figure starting gate 251 provided at the lower center of the game board is distinguished from the other general figure starting gate 253, it is referred to as a central common figure starting gate 251. Unlike the ball that entered the general prize opening 226, the ball that has passed the central opening gate 251 is not discharged to the amusement island side, and the ball can enter the central general prize opening 226. It is. However, even if a game ball passes through the central ordinary start gate 251, no prize ball will be paid out. The central normal start gate 251 corresponds to an example of a first entry area, and the central general winning opening 226 below the gate corresponds to an example of a second entry area.

  Here, the game performance of the pachinko machine 100 provided with the game board 200 shown in FIG. 128 will be briefly described. The pachinko machine 100 is a gaming machine that does not make a game ball enter the variable winning opening 234 and earns a ball, but makes a game ball enter the ordinary electric accessory 252 to earn a ball. In a normal state (a special figure low-probability normal figure low-probability state to be described later), first, when a game ball enters the central general figure start gate 251, aiming at the central general figure start gate 251 provided at the lower center of the game board. Then, whether or not the normal map is determined (first determination of correctness) is performed, and the general map display device 210 starts the variable display. In addition to the variable display of the general-purpose display device 210, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a variable display of the normal-pattern decorative symbol. That is, the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the general symbol display device 210 in a form with enhanced performance.

  In the case where the winning / winning determination of the normal symbol is won, the universal symbol display device 210 displays a stop symbol (see FIG. 130 (c)) of a predetermined symbol form corresponding to the winning symbol, and a decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the hit is stopped and displayed. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen for instructing to make a right strike, and the general-purpose electric accessory 252 disposed in the right area of the game area 124 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 5.8 seconds). To do. In other words, the ordinary electric accessory 252 includes a movable member (here, a door member 2521) that can be freely opened and closed, and when the door member 2521 is opened, it is possible to win a prize at the special drawing start port 230. The door member 2521 is a member that changes the difficulty level of winning a prize to the special figure starting port 230. When the door member 2521 is closed, it is impossible to enter the special drawing starting port 230, and the closed state where the door member 2521 is closed is an open / close state in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, the state in which the door member 2521 is open is an open / close state in which winning is easy. Accordingly, the special figure starting port 230 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball). This is a variable start area in which the ease of entering a game ball changes from one size to the other size. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the usual start gates 251 and 253. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the normal start gates 251 and 253 or smaller than the size of the entrance of them (251 and 253). It should be noted that the closed state of the door member 2521 of the ordinary electric accessory 252 does not necessarily need to be completely closed, and may be in a state where it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball even if it is slightly opened. . The closed state of the door member 2521 of the general electric accessory 252 corresponds to an example of the first state, and the open state corresponds to an example of the second state. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, seven) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that has entered the special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. 128 is a variable starting means, and can be said to be an attacker-type electric tulip (electrical chew).

  When a game ball enters the general-purpose electric accessory 252 in a state where the door member 2521 is opened, the ball always enters the special figure starting port 230. Even if a plurality of game balls enter the special figure starting port 230 by opening the door member 2521 once, whether or not the special figure is determined (lottery) is performed only for the first ball that has entered. That is, in this pachinko machine 100, there is no special figure holding storage. Therefore, the game board 200 is not provided with a special figure holding lamp. In addition, a winning lamp 254 is provided in the vicinity (in this example, on the right side) of the ordinary electric accessory 252. The winning lamp 254 emits light (flashes) when there is a winning at the special drawing start port 230. Further, light is emitted (flashing) when the door member 2521 is closed. The winning lamp 254 corresponds to an example of a light emitting unit.

  The door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 opens for a predetermined time (here, 5.8 seconds), and a predetermined number of balls (here, ten balls) enter the general-purpose electric accessory 252 during the predetermined time. In this case, the door member 2521 is closed without waiting for the elapse of a predetermined time when the predetermined number of balls have entered. When the game ball enters the general-purpose electric accessory 252, whether or not the special figure is appropriate (lottery) is determined, and the special figure display device 212 starts the variable display. In addition to the variation display of the special figure display device 212, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100, the one-time opening of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 aims to acquire the right to determine whether or not the special drawing is won once and increase the number of prize balls by winning one or more balls. Is.

  When the big win is won in the special symbol determination, the special symbol display device 212 displays a stop symbol of a predetermined symbol form corresponding to the big hit, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also provides an effect corresponding to the big hit. The variable start port 234 is opened for a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times or twice) for a very short time (for example, 0.1 second). Only one variable winning port 234 is arranged below the center of the game board 200 shown in FIG. The variable winning opening 234 includes a winning opening and a door member 2341 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid. The winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be referred to as an attacker. The variable winning opening 234 is kept closed until a jackpot game to be described later is started, and when the jackpot game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. That is, the variable winning opening 234 includes a predetermined first opening / closing state (here, the closed state) and a second opening / closing state (here, the opening state) in which the winning of the game ball is easier than the first opening / closing state. The variable winning means is capable of changing the open / closed state from one to the other. It should be noted that the closed state at the variable winning opening 234 does not necessarily need to be completely closed, and may be in a state where it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball even if it is slightly opened. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as a winning ball. However, in the pachinko machine 100 as described above, since the open state at the variable winning opening 234 is extremely short (for example, 0.1 seconds), almost no payout by entering the variable winning opening 234 can be expected. The ball that entered the variable prize opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  In the normal state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), if a big win is won in the special figure success / failure determination, it always shifts to the electric support state (also called short-time state, general figure high probability state). In the electric support state, first, the general-purpose starting gate 253 disposed in the right area of the game area 124 is aimed. A general electric accessory 252 is provided directly below the normal start gate 253. The right-hand general start gate 253 corresponds to an example of the first entry area, and the special-purpose start opening 230 that allows the game ball to enter when the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 immediately below the door is opened. This corresponds to an example of two approach areas.

  Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the normal start gate 253 is not discharged to the amusement island side, and no winning ball is paid out. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed the right-hand general map start gate 253, the normal map determination is made, and the general map display device 210 starts the normal map variable game.

  If the pachinko machine 100 is in the electric support state, it is easy to hit in the normal determination. If it is determined whether or not the normal figure is correct, the door member 2521 of the general purpose electric accessory 252 is opened again, and when the game ball enters the general purpose electric accessory 252, whether or not the special figure is appropriate is determined. In the pachinko machine 100, in the probability variation state (special figure high probability state) and the non-probability variation state (special figure low probability state), the probability of winning the big hit in the special figure judgment changes, but in any state, the big hit with high probability Is configured to win. If the big win is not won in the special figure determination (if it is a loss), the variable winning opening 234 is not opened. However, since it is in the electric support state, if the game ball passes through the right-hand general start gate 253, the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is opened with a considerable probability. In this way, it is easy to win a special jackpot several times during the electric support state. In the pachinko machine 100, the period between the electric support states corresponds to a special game state, and a bonus game is produced.

  In general, when winning a ball is not reduced, repeatedly winning a special bonus jackpot is called a ream. Therefore, even if it is in the non-electric support state, while it is in a probable variation state, repeatedly winning a special figure jackpot may be referred to as a recreational resort. However, in the gaming board 200 shown in FIG. 128, there is only one special figure starting port, and the special figure starting port 230 is not won unless the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is opened. Therefore, here, it is referred to as consecutive resort that, during the electric support state, the jackpot with the electric support is repeatedly elected and the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is repeatedly opened. For example, during the electric support state, a consecutive house is also established when a special jackpot with electric support of the special figure is won by one or more times. Special bonus jackpots are available with probability variation jackpots and non-probability variation jackpots. It is easy to win a jackpot with probability variation with a jackpot with probability variation and a jackpot with probability variation, but the number of times that a jackpot with probability variation can be acquired between the transition to the non-power support status after transition to the power support status. There are restrictions. Hereinafter, this probability variation limit is referred to as a limiter, and the above number is referred to as a prescribed number. Here, the specified number of times is 11. When the specified number of times is reached, the electric support state is changed to the non-electric support state and the non-probable change state is changed. That is, a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state which is a normal state is obtained. On the other hand, if the special figure wins a non-probable big hit before the specified number of times is reached, the limiter is reset and the number of wins with a probable big hit becomes zero.

  In the pachinko machine 100 having the above-described configuration, a plurality of types of times are prepared as the time until the determination result of the normal map is obtained, that is, the variation time of the general map display device 210. A plurality of types of times are prepared for the time until deriving, that is, the variation time of the special figure display device 212. In the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the normal figure is short, and when the game ball passes the right normal figure start gate 253, the determination result is immediately notified. When the special figure is a big hit, the fluctuation time of the special figure is not more than one opening period (here, 5.8 seconds) of the door member 2521 in the general-purpose electric accessory 252; It may become longer with a predetermined probability.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 128, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a game nail 238 are arranged in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, and the inner rail 204 At the bottom, there is provided an out-port 240 for guiding a ball that has not won any winning opening or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the amusement island side.

The sphere accommodated in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 146 and launcher 148 into the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (The usual start gates 251 and 253, the special drawing start port 230) are won or reach the out port 240 without winning any winning port or start port.
<Directing device 206>

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll. In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242 and the stage 244.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball naild by the game nail 238 and the like, and the passed ball enters the central normal start gate 251 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate this.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 128, and the shielding device 246 correspond to the rendering means. Among these, the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of the symbol display means. .
<Control unit>

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and the power management unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. Yes. In the pachinko machine 100, the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 are composed of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) The first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be composed of one common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. It may be a thing. Therefore, each of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 can be regarded as a predetermined control means, or one of these three control units (300, 400, 500) combined. One can be regarded as a predetermined control means, or one combined with the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 can be regarded as a predetermined control means.
<Main control unit>

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 includes a random value generation circuit 318 for deriving a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two random value generation circuits). Lower plate for detecting that the main body opening sensor 1041, the front frame door sensor 1061, the door sensor with ball storage tray 1082, and the lower tray 128 shown in FIG. Receives signals output from various sensors 320 including a full tank detection sensor, a ball detection sensor provided inside each start opening, winning opening and variable winning opening, and disturbs the result of amplification and comparison with reference voltage. A sensor circuit 322 for outputting to the numerical value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special figure display device 212, and the general diagram display device 2 A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of 0, a drive circuit 330 for performing display control of various status display units 328 (for example, the universal map holding lamp 216, the high-accuracy medium lamp 222, etc.) A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing the door member 2521 of the object 252 and the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 and the drive circuit 335 for controlling the light emission of the prize lamp 254 are connected. ing. Note that the light emission control of the winning lamp 254 may be performed on the first sub-control unit 400 side.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random value generation circuit 318 can be broadly divided into two types of methods: counter mode and random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that is counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods in the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode performs an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of random numbers, and derives the operation result as a random number. The second method reads a numerical value from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derives the read numerical value as a random number. The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on a signal input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random value generation circuit 318 uses the acquired value as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, uses it as a seed of random numbers, or determines a read start position of the random number table. .

  When the sphere detection sensor among the various sensors 320 detects that the sphere has won the special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Output. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the special figure starting port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. This is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the start port 230. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won a prize in the usual figure starting gates 251 and 253 (these two ordinary figure starting gates are collectively referred to as a usual figure starting area). The value at the timing of the random number generation circuit corresponding to the normal start area is latched, and the latched value is stored in the random value storage register corresponding to the normal start area built in the random number generation circuit 318. To do.

  Further, as the ball detection sensor referred to in this specification, specifically, a sensor for detecting a ball that has won a predetermined winning opening or starting opening such as a general winning opening 226, a special drawing starting opening 230, a variable winning opening 234, or the like. There is a sensor for detecting a sphere passing through the normal start gates 251 and 253.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the control state) is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power management unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this case), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302. The low voltage signal is an electric system abnormality signal indicating that there is an abnormality in the electric system for operating the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 corresponds to an example of an electric system abnormality signal output unit.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started). The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of game control means.

The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.
<Sub control unit>

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is connected to a ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 detects a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418, and pressing of the effect button 136 shown in FIG. An effect button detection sensor 426 and a sensor circuit 428 that outputs detection signals from various sensors to the basic circuit 402 are connected.

Furthermore, a second sub-control unit 500 for controlling the decorative symbol display device (liquid crystal display device) 208 and the shielding device 246 is connected to the first sub-control unit 400.
<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply management unit>

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply management unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Based on a control signal instructing the launch intensity according to the amount, control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the ball from the upper plate 126 to the launcher 110 I do.

The power management unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and supplies the predetermined voltage to the dispensing control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500. The main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the launch control unit 630 are supplied with a predetermined voltage from the payout control unit 600. The power management unit 660 also stores a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the pachinko machine 100, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power management unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.
<Type of design>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 130 (a), the types of special figures that the special figure display device 212 of the pachinko machine 100 stops and displays will be described.

  FIG. 130 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol mode (second symbol mode) of the special figure. The special figure variation game is started on the condition that the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is opened and the ball detection sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure starting port 230. When the special figure variable game is started, the special figure display device 212 displays “variable display of special figure” (special figure variable game) which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. Then, when the variation time (first variation time) determined before the start of the variation of the special figure elapses, the special diagram display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special diagram. Hereinafter, a series of displays from the start of the “figure display of special figure” to the stop display of the stop symbol form of the special figure may be referred to as a special figure fluctuation stop display. This special figure variable stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 130 (a), 22 types of special charts from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure W” are shown as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation stop display. In FIG. 130 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  In the pachinko machine 100, 20 types of jackpot symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure T") are prepared as the stop symbol forms of special figures. Any of the jackpot symbols is a jackpot symbol of a predetermined round (for example, 15 rounds or two rounds).

  The round here means the number of chances that a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) can be obtained. In the pachinko machine 100, the number of actuations of the variable prize opening 234 shown in FIG. 128 is represented, and the 15th round is one or more opening / closing operations of the variable prize opening 234 (one action). This means that this operation continues 15 times. That is, one operation corresponds to an example of a specific change in which the open / close state changes from the first open / close state (here, the closed state) to the second open / close state (here, the open state). During the big hit game, the specific change is performed a plurality of constant times (15 times in the case of 15 rounds). Each round has a predetermined round end condition (for example, the entry of a game ball of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls), acquisition of a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls), elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the round, etc. 1 or more) is completed. A big hit game is in progress for a predetermined round.

  FIG. 130 (b) is a table summarizing the characteristics of the special figure shown in FIG. 130 (a). When the special figure is a big hit in the normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability), that is, in the state where the special figure is big hit in the non-electric support state, the door member 2521 of the general figure electric accessory 252 repeatedly opens and closes The probability of doing this is extremely low, and in FIG. 130 (b), it is marked as when the general electric component is released (initial). This means that the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 for which the determination of whether or not the special drawing is to be performed is performed once. At the time of the normal drawing electric component release (initial stage), the special figure A to the special figure P become a big hit with certainty. If it is with certainty change, it will shift to a state where the probability of winning a big hit is high in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. The pachinko machine 100 shifts to a special figure low probability state during a big hit game, and if a big hit with probability change is won, it shifts to a special figure high probability state after the big hit game ends. On the other hand, special figure Q to special figure T are big hits without certainty.

  Also, at the time of releasing the ordinary electric charge (initial stage), if the special figure is a big hit, the time is given. That is, special figure A to special figure P will be a big hit with a time-saving until the next big hit, and special figure Q to special figure T will be given a short time while the symbol variation stop display of the special figure is performed 100 times. After any big hit game from special figure A to special figure T, the state shifts to a state with electric support (electric support) (hereinafter referred to as an electric support state). The electric support state is one of the control states prepared for the pachinko machine 100, and is sometimes referred to as a time-short state. The electric support state (short-time state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric support state” is a state related to a general plan, and the “short-time state” is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a general figure and a special figure. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a time reduction flag. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is usually in a high probability state. Note that the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the big hit game. In the normal figure high probability state, compared to the normal figure low probability state, it becomes easier to win the common figure variable game (general figure certain change). For example, the probability of winning the usual figure variation game is 1/60 in the low figure probability state (non-electric support state), but increases to 1 / 1.0003 in the high figure probability state (electric support state). To do. In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the general figure change game is shorter than that in the non-electric support state (the general figure change short). For example, in the non-electric support state, the variation time of the usual game of 10 seconds is reduced to 1.5 seconds in the electric support state. The probability of entering the special figure starting port 230 increases due to the change of the universal figure and the change of the universal figure. In the pachinko machine 100, the normal figure change and the normal figure change are performed in the electric support state (short time state), but the electric chew release period may be extended or the electric chew release frequency may be increased. From the above, in the non-electric support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the special figure starting port 230 than in the electric support state. That is, in the non-electric support state, the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is likely to be closed, and the rate of entry of game balls into the special-purpose starting port 230 is low. On the other hand, in the electric support state, the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is easy to open, and the rate of entry of game balls into the special-purpose starting port 230 is increased. Therefore, the non-electric support state corresponds to an example of a non-specific state (which also corresponds to a normal game state), and the electric support state corresponds to an example of a specific state (also corresponds to a special game state). The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a game state transition unit that shifts the game state between the normal game state and the special game state.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 100, there is a limit (limiter) on the number of times that a big hit with certain change can be obtained between the transition to the power support state and the transition to the non-power support state. . The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a probability variation counter that counts the number of times that a big hit with probability variation can be obtained. When the non-electric support state is shifted to the electrical support state, a specified number of times is set in this probability variation counter. Then, every time a jackpot with probability variation is obtained, the probability variation counter is decremented by one. This probability variation counter corresponds to an example of a specified number counter. When the limiter is set and the specified number of times has not been reached (when the limiter has not been reached), that is, until the number of jackpots with probability change after shifting to the electric support state reaches the specified number of times Then, special figure A to special figure P will be a big hit with certainty and with a short time until the next big hit. Further, in the special drawings A to P, the probability variation counter is not reset. On the other hand, when the limiter is not reached, the special figure Q to the special figure T are big hits with no probability change, and the probability variation counter is reset to the specified number of times, and the symbol variation stop display with a special time is 100 times. Granted while done.

  Further, when the probability variation counter reaches the specified number of times (here, the counter value becomes 0), that is, when the limiter is reached, the special figures A to H and the special figures Q and R are big hits without the probability variation, and the time reduction is The symbol variation stop display of the special figure is given 100 times, and the probability variation counter is reset. On the other hand, when the limiter is reached, the special drawings I to P and the special drawings S and T are big hits with no probability change and no short time, and the limiter setting is completed and the normal game state is entered.

  To summarize the above, special maps A to P are in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state from the first hit (when the electric figure electric component is released (initial)) to when the limiter has not reached (in the Renzhuang). Yes, special figure Q to special figure S are special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. When the limiter is reached, special figure A to special figure H and special figures Q and R are in a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, and special figure I to special figure P and special figures S and T are special figures low. It is a low probability state. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100, the benefit given to the player based on the stop pattern aspect of the special figure is in the gaming state (when the electric figure is released (initial), when the limiter is not reached (during the reaming) Although the difference is different when the limiter is reached, the stop symbol form of the special figure is made common in different gaming states.

  The pachinko machine 100 also has two types of lost symbols. The special figure V shown in FIG. 130 (a) is the first lose symbol, and the special figure W is the second lose symbol. When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 does not open / close. In addition to the big hit symbol and the lost symbol, a small hit symbol in which the control state (game state) does not change before and after the small hit game may be prepared. The special figure display device 212 corresponds to an example of a first symbol display means for informing a special figure determination result (second determination result).

  FIG. 131 (a) shows an example of the usual stop symbol mode (first symbol mode). There are two types of stoppage display modes of the usual figure of the pachinko machine 100: “common figure A” which is a winning symbol and “common figure B” which is a lost symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that a sphere has entered the normal map start area (the normal map start gates 251 and 253), the general map display device 210 displays that all seven segments are turned on. Then, the “variable display of ordinary figure” (ordinary figure fluctuation game) is performed by repeatedly turning on one central segment. Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the symbols “general symbol A” which is a winning symbol and “general symbol B” which is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 131 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  In the following, a series of displays from the start of the “variable display of the usual figure” to the stop display of the stop pattern form of the usual figure may be referred to as a usual figure change stop display. The universal symbol display device 210 corresponds to an example of a second symbol display means for notifying the normal decision determination result (first determination result).

  FIG. 131 (b) shows an example of a general-purpose decorative symbol. There are 10 types of decorative patterns for the pachinko machine 100: “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. Each symbol of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 on condition that a sphere has entered the universal symbol start area (normal figure start gates 251 and 253). In the display area, “decoration pattern” is switched in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. "Change display". That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbols in a variable manner separately from the general symbol display device 210. And the stop symbol mode which is a combination of a decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. When notifying the hit of a normal figure, combinations of decorative symbols in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “decoration 1 -decoration 1 -decoration 1” or “decoration 2 -decoration 2”). -Decoration 2 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. When a combination of decorative symbols in which three identical decorative symbols are arranged is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 opens for a predetermined time (here, 5.8 seconds). On the other hand, in the case of notifying the usual figure, the combination of the decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols in which three of the same decorative symbols are arranged (for example, dissemination) is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. . Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a series of displays from the start of the “decorative symbol variable display” to the stop display of the decorative symbol stop pattern may be referred to as decorative symbol variation stop display.

In addition, the stop symbol mode (refer to FIG. 131 (a)) of the normal symbol and the stop symbol mode of one decorative symbol (in the same figure) displayed in each of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c on the left middle right of the decorative symbol display device 208 (See (b)) is larger for decorative designs (see (b) in the figure).
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 129 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 129 is provided with a special figure determining random number counter, a special figure changing time determining random number counter, and a normal figure changing period determining random number counter. In addition, the RAM 308 stores special figure determination result, special figure determination result, special figure change time determination result, general figure determination result, general figure change period determination result, and general figure hold number. . Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a general-purpose holding storage section that is divided into a maximum number of areas (four in this example) that can hold the start of the determination of whether or not to determine the normal-use figure (lottery).

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 129 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input performs reset start by a reset interrupt and executes main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 132 according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the pachinko machine 100, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the power supply control unit 660. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this case), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and the state before power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. If the RAM clear signal is ON (RAM clear is necessary), the process goes to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the power-off state. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 129 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, an initial value generating random number counter for generating an initial value of the special figure determining random number counter, a special figure changing time determining random value, and a normal figure changing period determining random value respectively The two random number counters for generating are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as the basic random number value is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308, 1 is added to the acquired value, and then stored in the original random number counter storage area. . At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.
<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 129 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (here, about once every 4 ms), and the main control unit timer is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically changed (in this case, so as not to detect a processing abnormality) so that the WDT 314 count value exceeds an initial setting value (32.8 ms in this case) and a WDT interrupt does not occur. Restart once about every 2ms, which is the main controller timer interrupt cycle.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 129 including various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 receives various detection signals. The data is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interruption process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms is started several times while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the pachinko machine 100, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the sphere detection sensor, it is determined that there has been a prize when the detection signal is continuously stored twice after no detection signal. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 129, winning determination pattern information (here, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal) is stored. In this step S205, information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (here, no detection signal before, detection signal last time, detection signal this time). If it matches the information), it is determined that there has been a ball entry or passage to the general winning opening 226, the ordinary start gates 251 and 253, the special figure starting opening 230, and the variable winning opening 234. In other words, it is determined that there has been a winning at these winning ports 226, 234, the starting port 230, and the gates 251, 253. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (here, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the special figure determination random number counter used in the main control unit 300 is used. The special figure variation time determination random number counter and the normal figure variation period determination random number counter are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a certain random number value is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Stored in the random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value obtained from a random number counter that fluctuates in a numerical value range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the obtained value is a previously set initial value stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. When the value is equal to (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter, and is set in the random number counter. In order to determine this, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update processing, the time for displaying a symbol on the general symbol display device 210 is displayed, and the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 is counted. Various timers are updated, including a special figure display symbol update timer, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening period, a predetermined closing time, a timer for measuring a predetermined end effect period, and the like.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning prize counter updating process, when winning prizes 226 and 234 and start opening 230 are awarded, the value of the number-of-scores storage area provided for each winning prize is read into the RAM 308 and 1 is added. The original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, when there is a winning in the usual figure start area (the usual figure start gates 251 and 253) and the number of the pending figure changing games is less than a predetermined number (here, 4), The predetermined start information is acquired. In other words, if the number of holds in the usual figure is less than the predetermined number, the usual prize winning random number value and the usual figure changing period determining random value are acquired. The normal winning random number and the normal change period determining random number correspond to an example of start information in the present invention. The universal winning random value obtained here is a value obtained by processing a hardware random number (a value of hardware random number + a value of the R register + 1), and a random value for determining a normal variation period is a value obtained by processing a software random number ( Software random number value + R register value + 1). The random number value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 129 includes a random number value storage register corresponding to the normal diagram start area, a random number counter for determining the normal variable period provided in the RAM 308, and a main control unit 300 for performing random number processing. The thing corresponds to an example of start information generating means (first start information generating means). The random number value (starting information) acquired here is stored as a set of starting information in a vacant area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) in the usual figure holding storage unit provided in the RAM 308. This general map hold storage unit can store start information acquired when a game ball enters the general map start area (general map start gates 251 and 253) up to a predetermined upper limit number (four in this case). It corresponds to storage means. At this time, the start information may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the value stored in the temporary area may be stored in the usual storage unit. In this case, the temporary area may be used as the start information storage means. Alternatively, the usual reserved storage unit and temporary area may be used as the starting information storage means. In addition, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the usual number of reservations stored in the RAM 308, and the usual number of reservations increases by one. Therefore, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a holding unit.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 does not have a special figure hold memory. A special figure winning flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. The special figure winning flag is turned off when the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is closed. Therefore, immediately after the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is opened, the special figure winning flag is off. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 obtains predetermined start information if there is a prize at the special drawing start port 230 and the special figure winning flag is off. That is, as the predetermined starting information, a special figure winning random number value, a special figure determining random value, and a special figure changing time determining random value are acquired. The special figure winning random number value obtained here is a value obtained by processing a hardware random number (hardware random number value + R register value + 1), and the special figure determining random value and the special figure variation time determining random value are: A value obtained by processing the software random number (the value of the software random number + the value of the R register + 1). 129 of the random value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 129, a random number storage register corresponding to the special figure starting port 230, a special figure variable time determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and a main control unit 300 for performing random number processing. This corresponds to an example of start information deriving means (second start information deriving means). The special figure winning random number value, the special figure determining random number value, and the special figure variation time determining random value acquired here are stored as one set of starting information in the special figure starting information storage area provided in the RAM 308. The

  Further, in this winning acceptance process, when a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a winning (winning) at the normal start gates 251 and 253, the special drawing start opening 230, or the variable winning opening 234, the first sub In the transmission information to be transmitted to the control unit 400, winning acceptance information indicating presence / absence of winning (winning) of the normal figure starting gates 251 and 253, the special drawing starting opening 230, and the variable winning opening 234 is set.

  In addition, when there is a winning at the special figure starting port 230, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 causes the winning lamp 254 shown in FIG. 128 to emit light.

  Note that the normal start information is not acquired if the number of normal hold is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, and the process proceeds to step S219. Further, the special chart starting information is not acquired if the special chart winning flag is on, and the process proceeds to step S219.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 129 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information in bit 7 (indicating that data is set when on), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the general diagram state update process in the middle of the normal map change display (the value of the above-mentioned general map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the general map display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the general map display device 210 performs normal variable display (normal map variable game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. When the 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is turned on / off, and the hit flag is off, the general-purpose display device 210 is configured to display a lost pattern. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the universal symbol display device 210 determines one of the symbols of the winning symbol (the universal symbol A shown in FIG. 131 (a)) and the lost symbol (the universal symbol B shown in FIG. 131 (b)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game. Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later.

  FIG. 134 (a) is a diagram showing a table summarizing the operation modes of the general-purpose electric accessory 252. When the common figure flag is ON, in the common figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the general figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 is set While the normal operation is set in the area, information indicating a predetermined opening period is set in the storage area of the door member opening period management timer provided in the RAM 308. In the pachinko machine 100, the storage area of the door member opening period management timer is 5.8 in both the electric support state (normal high probability state) and the non-electric support state (normal low probability state). Set information indicating the release period of seconds. Therefore, the operation of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 in the electric support state and the operation of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 in the non-electric support state are the same, and the player sees the operation mode of the general-purpose electric accessory 252. It is not possible to determine whether or not the power support is in effect. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 is used for opening / closing driving of the door member 2521 until 5.8 seconds set here or until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (here, 10 balls) is detected in the special figure starting port 230. A signal for holding the door member 2521 in an open state is output to the solenoid (332). In the pachinko machine 100, the variable starting means (general electric accessory 252) is opened only once (second state) during one operation period, so this 5.8 seconds is an example of the second period. It corresponds to. In addition, a predetermined value is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command electric utility release setting process in the command setting transmission process (step S233). In addition, a predetermined value is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command normal operation process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Further, in the processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door member opening period management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the normal operation set in the setting area of the RAM 308 is maintained. In addition, information indicating a predetermined opening period is set in the storage area of the door member closing period management timer provided in the RAM 308. In the pachinko machine 100, in the storage area of the door member closing period management timer, information indicating the closing period of 0.5 seconds is set in the electric support state (normal figure high probability state), and the non-electric support state (normal figure low) In the probability state), information indicating a closing period of 60 seconds is set. That is, in the pachinko machine 100, 0.5 seconds corresponds to an example of the first period in the electric support state (general figure high probability state), and 60 seconds in the non-electric support state (general figure low probability state) corresponds to the first period. It corresponds to an example. Therefore, in the first period, the non-electric support state is longer than the electric support state. As described above, the electric support state here is an example of a specific state, and the non-electric support state is an example of a non-specific state. Compared to the non-specific state (non-electric support state), the specific state (electric support state) is more likely to cause the variable starting means (usually the electric accessory 252) to enter the second state (open state). The rate of entry of game balls into the starting opening 230) is high. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 outputs a signal for holding the door member 2521 in the closed state to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing driving of the door member 2521 until the closing period set here elapses. In addition, a predetermined value is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command electric utility article closing setting process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Then, in the process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing at which the door member closing period management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. Further, a predetermined value is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command normal operation non-operation processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S233).

  In the pachinko machine 100, the normal operation period is the first operation time (6.3 seconds here) in the electric support state (normal high probability state), and the non-electric support state (low normal probability state). Then, it becomes the 2nd operation period (here 65.8 seconds) longer than the 1st operation period. The RAM 308 is provided with an operation period timer for measuring the lapse of these operation periods (periods during normal operation), the normal operation is set in the setting area of the RAM 308, and the operation period timer is stored in the storage area of the operation period timer. Information indicating a predetermined period may be set. In the pachinko machine 100, the operation period is started based on the fact that a winning condition corresponding to an example of a common figure corresponding to an example of a first predetermined condition is established. Further, in the pachinko machine 100, the variable starting means (general electric accessory 252) is in the second state (open state) only once during one operation period, but there are a plurality of variable start means (open state) in the second state (open state). It may be a mode that turns. For example, the open state is maintained for 1 second simultaneously with the start of the operation period, the closed state is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), and then the open state is maintained for 1.8 seconds, and the closed state is maintained for a predetermined period ( For example, the open state may be maintained for 2 seconds, and the closed state may be maintained for 0.5 seconds in the electric support state and 60 seconds in the non-electric support state. In this case, 2 seconds for maintaining the final second state (open state) corresponds to an example of the second period. Further, in the non-electric support state, 60 seconds for maintaining the closed state at the end of one operation period is the longest period longer than the period for maintaining the closed state (0.5 seconds in this example). It is.

  The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs opening / closing control of the door member 2521 in this way corresponds to an example of variable start control means that controls the universal electric accessory 252 that is variable start means.

  Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure variable game is lost, the usual figure lost flag is turned on. When the usual figure loss flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  Subsequently, in the step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is executed. First, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the usual figure variable game is being performed or whether the opening and closing control of the ordinary figure electric accessory 252 is being performed (the state of the usual figure is in operation). If it is also performed on one side, the general drawing related lottery process is terminated. On the other hand, if neither is performed, it is determined whether or not the number of pending custom-variable games is 1 or more. If it is above, the random number value for one set which is the start information stored in the past in the RAM 308 (general winning random number value and random number value for determining the normal variation period) is extracted. The starting information (a set of random values) that is still stored in the holding storage unit is transferred from the currently stored area to the adjacent area. That is, when the start information stored in the past is taken out from the general-purpose hold storage unit and the start-up information is stored in the general-purpose hold storage unit, the Nth oldest start information is stored in the general-purpose hold storage unit as N−1. This is the second oldest starting information. Also, 1 is subtracted from the usual pending number stored in the RAM 308. The main control unit 300, which performs processing for extracting one set of random values (normal winning value and random number for determining the normal variation period) from the normal figure holding storage unit of the RAM 308, starts information acquisition means (first start This corresponds to an example of information acquisition means). Next, a normal / unusual determination process is performed. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a normal-use determination table.

  FIG. 134 (b) is a diagram showing a normal probability determination low probability table, and FIG. 134 (c) is a diagram showing a general probability determination high probability table.

  In the usual-time determination processing, the time reduction flag is referred to and the determination is made based on whether or not the current control state is the electric support state. If the time reduction flag is off (if it is in the non-electric support state), whether or not the normal time is determined is determined using the low probability table shown in FIG. 134 (b), and if the time reduction flag is on (electric support). If it is in the state), the normal determination is performed using the high probability table shown in FIG. The determination of whether or not a common figure is made is performed based on a random number value for a common figure winning in the starting information extracted from the common figure holding storage unit of the RAM 308 (a possible range is 0 to 65535). The usual Atari probability is 1/60 in the low probability table shown in FIG. 134 (b) and 1 / 1.00003 in the high probability table shown in FIG. 134 (c), which is a considerably high probability. In the general figure winning, the center general figure starting gate 251 becomes main when in the non-electric support state, and when it is in the electric support state, the right-handed driving is promoted and the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is easily opened. The usual starting gate 253 becomes the main. Therefore, the low probability table shown in FIG. 134 (b) is a table used when winning the central general chart start gate 251 and the high probability table shown in FIG. 134 (c) is a table used when winning the right general chart start gate 253. You can say that. Here, deriving “winning” or “losing” is equivalent to the normal-win / no-go determination (lottery), and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the normal-win / no-win determination processing here is the first win / fail determination means. It corresponds to an example. In addition, the success / failure determination result of “win” corresponds to an example of a specific first determination result.

  When the execution of the normal figure determination process is completed, the normal figure change period in the normal figure change stop display is determined. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a normal change period determination table.

  FIG. 135 (a) is a diagram showing a low probability loss table for determining a normal variable period, and FIG. 135 (b) is a diagram showing a low probability per table for determining a normal variable period. FIG. 135 (c) is a diagram showing a high probability loss table for determining a normal variation period, and FIG. 135 (d) is a diagram showing a high probability per table for determining a normal variation period.

  Even in the determination of the normal fluctuation period, the time reduction flag is referred to, and whether or not the current control state is the electric support state is determined. If the time reduction flag is off (if it is in the non-electric support state), the normal time fluctuation period is determined using the table at the low probability shown in FIG. 135 (a) and FIG. If is turned on (if it is in the electric support state), the normal fluctuation period is determined using the table at the time of high probability shown in FIGS. 135 (c) and (d). Further, based on the result of the determination of whether or not the normal figure is correct, if it is a loss, the normal time fluctuation period is determined using the table at the time of the loss shown in FIGS. 135 (b) and (d). The normal figure change period is determined using the table at the time of winning shown in FIGS. 135 (a) and (c). Further, the normal fluctuation period is determined on the basis of a random number value for determining a normal fluctuation period in the start information extracted from the normal figure holding storage unit of the RAM 308 (a possible range is 0 to 65535). In addition, the acquisition timing of the random number value for determining the normal fluctuation period is the timing of acquiring the start information, but may be the timing immediately before the start of the normal fluctuation. In addition, in the non-electric support state, if the result of determining whether or not the normal signal is lost, the normal time fluctuation period is determined based on the number of suspensions at that time. As described above, the pachinko machine 100 holds the random number value for one set (the normal winning random number value and the random time value for determining the normal changing period) from the general figure holding storage unit provided in the RAM 308. From the relationship of subtracting 1 from the number, the minimum value of the number of reserved balls in the usual case is 0 and the maximum value is 3. As shown in FIG. 135 (b), when the random number value for determining the normal time period falls within the range of 0 to 59000, if the number of hold of the normal time is 3, the normal time fluctuation period is 3 seconds, and 0 When it is ˜2, it becomes a fluctuation period of 10 seconds. When the random number value for determining the normal change period is equal to or greater than 59001, it becomes a common normal change period regardless of the number of holds in the normal figure. Moreover, in the electric support state, even if the result of determining whether or not the normal figure is correct is lost, the common normal figure change period is set regardless of the number of hold of the normal figure.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 135 (c) and (d), in the electric support state, the normal figure change period is 1.5, regardless of whether the normal figure success / failure determination result is win or miss. A very short variation period of seconds. The usual figure change period in this electric support state is shorter than the opening period of the door member 2521 of the later figure electric accessory 252 described later. Moreover, the usual figure change period in the electric support state is shorter than the usual figure change period in the non-electric support state.

  Further, in each table of FIGS. 135A to 135D, the effect forms of the general symbol decoration pattern in the decorative symbol display device 208, which are determined according to the length of the general symbol variation period, are shown. The information indicating the normal time change time determined here is included in the normal time change start command transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, as will be described later. The sub-control unit 400 specifically determines the effect mode of the general-purpose decorative symbol shown here based on the information indicating the normal time change time. Normal reach and super reach are included in the production form of the usual decorative pattern. In normal reach, generally, two symbol display areas (for example, the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c shown in FIG. 128) are displayed in a stopped manner, and the remaining one symbol display area (for example, the middle symbol display area 208b) is displayed. If the symbol display area that is variably displayed, that is, if the symbol display area that is variably displayed is a specific symbol (a symbol that is equal to the symbol display area that is stopped), the combination of predetermined jackpot symbols (FIG. 131) This is a state where the decorative combination shown in (b) is stopped and displayed. Super reach is a product obtained by adding special variation display to normal reach to improve the production effect (long reach, normal reverse reach, double line reach, etc.). In addition, there is also an aspect called special variation in the effect form of the decorative design. Special variation includes special multi-line reach, full rotation reach, special full rotation reach, etc. When simply referred to as reach, it means a variation pattern of decorative symbols including normal reach, super reach and special variation. This reach is the result of the success / failure determination that the result of the normal / failure determination in the common-map related process is the specific first success / failure determination result (a predetermined result with a high player's advantage). It is a notice effect that informs the player in advance before notifying the result of the success / failure determination, and whether or not to reach is determined after the determination of the success / failure.

  When the determination of the normal map change period is completed, the general map related lottery process (step S223) ends, and then the special figure state update process is executed (step S225). The special figure state update process performs one of the following eight processes in accordance with the special figure state. For example, in the special figure state update process in the middle of the special figure symbol display to stop the special figure (the value of the special figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure display device 212 is turned on and off. Repeated lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed. By performing this control, the special figure display device 212 performs a special figure fluctuation display (special figure fluctuation game).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation start setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and the process ends.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a big hit flag and a lost flag. In the special figure state update process starting at the timing when the special figure variation display period has elapsed (the timing when the special figure display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), the special figure determination result in the special figure related lottery process (to be described later) ( On / off drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure display device 212 is performed based on the special figure stop symbol form), and a setting indicating that the special figure stop display is in progress is made in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure display device 212 is any one of the jackpot symbol (special figure A to special figure T), the first lose symbol (special symbol V), and the second lose symbol (special symbol W). Performs a fixed display of two symbols. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a special figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure variable game is notified to the player.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in a command setting transmission process (step S233) to be described later is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

  Also, if the result of the special figure variation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 RAM 308 is set to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for informing the player that a big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. The information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure standby time management timer provided in FIG. Further, 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the transmission information storage area described above in order to execute the general command winning effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Further, in the special figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (when the value of the special figure standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 0.1 second) Alternatively, the door member 2341 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 until a winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable prize opening 234. In addition to outputting a signal to be held at the same time, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening period management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command big prize opening release setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Further, in the special figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening period management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the variable prize opening for a predetermined closing period (for example, 1 second) Information indicating the closing period in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308, while outputting a signal for holding the door member 2341 in the closed state to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing driving of the door member 2341 of 234 Set. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure state update process that starts and closes the opening / closing control of the door member a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds or 2 rounds), a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a decorative symbol display Information indicating the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image informing the player that the big hit by the device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set.

  As described above, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of variable winning control means for performing change control of the open / closed state of the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit gaming state. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the opening / closing pattern of the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 responds to the determination of whether or not the special figure variable game is successful from the ROM 306. Get the open / close pattern.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a probability variation flag in addition to the time reduction flag. At the same time as the end of the big hit game, based on the state of the game when the start information used for the game was acquired The probability variation flag and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 are set to ON.

  Furthermore, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Further, in the special figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special area is not in operation in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set. Furthermore, if the result of the special figure variation game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. When this loss flag is on, the special figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) is also stored in the RAM 308. Set special figure inactive in the setting area. In the special figure state update process when the special figure is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next process.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 is completed, a special figure related lottery process (step S229) is performed. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special figure related lottery process corresponds to an example of a second win / fail determination unit. In the special figure related lottery process (step S229), the lottery (first win / fail determination) is executed, the special figure to be stopped is determined, and the variable period (first variable period) in the special symbol variable stop display is determined. . First, it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined success / failure determination prohibition condition is not satisfied. Here, it is determined whether or not the special figure display device 212 is in the special figure fluctuation display or in the stop display, and if it is in any display, the special figure related lottery process is terminated. . On the other hand, if neither is displayed, it is determined whether it is set during special figure operation or special figure non-operation, and if it is set during special figure operation, special drawing related lottery processing is If it is set and the special figure is not in operation, the determination result prohibition condition is not satisfied, and this time, it is determined whether or not a predetermined determination result condition is satisfied. In this determination, it is determined whether or not start information is stored in the special figure start information storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the starting information is not stored, the special drawing related lottery process is terminated, and if the starting information is stored, a predetermined success / failure determination condition is established.

  If the predetermined success / failure determination condition is satisfied, the starting information (the special figure winning random number value, the special figure determining random value, and the special figure changing time determining random value) stored in the special figure starting information storage area Is acquired, and special figure winning / failing determination (first winning / failing determination) processing is performed. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a special figure determination table.

  FIG. 136 (a) is a diagram showing a special figure success / failure determination low probability table, and FIG. 136 (b) is a diagram showing a special figure success / failure determination high probability table.

  In the special figure success / failure determination process, the probability change flag prepared in the RAM 308 is referred to, and the determination is made based on whether or not the current control state is the special figure probability change state. If the probability variation flag is off (if the special figure low probability state), the special figure is judged using the low probability table shown in FIG. 136A, and the probability variation flag is on (the special figure high probability). State), whether or not the special figure is determined is determined using the high probability table shown in FIG. 136 (b). The special figure success / failure determination is performed based on the special figure winning random number value (the possible range is 0 to 65535) in the start information acquired from the special figure start information storage area of the RAM 308. Further, in the pachinko machine 100, when the specified number of times is reached (at the time of the limiter), the state shifts to an uncertain change state (a special figure low probability state). In this case, as shown in FIG. 136 (a), the special symbol winning / non-judgment determination is won with a 12.5% probability of winning without a short time, and with the probability of 12.5%, the symbol variation stop display of the next special symbol will be performed. To win a jackpot with a short time until the special symbol change stop display is made 100 times. In the pachinko machine 100, the special figure success / failure determination result is a big hit result with a probability of 25% as shown in the special figure success / failure determination table in FIG. 136 (a) in the uncertain change state. As shown in the special figure success / failure determination table 136 (b), the result is almost a big hit. This “big hit” special figure determination result corresponds to an example of a specific second determination result.

  When the execution of the special figure success / failure determination process is completed, a special figure determination process for determining a stop symbol form of the special figure is performed. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special figure determination table.

  FIG. 136 (c) is a diagram showing a big hit special figure determination table. In the jackpot special figure determination table shown in FIG. 136 (c), the number of times until the limiter is reached is also shown.

  In this special figure determination process, the special figure determination random number value (possible range is 0 to 65535) in the start information acquired from the special figure start information storage area of the RAM 308 is performed. Further, the special figure stop symbol form is determined based on the gaming state when the start information used when obtaining the special figure determination result is obtained. That is, if the special figure win / fail determination result is a big hit at the time of the release of the electric figure of the special figure (at the time of the initial common figure), the special figure A to the special figure with a probability of 96% based on the random number for special figure determination. A special figure of P (with big change and a big hit symbol with a short time until the next big hit) is decided, and a special figure Q to a special figure T (no big change and with a short time of 100 times) with a probability of 4% ). Note that the number of times to reach the limiter is determined to be one of the special figures A to P, so that the jackpot with probability variation is obtained once, and the maximum number of times the jackpot with probability variation is obtained. (11 times) -1 times = 10 times. On the other hand, when the special figure is selected from any of the special figures Q to T, the maximum number of wins per jackpot with probability change is 11 times. Even if the special figure success / failure determination result is a big hit when the limiter has not been reached (during the consecutive day), the special figure A to the special figure P (with certainty and with a probability of 96%) based on the special figure determination random value. Decided to be one of the special charts in the jackpot symbol with a short time until the next jackpot), with a probability of 4%, any of the special charts Q to T (the jackpot symbol with no time change and 100 times the short-term) The special figure is decided. However, if the number of times to reach the limiter is determined as one of the special figures from A to P, it means that the jackpot with probability variation is obtained once, and it is subtracted once. When any of the special drawings in FIGS. Q to T is determined, the number is reset and the prescribed number of times 11 is set again. When the result of the special figure determination is a big hit when the limiter is reached, the special figure A to the special figure H, the special figure Q, and the special figure R have a probability of 53.3% based on the random number value for special figure determination. (Special jackpot design with no time variation and 100 times of time-saving) Decided to one of the special maps, with a probability of 4% Special maps I-P, S, T A special figure is selected from among the jackpot symbols without). In this case, the number of times until the limiter is reached is reset when it is determined as one of the special figures A to H, special figure Q, and special figure R, and the prescribed number of times is reset to 11 times. Is done. If any of the special maps I to P, S, T is determined, the number of times is zero.

  In other words, the number of times that the jackpot with probability change can be acquired between the transition to the non-electric support state and the non-electric support state is 11, and the non-probable change to the non-probable change state (special low probability state) When the big hit is pulled, 11 limiter times are set, and when the probable big hit is drawn, the limiter number is 10 times. In addition, when the non-probable big hit is drawn during the retreat, the number of limiters is reset, the prescribed number of times is set again, and a time reduction of 100 times is given. In other words, since the fluctuation of one special figure is allowed in the short time after the uncertain large hit, hitting at this time adds a ranger to resetting the limiter count. Furthermore, when the limiter arrives, even if a probability variation symbol is displayed, it is treated as a non-probability variation big hit, but if a time reduction is given at this time, a real villa will be added as will be described in detail later.

  When the execution of the special figure determining process is completed, the special figure fluctuation period in the special figure symbol symbol change stop display is determined. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special figure change period determination table.

  FIG. 137 (a) is a diagram showing a jackpot table for determining the special figure fluctuation period during normal high probability, and FIG. 137 (b) is a diagram showing the jackpot table for determining the special chart fluctuation period during low probability, FIG. 6C is a diagram showing a typical high-probability special-figure variation period determination lose table, and FIG. 10D is a diagram showing a general-low-probability special map variation period determination lose table.

  In the determination of the special figure fluctuation period, the table shown in FIG. 137 is used based on the previous special figure determination result and the electric support state (normal high probability state) or the non-electric support state (normal low probability state). To determine the special figure fluctuation period. Further, the special figure change period is determined based on a special figure change period decision random value (the possible range is 0 to 65535) in the start information acquired from the special figure start information storage area of the RAM 308. Note that the acquisition timing of the random number value for determining the special figure variation period is the timing at which the start information is acquired, but may be the timing immediately before the start of the special figure fluctuation. As shown in the table of FIG. 137 (a), in the pachinko machine 100, when the special figure win / fail determination result is a big hit in the electric support state, the special figure fluctuation period is a predetermined short period (here. In 1 second). This predetermined short period is shorter than the opening period (5.8 seconds) of the door member 2521 of the ordinary electric accessory 252 and while the door member 2521 of the ordinary electric accessory 252 is opened once, In the meantime, the result of the special figure success / failure determination based on winning the special figure starting port 230 is often reported in the electric support state. In the electric support state, a fluctuation period of 120 seconds and a fluctuation period of 360 seconds are also prepared. The probability of a predetermined short period is higher than the probability of a long period such as 120 seconds or 360 seconds.

  On the other hand, as shown in the table of FIG. 137 (b), when the special figure determination result is a big hit in the non-electric support state, the special figure fluctuation period is a uniform fluctuation period of a predetermined period (here, 60 seconds). become.

  Further, as shown in the table of FIG. 137 (c), when the special figure determination result is lost in the electric support state, the fluctuation period of the special figure is uniformly 10 seconds. As shown in the table, when the special figure determination result is lost in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation period of the special figure is uniformly 60 seconds.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 100, in the non-electric support state, the variation time of the special figure is uniformly 60 seconds. In addition, only when the special figure success / failure determination result is a big hit in the electric support state, the special symbol variation stop display period for notifying the special figure success / failure determination result is made different, and the bonus game is produced. During the special game state, the special figure determination is performed at different intervals.

  The information representing the variation period of the special figure is included in the special symbol variation start command transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, and the first sub control unit 400 that has received the command receives the decoration. When the fluctuation period is 120 seconds, the symbol display device 208 displays the premium A jackpot effect during the fluctuation period. When the fluctuation period is 360 seconds, the premium B jackpot effect is displayed during the fluctuation period. Is displayed.

  When the determination of the special figure variation period is finished, the special figure related lottery process (step S229) is finished, and then the command setting transmission process (step S233) shown in FIG. 133 is performed, and various commands are sent to the first sub-control unit. 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are command Type (here, basic command, special symbol variation start command, special symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, general figure hold increase Bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. In the case of a special symbol variation start command, the command data indicates information indicating the special symbol stop symbol, information indicating the control state (information indicating the setting state of the time reduction flag and the probability variation flag), and the special symbol variation time. In the case of a special symbol variation stop command, the information includes special symbol stop symbol information, control state information, and the like. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, presence / absence of winning at the special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the variable winning port 234, and the like.

  Further, in the above-described general command winning effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the control state Set the information indicating. In the above-described general command end effect setting transmission process, command control data represents effect control information and control state stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period. Set the information. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the commands related to the effects transmits a control command related to the effects to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the received commands.

  Further, in the above-described general command special winning opening release setting transmission process, information indicating the number of winning rounds stored in the RAM 308, the current number of rounds, information indicating the control state, etc. is set in the command data. In the above-described general command big prize opening closing setting transmission process, information indicating the current round number stored in the RAM 308, information indicating the control state, and the like is set in the command data.

  Further, in this step S233, a general command usual figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command usual figure hold increase process, information indicating a control state is set in the command data of the general figure hold increase command.

  In addition, a main symbol variation start command indicating that the variation display of the normal diagram has been started is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 as a command related to the general diagram. The command data of the normal symbol variation start command includes information indicating the result of determining whether or not the normal symbol has been received, information indicating the control state (information indicating the setting state of the time reduction flag and the probability variation flag), information indicating the common symbol variation time, and the probability variation. Information indicating the value of the counter is included. Further, the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 release the normal figure fluctuation stop command indicating that the usual figure change display is stopped, and the door member 2521 of the usual figure electric accessory 252 is opened. A universal electric accessory opening start command indicating that it has started (doing), a universal electric accessory closing command indicating that the door member 2521 has been closed (doing), and the like are transmitted.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In this command setting transmission process, a command is also transmitted to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when turned on) in bit 7, and power-on information in bit 6. (In the case of ON, it indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), the current processing type (0-3) for encryption in bits 4-5, and the encrypted processing in bits 0-3 The number of payout requests is indicated.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step 205 are read out to monitor whether there is a glass frame opening error or a lower pan full error, and so on. When a full tank error is detected, device information indicating whether there is a glass frame opening error or a lower pan full error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In addition, various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 129 are driven to control the opening and closing of the universal electric accessory 252 and the variable winning opening 234, and the universal display device 210, special figure via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. Display data to be output to the display device 212, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port of the I / O 310. Further, when the door member 2521 of the general electric accessory 252 is closed, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 causes the winning lamp 254 shown in FIG. 128 to emit light. By the light emission of the winning lamp 254 when the door member 2521 is closed, there may be a case where a predetermined special effect, which will be described later, is made to appear to the player as an effect based on the electric chew winning.

  In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on in order to determine whether or not a power supply interruption (power interruption) has been detected. Then, when the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. When the low voltage signal is on (when the power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243.

  In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return.

  On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and processing at power-off such as initialization of an input / output port is performed. Thereafter, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. <Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>

  The processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initial setting in step S301 is executed. In this initial setting, initial setting of the I / O port 410 shown in FIG. 129, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable.

  In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. The effect control process will be described later in detail.

  In step S311, when the press of the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 127 is detected, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to effect data corresponding to the press of the effect button 136.

  In step S313, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S315, if there is a command to the drive circuit 420 for the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  The RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 is provided with a transmission area for setting a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500. If a control command is set in this transmission area, processing for transmitting the control command to the second sub-control unit 500 is performed (step S319), and the process returns to step S303.

  FIG. 138 (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of the effect control process shown in FIG.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, in the command setting transmission process (step S233) shown in FIG. 133, the main control unit 300 sends a general operation start command indicating the start of the normal operation period, and the general operation tool 252. A general-purpose electric accessory closing command indicating the closing of the door member 2521, a symbol variation start command indicating the start of variation of the special figure, and the like are transmitted. The general operation start command includes information indicating the opening / closing pattern of the door member 2521 in the general electrical accessory 252. As shown in FIG. 134 (a), here, the opening / closing pattern of the door member 2521 is a pattern of opening once and closing once, but the first sub-control unit 400 uses the information to It is possible to recognize the last closing of the door member 2521 in the normal operation period of the rotation. That is, it is possible to recognize the closing immediately before the electric chew release end waiting time (here, 60 seconds) corresponding to an example of the first period. In the effect control process, first sub-control unit 400 first determines whether or not a special effect start condition is satisfied (step S3091). In other words, if no symbol change start command has been received between the reception of the general operation start command and the reception of the general electrical tool closing command representing the final closing, A start condition is satisfied, a special effect command is set in the transmission area provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 (step S3092), and the process proceeds to step S3093. On the other hand, if the special effect start condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3093 without performing the process in step S3092. In step S3093, other effect control processing is performed, and the effect control processing ends. The special effect command set in step S3092 is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the information transmission process of step S319 shown in FIG. 138 (a). When receiving the special effect command, the second sub-control unit 500 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the special effect command, and the decorative symbol display device 208 stores an image of a predetermined special effect described later. Is displayed.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 138 (c). FIG. 138 (c) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is set as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408, and this command reception interrupt process ends.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 138 (d). FIG. 138 (d) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (here, once every 2 ms). Run with.

In step S341 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S343 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process or the like is performed, and this timer interrupt process ends.
<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>

  The second sub control unit 500 executes control of the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the control command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400. The second sub-control unit 500 is connected to an image control unit that displays an image on the decorative symbol display device 208. This image control unit has a VRAM (video RAM) and a GPU (graphics processing unit). The GPU reads the picture information and the like stored in the ROM of the second sub-control unit 500 based on the signal from the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500, and uses the display area (work area) of the VRAM to display the display image. The generated image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  More specifically, the CPU of the second sub control unit 500 first issues an image data transfer instruction. Here, first, the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM is swapped. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU sets ROM coordinates (ROM transfer source address), VRAM coordinates (VRAM transfer destination address) and the like in the GPU attribute register based on the position information table and the like, and then images from the ROM to the VRAM. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The GPU transfers the image data from the ROM to the VRAM based on the instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the GPU outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal is input from the GPU. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM based on the image data transferred to the VRAM, the CPU stores information on the image data constituting the display image (VRAM coordinate axes, image size, VRAM coordinates). (Arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the GPU. The GPU sets parameters according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register. On the other hand, when the transfer end interrupt signal from the GPU has not been input, it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  Subsequently, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU instructs the GPU to start drawing an image. The GPU starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU.

  When a drawing instruction is performed, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the GPU based on the end of image drawing has been input. If the generation end interrupt signal is not input, the generation end interrupt signal is input. When a generation end interrupt signal is input, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1) to finish the process. To do.

  As described above, the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of an image display unit. A combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 corresponds to an example of an effect control unit.

  Further, the second sub control unit 500 also executes control of the shielding device 246 based on the control command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400.

  Next, the game flow in the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail.

  FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing a part of the game flow in the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 140 is a diagram showing step by step the screen of the decorative symbol display device in the game flow shown in FIG. In FIG. 140, time elapses in alphabetical order from (a) to (f), and the same applies to the subsequent drawings. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 140, the fourth symbol 217 of the usual figure and the fourth symbol 218 of the special figure are displayed at the left corner of the effect display area 208d. In these fourth symbols 217 and 218, the white circle represents the changing display, the black circle represents the stopped display, and the same applies to the subsequent drawings.

  When the game is started, it is a normal game state (a special low-probability figure low probability state). The player makes a left turn aiming at the central normal start gate 251. Eventually, a prize is awarded to the central common figure starting gate 251 (step S501), and the common figure display device 210 starts symbol variation stop display. At the same time, as shown in FIG. 140 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208, which is a liquid crystal display panel, starts the symbol variation of the normal decorative symbol (step S502). In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol fourth symbol 218 is being stopped, but the regular symbol fourth symbol 217 is being displayed in a variable manner. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a reach effect using a normal decorative symbol may be performed (step S503), but the reach effect is not performed, and the general symbol display device 210 causes a lost symbol (see FIG. 131 (a)). ) Is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of three decorative symbols in which the same decorative symbols are arranged (for example, disparity), and the process returns to step S501 ( Step S504).

  Even if the reach effect (step S503) as shown in FIGS. 140B and 140D is performed, the symbol (see FIG. 131A) is always stopped and displayed on the general-purpose display device 210. The combination of decorative symbols in which the same three decorative symbols are arranged is not necessarily stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the process may proceed to step S504. On the other hand, if the result of determining whether or not the common figure is successful, the symbol (see FIG. 131 (a)) is stopped and displayed on the universal figure display device 210, and as shown in FIG. 140 (d), the decorative symbol display device is displayed. In 208, a combination of decorative symbols in which three identical decorative symbols are arranged is stopped and displayed (step S505), and the winning of the normal-game variable game is notified. In addition, as shown in FIG. 140 (d), the universal symbol display device 210 stops and displays the fourth symbol 217 of the universal symbol of the decorative symbol display device 208 as well. Along with the winning of the common figure variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen for instructing to make a right-handed (step S506), and the general-purpose electric accessory 252 arranged in the right area of the game area 124 is displayed. The door member 2521 is opened for a predetermined time (here, 5.8 seconds) (step S507).

  Opening the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 makes it possible to win a special drawing start port 230, but if there is no win, the process returns to step S501 (step S508). A special figure win / no-go determination (special drawing lottery) is performed for one ball that has won a prize (step S509). When the special figure determination is made, a bowling chance game is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIGS. 140 (e) and (f) (step S510). In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth symbol 217 of the ordinary diagram is being stopped and the fourth symbol 218 of the special symbol is being variably displayed. If the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is lost, the special symbol display device 212 stops displaying the lost symbol (see FIG. 130 (a)), and also displays the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 140 (h). The image of the scene where the strike could not be taken is displayed (step S511). Here, the probability that the special figure determination is lost is 2/65536 (see FIG. 136 (a)). On the other hand, if the special symbol win / fail determination result is a big hit, the special symbol display device 212 stops and displays one of the special symbols A to P, which is a big hit symbol (see FIG. 130 (a)). As shown in FIG. 140 (g), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an image notifying that the bonus game is started due to the strike (step S512). The probability that the special figure win / reject determination here is a big hit is 65534/65536, which is a very high probability (see FIG. 136 (a)). When winning the big win of the special figure, it always shifts from the non-electric support state (general figure low probability state) to the electric support state (general figure high probability state). As shown in FIGS. 140 (g) and 140 (h), the special symbol display device 212 stops displaying, and at the same time, the special symbol fourth symbol 218 of the decorative symbol display device 208 also displays stopped.

  FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the game flow shown in FIG. 139, and FIG. 142 is a diagram showing step by step the screen of the decorative symbol display device when the initial hit is a big hit without any probability change.

  In the special figure variable game here, the probability of winning a jackpot with probability variation is 96%, and the probability of winning a jackpot without probability variation is 4% (see FIG. 136 (c)). When winning with a big hit without a probability change, a value of 11 is set in the probability change counter prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and as shown in FIG. 142 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 during the big hit game is displayed. Then, “remaining 11 times” is displayed as the remaining number of times that the jackpot with probability change can be obtained before the transition to the non-electric support state (step S513). In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 at this time also displays “single villa in” from the fact that the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 has been opened once (step S507 shown in FIG. 139). The On the other hand, when winning the jackpot with probability variation, a value of 10 is set in the probability variation counter (step S514).

  Since the control state has shifted to the electric support state, it is easy to win the normal determination, and the door member 2521 of the general electric accessory 252 is easy to open. For this reason, it is easy to determine whether or not a special figure is made. In the pachinko machine 100, if the special figure is determined to be in a non-probable change state, the player wins a big hit with a probability of 25%. Win a big hit. In the state where the number of remaining jackpots with probability change before the transition to the non-electric support state is more than 2 times, the probability of winning the jackpot with probability change and short time until next jackpot is 96%, The probability of winning a big hit with no chance change and 100 time savings is 4% (see FIG. 136 (c)). For example, when the remaining number of times is 11 and the winning combination with probability variation and the next big hit with time reduction is won, the probability variation counter is set to 10 values obtained by subtracting 1 from the 11 values set so far. As shown in 142 (b), “decided 10 times” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the big hit game. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 at this time also displays “during 2 consecutive villas”.

  On the other hand, if a winning big hit with no probability change and 100 time savings is won, the probability changing counter prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is reset, and a big hit with probability changing is acquired before the transition to the non-electric support state. The remaining number of times that can be increased. Although resetting the probability variation counter is advantageous to the player, it is performed only with a probability of 4% as described above.

  FIG. 142 (c) shows the decorative symbol display device 208 during the big hit game when the remaining number of times is two. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 142 (c), “remaining twice” and “during 10 consecutive resorts” are displayed, and “additional bonus when a strike is added” is also displayed. . When the remaining number of times becomes one, a bowling chance game is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the big hit game. The result of the special figure variable game that will be the big hit game here is a big hit with no probability change, but with a probability of 53.3%, it is a big hit with 100 time reductions, with a probability of 46.7% It is a big hit without time savings. If the result of the special figure variable game is a big hit without a short time, the bonus is ended (step S519), the state shifts to the non-electric support state, and also shifts to the non-probable change state, thereby entering the normal game state. . The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 142 (g) displays an image of a scene where the strike could not be taken. On the other hand, if the result of the special figure variation game is a big hit with a time reduction of 100 times, it shifts to the non-probable change state, but the electric support state is extended until the special figure change stop display is performed 100 times. .

  In the pachinko machine 100, when the special figure win / fail determination result is a big hit in the electric support state, as shown in FIG. The fluctuation period is often a short period of 1 second. However, the probability of 500/65536 is 120 seconds and the probability of 35/65536 is 360 seconds. Therefore, even if the bonus is won without any change during the bonus, the special period may have a long period of 120 seconds or 360 seconds. It should be noted that the special figure may be changed for a long period only when a big win without a certain change is won during the bonus. Since the time is attached even in the non-probable change state, the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is easy to open, and it is easy to determine whether or not a special figure is appropriate. If the fluctuation period of the special figure is a short period (here 1 second), the determination result of the special figure is immediately notified, and for one opening of the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252, In many cases, the special figure variation game is performed only once. In other words, the number of times of opening the door member 2521 of the general electric accessory 252 is synchronized with the number of limiters of the probability change. However, if the fluctuation period of the special figure is long (120 seconds or 360 seconds in this case), the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is opened several times while the special figure fluctuation game is performed once. The payout can be earned by paying out based on the winning at the special chart starting port 230 (here, 7 balls / 1 winning).

  As shown in FIG. 141, when the fluctuation period of the special figure is short, the process returns to step S513, and “decided 11 times” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 142 (f). The On the other hand, when the fluctuation period of the special figure is long, information indicating the fluctuation period of the special figure included in the special symbol fluctuation start command sent from the main control unit 300 (here, long-term information) ), The first sub-control unit 400 can open the door member 2521 of the general electric accessory 252 several times during the period from the transition to the electric support state to the transition to the non-electric support state. The prediction calculation is performed. Here, the prediction calculation is performed based on the fact that the one opening period of the door member 2521 of the ordinary electric accessory 252 is 5.8 seconds. When the fluctuation period of the special figure is the first long period (120 seconds in this case), the number of times is uniformly larger than the specified number of times. For example, the door member 2521 of the ordinary electric accessory 252 is predicted to open 5 times in 120 seconds, and the remaining number of times (specific identification) is 16 times obtained by adding 5 times as the predicted number to 11 times as the specified number. It corresponds to an example of information). Further, when the variation period of the special figure is the second long period (360 seconds in this case) longer than the first long period, display with a predetermined symbol or the like (for example, ????) is performed uniformly. You may do it.

  Here, the predicted number of times is the number of times that the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 can be opened before shifting to the non-electric support state. In many cases, the fluctuation period of the figure is a short period, and the special figure fluctuation game is often performed only once for one opening of the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252. The first sub-control unit 400 displays the predicted number of times as the number of remaining times on the decorative symbol display device 208 by regarding the number of times that the big change with probability variation can be obtained before the transition to the non-electric support state. (Step S520). As can be seen from this, in the pachinko machine 100, if the extra chance is not taken into account, one special figure variable game and one opening of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 are linked.

  FIG. 143 is a diagram showing a modification of the extra chance shown in FIG. 142 (c).

  FIG. 143 (a) shows a decorative symbol display device 208 during a jackpot game in which the number of remaining jackpots with probability change before the transition to the non-electric support state is five. . In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 (a), a display such as “Addition of a big bonus when a big bonus chance cup-in is made” is made.

  FIG. 143 (c) shows a screen that is displayed when “Large Bonus Chance” is false, and displays “Sorry”. In other words, the “big bonus chance” shown in FIG. 5A is a screen that is displayed when winning a big hit without certainty during the bonus, and the remaining number of times must be reset. However, in FIG. 5C, the remaining number does not change and “5 remaining” is still displayed.

  On the other hand, FIG. 143 (b) is a screen that is displayed when the “big bonus chance” is a true display, and displays “congratulations”.

  FIG. 143 (d) shows a screen that is displayed when the fluctuation period of the special figure is the second long period (eg, 360 seconds). What is the remaining number of times? ? ? It has become times.

  FIG. 143 (e) is a screen that is displayed when the fluctuation period of the special figure is the first long period (for example, 120 seconds), and the remaining number of times is 120 seconds after the prescribed number of 11 times. It is 16 times including 5 times that is the predicted number.

  As described above, during a bonus in the special game state, when a long production period (a special figure fluctuation period) is reached, an unusual production is performed. In addition, when the jackpot symbol of the special figure is stopped and displayed in the electric support state, the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is often opened once per special figure variable game. As shown in FIG. 137 (a), it is 12 times for the premiere A production and 36 times for the premier B production. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 described above, the variable prize opening 234 (attacker) is opened, but the number of game balls is increased by opening the door member 2521 of the ordinary electric accessory 252. The number of winning balls is 0 when winning at the normal start gates 251 and 253, 4 when winning at the variable winning opening 234 (Attacker), and 7 when winning at the general drawing electric 252 (special opening). It is good also as 10 balls at the time of winning a prize at the ball, the general winning opening 226. Satisfaction of the predetermined condition referred to in the present invention corresponds to the entry of a game ball into the winning opening and the start opening. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a predetermined game value is obtained based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied. A game value giving means (game medium payout means (payout device 152) for paying out game media). Furthermore, a variable prize opening 234 (attacker) with a small number of prize balls is arranged downstream of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 (special drawing start port) with many prize balls. Although it is conceivable to reverse the positional relationship between the ordinary electric accessory 252 and the variable winning opening 234, in this case, the variable winning opening 234 having a small number of winning balls is won first. In the present embodiment, during the bonus in the special game state, the game ball leaked to the ball entering the ordinary electric game 252 can be won in the variable winning opening 234 (attacker), contributing to an increase in the number of winning balls. To do.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the electric support state, the intervals for deriving the big hit with special figure probability change (specific first determination result) are different (intervals based on 1 second, 120 seconds, and 360 seconds, respectively). As a result, the interest of the game is improved. In addition, the game characteristics of the present embodiment are so-called limiter machines (there is an upper limit on the number of probability variation consecutive games), and the number of game balls is increased by a general electric accessory 252 (electric chew). In other words, since the time between jackpots of the special figure is different, the number of times of opening the electric chew during that time is different, so that it is possible to change the amount of game balls to be increased. This game characteristic is advantageous as the player fits. Moreover, by deriving the hit of the normal symbol with high probability and in a short time, the electric chew can be released frequently, and the electric chew contributes to the game characteristics of increasing the game ball. Further, in the electric support state, it is possible to provide a difference in the opening frequency of the electric chew by giving a change (1 second, 120 seconds, 360 seconds) to the fluctuation time of the special figure. In addition, the probability of deriving the special figure jackpot until reaching the limiter is made high, so that the opening frequency of the electric chew and the obtainable game ball based on the opening frequency can be changed by the fluctuation time of the special figure. it can. In addition, by resetting the limiter, it becomes possible to make the result of the special figure more interesting in the game characteristic in which the number of game balls is increased by using the general-purpose electric accessory 252 (electric chew). In addition, the long fluctuation time of the special figure itself is advantageous for the player in the special game state, but by enabling the long fluctuation time to be determined at the time of resetting the limiter, the special figure can be obtained even after the end of the fluctuation. It becomes possible to continue the special gaming state until the derivation for the prescribed number of times. That is, it is possible to simultaneously give two advantageous states for the player, that is, limiter reset and long-term fluctuation. Furthermore, the interest of the game in the special game state may be improved by notifying the current number of consecutive resorts and the remaining number of times until the limiter. In addition, when notification based on the number of times the electric chew is opened, it may be linked to the ball and the interest may be further improved. Furthermore, the long-term fluctuation of the special figure is equivalent to the one-time special figure for the limiter, and is equivalent to the short-term fluctuation. May increase. The game performance in this embodiment is a limiter machine, so at any timing, it is not guaranteed to give a special game state more than the number of limiters. It is possible to notify the player as if a special game state more than the number of limiters is given by using the fact that there are more times than the number of times (limiter subtraction). That is, it is possible to link the outgoing ball and the notification. Furthermore, by setting the notification content to the remaining number of times until the limiter, even if the notification exceeds the specified number of times, it is possible to link the balls, so the interest of the game may be improved.

  It should be noted that the special figure variation period may be long only when the bonus is won without change during the bonus. Alternatively, even in the case of losing, a long-term variation period of a special figure may be used. In this case, a large number of game balls can be obtained without the prescribed number of times of digestion (without subtraction of the limiter). Is possible.

  In addition, in the embodiment, the configuration of the game board 200 is such that the game ball is guided to both the ordinary electric game object 252 and the variable winning opening 234 when the player makes a right turn (during the special game state). However, it is not limited to this. For example, the variable winning opening 234 (attacker) may be arranged at a place where it is difficult to win a prize with the firing strength during the special gaming state. In this case, it is possible to make the attacker not open during the long fluctuation period (large bonus) of the special figure.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the big hit probability at the time of low special figure is 1/4 and the next big hit can be realized because the number of time reductions given after adding (after non-probable big hit) is 100 times. At the same time, it is possible to increase the number of game balls by releasing the general electric accessory 252 during the 3/4 special figure loss.

  Further, the determination of the long-term fluctuation period of the special figure may be made to completely correspond to the stop pattern of the special figure at 1: 1.

In addition, the interval for deriving the big hit with special figure probability change (specific first success / failure determination result) can be varied depending on the period during the big hit game as well as the fluctuation time (effect time) of the special figure. For example, the interval can be made different by changing the time of the start effect or end effect of the big hit game or the effect of the interval between rounds. Also, the interval can be made different by changing the special display stop display period.
Subsequently, characteristic points in the present invention will be described.

  In the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, even if a game ball passes (wins) through the ordinary drawing start gates 251 and 253, the winning ball is not paid out. This corresponds to a non-profit entry area that does not grant the player to the player. In addition, when the game ball passes through the usual figure start gates 251 and 253 (wins), the player is given the benefit of being able to receive a lottery for the usual figure variable game. On the other hand, when a game ball enters (wins), a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of award balls are paid out at the central general winning opening 226 disposed below the central general starting gate 251, and the right side When a game ball enters (wins), a special figure start port 230 that allows a game ball to enter when the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 disposed below the start gate 251 is opened is also a predetermined number. (For example, 7 balls) prize balls are paid out. Therefore, the central general winning opening 226 and the special figure starting opening 230 correspond to a profit grant entry area in which a profit of payout of a prize ball is given to a player when a game ball enters.

  In the present embodiment, a normal symbol variation start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the normal symbol variation start command outputs a control command instructing the second sub-control unit 400 to cause the decorative symbol display device 208 to execute the normal symbol variation effect. The second sub-control unit 500 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the control command, and a predetermined effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as a general symbol variation effect. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the normal symbol variation start command instructs the sound source IC 416 shown in FIG. 129 to output a predetermined sound as a normal symbol variation effect, and the speaker 120 outputs a predetermined sound output. Done. Here, the display of the predetermined effect image executed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the predetermined sound output executed by the speaker 120 correspond to an example of the predetermined effect according to the present invention.

  Further, when a game ball enters the central general winning opening 226 or the special figure starting opening 230, as described above, the main control unit 300 sets winning reception information in the winning reception process, and the winning reception information is the first sub-control. Transmitted to unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the winning acceptance information outputs a control command instructing the second sub-control unit 400 to cause the decorative symbol display device 208 to perform a prize ball payout appearance, and the second sub-control unit 500 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the control command, and a specific effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as a prize ball payout appearance. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the winning acceptance information instructs the sound source IC 416 shown in FIG. 129 to output a specific sound as a prize ball payout appearance, and the speaker 120 outputs a specific sound. Here, the display of the specific effect image executed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the specific sound output executed by the speaker 120 correspond to an example of the specific effect according to the present invention.

  FIG. 144 is a time chart of a regular symbol variation effect and a prize ball payout appearance. In FIG. 144, time elapses from the left to the right in the figure, and the same applies to the subsequent time charts.

  When the ball detection sensor provided in the non-profit entry area which is the normal start gates 251 and 253 detects the entry of the game ball to the normal start gates 251 and 253, the detection signal is not detected. Changes to detection, and at the timing of (a) shown in the drawing, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120 start a normal symbol variation effect (non-profit entry area entry effect).

  When a game ball that has passed through the central normal start gate 251 enters the central general prize opening 226, a ball detection sensor provided in the central general prize opening 226 detects the entry of the game ball and the detection signal is not detected. From the detection to the detection, at the timing of (a) shown in the figure, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120 start a prize ball payout appearance (profit grant entry area entry effect), and (c) shown in the figure At the timing, the award-paying performance will end. On the other hand, the regular symbol variation effect started at the timing of (a) shown in the drawing continues even after the appearance of the prize ball payout finishes. That is, the execution period of the regular symbol variation effect is longer than the execution period of the prize ball payout appearance, and the execution period of the prize ball payout appearance is included in the execution period of the regular symbol variation effect.

  In addition, if the number of holdings of the usual figure when the game ball passes through the usual figure starting gates 251 and 253 is less than a predetermined number (for example, 4), the main control unit 300 sends the first sub control unit 400 the usual figure. Send a pending increase command. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the universal figure hold increase command outputs a control command that instructs the second sub-control unit 400 to cause the decorative symbol display device 208 to execute the general figure hold increase effect. Also good. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the universal hold increase command may instruct the sound source IC 416 shown in FIG. 129 to output a predetermined sound as a general hold increase effect. By doing so, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as a general figure holding increase effect, and a predetermined sound output is performed on the speaker 120, and the display of these predetermined effect images is performed. Alternatively, the predetermined sound output may be a predetermined effect according to the present invention.

  FIG. 145 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of the regular symbol variation effect and the prize ball payout appearance.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 (a), a combination of stop symbols of ordinary decorative symbols is displayed. In other words, this is a state in which the usual game is stopped. In this state, when the game ball passes through the central general symbol start gate 251 (corresponding to the timing (A) shown in FIG. 144), the symbol variation display is started on the general diagram display device 210, and FIG. ), The decorative symbol display device 208 starts the usual decorative symbol variation display (corresponding to an example of a predetermined effect image). In addition, from the loudspeaker 120 (not shown), a normal variation sound indicating that the symbol variation display is performed on the universal symbol display device 210 is output. The decorative symbol change display and the normal change sound output correspond to an example of the normal symbol change effect. Further, the central universal start gate 251 corresponds to an example of a first entry area.

  Subsequently, when a game ball enters the central general winning opening 226 (corresponding to the timing of (A) shown in FIG. 144), as shown in FIG. In the center of the display screen of the symbol display device 208, a scary-faced panda character image 2081 (corresponding to an example of another image) uttering “Jara-Jara” is displayed in large size. That is, a panda character image 2081 with a scary face is displayed so as to cover the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a prize ball payout sound “Jarajara” imitating the payout sound is output from the speaker 120. Is done. The display of the scary-faced panda character image 2081 and the prize ball payout sound output “Jara Jara” correspond to an example of the prize ball payout appearance.

  In this specific example, a scary-faced panda character image 2081 covers a part of the decorative symbol variation display image, and a part of the decorative symbol variation display image (here, the middle symbol display area 208b) cannot be seen. ing. Also, a prize ball payout sound starts to sound from the middle of the usual figure fluctuation sound, and the usual figure fluctuation sound is heard by covering the usual figure fluctuation sound. In this way, the usual symbol variation effect changes depending on the appearance of the prize ball. As a result, the player is likely to notice that the prize ball payout appearance is given priority and the player is paying out the prize ball. In other words, since the player does not notice the generation of the winning ball, there are cases where the player can be made to think that the player has a better pedestal than the player who does not notice it. In addition, since the effect in which the player concentrates is changed, it becomes easier for the player to notice the occurrence of the prize ball. Furthermore, since the game ball that has passed through the central common figure starting gate 251 wins the central general winning opening 226, it is possible to enjoy the effect that the normal symbol variation effect and the normal symbol variation effect have changed with the same game ball. In some cases, the player can enjoy many effects with a small investment and improve the impression of the game table.

  FIG. 146 is a diagram showing a specific example of the general figure hold increase effect and the prize ball payout appearance in a state where the normal symbol variation effect is being performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 (a), the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as the symbol variation display) is performed in the universal symbol display device 210. The decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, from the loudspeaker 120 (not shown), a normal diagram fluctuation sound indicating that the symbol variation display is being performed in the general diagram display device 210 is output. That is, the regular symbol variation effect in the symbol variation display is performed.

  In this example, in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a universal figure hold display corresponding to a set of start information stored in the universal figure hold storage unit of the RAM 308 is displayed in the universal figure hold storage unit. Are displayed side by side from the left in order from the oldest in the order in which the start information is stored (in order of winning). The general map hold display is a display indicating that the start information is stored or stored in the first start information storage means (the general map hold storage section of the RAM 308). In other words, a general map hold display is performed for each normal start information stored in the first start information storage means, and the number of the general map hold display corresponds to the general hold number. The decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of a first start hold display unit. Each time the first sub-control unit 400 receives a general-purpose hold increase command, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a hold-increase instruction for the general-purpose figure to the second sub-control unit 500, and the second sub-control unit 500 is based on the instruction. Then, the decorative symbol display device 208 is controlled to increase the number of the universal figure hold display by one. On the other hand, each time the first sub-control unit 400 receives a universal symbol variation start command that is a signal for the usual-time reservation, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a universal symbol hold decrease signal to the second sub-control unit 500, and the second sub-control The unit 500 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 on the basis of the ordinary figure reservation decrease signal, and decreases the number of ordinary figure reservation displays by one. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 (a), two common figure hold displays are displayed. Hereinafter, the general map hold display representing the old general map hold (hereinafter referred to as the general map hold 1) is referred to as the first general map hold display 291 and the new general map hold (hereinafter referred to as the general map hold 2). The general map hold display representing) is referred to as a second general map hold display 292. Here, the usual number of holds is two.

  If the game ball passes through the central common figure start gate 251 while the symbol variation display is being performed, the symbol variation display is being performed here, and the number of holds of the regular symbol is also a predetermined number. Since it is less than 2, the starting information based on the current game ball passing through the central normal figure starting gate 251 is stored in the normal figure holding storage unit of the RAM 308, and the number of holding of the normal figure increases. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 (b), a third common figure hold display 293 is additionally displayed. The third general map hold display 293 displayed here continues to be displayed until the general map hold 3 represented by the third general map hold display 293 is consumed. Further, at the same time as the third general map hold display 293 is additionally displayed, a general map hold increasing sound for notifying that the general hold has increased is output from the speaker 120 for a predetermined period. This general figure hold increase sound stops before the symbol variation display ends. The additional display of the third general map hold display 293 and the output of the general map hold increase sound correspond to an example of the general map hold increase effect.

  Subsequently, when a game ball enters the central general winning award 226, as in FIG. 145 (c), the voice “Jara Jara” is displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 on which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. A panda character image 2081 with a scary face that emits a large amount is displayed, and a prize ball payout sound “Jara Jara” simulating a payout sound is output from the speaker 120 (see FIG. 146 (c)). A scary face portion 2081a of the panda displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and a balloon portion 2081b "Jara Jara" is displayed in the effect display area 208d. Also in the example shown in FIG. 146, the display of the scary-faced panda character image 2081 and the output of the prize ball payout sound “Jara Jara” correspond to an example of the prize ball payout appearance.

  In this specific example, a scary face portion 2081a of the panda covers a part of the decorative symbol variation display image, and a part of the decorative symbol variation display image (in this case, the middle symbol display area 208b) is not visible. . In addition, a balloon portion 2081b called “Jarajara” covers most of each of the first general map hold display to the third general map hold display 291 to 293 displayed in the effect display area 208d. 293 is not visible. Also, from the middle of the general fluctuation sound indicating that the symbol fluctuation display is being performed, first, a general figure hold increasing sound that informs that the retention of the general figure has increased starts to sound. I hear overtones. Next, a prize ball payout sound also starts to sound, and a prize ball payout sound is heard over the usual figure fluctuation sound and the usual figure holding increase sound. In this way, the general symbol variation effect changes with the appearance of the prize ball payout, and the general symbol hold increase effect also changes with the appearance of the prize ball payment. As a result, it is possible to inform players who are concentrating on the production that the prize ball has been generated due to the effect of the production change, that is, the appearance of the prize ball payout, and improve the impression of the game stand There are cases where it is possible. That is, by covering a part of the effect image that has been performed so far with the effect image due to the appearance of the prize ball, it is possible to visually report that the prize ball has been generated, and to improve the impression of the game stand There are cases where it is possible. In addition, when the production sound from the speaker 120 is applied, it can be heard audibly that a prize ball has been generated.

  In the above description, the prize-ball paying appearance was covered with the usual symbol variation effect and / or the usual figure holding increase effect, but the ordinary symbol variation effect and / or the usual figure holding increase effect was added to the prize ball paying appearance. It may be an aspect that changes.

  FIG. 147 is a time chart in which the regular symbol variation effect changes to a prize ball payout appearance.

  Even in the time chart shown in FIG. 147, when the ball detection sensor provided in the non-profit entry area, which is the normal start gate 251 or 253, detects the entry of the game ball to the normal start gate 251 or 253. The detection signal changes from non-detection to detection, and at the timing of (a) shown in the figure, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120 start a normal symbol variation effect (profit non-given entry region entry effect). The

  When a game ball that has passed through the central normal start gate 251 enters the central general prize opening 226, a ball detection sensor provided in the central general prize opening 226 detects the entry of the game ball and the detection signal is not detected. In the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120, which has changed from detection to detection and performed the normal symbol variation effect at the timing of (a) shown in the figure, the normal symbol variation effect is ended, and a prize is given instead. Start ball paying appearance (profit grant entry area entry effect). Eventually, at the timing of (c) shown in the figure, the appearance of the prize ball payout ends.

  FIG. 148 is a diagram showing a specific example of changing from a regular symbol variation effect to a prize ball payout appearance.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 (a), a combination of stop symbols of ordinary decorative symbols is displayed. In other words, this is a state in which the usual game is stopped. In this state, when the game ball passes through the central general map starting gate 251 (corresponding to the timing of (a) shown in FIG. 147), as shown in FIG. Is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of decorative symbols. In the variation display of the decorative symbols on the decorative symbol display device 208, the background screen is blank. In addition, the speaker 120 (not shown) outputs the first common figure fluctuation sound indicating that the symbol fluctuation display is performed on the common figure display device 210. The decorative symbol variation display and the first ordinary diagram variation sound output correspond to an example of a typical symbol variation effect.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 148 (c), the symbol “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. The display mode of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed here is the default display mode shown in FIG. 131 (b). On the other hand, in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is continued. In addition, the output of the 1st usual figure fluctuation sound is continuing from the speaker 120. FIG.

  Subsequently, when a game ball enters the central general winning opening 226 (corresponding to the timing of (A) shown in FIG. 147), as shown in FIG. The background screen of the symbol display device 208 changes from a non-patterned background screen to a predetermined background screen (here, a cross-hatched pattern background screen), and the decorative symbol (“decoration 6” of the left symbol display area 208a stopped and displayed earlier. The display mode of “)” also changes from the default display mode to a predetermined display mode (here, a black-colored display mode). Also, the display mode of the image indicating that the decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, which is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, is also a predetermined display mode (here, a horizontal striped pattern display mode). ). Also, the normal fluctuation sound output from the speaker 120 is switched from the first normal fluctuation sound output so far to the second normal fluctuation sound. This display of the predetermined background screen and display of the predetermined design of the decorative pattern and the output of the second ordinary figure fluctuation sound are equivalent to an example of the appearance of the prize ball payout, and the effect is changed from the usual figure change effect to the prize ball payout appearance. Has changed. Note that this effect change can be regarded as a change in the usual symbol variation effect itself. In any case, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the central general winning award 226, an effect in which the normal symbol variation effect is changed is performed. Note that the decorative symbol that has changed to the predetermined display mode remains changed to the predetermined display mode until the symbol variation display on the universal symbol display device 210 ends, and the timing at which the symbol variation display ends, that is, the stop symbol is changed. At the timing of display, the display returns to the default display mode or further changes to another display mode. Also, the normal pattern fluctuation sound that has changed to the second general pattern fluctuation sound remains changed to the second general pattern fluctuation sound until the symbol fluctuation display on the general diagram display device 210 ends, and the symbol fluctuation display is When finished, the usual fluctuation sound itself stops ringing.

  As described above, a change in the regular symbol variation effect itself occurs due to the establishment of a prize ball payout condition (predetermined condition) such as winning a prize at the central general prize opening 226, and a game in which a prize ball is paid out. It may be easier for the person to notice, and the ball holding may be better, which may improve the impression of the game stand.

  FIG. 149 is a diagram illustrating a specific example in which the general figure hold increase effect changes in a state where the normal symbol variation effect is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 149 (a), a symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as the symbol variation display) is performed in the universal symbol display device 210. The decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, from the loudspeaker 120 (not shown), a normal diagram fluctuation sound indicating that the symbol variation display is being performed in the general diagram display device 210 is output. That is, also in the specific example shown in FIG. 149, the regular symbol variation effect in the symbol variation display is performed. Further, in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 149 (a), a first general map hold display 291 indicating the general map hold 1 and a second general map hold display 292 indicating the general map hold 2 are displayed. Is displayed.

  If the game ball passes through the central common figure starting gate 251 while the symbol variation display is being performed, the number of holdings of the common figure increases here, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. A third common map hold display 293 is additionally displayed in the effect display area 208d. In FIG. 149 (b), three general map hold displays, a first general map hold display 291 to a third general map hold display 293, are displayed. In addition, it is displayed in a black display mode. Further, at the same time as the third general map hold display 293 is additionally displayed, the speaker 120 outputs a first general map hold increase sound for notifying that the general hold has increased for a predetermined period. The additional display of the third general map hold display 293 and the output of the first general map hold increase sound correspond to an example of the general map hold increase effect.

  Subsequently, when a game ball enters the central general winning opening 226, the display mode of the third general map hold display 293, which is the default display mode, changes to a predetermined display mode as shown in FIG. . That is, among the three general map hold displays 291 to 293 displayed in the default display mode, the display mode of only the third general map hold display 293 increased this time is a predetermined display mode (here, a horizontal stripe pattern). Change. In addition, the normal figure hold increase sound output from the speaker 120 is switched from the first normal figure hold increase sound output so far to the second general figure hold increase sound. The display according to the predetermined display mode in the third general figure hold display 293 and the output of the second general figure hold increase sound correspond to an example of the prize ball payout appearance, and the normal figure hold increase effect is changed to the prize ball payout appearance. The direction has changed. This effect change can be regarded as a change in the usual figure hold increase effect itself. In any case, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the central general winning award 226, an effect is produced in which the usual figure holding increase effect is changed. It should be noted that the third universal map hold display 293 changed to the predetermined display mode is digested with the hold of the third universal map hold even if the display changes to the predetermined display mode until the symbol variation display ends. The display 293 itself may remain changed to a predetermined display mode until it disappears. Further, the general figure hold increase sound that has changed to the second general figure hold increase sound continues to sound while changing to the second general figure hold increase sound, and stops ringing before the symbol variation display ends.

  As described above, due to the establishment of a prize ball payout condition (predetermined condition) such as winning a prize at the central general prize opening 226, here, a change occurs in the usual figure holding increase effect itself, and the prize ball is paid out. In particular, the player is likely to notice, the ball holding is considered good, and the impression of the game table may be improved.

  Next, in the specific example shown in FIG. 149, the third universal map hold display 293 changed to the predetermined display mode remains changed to the predetermined display mode at least until the symbol variation display ends. An example of returning to the default display mode before the symbol variation display ends will be described.

  FIG. 150 is a diagram illustrating an example of returning to the ordinary figure holding increase effect after the effect changes from the usual figure holding increase effect to the prize ball paying appearance.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 150 (a), the ordinary figure retention increase effect (non-profit entry area entry effect) is started at the timing shown in FIG. The figure hold increase effect is temporarily changed to a prize ball payout appearance (profit grant entry area entry effect). Then, after a prize ball payout appearance is made for a predetermined period, at a timing shown in FIG.

  150 (b) is a diagram showing, by layer, images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing (a) shown in FIG. 150 (a). The image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing of (a) shown in FIG. 150A includes a background image, an image indicating that the decorative symbol is being variably displayed, and three reserved display images. Become. Among these three hold display images, the first map hold display 291 image and the second map hold display 292 image are both images according to the default display mode, that is, a patternless black image. . On the other hand, the image of the third general map hold display 293 has changed to an image with black horizontal stripes on a white background due to the appearance of a prize ball.

  The background image is drawn on the first layer L1 displayed on the farthest side as viewed from the player, and the image indicating that the decorative design is variably displayed is the second layer one before the first layer L1. Draw at L2.

  The three images 291 to 293 displayed on hold in the usual map are drawn on the third layer L3 that is one before the second layer L2. All of the three ordinary-pending display images drawn on the third layer L3 are a patternless and black image (black circle image) 290b. The fourth layer L4, which is one level before the third layer L3, has a black horizontal stripe on a white background at a position overlapping the black circle image of the third map hold display 293 drawn on the third layer L3. An image 290w is displayed. Here, the fourth layer L4 is a layer displayed on the most front side when viewed from the player. The image of the third general map hold display 293 is obtained by overlapping a black circle image 290b drawn on the third layer L3 with an image 290w with black horizontal stripes drawn on the white background drawn on the fourth layer L4, and a black circle image 290b. Cannot be seen, and an image 290w with black horizontal stripes on the white background drawn on the fourth layer L4 can be seen.

  150 (b) is a diagram showing, by layer, images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing (c) shown in FIG. 150 (a). The image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing (b) shown in FIG. 150B is also a background image, an image indicating that the decorative symbol is being variably displayed, and three hold display images. Become. All of the three pending display images here are images (black circle images) in the default display mode. That is, the image of the third general map hold display 293 that has been changed due to the appearance of the prize ball payout is changed to the image (black circle image) in the default display mode by returning to the normal figure hold increase effect. In the drawing process of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing (c) shown in FIG. 150 (a), the first layer L1 to the third layer L3 in the drawing process of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing (b) are used as they are. Only the fourth layer L4 need not be drawn. By doing so, the image 290w with black horizontal stripes on a white background is not displayed, and the image of the third general map hold display 293 also returns to the black circle image, that is, the default display mode. In this aspect, it is possible to reduce the additional processing of drawing.

  Subsequently, in the specific examples so far, the prize ball payout appearance has been started at the timing when the game ball has passed the central general winning opening 226. .

  FIG. 151 is a diagram showing an example in which a payout for payball is started slightly after the timing when the game ball passes through the central general winning opening 226.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 151 (a), the usual figure retention increase effect (profit non-giving approach area entry effect) is started at the timing shown in FIG. Although it is detected that the ball has passed through the central general winning opening 226, at this timing, the usual figure holding increase effect does not change to the prize ball payout appearance (profit grant entry area entry effect), or the elapse of a predetermined period, or Based on a predetermined opportunity that occurs thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. The predetermined opportunity here may specifically be that a predetermined effect (for example, super reach, etc.) is executed as a regular symbol variation effect. Then, after a prize ball payout appearance is made for a certain period of time, at the timing shown in FIG.

  151 (b) is a diagram showing, by layer, images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing (c) shown in FIG. 151 (a). The image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing (c) shown in FIG. 151 (a) is a background image, an image indicating that the decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and three hold-display images. Become. Of these three hold display images, the first map hold display 291 image and the second map hold display 292 image are both images according to the default display mode, that is, a patternless black image (black circle). Image). On the other hand, the image of the third general map hold display 293 is changed from a black circle image to an image in which a white horizontal stripe is added to a black circle due to the appearance of a prize ball.

  Also in this example, the background image is drawn on the first layer L1, and the image indicating that the decorative design is being variably displayed is drawn on the second layer L2.

  In addition, three images 291 to 293 displayed on the hold map are drawn on the third layer L3. Here again, all of the three general-purpose reserved display images drawn on the third layer L3 are a patternless and black image (black circle image) 290b. In the fourth layer L4, an image 290s with only white horizontal stripes is displayed at a position overlapping the black circle image of the third general map hold display 293 drawn on the third layer L3. In the image of the third common map hold display 293, the black circle image 290b drawn on the third layer L3 overlaps the image 290s of only the white horizontal stripe drawn on the fourth layer L4, and the white horizontal stripe is added to the black circle. Looks like an image. That is, a part of the black circle image 290b is covered with the image 290s of only white horizontal stripes, but the remaining part of the black circle image 290b is visible, and the black circle image 290b drawn on the third layer L3 The image 290s with only white horizontal stripes drawn on the fourth layer L4 is a single image.

  151 (b) is a diagram showing, by layer, images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing (d) shown in FIG. 151 (a). The three on-hold display images here are also images (black circle images) in the default display mode. That is, the image of the third general map hold display 293 that has been changed due to the appearance of the prize ball payout is changed to the image (black circle image) in the default display mode by returning to the normal figure hold increase effect. In the drawing process of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing (d) shown in FIG. 151 (a), the first layer L1 to the third layer L3 in the drawing process of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing (c) are used as they are. Only the fourth layer L4 need not be drawn. By rubbing, the image 290s with only white horizontal stripes is not displayed, and the image of the third general map hold display 293 also returns to the black circle image 290b, that is, the default display mode. Also in this mode, it is possible to reduce the additional processing of drawing.

  In addition, in a state where a prize ball payout appearance is performed, for example, a state where a scary-faced panda character image 2081 uttered “Jarajara” as shown in FIG. 145 (c) is displayed. When a game ball enters (wins a prize) in the central common figure starting gate 251 and wins a win in the usual figure determination based on the prize, a predetermined effect (for example, an effect instructing to make a right hand) Is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a predetermined effect is cast on the balloon portion 2081b "Jarajara" which is a part of the appearance of the prize ball payout appearance, and the prize ball payout appearance changes.

  Further, even when the effect of instructing to make a right hand is not performed, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the general symbol variation effect and stops displaying the decorative symbol indicating the result of determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct. In some cases, the player can recognize that the door member 2521 of the ordinary electric accessory 252 is opened.

  In the above description, the game ball has entered the central general start gate 251 and the lower central general winning opening 226 as an example, but the right general start gate 251 and the lower right general start gate 251 are arranged below it. The same applies to the special drawing starting port 230 that allows the game ball to enter when the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is opened. The same applies not only to the central general winning opening 226 below the central ordinary starting gate 251 but also to other general winning openings 226 and entry areas where prize balls are paid out.

  Further, in the above description, the production sound (for example, a prize ball payout sound) is output using the speaker 120, but the game ball paid out from the payout device 152 is output to the upper plate 126 or the upper plate 126. A collision sound generated by colliding with a stored game ball may be used as a production sound (for example, a prize ball payout sound). By doing so, since the collision sound is directed to the player from a direction different from that of the speaker 120, the player may be able to recognize the occurrence of profit more.

  Then, the pachinko machine of 2nd Example based on 5th Embodiment of this invention is demonstrated. In the following description, matters that overlap with the items described so far will be described again. In addition, components having the same names as those of the components described so far are described using the same reference numerals as those used so far.

  FIG. 152 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 according to the second embodiment as viewed from the front.

  In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In this embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLumin S3ence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced form. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The universal figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of a predetermined first variable game (detailed universal figure variable game to be described later) that is on hold. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

  The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second variable games (a special figure variable game to be described later in detail) that are being held. In the example, it is possible to hold a special figure variable game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure). Here, the term “hold” means that the start of various determination processes (such as lottery process) based on start-up information described later is put on hold.

  The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-probability lamp 222 is configured so as to give a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on until the start of the big hit game, and thereafter does not notify the current symbol control state. Yes. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is turned off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but the symbol control state here may be any one of a normal state, a short-time state (electric support state), and a probability variation state. It is good also as one state in the state without special figure certain change.

  In the present specification, the term “control state” will be used to describe the state inside the gaming table (pachinko machine 100). The term “control state” includes the concept of a so-called gaming state.

  In addition, a general prize opening 226, a general figure starting opening 228, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are provided around the effect device 206. ing.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detecting sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). When winning, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 127 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. 1 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning is sometimes referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player is sometimes referred to as “rental ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance through which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 127 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure changing game is started by the first special figure display device 212. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special diagram starting port 230 does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is disposed below the general drawing starting port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid is provided. It corresponds to variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232. That is, when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an open / close mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure change game is won and the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. The ball can be entered (easy winning state), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is an easy winning state. In other words, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (game ball entrance). A variable starting area in which the ease of entering a game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is equivalent to an example of a second starting area. The size of the large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, out of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable start area is more than the game ball that has entered the first special figure start opening 230 that is the fixed start area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232 in the figure. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special diagram starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning port 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. The variable prize opening 234 includes a variable prize opening and a door member 2341 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be referred to as an attacker. The door member 2341 changes its state from any one of a predetermined closed state and an open state in which a game ball can easily enter the variable winning opening more than the closed state. Both the closed state and the open state are stationary states, the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state, and the closed state at the variable winning opening 234 of this embodiment is that the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is in a stationary state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state at the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment is rotated to the player side until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning opening 234 is kept closed until the big hit game is started, and when the big hit of the special figure is won and the big hit game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. The variable winning award 234 corresponds to an example of a winning device according to the present invention, and winning the special figure jackpot corresponds to an example of satisfying the second condition according to the present invention. Note that the closed state may be a state where the game ball is slightly opened to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter, in addition to a completely closed state. Further, the variable winning opening may be any as long as it becomes a winning of the game ball by passing or entering the game ball, and is not limited to the one shown in FIG. When the special figure variable game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable prize opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out-port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning opening or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the amusement island side.

The sphere accommodated in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 146 and launcher 148 into the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc. (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.
<Directing device 206>

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball naild by the game nail 238, etc., and the passed ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate the ball.

  The production movable body 224 is composed of an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm in the present embodiment, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122, the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 152 correspond to effect means, and among these, the decorative symbol display device 208 is an image display means. It corresponds to an example.

Note that the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment is basically the same as the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.
<Type of design>

  Next, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed using FIGS. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described.

  FIG. 153 (a) shows an example of a special symbol stop symbol form (second symbol form). The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the second special figure start port 232 has a ball. The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor which is a ball detection sensor detects that the ball has entered. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 1” (special figure). (Floating game). When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 2” ( (Special map variable game). Then, when the variation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special symbol 2. Hereinafter, a series of displays from the start of the “variable display of the special figure 1 or 2” to the stop display of the special symbol form of the special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as a special figure fluctuation stop display. This special figure variable stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 153 (a), six types of special drawings from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure F” are shown as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 153 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  In the present embodiment, four types of jackpot symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure D") are prepared as the stop pattern form of the special figure. “Special figure A” is a 15 round (R) special jackpot symbol, and when special figure A is stopped and displayed, the control state thereafter becomes a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. “Special figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol with electric support, and when special figure B is stopped and displayed, the control state thereafter becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. “Special figure C” is a 4R jackpot symbol with probability variation, and when this special figure C is stopped and displayed, the control state thereafter becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure D" is a 4R big hit symbol, and when this special figure D is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state.

  The round here means the number of chances that a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) can be obtained. In the present embodiment, the number of operations of the variable prize opening 234 shown in FIG. 152 is represented, and the 15th round is one or more opening / closing operations of the variable prize opening 234 (one operation). This means that this operation continues 15 times. That is, one operation corresponds to an example of a specific change in which the open / close state changes from the first open / close state (here, the closed state) to the second open / close state (here, the open state). During the big hit game, the specific change is performed a plurality of constant times (15 times in the case of 15 rounds). Each round has a predetermined round end condition (for example, the entry of a game ball of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls), acquisition of a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls), elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the round, etc. 1 or more) is completed. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not it is a special big hit is determined by lottery of software random numbers. The big hit with special figure A and the special figure big hit with special figure C have a high probability of winning a big hit in the next special figure variation game (special big hit or short-time big hit). Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In this embodiment, during the big hit game, the special figure low probability state is entered, and when the special figure A or special figure C is won, the special figure high probability state is maintained until the next big hit after the big hit game ends. Is done. On the other hand, when the special figure B or the special figure D is won, the special figure remains in a low probability state even after the big hit game ends. The special figure low probability state corresponds to an example of a first probability control state. In addition, a special figure high probability state after the jackpot game is finished is sometimes referred to as a special figure probability change. Is an example of a second stochastic control state. This special figure high probability state may be referred to as a probability variation state. In the present specification, the term “control state” will be used to describe the state inside the gaming table (pachinko machine 100). The term “control state” includes the concept of a so-called gaming state. The transition of the probability control state is performed by the main control unit 300, and the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a probability control state transition unit.

  In addition, when the special figure A or the special figure B is won, after the big hit game is over, the state shifts to a state with electric support (electric support) (hereinafter referred to as an electric support state). The electric support state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. Say. This power support state is one of the control states prepared in the pachinko machine 100, and is sometimes referred to as a time-short state. That is, the electric support state (time-short state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric support state” is a state related to a general plan, and the “short-time state” is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a general figure and a special figure. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is also provided with a time reduction flag. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is usually in a high probability state. In the normal figure high probability state, compared to the normal figure low probability state, it becomes easier to win the common figure variable game (general figure certain change). For example, the winning probability of the usual figure floating game is 1/101 in the usual figure low probability state (non-electric support state), but increases to 99/101 in the usual figure high probability state (electric support state). In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the general figure change game is shorter than that in the non-electric support state (the general figure change short). For example, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation time of the usual game of 10 seconds is reduced to 1.2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, compared to the non-electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 tends to be long (electric chew releasing period extension). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew release period of 0.3 seconds is extended to 1.7 seconds in the electric support state. Furthermore, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (increase the number of times the electric chew is released). For example, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened only once in the non-electric support state per opening to the normal start port 228 is opened three times in the electric support state (for example, 3 to open for 1.7 seconds) Repeatedly, the closing time between opening is 1.6 seconds). The probability of entering the second special figure starting port 232 increases due to the extension of the electric chew release period and the increase in the number of electric chow releases. Note that the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the power is supported during the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the second special figure starting port 232 until the predetermined number of game balls are entered during the big hit game. In order to solve this, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be entered during a big hit and the number of game balls that can be acquired increases, resulting in an increase in gambling. In this embodiment, in the electric support state (short-time state), all of the normal figure change, the universal figure change, the electric chew release period extension, and the electric chew release frequency increase are performed. If any one is performed, a player's advantage will be in a high state and it may be in an electric support state (time-short state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew release period or the increase in the number of electric chew release is performed, the electric support state (short-time state) may be set. . In the non-electric support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the second special figure starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, in the second special figure starting port 232, the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters changes from one of the small size and the large size to the other size. The entrance of the second special figure starting port 232 is larger in the electric support state over a longer period than in the non-electric support state. In this embodiment, when the special figure A is stopped and displayed, the electric support state (normal figure high probability state) is maintained until the next big hit game is started after the big hit game to be performed thereafter, and the special figure B is displayed. Is displayed, the power support state is maintained while the special figure variation game is performed 100 times after the big hit game that is subsequently performed, and the non-electric support state (ordinary figure low probability state) is maintained at the 101st time. Transition. On the other hand, when a big hit without special support (special drawing C, special drawing D) is won, it does not shift to the electric support state after the big hit game ends. In the non-electric support state, the entrance of the second special figure starting port 232 is kept small. On the other hand, as described above, in the electric support state, the entrance of the second special figure starting port 232 is large, and the entry rate of game balls is increased. That is, in the non-electric support state, the game ball enters the second special figure start port 232 that is the variable start area at the first approach rate, whereas in the electric support state, the game ball starts the second special figure start. It enters the mouth 232 at a second approach rate that is higher than the first approach rate. Therefore, the non-electric support state corresponds to an example of the first approach rate control state, and the electric support state corresponds to an example of the second approach rate control state.

  Further, in this embodiment, a stop symbol of special figure E is prepared as a small hit symbol in addition to the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for a maximum of 1.5 seconds per operation. In opening the door member 2341 at the small hit, for example, when a game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is acquired. As a result, the second and subsequent releases are not performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a role in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game is finished, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game. In addition, you may prepare the small hit symbol (for example, 2nd small hit symbol etc.) other than "special EI".

  In the big hit game and the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 is opened or closed one or more times, and the player's advantage is relatively high.

  Also, the special figure F shown in FIG. 153 (a) is a lost symbol. When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 is not opened and closed, and the player's advantage is relatively low. It should be noted that a missing symbol (for example, a second lost symbol, etc.) other than “Special Illustration F” may be further prepared.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the hit control state (the big hit control state and the small hit control state) of the second advantage that the player's advantage is high is higher than the second advantage. A loss control state having a first advantage with a low advantage is prepared, and the pachinko machine 100 is in one of a hit control state (second control state) and a loss control state (first control state). Take control state. The transition of these control states is also performed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a special game state providing unit. In the small hit control state, although the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 opens and closes, it is almost impossible to expect a ball to enter the variable prize opening 234. It can also be regarded as a control state (first control state).

  In addition, the jackpot includes a jackpot that is relatively advantageous to the player and a jackpot that is relatively disadvantageous. In terms of the number of rounds, the 15R series jackpot (Special Figure A, Special Figure B) corresponds to an advantageous jackpot, and the 4R series jackpot (Special Figure C, Special Figure D) corresponds to an unfavorable jackpot. Further, in terms of whether or not there is a probability variation, the big hit by special figure A and the big hit by special figure C correspond to advantageous big hits, and the big hit by special figure B and big hits by special figure D correspond to disadvantageous big hits. The jackpot success / failure determination result that is relatively advantageous to the player corresponds to an example of a specific success / failure determination result, and the jackpot control state that is relatively advantageous to the player corresponds to an example of a special game state.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, symbols other than “Special Illustration A” are also prepared as jackpot symbol 1, and the same applies to other symbols such as jackpot symbol 2.

  The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are notifying means for informing the determination result (lottery result), and the pattern mode ( This corresponds to an example of symbol display means for performing symbol variation display until the special symbols A to F) are stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 153 (b) shows an example of the decorative pattern of the special figure. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the special drawing of this embodiment, “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Change display of decorative pattern of special figure” is performed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the special symbol decorative symbols separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. And the stop symbol mode (effect symbol mode) which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the special symbol is stopped and displayed. In the case of notifying the big hit (special illustrations A to D), “decoration combination 1” (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration” in which three identical ornamental symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c 1 ”or“ decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2 ”). When notifying a promiscuous jackpot (Special Figure A or Special Figure C) in the normal gaming state (Special Figure Low Probability Low Figure) or a jackpot other than the normal gaming state (Special Figure Low Probability Low Figure Probability) In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, three “decorative symbol combinations 2” (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”, “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”, etc.) in which three odd-numbered ornamental symbols are arranged. ) Is stopped. When notifying the small hit (special drawing E), “decoration symbol combination 3” (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Further, when notifying “special drawing F” which is a loss, symbols other than “decorative symbol combination 1”, “decorative symbol combination 2” and “decorative symbol combination 3” are displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of decorative symbols (for example, loose eyes) is stopped and displayed. Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, from the start of the “variable display of the decorative symbol of the special symbol” to the stop display of the decorative symbol pattern of the special symbol (for example, “decorative symbol combination 2”). This series of displays is sometimes referred to as a special design decoration stop display.

  It should be noted that the stop symbol mode (see FIG. 153 (a)) of the special symbols 1 and 2 and the decoration of one special symbol displayed in each of the left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. As for the stop symbol mode of the symbol (see FIG. 5B), the decorative symbol of the special symbol (see FIG. 5B) is larger.

  FIG. 153 (c) shows an example of the usual stop symbol mode (first symbol mode). In this embodiment, there are three types of stoppage display modes for normal symbols, “general symbol A” which is a winning symbol 1, “general symbol B” which is a winning symbol 2, and “normal symbol C” which is a lost symbol. . “Popular A”, which is a hit symbol 1, is a hit per symbol in which the opening time of the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 is relatively short. “B” is a common figure in which the opening time of the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 is relatively long. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general display display device 210 illuminates all seven segments and the central one segment. Repeat the lighting and perform “variable display of ordinary figure” (ordinary figure fluctuation game). Then, after the variation time has elapsed, any one of the three types of symbols is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 153 (c), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  In the following, a series of displays from the start of the “variable display of the usual figure” to the stop display of the stop pattern form of the usual figure may be referred to as a usual figure change stop display. The universal symbol display device 210 corresponds to an example of auxiliary symbol notification means.

  FIG. 153 (d) shows an example of a usual decorative pattern. There are three types of decorations for ordinary drawings in this embodiment: ordinary ornaments 1 to 3. An effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, that is, the general-purpose start-up sensor has detected that a sphere has entered the general-purpose start opening 228. In the predetermined area which is the central portion of the “Drawing decoration pattern change display”, the display is switched in the order of “decoration ○” → “decoration ◎” →. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbols of the general symbols in a variable manner separately from the general symbol display device 210. And the stop symbol mode (effect symbol mode) of the usual decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When notifying the hit symbol 1 (ordinary symbol A) of the ordinary figure, the “decoration ○” that is the ordinary ornament 1 is stopped and displayed in the predetermined area of the ornamental symbol display device 208. When notifying the hit symbol 2 (ordinary symbol B) of the ordinary figure, the “decoration ◎” which is the ordinary figure ornament 2 is stopped and displayed in the predetermined area. On the other hand, in the case of notifying the usual figure losing symbol (ordinary figure C), the “decoration ×” which is the common figure decoration 3 is stopped and displayed in the predetermined area. Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a series of processes from the start of the “variable display of the decorative symbol of the normal figure” to the stop display of the decorative symbol pattern of the normal figure (for example, the common figure decoration 2) is stopped. The display may be referred to as a normal decoration symbol change stop display.

In addition, the stop symbol mode (refer to FIG. 153 (c)) of the general symbol A and the normal symbol B and the stop symbol mode of the single normal symbol displayed in the predetermined area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (the same figure). As for (d), the usual decorative design (see (d) in the figure) is larger.
<Main control section control processing>

  Next, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 in the second embodiment is the same as the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 132 executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 in the first embodiment. The description is omitted because they are the same.

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing in the second embodiment.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment has two types of special drawings such as special figure 1 and special figure 2, and a lottery based on winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232 (determination of success / failure of special figure 2), This is prioritized over the lottery based on winning in the first special figure starting port 230 (judgment determination of special figure 1). In other words, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment, when a game ball enters the first special start area, the random number value is stored in the first random value storage area up to the maximum number of reservations, and the second special start A winning storage unit that stores up to the maximum number of reserved random numbers in the second random value storage area when a game ball is won in the area, both the first random value storage area and the second random value storage area When the random number value is stored in the first random number value storage area, the time when the random number value is stored in the first random number value storage area and the time when the random number value is stored in the second random number value storage area. The determination is made based on the random number value stored in the second random value storage area, the random number value is not stored in the first random value storage area, and the second random value storage is performed. If a random value is stored in the area, the second random number The determination is made based on the random number value stored in the value storage area, the random value is not stored in the second random value storage area, and the random value is stored in the first random value storage area. In the case where it is determined, a determination unit is provided for determining whether or not it is correct based on the random number value stored in the first random value storage area. In addition, the main control unit 300 notifies the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, and wins a prize to the second special figure start port 232. Based on the determination result, the start information of FIG. 1 is used as the start information in which the determination result is not performed. In the state where only the start information of the special figure 1 of the start information of the special figure 2 remains, and the start information of the special figure 2 is newly stored, the newly stored start of the special figure 2 The notification of the result of the determination based on the information is performed prior to the notification of the result of the determination based on the startup information of FIG. Further, the start information acquisition means for acquiring start information, when start information is stored in both of the first start information storage means and the second start information storage means, the second start information When starting information is acquired from the storage means and the starting information is stored in one of the first starting information storing means and the second starting information storing means, the starting information is stored. The starting information is obtained from the information storage means.

  In the main control unit timer interrupt process in the second embodiment, special figure state update processing is performed for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2, but first, special figure state update process for special figure 2 (see special figure 2). State update processing) is performed (step S1225), and then special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S1227). When the special figure state update process in step S1225 and step S1227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special figure related lottery process corresponds to an example of the determination unit. The main control unit 300 first performs the process for the special figure 2 (the special drawing 2 related lottery process) (step S1229), and then performs the process for the special figure 1 (the special figure 1 related lottery process) (step S1231). ). As described above, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the game ball enters the first special figure start port 230 at the same timing. The start information is acquired and the start information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second special figure start port 232, the special condition 2 variable game start conditions, and the special figure 1 variable game start. Even if the conditions are satisfied at the same time, or if both the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 variable game start condition are satisfied, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. Figure 1 Floating game does not start to fluctuate.

  Further, after the winning acceptance process S1217 is performed and before the special figure state update process is performed, the special figure prefetching process is performed (step S1224).

  FIG. 155 (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of special figure prefetching processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300.

  First, in step S1224a, whether or not there has been an increase in the start information of special figure 2, that is, in the reserved storage unit of special figure 2 provided in RAM 308, start information about special figure 2 (special figure 2 winning random number value, jackpot It is determined whether or not special figure 2 random number values and special figure 2 variation time determination random number values) have been added. If they have increased (if they have been added), the start information of the increased special figure 2 is prefetched. Then, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 is determined in advance (step S1224b). In this step S1224b, first, the start information of FIG. 2 is prefetched from the holding storage unit of FIG. That is, with the winning of the second special figure starting port 232 as a trigger, the starting information generated based on the winning is prefetched. Therefore, the start information is prefetched before the start information is acquired in the determination of success / failure (the special drawing 2 related lottery process in step S1229 shown in FIG. 154). The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs this prefetching corresponds to an example of start information prefetching means. In the prefetching here, only the winning portion (holding increment) is prefetched, but all may be prefetched. Note that pre-reading here means that the start information is read first before the validity determination (final lottery), but in the following explanation, the word “prefetching” is referred to as the result of the pre-judgment (final lottery). ) May be used to mean read.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a special figure success / failure prior determination table shown in FIG. 155 (b) and a special figure prior determination table shown in FIG.

  When the start information is prefetched, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 pre-determines whether or not the result is determined in the future special drawing 2 related lottery process and the symbols to be stopped based on the preread start information. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 first refers to the probability variation flag, and uses the special figure win / fail prior determination table shown in FIG. The possible numerical range is 0 to 65535), and it is determined in advance whether the determination result is a big hit determination result, a small hit determination result, or a loss determination result. . That is, whether or not the winning / failing determination result based on the starting information generated based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 becomes the big hit determination result (specific determination result or not). It is determined in advance. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs this pre-determination corresponds to an example of a pre-determination unit, and the result of the pre-determination here is treated as a special figure 2 determination result.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a special figure success / failure determination table having the same contents as the special figure success / failure prior determination table shown in FIG. 155 (b). Whether it is the special figure success / failure determination table or the special figure success / failure prior determination table shown in FIG. 155 (b), the jackpot probability is 1/320 in the special figure low probability state (non-electric support state). On the other hand, in the special figure high probability state (electric support state), it rises to 1/32. On the other hand, the small hit probability is 1/100 in both the special figure low probability state (non-electric support state) and the special figure high probability state (electric support state).

  Next, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 uses the special chart prior determination table shown in FIG. 155 (c) to determine the big hit in the pre-read start information when the special figure 2 success / failure prior determination result is a big hit. Based on the special figure 2 random number value (possible numerical range is 0 to 99), the jackpot symbol as a stop symbol is determined in advance. The pre-determination of the special figure here is also executed before the success / failure determination (the special drawing 2 related lottery process) based on the pre-read start information is performed, and the result of the pre-determination here is treated as the special figure 2 pre-determination result. . The pre-determination of the jackpot symbol here corresponds to pre-determining which type of jackpot is out of a plurality of types of jackpots prepared. In the second embodiment, only one kind of small hit symbol and lost symbol are prepared. Therefore, if the special figure 2 pre-judgment result is small hit or lost, it is unambiguous. Special figure 2 pre-determination results are obtained.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a special figure determination table having the same contents as the special figure prior determination table shown in FIG. The special jackpot type of the special chart of the second embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the special chart pre-determination table shown in FIG. 155 (c). The jackpot symbol 1 (special symbol A) or the jackpot symbol 2 (special symbol B) is In the jackpot game that is started with stop display, one round in which the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 is opened for 30 seconds (but closed when 10 balls are won in the variable prize opening 234) is performed 15 times. In the jackpot game that starts with the jackpot symbol 3 (special symbol C) or the jackpot symbol 4 (special symbol D) being stopped and displayed, the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 is opened for 30 seconds (however, the variable prize slot 234 is opened). One round, which is closed when 10 balls are won, will be held four times. The winning probability of jackpot symbol 1 (special symbol A) is the highest at 50%.

  In step S1224c following step S1224b, the stop symbol information (special figure 2 preliminary determination result) of special figure 2 obtained in step S1224b is stored in the special chart 2 preliminary determination result storage area prepared in the RAM 308, and in step S1224d. move on.

  On the other hand, if the start information in FIG. 2 has not increased in the determination in step S1224a, the process proceeds to step S1224d, and the pre-reading and pre-determination of the start information in FIG. 2 are not performed.

  In step S1224d, this time, whether or not there has been an increase in the start information of special figure 1 (special figure 1 winning random number value, jackpot special figure 1 random value, and special figure 1 variation time determining random value), ie, in RAM 308. It is determined whether or not one set of random values has been added to the reserved storage unit of the special figure 1 provided. If it has increased (if it has been added), the current control state is now the electric support state. Is determined with reference to the time reduction flag prepared in the RAM 308 (step S1224e). If the current control state is the non-electric support state (if the time reduction flag is off), step S1224f is determined. Proceed to

  In step S1224f, as in step S1224b described above, first, the start information of FIG. 1 is prefetched from the holding storage unit of FIG. Next, similarly to step S1224b, the special figure success / failure preliminary determination result is obtained based on the pre-read start information (special figure 1 winning random number value) using the special figure success / failure preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 155 (b). Subsequently, when the special figure 1 hit / no-go pre-judgment result is a big hit, similarly to step S1224b, using the special figure pre-judgment table shown in FIG. The special figure 1 pre-determination result is acquired based on the random number value in FIG.

  In step S1224g subsequent to step S1224f, the stop symbol information (special figure 1 preliminary determination result) of special figure 1 obtained in step S1224f is stored in the special chart 1 preliminary determination result storage area prepared in the RAM 308, and shown in FIG. Return to the indicated main controller timer interrupt processing.

  Note that in this special figure prefetching process, only the stop determination of the special figure was performed in advance, but based on the random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time in the prefetched start information, the advance time of the special figure fluctuation time was determined. The determination may be performed, and the change time advance determination result (special figure change time advance determination result) may be stored in the advance determination result storage area. Further, instead of the variation time, the effect mode (variation pattern) in the decorative symbol display device 208 may be determined in advance. In the present embodiment, the variation time of the special figure and the effect form of the decorative symbol display device 208 are associated one-to-one, and the fact that the variation time is selected is regarded as the variation pattern being selected. You can also. Further, the production modes may be divided into groups, and for example, only the group of “out of reach / normal reach lose” or the group of “reach A out of reach / reach B lose” may be selected. Or, it belongs to the group of reach production of “per normal reach, normal reach lose, per reach A, per reach B, per reach A, per reach B” or “super shortened lose, shortened lose, lose, chance all extinguished” It may be determined in advance whether it belongs to the group without reach.

  The pre-determination information newly stored in the pre-determination result storage area of the RAM 308 (information indicating the special figure pre-determination result) is stored in the command data of the special figure pending increase command as information of the pre-determined special figure 1 or special figure 2. It is included and transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400.

  On the other hand, if the start information in FIG. 1 has not increased in the determination in step S1224d shown in FIG. 155 (a), the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. No prior judgment is performed.

  In addition, even when the current control state is the electric support state (the time reduction flag is on) in step S1224e, the start-up information and the pre-determination are not performed in FIG. The “undetermined” information indicating that the determination of success / failure based on the start information of the special figure 1 and the preliminary determination of the stop symbol is not performed is stored in the special figure 1 preliminary determination result storage area (step S1224h), and FIG. Return to the main controller timer interrupt processing shown in. Note that, based on the start of the big hit game, the area in which the special figure 1 preliminary determination result is stored in the special figure 1 preliminary determination result storage area is rewritten to “undetermined” information. Further, in the second embodiment, if the undetermined information setting condition (in the power support state here) is satisfied, the start information itself is not prefetched, but the prefetch is performed and the predetermination is not performed. In addition, although prefetching and preliminary determination are performed, the result may not be sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 300 has obtained up to the special figure advance determination result, but the main control unit 300 does not obtain the special figure advance determination result and uses the pre-read start information as a special figure pending increase command. The first sub control unit 400 may be included in the data and transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, and the first sub control unit 400 may obtain a special figure preliminary determination result as necessary. However, since the normal state update is performed by the main control unit 300, if the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not the electric support is being performed, the normal state is also changed to the first sub control unit 400. Must be sent and not efficient. Therefore, it is more efficient to execute the prior determination in the main control unit 300.

  After executing the special figure prefetching process described above, the main control unit 300 executes the special figure related lottery process (steps S1229 and S1231), and the same start information as the prefetched start information targeted by the special figure prefetch process. Based on the above, the special figure success / failure determination result using the above-mentioned special figure success / failure determination table, the special figure determination result using the above-mentioned special figure determination table, and the variation time of the special figure are obtained again.

  Here, a method for determining the fluctuation time of the special figure in the special figure-related lottery process (steps S1229 and S1231) will be described. In the following description, since it is the same for both the fluctuation time of FIG. 1 and the fluctuation time of FIG. 2, the description will be made without distinguishing both.

  In the special drawing related lottery process (steps S1229 and S1231) shown in FIG. 154, when the special figure determination result is obtained using the special figure determination table, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 responds to the special figure determination result. Then, a timer number representing the fluctuation time of the special figure is determined.

  FIG. 156 (a) is a diagram showing a table set selection table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  In this table set selection table, the relationship between the special figure determination result (special figure stop symbol), the special figure fluctuation count, and the timer selection table is defined. In the second embodiment, two types of tables are prepared as timer selection tables. The timer selection table is a table used for determining the fluctuation time of the special figure. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with an area (timer selection table information storage area) for storing information representing a timer selection table. The RAM 308 is also provided with a special figure variable game execution number counter for counting the number of executions of the special figure variable game. If the value of the special figure variable game execution number counter is larger than 0, the special figure display device 212 ends the variable display, and after the confirmed special figure is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, the special figure variable game is executed by the CPU 304. The value of the execution counter is decremented by 1.

  For example, in the special figure state update process (steps S1227 and S1229) at the timing when the special rendering stop symbol is the big hit symbol 2 and 15R big hit is won and the end effect period of the 15R big hit game ends, the special figure variable game execution number counter Is set to 100, and information representing the table 4 is stored in the timer selection table information storage area. Also, in the special figure state update process (steps S1227 and S1229) at the timing when the special figure stop display is finished, if the value of the special figure variable game execution number counter is larger than 0, the value of the counter is decremented by 1. The information representing the table 2 is continuously stored in the timer selection table information storage area until the counter value becomes zero. When the value of the special figure variable game execution number counter changes from 1 to 0, the pointer on the RAM 308 is advanced to set a value of 0 to the special figure variable game execution number counter, and in the timer selection table information storage area. Information representing the table 1 is stored. Then, in the special figure state update process (steps S1227 and S1229) at the timing when the special figure stop display is completed until the special figure determination result is switched, the value of the special figure variable game execution number counter is continuously set to 0, and the timer Information indicating the table 1 is continuously stored in the selection table information storage area. As a result, when the 15R big hit game ends, unless the big win or the small win is won, the variable time of the special figure is determined using the timer selection table 2 in the first 100 special figure variable games, and after the 101th, Using the selection table 1, the variation time of the special figure is determined.

  FIG. 156 (b) is a diagram showing a timer number determination table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 is defined in the timer number determination table shown in FIG. 156 (b) based on the random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time in the starting information (the possible range is 0 to 99). Determine the timer number. That is, the timer number is determined by a special figure determination result, a predetermined random number (for example, a random number for timer number determination), a hold number obtained by adding the hold number of FIG. 1 and the hold number of FIG. 2, and predetermined period information. This is performed based on a table (for example, a timer selection table), and is not based on the result of prefetching by the prefetching process or the result of prior determination.

  The timer number is the time from when the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214 starts changing the symbol until the stop symbol indicating the result of the determination of the success / failure is displayed, that is, the time for displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol. (Design variation display time). The main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a variation time determination unit that determines a variation time of a symbol. Note that the time from when the decorative symbol display device 208 starts to change the decorative symbol of the special symbol until the stop symbol indicating the result of the determination of the success / failure is displayed (decorative symbol variation stop display time) is also displayed in this symbol variable display. Adjusted to time.

  FIG. 156 (c) is a diagram showing the relationship between the timer number and the symbol variation display time.

  In the second embodiment, the decorative pattern variation pattern of the special symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208 is determined in accordance with the symbol variation display time. That is, the first sub-control unit 400 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol decoration pattern based on the timer number (design variation display time). FIG. 156 (c) also shows the relationship between the timer number and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern of the special drawing for reference.

  The timer 1 represents that the special figure fluctuation time is an extremely shortened fluctuation time of 2 seconds, and the timer 2 represents that the special figure fluctuation time is a shortened fluctuation time of 5 seconds. Note that the determination of the timer 1 or the timer 2 may be referred to as a special figure change. The timer 3 represents that the special figure fluctuation time becomes a normal fluctuation time (reference fluctuation time) of 10 seconds. Further, in the timers 1 to 3, the variation pattern of the special symbol decorative pattern in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 152 becomes no reach. The timer 4 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time becomes a fluctuation time of 12 seconds. When the timer 4 is determined, normal reach is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure decorative pattern in the decorative symbol display device 208. The timer 5 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 40 seconds, and the timer 6 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 50 seconds. When the timers 5 and 6 are determined, the super-reach is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative pattern of the special graphic in the decorative graphic display device 208.

  This reach is determined to be a success / failure determination that the result of the success / failure determination (main lottery) in the special drawing related lottery process (steps S1229 and S1231) becomes a specific determination result (predetermined result with high player advantage). This is a notice effect that informs the player in advance before the result of the determination of whether or not the game is determined, and whether or not to reach is determined after the determination of the determination. The main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a notice control unit.

  In the second embodiment, the length of the period from the determination of whether or not a special figure is made to the notification of the result of the determination of the special figure is greater than the case where the advance notice of reach production is not made (the special figure fluctuation time) ) Is long.

  As shown in FIG. 156 (b), when the special figure determination result is an out-of-order symbol ("Special Figure F"), if the number of holds is 0 to 2, the timer 3 without reach has a probability of 90%. If the hold number is 3 to 7, the non-reach timer 2 is determined with a probability of 98%. Further, when the table 1 is selected with the off symbol, the super-reach timer 5 or the timer 6 is determined with a probability of 1% regardless of the number of holdings.

  In addition, if the decision result is a big hit, regardless of the type of special figure (big hit symbols 1 to 4), regardless of the timer selection table, and regardless of the number of holds, the normal reach The timer 4 is determined with a probability of 2%, the super reach 1 timer 5 is determined with a probability of 32%, and the super reach 2 timer 6 is determined with a probability of 66%. The same applies when the special figure determination result is a small hit symbol.

  Next, the common figure relevant lottery process (step S1223) shown in FIG. 154 will be described. In the second embodiment, the normal starting information is a normal winning random number and a winning common random number. In this general drawing related lottery process (step S1223), a general figure determination process is performed.

  FIG. 157 (a) is a diagram showing a normal / unusual determination table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  In the usual-time determination processing, the time reduction flag is referred to and the determination is made based on whether or not the current control state is the electric support state. This determination of whether or not a normal figure is made is performed based on a random number value for a normal figure winning (from 0 to 65535) in the start-up information extracted from the normal figure holding storage unit of the RAM 308. In the second embodiment, the general attack probability is about 10% in the normal low probability state (non-electric support state), but is 100% in the normal high probability state (electric support state).

  When the execution of the normal-figure success / failure determination process is completed and the normal-figure success / failure determination result is a win, the normal-figure stop symbol determination process is executed. In addition, since there is only one type of misplaced symbol, the stop symbol of the ordinary diagram is unambiguously determined if the result of determining whether or not the usual figure is correct.

  FIG. 157 (b) is a diagram showing a common map determination table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  Here again, referring to the time reduction flag, whether or not the current control state is the electric support state is determined. This usual figure stop symbol determination process is performed based on the common figure random number value (possible range is 0 to 99) in the start information extracted from the ordinary figure holding storage unit of the RAM 308. In the low-probability state (non-electric support state), 90% of the winning symbols are awarded to symbol 1 (common symbol A), and 10% of the probability is winning symbol 2 (common symbol B). . On the other hand, in the normal figure high probability state (electric support state), the symbol 2 per common figure (normal figure B) is won with a probability of 100%.

  Here, referring to the common figure determination table shown in FIG. 157 (b), the common figure hit type of the second embodiment will be described in detail. Is stopped, the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 is opened for 1.8 seconds (however, when 10 balls are won in the second special figure starting port 232, it is closed). On the other hand, when the symbol 2 per symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 210, the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special diagram starting port 232 is opened for 6.0 seconds (however, the second special diagram). It will be closed when 10 balls are won in the starting port 232).

In the second embodiment, the normal time fluctuation time is uniquely determined at a predetermined time according to the normal control state. For example, it is 10 seconds in a normal low probability state (non-electric support state), and 5 seconds in a normal high probability state (electric support state).
<Sub-control unit side control processing>

  Next, the first sub control unit main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 in the second embodiment is shown in FIG. 138 executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 in the first embodiment. Since it is basically the same as each process of the first sub-control unit, description thereof is omitted. Further, the processing in the second sub-control unit 500 is basically the same as that in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the prefetch notice in the second embodiment will be described in detail.

  First, in the second embodiment, a special figure 1 holding display area is prepared on the left side of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, that is, on the left side of the predetermined area where the normal decorative pattern is displayed. On the right side, a special figure 2 hold display area is prepared. In the special figure 1 hold display area, a hold display corresponding to one set of start information stored in the hold storage part of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is shown in FIG. Are displayed side by side from the left in order from the oldest in the order in which the start information is stored (in order of winning). The hold display is a display indicating that the start information is stored or stored in the start information storage means (the special storage section of the RAM 308). In the special figure 2 hold display area, a hold display corresponding to one set of start information stored in the hold storage part of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is displayed in the hold storage part of the special figure 2. Are displayed side by side from the left in order from the oldest in the order in which the start information is stored (in order of winning). That is, a hold display is performed for each start information stored in the start information storage means, and the number of hold displays corresponds to the hold number. The decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of a start hold display unit. In the present embodiment, the default display mode in the hold display is a mode in which a round graphic is displayed without any pattern and in one color, and corresponds to an example of the first mode. Each time the first sub control unit 400 receives the special figure hold increase command, the first sub control unit 400 transmits a hold increase command to the second sub control unit 500, and the second sub control unit 500 performs the decoration based on the hold increase command. The symbol display device 208 is controlled to increase the number of pending displays by one. On the other hand, every time the first sub-control unit 400 receives a symbol variation start command that is a signal for the detention, the second sub-control unit 500 transmits a hold decrease signal to the second sub-control unit 500. Based on the signal, the decorative symbol display device 208 is controlled to decrease the number of the hold display by one.

  The pre-reading notice in the second embodiment is an effect for giving a notice that there is a possibility that the result of the determination as to whether or not the lottery process is performed in the special drawing related lottery process (steps S1229 and S1231) shown in FIG. More specifically, in this embodiment, the big hit is a big hit that is relatively advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit of the 15R series: special figure A, special figure B) and a big hit that is relatively disadvantageous ( For example, 4R series big hits: special figure C, special figure D) are prepared, and the pre-reading notice is an effect for giving a notice that there is a possibility of an advantageous big hit. Note that the big hit with certainty (special drawing C) may be an advantageous big hit even in the big hit of the 4R system. Further, the pre-reading notice in the second embodiment is a notice made based on the starting information (pre-reading starting information) acquired before the starting information is acquired in the special drawing related lottery process (steps S1229 and S1231). is there. That is, the pre-reading notice is performed based on a pre-determination result based on the pre-read start information.

  In addition, the prefetching notice here includes a false prefetching notice that falsely notices as if it is an advantageous jackpot even if the pre-determination result is not an advantageous jackpot. In other words, the pre-reading notice indicates that the result of the success / failure determination may be an advantageous jackpot, is a notice that suggests to the player, or that the result of the determination is an advantageous jackpot. It can be said that it is a notice to expect.

  In the second embodiment, it is possible to perform a pre-reading notice effect using the hold display by changing the display mode of the hold display. The pre-reading notice effect using the hold display has an execution start timing when winning, and the execution area is within the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when the special figure hold is 0 and there is a prize at the special figure starting ports 230 and 232, whether or not the special figure is determined based on the prize is determined immediately, and the symbol variation display of the special figure is also immediate. However, it is possible that the special figure hold display based on the winning is not performed, but it may be performed for a few seconds immediately after the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure based on the winning. In this case, the effect of the pre-reading notice is performed during the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display corresponding to the pre-read start information) for notifying the success / failure determination result based on the pre-read start information. The prefetching notice using the hold display corresponds to an example of a predetermined notice form of the prefetching notice, and the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of the prefetching notice unit.

  In addition, by driving the effect movable body 224 and the shielding device 246, it is possible to perform a pre-reading notice effect by actuating an accessory. The pre-reading notice effect by the actuating of the accessory may be executed at the time of winning or at the time of stopping the symbol fluctuation, and the execution area is an area covering the decorative symbol display device 208. The symbol variation stop time in the pre-reading notice is when at least one of the symbol variation display corresponding to the pre-read start information and the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display is stopped. More specifically, if there is a winning with a hold of 0, the winning / failing determination based on the winning is immediately performed, and the special symbol variation display is also immediately started. When the symbol variation display corresponding to the information is stopped, the execution of the prefetch notice is started.

  It is also possible to perform a pre-reading notice effect by causing a design such as a specific character or symbol to appear on the decorative design display device 208. The execution start timing of the pre-reading notice effect using this specific symbol may be at the time of winning, or by the symbol variation start command after a predetermined time has elapsed after receiving the first symbol variation starting command after winning. The started symbol variation display may be in progress. Here, if there is a winning in a state where the hold is 0, the winning / failing determination based on the winning is performed immediately and the special symbol variation display is started immediately. The symbol variation display after a predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol variation display (design variation display corresponding to the pre-read start information) for notifying the determination result is started. When there is a winning in a state where the hold is 1 or more, the symbol variation display is performed before the symbol variation display. The execution area may be the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c in the decorative symbol display device 208, or a predetermined area for the effect display area 208d. Also good.

  Furthermore, it is possible to perform a pre-reading notice effect by changing the background image of the decorative symbol display device 208. The execution start timing of the prefetch notice effect using the background image is at the time of winning a prize, and the execution area is the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Note that the pre-reading notice effect is not limited to a notice using an image or an accessory, but may be a notice using sound or light.

  When the first sub control unit 400 receives the special figure hold increase command, the first sub control unit 400 performs a pre-reading notice execution process in the effect control process in the first sub control unit main process. In this prefetching notice execution process, a prefetching notice using a hold display, a prefetching notice by actuating an accessory, a prefetching notice using a specific design, and a prefetching notice using a background image are determined in advance. Further, if the pre-reading notice using the hold display is used, the display form after the change according to the pre-reading notice is determined by lottery from a plurality of types of display forms of the hold display prepared in advance. If the pre-reading notice is due to the action of an accessory, one drive pattern is determined by lottery from drive patterns of a plurality of types of effect movable bodies 224 and shielding devices 246 prepared in advance. If it is a pre-reading notice using a specific symbol, a symbol to be made to appear in the pre-reading notice is determined by lottery from a plurality of types of symbols such as characters and symbols prepared in advance. If it is a prefetch notice using a background image, a background image used for the prefetch notice is determined by lottery from a plurality of types of background images prepared in advance.

  Also in the second embodiment, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the common symbol variation start command, the decorative symbol display device 208 executes the regular symbol variation effect. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the special symbol variation start command, the decorative symbol display device 208 also executes a special symbol variation effect.

  FIG. 158 is a diagram showing a specific example of the normal symbol variation effect, the special symbol variation effect, and the prefetching notice effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (a), the combination of the stop symbol of the special symbol decorative symbol is displayed, and in the effect display area 208d, the predetermined symbol 208x is displayed in which the normal symbol decorative symbol is displayed. Is displayed as a stop symbol of the usual decorative pattern. That is, the special figure variable game and the general figure variable game are stopped. In this state, when the game ball passes through the universal figure starting port 228, as shown in FIG. 158 (b), the fluctuation display is started on the universal figure display device 210 and the predetermined area 208x of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Then, the variation display of the general-purpose decorative symbols is started. In addition, from the loudspeaker 120 (not shown), a normal variation sound indicating that the symbol variation display is performed on the universal symbol display device 210 is output. The variation display of the general symbol decoration symbol and the output of the common symbol variation sound correspond to an example of the general symbol variation effect, and the universal symbol variation effect corresponds to an example of the predetermined effect according to the present invention.

  Subsequently, when a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230, a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, as shown in FIG. 158 (c), the symbol variation display is started on the special symbol display device 212, and the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. In the area 208c, the variation display of the special figure decoration symbol is started. Also, a special figure fluctuation sound indicating that the symbol fluctuation display is being performed on the special figure 1 display device 212 is output from the speaker 120. The variation display of the special symbol decoration symbol and the output of the special symbol variation sound correspond to an example of the special symbol variation effect. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect based on the pre-reading of the starting information stored in the special figure 1 holding storage unit of the RAM 308 is also executed by winning the first special figure starting port 230. Here, a pre-reading notice effect using a specific symbol is executed at the time of winning a prize at the first special figure starting port 230, and the princess character's symbol 2082 is displayed as a specific symbol in the lower area including the effect display area 208d. Move from left to right. Note that a pre-reading notice effect sound may be output from the speaker 120 while the princess character's symbol 2082 is moving.

  In the specific example described above, the special figure fluctuation sound starts to sound from the middle of the normal figure fluctuation sound, and the special figure fluctuation sound is heard over the normal figure fluctuation sound. In addition, the predetermined area 208x where the variation display of the general-purpose decorative symbol is performed is covered with the symbol 2082 of the princess character passing by the pre-reading notice effect for a moment, so that the variation display of the general-purpose decorative symbol is not visible for a moment. In other words, the pattern 2082 of the princess character enters the predetermined area 208x, thereby reducing the predetermined area 208x. Therefore, the general symbol variation effect corresponding to an example of the predetermined effect according to the present invention is changed by the special symbol variation effect or the prefetching notice effect.

  Here, the movement of the princess character's symbol 2082 is executed as a pre-reading notice effect, but it may be executed as a special symbol variation effect.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 158 (c ′), when a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230, the middle area of the special figure decoration symbol is a predetermined area where the variable display of the normal figure decoration symbol is displayed. It may be a special symbol variation effect that fluctuates over 208x. By doing so, the ordinary symbol variation effect changes according to the special symbol variation effect. It should be noted that the effect that the middle symbol of the special symbol decoration symbol is displayed in a variable manner over the predetermined area 208x is used to pre-read the starting information stored in the special symbol 1 holding storage unit of the RAM 308 by winning the first special symbol starting port 230. It may be performed as an effect of prefetching notice based on.

  Further, in FIG. 158 (c), the pre-reading notice effect based on the pre-reading of the starting information stored in the special figure 1 holding storage unit of the RAM 308 by winning the first special figure starting port 230 is a notice using a specific symbol. Although it is executed in a mode, it may be executed in a notice mode in which the effect movable body 224 is driven as shown in FIG. Also in this case, the forearm portion 224b that has been rotated covers the predetermined area 208x where the variation display of the regular symbol decorative symbol is performed, and the regular symbol variation effect changes due to the pre-reading notice effect.

  Also in the specific example in the second embodiment described above, the regular symbol variation effect changes here due to the establishment of a prize ball payout condition (predetermined condition) such as winning a prize at the first special figure starting port 230. The player is more likely to notice that the payout is being made, the ball holding is likely to be good, and the impression of the gaming table may be improved. The same applies to the specific examples described below. In addition, since the change in the regular symbol variation effect is caused by the pre-reading notice effect, the player may generate a predetermined profit (here, payout of a prize ball) and the variable winning opening 234 may be in an advantageous state. Can be recognized at a time by a pre-reading notice effect (specific effect), which can enhance the player's interest in the game and improve the impression of the game stand compared to the case where each is recognized separately There is a case that can be made.

  FIG. 159 is a diagram showing a specific example of the normal symbol variation effect and the prefetching notice effect. Hereinafter, the difference from the specific example shown in FIG. 158 will be mainly described.

  Also in this specific example, when the game ball passes through the ordinary figure starting port 228, the ordinary symbol variation effect is started. In other words, in the predetermined area 208x of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable decorative symbol display is started, and the normal symbol changing sound is output from the speaker 120 (not shown).

  Subsequently, when a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230, a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, a special symbol variation effect similar to the specific example shown in FIG. 158 is started, but pre-reading of the start information stored in the special figure 1 storage unit of the RAM 308 by winning the first special figure start port 230 is started. Based on the pre-reading notice effect based on it is also executed. The notice mode of the prefetch notice effect based on the prefetch here is a form using a background image. As shown in FIG. 159 (c), the symbol variation display is started on the special figure 1 display device 212. The entire front screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is darkened for a moment, and the normal symbol variation effect executed in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the special symbol variation effect started by the decorative symbol display device 208 are temporarily invisible. . That is, the regular symbol variation effect changes depending on the prefetching notice effect.

  Here, the switching of the background image is executed as the pre-reading notice effect, but it may be executed as a special symbol variation effect. That is, the background image of the decorative design display device 208 is switched to a dark background image (blackout image) for a moment before starting the variable display of the special design, and then the normal background image is restored. You may perform the change display of a symbol. Even with rubbing, the regular symbol variation effect changes according to the special symbol variation effect. The blackout image can also be used as a scene switching image, and such background image switching can also be viewed as a special symbol variation effect that also serves as a scene switching effect.

  In FIG. 159 (c), the background image is switched to a dark image (blackout image). However, as shown in FIG. 159 (c ′), the background image is switched to a bright image (here, whiteout image). Also good.

  Further, in FIG. 159 (c), the pre-reading notice effect based on the pre-reading of the starting information stored in the special figure 1 holding storage unit of the RAM 308 by winning the first special figure starting port 230 is the notice mode using the background image. However, it may also be executed in a notice mode in which the open shielding device 246 is closed as shown in FIG. Also in this case, the predetermined area 208x in which the variation display of the usual figure decorative symbol is performed is hidden by the left door 246a and the right door 246b of the shielding device 246, and the ordinary symbol variation effect is changed by the pre-reading notice effect. Note that switching to a white-out image and an effect effect that closes the left door 246a and the right door 246b can also be viewed as a scene switching effect.

  The background image may be a translucent image. Since it is translucent, it is possible to visually recognize the regular symbol variation effect and the special symbol variation effect, and thus it may be possible to prevent a decrease in the rendering effect.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when the first sub control unit 400 receives the special figure hold increase command, the decorative symbol display device 208 executes a special figure hold increase effect.

  FIG. 160 is a diagram showing a specific example of the general symbol variation effect and the special figure hold increase effect.

  In FIG. 160 (a), the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as the symbol variation display) is performed on the special symbol display device 212, and the special symbol decoration symbol variation display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Yes. Also, three special figure hold displays are displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 160 (a). Hereinafter, the special figure hold display representing the oldest special figure hold (hereinafter referred to as special figure hold 1) will be referred to as the first special figure hold display 296, and the second old special figure hold (hereinafter referred to as special figure hold 2). ) Is called a second special figure hold display 297, and a special figure hold display representing the newest special figure hold (hereinafter referred to as special figure hold 3) is called a third special figure hold display 298. Here, the number of reserved special figures is three. On the other hand, the general symbol display device 210 is stopped and a stop symbol of the general symbol decorative symbol is displayed in a predetermined area 208x of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  When the game ball passes through the general symbol start port 228 while the symbol variation display is being performed, the regular symbol variation effect is started. In other words, in the predetermined area 208x of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable decorative symbol display is started, and the normal symbol changing sound is output from the speaker 120 (not shown).

  Next, when a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230, a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, special figure hold increases. Hereinafter, the increased special figure hold will be referred to as special figure hold 4, and the special figure hold display representing the special figure hold 4 will be referred to as a fourth special figure hold display 299. When a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230, a special figure holding increase sound is output from the speaker 120 (not shown), and the fourth black circle, which is the default display mode, is displayed from the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208. A track symbol 2991 on which the special symbol hold display 299 symbol is placed appears, and this track symbol 2991 moves to the left in the effect display area 208d. As a result, as shown in FIG. 160 (c), the design 2991 of the track passes through the predetermined area 208x where the variation display of the general-purpose decorative pattern is performed, and the general-purpose decoration design performed in the predetermined area 208x. The change display of is not visible for a moment. In other words, the predetermined area 208x becomes smaller when the track pattern 2991 enters the predetermined area 208x. Also in this specific example, the regular symbol variation effect changes due to the special symbol hold increase effect.

  The symbol of the fourth special figure hold display 299 of the black circle, which is the default display mode placed on the truck, is transported to the right side of the third special figure hold display 298, and then is lowered from the truck, and the fourth special figure hold display 299 is displayed. The figure hold display 299 is displayed on the right side of the third special figure hold display 298. When the fourth special figure hold display 299 is displayed on the right side of the third special figure hold display 298, a prefetch notice effect using the hold display is performed. Here, as shown in FIG. 160 (d), a light aura effect image 2992 representing a state in which light radiates radially from the black circle image is added to the black circle image which is the default display mode. The display mode has changed. This light aura effect image 2992 enters the predetermined area 208x where the variation display of the general-purpose decorative symbol is performed, and the predetermined area 208x is also reduced here. Therefore, the general symbol variation effect is also changed by the prefetching notice effect. The light aura effect image 2992 may be a translucent image. Since it is translucent, it is possible to visually recognize the regular symbol variation effect, so that it may be possible to prevent a decrease in the rendering effect of the regular symbol variation effect.

  The display form of the fourth special figure hold display 299 displayed on the right side of the third special figure hold display 298 may be changed to another display form. In FIG. 160 (d ′), the display form of the fourth special figure hold display 299 displayed on the right side of the third special figure hold display 298 is changed to a panda character image with a scary face. In addition, this character image is larger than the black circle image of the default display mode, and a part of the character image enters the predetermined area 208x, and here, the regular symbol variation effect is also changed by the pre-reading notice effect. The hold display that also serves as a pre-reading notice effect represents a hold that the player can expect from the big hit, and it is easier for the player to understand by displaying it larger than the size of the default display mode. In this way, the size of the hold display may be changed according to the expectation degree (reliability) of the prefetch notice. It should be noted that it may be displayed larger only for the first predetermined period of the hold display and thereafter displayed in the same size as the size of the default display mode.

  FIG. 161 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the normal symbol variation effect itself changes. Hereinafter, the difference from the specific example shown in FIG. 158 will be mainly described.

  Also in this specific example, when the game ball passes through the ordinary figure starting port 228, the ordinary symbol variation effect is started. In other words, in the predetermined area 208x of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable decorative symbol display is started, and the normal symbol changing sound is output from the speaker 120 (not shown).

  Subsequently, when a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230, a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are also paid out as prize balls. In addition, as shown in FIG. 161 (c), a special symbol variation effect similar to the specific example shown in FIG. 158 is started. Furthermore, based on the start of the special symbol variation display, the background screen of the predetermined area 208x where the variation of the regular symbol decoration symbol is displayed changes, and the regular symbol variation effect itself changes. Here, the background image with no pattern is changed to a background image with an oblique stripe pattern.

  Further, as a change of the general symbol variation effect itself based on the start of the special symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 161 (d), instead of the variation display of the regular symbol decoration symbol performed in the predetermined area 208x. The countdown display may be performed to change the display to, for example, 5 → 4 → 3 → 2 → 1 → ◯.

  When the special figure hold increases, a pre-reading notice effect based on the pre-reading of the start information stored in the special figure hold storage unit of the RAM 308 by winning at the special figure start opening is displayed as a variation display of the general-purpose decorative symbol. It may be executed in the predetermined area 208x where is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 161 (e), instead of the variable display of the general-purpose decorative symbol, a symbol such as a specific character or symbol (here, a panda character symbol with a scary face) is displayed in the predetermined area 208x. Is displayed.

  Further, in the above description, the variation display of the general symbol decoration symbol (general symbol variation effect) on the decorative symbol display device 208 is always performed. You may make it carry out by probability (for example, 10% or 0%). By doing so, the player's expectation for the regular symbol variation effect may be increased.

  Moreover, the sound production based on each production may include a silent production. This makes it easier for the player to notice that a profit (for example, a payout of a prize ball) has occurred. In addition, there is a case where it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the special figure is judged to be unacceptable without interfering with the special figure-related effect.

  In addition, you may be made not to perform a regular symbol change effect during electric support. If the electric support is in progress, the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 is easy to open and a prize ball is likely to be generated, so that the player can concentrate on the effect based on the generation of the prize ball. There is a case.

  Although the example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine has been described here, the present invention can also be applied to a rotating game machine (slot machine).

  In the above description, “a game ball can enter in a game stand that gives a player a predetermined game value based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, entry of a game ball into a winning opening or a start port). Starting information (for example, a normal winning random number and a random number for determining a normal variation period) based on a first approach area (for example, the central general map start gate 251) and a game ball entering the first entrance area ) Generating start information generating means (for example, a random value storage register corresponding to the general start area of the random value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 129, a general variable changing period determining random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and Combined with a main control unit 300 for performing random number processing), and a determination unit for determining whether or not the vehicle is correct based on the start information generated by the start information generating unit (for example, a main system for executing a normal determination process) CPU 304 of unit 300), an effect means for effecting (for example, decorative symbol display device 208), and a predetermined effect (for example, a normal symbol variation effect on the effect means) based on the result of the success / failure determination of the success / failure determination means. ) And a second entry area (for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500) and the second entry area (for example, the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball) And a general general winning opening 226), and the effect control means gives the effect means the predetermined effect based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entry area during the predetermined effect. A game stand characterized by causing a changed effect (for example, an effect in which a normal symbol variation effect is changed by a prize ball paying appearance). Is explained.

  Here, the first entry area may be an area (for example, a gate) through which a game ball passes. That is, the first entry area may be provided in a game area where a game ball rolls, and the game ball may roll further in the game area even if the game ball enters. The predetermined condition may not be satisfied even if a game ball enters the first entry area.

  Further, the second entry area may be provided in the game area, and the game ball may be guided to the back side of the game area when entering.

  In addition, the second approach area is easy to enter the game ball from the first state in which it is difficult to enter the game ball based on the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination means being a specific result of the success / failure determination. A variable start port that changes state to the second state may be included.

  Furthermore, the predetermined effect may be an effect by image display, an effect by sound, or an effect by light.

  In addition, the effect obtained by changing the predetermined effect here may be an effect in which the predetermined effect itself is switched to another effect, or an effect in which a part of the predetermined effect is changed. Alternatively, it may be an effect in which some or all of the predetermined effects are covered with other effects.

  Also, giving a predetermined game value to a player is exemplified by paying out game media.

  Further, in the description so far, “the effect control means causes the effect means to perform a specific effect (for example, appearance of a prize ball payout) that affects the predetermined effect in order to change the predetermined effect. A game stand characterized by being. Is also explained.

  Further, in the description so far, “the effect means includes an image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) for displaying an effect image, and the effect control means has a predetermined effect image (for example, a decoration for a normal figure). By displaying the graphic display) on the image display means, the predetermined effect is displayed on the image display means, and a part or all of the predetermined effect image is displayed as an effect obtained by changing the predetermined effect. An image (for example, see FIG. 145 (c)) covered with a part or all of another image (for example, a panda character image 2081 having a scary face) is displayed on the image display means. Amusement stand. Is also explained.

  Here, the effect control means may cause the image display means to display an effect image that is wholly or partially translucent as the specific effect.

  Further, the effect means includes sound output means for outputting a predetermined sound,

  The production control means causes the sound output means to output the predetermined sound to cause the sound output means to perform the specific production, and the specific output that is output in parallel with the predetermined sound. The sound may be output to the sound output means. By doing so, the player may be able to recognize the occurrence of profit by the sound based on the specific performance.

  Further, the sound output means includes a ball tray capable of storing a game ball, and the collision based on the game ball paid out from the game ball payout means colliding with the game ball stored in the ball dish or the ball tray A sound may be output as the specific sound. By doing so, the collision sound is directed to the player from a direction different from that of the speaker, so that the player may be able to recognize the generation of profit more.

  In addition, in the description so far, “the first entry area (for example, the central universal start gate 251) is provided in the game area (for example, the game area 124) where the game ball rolls, The game area is further rolled, and the second entry area (for example, the central general winning opening 226) is entered by a game ball after entering the first entry area of the game area. A game table characterized by being provided at a possible position. Is also explained.

  Further, in the description so far, “a winning device (for example, a variable winning port 234) that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that a predetermined second condition is satisfied (for example, winning a big win of a special figure). The effect control means causes the effect means to perform an effect that suggests that the predetermined second condition is highly likely to be satisfied as the specific effect (for example, an effect of a pre-reading notice). A game stand characterized by being. Is also explained.

  Hereinafter, the start information generated based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry area is referred to as first start information, and the determination of success / failure based on the first start information is set as the first success / failure determination. The correctness determination means for performing the first correctness determination is used as the first correctness determination means.

  Also, second start information (for example, a special figure) generated based on a game ball entering the second entry area (for example, the first special figure start port 230, the second special figure start port 232). Second starting information storage means (for example, RAM 308) for storing a winning random number value, a big hit special figure random value, a small hit special figure random value, a lose special figure random value, and a special figure variation time determination random value. 2 and the second start information stored in the second start information storage means, and whether or not it is determined based on the acquired second start information. The second success / failure determination means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) for making a determination and deriving a second success / failure determination result, and when the symbol variation display is performed and the symbol variation display is finished, the second success / failure determination is performed. The symbol variation display that stops and displays the symbol form representing the judgment result is performed. The second symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214) and the second symbol display means stop display the symbol pattern representing the specific second determination result. Control state transition means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) that shifts the control state from the normal control state to the big hit control state and the second determination result based on predetermined second start information by the second determination unit. The second success / failure determination means provides a pre-reading notice effect for notifying that there is a possibility that the result will be the specific second success / failure determination result (for example, a big success / failure determination result). A pre-reading notice effecting means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) that executes at a predetermined execution probability based on the predetermined second starting information acquired before acquiring the starting information; Before The effect means includes the prefetch notice effect means, and the effect control means causes the prefetch notice effect means to perform the prefetch notice effect as the specific effect. Good.

  In addition, the variable symbol means (for example, variable prize opening 234) that is opened after the second symbol display means stops displaying the symbol form indicating the specific second success / failure determination result (for example, special figure big hit determination result). The aspect provided with this may be sufficient.

  The pre-reading notice effect unit executes a pre-reading notice effect for notifying that the result of the determination on the basis of predetermined start information by the determination unit may be the specific determination result. Alternatively, it may be one that executes a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the information based on the predetermined starting information acquired before the determination unit determines that the predetermined starting information is acquired.

  Further, the prefetching notice effect means may start the prefetching notice effect before the appropriateness determination means makes a determination as to whether or not based on the predetermined start information.

  In addition, there is provided a symbol display unit that performs symbol variation display for each starting information stored in the starting information storage unit from the start of symbol variation until the symbol mode corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed. If it is an aspect, the pre-reading notice effect control means may use the predetermined start information in at least one of the symbol variation display corresponding to the predetermined start information and the symbol variation display executed prior to the symbol variation display. A pre-reading notice effect may be executed for notifying that the result of the determination based on whether or not the result is the specific determination result.

  In addition, the pre-reading notice producing unit may determine whether or not the notice of whether or not the result of the determination based on the predetermined start information by the determination unit may be the specific determination result may be executed. A pre-reading notice effect that is determined before the determination of whether or not based on the predetermined start information may be executed.

  Further, the prefetching notice effect means may execute the prefetching notice effect based on the predetermined start information stored in the start information storage means, or the prefetch notice effect. The command may be executed based on receiving a command indicating that the predetermined start information is stored in the start information storage means.

  Also, a predetermined number of game balls are encapsulated as encapsulated balls, the encapsulated spheres are fired into a game area to play a game, and a predetermined game value is given to a player based on the fact that the encapsulated balls have won a predetermined entry area. It is also possible to use an enclosed ball type gaming machine that can be used by circulating the encapsulated ball that has won the predetermined entry area or the enclosed ball that has not won the prize to the game area. Further, the gaming value may be a predetermined number of game ball number data that can be launched into the game area, and the effect control means is based on the fact that the game ball number data is given to the player, You may make the said production | generation means perform the production | generation which changed this predetermined production (For example, the production which the regular symbol fluctuation production changed by a prize ball paying appearance). Further, the effect control means may display an image indicating the predetermined number of the predetermined number of game ball number data on the image display means as the specific effect.

  Next, a pachinko machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the following description, matters that overlap with the items described so far may be omitted or redundantly described, but the components having the same names as the names of the components described so far are used. Will be described with the same reference numerals used so far.

  FIG. 162 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 according to the third embodiment as viewed from the front.

  The game board 200 shown in FIG. 162 is a game board that makes a right turn during the electric support and the big hit game. In the game board 200, a general start port (gate) 228 is provided in each of the left region and the right region. The normal start port 228 corresponds to an example of an entry area, and the ball that has passed the normal start port 228 rolls in the game area 124 without being discharged to the game island side. The general start port 228 provided in the left region can be used to open the electric long during the non-electric support state (details will be described later), and the general start port 228 provided in the right region is It is possible to aim to open the electric Chu during the electric support state.

  Further, the first special figure starting port 230 and the second special figure starting port 232 are provided below the central portion of the game area 124. Both the first special figure start port 230 and the second special figure start port 232 are start areas into which game balls can enter, but the second area (the right side in the game area) rolls due to the arrangement of the game nails 238 and the like. The game ball is configured so that it is difficult or impossible to enter the first special figure starting port 232. On the other hand, even if the second special figure starting port (electrical chew) 232 is a game ball that rolls in the first area (left side in the game area), it rolls in the second area (right side in the game area). Even a game ball can be entered. The second special figure starting port 232 is provided directly below the first special figure starting port 230, and in the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, there is a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid. Is provided. The combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure start port 232 corresponds to variable start means (variable start region), hereinafter referred to as an electric Chu (electric tulip), and the pair of blade members 2321 open. Is referred to as electric chew release. When the pair of blade members 2321 is closed (first state), the game ball is difficult to enter, and when the pair of blade members 2321 is open (second state), the game ball is easy to enter. . The electric chew is a starting region in which the state can be changed at least between the difficult-to-enter state and the easy-to-enter state. It should be noted that the size of the reception hole for the game ball of the electric chew when the pair of blade members 2321 is open is less than the size of five game balls.

Further, the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 is provided below the electric chew, and the door member 2341 is moved to be in a state where a winning can be achieved. That is, the variable winning opening 234 is a winning area (winning means) whose state can be changed at least between a winning impossible state and a winning possible state. It should be noted that the size of the game ball receiving port of the attacker in the state where the door member 2341 is opened is the size of five or more game balls. In the game board 200 shown in FIG. 162, it is difficult for the game ball rolling in the first area (the left side in the game area) to enter the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 due to the arrangement of the game nail 238 or the like. It is configured to be impossible, and the player needs to make a right strike during the big hit game.
<Type of design>

  Next, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed using FIGS. The types of special maps, common maps, and decorative symbols will be described.

  FIG. 163 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol mode (second symbol mode) of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed after the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214. FIG. In FIG. 163 (a), ten types of special drawings "Special Figure A" to "Special Figure J" are shown. In FIG. 163 (a), the white portions in the drawing indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  In the present embodiment, six types of jackpot symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure F") are prepared as the stop pattern modes of the special figure. “Special Figure A” and “Special Figure B” are 15 round (R) special jackpot symbols, and “Special Figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol (suddenly probable). When these symbols (special illustrations A, B, E) are stopped and displayed, the control state thereafter becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. "Special figure C" and "Special figure D" are 15R jackpot symbols (15R normal jackpot). When the special figure C or the special figure D is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R big hit symbol (hidden probability variation). When the special figure F is stopped and displayed, the control state thereafter becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state.

  In this embodiment, during the big hit game, the special figure low probability state is entered, and when the special figure A, special figure B, special figure E, and special figure F are won, the big hit is next. Until then, the special figure high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, when the special figure C and the special figure D are won, the special figure low probability state remains even after the big hit game ends.

  Also, after the end of the 15R big hit game and after the big hit game due to sudden probability change, the state shifts to a state with electric support (electric support) (hereinafter referred to as an electric support state). Even in this embodiment, in the electric support state (short-time state), all of the normal figure change, the universal figure change, the electric chew release period extension, and the electric chew release frequency increase are performed. If any one is performed, a player's advantage will be in a high state and it may be in an electric support state (time-short state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew release period or the increase in the number of electric chew release is performed, the electric support state (short-time state) may be set. . In the non-electric support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the second special figure starting port 232 than in the electric support state. In the present embodiment, when special figure A, special figure B, or special figure E is stopped and displayed, the electric support state (ordinary high probability) is maintained until the next big hit game is started after the subsequent big hit game is finished. State) is maintained, and when special figure C or special figure D is stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained while special figure variable game is performed 100 times after the end of the big hit game to be performed thereafter. Shifts to the non-electric support state (ordinary low probability state). On the other hand, when a big hit without special support (Special Figure F) is won, the game does not enter the electric support state after the big hit game ends. As will be described later, the special figure F is a symbol that is selected in the special figure 1 but not selected in the special figure 2.

  In this embodiment, two types of stop symbols are prepared as small hit symbols in addition to the big hit symbol. The special figure G shown in FIG. 163 (a) is the small hit symbol 1 and the special figure H is the small hit symbol 2. Any of the small winning symbols is a stop symbol mode in which the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount. Note that, as will be described later, the small hit symbol is a symbol that is selected in the special figure 1 but is not selected in the special figure 2.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, two types of stop symbols are prepared as lost symbols. Special figure I is a losing symbol 1, and special figure J is a losing symbol 2.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the big hit control state of the second advantage with a high player's advantage and the first advantage with a lower advantage than the second advantage. A non-hit control state is prepared, and the pachinko machine 100 takes one of the control states of the big hit control state (second control state) and the non-hit control state (first control state). The main control unit 300 also performs the transition of these control states, and the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a control state transition unit.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as the 15R special jackpot symbol, symbols other than the two types of symbols, “Special Figure A” and “Special Figure B”, are prepared. Symbols other than the two types of symbols “Fig. C” and “Special D” are also prepared, and a plurality of types of symbols are also prepared for the jackpot symbol of sudden probability change and the jackpot symbol of hidden probability change.

  FIG. 163 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a decorative pattern of a special figure. There are 10 types of decorative patterns of special drawings in the present embodiment: “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. When the reserved digest condition is satisfied, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b, and 208 c of the decoration symbol display device 208. “Decoration display change” is performed to switch the display in the order of “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the special symbol decorative symbols separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. And the stop symbol aspect (2nd symbol aspect) which is a combination of a decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. The variation display and stop display of the decorative symbol of the special figure are synchronized with the variation display and stop display of the symbol on the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214.

  When a 15R special jackpot ("Special Figure A" or "Special Figure B") or a 15R special jackpot ("Special Figure C" or "Special Figure D") is notified, the same decorative design is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of three decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1”, “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”, etc.) is stopped and displayed. The combination of these decorative symbols is a combination of decorative symbols with a jackpot fixed with probability change. Further, among these combinations of decorative symbols, combinations of decorative symbols in which three of the same odd number of decorative symbols are arranged (for example, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”). Is a combination of 15R special jackpot-decorated decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed only in the case of 15R special jackpot that is "Special Figure A" or "Special Figure B". Further, when notifying the hidden probability change ("Special Figure F") or the small hits ("Special Figure G", "Special Figure H") of the 2R big hits, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed with " A combination of decorative symbols such as “decoration 1 -decoration 2 -decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. Further, when a sudden probability change (“special drawing E”) in the 2R jackpot is notified, a combination of decorative symbols such as “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative symbols such as “decoration 1 -decoration 2 -decoration 3” and a combination of ornamental symbols such as “decoration 1 -decoration 3 -decoration 5” may be referred to as chance eyes. In addition, when notifying the special symbol I or the special symbol J, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c may be combined with a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols described above (for example, a variety of symbols). Eye) is stopped.

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of the “variable display of the decorative symbol of the special symbol” until the stop symbol mode (combination of decorative symbols) of the decorative symbol of the special symbol is stopped is displayed as the special symbol. It may be referred to as a variable display of decorative patterns for use. The variation display of the special-purpose decorative symbol is performed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400.

  The special symbols 1 and 2 shown in FIG. 130 (a) and the special symbol display area 208a-c on the left, middle and right of the decorative symbol display device 208 described above. The decorative pattern of the decorative pattern (see (c) of the figure) is larger in the decorative pattern of the special figure (see (c) of the figure).

  FIG. 163 (c) is a diagram showing an example of a general stop symbol pattern (first symbol pattern) that is stopped and displayed after the variable symbol display on the normal symbol display device 210. FIG. In the present embodiment, two types of winning symbols (“common figure A” and “common figure B”) and one type of off-line symbol (“common figure C”) are prepared as stop patterns of the normal figure. . “Common map A” is the winning symbol 1 and “Utsu figure B” is the winning symbol 2. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general display display device 210 illuminates all seven segments and the central one segment. Repeat the lighting and perform “variable display of ordinary figure” (ordinary figure fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, the usual stop symbol pattern shown in FIG. 163 (c) is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 163 (c), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the “variable display of the normal figure” to the stop display of the stop pattern of the normal figure may be referred to as a normal variable display. The universal symbol display device 210 corresponds to an example of an auxiliary symbol notification unit, a first symbol display unit, or a simple symbol display unit.

  In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 also displays a variation of the usual decorative symbol. FIG. 163 (d) is a diagram showing a stop symbol form of a usual decorative symbol. Although the decorative display of the normal symbol will be described in detail later, the stop symbol mode shown in FIG. 4D is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 after the variable symbol variable display of the general symbol is displayed. In other words, when the universal symbol display device 210 stops displaying the winning symbol 1 (“common symbol A”) shown in FIG. 10C, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “general symbol” shown in FIG. In the case where “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed, and the normal symbol display device 210 stops and displays the winning symbol 2 (“common symbol B”) shown in FIG. ) Is displayed in a stopped manner, and in both cases, the hit of the general map is notified. In addition, when the universal symbol display device 210 stops and displays the off symbol (“common symbol C”) shown in FIG. 10C, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the “general symbol decoration” shown in FIG. 3 ”is stopped and the usual deviation is notified. It should be noted that the normal symbol variation display in the general symbol display device 210 and the normal symbol variation display in the decorative symbol display device 208 may be synchronized or may not be synchronized.

  Next, the normal / bad determination in the present embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, left-handed in the non-electric support state and right-handed in the electric support state. When left-handed in the non-electric support state, whether or not the normal game is successful is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the general game start opening (gate) 228 provided in the left region. Further, when the player makes a right turn in the electric support state, whether or not the normal game is successful is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the general game start opening (gate) 228 provided in the right region. Even when the game ball passes through the normal start port 228 provided in the right area even though it is in the non-electric support state, it is left even though it is in the electric support state. Even if the game ball passes through the general start port 228 provided in the left area, the determination of whether or not the normal map is made is performed. However, if the usual-pending digestion condition is not satisfied, whether or not the usual-plot is successful is not performed. The requirement to establish the “Usu” hold-up condition here is when there is a hold of the “Usu”, the electric chew is not operating, and the “Utsu” variable game is not being played, and the “Usu map” is not displayed. This is a requirement that holds true. In addition, when there is no holding of the usual figure, when the electric chew is not operated, and the usual figure variable game is not being performed and the usual figure confirmation display is not being performed, the figure is opened through the start opening (gate) 228. This is a requirement that holds even when the ball passes.

  In the embodiment, the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a normal-use determination table.

  FIG. 164 (a) is a diagram showing a normal probability determination low probability table, and FIG. 164 (b) is a diagram showing a general probability determination high probability table.

  In this embodiment, when the usual random number acquisition condition is satisfied, one set of random number values (starting information) is stored in the ordinary figure storage unit provided in the RAM 308. The requirement for establishment of the common figure random number acquisition condition here is a requirement established based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the common figure start port (gate) 228. In other words, in a state where the number of ordinary holds is less than a predetermined upper limit, this is a requirement that is established when a game ball passes through the general opening 228, and in a state where the number of ordinary holds is a predetermined upper limit, This is a requirement that does not hold even if a game ball passes through the normal start port 228. In the present embodiment, the universal figure winning random number value and the universal figure determination random number value are stored as random number values (starting information) for one set in the universal figure storage unit.

  In the usual-time determination processing, the time reduction flag is referred to and the determination is made based on whether or not the current control state is the electric support state. If the time reduction flag is off (if it is in the non-electric support state), whether or not the normal time is correct is determined using the low probability table shown in FIG. 164 (a), and if the time reduction flag is on (electric support) If it is a state), the normal determination is performed using the high probability table shown in FIG. 164 (b). The determination of whether or not a common figure is made is performed based on a random number value for a common figure winning in the starting information extracted from the common figure holding storage unit of the RAM 308 (a possible range is 0 to 65535). The hit probability of the usual figure is 65532/65536 in the low probability table shown in FIG. 164 (a), and 655341/65536 in the high probability table shown in FIG. 164 (b). Although it is almost equivalent to the determination of whether or not to win, the probability of winning per normal figure is higher in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state. Here, deriving “winning” or “losing” is equivalent to the normal-win / no-go determination (lottery), and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the normal-win / no-win determination processing here is the first win / fail determination means. This corresponds to an example of (auxiliary success / failure determination means). In addition, the usual “hit” hit determination result corresponds to an example of a specific hit determination result.

  When the determination of whether or not the usual figure is completed is completed, the stop symbol form of the ordinary figure is determined. In addition, it is good also considering the determination of a common figure and the determination of the stop symbol aspect of a common figure together as the determination of a normal figure's success / failure (first success / failure determination).

  FIG. 164 (c) is a diagram showing a low probability table for usual figure determination, and FIG. 164 (d) is a diagram showing a high probability table for usual figure determination.

  Also in the common map determination process, the time stamp flag is referred to, and the general map determination is performed based on whether or not the current control state is the electric support state. If the time reduction flag is off (if it is in the non-electric support state), the general decision is made using the low probability table shown in FIG. 164 (c), and if the time reduction flag is on (in the electric support state) If there is any), the common figure is determined using the high probability table shown in FIG. 164 (d). In this common figure determination process, it is performed based on a common figure decision random number value (acquisable range is 0 to 99) in the start information extracted from the common figure holding storage unit of the RAM 308. In the low-probability state (non-electric support), 99% of the winning symbols are awarded to Symbol 1 (Normal Diagram A), and 1% of the probability is awarded to Symbol 2 (Normal Diagram B). . On the other hand, in the normal figure high probability state (electric support state), the symbol 2 per common figure (normal figure B) is won with a probability of 100%. Since there is only one type of lost symbol, the common symbol determination process based on the common symbol determination random number value may be omitted.

  The determination as to whether or not the usual figure is true may be derived from “winning” or “losing”. Alternatively, the determination as to whether or not a normal figure is acceptable may be derived up to a general symbol.

  The reference time determination table shown in FIG. 164 (c) and the common figure determination table shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the usual figure in the ordinary figure display device 210 is uniformly 1 second in the electric support state, and is uniformly 20 seconds in the non-electric support state. Therefore, the usual fluctuation time is a relatively short first fluctuation time in the electric support state, and a relatively long second fluctuation time in the electric support state. In addition, when the standard random number acquisition condition is established, the random number value for determining the standard variable period is acquired together with the standard random number value and the standard random number value, and the variable time of the standard figure is determined by lottery. Also good.

  Next, an opening / closing operation of the pair of blade members 2321 performed by the main control unit 300, that is, an opening / closing pattern of the electric chew will be described.

  FIG. 165 (a) is a diagram for explaining an open / close pattern of an electric chew in the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment.

  If the result of the usual figure determination is ordinary figure A, after the ordinary figure decoration 1 is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the electric Chu opens once for 0.3 seconds. Even in the pachinko machine of the second embodiment, the launch interval of the game balls by the launcher 110 is 0.6 seconds, and in the case of the hit pattern of the general figure A, one opening time of the pair of blade members 2321 is a game It is shorter than the launch interval of the spheres, and even if it is elected per the usual figure of Fig. A, it is virtually impossible to enter the electric Chu, and it is almost impossible to acquire the exit ball. Hereinafter, the winning of the usual figure A and the opening of the pair of blade members 232a may be referred to as electric Chu short opening. This electric chew short open (corresponding to the first open pattern) stochastically becomes an electric chew open pattern in the non-electric support state.

  When the result of the universal figure determination is normal figure B, after the universal figure decoration 2 is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the electric Chu first opens for 0.3 seconds, After a 0.5 second closure time, a 5 second release is performed. That is, the electric Chu performs a specific operation (opening / closing operation of the pair of blade members 232a) for 5.8 seconds. Hereinafter, the winning of the normal figure B and the opening of the pair of blade members 232a may be referred to as electric tulong opening. With this electric-chu-long opening (corresponding to the second opening pattern), it is expected that the player will enter the electric chew, and it can be highly expected that he will get out. In the electric Chu long opening, the blade member 2321 may be opened at least longer than the firing interval or longer than the normal fluctuation time in the electric support state, and the first 0.3 second opening is omitted. Then, only the second long opening may be performed. This electric-chu-long opening stochastically becomes an electric-chu opening pattern in the electric support state.

  If there is a predetermined number of balls before the predetermined opening time elapses, the electric chew is closed at that time.

  In the case where the universal figure determination result is the universal figure C, after the universal figure decoration 3 is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the electric chew does not open and maintains the closed state.

  Next, a first effect (hereinafter referred to as a normal drawing effect) performed on the sub-control unit side (second sub-control unit 500) will be described. The ordinary drawing effect in the present embodiment includes at least one effect of a changing effect, a finalizing effect, and an operating effect, or includes a predetermined area in the decorative symbol display device 208. It is sufficient that the effect is performed in the area. The changing effect is an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 during the normal symbol change display by the general symbol display device 210, and the finalizing effect determines the stop symbol pattern of the normal diagram by the general symbol display device 210. This is an effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during display, and the in-operation effect is an effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the operation of the electric chew. In addition, these effects are effects in which an effect related to the result of determination of whether or not a special figure (for example, a notice per universal figure) and an effect related to the result of whether or not a special figure is determined (for example, a special figure big hit notice) are added. There may be an effect related to the result of the determination of whether or not the special drawing is performed instead of the effect related to the result of the determination of whether or not the normal drawing is received. As will be described in detail later, the general drawing effect is executed in an area including a predetermined area provided between the area for displaying the hold icon of FIG. 1 and the area for displaying the hold icon of FIG. .

  FIG. 165 (b) is a diagram for explaining several examples of the usual drawing effect in the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the third embodiment.

  (A)-(f) are the change display patterns in a non-electric support state.

  (A) is a variation display pattern (the above-mentioned variation effect) of the usual decorative pattern. In the effect shown in (a), high-speed fluctuations are repeated in the order of general decoration 1, general decoration 2, and general decoration 3, and after 3 seconds, the decorative pattern of the general graphic representing the result of determining the general graphic is stopped and displayed.

  (A) is also a variation display pattern (the above-mentioned variation effect) of a normal decoration symbol. In the effect shown in (a), high-speed fluctuation is repeated in the order of general decoration 2, general decoration 2, and general decoration 3, and the decorative pattern of the general graphic representing the general graphic determination result is stopped and displayed after 15 seconds. In this effect, many ordinary decorations 2 are displayed during high-speed fluctuations, so that the degree of expectation for opening the electric tulong is improved.

  (C) is also a variation display pattern (the above-mentioned variation effect) of the usual decorative pattern. In the effect shown in (c), high-speed fluctuation in which the general decoration 2 is continuously displayed is repeated and stopped after 10 seconds. In this effect, since only the ordinary figure decoration 2 is displayed continuously, the stop display also becomes the ordinary figure decoration 2. Therefore, when this effect is started, the electric tulong release is confirmed.

  (D) is also a variation display pattern (the above-described variation effect) of the usual decorative pattern. In the production shown in this (d), repeated high-speed fluctuations in the order of Ordinary decoration 1, Ordinary decoration 2, Ordinary decoration 3, and "Gekiatsu", which represents the special jackpot notice, repeated 10 seconds later, One of the decorative symbols stops. Therefore, there is a case where the decoration pattern of “Gekiatsu” is stopped and displayed. In this case, the expectation of opening the electric tulong does not increase, but the expectation of the big hit of the special figure increases and the interest of the game is improved. . In other words, there is a case where not only electric chew opening but also big hit can be expected.

  (E) is also a variation display pattern (the above-described variation effect) of the usual decorative symbol. In the production shown in (e), high-speed fluctuations were repeated in the order of Ordinary decoration 2 and “Gatsu Atsu”, which represents the special jackpot notice, and after 10 seconds, either the Ordinary decoration 2 or “Geki Atsu” One of the decorative symbols is stopped. In this effect, half of the special figure jackpot notice is displayed during high-speed fluctuations, so there are cases in which not only the electric chew release but also the special figure jackpots can be expected from the high-speed fluctuation.

  In the variation display pattern shown in (f), a “latent” decorative symbol representing a 2R jackpot notice that is a latent probability change of a special figure, a “surprise” decorative pattern representing a 2R jackpot notice that is a sudden probability of a special figure, High-speed fluctuation is repeated in the order of the “big hit” decorative symbol representing the special 15R jackpot notice, and any decorative symbol is stopped and displayed after 5 seconds. When this effect is started, the opening of the variable prize opening 234 is confirmed.

  The variation display pattern described above may be such that the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in accordance with the end timing of the regular symbol variation display by the universal symbol display device 210. In particular, in the case of a normal figure, since the electric chew is released thereafter, the timing of the end of the symbol variation display by the general diagram display device 210 is matched with the timing of the production end of (a) to (e), It is preferable to notify the player of the opening of the electric chew. On the other hand, in particular, in the case of a deviation from the usual figure, it is not always necessary to make the timings coincide with each other. For example, the general symbol effect may be started before the start of the symbol variation display by the general symbol display device 210, or may be continued until after the symbol variation display by the general symbol display device 210 is completed. Furthermore, since the effect shown in (f) is an effect related to the result of determination of whether or not a special figure is appropriate, it may be performed during a period when the symbol variation display by the general figure display device 210 is not performed. In addition, the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed after the decorative symbol variation display may be a decorative symbol representing a fake general symbol determination result or a fake jackpot notice.

  (Ki) is an example of the effect during operation. In the effect during operation shown in (ki), after the symbol variation display by the universal symbol display device 210 in the non-electric support state, the decoration symbol in which the character of the frog is carrying a peace sign is displayed on the ornament symbol display device 208. The In the non-electric support state, in many cases, the winning of the electric chew short is won, but during the electric chew short opening, the operating effect shown in (ki) is suddenly executed for a moment. In addition, when electing to open the electric Chu long, the in-operation effects shown in (ki) are executed for 5.8 seconds during which the electric Chu opens and closes. The in-operation effects shown in (ki) may be executed only while the electric Chu is open for 5 seconds, or only while the electric Chu is initially open for 0.3 seconds ( An effect during operation shown in (g) may be executed. Hereinafter, an effect in which a decorative symbol in which the Tono-sama character is performing a peace sign is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be referred to as an electric chew release notification effect.

  The in-operation effects shown in (ki) may be executed immediately after the final display of the general map B by the general map display device 210 is completed (immediately before the electric chew operation).

  In addition, not only in the non-electric support state but also in the electric support state, even when the electric tulong release is won, the in-operation effects shown in (ki) may be executed. In this case, after the symbol variation display for 1 second is performed, in many cases, the electrified long open is won, and during the 5.8 seconds during which the electrified opens and closes, the in-motion effects shown in (ki) are executed. do it. In addition, when the winning of the electric chew short is won, it may be executed for a moment during the opening of the electric chew short for 0.3 seconds.

  In addition, the production time (first time) of the variable display pattern shown in (a) to (e) of FIG. 165 (b) is the production of the electric chew release notification production pattern shown in (ki) of FIG. 165 (b). Since it is a time longer than the time (second time) and the usual decorative symbol variation display effect is performed in a relatively long effect time, the expectation for the opening of the electric chew may be improved.

  (K) is an example of the effect of the jackpot notice of the special figure fluctuation. The effect shown in (K) is executed in an area including a predetermined area in the decorative symbol display device 208 regardless of the symbol variation display by the general symbol display device 210 or the electric chew operation. In other words, even when the symbol variation display by the general symbol display device 210 is not being performed or the electric chew is not being operated, it is executed during the symbol variation display by the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214. This is an effect of notifying that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display, and an effect of notifying that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display as if it is stopped ( So-called fake notice effects) are also included. Here, the “Hidden” decorative symbol that represents the 2R jackpot notice that is the special probability of the latent figure change, the “Random” decorative symbol that represents the 2R jackpot notice that is the sudden probability of the special figure, and the 15R jackpot notice of the special figure The high-speed variation is repeated in the order of the “big hit” decorative symbol and the “super hot” decorative symbol indicating the special symbol big hit notice, and one of the decorative symbols stops and displays after 8 seconds. Note that a decorative pattern of a picture may be used instead of the decorative pattern of a character.

  In addition, the electric chew release notification effect of (ki) shown in FIG. 165 (b) may be executed after the respective effects (a) to (f) and (ku) shown in FIG. 165 (b). That is, the electric chew release notification effect may be performed in combination with the variable display pattern. Furthermore, the electric chew release notification effect may not be executed when the electric chew short is opened, but may be executed when the electric chew long is opened. By doing so, only when the electric chew is open advantageous for the player, the electric chew release notification effect is performed, and it may be possible to increase the player's expectation. Further, when the general map A is displayed in a stopped state, the effects (decorative symbol variation display effects) shown in FIG. 165 (b) are not executed, and the electric chew is released. In the case where the general effect B is stopped and displayed, the notification effects are not executed, and the respective effects (decorative symbol variation display effects) shown in FIG. 165 (b) are executed. Later, an electric chew release notification effect may also be executed. By doing so, the decorative symbol variation display effect can be performed only when the electric chew is advantageously opened, and it may be possible to increase the player's expectation.

  Further, the ordinary drawing effect may be an effect of displaying the ordinary figure decorative symbol shown in FIG. 163 (d) as the finalizing effect without performing the fluctuation display of the ordinary decorative symbol (the above-described changing effect). In addition, the effect during the finalization may be performed, and in the case of the usual figure, the effect of performing the electric chew release notification effect may be used. In addition, even if it is per map, it may be an effect that performs an electric chew release notification effect only for the general map B where the electric chew long open is performed, or in the sense of performing a rare display in a very short time, It may be an effect of performing an electric chew release notification effect only for the usual figure A in which the electric chew short open is performed.

  Subsequently, a general drawing effect determination process executed by the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the flow of the ordinary drawing effect determination process.

  The first sub-control unit 400 is transmitted with a normal change start command from the main control unit 300. The general drawing effect determination process shown in FIG. 166 is started when the first sub control unit 400 receives this general figure change start command. The usual figure change start command includes information indicating the current control state (whether or not the electric support state is set) and a usual figure determination result. The first sub-control unit 400 also receives a general-purpose hold increase command from the main control unit 300. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the general-purpose hold increase command, the general-purpose effect determination process is started. It may be.

  First, it is determined whether or not the non-electric support is in effect based on the information indicating the current control state included in the general figure change start command (step S601). The determination process ends. If it is in the non-electric support state, it is determined whether or not the ordinary drawing effect is executed (step S602). In the determination here, for example, if the usual figure determination result included in the ordinary figure change start command is the ordinary figure B, the ordinary figure effect is executed. Further, even if the ordinary map determination result is the ordinary map C, it may be executed as a fake ordinary drawing effect. Further, a dedicated random number may be acquired, and a lottery for whether or not to perform a normal drawing effect may be performed. In particular, when the normal map determination result is the normal map C, the execution of the fake general map effect may be determined by a lottery process. Alternatively, if the special symbol variation start command is received and the special symbol variation is being executed, the regular symbol effect may be performed. In this case, it is preferable to execute a general drawing effect including a special jackpot notice effect. In addition, when the symbol variation of the special figure is being executed and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed due to the symbol variation, the jackpot notice effect of the special symbol may be executed as a general drawing effect, Even if the jackpot symbol is not stopped and displayed, the jackpot notice effect of a fake special symbol may be executed. In addition, the execution of the special bonus jackpot notice here may be executed when an effective / not effective lottery is performed and the lottery is won.

  If the ordinary drawing effect is not executed, the ordinary drawing effect determining process is ended. If the ordinary drawing effect is executed, it is determined whether or not it is during a predetermined period (step S603). In the present embodiment, during the special figure jackpot game (when the attacker opens / closes), or during the production where the expectation of the special figure jackpot is high (for example, during the super reach in the variation display of the special figure decoration symbol) Refrain from performing each of (a) to (e) and (c) shown in 165 (b). The predetermined period here is during a special hit game of a special figure and during a performance with a high expectation level of the special figure jackpot. If it is not during this predetermined period, an effect pattern is selected from all the effect patterns ((a) to (ku)) shown in FIG. 165 (b) (step S604), and the process proceeds to step S606. 165 (b) may be executed after the respective effects (a) to (e) shown in FIG. 165 (b), or (165) in FIG. 165 (b). Only the electric-chu release notification effect may be executed without executing any of the effects (a) to (e) shown in FIG. Further, if it is not during the predetermined period, an effect pattern may be selected from effects other than the electric chew release notification effect ((A) to (O) and (K) shown in FIG. 165 (b)).

  On the contrary, if it is during the predetermined period, an effect pattern of only the electric chew release notification effect shown in FIG. 165 (b) is selected (step S605), and the process proceeds to step S606. In this way, during the big hit game, the decorative symbol variation display effects of (a) to (e) and (ku) shown in FIG. There may be cases where it is only the presentation time of the notification effect and the player can be concentrated on the big hit game.

  In step S606, information representing the effect pattern selected in step S604 or step S605 is set in the ordinary drawing effect command and transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, and the ordinary drawing effect determining process ends. The second sub-control unit 500 that has received the ordinary drawing effect command controls the decorative symbol display device 208 based on information representing the effect pattern included in the ordinary drawing effect command, and sets a predetermined area in the decorative symbol display device 208. A general drawing effect is executed in the area that includes it.

  As described above, in this embodiment, if the current control state is the electric support state, the ordinary drawing effect is not executed by the determination in step S601. In addition, when the current control state is the electric support state, instead of not uniformly executing the ordinary drawing effect, perform a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the ordinary drawing effect with a predetermined probability. Also good. As described above, in this embodiment, the ordinary drawing effect is an effect that is more easily executed in the non-electric support state than in the electric support state. Since the non-electric support state is a state in which it is difficult for a game ball to win the electric chew, there is a case where it can be expected that the game ball wins the electric chew. On the other hand, since the electric support state is a state in which a game ball is likely to win the electric chew, there is a possibility that the player's expectation will not be improved so much even if the usual drawing effect is performed.

In the present embodiment, during a predetermined period such as during a big hit game, the changing effect and the confirmed effect are not uniformly performed according to the determination in step S603, and only the electric chew release notification effect is performed. In addition, during the predetermined period, instead of uniformly executing the changing production and the finalizing production, perform a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the changing production and the finalizing production with a predetermined probability. Also good. Further, during the predetermined period, the changing effect or the determined effect may not be performed, and the normal drawing effect may not be performed uniformly. Or, even if it is performed, it is possible to perform a lottery to determine whether or not to execute, and to execute only the electric chew release notification effect with a predetermined probability. That is, the first effect may be an effect that is easier to execute in the non-hit control state than in the big hit control state. Winning of a normal chart is also a factor that improves the chances of a special chart's success determination (big win lottery), so the player can be expected by performing the general drawing performance in a non-hit game There is. Also, in general, there are more attacker balls than electric chews. When the electric chew is placed on the upper or upstream side of the attacker, the opening of the electric chew during the big hit game will win the attacker. May be disturbed. For this reason, it may be possible to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player by making it difficult to perform the usual drawing effect during the big hit game.
Here, the determination of whether or not a special figure is appropriate will also be described.

  In the present embodiment, when the special figure starting information acquisition condition is satisfied, one set of random values (starting information) is stored in the special figure 1 storage unit or the special figure 2 storage unit provided in the RAM 308. The requirement for establishment of the special figure random number acquisition condition here is a requirement that is established based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first special figure starting port 230 for the special figure 1. That is, in the state where the number of holdings in FIG. 1 is less than the predetermined upper limit number, it is a requirement that is satisfied when a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of holdings in FIG. In a certain state, it is a requirement that does not hold even if a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230. The special figure 2 is a requirement established based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second special figure starting port 232 (electric Chu). That is, in the state where the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is less than the predetermined upper limit number, it is a requirement that is satisfied when a game ball enters the second special figure starting port 232, and the holding number in the special figure 2 is the predetermined upper limit number. In a certain state, it is a requirement that does not hold even if a game ball enters the second special figure starting port 232. In this embodiment, the special figure 1 winning random number value, the special figure 1 determined random value, and the special figure 1 variation time determining random value are stored as random number values (starting information) for one set in the special figure 1 storage unit. To do. Further, the special figure 2 winning random number value, the special figure 2 determined random value, and the special figure 2 variation time determining random value are stored as one set of random value (starting information) in the special figure 2 holding storage unit.

  FIG. 167 (a) is a diagram showing a high probability table for success / failure determination of special figure, and FIG. 167 (b) is a diagram showing a low probability table for success / failure determination of special figure. These tables are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  When the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 retrieves the start information from the holding storage unit of the RAM 308, the CPU 304 refers to the probability variation flag, and if the probability variation flag is on, the special diagram high probability state exists. 1 is based on which random number range in the winning probability determination high probability table shown in FIG. 167 (a) belongs to the winning random number value (both possible numerical range is 0 to 65535). Deriving "big hit" or "losing". On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is off, the special figure low-probability state is set, and therefore any special random number value in the special figure 2 winning random number value or the special figure 1 winning random number value in the high probability table for success / failure determination shown in FIG. Based on whether it belongs to the range, “big hit” or “losing” is derived as the special figure 2 win / fail judgment result.

  In this embodiment, the big hit probability is about 1/400 in the special figure low probability state, whereas it is about 1/40 in the special figure high probability state.

  In this embodiment, the small hit is not in the special figure 2 but only in the special figure 1. Accordingly, if the result of the determination of success / failure using the special figure 1 winning random number value is a loss, a small hit determination is performed.

  FIG. 167 (c) is a diagram showing a table for determining small hits stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  In the small hit determination only in the special figure 1, the special figure 1 winning random number value is used again to perform the small hit determination. In addition, like FIG. 1, you may provide a small hit in special figure 2. FIG.

  In this way, “big hit”, “small hit”, or “lack” is derived as the special figure 1 determination result. Further, “big hit” or “losing” is derived as the special figure 2 determination result.

  Next, the symbol of the special figure is determined based on the special figure determination result.

  FIG. 167 (d) is a diagram showing a special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. This special figure determination table includes a special symbol stop symbol pattern (see FIG. 163 (a) for each big hit (Special Figure A to Special Figure F), small hit (Special Figures G and H), and out (Special Figures I and J). ))) Is specified. Special figure 2 does not have a random number range corresponding to each of special figure F to special figure H. In special figure 2, the big hit is 15R special big hit (special figures A and B), 15R normal big hit. (Special figure C, D), suddenly a 2R big hit symbol (special figure E), which is a probable change, and no small hit.

  The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 1 random value or the special figure 2 random value out of one set of random values previously obtained from the special figure 1 reservation storage part or the special figure 2 reservation storage part of the RAM 308. A special figure is determined using a numerical value (a numerical range that can be taken together is 0 to 99).

  The winning probability of the 15R special jackpot (Special Figures A and B), which is the most advantageous for the game, is 70% in the case of Special Figure 2, whereas it is 30% in the case of Special Figure 1. 2 is a big hit which is more advantageous than that of FIG. Thus, in this embodiment, special figure 2 is more likely to generate a big hit that is more advantageous to the player than special figure 1.

  The determination of whether or not the special figure is true may be derived from “big hit”, “small hit”, or “lack”, or may be derived from “big hit” or “lack”. Alternatively, whether or not a special figure is appropriate may be derived up to a special figure symbol.

  Next, specific examples of effects in the present embodiment will be described. First, description will be made with reference to FIGS. 168 to 172. FIG. 168 is a diagram illustrating a 1/5 portion of a specific example of the effect in the present embodiment, FIG. 169 is a diagram illustrating 2/5 portion of the specific example of the effect in the present embodiment, and FIG. 170 is a diagram illustrating the present embodiment. FIG. 171 is a diagram showing a 4/5 portion of a specific example of the effect in the present embodiment, and FIG. 172 is a specific example of the effect in the present example. It is a figure showing 5/5 part, and is an example connected to FIG. 168-FIG. 172 by one.

  168 to 172 show the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. Also, below the decorative symbol display device 208, a general-purpose display device 210, a first special figure display device 212, and a second special figure display device 214 are shown. The common figure display device 210 is a seven-segment display device shown on the rightmost side, the second special figure display device 214 is a seven-segment display device shown on the leftmost side, and the first special figure display device 212 is 7-segment display device shown in the center. In these 7-segment display devices, only the horizontal segment at the center in the vertical direction is lit while the symbol is changing. In addition, the location of the segment where the black part is lit is shown.

  In addition, between FIGS. 168 (a) and (b), a state in which the game ball B is about to pass through the normal start port 228 is shown. Further, in FIGS. 168 (K) and (K), FIG. 169 (K) and (K), FIG. 170 (S) and (T), FIG. 171 (D), FIG. 172 (G) and (E), An electric Chu (second special figure starting port 232 and a pair of blade members 232a) is shown.

  Further, a special figure 1 hold display area 281 is prepared on the left side of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a special figure 2 hold display area 282 is prepared on the right side thereof. Further, a special drawing effect area 283 corresponding to an example of the predetermined area described above is provided between the special figure 1 hold display area 281 and the special figure 2 hold display area 282. That is, the general drawing effect area 283 is provided in the center portion of the effect display area 208d.

  Whether the special figure 1 hold display area 281 or the special figure 2 hold display area 282, the hold icon is displayed on the normal drawing effect area 283 side (center side) as the old hold icon. That is, in the special figure 1 hold, the first hold icon representing the first hold with the oldest winning timing is displayed on the left side of the ordinary drawing effect area 283, and in the special figure 2 hold, the first winning icon with the oldest winning timing is displayed. A second hold icon representing 2 hold is displayed on the right side of the ordinary drawing effect area 283. In the special figure 1 hold display area 281 shown in FIG. 168 (a), one special figure 1 hold icon (first special figure 1 hold icon) 2811 indicating that there is one special figure 1 hold is shown. Has been. The default mode of the special figure 1 hold icon is a black circle. The first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 is displayed on the left side of the general drawing effect area 283. In addition, in the special figure 2 hold display area 282 shown in FIG. 168 (K), there is one special figure 2 hold icon (first special figure 2 hold icon) 2821 indicating that there is one special figure 2 hold. It is shown. The default mode of the special figure 2 hold icon is a white circle different from the default mode of the special figure 1 hold icon so that it can be distinguished from the special figure 1 hold icon. The first special figure 2 hold icon 2821 is displayed on the right side of the general drawing effect area 283.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine of this embodiment is also a special figure 2 priority fluctuation machine.

  The state shown in FIG. 168 (a) is a non-electric support state, there is no special figure 2 hold, and there is one special figure hold, and the first special figure display device 212 displays a symbol variation display. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variable display shown in FIG. 1 is displayed. On the other hand, the symbol display device 210 does not perform symbol variation display, and the symbol of the usual symbol decoration 3 as the previous result is still displayed in the symbol effect area 283 of the ornament symbol display device 208. . When the general symbol display device 210 does not perform symbol variation display, no symbol may be displayed in the general symbol effect area 283.

  Here, since the player is in the non-electric support state, the player is left-handed, and eventually, one game ball B passes through the general game start port 228 provided in the left region, and the general game display device 210 Then, the symbol variation display is started.

  In the ordinary drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The usual decorative pattern variation display pattern here is the variation display pattern shown in FIG. Further, in this decorative symbol display device 208, a character C1 of a haniwa that imitates a cactus appears as an effect of a big hit notice of Special Figure 1. The character C1 is displayed larger than the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the foot portion hides a part of the normal drawing effect area 283 where the variable display is performed. As a result, it is difficult to visually recognize the fluctuation display of the usual decorative pattern, and the interest of the game is improved. However, the symbol variation display on the general-purpose display device 210 can be viewed well. In addition, you may hide all the usual drawing effect area | regions 283 by the character C1.

  In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 168 (c), the character C1 disappears, and the display of the decorative design shown in FIG. By the disappearance of the character C1, the symbol variation display in the normal drawing effect area 283 can be visually recognized well.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 168 (D), the decorative symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is developed into super reach, and the decorative symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is small in the left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. A housemaid character C2 appears as an effect of super reach. Super reach itself is a type of jackpot notice, and the super reach production also corresponds to the jackpot notice. The character C2 is also displayed larger than the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the foot portion hides a part of the normal drawing effect area 283 where the variable display is performed. As a result, it is difficult to visually recognize the fluctuation display of the usual decorative pattern, and the interest of the game is improved. However, the symbol variation display on the general-purpose display device 210 can be viewed well. Note that the general drawing effect area 283 may be entirely hidden by the character C2. Further, when the super reach is developed, the hold icon that has been displayed so far (here, the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811) disappears. Here, although part of the general drawing effect area 283 is hidden by the character C2, the variation display of the decorative pattern of the special figure 1 is not moved to the left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the A part may be hidden by the variable display of the decorative pattern of the special figure 1. The mode of hiding a part or all of the general drawing effect area 283 by the variation display of the special symbol decoration pattern is not limited to the super reach, and any timing may be used as long as the special diagram variation display is in progress.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 168 (e), a disappointing effect is performed in which the decorative symbol that stops in the middle symbol display area 208b is the ornament 7 in the state where the maiden character C2 appears. In 168 (f), the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 is finished, the stop symbol is displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 is a combination of the decorative symbols that are off. -Decoration 6 "is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, the symbol variation display in the general symbol display device 210 is also ended, and the non-electric support state is displayed, but the general symbol B is stopped and displayed in the general symbol effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208. The fluctuation display is ended, and the general decoration 2 corresponding to the general map B is stopped and displayed. As a result, the electric long opening is performed.

  In FIG. 168 (ki), the electric chew long open is started, and in the general drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the electric chew release notification effect (the character of Tono-sama is a piece is shown in FIG. 165 (b)). An effect in which a decorative design that is signed is displayed). In addition, the suspension of the remaining one special figure 1 is exhausted, the first special figure display device 212 starts the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variation display of the special symbol 1.

  In FIG. 168 (K), a game ball enters an electric chew that has been in an open state for 5 seconds, and the holding in FIG. 2 increases by one. Display of one special figure 2 hold icon 2821 (first special figure 2 hold icon 2821) indicating that there is one special figure 2 hold in the special figure 2 hold display area 282 of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is started. In addition, the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 is ended, the stop symbol is displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 displays “decoration 5 -decoration 3 -decoration 4” which is a combination of the decorative symbols that are not included. Stopped display.

  Next, the first hold of the special figure 2 represented by the first special figure 2 hold icon 2821 shown in FIG. 168 is digested, and the second special figure display device 214 starts the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, the variation display of the decorative pattern of the special figure 2 is started. Moreover, in the electric Chu, the opening for 5 seconds is continued, two game balls enter the electric Chu, and the holding of the special figure 2 increases by two. In the special figure 2 hold display area 282 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (K), a first special figure 2 hold icon 2821 and a second special figure 2 representing that there are two special figure 2 hold. A hold icon 2822 is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a princess character C3 appears as an effect of the big hit notice of the special figure 2. The character C3 is also displayed larger than the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the foot portion hides a part of the general symbol effect area 283 where the electric chew release notification effect is performed. . As a result, it is difficult to visually recognize the electric chew release notification effect in the usual decorative design, and the interest of the game is improved. In other words, the normal drawing effect (herein, the electric chew release notification effect) is difficult to visually recognize due to the predetermined effect (hit-hit notice effect) of the special figure 2 based on the entrance of the electric chew release. Players are more likely to perform during special symbol changes (during special symbol decoration changes) that occur when winning a prize while the electric chew is open rather than the electric chew release notification In some cases, the entertainment of the game may be improved by giving priority to the effect that the player is interested in and making the other (here, the electric-chu release notification effect) difficult to see. Also, as described with reference to FIG. 167 (d), in the special figure 2 variation shown here, the 15R special jackpot advantageous to the player is more likely to occur than the special figure 1 variation. Therefore, there are cases where the character C3 that gives notice of the occurrence of an advantageous jackpot can be conspicuous. Note that the general drawing effect area 283 may be entirely hidden by the character C3. On the other hand, in the general map display device 210, the general map B remains stopped and displayed, but the general map display device 210 can be seen well.

  In FIG. 169 (ko), the opening of the electric chew ends for 5 seconds, and the electric chew returns to the closed state. In addition, the electric chew release notification effect in the general symbol effect region 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 is also ended, and here, no symbol is displayed in the normal symbol effect region 283. Further, in the decorative design display device 208, the character C3 disappears, and the decorative design of FIG. Since the character C3 has disappeared, no symbols are displayed, but the normal drawing effect area 283 can be viewed well.

  In addition, between FIG. 168 (a)-FIG. 169 (co), the game ball | bowl passes through the usual figure start port 228, and the hold of the usual figure is accumulate | stored.

  In the general symbol display device 210 shown in FIG. 169 (s), the symbol variation display is started, but in the general symbol effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (s), no symbol is displayed. In addition, the usual display of decorative symbols is not executed. This is because, in the determination in step S602 shown in FIG. 166, the common figure determination result included in the common figure change start command is the general figure A, and therefore it is decided not to perform the general figure effect. . Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 2 is developed into super reach, and a female character C2 appears as an effect of super reach. This character C2 is also displayed larger than the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the foot part hides a part of the general drawing effect area 283, making it difficult to see the normal drawing effect area 283. And the fun of gaming is improved. No symbol is displayed in the general drawing effect area 283, but it is difficult for the player to know whether or not the variation display of the decorative symbol of the general symbol is being performed, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (si), a big hit announcement effect is performed in which the decorative symbol that stops in the middle symbol display area 208b is the ornament 7 in the state where the maiden character C2 appears. In FIG. 170 (s), the symbol variation display of the second special symbol display device 214 is finished, the special symbol A which is the 15R special jackpot symbol is displayed, and the special symbol A is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. “Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the above, is stopped and displayed. Also, the symbol variation display on the diagram display device 210 is ended and the diagram A is stopped and displayed. However, in the diagram representation area 283, the variation display of the diagram decoration is not performed and the diagram display is not performed. No symbol is displayed even if the symbol variation display in the apparatus 210 is completed. As a result of the general map display 210 being stopped and displayed as a result of the general map display A, an electric chew short circuit is released. However, there is no single ball during one open period of 0.3 seconds. There is no change in the number of holds.

  Eventually, 15R big hit game is started and the player switches from left-handed to right-handed. FIG. 170 (C) shows a state of the decoration symbol display device 208 of the 1Rth. In the central area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a big hit effect where a panda character appears is performed. In addition, during the big hit game, the hold icons (the first special figure 2 hold icon 2821 and the second special figure 2 hold icon 2822 here) that have been displayed so far disappear, and a predetermined area including the normal drawing effect area 283 (here) In the normal drawing effect area 283 and the special map 1 holding display area 281), an effect different from the normal drawing effect (first effect) is performed. In this example, the character “Now in a single villa” is displayed in the special figure 1 holding display area 281 and the face of the character in the single villa is displayed in the normal drawing effect area 283. Has been done. By doing so, the ordinary drawing effect area 283 can be used effectively. Further, even during the big hit game, as long as there is a holding of the usual figure (as long as there is an entry to the ordinary figure starting port 228), the symbol variation display on the ordinary figure display device 210 is performed. However, in the ordinary drawing effect area 283, the notification of the number of consecutive resorts is performed, and the variation display of the decorative symbol of the ordinary drawing is not performed (see step S603 shown in FIG. 166). In the universal symbol display device 210 shown in FIG. 170 (C), the symbol variation display is started. In addition, the effects different from the usual drawing effect performed in the lower area are the remaining round number notification effect, the current round (digestion round) number notification effect, the attacker winning ball number notification effect, the attacker open remaining time notification effect, and the attacker release elapsed time. It may be a notification effect, an effect of encouraging a winner in an attacker, or the like. Further, even during the big hit game, the hold icon may be displayed without erasing, and an effect different from the ordinary drawing effect (for example, the number of consecutive resort times notification effect) may be performed only in the ordinary drawing effect region 283. However, it may be performed only in the area adjacent to the normal drawing effect area 283 (for example, the hold display area). Further, even during a big hit game, when a win for the normal drawing effect execution lottery is won, etc., the normal drawing effect may be performed in the normal drawing effect area 283.

  FIG. 170 (G) shows a state of the 8R decoration symbol display device 208. Even in this decorative symbol display device 208, the effect during the big hit is continued and the notification of the number of consecutive resorts is also continued. In addition, in the common figure display device 210 shown in FIG. 170 (So), the symbol variation display performed so far is terminated, and the common figure B is stopped and displayed. As a result, the electric long opening is performed.

  In FIG. 170 (T), the electric-chu-long opening is started, and in the ordinary drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the electric-chu opening notification effect (Tono-sama) is used in place of the previously-described number of consecutive resorts notification effect. The effect of displaying the decorative design in which the character of the person is performing a peace sign is executed (see step S605 shown in FIG. 166). That is, in the ordinary drawing effect area 283, since the decorative display of the usual drawing has not been changed, the electric chew release notification effect is suddenly started. While the electric Chu long is released, four game balls enter the electric chew, and the holding of the special figure 2 increases by four. However, the hold icon is not displayed during the big hit game.

  170 (ta ′) is a diagram showing a modification of FIG. 170 (ta ′). In FIG. 170 (ta ′), the electric chew release notification effect is not performed in the normal drawing effect region 283, and the sound from the speaker 120 is displayed. An electric-chu opening notification effect is announced to notify that the electric-chu is open. In the ordinary drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 170 (Ta ') where the electric chew release notification effect has not been performed, the number of consecutive resorts notification effect is continued. Since there are more award balls in the attacker than in the electric chew, there may be a case where no positive electric chew release notification effect is required.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (h), it is informed that the end effect of the big hit game is performed, and that it is promoted to the probable change state after the big hit game ends. The symbol variation display is also started in the universal symbol display device 210 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 171 (tsu) shows a state of the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after the end of the big hit game. In the special figure 2 holding display area 282 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of holdings of the special figure 2 that has increased by entering the electric chew at the timing of FIG. First to fourth special figure 2 hold icons 2821 to 2824 are displayed.

  Above the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (T), a character display of “probably changing” indicating that the state is being changed is performed. In other words, an effect of informing game information is performed. Moreover, the electric support state continues until the next big hit. In FIG. 171 (t), the symbol variation display by the second special symbol display device 214 is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variation display of the decorative symbol of the special symbol 2. On the other hand, the universal figure display device 210 which has been performing the symbol variation display until now performs a stop display, and the universal figure display device 210 shown in FIG. Yes. The symbol change display of the usual figure stopped and displayed here is a symbol change display performed across the jackpot game, and is a symbol change display for notifying the result of the determination of whether or not the common figure is in the non-electric support state during the jackpot game. is there.

  Further, in the general drawing effect area 283, the normal drawing effect is not performed because it is in the electric support state (see step S601 shown in FIG. 166), and this normal drawing effect area 283 functions as a display area for the digestion suspension icon. Yes. In other words, the first special figure 2 hold icon 2821 representing the first hold of the special figure 2 started here is a special drawing effect area which is a separate area from the special figure 2 hold display area 282 together with the symbol variation display of the special figure. It moves to 283, and then disappears in the general drawing effect area 283 before the symbol variation ends. In addition, in the special figure 2 hold display area 282, the hold icon, which has been the second special figure 2 hold icon 2822 so far, is shifted to the first special figure 2 hold icon display position on the right side of the general drawing effect area 283. Similarly, the hold icons after the second special figure 128 hold icon 2823 are also shifted to the left by one. In addition, the time (second movement completion time) in which the digestion suspension icon, which has been the first special figure 2 suspension icon 2821 so far, moves to the normal drawing effect region 283 (second region) where the digestion suspension icon is displayed. ) Is an undigested pending icon (holding icon which has been the second to fourth special figure 2 holding icons 2822 to 2824 until now) left in the special figure 2 holding display area 282 (first area). This is different from the time required to move to another position in the hold display area 282 (first movement completion time). Also, in order to make the player hold a hold icon (digestion hold icon) corresponding to the change for a long time and to make a strong impression that one hold has been consumed, the second movement completion time is more suitable for the first movement completion time. Longer than one movement completion time is preferable. Further, the ordinary drawing effect area 283 is a common destination for the digestion suspension icon of FIG. 1 and the digestion suspension icon of FIG. 2. The destination of the icon and the destination of the digestion pending icon of FIG. 2 may be provided separately.

  In FIG. 171 (G), the symbol variation display of the second special symbol display device 214 is finished, the stop symbol is displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 is a combination of the decorative symbols that are out of place “decoration 4-decoration 5”. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, the general symbol display device 210 starts the normal symbol variation display. Note that the first special figure 2 hold icon 2821 (digestion hold icon) moved to the general drawing effect area 283 is disappeared, and in the electric support state, it is stochastically elected to open the electric long, so the normal figure display device Even if the symbol variation display is started in 210, the ordinary drawing effect is not performed (see step S601 shown in FIG. 166).

  Subsequently, the symbol variation display by the second special symbol display device 214 is started again, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variation display of the special symbol 2 again, and the decorative symbol shown in FIG. A princess character C3 appears on the display device 208 as an effect of the jackpot notice in FIG. The character C3 is also displayed larger than the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, the foot portion hides a part of the general drawing effect region 283, and the head portion is “probably changing”. Part of the character display (game information notification effect) is hidden. In the ordinary drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 171 (na), the digestion hold icon 2820 is different from the default display mode, and the display mode of the jackpot notice (including the false jackpot notice) in this change (here, the face of the panda) However, it is difficult to visually recognize the character C3, and the interest of the game is improved. It should be noted that the digestion pending icon 2820 changes the display mode during or after the movement to the normal drawing effect area 283. Further, the game information notification effect is also difficult to visually recognize by the character C3, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, the universal map display device 210 shown in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (d), the character C3 disappears, and the variation display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. Due to the disappearance of the character C3, the big hit notice by the digestion pending icon 2820 in the normal drawing effect area 283 can be visually recognized well. In FIG. 171 (d), the electric-chu-long opening has been started, but in the electric support state, since the electric-chu-long opening is stochastically selected, the electric-chu opening notification effect is not performed (FIG. Step 601 shown in 166). While this electric Chulong is released, a game ball enters the electric Chu, and the holding in FIG. 2 becomes full (four).

  In the general pattern display device 210 shown in FIG. 171 (nu), the symbol variation display is started, but no symbol is displayed in the universal diagram effect area 283, and the variation display of the decorative symbol of the regular diagram is not executed. is there. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 2 is developed into super reach, and a female character C2 appears as an effect of super reach. This character C2 is also displayed larger than the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the foot part hides a part of the general drawing effect area 283, making it difficult to see the normal drawing effect area 283. Yes. No symbol is displayed in the general drawing effect area 283, but it is difficult for the player to know whether or not the variation display of the decorative symbol of the general symbol is being performed, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (ne), a big hit announcement effect is performed in which the decorative symbol that stops in the middle symbol display area 208b is the ornament 6 in the state where the maiden character C2 appears. In FIG. 172 (No.), the symbol variation display of the second special symbol display device 214 is finished, the special symbol D which is the 15R normal jackpot symbol is displayed as a stop symbol, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the special symbol D. “Decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”, which is a combination of the ornamental patterns corresponding to, is stopped and displayed. 171 (ne) ends the symbol variation display and the symbol B is stopped and displayed, but in the symbol effect area 283, the variation of the ornamental symbol of the symbol is displayed. No symbol is displayed even when the symbol variation display on the general symbol display device 210 is completed. As a result of the stoppage display of the normal figure B on the normal figure display device 210, in FIG. 172 (no), the electric long is opened.

  Eventually, the 15R jackpot game is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (C), the end effect of the jackpot game is performed, and it is notified that the jackpot game is promoted to the electric support state (short-time state) after the jackpot game ends. ing. In the universal symbol display device 210 shown in FIG. 172 (c), symbol variation display is performed.

  FIG. 172 (G) shows a state of the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after the end of the big hit game. In addition, the general-purpose display device 210 that has been performing symbol variation display so far displays a stop display, and the general-purpose display device 210 shown in FIG. Yes. The symbol change display of the usual figure stopped here is also a symbol change display performed across the jackpot game, and a symbol change display that informs the result of the determination of whether or not the common figure is in the non-electric support state during the jackpot game. is there. The control state shown in FIG. 172 (e) is the electric support state, and the normal drawing effect is not performed even if the result of the normal / non-electric support result in the non-electric support state is notified. However, here it is also possible to perform a general drawing effect.

  Above the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (F), a character display of “short time” indicating the electric support state is performed. In other words, an effect of informing game information is performed. Further, in FIG. 172 (f), the symbol variation display by the second special symbol display device 214 is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has started the variation display of the decorative symbol of the special symbol 2. In addition, the symbol variation display is also started in the universal symbol display device 210 shown in FIG. Furthermore, when the 15R normal big hit is won, the electric support state is maintained until the special symbol change display is performed 100 times after the big hit game is finished. In the state shown in FIG. Since the variable display is started, the remaining number of times that the power support state is maintained is 99 times. In the general drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 172 (f), since the electronic support state is in effect, the general drawing effect is not performed even if the normal symbol variation display by the general map display device 210 is started. The remaining number of states is displayed. In other words, in the general game effect area 283 shown in FIG. 172 (f), an effect of notifying game information is performed. Since the opening of the electric chew can occur normally during the electric support state or the like, the interest of the game may be improved by displaying the remaining number of times of the electric support state instead of the ordinary drawing effect.

  In FIG. 172 (f), the symbol variation display of the second special symbol display device 214 is terminated, the stop symbol is displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 is “decoration 4—decoration 5”, which is a combination of disparate ornament symbols. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. Also, in the general diagram display device 210, the normal symbol variation display is ended and the general diagram B with the electric-chu-long open is stopped and displayed, but in the general diagram effect area 283, the symbol variation display in the general diagram display device 210 is displayed. No symbol is displayed even if is finished. As a result of the stoppage display of the general map B on the general map display device 210, in FIG. 172 (e), the electric tulong is released, and the hold of the special map 2 becomes full. In FIG. 172 (e), the symbol variation display by the second special figure display device 214 is started again, and the remaining number of times that the electric support state is maintained becomes 98 times. In the ordinary drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 172 (e), 98 numerals are displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (ma), a princess character C3 appears as an effect of the jackpot notice in FIG. The character C3 is also displayed larger than the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, the foot portion hides a part of the general drawing effect region 283, and the head portion is referred to as “short time”. Part of the character display (game information notification effect) is hidden. The game information notification effect (number of 98) displayed in the general game effect area 283 shown in FIG. 172 is also the game information notification effect (character display of “short time”) displayed above the decorative symbol display device 208. ) Is also difficult to visually recognize by the character C3, and the fun of the game is improved.

  Then, an example of the effect which mixed the prefetch effect in a present Example is demonstrated. FIG. 173 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect in which a prefetch effect is added in the present embodiment in a stepwise manner.

  The state shown in FIG. 173 (a) is a non-electric support state, there is no special figure 2 hold, and one special figure hold is left, and the first special figure display device 212 displays a symbol variation display. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variation of the decorative symbol of the special figure 1 and the special special figure 1 hold display area 281 shows the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 in the default display mode. Has been. In addition, the symbol display is performed on the general symbol display device 210, and in the general symbol effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable symbol display of the normal symbol is started.

  FIG. 173 (a) shows a state in which the game ball B has entered the first special figure starting port 230, and the special figure 1 hold display area 281 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (a). The second special figure 1 hold icon 2812 is additionally displayed in a pre-reading notice display mode different from the default display mode. That is, the display of the hold icon representing the second hold in FIG. 1 is started in the display mode of the old character. The pre-reading notice here is a notice that starts a notice regarding the result of the determination of whether or not the special graphic is received before the start of the symbol change for notifying the result of the determination of the appropriateness. In more detail, the start information is pre-read before the start of the symbol change of the special symbol, the result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol is determined in advance based on the start information, and the result of the determination on the success or failure based on the start information is notified. Before starting the symbol change, based on the previous determination result, it is foretold that the determination result based on the start information will be a big hit, or special figure A or special figure B, based on the start information Even if the determination result is out of place, or even if it becomes special figure I or special figure J, a notice (so-called fake) as if the determination result based on the start information becomes a big hit or special figure A or special figure B Including notice). In this case, the pre-reading notice is started from the start of displaying the hold icon (starting entrance timing), but the display is changed to the display form of the pre-reading notice after the display is once started in the default display form. Alternatively, the display mode may be changed to the display mode of the prefetching notice after the display is once started in a display mode different from the default display mode and the display mode of the prefetching notice. For example, the display state of the pre-reading notice may be changed at the timing at which the hold icon is shifted (the timing of the start of symbol change of the special symbol), or the display state of the pre-reading notice is changed when the chance button 136 is pressed. May be.

  In FIG. 173 (a), the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 is ended, the stop symbol is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is a combination of “decoration 5- “Decoration 3—Decoration 4” is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. 173 (c), the symbol variation display by the first special symbol display device 212 that digests the first hold is started, and the ornamental symbol display device 208 displays the ornament of the special symbol 1 The symbol variation display has started. On the other hand, in the general diagram display device 210 shown in FIG. 173 (c), the symbol variation display performed so far is terminated, the general diagram B is stopped and displayed, and the general diagram effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is also displayed. The change display of the decorative pattern of the ordinary figure is finished, and the ordinary figure decoration 2 corresponding to the ordinary figure B is stopped and displayed. As a result, the electric long opening is performed.

  In FIG. 173 (D), the electric chew long opening is started, and the electric figure opening notifying effect (the decorative symbol in which the character of Tono-sama is performing a peace sign is displayed in the universal drawing effect region 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208. Production) is being executed. In this electric chew release notification effect, Tono-sama's character is displayed larger than the ordinary drawing effect area 283, enters the special figure 1 hold display area 281 and displays the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 (in this case, a pre-reading notice display) A part of the mode hold icon) is hidden. As a result, the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 is difficult to visually recognize. In this way, when the player can be interested in the trend of the general drawing effect by intentionally hiding the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 whose display mode has been changed to the pre-reading notice mode with the normal drawing effect. There is. Further, the pre-reading notice is a future jackpot notice, and the player may be expected to open the electric chew by conspicuously presenting the current progressive drawing. Note that all of the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 may be hidden by the electric chew release notification effect. The Tono-sama character also enters the middle symbol display area 208b, and also hides a part of the decorative symbol of the special figure that is changing in the middle symbol display area 208b.

  FIG. 173 (A ') is a diagram showing a modification of the prefetch notice. In FIG. 173 (a), the pre-reading notice effect is performed using the display mode of the hold icon, but in FIG. 173 (a ′), the display of the effect image in which the characters of 爺 are arranged in a large V-shape. The pre-reading notice effect is performed by the character display “Pre-reading notice”. This pre-reading notice effect also enters the ordinary drawing effect region 283, but is partially hidden by the variation display of the decorative symbol of the ordinary drawing. On the other hand, the variation display of the usual decorative pattern may be hidden by the pre-reading notice effect.

  FIG. 173 (C ') is a diagram showing a modification of the mode of the general-purpose decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 173 (C '), the symbol of the stop-displayed general drawing decoration 2 is displayed larger than the general drawing effect area 283, enters the special figure 1 hold display area 281 and the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 ( Here, a part of the hold icon) in the display mode of the prefetch notice is hidden. As a result, the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 becomes difficult to visually recognize, and the interest of the game is improved. It should be noted that the first special figure 1 holding icon 2811 may be entirely hidden by the fluctuation display of the normal decoration pattern or the stop-displayed universal figure decoration symbol. In addition, the stop-displayed general symbol decoration 2 also enters the middle symbol display area 208b, and also hides a part of the special symbol decoration symbol that is changing in the middle symbol display area 208b.

  FIG. 173 (D ') is a diagram showing a modification of the electric chew release notification effect. In the electric chew release notification effect in FIG. 173 (D '), the Tono-sama character is displayed larger than the ordinary drawing effect area 283 and enters the special figure 1 hold display area 281. A part of the Ton-like character is displayed. Is hidden by the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 (here, the hold icon of the display mode of the pre-reading notice). The character of Tono-sama also enters the middle symbol display area 208b. However, a part of the character of Tono-sama is hidden by the special decorative pattern that is changing in the middle symbol display area 208b. As a result, it is difficult to visually recognize the electric Chu opening notification effect.

  Note that the pre-reading notice with the hold icon is a kind of continuous notice that is continuously performed over a plurality of symbol variation displays. In the special figure 2 priority variation machine, the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 2 may interrupt during execution of the continuous notice for the special figure 1, but the continuous notice is continued even in the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 2 that has been interrupted. . That is, the special figure 1 hold icon is displayed in the display form of the pre-reading notice, and even if the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 2 interrupts before the special figure 1 hold icon is put on hold, the graphic fluctuation display of the interrupted special figure 2 is being displayed. In addition, the special figure 1 hold icon continues to be displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. In the example shown in FIG. 173 (D '), the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 in the pre-reading notice display mode makes it difficult to visually recognize a part of the electric chew release notification effect. While maintaining the expectation, the look-ahead notice can be conspicuous and the expectation for the big hit may be able to be sustained.

  FIG. 174 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which jackpot notices are mixed in the ordinary drawing effect in the present embodiment.

  The state shown in FIG. 174 (a) is a non-electric support state, and “decoration 5—decoration 3—decoration 4”, which is a combination of outlier decoration symbols, is stopped and displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. On the other hand, the general symbol display device 210 performs symbol variation display, but the symbol of the general symbol decoration 3 that is the previous result remains displayed in the general symbol effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208. , Fluctuating display of ordinary decorative patterns is not performed.

  In the first special symbol display device 212 shown in FIG. 174 (a), symbol variation display is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, variation display of the decorative symbol of special symbol 1 is started. When the symbol variation display of the special figure is started, the variation display of the ordinary decoration pattern is also started in the ordinary drawing effect area 283. In other words, the general drawing effect (variable display of the decorative pattern of the ordinary figure) is started in accordance with the change of the special figure (variable display of the decorative pattern of the special figure).

  In FIG. 174 (c), the change display of the decorative pattern of the normal figure in the normal drawing effect area 283 is hidden by the character display effect of “Katsuatsu”, which is a kind of special jackpot notice effect. That is, the special bonus jackpot notice effect here is displayed over the lower area including the ordinary figure effect area 283, making it difficult to visually recognize the ordinary figure effect. The character display effect “Gekiatsu” here is a pre-reach notice, and may be an effect of notifying that the change display of the decorative pattern of the special drawing will be developed to reach. In this case, for example, the decorative display variation pattern of the usual figure is a high-speed display of the character “Gekiatsu”, which is a kind of special figure jackpot notice effect, as shown in FIG. It is a variation display pattern included in the variation. In the variation display of the usual decorative pattern, the character display “Gekiatsu” is displayed in the ordinary drawing effect area 283.

  FIG. 175 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which the usual display effect of the variable display pattern shown in (f) of FIG. 165 (b) is performed.

  The state shown in FIG. 175A is a non-electric support state, and “decoration 5—decoration 3—decoration 4”, which is a combination of out-of-constitution ornamental symbols, is stopped and displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. Also, the symbol change display is not performed in the general symbol display device 210, and the symbol of the general symbol decoration 3 as the previous result is still displayed in the general symbol effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208. is there.

  In the first special symbol display device 212 shown in FIG. 175 (a), the symbol variation display is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the decorative symbol of the special symbol 1 is started. Also, the symbol variation display is started in the general symbol display device 210 shown in FIG. 175 (a), and the variable symbol variation display of the normal symbol is started in the general symbol effect region 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the usual display effect of the variable display pattern shown in (f) of FIG. 165 (b) is performed.

  In the ordinary drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 175 (c), the character display of “latency” representing the 2R jackpot notice, which is a probability change of the special figure, is displayed beyond the ordinary drawing effect area 283.

  In the ordinary drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 175 (D), the character display of “surprise” representing the 2R jackpot notice that is a sudden change in the special figure is displayed beyond the ordinary drawing effect area 283.

  In the ordinary drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 175 (e), the character display of “big hit” representing the special figure 15R jackpot notice is made beyond the ordinary drawing effect area 283.

  In FIG. 175 (f), the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 is finished, the second small hit symbol (special symbol H) is displayed as a stop symbol, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a special symbol. “Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 3” corresponding to H is stopped and displayed. In the general symbol display device 210, the symbol variation display is continued. However, in the universal symbol effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the regular symbol decorative symbol is displayed before the special symbol variation display is finished. In the normal drawing effect area 283, the characters “Hidden” are stopped and displayed.

  In this example, the ordinary drawing effect functions as a special jackpot notice, but the ordinary drawing effect in this example is also an effect executed in the ordinary drawing effect region 283.

  Here, the special drawing effect that functions as a special figure jackpot notice enters the special figure 1 hold display area 281 and the special figure 2 hold display area 282. Therefore, if the first special figure hold icon whose display mode is changed to the pre-reading notice mode is displayed in the special figure 1 hold display area 281 or the special figure 2 hold display area 282, the first special figure hold icon is Some or all of them are hidden by the usual drawing effects. The jackpot notice (especially the special chart variable game currently being executed) is a notice that can be expected to hit the jackpot ahead of the prefetching notice (future special chart variable game jackpot notice). Since it is possible to perform the ordinary drawing effect including the pre-reading notice more conspicuously, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

It should be noted that the character display displayed in the normal drawing effect area 283 may be in a form that fits within the normal drawing effect area 283. In addition, the start timing of the variation display of the ordinary design is changed so that the end timing of the variation display of the ordinary design coincides with or slightly before the end timing of the special symbol variation display. You may delay from the design variation display start timing of the display device 210.
FIG. 176 is a diagram illustrating an example of other effects.

  FIGS. 176 (a) and (b) are examples in which the jackpot notice effect is performed by the effect using the effect movable body.

  The pachinko machine in this example is a pachinko machine having a production movable body 224 shown in FIG. In the ordinary drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts to display the special symbol decorative symbols in a variable manner. Then, after the start of the normal drawing effect, the big hit announcement effect for notifying that the change display is a big hit is performed by the effect movable body 224 provided beside the decorative symbol display device 208. The effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. 176 (a) includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor (not shown) that rotates the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. And a forearm motor (not shown) for rotating the forearm 224b at the position of the elbow. The effect movable body 224 is an accessory that can move at least the front side (player side) of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor. In FIG. 176 (a), the forearm portion 224b that has been rotated upwards covers the general drawing effect region 283 where the normal drawing effect is performed, and the general drawing effect region 283 is hidden by the forearm portion 224b. The visual effects are difficult to see. In addition, there are cases where the operation of the production movable body 224 can be emphasized, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, three special figure 2 hold icons 2821 to 2823 are displayed in the special figure 2 hold display area 282 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (a). These special figure 2 hold icons 2821 are displayed. Part or all of ˜2823 is also hidden by the forearm portion 224b, and the special figure 2 holding icons 2821 to 2823 are difficult to visually recognize. In addition, a large hitting notice effect using the effect movable body 224 and the effect image can be performed using the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the entertainment of the game is improved by the large scale effect.

  FIG. 176 (a) is a diagram showing a state continued from FIG. (A). From the front of the normal drawing effect area 283 where the forearm portion 224b is further rotated upward and the normal effect is performed. The forearm 224b disappears. However, instead, an effect image (here, three shooting stars images) related to the operation of the effect movable body 224 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the ordinary drawing effect region 283 is hidden by the effect image. Has become difficult to see. In addition, three special figure 2 hold icons 2821 to 2823 are also displayed in the special figure 2 hold display area 282 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (a). These special figure 2 hold icons 2821 are also displayed. Part or all of ˜2823 is also hidden by the forearm 224b or the effect image, and the special figure 2 reservation icons 2821 to 2823 are difficult to view. The effect image may be an image displayed before, during, or after the effect movable body 224 operates. Further, the effect movable body 224 is not necessarily exposed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In addition, after the big hit announcement is started by the production movable body 224, the normal drawing production is not executed until the big hit announcement is completed. That is, in this example, the predetermined period in step S603 shown in FIG. 166 corresponds to the execution of the big hit notification by the effect movable body 224. By doing so, it may be possible to draw attention by a big hit announcement by the effect movable body 224.

  Further, the effect movable body 224 may make it difficult to visually recognize the normal drawing effect only with the effect image without performing the operation to the front side (player side) of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  51 (a) is an example in which a jackpot notice effect is performed by an effect using a tutorial.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (a), the tutorial display is performed so as to overlap a part of the general drawing effect area 283 where the normal drawing effect is performed. In this tutorial display, a predetermined display (here, the character C1 of the jackpot notice in FIG. 168 shown in FIG. 168, etc.) is described. The ordinary drawing effect area 283 is hidden by the tutorial display image, and the ordinary drawing effect is difficult to visually recognize.

  FIG. 176 (I) is an example in which a plurality of effects hides the ordinary drawing effects and the hold icon. In this example, the plurality of effects are two effects, but may be three or more effects.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (I), the special symbol decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the normal symbol effect is displayed in the normal symbol effect region 283. The first special symbol 1 hold icon 2811 is displayed. It is displayed. In addition, on this decorative symbol display device 208, the character C1 (first special effect) of the jackpot notice of the special figure 1 and the other new character C4 (second special effect) shown in FIG. Has been. The other new character C4 may be, for example, a notice display indicating the advancement of reach, a one-announce notice display of 15R special big hit, a display prompting the user to press the chance button 136, or the like. In the example shown in FIG. 176 (I), these characters C1 and C4 hide a part of each of the ordinary drawing effect area 283, the hold icon, and the variation display of the decorative pattern of the special drawing. In addition, it is difficult to visually recognize the display mode of the hold icon and the decorative display of the special design.
Hereinafter, the third embodiment will be supplemented.

  An example in which it is difficult to visually recognize the symbol variation display (second symbol variation display) on the display device (for example, the ornament symbol display device 208) controlled by the sub-control means, that is, the ornament symbol variation display (for example, the general symbol effect). Is not only hidden by other effect display (for example, jackpot notice display, game information display, etc.), but includes other methods. For example, light may be emitted intensely around the decorative symbol display (more pronounced if it is a similar color), making it relatively difficult to see, or the decorative symbol variation display and other effect displays may be similar colors. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize even when there is no overlap. Also, the device for displaying the decorative symbol variation display and other effects may be separate. For example, the main liquid crystal and the auxiliary liquid crystal may be used.

  Further, in addition to the case where the display of variation of the decorative symbol is difficult to visually recognize due to another effect display, the other effect display may be difficult to visually recognize due to the variation display of the decorative symbol. For example, a part of the pre-reading notice may be hidden by the variation display of the general-purpose decorative symbol, and other effects with low reliability may be made difficult to view by the variable display of the general-purpose decorative symbol. If the expectation of the big hit is low, the player may be more interested in directing the opening of electric Chu.

  Moreover, the structure which changes for every condition whether it makes it difficult to visually recognize another effect or makes it difficult to visually recognize the change display of a decoration symbol may be sufficient. A configuration that prioritizes an effect that a player can expect and makes it difficult to visually recognize the other, or a configuration that prioritizes an effect from which a result is derived first and makes the other difficult to view. .

  Other effects include a jackpot notice, look-ahead notice, reach effect (reach fluctuation), suggestion of gaming state such as hiding, etc. . For example, the action of the accessory itself is not configured to make it difficult to visually recognize the decorative display of the decorative pattern due to the big hit notification by the action of the accessory, but it is difficult to visually recognize the variable display of the decorative pattern by the effect image that is generated at the same time. Also good.

  Moreover, the structure which becomes difficult to visually recognize at least one part of the electric-chu open | release alerting | reporting effect after the change display of a decoration symbol may be sufficient.

  Further, the decorative symbol variation display may be performed whenever the electric chew is long open in the non-electric support state, but may or may not be performed by performing a matter availability lottery.

  Another effect may be a configuration in which the decorative symbol variation display and the hold display (hold icon) are difficult to visually recognize at the same time.

  Moreover, the structure which performs the variable display of a decoration pattern at the time of electric Chu short open | release may be sufficient.

  Also, the decorative symbol variation display may not be performed during the electric support state, or the decorative symbol variation display may be performed during the electric support state.

  In addition, the decorative symbol change display is not only related to the result of the auxiliary success / failure determination (whether or not to determine the normal map), but also to other results such as the result of the determination of whether or not to assist (the determination of whether or not the special figure is accepted). It may be a variable display in which notices are mixed.

  In addition, the execution frequency of the decorative symbol variation display is compared with that in the electric support state and that in the non-electric support state, and the configuration is influenced by the launch strength (for example, right-handed and left-handed) due to game characteristics. May be.

  During the big hit game, it may be configured to display only the symbol variation display (first symbol variation display) on the display device (for example, the general symbol display device 210) controlled by the main control means. It is also possible to adopt a configuration that also displays the fluctuations of Further, during the big hit game, the decorative symbols may not be displayed in a variable manner, and only the electric chew release notification effect may be performed.

  Further, while the big hit game and the electric support state, which are advantageous, are right-handed, the left-hand hit may be left during the big hit game, and the combination is arbitrary.

  In the past, the explanation was given for the special figure 2 priority fluctuation machine. However, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are alternately won in the winning order fluctuation machine or in the non-electric support state, and the electric chew is in the electric support state. It may be a game machine that is open and allows only special figure 2 winning. In particular, if it is in electric support, it will have the same effect as the priority change machine. Moreover, a simultaneous variable machine may be sufficient.

  The so-called tutorial notice that performs the jackpot notice effect by the effect using the tutorial may make it difficult to visually recognize the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols, or vice versa. For example, highlight the tutorial notice that explains the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display (this makes it difficult to see the variable symbol display), and then stop the decorative symbol related to the description and It is also possible to explain.

  In addition, the pre-reading notice may make it difficult to visually recognize the variation display of the decorative symbol.

  Further, among the plurality of other effects described with reference to FIG. 176 (I), the first other effect may be configured to be hidden so that the player cannot see the decorative symbol variation display at all. Further, the first other effect may be configured to hide the first region of the decorative symbol variation display, and the second other effect may be configured to hide the second region. The decorative symbol variation display may display a plurality of characters, characters, etc. at the same time, and at least one of them may be hidden by other effects. Moreover, the structure which hides other effects may be sufficient.

  Moreover, the structure which performs several fluctuation display of a decoration symbol simultaneously may be sufficient.

As described above, in the example described so far, when one effect conceals the other effect, even if not particularly refused, the other effect may conceal one effect. . Further, when one effect conceals a part of the other effect, even if not specifically refused, one effect may conceal all of the other effect.
Further, the difficulty of visual recognition includes inability to visually recognize.

  Further, the other effects such as the ordinary drawing effect and the jackpot effect may be a sound effect, a light effect, or an effect as shown in FIGS. 176 (a) and (b). An effect by a movable body may be used. In the case of an effect by sound, sounds overlap and one effect conceals the other effect according to the volume and pitch, that is, it becomes difficult to view the other effect.

  In the above description, “a start region (for example, electric Chu) that can be changed at least between an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) and a difficult-to-enter state (for example, a closed state), For example, it is possible to execute at least a first success / failure determination unit (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of executing at least a normal / failure determination and a second determination / non-permission determination (for example, determination of whether or not a special figure is present) When the second success / failure determination means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) and the second success / failure determination result is the big success / failure determination result, the control state is changed from the non-hit control state to the big hit control state. Game control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) that can be transferred to at least, and effect display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) that can execute at least effect display. The start area is at least a state from the difficult entry state to the easy entry state when the result of the first success / failure determination is a specific success / failure determination result (for example, per ordinary figure). The first success / failure determination means is more likely to derive the specific success / failure determination result in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state. The first effect is an effect including at least an effect display relating to the result of the first success / failure determination (for example, a normal drawing effect), and the effect display means includes the It is possible to display at least a second effect related to the result of the second success / failure determination (for example, a jackpot notice effect), and the second effect is a part or all of the period during the execution of the first effect. , Little of the first production In both cases, it is an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize a part (for example, FIG. 168 (A), FIG. 169 (K), etc.), and the first effect is in the non-electric support state rather than the electric support state. Is a performance that is easy to be executed (for example, step S601 shown in FIG. 166). Was explained.

  Note that a winning means (or winning area) (for example, an attacker) capable of changing at least the state between an easy winning state and a difficult winning state is provided, and the winning means (or winning area) is configured to determine whether or not the second success / failure determination is made. When the result is a jackpot winning / failing determination result, the state may be changed at least from the difficult-to-win state to the easy-to-win state.

  The jackpot control state may be a state in which the winning area is at least changeable from the difficult winning state to the easy winning state.

  Moreover, the aspect provided with the approach area (For example, a 1st approach area, in other words, a fixed entrance area, for example, a normal gate etc.) which cannot change a state may be sufficient.

  Moreover, the aspect provided with the 1st symbol display means (for example, the general symbol display apparatus 210) which can perform the 1st symbol fluctuation | variation display at least may be sufficient. The first symbol display means may be capable of displaying at least a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the first success / failure determination after performing the first symbol variation display. The first symbol display means may be one in which operation is suspended when the first holding condition is established, and the requirement for establishment of the first holding condition is that a game ball is placed in the entry area. It may be a requirement including that the has entered. More specifically, the establishment requirement of the first holding condition may be a requirement including at least that a game ball has entered the entry area.

  Moreover, the aspect provided with the 2nd symbol display means (for example, 2nd special figure display apparatus 214) which can perform at least 2nd symbol fluctuation | variation display may be sufficient. The second symbol display means may be capable of displaying at least a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the second success / failure determination after performing the second symbol variation display. Further, the second symbol display means may be one in which the operation is suspended when the second holding condition is established, and the requirement for establishment of the second holding condition is the start region (for example, The requirement may include that a game ball has entered the second entry area, in other words, an electric tulip that is a variable entry area. More specifically, the establishment requirement of the second holding condition may be a requirement including at least that a game ball has entered the start area.

  The aspect provided with the effect display means (for example, sub-control means 400,500) which can control the said effect display means at least may be sufficient.

  The first effect may be an effect including at least a change effect and an opening effect,

  The variation effect is an effect executed during the period in which the first symbol variation display is performed,

  The opening effect is an effect that is executed after a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the first success / failure determination of a specific (for example, hit) is displayed, for example, a period in which the start area is in the easy entry state. It may be an effect that is executed during the included period.

  Further, the first effect may include a stop display effect that is executed during a period in which a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the specific first determination of success / failure is displayed.

  The second effect may be a jackpot notice effect or a prefetch notice effect.

  In addition, “the effect display means is an image display means, and the image display means is capable of displaying at least the first effect in a predetermined display area (for example, the general drawing effect area 283), The image display means can display at least a third effect in a period including at least a part of the non-execution period of the first effect, and the third effect is also the first effect. It is an effect different from the second effect (for example, a game information notification effect that displays the remaining number of times of the electric support state), and the second effect is a part or all of the period during the execution of the third effect. A game table characterized in that it is an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the third effect (for example, FIG. 172 (ma)). ”Was also explained.

  Note that the third effect may be a hold icon, or a display of the number of time savings or the number of consecutive resorts.

  Further, “the third effect is an effect including at least one of a jackpot notice display (for example, an appearance effect of the characters C1 to C3) and a game information display (for example, a character display“ probably changing ”). A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  The jackpot notice display here may be a display for notifying that the winning area is changed to the easy winning state, and includes a false display. The jackpot notice display may be a jackpot notice display that is displayed after the second determination is made, that is, after the second symbol variation display is started. It may be a pre-reading notice display in which the display is started before the determination of whether or not is made, that is, before the second symbol variation display is started.

  In addition, the game information display here is a display indicating the number of time reductions (the number of remaining times of the second symbol variation display or the number of digested times in the electric support state) or a display indicating the number of consecutive games (the number of executions of the big hit game) It may be.

  Further, “the image display means is capable of executing at least the jackpot notice display during the non-execution period of the first effect in the non-electric support state (for example, FIG. 169 (support)). The image display means can execute at least the game information display during the non-execution period of the first effect in the power support state (for example, FIG. 171 (Te), etc.) ), A game table characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  “The first effect is an effect of one kind of effect pattern selected from a plurality of kinds of effect patterns (for example, a plurality of patterns shown in FIG. 165 (b)), and the plurality of kinds of effects. One type of effect pattern of the patterns includes at least an image (for example, a general-purpose decorative pattern) related to the result of the first determination of success / failure, and an image of the jackpot notice display (for example, a decorative image called “Gekiatsu”). A game table characterized by a variation display effect pattern (for example, a variation display pattern shown in (e) of FIG. 165 (b)) that sequentially displays a plurality of images. ”Was also explained.

  Further, in the above description, “a start region (for example, electric Chu) that can change at least between an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) and a difficult-to-enter state (for example, a closed state); First determination unit (e.g., CPU 304 of main control unit 300) capable of executing at least determination (e.g., determination of success / failure of normal map) and at least execution of second determination (e.g., determination of success / failure of special figure). When the possible second success / failure determination means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) and the result of the second success / failure determination is the big success / failure determination result, the control state is changed from the non-big hit control state to the big hit Game control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of at least shifting to the control state, effect display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least performing effect display, The starting area is configured to change from the difficult entry state to the easy entry state when the first success / failure determination result is a specific success / failure determination result (for example, per common figure). At least the state change is possible, the effect display means can display at least the first effect, and the first effect includes at least an effect display relating to the result of the first success / failure determination. (For example, ordinary drawing effect), and the effect display means can display at least a second effect (for example, a jackpot notice effect) related to the result of the second success / failure determination, and the second effect. Is an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect during part or all of the execution of the first effect (for example, FIG. 168 (A) and FIG. 169). (K) etc.) Effect of the big hit are demonstrations likely to be performed toward the non-jackpot controlled state than the control state (e.g., step S603 shown in FIG. 166), the amusement machine, characterized in that. Was explained.

  “The first effect is an effect of one type of effect pattern selected from a plurality of types of effect patterns (a plurality of patterns shown in FIG. 165 (b)). Of these, the first effect pattern is an effect pattern that is more easily executed in the non-hit control state than in the jackpot control state (for example, an effect pattern other than the electric chew release notification effect: a variable display effect) (see FIG. 166). Step S604, step S605), and a game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  In addition, “the first effect pattern is an effect pattern (for example, a variable display pattern shown in (a) of FIG. 165 (b)) performed over a first time, and among the plurality of types of effect patterns, The second effect pattern (for example, the electric chew release notification effect pattern shown in (ki) of FIG. 165 (b)) is an effect pattern performed over the second time, and the first time (for example, 15 (Second) is a time longer than the second time (for example, 5.8 seconds). ”Was also explained.

  Further, “the starting region is an electric tulip, and the electric tulip includes at least a first opening pattern (for example, an electric chew short opening pattern) and a second opening pattern (for example, an electric tulong opening pattern). The opening pattern is a single opening pattern, and the second opening pattern is an opening pattern that is more advantageous to the player than the first opening pattern. The game table is capable of displaying at least the first effect when the electric tulip opens in the second opening pattern. ”Was also explained.

  The open pattern advantageous to the player here is an open pattern in which a game ball can easily enter the electric tulip, in other words, an open pattern in which a large number of outgoing balls can be obtained. For example, the open time is long. When the number of times of opening is large or the number of times of opening is plural, the opening pattern is such that the total opening time is long or the opening time of one time is long.

  Further, “the effect display means is capable of displaying at least the first effect in the second effect pattern during the jackpot control state (step S605 shown in FIG. 166). Amusement stand. ”Was also explained.

  Further, in the above description, “a start region (for example, electric Chu) that can change at least between an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) and a difficult-to-enter state (for example, a closed state); First determination unit (e.g., CPU 304 of main control unit 300) capable of executing at least determination (e.g., determination of success / failure of normal map) and at least execution of second determination (e.g., determination of success / failure of special figure). When the possible second success / failure determination means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) and the result of the second success / failure determination is the big success / failure determination result, the control state is changed from the non-big hit control state to the big hit Game control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of at least shifting to the control state, effect display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least performing effect display, The starting area is configured to change from the difficult entry state to the easy entry state when the first success / failure determination result is a specific success / failure determination result (for example, per common figure). At least the state change is possible, the effect display means can display at least the first effect, and the first effect includes at least an effect display relating to the result of the first success / failure determination. (For example, ordinary drawing effect), and the effect display means is capable of displaying at least a pre-reading notice effect relating to the result of the second success / failure determination, and the first effect is being executed in the prefetching notice effect. A game table characterized in that it is an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the pre-reading notice effect during a part or all of the period (for example, FIG. 173 (D)). Was explained.

  “The first effect is an effect of one type of effect pattern selected from a plurality of types of effect patterns (a plurality of patterns shown in FIG. 165 (b)). One type of effect pattern includes a plurality of images including at least an image related to the result of the first success / failure determination (for example, a general-purpose decorative pattern) and a jackpot notice display image (for example, a decorative image called “Gekiatsu”). A game machine characterized by a variation display effect pattern for sequentially displaying images (for example, a variation display pattern shown in (e) of FIG. 165 (b)). ”Was also explained.

  The one kind of effect pattern mentioned here may be the first effect pattern.

  Further, “a symbol display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 214) capable of displaying at least a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the second determination of success / failure after the symbol variation display is performed, and the symbol display means At least controllable symbol display control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300), and the symbol display control means holds the operation of the symbol display means when the holding condition is established. The effect display means is an image display means, and the image display means displays the first effect in a predetermined display area (for example, the normal drawing effect area 283). The image display means can display at least one hold icon (for example, the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811) for one hold. The image display means can display the hold icon at least in a hold display area (for example, special figure 1 hold display area 281), and the pre-reading notice effect is a display of the hold icon. It is an effect (for example, the example shown in FIG. 173) that displays the hold icon by changing the aspect, and the first effect is an effect of one type of effect pattern selected from a plurality of types of effect patterns. There is one kind of effect pattern of the plurality of kinds of effect patterns, wherein the effect image (for example, the effect image in which the character of Tono-sama is performing a peace sign) exceeds the predetermined display area and the hold display area A part or all of the on-hold icon displayed in the on-hold display area can be made difficult to see by part or all of the effect image. Pattern (e.g., FIG. 173 (pattern of electrically movable open notification effect shown in d)) is, the amusement machine, characterized in that. ”Was also explained.

  The one type of effect pattern mentioned here may be the second effect pattern or the first effect pattern.

  Further, here, the hold icon is limited, but the pre-reading notice effect may be an effect that does not use the hold icon. In this case, the image display means is configured to display the image in the second predetermined display area. The pre-reading notice effect may be displayed at least.

  In addition, “at least a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the second determination of success / failure is displayed after a different start region different from the start region (for example, the first special figure start port 230) and the symbol variation display. Possible symbol display means, and as one of the symbol display means, a first symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 212) and one of the symbol display means As two symbol display means, a second symbol display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 214) and a symbol display control means capable of controlling at least the first symbol display means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300). ), And the separate starting area is one in which the ease of entry of a game ball does not change, and the symbol display control means can at least control the second symbol display means, The symbol display The control means is capable of executing at least control of a first hold (for example, hold of special figure 1) for holding the operation of the first symbol display means when the first hold condition is established. And the symbol display control means controls the second holding (for example, holding of the special figure 2) for holding the operation of the second symbol display means when the second holding condition is established. Can be executed at least, and the establishment requirement of the first hold condition is a requirement including at least that the game ball has entered the separate starting area, and the establishment requirement of the second hold condition is a game A requirement that includes at least that the ball has entered the start-up area, and the symbol display control means starts the operation of the first symbol display means when the first holding digest condition is established. Is at least feasible and before The symbol display control means can execute at least control for starting the operation of the second symbol display means when the second reserved digest condition is established, The establishment requirement is a requirement at least including that the operation of the second symbol display means is suspended, and the establishment requirement of the first suspension digestion condition is that the operation of the second symbol display means is suspended. The requirement for establishing the first suspension digestion condition is a requirement that includes at least that the operation of the first symbol display means is suspended, and the effect display means includes: Image display means, and the image display means displays one first hold icon (for example, special figure 1 hold icon 2811) for a first hold display area (for example, a special hold display area (for example, special display area)). Figure 1 hold At least in the display area 281), and the image display means displays one second hold icon (for example, the special figure 2 hold icon 2821) for the second hold. Can be displayed at least in the hold display area (for example, special figure 2 hold display area 282), and the image display means can display the first display area in the predetermined display area (for example, general drawing effect area 283). An effect can be displayed at least, and the predetermined display area is an area located between the first reserved display area and the second reserved display area, and the first effect has a plurality of types. One type of production pattern selected from among the plurality of types of production patterns is a production image (for example, the character of Tono-sama Effect image) enters the reserved display area of at least one of the first reserved display area and the second reserved display area beyond the predetermined display area. It is an effect pattern (for example, an electric chew release notification effect pattern shown in FIG. 173 (d)) that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the display area, and the prefetch notice effect is the first hold This is an effect of changing the display mode of the icon to display the first hold icon (for example, the example shown in FIG. 173), and the prefetching notice effect is changed by changing the display mode of the second hold icon. This is an effect of displaying the second hold icon, and either the hold icon of the first hold icon or the second hold icon becomes difficult to visually recognize due to the effect image (for example, , The pattern of electrically movable open notification effect shown in FIG. 173 (d)), the amusement machine, characterized in that. ”Was also explained.

  The game stand here is a so-called special figure 2 priority change machine.

  Further, the one kind of effect pattern referred to here may be the second effect pattern or the first effect pattern.

  Further, the predetermined display area referred to here may be an area sandwiched between the first hold display area and the second hold display area, or both hold display as viewed from the predetermined display area. The region may be a region provided at a position shifted from each other. The first reserved display area and the second reserved display area may be provided with an interval, and the predetermined display area may be provided at the interval.

  Further, “the effect display means is capable of displaying at least a third effect, and the third effect is an effect different from the first effect and the pre-reading notice effect (for example, for the change) The third effect is an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect during a part or all of the period during the execution of the first effect. A game table characterized by being (for example, FIG. 168 (A), FIG. 169 (K), etc.). ”Was also explained.

  The third effect here may be an effect related to the result of the second success / failure determination (for example, a jackpot notice effect), or an effect that represents game information (for example, the number of short hours, the number of consecutive resorts, etc.). There may be.

  Further, in the above description, “a start region (for example, electric Chu) that can change at least between an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) and a difficult-to-enter state (for example, a closed state); First determination unit (e.g., CPU 304 of main control unit 300) capable of executing at least determination (e.g., determination of success / failure of normal map) and at least execution of second determination (e.g., determination of success / failure of special figure). When the possible second success / failure determination means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) and the result of the second success / failure determination is the big success / failure determination result, the control state is changed from the non-big hit control state to the big hit Game control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of at least shifting to the control state, and effect means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect movable body 2) capable of executing at least effects. 4), wherein the starting area is at least in a state where the entry difficulty state is changed to the entry easy state when the first success / failure determination result is a specific success / failure determination result. The effect display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) of the effect means is capable of at least effect display, and the effect movable means (for example, the effect means, for example) The effect movable body 224) can execute at least the effect operation, the effect display means can display at least the first effect, and the first effect is determined by the first success / failure determination. The effect movable means includes at least an effect display relating to the result of the second effect (for example, ordinary drawing effect), and the effect moving means performs the effect operation of the second effect relating to the result of the second success / failure determination (for example, FIG. And (a)) can be executed at least, and the effect display means can display related effects related to the effect operation of the second effect in the effect moving means (for example, the effect shown in FIG. 176 (A)). Display of the image) is at least executable, and at least one of the effect operation of the second effect and the related effect display is part or all of the period during the execution of the first effect, A gaming machine characterized in that at least a part of the first performance can be made difficult to visually recognize (for example, FIGS. 176 (a) and (b)). Was explained.

  That is, the effect means is a part or all of the first effect being executed by at least one of the effect operation of the second effect by the effect moving means and the related effect display by the effect display means. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect during the period.

  The related effect display may be an effect image display.

  In addition, “the effect unit starts the first effect by the effect display unit first, and during the execution of the first effect, the effect operation of the second effect by the effect moving unit and the It is possible to make at least a part of the first effect difficult to view by at least one of the related effect displays by the effect display means, and the effect means first the second effect. The game is characterized in that the first effect is not performed by the effect display means during the execution of the second effect (for example, FIG. 176 (A) and (I)). Stand. ”Was also explained.

  That is, the first effect is started first, and during the execution of the first effect, at least one of the effect operation of the second effect and the related effect display is the first effect. It is possible to make at least part of the view difficult,

  The second effect is started first, and the first effect is not performed during execution of the second effect.

  Further, “a symbol display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 214) capable of displaying at least a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the second determination of success / failure after the symbol variation display is performed, and the symbol display means At least controllable symbol display control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300), and the symbol display control means holds the operation of the symbol display means when the holding condition is established. (For example, hold of special figure 2) can be executed at least, and the effect display means is image display means, and the image display means has one hold icon ( For example, the special figure 2 hold icon 2821) can be displayed at least, and the image display means displays the hold icon in a hold display area (for example, the special figure 2 hold display area 282). And at least one of the second effect production operation and the related production display can make at least a part of the reserved display area difficult to view ( For example, FIG. 176 (A) and (A)), a game table characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  Further, “a control state transition means (for example, that can shift the control state from a non-hit control state to a big hit control state when the result of the second success / failure determination is a specific second success / failure determination result (for example, CPU 304) of the main control unit 300, the jackpot control state is a state in which the winning area is at least changeable state from the difficult entry state to the easy entry state, the first effect is the jackpot control A gaming machine characterized in that the non-hit control state is more easily executed than the state (for example, step S603 shown in FIG. 166). ”Was also explained.

  Further, “the first success / failure determination means is that the electric support state is easier to derive the specific determination result than the non-electric support state, and the first effect is more than the electric support state. The game stand is characterized in that the non-electric support state is more easily performed (for example, step S601 shown in FIG. 166). ”Was also explained.

  That is, the electric support state may be a state in which a game ball easily enters the start area, and the non-electric support state may be a state in which the game ball does not easily enter the start area.

  Further, in the above description, “a start region (for example, electric Chu) that can change at least between an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) and a difficult-to-enter state (for example, a closed state); First determination unit (e.g., CPU 304 of main control unit 300) capable of executing at least determination (e.g., determination of success / failure of normal map) and at least execution of second determination (e.g., determination of success / failure of special figure). When the possible second success / failure determination means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) and the result of the second success / failure determination is the big success / failure determination result, the control state is changed from the non-big hit control state to the big hit After at least a game control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of shifting to the control state and a symbol variation display, at least a stop symbol corresponding to the second determination result is displayed. A game machine comprising possible symbol display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 214) and effect display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least effect display. The region is a region where at least a specific action can be performed when the result of the first success / failure determination is a specific success / failure determination result. An operation including an operation for changing the state to an easy state (for example, an opening / closing operation of a pair of blade members, more specifically, an electric-chu short opening operation or an electric-chu long opening operation), The first effect can be displayed at least, and the first effect is an effect including at least an effect that is performed while the start area is executing the specific operation (for example, ( The effect display means is capable of displaying at least a second effect, and the second effect is an effect display performed during execution of the symbol variation display. (For example, display of characters C1 to C3), and the second effect is a part or all of the period during execution of the first effect, and at least a part of the first effect. A game stand characterized by an effect that can be made difficult to view (for example, FIG. 169). Was explained.

  Here, the specific operation may be an operation of alternately repeating the difficult entry state and the easy entry state one or more times. Therefore, the second effect may be an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect when the start area is in the easy-to-enter state. May be an effect capable of making it difficult to see at least a part of the first effect before the state is changed from the difficult-to-enter state to the easy-to-enter state, and the starting area is in the easy-to-enter state. It may be an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect after the state is changed to the entry difficult state.

  In addition, after performing the first symbol variation display (for example, the normal symbol variation display), the first symbol display means (for example, the regular symbol) capable of displaying at least the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the first success / failure determination. The display device 210) includes the effects displayed during the first symbol variation display (for example, (a) to (f) in FIG. 165 (b)) as the first effects. The effect display means can display at least the effect (for example, confirmed) as the first effect during the display of the stopped symbol by the first symbol display means. Medium effect) can be displayed at least, and the effect display means displays, as the first effect, at least an effect (for example, an effect during operation) performed while the start area is executing the specific operation. Even if possible There.

  That is, the first effect may be an effect including at least one effect among the effect during change, the effect during determination, and the effect during operation.

  In addition, as another symbol display means (for example, a first special symbol start port 230) different from the start region and one of the symbol display means, a first symbol display means (for example, a first symbol display means) 1 special symbol display device 212), and as one of the symbol display means, second symbol display means (for example, second special symbol display device 214) and first symbol display means. At least controllable symbol display control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300), and the separate start area does not change the ease of entry of a game ball, and the symbol display control means includes: The second symbol display means is at least controllable, and the symbol display control means holds the operation of the first symbol display means when the first holding condition is established. At least one hold control The symbol display control means can execute at least a second holding control for holding the operation of the second symbol display means when the second holding condition is satisfied. The establishment requirement of the first holding condition is a requirement including at least that the game ball has entered the separate start area, and the establishment requirement of the second hold condition is that the game ball has the start area The second effect is an effect that is performed while the second symbol display means is executing the symbol variation display (for example, a jackpot notice effect for the variation). A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  The second effect mentioned here may be an effect of variable display of decorative symbols performed while the second symbol display means is executing the symbol variable display.

  In addition, “the first symbol display means is capable of displaying at least a first stop symbol (for example, special symbol F) corresponding to the result of the big hit determination after the symbol variation display. The second symbol display means is capable of displaying at least a second stop symbol (for example, the special symbol A) corresponding to the result of the jackpot success / failure determination after performing symbol variation display, It is more advantageous for the player as the jackpot control state when the second symbol display means displays the second stop symbol than when the first symbol display means displays the first stop symbol. A game table characterized by having a configuration (for example, FIG. 167 (d)) in which a large jackpot control state is easily started. ”Was also explained.

  Here, the game control means changes the control state from the non-big hit control state to the first big hit control state (for example, 2R big hit game when the first symbol display means displays the first stop symbol. The game control means can change the control state from the non-big hit control state to the second big hit when the second symbol display means displays the second stop symbol. It is possible to shift at least to a control state (for example, 15R special jackpot gaming state), and the second jackpot control state may be a control state that is more advantageous to the player than the first jackpot control state. .

  In addition, in the winning area (for example, attacker), the second symbol display means displays the second stop symbol more than after the first symbol display means displays the first stop symbol. The latter may be easier to perform a state change operation (for example, an opening / closing operation) that is advantageous to the player. For example, an operation with a large number of times of opening or an operation with a long opening time may be easily performed.

  Further, “the symbol display control means is capable of executing at least a control for starting the operation of the first symbol display means when the first holding digest condition is established, and the symbol display control The means is capable of executing at least a control for starting the operation of the second symbol display means when the second reserved digestion condition is established, and the establishment requirement of the second reserved digestion condition is: , The requirement that at least the operation of the second symbol display means is suspended, and the requirement to establish the first suspended digestion condition is that the operation of the second symbol display means is not suspended The requirement for establishing the first suspended digestion condition is a requirement including at least that the operation of the first symbol display means is suspended, and the effect display means includes the second display Wrong or wrong At least a pre-reading notice effect (for example, an effect due to a change in the display mode of the hold icon) can be displayed, and the effect display means can execute at least a continuous notice effect as the pre-reading notice effect. The effect display means is capable of continuing at least the continuous notice effect during the interrupt symbol variation display, and the interrupt symbol variation display is performed when the second reserved digest condition is during the continuous notice effect. It is a symbol variation display that is started during the continuous notice effect by being established, and the prefetch notice effect (for example, the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 in the display mode of the prefetch notice) is being executed in the first effect. It is an effect that makes it difficult to view at least a part of the first effect (for example, the electric chew release notification effect) during part or all of the period (for example, FIG 173 (d ')), the amusement machine, characterized in that. ”Was also explained.

  The game stand here is a so-called special figure 2 priority change machine.

  The effect display means is capable of displaying at least the first effect during execution of the prefetch notice effect.

  Next, a pachinko machine according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described. The pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment has many in common with the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, and is the same as the pachinko machine of the third embodiment unless otherwise specified. In the following description, components having the same names as those of the components described so far will be described using the same reference numerals as those used so far.

  FIG. 177 (a) is a diagram showing the success / failure determination table of FIG. 1 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 177 (b) is a diagram showing the success / failure determination table of FIG. These tables are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  In the fourth embodiment, whether the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, the winning probability of the jackpot is about 1/320 in the special figure low probability state and about 1/32 in the special figure high probability state. Compared with the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment is a pachinko machine with specifications that make it easy to win a big hit.

  Also in the fourth embodiment, the small hit is not in the special figure 2 but only in the special figure 1.

  The special figure determination table is the same as that of the third embodiment shown in FIG. 167 (d), and the table set selection table is the same as that of the second embodiment shown in FIG. The timer number table is also the same as that of the second embodiment shown in FIG.

  Therefore, also in the fourth embodiment, the special figure 2 is more likely to generate a big hit advantageous to the player than the special figure 1.

  Further, the determination of whether or not the special figure is true may be derived from “big hit”, “small hit”, or “lack”, or may be derived from “big hit” or “lack”. Alternatively, whether or not a special figure is appropriate may be derived up to a special figure symbol.

  The pre-reading notice is also executed in the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment. The pre-reading notice pre-reads the starting information before the start of the symbol variation of the special symbol, determines the result of the special symbol determination in advance based on the starting information, and notifies the result of the determination on the basis of the starting information Prior to the start, based on the determination result in advance, it is foretold that the determination result based on the start information will be a big hit or special figure A or special figure B, and the determination result based on the start information Even if it is off, or it becomes special figure I or special figure J, it is a notice (so-called fake notice) that the success / failure determination result based on the start information becomes a big hit or special figure A or special figure B ) Is also included.

  FIG. 178 (a) is a diagram showing a special figure 1 failure determination table used when pre-determining by pre-reading the starting information of FIG. 1, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the table for special figure 2 this time prior determination used when pre-determining by pre-reading the starting information.

The special figure 1 success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 178 (a) is the same as the special figure 1 failure determination table shown in FIG. 177 (a), and the special figure 2 failure advance determination shown in FIG. 178 (b). The use table is the same as the success / failure determination table of FIG. 2 shown in FIG. 177 (b). Even if the preliminary determination is performed using the preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 178, in the special drawing-related lottery process, the determination on the success / failure using the determination table shown in FIG. 177 is performed again.
Moreover, in prior determination, it performs until prior determination of a special figure.

  FIG. 178 (c) is a diagram showing a special figure prior determination table.

  The special figure preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 178 (c) is the same as the special figure determination table (see FIG. 167 (d)) used in the special figure related lottery process. The special figure determination process using the special figure determination table is performed.

  In advance determination, it is also possible to make a prior determination of the special figure based on the prior determination result of the fluctuation time by making a prior determination of the fluctuation time of the special figure without performing the preliminary determination of the special figure. Alternatively, instead of specifically predetermining the fluctuation time of the special figure, it is possible to predetermine trends of fluctuation times and groups of fluctuation times, and to make a pre-reading notice based on those prior judgment results. May be.

  Further, whether or not to perform the pre-reading notice or in what form the pre-reading notice is performed is determined by the sub-control unit (400, 500), for example, by performing random lottery.

  Next, the normal / bad determination in the fourth embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 179 (a) is a diagram showing a normal / unusual determination table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

Also in the normal-time success / failure determination process in the present embodiment, the time / shortness flag is referred to, and whether or not the current control state is the power support state is determined. The normal control state is a low probability state if the hourly flag is turned off (if it is a non-electric support state), and is a high probability state if the hourly flag is turned on (if it is an electric support state). . The determination of whether or not a common figure is made is performed based on a random number value for a common figure winning in the starting information extracted from the general figure holding storage unit of the RAM 308 (a possible range is 0 to 65535). The usual Atari probability in the fourth embodiment is about 10% in the non-electric support state (low probability state) and 100% in the electric support state (high probability state). In the electric support state, it may be possible to win only for winning.
FIG. 179 (b) is a diagram showing a general-purpose determination table.

  In determining the common map, the standard map is determined based on whether or not the current control state is the electric support state with reference to the time reduction flag. If it is a non-electric support state, a common figure will be determined based on the common figure decision random number value (the range which can be taken is 0-99) among the starting information taken out from the common figure storage part of RAM308. In the fourth embodiment, the normal figure A is determined with a probability of 90% in the non-electric support state, and the normal figure B is determined with a probability of 10%. In the universal figure determination table shown in FIG. 179 (b), an electric chew release mode corresponding to the universal figure determination result is shown. When the map A is stopped and displayed on the map display device 210, the electric chew is released for a maximum of 1.8 seconds (electric chow short is released). On the other hand, when the normal figure B is stopped and displayed on the normal figure display device 210, the electric chew is released for a maximum of 6 seconds (electric chow long open). If a predetermined number of balls (10 balls in this case) are entered before a predetermined opening time elapses, the electric Chu is closed at that time.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, the figure B is always determined in the electric support state. Therefore, the lottery based on the usual decision random number is not performed. Even if the general map B is stopped and displayed on the general map display device 210 in the electric support state, the electric chew is released for a maximum of 6 seconds (electric chew long open). In this case, when the general map B is stopped and displayed on the general map display device 210 in the non-electric support state, the electric chew is opened for the first time (for example, 4 seconds) at the maximum, and the general display is displayed in the electric support state. When the map A is stopped and displayed on the apparatus 210, the electric chew may be opened for a second time (for example, 6 seconds) at the maximum.

  In addition, when the result of determining whether or not the usual figure is correct is out of date, the figure becomes the ordinary figure C, so that the lottery based on the usual figure determined random value is not performed.

In the fourth embodiment, only in the electric support state, the determination of whether or not to win a normal figure is won. However, it is also possible to win almost (or necessarily) in the non-electric support state. In this case, in the non-electric support state, when the map A is stopped and displayed on the map display device 210, the power Chu is opened only for a maximum of 0.1 seconds.
FIG. 179 (c) is a diagram showing a general timer table.

  As shown in the normal time timer table of FIG. 179 (c), in the fourth embodiment, the normal symbol change time is uniformly 20 seconds (normal time) in the non-electric support state regardless of the normal time symbol. The timer is a timer 1), and in the power support state, it is uniformly 1 second (ordinary timer 2). In this way, since the non-electric support state is longer in the non-electric support state than the electric support state, it is possible to perform a long effect during the normal symbol change display in the non-electric support state, and enhance the effect There are cases where it is possible.

  Note that it is also possible to prepare a plurality of types of normal symbol variation times in the non-electric support state and determine the normal symbol variation times in the non-electric support state by random number lottery. In addition, a plurality of types (two types or three or more types) of symbol change time of the normal figure in the electric support state are prepared, and a random number lottery is selected from among them. The symbol variation time in the figure may be determined. Alternatively, the symbol variation time may be prepared for each ordinary symbol, and the symbol B may be selected more easily for the ordinary symbol B than for the ordinary symbol A. By doing so, it becomes easy to produce a turn effect before the usual figure B is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, the symbol B may be selected more easily in the normal figure B than in the normal figure A. By doing so, the player can be made more advantageous.

  Further, in the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment, the usual determination in advance is also executed based on the fact that the usual start information acquisition condition is satisfied. The requirement for establishing the usual start information acquisition condition here is a requirement established based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the usual figure start port 228. In other words, in a state where the number of ordinary holds is less than a predetermined upper limit, this is a requirement that is established when a game ball passes through the general opening 228, and in a state where the number of ordinary holds is a predetermined upper limit, This is a requirement that does not hold even if a game ball passes through the normal start port 228. The pre-judgment of ordinary drawings is the same process as the special-judgment pre-judgment.

  FIG. 180 (a) is a diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to determine whether or not to determine a normal figure used when pre-determining by pre-reading the normal startup information.

180A is the same as the table for determining whether or not a normal figure is shown in FIG. 179A. Even if the preliminary determination is performed using the preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 180 (a), in the common drawing-related lottery process, the determination of success / failure using the general figure determination table shown in FIG. 179 (a) is performed again. Is called.
Moreover, in prior determination, it is performed until the prior determination of a usual figure.

  FIG. 180 (b) is a diagram showing a general-purpose advance determination table.

  180B is the same as the general map determination table shown in FIG. 179B. However, in the general drawing related lottery process, the general map determination table is used again. The usual figure determination process was performed.

  Subsequently, a general drawing effect determination process executed by the first sub-control unit 400 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 181 (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of the ordinary drawing effect determination process in the fourth embodiment.

  The general drawing effect determination process shown in FIG. 181 (a) is also started when the first sub-control unit 400 receives a general diagram change start command from the main control unit 300. The usual figure change start command includes information indicating the current control state (whether or not the electric support state is set) and a usual figure determination result.

  First, it is determined whether or not it is during the prohibition period of the usual drawing effect (step S611). The prohibition period here is a period during power support. Note that this prohibition period may include at least one execution period among the specific effects described later. If it is during the prohibition period (during electric support), this ordinary drawing effect determination process ends, and the ordinary drawing effect (first effect) is not performed. Since the electric support state is a state in which a game ball easily wins an electric chew, there is a possibility that the player's expectation will not be improved so much even if the usual drawing effect is performed. However, if the electric support is in progress, the general drawing effect will not be performed uniformly. Even if the electric support is in progress, if the lottery with a predetermined probability is won, the normal drawing effect will be executed. May be.

  On the other hand, if it is not during the prohibition period (if it is during non-electric support), it is determined whether or not the normal drawing execution condition is satisfied (step S612). The requirements for establishing the ordinary drawing execution condition are requirements that are established by winning the ordinary drawing B shown in FIG. 163 (c). In addition, when the normal map B is stopped and displayed on the general map display device 210, the electric tulong release is executed, and this general drawing effect execution condition corresponds to the execution condition of the true normal drawing effect. Moreover, it is also a requirement that is established by winning the general drawing A shown in FIG. 163 (c) and winning the effect execution lottery with the first probability (for example, 1/10). When the map A is stopped and displayed on the map display device 210, the electric-chu short opening is executed, and this general drawing production execution condition is equivalent to the execution condition of the fake general drawing production for the electric-chu long opening. However, it corresponds to the execution condition of the true general drawing effect for the electric Chu release. Furthermore, it is also a requirement to be established by winning the drawing C of the second probability (for example, 1/100) and winning the drawing execution possibility determination lottery in the common figure C shown in FIG. 163 (c). Note that the first probability may be a probability equal to or higher than the second probability or higher than the second probability. When the general map C is stopped and displayed on the general map display device 210, the electric chew is not opened and remains closed, and this general drawing performance execution condition corresponds to a false general drawing performance execution condition. Note that here, the general drawing production execution condition is always established if the normal figure B is won, but it may be established by winning the third stage (for example, ½) production execution possibility lottery. Good. The third probability may be a probability that is equal to or higher than the first probability or a probability that is higher than the first probability. If the general drawing effect execution condition described above is not established, this general drawing effect determination process is terminated.

  On the contrary, if the ordinary drawing effect execution condition is satisfied, it is determined whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied (step S613). The requirement for satisfying the predetermined condition here is a requirement that is satisfied when the specific effect is executed. Specific effects include effects during a big hit game, effects with a high expectation level for jackpots during special symbol changes (for example, super reach, notice effects), forced effects that occur every predetermined time, right-handed or button presses For example, an effect that prompts the player to perform an operation, an effect that prompts each button to be pressed, and the like. The compulsory effect is an effect that is performed by moving the decorative symbol to the corner if the special symbol is changing, and is an effect that is performed in the middle of the demo effect if the demonstration is being performed. Further, the effect of prompting the user to press the button may be, for example, an effect that notifies the button pressing timing for each button, an effect that notifies the button pressing reception period, or the remaining button pressing reception. It may be an effect that informs the period. If the predetermined condition is not established, the first ordinary drawing effect command is set in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 (step S614), the ordinary drawing effect determining process is ended, and if the predetermined condition is established. Then, the second ordinary drawing effect command is set in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 (step S615), and the ordinary drawing effect determining process ends. The ordinary drawing effect command set in the RAM 408 is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the information transmission process (step S319) shown in FIG. 138 (a), and the second sub-control unit 500 transmits the received ordinary command. Based on the effect command, the decorative symbol display device 208 is controlled, and the normal symbol effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The ordinary drawing effect based on the first ordinary drawing effect command is an effect executed over a relatively long effect time, and the ordinary drawing effect based on the second ordinary figure effect command is executed over a relatively short effect time. Production. For example, the start time of the general drawing production based on the second general drawing production command is later than the start time of the general drawing production command based on the first general drawing production command, and the production time is shortened. In other words, when the usual drawing effect is started while the specific effect is being executed, the effect time is shorter than when the usual drawing effect is started while the specific effect is not being executed. By doing so, there are cases where the production can be varied and the interest of the game can be enhanced. In addition, when a specific effect (for example, a big hit notice) is being executed, it is possible to attract a player's attention to the specific effect by shortening the effect time of the general effect, and a general effect including a result display. In some cases, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the stop display of the regular symbols, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In addition, 0 seconds are also included in the short production time here, and in the case of 0 seconds, the usual drawing production is not executed. In the case of 0 seconds, the second ordinary drawing effect command may not be transmitted, or the second ordinary drawing effect command may be a cancel command. Further, even if the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the first general drawing production command is not set uniformly, but in step S614, a lottery is performed, and the second general display is performed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/20). You may make it set a figure production command.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment as well, it is easier to perform a normal drawing effect in the non-electric support state than in the electric support state. Since the non-electric support state is a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to win the electric chew, there is a case where it can be expected to win the game ball to the electric chew by executing the ordinary drawing effect.

  FIG. 181 (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of the predetermined area notice effect determining process in the fourth embodiment.

  The predetermined area here is a predetermined area in the decorative symbol display device 208, and corresponds to, for example, a special figure holding display area. Also in the fourth embodiment, the special figure holding display area is provided in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, which is the same as in the third embodiment. However, in the third embodiment, the normal drawing effect area where the normal drawing effect is provided, which is provided between the special figure 1 hold display area and the special figure 2 hold display area, is referred to as a predetermined area. In the embodiment, the special figure 1 hold display area or the special figure 2 hold display area is referred to as a predetermined area. The predetermined area in the fourth embodiment is not limited to the special figure hold display area, and may be an area including an area close to or adjacent to an area where the ordinary drawing effect is performed.

  The predetermined area notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 181 (b) is also started when the first sub control unit 400 receives the special figure hold increase command from the main control unit 300. The notice effect here refers to a special bonus jackpot notice effect. The special jackpot notice effect here is a prefetch notice effect based on the prior determination result described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 starts even when it receives any of the commands described so far, such as a special symbol variation start command, a universal symbol hold increase command, a universal symbol variation start command, a jackpot presentation start command, etc. You may do it. In these cases, the notice effect is not limited to the look-ahead notice effect, but may be a notice effect regarding the stop symbol of the symbol change, or may be a notice effect for notifying the development to reach. Further, it may be a notice effect or the like for giving a notice of a transition to the probability change state or the electric support state after the big hit.

  In step S621, it is determined whether it is during the prohibition period. The prohibition period in step S621 is a period during the normal drawing effect. If it is during the prohibition period (during the ordinary drawing production), the process proceeds to step S624.

  On the other hand, if it is not during the prohibition period, it is determined whether or not the notice effect execution condition is satisfied (step S622). The requirement for fulfilling the notice effect execution condition is a requirement that is established by winning the notice execution possibility lottery. If this notice effect execution condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S624.

  On the contrary, if the notice effect execution condition is satisfied, a predetermined area notice effect command is set in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 (step S623), and the process proceeds to step S624. The predetermined area notice effect command set in the RAM 408 is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the information transmission process (step S319) shown in FIG. 138 (a), and the second sub control unit 500 transmits the predetermined predetermined command transmitted. The decorative symbol display device 208 is controlled based on the region notice effect command, and the notice effect is displayed in a predetermined area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In step S624, the other notice effect lottery process is executed, and the predetermined area notice effect determination process ends. Other notice effects are equivalent to notice effects (including pre-read notice) performed outside the predetermined area.

  Next, a specific example of effects in the fourth embodiment will be described. First, description will be made with reference to FIGS. 182 and 183.

  FIG. 182 is a time chart showing an example of the effect in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 183 is a diagram showing the appearance of the decorative symbol display device and the like for each important point in the time chart shown in FIG. That is, the decorative symbol display devices shown in FIGS. 183 (a) to 183 (c) correspond to the periods (a) to (ku) shown in FIG. In the time chart shown in FIG. 182, time (t) elapses from the left to the right in the figure.

  Under the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 183, there are shown a general-purpose display device 210, a first special-figure display device 212, and a second special-figure display device 214, all of which are driven and controlled by the main control unit 300. Has been. In the figure used for explanation in the fourth embodiment, the positions of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are opposite to those in the figure used for explanation in the third embodiment, and the first special figure is displayed. The display device 212 is shown on the leftmost side, and the second special figure display device 214 is shown on the right side. Further, the general map display device 210 is shown on the rightmost side. Furthermore, in the figure used for description in the fourth embodiment, the hold lamps that are turned on by the number of the hold numbers are shown on each display device. That is, four first special figure holding lamps 218 are shown on the leftmost first special figure display device 212, and the second special figure display device 214 on the right (middle) thereof is on the second special figure display device 214. Four figure hold lamps 220 are shown, and four figure hold lamps 216 are shown on the rightmost map display device 210. These holding lamps are all controlled to be turned on by the main control unit 300. In the fourth embodiment, the maximum number of reservations in the usual figure is four as well as the maximum number of reservations in FIG. 1 and the maximum number of reservations in FIG. It should be noted that the maximum number of reservations may or may not be provided for both normal and special drawings. In the figure used for the explanation in the fourth embodiment, as in the figure used for the explanation in the third embodiment, only the horizontal segment at the center in the vertical direction is lit and the black portion is lit while the symbols are changing. Indicates the location of the segment.

  On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 208 is driven and controlled by sub-control means (here, the second sub-control unit 500). A special figure 1 hold display area 281 is provided on the left side of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a special figure 2 hold display area 282 is provided on the right side thereof. Further, a special drawing effect area 283 corresponding to an example of the predetermined area described above is provided between the special figure 1 hold display area 281 and the special figure 2 hold display area 282. In each hold display area, the older hold icon is displayed on the universal drawing effect area 283 side (center side), which is the same as the decorative symbol display device 208 of the third embodiment shown in FIG. Further, the default display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon is a black circle, and when a pre-reading notice effect is performed, the default display mode is changed to a predetermined display mode. Here, the pre-reading notice effect is performed by displaying the hold icon in the display mode of the old character. Note that a second predetermined display mode (for example, a character different from the old one) may be prepared and used in accordance with the reliability of the prefetch notice. For example, a pre-reading notice effect may be performed by displaying a hold icon in a predetermined display mode when the reliability for winning a big hit is really low and in a second predetermined display mode when the reliability is high.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 183, the number display of the number of each hold and the fourth symbol are displayed in a vertical line on the left side of the left symbol display area 208a. That is, a numerical display 284 representing the number of reserved figures in FIG. 1 is provided at the top, and a fourth symbol 285 in FIG. 1 is displayed below the figure. Below that, there is provided a numerical display 286 indicating the number of reserved figures in FIG. 2, and below that, a fourth symbol 287 of special figure 2 is displayed. Further below that, a number display 288 representing the number of holds of the usual figure is provided, and below that, the fourth figure 289 of the usual figure is displayed. The fourth symbol is for displaying the symbol variation. In the first special symbol display device 212 at the left end shown in FIG. 183 (a), the special symbol variation display is performed, and the other display devices 214, 210 is stopped. The 4th symbol 285 of the special figure 1 is lit in gray, and the other 4th symbols 287 and 289 are unlit. Each of the fourth symbols 285, 287.289 lights up in a predetermined color when the display devices 212, 214, 210 stop displaying the big hit symbol or the hit symbol, and during the big hit game or during the electric chew opening / closing operation May continue to light in a predetermined color.

  The state shown in FIG. 183 and FIG. 182 (a) is a non-electric support state, the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 3, and the number of holdings of special figure 2 and ordinary figure is zero. In the special figure 1 hold display area 281 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 183 (a), two hold icons are displayed, and the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 representing the first hold of the oldest winning prize. Is displayed in the display mode of old and new characters, and a pre-reading notice effect is executed on the left side of the normal drawing effect region 283. In addition, the default image 283a is displayed in the normal drawing effect area 283. The default image 283a is an image displayed in the general drawing effect area 283 when the normal drawing effect is not performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 182 (a), the electric chew is not operating, and the electric chew (the pair of blade members 232) is in a closed state. Note that, as described above, the first special symbol display device 212 shown in FIG. 183 (a) performs special symbol variation display, and this symbol variation display continues beyond the timing of FIG. 183 (ku). To do.

  Here, since the player is in the non-electric support state, the player is left-handed, and eventually, three game balls B pass continuously through the general start port 228 provided in the left region, The number of holds increases to 3. As shown in FIG. 182 (a), the general-purpose display device 210 starts the general-purpose symbol variation display and also starts the general-purpose effect. Here, the ordinary drawing effect is the ordinary drawing effect (hereinafter referred to as the first ordinary drawing effect) based on the first ordinary drawing effect command set in step S614 of FIG. 181 (a). The usual symbol variation display is performed for 20 seconds. In the ordinary drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 183 (a), the decorative display variation display (high-speed variation) of the ordinary drawing is started. Here, the variation display of the decorative pattern of the ordinary figure is performed for 20 seconds by the variation display pattern (repeat of the ordinary figure decoration 1 → the ordinary figure decoration 2 → the ordinary figure decoration 3) shown in (a) of FIG. 165 (b). . In addition, the number display 288 of the usual number of reserved figures shown in FIG. 183 (a) is 3, and the fourth figure 289 of the usual figure is also lit in gray.

  Eventually, as shown in (c) of FIG. 182, the general symbol display device 210 ends the normal symbol variation display, and the final display is performed. That is, the general-purpose display device 210 displays the stop symbol of the general-purpose figure C (see FIG. 163 (c)) for 0.6 seconds. The “symbol variation display period” may refer to a period from the start of the symbol variation display to the end of the fixed display. In the ordinary drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 183 (c), the ordinary figure decoration 3 which is the stop pattern aspect of the ordinary figure decorative pattern (see FIG. 163 (d)) is 0 after the variation display of the ornamental pattern of the ordinary figure. Displayed for 6 seconds. That is, the usual result display effect is performed. Note that the first ordinary drawing effect here is a relative display in which the decoration diagram of the ordinary drawing is displayed in a variable manner by referring to the decision result of the ordinary drawing in step S612 in FIG. It is a production over a long first time (20.6 seconds). In addition, the 4th symbol 289 of the usual figure shown in FIG. 183 (C) is turned off when the decision display on the ordinary figure display device 210 is being performed.

  When the final display on the general-purpose display device 210 is finished, as shown in FIG. 182 (D), the general-purpose display device 210 starts the symbol variation display of the general-purpose figure again, but here, the general-purpose effect is not executed. . That is, in the determination in step S612 shown in FIG. 181, it is determined that the general drawing effect execution condition is not satisfied, and therefore the normal drawing effect is not executed and the fake normal drawing effect is not performed. A default image 283a is displayed in the ordinary drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. In addition, the number display 288 of the number of reserved figures in the usual figure shown in FIG. 183 (D) is 2, and the fourth figure 289 of the usual figure is also lit in gray.

  Eventually, as shown in (e) of FIG. 182, the general symbol display device 210 ends the normal symbol variation display, and a fixed display is performed for 0.6 seconds. A default image 283a is still displayed in the normal drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. That is, the usual result display effect is not performed. In addition, the 4th pattern 289 of the usual figure shown to FIG. 183 (e) is light-extinguished.

  When the confirmation display on the general-purpose display device 210 is completed, as shown in FIG. 182 (f), the general-purpose display device 210 starts the normal-pattern variation display again, and this time, the general-purpose effect is also started. . Here, the usual symbol variation display is also performed for 20 seconds. In the ordinary drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 183 (f), the decorative display variation display (high-speed variation) of the ordinary drawing is started. The general map production here is also the first general map production. In addition, the number display 288 of the usual number of reserved figures shown in FIG. 183 (a) is 1, and the fourth figure 289 of the usual figure is also lit in gray.

  When 20 seconds have elapsed from the start of the normal symbol change display, as shown in FIG. 182 (ki), the normal symbol display device 210 ends the normal symbol change display and confirms the 0.6 second. Display is performed. The stop signal of the general map B (see FIG. 163 (c)) is displayed on the general map display device 210 shown in FIG. 183 (ki), and the variation display of the decorative pattern of the general map is displayed on the general map effect area 283. Subsequent to this, the usual figure decoration 2 (see FIG. 163 (d)) corresponding to the usual figure B is displayed, and the usual figure result display effect is performed. In addition, an effect image (here, an effect image 283b) is also displayed so as to surround the ordinary drawing effect region 283 as a normal drawing effect. The effect image 283b enters the special figure 1 hold display area 281, and a part of the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 in the display form of the pre-reading notice which is the display form of the old character is hidden by the effect image 283b. ing. As a result, the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 is difficult to visually recognize. Note that the entire first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 may be hidden by the effect image 283b.

  Subsequently, as shown in (ku) of FIG. 182, the electric chew long is released and the electric chew is opened for 5 seconds. In the ordinary drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 183 (ku), the electric chew release notification effect is executed following the usual result display effect with the effect image 283b. In the electric chew release notification effect here, a decorative design in which a character of Tono-sama with a balloon saying “electric chew is open” has a peace sign is displayed. With the balloon “opening electric chew”, the player knows that the game ball can enter the electric chew, and can grasp the launch timing of the game ball. In addition, the character's hand extends beyond the normal drawing effect area 283, enters the special figure 1 hold display area 281, and the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 (in this case, the pre-reading advance notice) Part of the hold icon) in the display mode is hidden. As a result, the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 is difficult to visually recognize. This electric chew release notification effect can also be regarded as one of the usual result display effects. Note that all of the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 may be hidden by the electric chew release notification effect. In addition, a balloon “During electric Chu open” also extends beyond the general drawing effect area 283, and this balloon enters the special figure 2 hold display area 282.

  As described above, the first special figure 1 holding icon 2811 whose display mode has been changed to the pre-reading notice mode is dared to be hidden by the normal drawing effect such as the effect image 283b or the electric-chu release notification effect. You may be interested in the trends. Further, the pre-reading notice is a future jackpot notice, and the player may be expected to open the electric chew by conspicuously presenting the current progressive drawing.

  The first ordinary drawing effect here refers to the result of determining the ordinary drawing in step S612 in FIG. 181, and displays the variation of the decorative pattern of the ordinary drawing, and then the result display effect of the ordinary drawing with the effect image 283b. And then the electric-chu release notification effect, which is an effect over a relatively long second time (25.6 seconds).

  Subsequently, although not shown in FIG. 183, as shown in FIG. 182 (K), when the electric chew long release is ended, the electric chew release notification effect is also ended, and the normal symbol variation display is started. However, the usual drawing effect is not executed.

  FIG. 184 is a time chart showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 182, and FIG. 185 is a diagram showing the state of the decorative symbol display device and the like for each important point in the time chart shown in FIG. In other words, the decorative symbol display device shown in (sa) to (se) of FIG. 184 corresponds to the period of (sa) to (se) shown in FIG. In the time chart shown in FIG. 184, time (t) elapses from the left to the right in the figure.

  After the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 performed in FIG. 183 is finished and the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the first special feature of the display mode of the pre-reading notice which is the display mode of the old character shown in FIG. The hold of the special figure 1 represented by the hold icon 2811 in FIG. 1 is consumed, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. In accordance with the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the decorative symbol display device 208 also starts the variation display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 1 and develops into super reach. The predetermined condition shown in FIG. 184 is the predetermined condition in step S613 of FIG. 181, and the predetermined condition is being established during the performance of the super-reach with a high expectation of jackpot. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185 (sa), a state of development to super reach is shown. Super reach itself is a type of jackpot notice, and the super reach production also corresponds to the jackpot notice. In the production of the super reach here, the background image of the decorative symbol display device 208 changes, the decorative symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 in the reach state moves to the left corner and is displayed small, and the female character C2 Appears. Note that the hold icon disappears when it evolves into super reach. Note that even when the hold icon display control is performed and only the player cannot see the hold icon, it is assumed to be “disappear” or “erase” in this specification. The same applies to “hidden” and “hidden”. However, the numerical displays 284, 286, and 286 at the left end are not erased (visible). Each fourth symbol 285, 287, 289 is also displayed.

  Again, since the player is in the non-electric support state, the player is left-handed, and three game balls B pass continuously through the normal start port 228 provided in the left area, and ( As shown in FIG. 5B, the general symbol display device 210 starts the normal symbol variation display, and the regular symbol variation display is performed for 20 seconds. On the other hand, since the predetermined condition is established (in the super reach), the ordinary drawing effect is an effect based on the second ordinary drawing effect command set in step S615 in FIG. Will be executed), but at the start of the general symbol variation display on the general diagram display device 210, the second general diagram effect is not yet started, and the general diagram effect shown in FIG. A default image 283 a is displayed in the figure effect area 283. It should be noted that the ordinary drawing effect area 283 may be erased with the background image which is one of the effects of super reach, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the default image 283a is not displayed until the ordinary drawing effect is started. Also good.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 185 (sa), in the super reach character C2, the foot portion hides a part of the normal drawing effect area 283 where the normal drawing effect is not performed. As a result, the ordinary drawing effect region 283 is difficult to visually recognize.

  As shown in FIG. 184 (si), when the end of the normal symbol variation display on the general diagram display device 210 is approaching (here, one second before), the second general diagram effect is displayed in the normal diagram effect area 283. Is started. In the ordinary drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 185 (f), the decorative display variation display (high-speed variation) of the ordinary drawing is started. The variation display of the decorative pattern of the ordinary figure here is also the variation display pattern shown in (a) of FIG. 165 (b) (the repetition of the ordinary figure decoration 1 → the ordinary figure decoration 2 → the ordinary figure decoration 3). Since the time is short, the number of repetitions is small.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 185 (S), when the normal drawing effect is started in the normal drawing effect region 283, this time, the normal drawing effect region 283 hides the foot portion of the super reach character C 2. . As a result, the character C2 is difficult to visually recognize. It should be noted that the leg portion of the super reach character C2 may still hide a part of the ordinary drawing effect area 283, or the ordinary drawing effect area 283 may obscure the foot portion of the super reach character C2. It may not be hidden.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 184 (su), the general symbol display device 210 ends the normal symbol variation display, and a fixed display is performed for 0.6 seconds. In the ordinary drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 185, the ordinary drawing decoration 2 is displayed for 0.6 seconds following the variation display of the ordinary decoration pattern, and the usual drawing result display effect is performed. . Also here, as the ordinary drawing effect, an effect image (here, the effect image 283b) is also displayed so as to surround the ordinary drawing effect region 283. The super reach character C2 is hidden by the effect image 283b up to the band portion. As a result, the super reach character C2 is more difficult to visually recognize. Note that all of the super reach character C2 may be hidden by the effect image 283b.

  It should be noted that the variation display time of the decorative pattern of the ordinary figure in the second ordinary figure effect (period length of (S) in FIG. 184) is the fixed display time (the result display effect time of ordinary figure: period of (S) in FIG. 184) Long), or shorter or longer than the fixed display time.

  Subsequently, as shown in (c) of FIG. 184, the electric chew long is released and the electric chew is opened for 5 seconds. In the ordinary drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 185 (c), the same effect as the electric chew release notification effect shown in FIG. 183 is executed following the usual result display effect with the effect image 283b. In the super reach character C2, the right body part is hidden by a balloon “During electric Chu release” in the electric Chu release notification effect. As a result, it is difficult to visually recognize the super-reach character C2. The electric chew release notification effect here can also be regarded as one of the usual result display effects. Note that all of the super reach character C2 may be hidden by the electric chew release notification effect.

  Note that the second general drawing production here refers to the result of determining the normal drawing in step S612 in FIG. 181, displays a short variation of the decorative pattern of the normal drawing, and then displays the result of the normal drawing with the effect image 283b. The effect is performed over a relatively short third time (for example, 6.6 seconds) in which the effect is performed and then the electric chew release notification effect is performed.

  Subsequently, although not shown in FIG. 185, as shown in FIG. 184 (S), when the electric chew long open is ended, the electric chew release notification effect is also ended, and the normal symbol variation display is started. However, the usual drawing effect is not executed.

  Note that the start time of the second general drawing effect may be changed according to the start time of the symbol variation display of the special symbol. For example, a predetermined period including the start time of the second general drawing effect (for example, the front and back 5 seconds) ) May be controlled so that the start time of the second general drawing effect is synchronized with (at the same time as) the start time of the symbol variation display of the special symbol. Alternatively, control may be performed so as to be delayed from the start time of the symbol variation display of the special symbol, or may be controlled so as to be advanced. In the period (c) in FIG. 184, an example in which the electric chew is kept open is shown. However, the electric chew (the pair of blade members 232a) is opened and closed one or more times in the period (c). You may make it perform, and you may make at least one part of production | presentation display common at the time of opening or opening and closing and closing, or may make it different. For example, it may be a peace sign during opening or opening, a goo sign during closing or closing, or a blue kimono during opening or opening, even if the peace sign is continued. Yes, it may be red kimono when closed or during closing.

  FIG. 186 is a time chart showing a modification of the second ordinary drawing effect, and time (t) elapses from the left to the right in the figure.

  In the modified example shown in FIG. 186 (a), the second general drawing effect is not performed during the fluctuation display of the ordinary decorative pattern (period (C)), and the final display starts (the beginning of the period (T)). ), The second general drawing production is started, and the electric chew release notification effect (this is also the result of the general drawing) is displayed as part of the second general drawing production even during the opening of the electric Chu long (period). A kind of production). In other words, the second ordinary drawing effect in this modification is configured only by the result display effect of the ordinary drawing, and the effect time is a relatively short fourth time (here, 5.6 seconds). Note that in the case of an ordinary figure out of date (ordinary figure C), only the result display effect of the ordinary figure in the final display is displayed, but since it is a very short time of 0.6 seconds, the ordinary figure is out of date (normal figure). In the case of FIG. C), the second general drawing effect may not be executed.

  In the second ordinary drawing production in the modification shown in FIG. 186 (b), the second decoration is displayed both during the variation display (period (d)) and during the fixed display (period (nu)) of the decoration pattern of the ordinary figure. If the ordinary drawing effect is not performed and the electric Chulong opening is started (the beginning of the period (ne)), the second ordinary drawing effect is started. The production time of the second ordinary drawing effect in this modification is a relatively short fifth time (here, 5 seconds). Note that this second general drawing effect is not executed when the normal figure is out of place (normal figure C).

  In step S615 in FIG. 181, any one of the second general drawing effect of the third time, the second general drawing effect of the fourth time, and the second general drawing effect of the fifth time is selected. It may be determined by lottery whether to execute the second general drawing effect of time. Moreover, you may prepare the thing of production time other than said 3rd time-said 5th time as a 2nd common figure production.

  Further, the third time to the fifth time are all shorter than the usual symbol variation time (20 seconds here) in the non-electric support state. By doing so, there are cases where the production can be varied and the interest of the game can be enhanced. In addition, while the symbol variation display that is not performing the normal drawing effect, it is possible to attract the player's attention to other effects, and the player can display the stop display of the general symbol by performing the general drawing effect including the result display. May become easier to recognize and may increase the interest of the game.

  FIG. 187 is a time chart showing an example when the predetermined condition is changed from the established state to the unestablished state, and time (t) elapses from the left to the right in the drawing.

  In the example shown in FIG. 187 (a), even if the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, super reach is being executed), but the state is not satisfied (for example, super reach end), the normal symbol variation display is started. It is an example which performs the 2nd general drawing effect determined at the time. That is, the same second general drawing effect as the second general drawing effect shown in FIG. 184 is executed (period (F) to (E)).

  The example shown in FIG. 187 (b) is an example in which the usual drawing effect is started from the point in time when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. In this example, since the predetermined condition was established at the time of starting the normal symbol variation display, the second general diagram effect (the second general diagram effect shown in FIG. The same). However, the predetermined condition is not satisfied during the display of the variation of the ordinary decorative pattern, and the variation display of the ordinary decorative symbol is started from the middle of the variation display of the ordinary decorative symbol (the beginning of the period of (le)). ), The display of the variation of the decorative pattern of the usual figure is continued even during the period of (L), and thereafter, the result display effect of the usual figure with the effect image 283b is performed (period (B)), and then the electric chew release notification effect is produced. Perform (period (wa)).

  In addition, you may add a variation display of the usual decorative pattern for the period of (Le), or start the display control of the variation display of the ordinary decorative pattern from the beginning of the period (Li), While the predetermined condition is satisfied, it may be hidden and displayed when the predetermined condition is not satisfied.

  FIG. 188 is a diagram illustrating an example of a general-purpose prefetch notice. This pre-reading advance notice effect may be executed when there is a common figure hold in the hold of the normal figure, or a special symbol hit pattern (for example, the general figure B of the electric tulong release) ) May be executed when there is a suspension of the usual figure, and it may be executed when a lottery with a predetermined probability is won (fake ordinary figure pre-reading notice effect). Moreover, even if there is a regular symbol per game in the hold of a normal figure, and even if there is a specific symbol hit in the hold of a normal diagram, it may be executed if a lottery with a predetermined probability is not won.

  In the ordinary drawing pre-reading notice effect shown in FIG. 188, the decoration image display device 208 displays an effect image (here, the effect image 283b) so as to surround the ordinary drawing effect region 283. The effect image 283b shown in FIG. 188 also enters the special figure 1 hold display area 281, and a part of the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 is hidden by the effect image 283b. In addition, a part of the decorative pattern of the special figure that is changing in the middle symbol display area 208b is also hidden by the effect image 283b.

  In this general-purpose pre-reading notice effect, when there are multiple holdings of the general drawing and the last holding of the general drawing is successful, the warning display is performed over the multiple times of the symbol change display of the normal drawing. It becomes a notice.

  Note that the pre-reading notice announcement for the special map may start after receiving the command for increasing the special figure hold (immediately after the increase of the special figure hold), but the specific effect (for example, the special figure jackpot notice or the special figure super reach) Etc.) may be started at the time when the specific effect is completed, or when the specific effect is started from the middle, the general-purpose prefetching notice effect is hidden. May be.

  FIG. 189 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a special figure jackpot notice effect is performed in the general drawing effect region 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 189 (a), the special figure 1, the special figure 2, and the usual figure are stopped. In addition, a default image 283a is displayed in the general drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208. The number of holds in special figure 1 is 3, while the number of holds in special figure 2 and ordinary figure is both 0. Note that the state shown in FIG. 189 is a non-electric support state.

  In FIG. 189 (b), the special symbol display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 212, and the decorative display of the special symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. Note that the general-purpose display device 210 remains stopped. In this example, when the first general drawing effect is executed in the general symbol effect region 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display pattern shown in (d) of FIG. Repeatedly displayed.

  If the number of holdings of the usual figure is 0 at the time when the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the special figure jackpot notice effect may be started in the common figure effect region 283. The special jackpot announcement effect in the special figure effect area 283 is displayed when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and the lottery with the first predetermined probability is won, Even if the symbol is stopped and displayed, it is executed when the lottery with the second predetermined probability is won (a fake jackpot notice effect). In addition, you may perform as a pre-reading notice effect of a special figure. When the special figure jackpot notice effect is started in the general drawing effect region 283, first, high-speed fluctuation is started in the general drawing effect region 283, and as shown in FIG. 189 (c), the general drawing effect region 283 before reach development. The decoration character design of “Gekiatsu” is stopped and displayed. The decorative character design of “Gekiatsu” shown in FIG. 189 (c) is displayed beyond the ordinary drawing effect area 283, and overlaps a part of the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811, and the first special figure 1 hold icon. 2811 is difficult to visually recognize. Note that the decorative character design “Gekiatsu” may be displayed in the general drawing effect area 283. In addition, in the case of a fake jackpot notice effect, a decorative character design of “sorry” may be stopped and displayed in place of the decorative character design of “gekiatsu”.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 189 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the special symbol decorative symbol develops into a reach effect. Even after the development of the reach production, the decoration character design “Gekiatsu” is stopped and displayed in the ordinary drawing production area 283. However, after the development of the reach production, the decoration character design of “Gekiatsu” may be erased. Alternatively, the default image 283a may be displayed in the normal drawing effect area 283.

  FIG. 190 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the advance notice effect to the special effect of the special figure is performed in the general drawing effect region 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208. Differences from the example shown in FIG. 189 will be mainly described, and items not particularly noted are the same as those in the example shown in FIG.

  The specific effect referred to here is, for example, a super reach effect in the variable display of the decorative pattern of the special drawing. It should be noted that the advance notice advancement to the special effect of the special figure can be regarded as a big hit notice of the special figure.

  In the example shown in FIG. 190 as well, as in the example shown in FIG. 189, when the number of holdings of the usual figure is 0 at the time when the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1 is started, the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1 is started. Then, high-speed fluctuation is started in the ordinary drawing effect area 283 (see FIG. 190 (b)).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 190 (c), after the occurrence of normal reach and before the development of the super reach effect, the decorative character design of “Gekiatsu” is stopped and displayed in the general drawing effect area 283. The decorative character design of “Gekiatsu” shown in FIG. 190 (c) is also displayed beyond the general drawing effect area 283, and overlaps a part of the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811, and the first special figure 1 hold icon is displayed. 2811 is difficult to visually recognize.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 189 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the special symbol decorative symbol develops into a super reach effect. After the development of the super reach production, the decorative character design of “Gekiatsu” disappears, and the default image 283a is displayed in the normal drawing production area 283. Further, a part of the base drawing effect area 283 is overlapped with a leg portion of the super reach character C2, and it is difficult to visually recognize the base drawing effect area 283.

  FIG. 189 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a special figure jackpot notice effect is performed in the general drawing effect region 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 189 (a), the special figure 1, the special figure 2, and the usual figure are stopped. In addition, a default image 283a is displayed in the general drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208. The number of holds in special figure 1 is 3, while the number of holds in special figure 2 and ordinary figure is both 0. Note that the state shown in FIG. 189 is a non-electric support state.

  In FIG. 189 (b), the special symbol display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 212, and the decorative display of the special symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. Note that the general-purpose display device 210 remains stopped. In this example, when the first general drawing effect is executed in the general symbol effect region 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display pattern shown in (d) of FIG. Repeatedly displayed.

  If the number of holdings of the usual figure is 0 at the time when the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the special figure jackpot notice effect may be started in the common figure effect region 283. The special jackpot announcement effect in the special figure effect area 283 is displayed when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and the lottery with the first predetermined probability is won, Even if the symbol is stopped and displayed, it is executed when the lottery with the second predetermined probability is won (a fake jackpot notice effect). In addition, you may perform as a pre-reading notice effect of a special figure. When the special figure jackpot notice effect is started in the general drawing effect region 283, first, high-speed fluctuation is started in the general drawing effect region 283, and as shown in FIG. 189 (c), the general drawing effect region 283 before reach development. The decoration character design of “Gekiatsu” is stopped and displayed. The decorative character design of “Gekiatsu” shown in FIG. 189 (c) is displayed beyond the ordinary drawing effect area 283, and overlaps a part of the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811, and the first special figure 1 hold icon. 2811 is difficult to visually recognize. Note that the decorative character design “Gekiatsu” may be displayed in the general drawing effect area 283. In addition, in the case of a fake jackpot notice effect, a decorative character design of “sorry” may be stopped and displayed in place of the decorative character design of “gekiatsu”.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 189 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the special symbol decorative symbol develops into a reach effect. Even after the development of the reach production, the decoration character design “Gekiatsu” is stopped and displayed in the ordinary drawing production area 283. However, after the development of the reach production, the decoration character design of “Gekiatsu” may be erased. Alternatively, the default image 283a may be displayed in the normal drawing effect area 283.

  FIG. 191 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the normal drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208 functions as a display area for a reserved digest effect.

  In the general drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 191 (a), the electric chew release notification effect is performed, and the electric chew long open is performed. As a result, there are four balls in the electric Chu.

  In FIG. 191 (b), four special figure 2 hold icons 2821 to 2824 are displayed in the special figure 2 hold display area 282. A part of each of these four special figure 2 hold icons 2821 to 2824 is hidden by the electric chew release notification effect, making it difficult to view.

  In FIG. 191 (c), the symbol variation display of special figure 1 performed so far is terminated. In addition, the opening of the electric chew long is ended, the electric chew is closed, and the ordinary drawing effect is ended. However, a Tono-sama character is displayed in the general drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 191 (c). The pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment is also a special figure 2 priority change machine, and in this example, when there is a special figure 2 suspension, the Tono-like character continues to be displayed in the general drawing effect area 283. That is, in the general drawing effect area 283, when all the reservations for the special figure 2 are consumed, the Tono-sama character disappears and the default image 283a shown in FIG. 190 (a) is displayed. Note that if the game ball passes through the general drawing start port 228 before the special figure 2 is deferred, the Tono-sama character disappears in the general drawing effect area 283, and the normal drawing effect is preferentially executed. You may do it.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 191 (d), the second special figure display device 214 starts the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure. The display style of the Tono-sama character displayed in the normal drawing effect area 283 may be changed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2. For example, if the default Tono-sama character has a display with a heel in both hands, but it is predicted that the jackpot symbol will be stopped on the digested suspended symbol variation display, the symbol variation display It changes into the display mode which lifted the bag which was held in both hands with the start. In addition, you may change from Tono to another character. In addition, the display in the general drawing effect area 283 may be changed every time the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started.

  In the above description, when one effect conceals the other effect, the other effect may conceal one effect even if it is not particularly refused. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 185 (C), the electric-chu release notification effect hides a part of the super-reach character C2, but the super-reach character C2 is one of the electric-chu release notification effects. The part may be concealed so that the electric chew release notification effect becomes difficult to visually recognize. Further, when one effect hides the other effect, it may be hidden over the entire effect period of the other effect, or may be hidden only during a part of the entire effect period. Further, when one effect conceals a part of the other effect, even if not specifically refused, one effect may conceal all of the other effect. Further, the difficulty of visual recognition includes inability to visually recognize.

  Furthermore, other effects such as the ordinary drawing effect and the jackpot effect described above may be a sound effect or a light effect, and are shown in FIGS. 176 (a) and (b). An effect by such an effect movable body may be used. In the case of an effect by sound, sounds overlap and one effect conceals the other effect according to the volume and pitch, that is, it becomes difficult to view the other effect.

  In the above description, “a start region (for example, electric Chu) that can change at least between an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) and a difficult-to-enter state (for example, a closed state); A determination unit (e.g., the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of executing at least the determination of whether or not the figure is displayed and a symbol that can display at least a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the determination as to whether or not the symbol has been displayed. A game machine comprising display means (for example, a general-purpose display device 210) and effect means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least an effect, wherein the start area is the determination of whether or not it is successful When the result is a specific success / failure determination result (for example, per common map), at least a specific operation (for example, opening / closing operation) can be performed. It is an operation including an operation for changing the state from the difficult entry state to the easy entry state, and the production means is capable of executing at least a first production (for example, an ordinary drawing production), and the first production is The start area is an effect including at least an effect (for example, an electric chew release notification effect) performed during execution of the specific operation, and the first effect is a first effect time (for example, a third effect time) Is an effect performed over a time (for example, 6.6 seconds), a fourth time (5.6 seconds), and a fifth time (for example, 5 seconds). A game table characterized by having a time shorter than a variable display time (for example, 20 seconds). Was explained.

  Here, the first effect may be an effect by display, an effect by sound, an effect by light, or an effect by a movable object. Further, the effect means may be an effect display means, for example.

  The specific operation may be an operation in which the difficult-to-enter state and the easy-to-enter state are alternately repeated one or more times. Therefore, the second effect may be an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect when the start area is in the easy-to-enter state. May be an effect capable of making it difficult to see at least a part of the first effect before the state is changed from the difficult-to-enter state to the easy-to-enter state, and the starting area is in the easy-to-enter state. It may be an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect after the state is changed to the entry difficult state.

  In addition, “the success / failure determination means is that the electric support state is more likely to derive the specific determination result than the non-electric support state, and the first effect is the non-electric support state than the electric support state. A game table characterized in that the electric support state is an effect that is more easily executed (step S611 shown in FIG. 181). ”Was also explained.

  In addition, “the symbol display means often displays the variation of the symbol for a longer time in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (FIG. 179 (c)). A characteristic game stand. ”Was also explained.

  In addition, “the first effect is an approachable notification effect that notifies that a game ball can enter the start area when the result of the determination is a specific result (for example, FIG. 183 (ku) or the like, a game table characterized by at least an effect including a speech balloon “opening electric Chu”. ”Was also explained.

  Further, “a second success / failure determination unit (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of executing at least a second success / failure determination (for example, whether or not a special figure is determined) and a result of the second success / failure determination are big hit Game control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of at least shifting the control state from the non-hit control state to the big hit control state, It is possible to execute at least a second effect relating to the result of the second success / failure determination (for example, a special figure jackpot notice effect (including a pre-reading notice)), and the second effect is the first effect. A game table characterized by being an effect capable of making it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect during a part or all of the execution period. ”Was also explained.

  Furthermore, in the above description, “a starting region (for example, electric Chu) that can change at least between an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) and a difficult-to-enter state (for example, a closed state), , A determination unit (e.g., the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of executing at least normal pattern determination, and after displaying a variation of the symbol, at least a stop symbol corresponding to the determination result can be displayed. And a display device (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least an effect. When the determination result is a specific determination result (for example, per common figure), a specific operation (for example, opening / closing operation) can be performed at least, and the specific operation , An operation including an operation of changing the state from the difficult entry state to the easy entry state, wherein the rendering means is capable of executing at least a first rendering (for example, a normal rendering), The effect is an effect including at least one effect of a changing effect, a finalizing effect, and an operating effect, and the changing effect is an effect executed during the symbol change display (for example, in FIG. 182). The effect during determination is an effect executed during display of the stop symbol by the symbol display means (for example, an effect during the period (K) shown in FIG. 182). And the in-motion effect is an effect (for example, an effect in the period of (K) shown in FIG. 182) performed while the start area is executing the specific operation, and the effect means is the first effect Different from directing A second effect (for example, a special bonus jackpot notice effect (including a pre-reading notice)) is executable, and the effect means performs at least the first effect during the execution of the second effect. It is possible to start (for example, FIGS. 185 (C) to (C)), and the production means can at least start the first production even when the second production is not being executed. (For example, FIGS. 183 (A) to (C)), the production time of the first production started during the second production non-execution (for example, the first time (20.6 seconds)). The game stand characterized in that the first effect production time (third time (for example, 6.6 seconds)) started during execution of the second production tends to be shorter. Was explained.

  Here, the first effect and the second effect may be an effect by display, an effect by sound, an effect by light, or an effect by a movable object. It may be. Further, the effect means may be an effect display means, for example.

  The second effect may be an effect that starts every predetermined time, or may be an effect that starts during an extra game state. Further, it may be an effect that prompts the player to perform an operation such as right-handed or pressing a button. Further, it may be an effect that prompts each button to be pressed. For example, for each button, it may be an effect that notifies the button press timing, an effect that notifies the button press acceptance period, or an effect that notifies the button press acceptance remaining period. Good.

  Further, “a second success / failure determination unit (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of executing at least a second success / failure determination (for example, whether or not a special figure is determined) and a result of the second success / failure determination are big hits. Game control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of at least shifting the control state from the non-hit control state to the big hit control state in the case where the determination result is a success / failure determination result. Is an effect including at least an effect related to the result of the second success / failure determination (for example, a super reach effect shown in FIG. 185). In addition, “the second effect is that when the result of the second success / failure determination is a jackpot success / failure determination result, the second success / failure determination result is a jackpot success / failure determination result. The second effect is an effect including an effect to be notified in advance (for example, the super reach effect shown in FIG. 185), and even if the result of the second success / failure determination is not a jackpot success / failure determination result, the second effect A game stand characterized by an effect including an effect of giving a notice as if the result of the second success / failure determination is a result of the success / failure determination of jackpot (a so-called fake jackpot notice effect). ”Was also explained.

  In addition, as another symbol display means (for example, a first special symbol start port 230) different from the start region and one of the symbol display means, a first symbol display means (for example, a first symbol display means) 1 special symbol display device 212), and as one of the symbol display means, second symbol display means (for example, second special symbol display device 214) and first symbol display means. At least controllable symbol display control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300), and the separate start area does not change the ease of entry of a game ball, and the symbol display control means includes: The second symbol display means is at least controllable, and the symbol display control means holds the operation of the first symbol display means when the first holding condition is established. At least one hold control The symbol display control means can execute at least a second holding control for holding the operation of the second symbol display means when the second holding condition is satisfied. The establishment requirement of the first holding condition is a requirement including at least that the game ball has entered the separate start area, and the establishment requirement of the second hold condition is that the game ball has the start area The second effect is an effect that is performed while the second symbol display means is executing the symbol variation display (for example, a jackpot notice effect for the variation). A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  The second effect mentioned here may be a decorative display variation display effect (for example, a super reach effect) performed while the second symbol display means is executing the symbol variation display.

  In addition, “the first symbol display means is capable of displaying at least a first stop symbol (for example, special symbol F) corresponding to the result of the big hit determination after the symbol variation display. The second symbol display means is capable of displaying at least a second stop symbol (for example, the special symbol A) corresponding to the result of the jackpot success / failure determination after performing symbol variation display, It is more advantageous for the player as the jackpot control state when the second symbol display means displays the second stop symbol than when the first symbol display means displays the first stop symbol. A game table characterized by having a configuration (for example, FIG. 167 (d)) in which a large jackpot control state is easily started. ”Was also explained.

  Here, the game control means changes the control state from the non-big hit control state to the first big hit control state (for example, 2R big hit game when the first symbol display means displays the first stop symbol. The game control means can change the control state from the non-big hit control state to the second big hit when the second symbol display means displays the second stop symbol. It is possible to shift at least to a control state (for example, 15R special jackpot gaming state), and the second jackpot control state may be a control state that is more advantageous to the player than the first jackpot control state. .

  In addition, in the winning area (for example, attacker), the second symbol display means displays the second stop symbol more than after the first symbol display means displays the first stop symbol. The latter may be easier to perform a state change operation (for example, an opening / closing operation) that is advantageous to the player. For example, an operation with a large number of times of opening or an operation with a long opening time may be easily performed.

  Further, “the symbol display control means is capable of executing at least a control for starting the operation of the first symbol display means when the first holding digest condition is established, and the symbol display control The means is capable of executing at least a control for starting the operation of the second symbol display means when the second reserved digestion condition is established, and the establishment requirement of the second reserved digestion condition is: , The requirement that at least the operation of the second symbol display means is suspended, and the requirement to establish the first suspended digestion condition is that the operation of the second symbol display means is not suspended The requirement for establishing the first suspended digestion condition is a requirement including at least that the operation of the first symbol display means is suspended, and the effect display means includes the second display Wrong or wrong At least a pre-reading notice effect (for example, an effect due to a change in the display mode of the hold icon) can be displayed, and the effect display means can execute at least a continuous notice effect as the pre-reading notice effect. The effect display means is capable of continuing at least the continuous notice effect during the interrupt symbol variation display, and the interrupt symbol variation display is performed when the second reserved digest condition is during the continuous notice effect. It is a symbol variation display that is started during the continuous notice effect by being established, and the prefetch notice effect (for example, the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 in the display mode of the prefetch notice) is being executed in the first effect. It is an effect that makes it difficult to view at least a part of the first effect (for example, the electric chew release notification effect) during part or all of the period (for example, FIG 173 (d ')), the amusement machine, characterized in that. ”Was also explained.

  The game stand here is a so-called special figure 2 priority change machine. The effect display means is capable of displaying at least the first effect during execution of the prefetch notice effect.

  Further, “the second effect is an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect during a part or all of the period during the execution of the first effect. A characteristic game stand. ”Was also explained.

The present invention can also be applied to a sealed pachinko machine. FIG. 192 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied. In a sealed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 192, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 901 to the game area 902 can be discharged from the game area 902 and supplied to the launching means 901 again. In addition, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (award balls, rental balls, total number of balls, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in FIG.
<Sixth Embodiment>

Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 193 to 229 are used only in the description of the sixth embodiment in principle, and the description of the present embodiment is provided even when the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings. Then, priority is given to the code | symbol shown in FIGS. On the other hand, in the following description, about the code | symbol which is not shown by FIGS. 193-229, the same code | symbol is used as the same component as 1st Embodiment-5th Embodiment. In addition, when there are drawings showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, overlapping description may be omitted.
<Type of design>

  First, referring to FIG. 193, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment are stopped and displayed. The types of figures and ordinary drawings will be described.

  FIG. 4A shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG. 1, and FIG. 4B shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display according to the present invention.

  Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the variation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the special symbol form of the special figure 1. When the variation time determined before the start of variation 2 (this also corresponds to the variation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special diagram 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as symbol variation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. In FIG. 5A, five types of special figures from “Special figure A” to “Special figure E” are shown as the stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of special figure 1. Indicates the location of the segment that is turned off, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is turned on. Also, FIG. (B) shows four types of special charts from “special chart a” to “special chart d” as stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of special chart 2, The unplugged portion indicates the location of the segment that is turned off, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, “Special Figure A” is a 15-round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as described above, whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not it is a special big hit is determined by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state. The state that shifts to the short time state is called a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the short time state is called a normal low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  “Special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. “Special figure D” is a small hit symbol, and if the game state before winning the small hit is the special figure high-definition figure high-definition state (after winning the small hit), the special figure high-definition figure high If the game state is a certain state and the game state before winning the small hit is a special figure low-probability high figure state (after winning the small hit), it is a special figure low-probability high figure state. Further, the “special drawing E” is a loss symbol, and is a symbol in which the profit amount given to the player is relatively small.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, “Special Figure a” is a 16R special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure b” is an 8R special jackpot symbol, both of which are in a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. “Special figure c” is a 8R jackpot symbol, which is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. Further, the “special drawing d” is an outlier symbol, which is a symbol in which the profit amount given to the player is relatively small.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, symbols other than “Special Illustration A” are prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 193 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed.

  For example, when notifying 15R special big hit of "Special Figure A", 15R big hit of "Special Figure B", 8R special big hit of "Special Figure b", or 8R big hit of "Special Figure c" Stops the combination of three same decorative symbols (such as “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” or “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”) corresponding to 15R jackpot or 8R jackpot on 208a-208c indicate. When notifying the 15R special jackpot of "Special Figure A" or the 16R special jackpot of "Special Figure a", a combination of three symbols with the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3"). ”,“ Decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 ”, etc.) are stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying the small hit of “special drawing D” or the sudden probability change of “special drawing C”, symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations other than the above (for example, “decoration 1-decoration”) are displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. 2-decoration 3 ”,“ decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5 ”, etc.) are stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying the special symbol E and the special symbol d, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in FIG.

FIG. 193 (d) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes for ordinary maps, “general diagram A” which is a winning symbol and “general symbol B” which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the usual figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in this figure (d), the white part in a figure shows the location of the segment which turns off, and the black painting part shows the location of the segment which lights up.
<Another example of display regarding operation of operation means by display means>

Next, another example in which the display unit (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) performs display related to the operation of the operation unit in accordance with the operation of the operation unit (for example, the chance button 136) will be described. In the following description, as an example, another example of the operation unit image display that performs display related to the operation of the operation unit by the same process as the operation unit image display process described in the third embodiment will be described.
<Example 20 of operation means image display>

  FIG. 194 is a diagram showing operation means image display of the twentieth embodiment in time series. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, for example, a special figure 1 4th symbol display area 208e and a special figure 2 4th symbol display area 208f are provided above the right end in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example. Provided. This special figure 1 4th symbol display area 208e displays the result of whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful, and the special figure 1 variable game (during special figure 1 fluctuation) is rounded as the 4th symbol 217 of the special figure 1 The figure of blinks. The special figure 2 4th symbol display area 208f is an area for displaying the result of the special figure 2 variable game, and during the special figure 2 variable game (during the fluctuation of the special figure 2) as the 4th symbol 218 of the special figure 2 Triangular figure blinks. In the sixth embodiment, a case where a special figure 1 variable game is performed as an example of a variable game will be described as an example. However, a special figure 2 variable game can be similarly implemented.

  A hold display area 700 is provided, for example, below the left end in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the right end of the hold display area 700 is secured as a variable icon display area 702. Here, hold icons PI1 and PI2 indicating that there are two holdes in FIG. 1 are displayed. In the following description, an example is shown in which one hold display area 700 is provided. However, as shown in FIG. 168, the special figure 1 hold display area 281 and the special figure 2 hold display area 282 may be provided separately. Good.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 5B, one special figure hold is consumed, the special figure 1 variable game hold is reduced from 2 to 1, and the first special figure display device 212 starts the symbol fluctuation display. Then, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol of the special symbol 1. In the change icon display area 702, the digested hold is displayed as the change icon CI, and in the hold display area 700, the hold icon PI1 indicating that there is one hold in FIG. 1 is displayed.

  In this embodiment, after the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 (or the second special symbol display device 214) is started, the blinking display of the fourth symbol 217 and the decrease of the hold icons PI1 and PI2 are performed. It starts in the order of animation and decorative pattern variation display. The order of the start timing of the 4th symbol blink display, the hold icon reduction animation (display), and the decorative symbol variation display is not limited to the above, and the display may be started in any order, and a plurality of them may be simultaneously displayed. The display may be started, and the order of the display start timing is the same in the following embodiments.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5C, during the decorative symbol variation display, a character display of a speech display 704 (for example, “Yoshimune is Yatsushiro Shogun.” Is displayed in the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. And an image corresponding to the notice effect for displaying the character image (princess). Here, the effect display 704 makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize a part of the decorative symbol variation display, but the player may be able to visually recognize a portion of the decorative symbol variation display.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D shows a state in which the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has started, and the first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 (this In the example, an image imitating a chance button) is displayed on the front side of the decorative design (front side of the layer (player side)) and on the rear side of the effect display 704.

  Also, a first time for notifying the elapsed time of the first operation acceptance period of the chance button 136 below the first operation means image BG1 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. The elapsed time notification image TG1 is displayed in the first color (blue in this example). The display position of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is also the front face of the decorative symbol and the rear face of the effect display 704. In addition, the character image (donor) is displayed on the front of the decorative pattern at almost the same timing as these displays.

  This timing is the start of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, and in fact, all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (from the left end to the right end) is filled with the first color. However, a part of the first operation means image BG1 and a part of the first operation means image BG1 are displayed by a part of the effect display 704 (here, a character display of a balloon “Yoshimune is Yatsushiro Shogun”) at the timing of FIG. Part of the elapsed time notification image TG1 (here, the portion including the right end portion) is hidden, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize (not visible).

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the first display (the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is preferentially overlapped (that is, earlier in time and The first display is hidden by the second display (displayed as a layer on the front) (part of the effect display 704) and is not hidden by the second display ((j) in the figure). ), The visibility of the first display is low. Here, the first display of the present embodiment refers to a display in which the display mode of the first display can be changed at least when the change condition is satisfied. The change condition is satisfied when, for example, the time from the start of the display of the first display has elapsed or the operation of a predetermined operation means (such as one or more operations or a long press). This is the case. Further, the change condition may be satisfied once during the display period of the first display, or may be plural. For example, when the change condition is the passage of time every second, for example, from the start of display of the first display and this is established a plurality of times, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is displayed every second. The aspect changes. Specifically, as will be described later, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is an image in which the filled portion of the first color decreases (or increases) with time (for example, every second). Is displayed. Note that the second display may not be displayed with priority over the first display.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 5E and 5F show a state in which time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds, which is the reception period) has elapsed since the start of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 (FIG. 4D). ing. Thus, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is a meter display, and the scale (filled portion) of the meter (also referred to as a gauge, hereinafter the same) is displayed in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. Display gradually decreasing images. The effect display 704 continues to be displayed even during a period in which the scale of the meter gradually decreases, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1. That is, the first display (first elapsed time notification image TG1) is hidden by the second display (part of the effect display 704), and is not hidden by the second display ((j) in the figure). Change of the display mode of the first display (first elapsed time notification image TG1) (display in which the scale of the meter gradually decreases) even in a state where the visibility is low compared to ing. In this example, the display mode and display position of the effect display 704 do not change with time.

  The timings shown in (g) to (i) in the figure indicate a state in which a time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds, which is the reception period) has elapsed from (f) in the figure. At these timings, an image in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases is displayed (decrease display), but the scale of the meter is hidden behind the effect display 704, and the scale of the meter is reduced. The display mode of the display is difficult for the player to visually recognize (not visible). In other words, even while the meter scale is hidden by the effect display 704, the scale reduction display is continued.

  In this way, the second display (here, the effect display 704 which is a notice) is hidden by being overlapped (hidden by the effect display 704), and the first display (here) becomes invisible to the player. Then, when there is an image in which the scale of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 gradually decreases), the first display of the part that becomes invisible (that is, the image that is not displayed) is not actually drawn. You may control. By doing in this way, the control burden of drawing processing can be reduced. This is the same in all examples of the present specification. Note that the first display of the portion that is invisible to the player (hidden) may be drawn.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6J shows a state in which the effect display 704 is not displayed before (immediately before) the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 is ended. Thereby, before the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 ends, the entire player including the right end portion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 can be visually recognized by the player.

  In the present embodiment, the second elapsed time display image TG1 (meter) is displayed by overlaying the second display (in this case, the effect display 704) on the area including the left end of the first elapsed time notification image TG1. ) And the display mode of the decrease display may be difficult for the player to visually recognize (the same applies to the following embodiments).

  As described above, FIGS. (D) to (j) show an example in which the button operation is not performed during the operation reception period of the chance button 136, but the button operation was performed during the operation reception period of the chance button 136. An example of the display is shown below.

  FIG. 10G-1 is a display example when the chance button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, based on the operation of the chance button 136, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, and then the effect display (first display) An image 730 (an image corresponding to the second notice effect, which is a character display of “chance!” In this example), which is different from the image 704 corresponding to the notice effect, is displayed as a decorative pattern. It is displayed in the display area of the display device 208. However, even in this state, the visibility of the part of the image 730 corresponding to the second notice effect is lowered for the player due to the overlap of the effect display 704 (image corresponding to the first notice effect). (It is considered difficult for players to see.)

In this example, the case where it is difficult to visually recognize a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 by the effect display 704 that is an image corresponding to the notice effect has been described. However, other effect images or other images are used. May make it difficult to visually recognize a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and the same applies to the following embodiments.
<Example 21 of operation means image display>

  FIG. 195 is a diagram showing operation means image display of Example 21 in time series.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 7B to 7E are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 194B to 194e, but in this embodiment, the first operation means image BG1 is a chance button. 136 is an image corresponding to the first operation of 136, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is an image displaying the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5F shows a state in which a time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds, which is the reception period) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, a second operation means image BG2 corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 and a downward arrow are displayed on a part of the effect display 704 (here, in a balloon). On the other hand, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 that displays the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 is not displayed. In this example, while reducing the visibility of the image in which the scale of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 gradually decreases (making it difficult for the player to see), a part of the effect display 704 (second operation) The means image BG2 and the image of the downward arrow) provide an effect of prompting the second operation of the chance button 136.

  Note that the second elapsed time notification image TG2 may be displayed on a part of the effect display 704 (here, in a balloon). Further, the second operation means image BG2 and the image of the downward arrow are not displayed when the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 ends, and the timing thereof is the first time of the chance button 136. It may be set at the same timing as the end timing of the operation reception period (the timing at which the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are not displayed), or a timing earlier than that. Later timings are also acceptable. In the present embodiment, the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 is a period shorter than the first operation reception period of the chance button 136, but the time may be the same period. May be a long period.

  The timings shown in (g) to (j) are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 194 (g) to (j).

  FIGS. 195 (b) to (j) show an example in which no button operation is performed during the operation reception period of the chance button 136. However, when the button operation is performed during the operation reception period of the chance button 136, FIG. A display example is shown below.

  FIG. 11G-1 is a display example when the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, based on the second operation of the chance button 136, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, and then the effect display ( An image 730 corresponding to the notice effect, which is different from the image 704 corresponding to the first notice effect) (an image corresponding to the second notice effect, in this example, a character display of “chance!”) Is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. However, even in this state, a part of the image 730 corresponding to the second notice effect is made difficult for the player to visually recognize by the effect display 704 (image corresponding to the first notice effect). In addition, a part of the effect display 704 is changed. Specifically, based on the second operation of the chance button 136 being performed, the second operation means image BG2 in the balloon is erased, and “Gekiatsu! "Is displayed.

  FIG. 11G-2 is another display example when the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, based on the second operation of the chance button 136, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, and then the effect display ( An image 730 corresponding to the notice effect, which is different from the image 704 corresponding to the first notice effect) (an image corresponding to the second notice effect, in this example, a character display of “chance!”) Is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. However, even in this state, a part of the image 730 corresponding to the second notice effect is made difficult for the player to visually recognize by the effect display (image corresponding to the first notice effect) 704. In this example, the display mode of the effect display 704 is not changed, and the display of the second operation means image BG2 and the downward arrow image is continued. In this case, the display of the second operation means image BG2 and the downward arrow image may prompt the third operation of the chance button 136, and the third operation of the chance button 136 is performed accordingly. In such a case, the display may change to an effect display 704 shown in FIG. In practice, the third operation of the chance button 136 may not be accepted (restricted).

  FIG. 6G-3 is another display example when the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, a part of the effect display 704 is changed based on the second operation of the chance button 136 being performed. Specifically, based on the second operation of the chance button 136 being performed, the second operation means image BG2 in the balloon is erased and the characters “Gekiatsu!” Are displayed. On the other hand, the display of the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, and a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is visually recognized by the player by a part of the effect display 704. It is difficult. In this case, actually, an image in which the first elapsed time notification image TG1 gradually decreases is displayed.

  The timing shown in (f-1) of the figure is another display example when the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed at the timing shown in (e) of the same figure. At this timing, based on the first operation of the chance button 136 being performed, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are deleted, and then the effect display ( An image 730 corresponding to the notice effect, which is different from the image 704 corresponding to the first notice effect) (an image corresponding to the second notice effect, in this example, a character display of “chance!”) Is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In (f-1), the second operation means image BG2 corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 and a downward arrow are displayed on a part of the effect display 704 (in the balloon here). Yes.

In this embodiment, when the chance button 136 is operated, an effect display (an image corresponding to the first notice effect) 704 and an image 730 corresponding to the second notice effect are each displayed on the chance button 136. An image corresponding to the operation may be displayed, or one of the images may be displayed. Further, when the chance button 136 is operated, this is not accepted, and both the effect display (image corresponding to the first notice effect) 704 and the image 730 corresponding to the second notice effect are displayed. It is good also as what is not changed.
<Example 22 of operation means image display>

  FIG. 196 is a diagram showing operation means image display of Example 22 in time series. In the present embodiment, the first operation means image BG1 is an image corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136. The second operation means image BG2 is an image corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B is the same as the timing shown in FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5C shows a state in which the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has started during the decorative symbol variation display, and is displayed at the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The effect display 704 (for example, the second operation means image BG2 corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136, the image of the character “Long press!”, And the character image (princess) are displayed in a balloon. The image corresponding to the notice effect) is being displayed. In this example, as a second operation of the chance button 136, a display prompting the long press of the chance button 136 is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D shows a state in which the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has started, and the first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 (this In the example, an image imitating a chance button) is displayed on the front side of the decorative design and on the rear side of the effect display 704.

  Also, a first elapsed time notification for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 below the first operation device image BG1 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation device image BG1. The image TG1 is displayed in the first color (blue in this example). The display position of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is also the front face of the decorative symbol and the rear face of the effect display 704. In addition, the character image (donor) is displayed on the front of the decorative pattern at almost the same timing as these displays.

  At this timing, it is the start of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136, and in fact, all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (from the left end to the right end) is filled with the first color. , A part of the first operation means image BG1 and a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this case, a balloon image displaying the second operation means image BG2). Here, the portion including the right end portion) is concealed, and the visibility of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is reduced (it is difficult for the player to see (not visible)).

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E is the second operation (long time) of the chance button 136 after a time (for example, a time shorter than the reception period of 6 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. This shows a state in which the pressing operation is started. At this timing, an image in which the scale of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (meter) gradually decreases is displayed, and the effect display 704 continues to be displayed during the period, and the first elapsed time is displayed. A part of the notification image TG1 is difficult for the player to visually recognize. In this example, the effect display 704 is changed as the second operation (long press operation) of the chance button 136 is started. Specifically, the display position of the effect display 704 does not change, but the display mode of the effect display 704 (here, the fill color of the second operation means image BG2) is changed from the first color (for example, white) to the second. The color is changed to red (for example, red).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6F is a state in which the second operation (long press operation) is continued. Is shown. At this timing, an image in which the scale of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (meter) gradually decreases is displayed, and the effect display 704 continues to be displayed during the period, and the first elapsed time is displayed. A part of the notification image TG1 is difficult for the player to visually recognize. In addition, the effect display 704 is informed that the state after the change of the display mode (filling with the second color) is maintained and the second operation (long pressing operation) is continued. As described above, the display mode after the change of the effect display 704 is maintained while the second operation (long press operation) is continued, but the second operation (long press operation) is continued. Even if it is during the period, it may return to the original first color. In addition, the display mode after the change of the effect display 704 is maintained in the same display mode as before (or immediately before) when the player interrupts the second operation (long press operation). If the player interrupts the second operation (long press operation), the player may return to the original first color.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5G shows a state in which time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds, which is the reception period) has elapsed from FIG. At these timings, an image in which the scale of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (meter) gradually decreases is actually displayed, but the scale of the meter (filled portion) is hidden behind the effect display 704. The display mode of the reduced display of the meter is difficult for the player to visually recognize. In this case, it may be controlled not to actually draw an image whose scale gradually decreases. By doing in this way, the control burden of drawing processing can be reduced. In addition, the effect display 704 is informed that the state after the change of the display mode (filling with the second color) is maintained and the second operation (long pressing operation) is continued. In the above case, it may be controlled to draw an image in which the scale gradually decreases.

  The timing shown in (h) in the figure shows a state in which time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds, which is the reception period) has elapsed from (f) in the same figure. At this timing, the second operation means image BG2 is erased based on the result of the second operation (long press) of the chance button 136 (for example, the long press period (for example, about 3 seconds has elapsed), The text “Gekiatsu!” Is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6J shows a state in which the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136 has ended. In the present embodiment, the display of the effect display 704 is continued even at the end of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 (after the end), and the scale of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (meter) is displayed. Is considered difficult for the player to see.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5 (k), the first operation means image BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and the character image (donor) are not displayed (erased), and the decorative symbol change display is displayed to the player. It is in a state where it is visible. However, also in this case, the display of the effect display 704 is continued, which makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize a part of the decorative symbol variation display.

  FIG. 11E-1 shows another display example at the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, as the second operation (long press operation) of the chance button 136 is started, the display mode (here, the fill color) of the effect display 704 is changed from the first color (for example, white). Although the color is changed to the second color (for example, red), the second operation of the chance button 136 is determined to be the first operation of the chance button 136 for control, and corresponds to the first operation of the chance button 136. The state where the notice effect is started is shown. That is, after deleting the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1, a notice effect image 730 (here, “chance” characters) corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 is displayed. . Also in this case, a part of the notice effect image 730 corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 is difficult for the player to visually recognize by the effect display 704.

  FIG. 11H-1 is another display example at the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the characters “Super hot!” Displayed based on the result of the second operation (long press) of the chance button 136 (for example, the long press period (for example, about 3 seconds has passed)). At substantially the same timing as the display, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, and the notice effect image 730 corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 (here, the characters “chance”) ) Is displayed.

In addition, in the timing shown in (i) in the figure, when there is a further operation of the chance button 136 (third operation (long pressing, pressing for a period shorter than the long pressing, etc.), (e-1) in FIG. Alternatively, the display shown in (h-1) of the figure may be performed, and when the chance button 136 is further operated (third operation) at the timing shown in (j) of FIG. The display shown in FIG. (E-1) or (h-1) may be performed.
<Example 23 of operation means image display>

  FIG. 197 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of Example 23 in time series. The timing shown in FIG. 5B is the same as the timing shown in FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C shows a state in which the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 is started during the decorative symbol variation display, and the first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 is shown. (In this example, an image simulating a chance button), a first elapsed time notification image TG1, and a character image (dono) are displayed on the front of the decorative symbol. At this timing, all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (from the left end to the right end) is filled with the first color.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D shows a state in which a pre-reading notice effect for changing the hold icon PI1 is started during the operation acceptance period of the chance button 136. As an example, the pre-reading notice effect of the present embodiment performs an effect display (animation display) 704 by animation. The animation display 704 is, for example, a display start animation in which a star connected to a balloon starts from above the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, descends toward the hold display area 700, and a star near the hold icon PI1. Is separated from the balloon, and the hold icon PI1 is changed, or without changing, only the balloon rises again, and the erase animation is deleted.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows a state in which time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds that is the reception period) has elapsed since the start of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136, and the first elapsed time notification image. An image in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter as TG1 gradually decreases is displayed. Also, the animation display 704 continues, displaying an image in which balloons and stars are descending.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5F shows a state in which time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds as the reception period) has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 5E, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1. The image where the scale (filled part) of the meter is gradually decreasing is displayed. Further, the animation display 704 continues, and the balloons and the stars are descending, and overlap the front surfaces of the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1. At this timing, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with a part (star) of the animation display 704, and the visibility of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is lowered (to the player). It is considered difficult to see). In addition, a part of the first operation means image BG1 is also covered with a part (balloon) of the animation display 704, making it difficult for the player to see.

  The timing shown in (g) of the figure shows a state in which a time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds as the reception period) has passed since the state of (f) in the figure, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1. The image where the scale (filled part) of the meter is gradually decreasing is displayed. Also, the animation display 704 continues, and the front of the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 while the stars and balloons move from right to left along the first elapsed time notification image TG1. Are overlapping. At this timing, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with a part (star) of the animation display 704, which is difficult for the player to visually recognize. In addition, a part of the first operation means image BG1 is also covered with a part (balloon) of the animation display 704, making it difficult for the player to see.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a part of the first display (here, the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is difficult to be visually recognized by the player due to the second display that moves (here, the animation display 704). ing. In addition, the position where the first display (here, the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is covered (the position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize) is elapsed by the second display (here, the animation display 704). Change with. The first elapsed time notification image TG1 displays an image that gradually decreases during a period in which the animation display 704 is partially covered and difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  The timings shown in (i) to (l) of FIG. 6 indicate a state in which the change display of the hold icon PI1 is successfully performed by the animation display 704. That is, when the change display of the hold icon is successful, the balloon and the star approach the hold display area 700 ((i) in the figure), the star leaves the balloon ((j) in the same figure), and the white circle hold icon PI1. A holding icon PI1 ′ whose display mode has been changed by combining stars and stars is displayed (change display is successful) and the balloon is raised ((k) in the figure), and the balloon is moved from the display area of the decorative symbol display area 208 to the balloon. Is deleted ((l) in the figure), the animation display 704 is executed.

  FIGS. (I-1) to (j-1) are states after the timing shown in FIG. (G) and indicate a state in which the change display of the hold icon has failed. That is, when the change display of the hold icon fails, the star does not leave the balloon even if the star and the balloon are close to the hold display area 700 ((i-1) in the figure), and moves to the left as it is, for example. Then, an animation display 704 that moves away from the hold icon PI is executed.

  In this embodiment, the animation display executed when the change display of the hold icon succeeds and the animation display executed when the change display fails are described as different animation displays. However, the same animation display is executed, and as a result The change display may be successful because only the icon display mode changes, or the change display may fail because only the display mode of the hold icon does not change. Also, the execution time of the animation display executed when the change display of the hold icon succeeds and the animation display executed when it fails may be the same period (length). The period may be different, for example, may be longer.

The timing shown in (f-1) in the figure is a state after the timing shown in (e) in the figure, and shows a state in which the chance button 136 is operated during the reception period of the chance button 136. At this timing, based on the operation of the chance button 136 being performed, after deleting the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image 730 corresponding to the notice effect (in this example, (Character display “Chance is!”) Is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Also in this case, the animation display 704 (second display) covers a part of the image 730 (first display) corresponding to the notice effect, making it difficult for the player to see.
<Example 24 of operation means image display>

  198 to 154 are diagrams showing the operation means image display of Example 24 in time series. In the twenty-fourth embodiment, an example of the operation unit image display in the case of performing the normal operation unit image display will be described as a premise of the description of the embodiment 25 to the twenty-eighth embodiment.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 198 (a), the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 is finished, the stop symbol is displayed, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 are out of decoration. A combination of symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. In the hold display area 700, two hold icons PI1 and PI2 of FIG. 1 are shown here.

  Next, at the timing shown in FIG. 7B, one special figure 1 hold is consumed, and the special figure 1 variable game hold is reduced from 2 to 1, and the first special figure display device 212 displays the symbol fluctuation display. Is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. In the hold display area 700, the digested hold is displayed as the change icon CI in the change icon display area 702, and the hold icon PI1 indicating that there is one hold in FIG. 1 is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C shows a state in which the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 has started, and the first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136. (In this example, an image simulating a chance button) is displayed.

  In addition, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed at the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1 in the first color (this In the example, blue is displayed below the first operation means image BG1. This timing is the start of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, and all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (from the left end to the right end) is filled with the first color.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D shows a state in which time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds, which is the reception period) has elapsed since the start of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136, and the first elapsed time notification image. The TG 1 displays an image in which the scale of the meter gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period for the operation of the chance button 136.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6E is before the time (for example, 6 seconds as the reception period) elapses (for example, 6 seconds as the reception period) from the start timing of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. In the previous state (after the timing (d) in the figure), the chance button 136 is operated. At this timing, based on the operation of the chance button 136 being performed, after deleting the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image 730 corresponding to the notice effect (in this example, A character display “Chance!” And a character image (dono) are displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. This notice effect may be displayed when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation acceptance period without the operation of the chance button 136 being performed. Moreover, although this embodiment demonstrates the case where a notice effect is displayed as an example, another effect display may be sufficient.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 5F and 5G are in a state in which an effect corresponding to the result of the determination of success / failure, the variation time, and the winning notice effect is started when the chance button 136 is operated. FIGS. 5F and 5G show an example of reach display in the decorative display variation display.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6H is the start state of super reach production, the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to white (white background), and the variation display of the decorative symbol is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. The display area is displayed in a small size, for example, in the upper right corner (decreasing display of decorative symbols). Further, the hold display area 700, the hold icon PI1, and the variation icon CI are hidden (erased). Note that any one of the hold display area 700, the hold icon PI1, the change icon CI erasing timing, the white back timing, and the decorative symbol reduction display timing may be executed first, if any, They may be executed in order. Moreover, at least some may be performed simultaneously.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 6 (i) and (j) are states in which execution of a swordsman reach production that confronts a swordsman character with a sword, for example, is started as a super reach production. Here, as an example, a swordsman character and a character “VS swordsman” are displayed (FIG. (I)), and then a confrontation scene between the character (dono) and the swordsman character is displayed (FIG. (J)).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (k) indicates that the confrontation scene between the character (dono) and the swordsman character is once erased, and the second operation means image BG2 (in this example, the chance button 136) corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed. Is displayed). Further, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed at the same timing as the display of the second operation means image BG2, in the first color (this In the example, blue is displayed below the second operation means image BG2. This timing is immediately before the start of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136, and all of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 (from the left end to the right end) is filled with the first color. Yes. Note that the fill color of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 may be a second color (for example, white) different from the first color. Further, at this timing, for example, an image that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 (for example, a letter “press the button to stop the feeling meter!”) Is displayed above the second operation means image BG2. Furthermore, the first state notification image SG1 is displayed at the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example. The first state notification image SG1 is a meter display and refers to a display whose display mode can be changed at least when a change condition is established. Satisfaction of the change condition is, for example, when the time from the start of the display of the first display has elapsed, or when there is an operation of a predetermined operation means (one or more operations, long press, etc.) And so on. Further, the change condition may be satisfied once during the display period of the first display, or may be plural. For example, when the change condition is, for example, the passage of time every 1 second from the start of display of the first state notification image SG1, and this is established a plurality of times, the first state notification image SG1 is set every 1 second. The display mode changes. Specifically, as will be described later, the first state notification image SG1 displays an image in which the filled portion increases (or decreases) over time (for example, every second). Further, in the case where the first state notification image SG1 changes the display mode with time, the change of the display mode is stopped according to the operation of the operation means (chance button 136) during the display mode change period. (Or end). For example, in the first state notification image SG1 of the present embodiment, the scale (filled portion) of a plurality of levels (for example, 10 levels) increases step by step from the lowest level (the scale increases and displays) as time elapses. The meter reaches the upper stage, and is an image that terminates (or stops) the scale increase display when the chance button 136 is operated during the scale increase display. Here, with the passage of time, the first state notification image SG1 is not filled in the initial state at the timing shown in FIG. 4K, or is in the first color (white, etc.). It is displayed with the whole area filled.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11 (l) is the same as that shown in FIG. 10 (k), but the time has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. Show.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (m) shows a state in which time has elapsed since the start of the reception period of the chance button 136, and the scale (filled portion) of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 gradually decreases. Display an image. In addition, at this timing, the scale (filled portion) of the first state notification image SG1 is sequentially filled with the second color different from the first color step by step from the bottom, and the filled portion gradually increases. Display the image. At this time, the fill color (second color) of the first state notification image SG1 changes stepwise, but it may be the same color.

  The timing shown in FIG. 9 (n) shows a state in which more time has elapsed since the start of the reception period of the chance button 136, and the scale (filled portion) of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 gradually decreases. Display the image. At this timing, the scale (filled portion) of the first state notification image SG1 gradually increases, and an image reaching the uppermost stage is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 10 (o) shows a state in which the chance button 138 is operated in a state where time has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. At this timing, an image in which the scale (filled portion) of the first state notification image SG1 has reached the uppermost level is displayed, and characters “feeling MAX” are displayed above the first state notification image SG1. Further, after the operation of the chance button 136 is performed, after the second operation means image BG2, the second elapsed time notification image TG2, and the characters “Press the button to stop the feeling meter!” Alternatively, in front of these images, an image corresponding to the notice effect (in this example, a character “Death Kill!” And a character image (dono)) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the present embodiment, the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter) decreases step by step with time after reaching the uppermost stage, and the scale increases during the acceptance period of the chance button 136. Repeat display and decrease display. Then, at the timing when the chance button 136 is operated, the change (increase / decrease) in the display mode of the scale is stopped, and different effects are executed depending on the position of the scale.

  That is, the timing shown in (o) in FIG. 5 is the timing at which the scale reaches the uppermost stage in anticipation of an increase in the scale of the first state notification image SG1 in which the display mode changes (the scale increases) with the passage of time. By operating the chance button 136, the scale of the first state notification image SG1 is stopped at the uppermost stage, and a notice effect ("hot" effect) advantageous to the player is being executed. .

  Note that the scale stop position of the first state notification image SG1 may be determined in advance by effect lottery regardless of the timing at which the chance button 136 is operated. In this case, the scale stops at a predetermined position when the chance button 136 is operated by the player.

  In addition, the upper limit of the scale stop position of the first state notification image SG1 may be determined in advance by effect lottery. That is, the scale increases or decreases with the passage of time, but the position determined in advance by the effect lottery (for example, the eighth stage) is the upper limit during the acceptance period of the chance button 136, and even if it does not reach the uppermost stage. Good. In this case, the upper limit of the scale stop position may be determined at the timing when the chance button 136 is operated by the player.

  FIG. 199 is a diagram showing the operation means image display after FIG. 198 (o) in time series. The timing shown in FIG. 199 (p) is such that the second operation means image BG2, the second elapsed time notification image TG2, the first state display image SG1, and the notice effect image are erased and shown in FIG. 198 (j). The confrontation scene between the character after the timing and the swordsman character is displayed.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 199 (q) and (r) indicate a scene in which the character (dono) wins over the swordsman character. In FIG. The fluctuation variation display of the combination (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”) is performed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (s) changes the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to white, and the timing shown in FIG. 4 (t) hits the symbol display regions 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 ( After the symbol combination (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”) is displayed in a swinging manner, the ornamental symbols are stopped and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 6 (w), the stop display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is erased, and the “probability big hit” character for notifying the start of the big hit is displayed.

  As described above, in FIGS. 198 to 199, the display examples when the chance button 136 is operated in the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 (after FIG. 198 (k)) have been described.

  FIG. 200 shows a display example when the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed in the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 (after FIG. 198 (k)).

  The timing shown in FIG. 200 (k) shows the same state as the timing shown in FIG. 198 (k).

  The timing shown in FIG. 200 (l) shows a state in which time has elapsed since the start of the reception period of the chance button 136, and the scale (filled portion) of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 gradually decreases. Display an image. At this timing, an image is displayed in which the scale (filled portion) of the first state notification image SG1 gradually increases from the lowest level.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (m) shows a state in which more time has elapsed since the start of the reception period of the chance button 136, and the scale (filled portion) of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 gradually decreases. Display the image. At this timing, the scale (filled portion) of the first state notification image SG1 gradually increases, and an image reaching the uppermost stage is displayed.

  The timings shown in (n) and (o) in the figure are images in which the scale (filled portion) of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 gradually decreases in a state in which time has elapsed from the state of (m) in the figure. Is displayed. Further, after the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter) reaches the uppermost stage, an image that decreases stepwise is displayed.

  Further, the timing shown in FIG. 10 (p) is a state in which time has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 10 (o), the scale (filled portion) of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 disappears, and the reception period of the chance button 136 is The elapsed state is shown. At this timing, an image in which the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter) increases again is displayed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 11 (q), since the operation is not performed during the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136, the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to white and the second operation means The image BG2, the second elapsed time notification image TG2, and the first state notification image SG1 are deleted.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7 (r) displays the confrontation scene between the lord and the swordsman character after the timing shown in FIG. 198 (j), as in FIG. 199 (p).

  As described above, when the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed during the period from the start to the end of the operation reception period of the chance button 136 ((k) to (p) in the figure), the first state notification is performed. The scale of the image SG1 (meter) is repeatedly increased and decreased.

  FIG. 201 shows another notice effect example displayed at the timing of FIG. 198 (o).

  FIG. 201 (o-1) shows a state in which the scale (filled portion) of the first state notification image SG1 is rising before reaching the uppermost stage (for example, the tenth stage) or in the middle of lowering after reaching the uppermost stage. This is an example of the notice effect when the chance button 136 is operated at the timing when the upper stage (for example, the eighth stage) is reached. In this case, an image 730 corresponding to the notice effect (in this example, a character display of “strongly slashing!” And a character image (dono)) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 201 (o-2) shows a notice effect when the chance button 136 is operated at a timing when the scale reaches the middle stage (for example, the fourth stage) while the scale of the first state notification image SG1 is going up or down. It is an example. In this case, an image 730 corresponding to the notice effect (in this example, a character display of “Kiri!” And a character image (dono)) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 201 (o-3) shows a notice effect when the chance button 136 is operated at the timing when the scale reaches the lower stage (for example, the first stage) while the scale of the first state notification image SG1 is going up or down. It is an example. In this case, an image 730 corresponding to the notice effect (in this example, a character display “weakly cut!” And a character image (dono)) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thus, the notice effect may be varied according to the scale of the first state notification image SG1 at the timing when the chance button 136 is operated. In this example, when the scale of the first status notification image SG1 is large, a notice effect with a high degree of advantage for the player is displayed, and when the scale of the first status notification image SG1 is small, the player has the advantage. A notice effect with a low advantage is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the same effect may be performed regardless of the scale stop position of the first state notification image SG1 (meter).

  FIG. 202 is an example of displaying a shift in the super reach production, and is a diagram showing the operation means image display after FIG. 198 (o) in time series.

  The timing shown in FIGS. 202 (p) and (q) displays a scene where the character (dono) loses to the swordsman character as a confrontation scene between the sword and the swordsman character after the timing shown in FIG. 198 (j). In FIG. 202 (q), in the reduced display of the decorative symbols, the fluctuation variation display of the shifted symbol combinations (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”) is performed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7 (r) discolors the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to white, and the timing shown in FIG. 3 (s) is shifted to the symbol display regions 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which the symbol combination (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”) is displayed in a swinging manner is shown in FIG. The hold icon PI1 indicating the remaining number of holds and the change icon CI of the change game are displayed again.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 9 (t), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. As a result, the variable game ends, and a round graphic is displayed in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 208e in preparation for the start of the next special figure 1 variable game.

The period from (u) to (w) shows the state from (t) until the next special figure 1 variable game starts. During this period, an erasing animation for erasing the variation icon CI indicating the hold suspended by the special figure 1 variation game up to (t) in FIG. That is, in this example, after the decorative symbol stop display shown in (t) of FIG.
<Example 25 of operation means image display>

  FIG. 203 is a diagram showing operation means image display of Example 25 in time series. The timing shown in FIG. 10A is a timing corresponding to FIG. 198 (k), and the timing shown in FIG. 10D is a timing corresponding to FIG. 198 (l). That is, in the present embodiment, the normal operation means image display described in the embodiment 24 before the start of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 (between FIG. 198 (k) and FIG. 198 (l)). This is a display example in the case where the effect display 704 is performed during (period).

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B shows a state in which the effect display 704 is performed before the start of the period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136. The effect display 704 is, for example, a display of a notice effect related to the change, and displays (cuts in) a band-shaped image of the character (donor) in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, at least a part of the first display (a part of the first state notification image SG1 (meter), a part of the first operation means image BG1 and the “button” are displayed by the second display (effect display 704). The part of the letters “Press to stop the feeling meter!” Is less visible than before the effect display 704 is displayed (FIG. 5A). In this way, in the present embodiment, by covering with the effect display 704, a part of the first state notification image SG1 (meter), a part of the second operation means image BG1, and “press the button to stop the feeling meter. Some of the characters "!" Are considered difficult for the player to see.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 6C, the effect display 704 displayed in FIG. 5B is hidden (erased), and the operation of the chance button 136 is performed as shown in FIG. The display indicating the start of the reception period is continued.

  Note that the display position of the effect display 704 in the present embodiment is not limited to that shown in FIG. 5B, and at least a part of the first state notification image SG1 (meter) is difficult to view (cover). If so, it may cover the vicinity of the uppermost stage of the first state notification image SG1, or may cover the vicinity of the lowermost stage. Further, it may cover the entire first state notification image SG1.

  FIGS. (B-1) to (B-4) are other display examples of the effect display 704 shown in FIG.

  As shown in (B-1) in the figure, the effect display 704 shows the first state notification image SG1 (meter) and a part of the characters “Press the button to stop the feeling meter!” To the player. Although it is difficult, the decorative symbol reduction display 708, the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display region 208e, and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol display region 208f may not be difficult to visually recognize. In other words, the effect display 704 is in front of the first state notification image SG1 and the letters “Press the button to stop the feeling meter!”, The reduced display 708 of the decorative symbol, the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display region 208e, and the special symbol. 2 is displayed on the rear side of the fourth symbol display area 208f.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5B-2, the effect display 704 makes it difficult to visually recognize the first state notification image SG1, the first operation means image BG1, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1. May be.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5B-3, the effect display 704 is an image that makes it difficult to visually recognize only a part of the first state notification image SG1 (here, a character having a placard of “Gekiatsu”). (Image of (Tono)) may be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4B-4, the effect display 704 moves so that the entire (or substantially the entire) first state notification image SG1 becomes difficult to see or can be visually recognized as time passes. In this example, the effect display 704 is an image in which the characters “super hot” are displayed on a background image having substantially the same area as the entire first state notification image SG1. This is an animation that enters (cuts in) from the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display area 208 and slides left and right.
<Example 26 of operation means image display>

  FIG. 204 is a diagram showing operation means image display of Example 26 in time series. In the present embodiment, the display example in the case where the effect display 704 is performed during the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 (period after FIG. 198 (l)) in the normal operation means image display described in the embodiment 24. is there.

  The timing shown in FIG. 9A is a timing corresponding to FIG. 198 (l), and the timing shown in FIG. 10B is a timing corresponding to FIG. 198 (m).

  The timing shown in FIG. 10C shows a state where the effect display 704 is performed at the timing corresponding to FIG. 198 (n). The effect display 704 is, for example, a display of a notice effect related to the change, and displays an image of the character (donor) in a band shape (cut-in) in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. With this effect display 704, a part of the first state notification image SG1 (meter), a part of the first operation means image BG1, and a part of the characters “Press the button to stop the feeling meter!” The visibility is lower than before the display 704 is displayed (FIGS. (A) and (B)). On the other hand, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 is not deteriorated in visibility (visible to the player), and the chance An image in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the button 136 is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D shows a state in which more time has passed from the timing shown in FIG. 4C (the reception period has progressed), and the effect display 704 is continued. Further, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 displays an image in which the scale of the meter (filled portion) is further reduced from the state shown in FIG.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the effect display 704 causes a part of the first state notification image SG1, a part of the first operation means image BG1, and a part of the characters “Press the button to stop the feeling meter!”. The display of the change in the display mode of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (change in which the filled portion gradually decreases) is continued to be visible to the player while being difficult for the player to see.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 5E, the effect display 704 displayed in FIGS. 4C and 4D is hidden (erased). FIGS. (F) and (G) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 200 (p) and (q), respectively.

  In the present embodiment, the first state notification image SG1 is difficult to visually recognize in the effect display 704 during the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. Therefore, depending on the display position of the effect display 704, the player operates the chance button 136. It becomes difficult to understand when to do. Since the player may refrain from the operation when the operation timing is difficult to understand, the player may be able to guide the operation timing of the chance button 136 by the effect display 704. For example, when the scale of the first status notification image SG1 (meter) is in the lower stage, even if the chance button 136 is operated, it is unlikely that an advantageous result is obtained for the player (the feeling meter does not accumulate sufficiently) By hiding the lower part of the first state notification image SG1 (meter) on the effect display 704, the player may have difficulty operating the chance button 136. By doing in this way, it may be possible to guide the operation at a timing that is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the scale of the first status notification image SG1 (meter) is in the upper stage, the player is trying to operate the chance button 136, but the optimal timing is difficult to understand, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced. There is a case.

Note that the display examples of the effect display 704 shown in FIGS. 203 (B-1) to 203 (B-4) are also applicable to FIGS.
<Example 27 of operation means image display>

  FIG. 205 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of Example 27 in time series. In the present embodiment, during the super-reach (period after FIG. 198 (j)) of the normal operation means image display described in the embodiment 24, the normal display change display and the normal display change display are determined as the effect display 704. It is configured to display a notice effect based on the determination.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 10A to 10C correspond to FIG. 198J, and the normal map is displayed during the super reach production (while the confrontation scenes of the character (dono) and the swordsman character are being displayed). Is started, and the production accompanying the normal fluctuation display is started. Specifically, for example, the display display 704 at this timing includes, for example, a display start animation (character (Chibi princess), Chibi princess roulette display, and “ This is an effect in which an animation displaying a speech balloon “Opening an electric chew when stopped at” is executed (FIGS. (A) and (B)), and the usual decorative symbol variation display is started (FIG. (C)).

  FIGS. (D) to (G) show timings similar to those in FIGS. 198 (k) to (m), and the description of the operation means image display is omitted, but is displayed after FIG. (D). The effect display 704 (ordinary decorative pattern variation display) continues in front of the first state notification image SG1, and at least a part of the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter) is the effect display. 704 makes it difficult for the player to see.

  FIG. 9H shows the same timing as FIG. 198 (n), and description of the operation means image display is omitted, but an effect display 704 (ordinary figure) is displayed in front of the first state notification image SG1. The display of the decorative symbol ◎ (display per unit) is continued, and at least a part of the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter) is difficult for the player to visually recognize by the effect display 704. .

  FIGS. (I) and (J) show timings similar to those in FIGS. 198 (o) and (p), and the description of the operation means image display is omitted, but the effect is produced in front of the first state notification image SG1. The display 704 (the display of the usual decoration symbol ◎ and the display of the balloon “opening electric Chu”) continues. In particular, in FIG. 11I, at least a part of the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter) is difficult for the player to visually recognize by the effect display 704.

  FIGS. (K) and (L) show timings similar to those in FIGS. 198 (p) and (q), and the description of the operation means image display is omitted, but the effect display 704 (ordinary decorative pattern ◎ (Stop display) is continued (FIG. (K)), and by the end of the effect display 704, erasing animation of Chibihime roulette and character (Chibihime) is executed (FIG. (L)).

  FIG. 5M shows the same timing as in FIG. 198 (q) in the state where the effect display 704 is finished.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, at least during the period when the first state notification image SG1 (meter) is displayed (from the start of display of the first state notification image SG1 shown in FIGS. Until the end of the display), at least a part of the first state notification image SG1 has low visibility due to the effect display 704 (it is difficult for the player to see). On the other hand, even during the period in which the effect display 704 is being executed, the change in the display mode of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continuously visible to the player ((D) in the figure). ~ (H)).

  In this embodiment, the case where the effect display 704 is performed during the reach effect has been described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any game form (such as during the decorative display variation display (before the reach effect) or during the big hit) ( For example, at the timing shown in FIG. 198 (c) or FIG. 198 (d), the second display (effect display 704) for reducing the visibility of the first display can be executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11H-1 is a state in which the effect display 704 (ordinary decoration symbol x (stop display of normal illustration) stop display) is continued. Also, the timing shown in FIG. 11 (I-1) is the state after FIG. 11H-1 and when the effect display 704 ends, the animation of deleting Chibihime roulette and characters (Chibihime) is executed. The As described above, the execution period of the effect display 704 may be different depending on whether or not the determination of whether or not the normal fluctuation display is correct and whether or not the determination of whether or not the normal fluctuation display is correct. It should be noted that the execution period of the effect display 704 may be the same in the case where it is determined whether or not the normal fluctuation display is correct and in the case where the determination is normal or not.

The execution (including the execution time) of the effect display 704 based on the determination of whether or not the normal map change display is appropriate can be applied to the following embodiments.
<Example 28 of operation means image display>

  FIG. 206 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of Example 28 in time series. In the present embodiment, two types of effect display 704 (first effect display 7041 and second effect display 704) are performed during super reach (period after FIG. 198 (j)) of the normal operation means image display described in the embodiment 24. The effect display 7042) is performed. For example, the first effect display 7041 is a display of a notice effect based on whether or not the normal map change display and the normal map change display of the twenty-seventh example are correct, and the second effect display 7042 is, for example, the change of the twenty-fifth example. It is a display of the notice effect about.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 5A to 5D are the same as those shown in FIGS. 205A to 205K, but in this embodiment, the advance notice based on the normal map change display and the determination of whether or not the normal figure change display is correct. An effect display (first effect display 7041) is executed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 4D, the first effect display 7041 (second display) is changed to the first state notification image SG1 (first display). ) Is displayed on the front side, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize at least a part of the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter).

  The timing shown in FIG. 9E shows a state after the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the first effect display 7041 continues, and in addition to this, the display of the notice effect regarding the change (second effect display 7042) has started. The first effect display 7041 and the second effect display 7042 make it difficult for the player to visually recognize at least part of the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter). Further, the first effect display 7041 and the second effect display 7042 are displayed at least partially overlapping (overlapping). On the other hand, even in this state, the change in the display mode of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continuously visible to the player. It should be noted that control may be performed so that only the meter is not drawn in the overlapping display area, control may be performed in which only the second effect display 7092 is not drawn, or control in which both are not drawn may be performed. Moreover, you may perform control which draws all.

  In this example, the first effect display 7041 is displayed with priority over the second effect display 7042 (in front), but the second effect display 7042 has priority over the first effect display 7041. It may be displayed (in front). In addition, the first effect display 7041 may be displayed with priority over the second effect display 7042 in time, or the second effect display 7042 may be displayed with priority over the first effect display 7041 in time. These may be displayed at the same time.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6F shows a state after the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the first effect display 7041 continues to reduce the visibility of a part of the first state notification image SG1, but the second effect display 7042 ends.

  The timing shown in FIG. 10G is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 198E and shows a state in which the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has started.

  The timings shown in FIGS. (H) to (O) are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 198 (G) to (M), but at least during the period in which the first state notification image SG1 (meter) is displayed. In (timing of (H) to (K) in the figure), at least a part of the first state notification image SG1 has low visibility due to the first effect display 7041 displayed continuously ( It is considered difficult for the player to see.) On the other hand, even during the period in which the first effect display 7041 is being executed, the change in the display mode of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continuously visible to the player (the same figure). (H) to (J)).

In this embodiment, the case where the effect display 704 is performed during the reach effect has been described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any game form (such as during the decorative display variation display (before the reach effect) or during the big hit) ( For example, at the timing shown in FIG. 198 (c) or FIG. 198 (d), the second display (effect display 704) for reducing the visibility of the first display can be executed.
<Example 29 of operation means image display>

  FIG. 207 is a diagram showing operation means image display of Example 29 in time series. In the twenty-ninth embodiment, as an assumption of the description of the thirty-third embodiment, an example of the operation unit image display when performing a normal operation unit image display will be described. The present embodiment has a configuration in which the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter) is accumulated in response to repeated hits of the chance button 136.

  The timing shown in FIG. 9A shows a state before the start of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136, for example, as in the timing shown in FIG. In the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second operation means image BG2, the second elapsed time notification image TG2, and the first state notification image SG1 are displayed and above the second operation means image BG2. An image that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 (continuous hitting) (for example, “let the spirit meter collect by pressing the button repeatedly!”) Is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B shows a state in which the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 is started. The second operation means image BG2, the second elapsed time notification image TG2, and the first The state notification image SG1 is displayed, and an image (for example, a letter “continuous hit!”) Prompting the operation (continuous hit) of the chance button 136 is displayed above the second operation means image BG2.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C shows a state in which time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds, which is the reception period) has elapsed (the reception period has progressed) since the start of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. An image in which the scale (filled portion) of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 gradually decreases is displayed. In addition, at this timing, the chance button 136 is continuously hit, and the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter) is increased (the feeling meter is accumulated) in accordance with the number of consecutive hits. . That is, in this case, the change condition is one or more operations of the chance button 136, and this is established a plurality of times. Specifically, as the number of consecutive hits of the chance button 136 increases, the first state notification image SG1 displays an image in which the filled portion increases.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D shows a state in which a time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds that is the reception period) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. An image in which the graduation (filled portion) gradually decreases is displayed. Further, at this timing, the chance button 136 is continuously hit, and the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter) is increased from the timing of FIG. It shows the state of accumulation.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows a state in which the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter) is accumulated up to the maximum (uppermost stage) within the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. . That is, an image in which the scale (filled portion) of the first state notification image SG1 reaches the uppermost stage is displayed, and a character of “feeling MAX” is displayed above the first state notification image SG1. It is notified that the scale of the state notification image SG1 (meter) has accumulated to the maximum (uppermost level). Further, after the first state notification image SG1 (meter) has accumulated to the maximum, the second operation means image BG2, the second elapsed time notification image TG2, and the characters “continuous hit” are deleted (or these) In front of the image, an image 730 corresponding to the notice effect (in this example, a character “Death Kill!” And a character image (dono)) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The timing shown in FIG. 9F is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 199 (q). From (F) onward, the “big hit” operation means image display similar to that on and after FIG. 199 (r) is executed. In addition, in a present Example, it is good also as a structure by which the maximum position where a meter accumulate | stores by lottery is determined beforehand. That is, even if the chance button 136 is repeatedly hit repeatedly, the maximum value determined by lottery (for example, the eighth step) or more may not be increased. Even if the determination result is “out of”, an effect of increasing to the maximum value (for example, the 10th stage) may be provided. Even if the result of the determination is “big hit”, an effect that does not increase to the maximum value (for example, the 10th stage) (for example, increases only to the 8th stage) may be performed.

  (D ′) to (G ′) are display examples in which “out of” operation means image display is executed in the present embodiment.

  When the result of the determination is “out of” and the “out of” production is selected in the production lottery, the second operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as shown in FIGS. (D ′) and (E ′). Even if the chance button 136 is repeatedly hit within the period (until the end of the reception period), the first state notification image SG1 (meter) does not accumulate to the maximum (the scale does not change after having accumulated halfway). indicate.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 5F, the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to white (white back), and at the timing shown in FIG. Shows a scene that has lost to a swordsman character.

Thereafter, the “out of” operation means image display similar to that shown in FIG. 202 (q) and thereafter is executed.
<Example 30 of operation means image display>

  FIG. 208 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of Example 30 in time series. This figure shows a state corresponding to the timing shown in FIGS. 207 (A) to (C). That is, the present example is a display example in the case where the effect display 704 is performed during the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 in the normal operation means image display described in the example 29.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 9A to 9C are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 207A to 207C. FIG. 4D shows a state in which more time has elapsed from FIG. 2C, and the state in which the first state notification image SG1 further increases as the number of consecutive hits of the chance button 136 increases. Show. Further, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 gradually decreases.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows a state in which the effect display 704 is being performed during the reception period of the operation (continuous hit) of the chance button 136. The effect display 704 is, for example, a display of a notice effect related to the change, and displays (cuts in) a band-shaped image of the character (donor) in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. By this effect display 704, a part of the first state notification image SG1 (meter), a part of the second operation means image BG1 and a part of the characters “Press the button to stop the feeling meter!” The visibility is lower than before the display 704 is displayed ((A) in the same figure). As described above, the present embodiment is covered with the effect display 704, so that a part of the first state notification image SG1 (meter), a part of the second operation means image BG1, and the characters "continuous hit!" Part of the game is difficult for players to see. On the other hand, a change in the display mode of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 (a change in which the filled portion gradually decreases) continues to be visible to the player.

  The timing shown in FIG. 9F shows a state in which the effect display 704 is continuously performed during the operation period (continuous hitting) of the chance button 136. In this example, even when the effect display 704 is being executed (even during a period in which part of the first state notification image SG1 is difficult to visually recognize by the effect display 704), the chance button 136 is repeatedly hit. Then, an image in which the scale of the first state notification image SG1 increases (the meter accumulates) is displayed, and the change in the display mode of the meter (change in the increase display) is continued.

  In addition, the effect display 704 that makes it difficult to view (hide) the first state notification image SG <b> 1 may be determined based on the result of determination of success / failure or the like, or the operation of the chance button 136 ( For example, or may be displayed when the scale reaches the uppermost stage of the first state notification image SG1. The same applies to the following embodiments.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5G shows a state in which the effect display 704 has ended during the acceptance period of the operation (continuous hit) of the chance button 136. The effect display 704 is hidden (erased), and the second operation means image BG2, the second elapsed time notification image TG2, and the first state notification image SG1 are displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the same time, an image for prompting the operation (continuous hitting) of the chance button 136 (for example, characters “continuous hitting!”) Is continued above the second operation means image BG2.

Also in the present embodiment, each effect display 704 in FIGS. 203 (Embodiment 25) to FIG. 206 (Embodiment 26) can be applied.
<Example 31 of operation means image display>

  FIG. 209 to FIG. 210 are diagrams showing the operation means image display of Example 31 in time series. In the present embodiment, the first state notification image SG1 is made difficult for the player to visually recognize at least one of the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 209 (a), the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 is finished, the stopped symbol is displayed, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 are out of decoration. A combination of symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. In the hold display area 700, two hold icons PI1 and PI2 of FIG. 1 are shown here.

  Next, at the timing shown in FIG. 7B, one special figure 1 hold is consumed, and the special figure 1 variable game hold is reduced from 2 to 1, and the first special figure display device 212 displays the symbol fluctuation display. Is started, and the special figure 1 4th symbol display area 208e displays a circular figure blinking.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6C, a moving animation in which the hold icon PI1 corresponding to the digested hold is moved to the variable icon display area 702 in the hold display area 700 is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 4D, the decorative symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the hold display area 700, the moving animation is completed, the hold icon PI1 corresponding to the remaining hold is displayed, and the change icon CI corresponding to the change game is displayed in the change icon display area 702.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E indicates a state before the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is started, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced and displayed 708 on the lower right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example. Then, the state notification image SG (the first state notification image SG1, the second state notification image SG2, the third state) is formed so that the substantially entire surface of the display area is divided into a plurality (here, three) in the vertical direction. A notification image SG3) is displayed. The state notification image SG of this example is also a meter whose scale increases from the lower stage to the upper stage with the passage of time (or the operation state of the chance button 136), and the whole is filled with the same color (for example, white) here. It is. In addition, a character such as “Long press the button to determine the character!” Is displayed at the upper end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example. At this timing, for example, the third state notification image SG3 on the right side is displayed on the rear surface of the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display region 208e, the special symbol 2 fourth symbol display region 208f, and the decorative symbol reduction display 708. , The fourth symbol 217, 218 (circular figure (flashing), triangular figure) and the decorative symbol reduction display 708 (both are the second display), the third state notification image SG3 (first display) ) At least part of the visibility is low (it is difficult for the player to see).

  The timing shown in FIG. 5F shows a state in which a reception period for the operation of the chance button 136 (here, a long press operation) has started. For example, on the front of the second state notification image SG2 in the center, A notification display 706 that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is displayed. The notification display 706 that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 in the present embodiment is, for example, a display of the first operation means image BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and the characters “long press!”. In addition, since it is at the start of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is in a state of being entirely filled.

  That is, at this timing, the visibility of at least part of the second state notification image SG2 of the second state notification image SG2 (first display) is reduced by the notification display 706 (second display). (It is considered difficult for players to see.) In addition, the third state notification image SG3 (first display) is also continuously displayed by at least a part of the third state notification image SG3 by the reduced display (second display) of the fourth symbols 217 and 218 and the decorative symbols. Visibility is low (it is considered difficult for the player to see).

  The timings shown in (g) and (h) of FIG. 6 indicate a state in which time (acceptance period) has progressed from the start of the acceptance period of the chance button 136, and the first status notification image SG1 and the second status notification. In each of the image SG2 and the third state notification image SG3, for example, an image in which the scale is sequentially increased from the lower stage to the upper stage is displayed. In this example, the scale is a divided image of the character (爺), character (princess), and character (dono), that is, the character (爺) and the second state notification image SG2 in the first state notification image SG1. The character (princess) and the scale (divided image) of the character (donor) sequentially increase in the third state notification image SG3, and an image approaching the completed image is displayed. Further, in the first state notification image SG1, the second state notification image SG2, and the third state notification image SG3, the speeds at which the scales increase are different from each other, and the speeds at which the scales increase in the middle are switched (for example, the same) In the figure (g), the scale of the third state notification image SG3 increases rapidly, but in the figure (h), the scale of the first state notification image SG1 increases rapidly). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the state notification images SG may have a scale that increases at the same speed, or the speed may not change in the middle. Further, as the acceptance period of the chance button 136 progresses, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 displays an image in which the filled portion gradually decreases.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (i) shows a state in which the acceptance period of the chance button 136 has further progressed, and the first state notification image SG1, the second state notification image SG2, and the third state notification image SG3. In each of the images, the scale gradually increases. Here, the scale of the second state notification image SG2 (character (princess)) is preceded by the first state notification image SG1 (character (爺)) and the third state notification image SG3 (character (dono)). The upper stage is reached and the character (princess) is approaching the completed image. Further, as the acceptance period of the chance button 136 progresses, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 displays an image in which the filled portion gradually decreases.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (j) further shows the state at the end of the acceptance period of the chance button 136. Here, in the first state notification image SG1 and the third state notification image SG3, the scale does not reach the uppermost end, and the completed image of the character (爺) and character (dono) is not displayed, but the second state The notification image SG2 has a scale at the top, and a completed image of the character (princess) is displayed. In addition, with the end of the acceptance period of the chance button 136, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 displays an image in which the first color is not filled and the whole is filled with the second color (for example, white). Has been.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the second state notification image SG2 (first display) is difficult for the player to visually recognize by the notification display 706 (second display). The change in the display mode of the elapsed time notification image TG1 (change in which the filled portion is reduced) is visible to the player. Further, the third state notification image SG3 (first display) is also difficult for the player to visually recognize due to the reduced display (second display) of the fourth symbol and the decorative symbol. In this example, the first state notification image SG1 (part of the first display) is visible to the player without overlapping the second display at any timing. .

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (k) further shows the state after the end of the acceptance period of the chance button 136, and the notification display 706 (first operation means) displayed on the front surface of the second state notification image SG2. The image BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and the characters “Long press!” Are deleted, and the selection of the character (princess) is determined.

  The timings shown in (l) to (m) in the figure are in a state where an effect indicating that the selection of the character (princess) has been determined is being executed, and is shown in (n) to (o) in the figure. The timing is a state in which a super reach production by the determined character (princess) is being executed.

  210 (p) and (q) show a state in which the result of the determination is wrong at the timing after FIG. 209 (o), and the symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display area 208 are shifted. The combination (for example, “decoration 6—decoration 5—decoration 6”) is displayed in a swinging manner ((p) in the figure), and the stop display of the decorative symbols is performed ((q) in the figure).

On the other hand, FIGS. 210 (p ′) and (q ′) show that the determination result is a big hit at the timing after FIG. 209 (o), and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display area 208 are displayed. The jackpot symbol combination (for example, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”) is displayed in a swinging manner (FIG. (P ′)), and the ornamental symbol is stopped (q ′).
<Thirty-second embodiment of image display by operation means>

  FIG. 211 is a diagram showing operation means image display of the embodiment 32 in time series. In the present embodiment, like the embodiment 32, the meter scales of the first state notification image SG1, the second state notification image SG2, and the third state notification image SG3 are respectively increased. Yes.

  The timing shown in FIG. 9A is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 209 (e), and shows a state before the start of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B is a timing after the timing shown in FIG. 5A, and shows a state in which the effect display 704 is started before the start of the operation reception period of the chance button 136. The effect display 704 is displayed preferentially (in front) over the first state notification image SG1, the second state notification image SG2, and the third state notification image SG3. In this example, the effect display 704 displays a group notice effect (animation display) which is a kind of special figure jackpot notice effect in the variable game, and at the timing shown in FIG. (Hani) appears and executes a moving animation that moves from the right side to the left side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. A part of the third state notification image SG3 is difficult for the player to visually recognize due to the effect display 704 (character (Hani)), the fourth symbol, and the reduced symbol 708 of the decorative symbol.

  The timing shown in FIG. 10C is the same timing as the timing shown in FIG. 209 (f), and shows a state in which the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136 (here, a long press operation) has started. That is, a notification display 706 (first operation means image BG1, first elapsed time notification image TG1 and “long press!” Characters prompting the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed on the front surface of the second state notification image SG2 in the center. Display). Further, the effect display 704 (animation display of group notice) is also continued, and a moving animation in which a plurality of characters (Hani) appear is executed following the first character (Hani). In addition, since it is at the start of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is in a state of being entirely filled. A part of the second state notification image SG2 is difficult to be seen by the player by the notification display 706 and the effect display 704 (character (Hani)), and a part of the third state notification image SG3 is an effect display 704. (Character (Hani)), the 4th symbol, and the reduced display 708 of the decorative symbol make it difficult for the player to see.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D is the same timing as the timing shown in FIG. 209G, and the notification display 706 continues in front of the second state notification image SG2. Also, the effect display 704 is continued, and after the first character (Hani), a large number of characters (Hani) appear one after another, and a moving animation from the right side to the left side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is executed. To do. The effect display 704 is executed prior to the notification display 706 (in front). That is, a part of the second state notification image SG2 is difficult for the player to visually recognize by the notification display 706 displayed on the front thereof, and the notification display 706 is further displayed to the player by the effect display 704 displayed on the front thereof. It is considered difficult to see. Further, a part of the first state notification image SG3 is difficult for the player to visually recognize by the effect display 704 (character (Hani)), and a part of the third state notification image SG3 is displayed by the effect display 704 (character ( Hani)), the 4th symbol and the reduced display 708 of the decorative symbol make it difficult for the player to see.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 209H, and the notification display 706 continues in front of the second state notification image SG2. Further, although the effect display 704 is continued, the effect display 704 is ended in front of the third state notification image SG3 and the second state notification image SG2 because of the moving animation display. That is, a part of the third state notification image SG3 is difficult for the player to visually recognize by the reduced display 708 of the fourth symbol and the decorative symbol, and a part of the second state notification image SG2 is played by the notification display 706. Although it is difficult for the player to visually recognize, the notification display 706 is visible to the player because the animation that moves in front of the notification display 706 ends. Further, a part of the first state notification image SG3 is difficult for the player to visually recognize due to the effect display 704 (character (Hani)).

  The timing shown in FIG. 8F is the same timing as the timing shown in FIG. 209 (i), and shows a state where the effect display 704 has ended.

In the present embodiment, the notification display 706 that reduces the visibility of the second state notification image SG2 (first display) is difficult for the player to visually recognize by the effect display 704 displayed on the front thereof. In addition, due to the effect display 704 (animation display), there is a period in which the change in the display mode of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (change in which the filled portion is reduced) is difficult for the player to visually recognize (D). ), And there is a period during which it is visible ((C), (E), (F) in the figure). In this case, the effect display 704 may also be an animation (image) that allows the player to visually recognize the change in the display mode of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 over the entire period during which the chance button 136 is accepted. Good.
<Example 33 of operation means image display>

  FIG. 212 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of Example 33 in time series. In this embodiment, a tutorial display (tutorial notice) 710 is performed instead of the effect display 704 (group notice display) of the embodiment 32 (FIG. 211).

  The timings shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B are the same as the timings shown in FIG. 209E, but in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. At a later timing and before the start of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136 (here, the long press operation), the tutorial display 710 (here, a balloon image and “a pattern in which a meter suddenly accumulates is also available.” Is displayed). The tutorial display 710 is displayed on the front surface of the first state notification image SG1 and the second state notification image SG2, and reduces the visibility thereof.

  The timing shown in FIG. 10C is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 209F, and the notification display 706 displayed on the front surface of the second state notification image SG2 is difficult for the player to visually recognize by the tutorial display 710. It is said that.

The timing shown in FIG. 4D is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 209 (g), and shows a state where the tutorial display 710 is erased. Note that the tutorial display 710 of this embodiment can also be referred to as an effect display 704 or a notification display 706. Here, the tutorial display may indicate a display for explaining an effect (notice, character, etc.) performed on the gaming machine.
<Example 34 of Operation Means Image Display>

  FIG. 213 is a diagram showing operation means image display of the embodiment 34 in time series. In the present embodiment, the visibility of at least a part of the state notification image SG is reduced by the prefetch hold icon 712.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B are the same as the timing shown in FIG. 209E, but as an example, the moving animation of the prefetch hold icon 712 starts at the timing shown in FIG. Indicates the state.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 9C and 9D are the same timings as shown in FIGS. 209F and G, but the moving animation of the prefetch hold icon 712 is continued, and the timing shown in FIGS. At the timing, the prefetch hold icon 712 is displayed in front of a part of the first state notification image SG1, and a part of the first state notification image SG1 is difficult for the player to see.

The timing shown in FIG. 5E is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 209H, but the standby animation of the prefetch hold icon 712 continues, and the first status notification image is displayed by the prefetch hold icon 712. Part of SG1 is difficult for the player to see. Further, in the same figure (D) and the same figure (E), since the prefetch hold icon 712 moves during standby, the area of the first state notification image SG1 whose visibility is reduced (hidden) by the prefetch hold icon 712 Has changed. Note that the prefetch hold icon 712 of the present embodiment can be said to be an effect display 704 or a notification display 706.
<Example 35 of operation means image display>

  FIG. 214 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of Example 35 in time series. In this embodiment, the visibility of at least a part of the state notification image SG is reduced by the error display 714.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 9A to 9D are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 209E to 209G and 209M, respectively. Here, as an example, the door opening error is detected and the error display 714 (for example, “Error: the door is open!”) Is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. . For example, the error display 714 is displayed over the first state notification image SG1, the second state notification image SG2, and the third state notification image SG3.

For example, as shown in FIG. 4D, the error display 714 is continuously displayed during a period in which the door opening error state is not canceled. Note that the error display 714 in this embodiment can also be regarded as an effect display 704 or a notification display 706.
<Example 36 of operation means image display>

  FIG. 215 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of Example 36 in time series. In the present embodiment, at least a part of the visibility of the state notification image SG is reduced by the alert notification display 718.

  The timing shown in (a) of the figure is a state in which the big hit end screen is displayed. In the timing shown in (b), the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state before the first change game after the probable big hit ends. It shows the state that was done.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C shows a state in which a warning alert display 718 is performed on the front of the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed (here, the symbol combination of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”). Show. For example, the alert notification display 718 is configured to move and display a character string for alerting a belt-like background image.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 4D and 4E show a state in which one hold is consumed (the number of holds is reduced from 4 to 3) and the variable game of FIG. 1 is started. Further, the alert alert display 718 continues. At these timings, the warning alert display 718 is superimposed on the belt-like background image and the characters “Please be careful not to forget to pay your prepaid card” are displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5F is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 209 (e) as the operation means image display, although the number of holds is different. Attention notification display 718 is displayed on the front surface of first state notification image SG1, second state notification image SG2, and third state notification image SG3, and first state notification image SG1 and second state notification image SG2 are displayed. In addition, a part of the third state notification image SG3 is difficult for the player to visually recognize. Further, due to the reduced display of the fourth symbol and the decorative symbol, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize a part of the third state notification image SG3.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5G is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 209 (f) as the operation means image display, although the number of holds is different. A notification display 706 is displayed on the front surface of the second state notification image SG2, and a warning notification display 718 is further displayed on the front surface thereof. A part of the second state notification image SG2 (for example, “Long press!”) Is difficult for the player to visually recognize by the notification display 706, and a part of the notification display 706 is displayed by the alert notification display 718. It is difficult to see. The first state notification image SG <b> 1 and the third state notification image SG <b> 3 are difficult to view by the alerting notification display 718 and the like as in FIG.

  The timings shown in (i) and (j) of FIG. 18 indicate the same state as the timings shown in FIGS. 208 (i) and (j). A notification display 706 is displayed on the front surface of the second state notification image SG2, and a warning notification display 718 is further displayed on the front surface thereof. A part of the second state notification image SG2 (for example, “Long press!”) Is difficult for the player to visually recognize by the notification display 706, and a part of the notification display 706 is displayed by the alert notification display 718. It is difficult to see. The first state notification image SG <b> 1 and the third state notification image SG <b> 3 are difficult to view by the alerting notification display 718 and the like as in FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 10 (k) shows a state in which the alert notification display 718 is erased, and the notification display 706 displayed on the front surface of the second state notification image SG2 is visible to the player. Yes.

The alert notification display 718 of the present embodiment can be said to be an effect display 704 or a notification display 706. In addition, the alert notification display 718 of the present embodiment is repeatedly displayed for a predetermined number of times, such as “Please be careful not to forget to pay for the prepaid card” (for example, until the travel display is turned twice). However, it may be displayed for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds from the start of fluctuation). In addition, although the alerting notification display 718 of the present embodiment is performed before the start of fluctuation of the special figure, it may be performed after the start of fluctuation of the special figure. Note that the alert alert display 718 is displayed when the gaming state before the big hit starts is in a special figure low probability state, and the gaming state after the big hit ends is shifted to a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state (probability change state). May be performed only when the transition from the special figure high-accuracy normal figure low-accuracy state (time-short state) to the special-figure low-accuracy general figure low-accuracy state (normal state) (that is, the first change after the time reduction ends). May be performed only. Further, it may be performed after the big hit ends regardless of the gaming state.
<Example 37 of operation means image display>

  FIG. 216 to FIG. 217 are diagrams showing operation means image display of Example 37 in time series. In the thirty-seventh embodiment, as an assumption of the description of the thirty-eighth to thirty-fourth embodiments, an example of the operation unit image display when performing normal operation unit image display will be described. The present embodiment executes a reach effect that causes the player to operate the chance button 136 one or more times. For example, a state notification image (here, the first state notification is generated by a plurality of operations of the chance button 136). It has a configuration in which the scale of the meter of the image SG1 and the second state notification image SG2) is changed.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 198H and 198i, although the positions of the reduced display of the decorative symbols are different.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C is a first state notification image SG1 that displays a confrontation scene between the character (dono) and the swordsman character and suggests the degree of damage of the character (dono) and the swordsman character with a meter. And the state which is displaying 2nd state alerting | reporting image SG2 is shown. In addition, the characters “YOSHIMUNE” and “KENGOU” are displayed above the first state notification image SG1 and above the second state notification image SG2, respectively.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D shows a state in which an operation notification display 720 for notifying the operation timing of the chance button 136 is displayed. Here, the operation notification display 720 displays the letters “Chance is three times!” On the belt-like background image in order to notify the number of operations of the chance button 136.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6E shows a state in which an operation notification display 720 for notifying that the first operation of the chance button 136 corresponds to the attack of the character (donor) is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5F shows the state before the start of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136, and the first corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 is displayed on the front of the operation notification display 720. And the first elapsed time notification image TG1 corresponding to the elapsed time of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 are displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5G shows a state after the start of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 (during the reception period), and the scale of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 gradually decreases. The image is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5H shows a state where the first operation (character (dono) attack) of the chance button 136 is performed. The operation notification display 720, the first operation means image BG1, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are once erased, and the second state notification image SG2 displays an image with a reduced scale (filled portion). Notifies the decrease in character damage.

  The timings shown in FIGS. (I) to (L) are operation means image displays corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136. The second operation of the chance button 136 is the same as (E) to FIG. 10 except that the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 are displayed and the operation corresponds to the counterattack of the swordsman character. The description is omitted because it is similar to FIG.

  Each timing shown in FIGS. 9M to 10O is a state in which the operation means image display corresponding to the third operation of the chance button 136 is being performed. In the third operation of the chance button 136, the third operation means image BG3 and the third elapsed time notification image TG3 are displayed ((O) in the figure).

Each timing shown in FIGS. 217 (P) to (R) shows a state after the timing shown in FIG. 216 (O). There is a third operation during the acceptance period of the third operation of the chance button 136 (FIG. (P)), and by this, the character (Mr.) wins (FIG. (Q) (R)), and the reduced display The displayed decorative symbols stop and display a symbol combination (for example, “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7”) that is a big hit ((R) in the figure). In this embodiment, the operation notification display 720 can be said to be an effect display 704 or a notification display 706.
<Example 38 of operation means image display>

  FIG. 218 is a diagram showing operation means image display of Example 38 in time series. In the present embodiment, at least a part of the first state notification image SG1 or the second state notification image SG2 of the normal operation means image display described in the embodiment 37 is difficult for the player to visually recognize by the effect display 704. It is a display example.

  The timing shown in FIG. 2C is the same as the timing shown in FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D shows a state in which the effect display 704 is displayed on the front surface of the first state notification image SG1 in FIG. In this example, the effect display 704 is a mission completion display, which makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize a part of the first state notification image SG1 (a meter that displays the damage of the character (donor)).

The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows the same timing as that shown in FIG. 216D, and the timing shown in FIG. 5F shows a state in which the effect display 704 is erased.
<Example 39 of operation means image display>

  FIG. 219 is a diagram showing operation means image display of Example 39 in time series. In the present embodiment, at least a part of the first state notification image SG1 or the second state notification image SG2 of the normal operation means image display described in the embodiment 37 is difficult for the player to visually recognize by the effect display 704. This is a display example, and the effect display 704 here is a hitting notification display.

  The timing shown in FIG. 2C is the same as the timing shown in FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D shows a state in which the effect display (hitting notification display) 704 is displayed on the front surface of the first state notification image SG1 in FIG. Thereby, a part of the first state notification image SG1 (meter that displays the damage of the character (donor)) and a part of the second state notification image SG2 (a meter that displays the damage of the character (donor)) are games. It is considered difficult to see.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows the same timing as the timing shown in FIG. 216D, and the timing shown in FIG. 5R shows the same timing as the timing shown in FIG. Is. As described above, in this embodiment, even when the reach effect is finished, the effect display (hitting method display) 704 is continued. The effect display (hitting method notification display) 704 is a predetermined time from the last sensor detection (for example, detection of the passing of the game ball by the sensor of the normal start port 228) by the game ball launched into the area on the right side of the board. When elapses, the display ends (the display is erased).

The hitting notification display may be displayed when the player has operated (turned) the handle to a certain position (position where the game ball is launched into the right region). In that case, the display may be terminated when the player operates the handle to a certain position (position where the game ball is launched into the left area). In addition, the notification of how to hit may be performed simultaneously with the effect display as well as the effect display.
<Example 40 of operation means image display>

  FIG. 220 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of Example 40 in time series. In the present embodiment, at least a part of the first state notification image SG1 or the second state notification image SG2 of the normal operation means image display described in the embodiment 37 is reduced in visibility by the effect display 704 (game). This is an example of display). In addition, although the example 37 demonstrated the example of a display when operating the chance button 136 3 times, this example is a display example when operating the chance button 136 twice.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5G shows the same state as the timing shown in FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11H shows a state in which the chance button 136 is operated during the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136, and thereby the effect display 704 is displayed. The effect display 704 is, for example, a notice effect, and here, a panda image is displayed (cut-in) so as to be inserted into the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereby, at least a part of the first state notification image SG1 and the second state notification image SG2 is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  Also, the timing shown in FIG. 10I shows a state in which the effect display 704 is displayed on the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The effect display 704 is displayed on the rear surface of the special symbol 1 4th symbol display area 208e, the special symbol 2 4th symbol display region 208f, and the decorative symbol reduced display 708, whereby the first state notification image SG1 and the second symbol are displayed. All of the state notification images SG2 are difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6J shows a state in which the effect display 704 has been erased (finished). In this state, a character (panda) is added next to the character (dono), and the display (effect display) above the first state notification image SG1 is also changed from “YOSHIMUNE” (see FIG. 5G) to “YOSHIMUNE & PANDA”. Has changed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 10K indicates the state before the start (immediate) of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136, and corresponds to the second operation of the chance button 136 on the front of the operation notification display 720. The second operation means image BG2 to be displayed and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 corresponding to the elapsed time of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 are displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11L shows a state after the start of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 (during the reception period), and the scale of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 gradually decreases. The image is displayed.

The timings shown in FIGS. 7 (M) to (O) indicate the state where the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed, and the operation means image display is shown in FIGS. 217 (Q) to (R). Since it is the same as the state of each timing, explanation is omitted.
<Example 41 of operation means image display>

  FIG. 221 is a diagram showing operation means image display of Example 41 in time series. The present embodiment has a configuration for executing a rewind effect in addition to the normal operation means image display described in the embodiment 37, and the first state notification image is displayed by a part of the display of the rewind effect. It is an example of a display which makes visibility of at least one part of SG1 or 2nd state alerting | reporting image SG2 fall (a player makes it difficult to visually recognize).

  The respective timings shown in FIGS. (L) to (P) are the same as the respective timings shown in FIGS. 216 (L) to 216 (P).

  The timing shown in FIG. 11P shows a state in which the execution of the rewind effect is started (the state at the start of execution) based on, for example, the third operation of the chance button 136. At this timing, a pause mark and “pause” characters are displayed as an effect display 704 above the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the same image is displayed for a predetermined time, and the image is stopped. It looks like Even in this case, the variation display of the decorative symbol and the blinking of the special symbol 1 and 4 symbol display area 208e are continued.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11 (Q) shows a state in which the rewind effect is being executed. At this timing, a rewind mark and “rewind” characters are displayed as an effect display 704 above the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and an image displayed at an earlier timing (image several frames before) Is displayed to show that rewinding display is being performed. Here, the image displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 5 (O) is displayed again, and the third elapsed time notification image TG3 also displays an image that is entirely filled.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7 (R) shows a state in which the rewind effect is being executed, and the image displayed at the timing shown in FIG. At the timing shown in FIG. 11 (L), a first state notification image SG1 and a second state notification image SG2 are displayed, and a rewind effect effect display 704 displays the entire first state notification image SG1. Part of the second state notification image SG2 is hidden, making it difficult for the player to see.

  At each timing shown in FIGS. (S) to (V), a rewind effect is continuously executed. As shown in FIGS. (S) and (T), the second operation means image BG2 and the second progress are shown. A state in which the time notification image TG2 is displayed is shown. In FIGS. 5 (S) and (T), the meter (scale) of the third elapsed time notification image TG3 is displayed as being rewound, but it is actually outside the reception period of the chance button 136. Also during the period of (S) to (V) in the figure, the entire first state notification image SG1 and a part of the second state notification image SG2 are hidden by the effect display 704 of the rewind effect. It is considered difficult to see.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (W) shows the state at the end of the rewind effect. The image displayed at the timing of FIG. 216 (B) is redisplayed, and the effect display 704 for rewind display is displayed. It is displayed. The timing shown in FIG. 6 (X) shows a state after the end of the rewind effect. Thereafter, the operation means image display of FIG. 216 (B) and thereafter is executed again.

  In this embodiment, an example of redisplaying an image several frames before as a rewind effect has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a rewind movie (reverse playback movie) may be prepared and played back. The rewind effect may be performed by using a control movie that actually rewinds and plays back the movie used in the operation means image display. During the rewind effect, the operation means image and / or the elapsed time notification image may be hidden.

In the above embodiment, the effect display 704 may be changed to the notification display 706, or the notification display 706 may be changed to the effect display 704.
<Example 42 of operation means image display>

  With reference to FIGS. 222 to 229, an outline of the sixth embodiment and another modification will be described as Example 42. FIG.

  FIG. 222 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the sixth embodiment. As shown in the figure, the gaming table (for example, pachinko machine 100) of the sixth embodiment includes display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), and the display means has a first display (for example, first display). Is a means capable of displaying at least the state notification image SG1). The first display is a display related to the operation of the operation means (for example, a display according to the operation timing or a display according to the number of consecutive hits), and the first display is an operation of the operation means. Accordingly, the display mode of the first display can be changed at least (for example, an increase display or a decrease display that increases the scale of the meter is possible), and the first display is a second state (for example, a player). (A state in which the hot notice effect display 704 is being executed) that is advantageous to the first state (for example, a state in which the hot notice effect display 704 is not executed) is at least more visible The display is lowered.

  FIG. 223 is a schematic diagram illustrating the first display in FIG. 222. FIGS. 9A to 9H are diagrams showing the operation means image display of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. The first display is performed by operating the operation means during a period such as an operation reception period, as shown from display A-0 ′ in FIG. 10C to display AN in FIG. This is a display (effect display) in which the display mode changes. The display A-0 in FIG. 5B shows a state in which an image or the like that is the first display is displayed, but the operation reception period has not started, and the display A in FIG. -N 'indicates a state after the image, which is the first display, is displayed but the operation acceptance period has ended. That is, the time here is, for example, from the start of the reception period of the operating means (chance button 136) ((c) in the same figure) to the end of the reception period (except at the end) ((f) in the same figure). This is a period, and a display whose display mode changes by operating the operating means during this period is referred to as a first display.

  The operation of the operation means includes one operation, a plurality of operations, repeated hits, long presses, a non-contact operation for detecting a hand held by a proximity sensor, a flick operation for detecting by a touch sensor, or the like. . Further, the period during which the operating means is operated is the time from when the display A is displayed until it is erased (from the start of the reception period shown in FIG. 5B to the reception period shown in FIG. It is also possible to set the first display including the display before the start of the reception period shown in FIG. 5B and the display after the end of the reception period shown in FIG. Also good.

  FIG. 224 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the sixth embodiment from another viewpoint. As shown in the figure, the gaming table (for example, pachinko machine 100) of the sixth embodiment includes display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), and the display means has a first display (for example, first display). The elapsed time notification image TG1 and the first state notification image SG1) can be displayed at least. The first display is a display related to the operation of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136), and the first display is the establishment of the change condition (for example, the progress of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136). Or when the chance button 136 is repeatedly hit), the display mode of the first display can be changed at least (for example, the display can be reduced to reduce the scale of the meter). When it is in the second state (for example, a state in which the (attention) notice effect that is advantageous to the player is being executed) than in the first state (for example, in a state in which the attraction notice effect is not being executed). The first display is a display that at least continues the change in the display mode of the first display in the second state.

  FIG. 225 is a schematic diagram illustrating the first display in FIG. 224. FIGS. 9A to 9H are diagrams showing the operation means image display of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. The first display is a display (effect display) in which the display mode changes with the passage of time, as shown from display B-0 ′ in FIG. 10C to display BN in FIG. is there. The display b-0 in FIG. 5B shows a state in which an image or the like that is the first display is displayed, but the operation reception period has not started, and the display B in FIG. -N 'indicates a state after the image, which is the first display, is displayed but the operation acceptance period has ended. That is, the time here is, for example, from the start of the reception period of the operating means (chance button 136) ((c) in the same figure) to the end of the reception period (except at the end) ((f) in the same figure). A display that is a period and whose display mode changes with the passage of time during this period is referred to as a first display.

  The time is not limited to a period during which the operation means can be received, but is the total time during which the operation means is actually operated (for example, the operation time when the chance button 136 is operated a plurality of times (including repeated hits)). Or a time during which the operation means is continuously operated (for example, long press). Moreover, it is good also as time (it is before the end of the reception period shown in the figure (g) from the start of the reception period shown in the figure (b)) after the display B is displayed until it erases, That is, the display may be the first display including the display before the start of the reception period shown in FIG. 5B and the display after the end of the reception period shown in FIG.

  FIG. 226 is a diagram illustrating the second display. (A) to (h) of FIG. 8A are display examples of operation means image display at a plurality of timings of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. In the figure, the second display is represented as display C, and the first display is represented as display A (see FIG. 223) or display B (see FIG. 224). FIG. 5B is a diagram showing the display start timing of the second display (display C) over time.

  Further, the second display (display C) is, for example, an effect display 704 (animation display, hitting effect display, rewind effect display, tutorial display, prefetch hold icon, error display, jackpot confirmation display, probability change state and time reduction state. And the like), a notification display 706, a fourth symbol, a reduced display 708 of a decorative symbol, and the like.

  The display timing of the second display (display C) may be a period before the start of the first display (display A, display B) as shown in FIG. Further, as shown in FIG. 5B, it may be simultaneously with the start of display of the first display or after the start of display of the first display. After the display of the first display is started, immediately after the display of the first display is started or after the display of the first display is started, the maximum period is, for example, about 10 seconds. Further, as shown in FIG. 8C, it may be before the operation acceptance period of the operation means (FIG. 223 (b), FIG. 225 (b)). Further, as shown in FIGS. 5D to 5F, it may be during the period for accepting the operation of the operating means (during the period when the display mode of the first display is changing). Further, as shown in FIG. 5G, it may be after the operation acceptance period of the operation means (FIG. 223 (g), FIG. 225 (g)). Alternatively, it may be after the first display is erased (or just after the erase) as shown in FIG. Further, the start timing of the second display is not always the same timing, and one or more timings (a) to (h) in the figure may be combined.

  On the other hand, the erase timing of the second display may be a period before the start of the first display (display A, display B), as shown in FIG. Further, as shown in FIG. 5B, it may be simultaneously with the start of display of the first display or after the start of display of the first display. After the display of the first display is started, immediately after the display of the first display is started or after the display of the first display is started, the maximum period is, for example, about 10 seconds. Further, as shown in FIG. 8C, it may be before the operation acceptance period of the operation means (FIG. 223 (b), FIG. 225 (b)). Further, as shown in FIGS. 5D to 5F, it may be during the period for accepting the operation of the operating means (during the period when the display mode of the first display is changing). Further, as shown in FIG. 5G, it may be after the operation acceptance period of the operation means (FIG. 223 (g), FIG. 225 (g)). Alternatively, it may be after the first display is erased (or just after the erase) as shown in FIG. Further, the erase timing of the second display is not always the same timing, but may be a combination of one or more timings (a) to (h) in FIG.

  FIG. 227 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display form of the second display. In the second display, the display mode and the display position may not change during the display period, or at least one of the display mode and the display position may change.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the second display (display C) hides the entire first display (display A or display B) (the first display is difficult for the player to see). It may be.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, the second display (display C) hides at least a part of the first display (display A or display B), and the size (area) of the second display. The area of the region that hides the first display may be changed (reduced) by changing (reducing).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5C, the second display (display C) hides at least a part of the first display (display A or display B), and the size (area) of the second display. The area of the region for hiding the first display may be changed (enlarged) by changing (enlarging).

  As shown in FIG. 4D, the display position of the second display (display C) moves while hiding at least part of the first display (display A or display B). Thus, the position of the area for hiding the first display may be changed (moved).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5E, the second display (display C) hides at least a part of the first display (display A or display B), while the display position (or display) of the second display. By moving the (direction), the area of the first display hidden area, the hidden area, or the hidden position may be changed (moved) depending on the shape of the second display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5F, the second display (display C) changes its shape, and at least part of the first display (display A or display B) is hidden, By changing the shape of the second display, the area of the area to be hidden, the area to be hidden, or the position to be hidden may be changed (moved).

  The second display may be composed of any one combination of (a) to (f) in the figure, and from one or all or all combinations of (a) to (f) in the figure. It may be configured. In addition, the combinations of two or more or all of the combinations (a) to (f) in the figure include, for example, the change in the figure (c) after the change in the figure (b) left figure → middle figure → right figure. Is also included, and there is also included a configuration that changes from the left diagram in FIG. 5B to the middle diagram in FIG. -Same for FIG.

  FIG. 228 is a diagram illustrating the first state and the second state according to the sixth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, in the second state, the second display (display C) overlaps the first display (display A or display B) (by being displayed over the front), so that the first display The visibility of the first display is lower in the second state than in the state.

  That is, as shown to the left figure of the figure (a), a 1st state is a state where only the 1st display (display A or display B) is displayed, and the 2nd display (display C) is not displayed. In the second state, the second display (display C) is transmitted over the first display (display A or display B) as shown in the middle diagram of FIG. This is the state displayed at a rate of 0%. Alternatively, in the second state, the first display (display A or display B) is superimposed on the first display (display A or display B) as shown in the right figure of FIG. In this state, it is displayed with less than 100% (for example, transmittance of 50%).

  Further, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 5B, the first state is superimposed on (in front of) only the first display (display A or display B), and the second display (display C) is displayed. The second state is displayed in a small state (for example, smaller than the first display), and the second state is superimposed on the first display as shown in the middle or right diagram of FIG. The display is displayed larger than the left figure of FIG.

  In addition, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 8C, the first state is superimposed on the first display (display A or display B) (in front of it), and the second display (display C) is The second state is a state of being displayed with a large transmittance (for example, a transmittance of 80%). The second state is the first display (display A or display B) as shown in the middle or left of FIG. ) (In front of it), the second display (display C) is displayed with a small transmittance (for example, a transmittance of 30% or 50%).

  Moreover, as shown in the left figure of the same figure (d), a 1st state is a state with which the 1st display (display A or display B) and the 2nd display (display C) do not overlap. In the second state, the second display (display C) is displayed over the first display (display A or display B) (in front of it) as shown in the right figure of FIG. It is in a state. In this case, the transmittance of the second display in the second state is 0% or more (including a case where only the frame line is not filled) and less than 100%.

  Further, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 5E, the first state is a state in which only the first display (display A or display B) is displayed, and the second state is the same as FIG. e) As shown in the right figure, the second display (display C) is displayed on the rear surface of the first display (display A or display B), and the second display is the first display. This is the case for similar colors. Even when the second display is displayed on the rear surface of the first display, the visibility of the first display is low when these are similar colors.

  In addition, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 5F, the first state is a state in which the second display (display C) is displayed on the rear surface of the first display (display A or display B). The second display is not the same color as the first display, and the second state is the rear surface of the first display (display A or display B) as shown in the right figure (f). The second display (display C) is displayed, and the second display has a similar color to the first display.

  Note that only one of the display forms (changes) of the second display shown in FIGS. 227 (a) to (f), or a plurality of combinations of FIGS. ) To (f), only one of the first state and the second state, or a plurality of combinations of FIGS. 228 (a) to (f) may be applied to each other.

  FIG. 229 illustrates the first state notification image SG1, the second state notification image SG2, the third state notification image SG3, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, which have been described as meters (gauges) in the above embodiment. It is a figure which shows other forms, such as 2nd elapsed time alerting | reporting image TG2 and 3rd elapsed time alerting | reporting image TG3.

  As shown in FIGS. 5A to 5A, the meter is not limited to an image composed of a single continuous area, and is composed of a plurality of images (scale M) spaced apart from each other. One meter may be configured. In that case, all the scales M may have the same shape as shown in FIG. 9A, or only a part of each scale M may have the same shape as shown in FIG. Each scale M may have a different shape as shown in FIG. In addition, the meter is configured such that the maximum number of scales is simultaneously displayed as the scale group MG, and the display mode (for example, the fill color) of each scale M is sequentially changed (filled) over time. There may be a configuration in which each scale M is sequentially displayed with the passage of time (the number of scales M increases).

  FIG. 4B shows an example of a meter in which the number of scales M increases. In this example, the scale M falls from above and accumulates in the meter as time passes, but as shown in FIG. 228, the change in the transmittance of each scale causes the inside of the meter. It is good also as composition which fills up.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 5C, the meter is not limited to a configuration in which the length and area are stacked and increased (having a shape as a so-called meter or gauge), but the meter increases from the inside to the outside, and the color and transmittance are increased. Any configuration that can be visually recognized so that the form of the entire meter expands and contracts due to the change is acceptable.

  Although the case where the meter is increased is described as an example here, the present invention can be similarly applied to a configuration where the meter is decreased.

  In conventional game machines, it has been desired to further enhance the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and is intended to provide a gaming table capable of improving the interest of the player. According to this, the interest of the player can be improved.

  That is, as described above, the game table (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the above embodiment includes display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) and operation means (for example, the chance button 136). The display means is means capable of displaying at least a first display (for example, a first state notification image SG1), and the first display relates to operation of the operation means. Display (for example, display according to the operation timing, display according to the number of consecutive hits, etc.), and the first display has at least a display mode of the first display according to the operation of the operation means. When the display is changeable (for example, a decrease display or an increase display of a meter scale), and the first display is in a second state (for example, an execution state of a “hot” production). ,first State (e.g., "HOT" non-execution state of the effect) visibility than is at least lower display, it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize a game machine having a display characteristic. Further, there are cases where the player can be prompted to operate the operation means (chance button 136) (operation at a timing that is advantageous to the player or continuous hitting). Further, since the visibility of the first display may be lowered, it may be possible to concentrate the player's line of sight on the display means. Further, the player's line of sight can be directed around the first display, and the player may be prompted to operate the operation means.

  The “display relating to operation of the operation means” refers to the following display.

(A) “Display including display for prompting operation of operation means” may be used.

(B) “Display including a display indicating that an operation of the operation means is accepted” may be used.

(C) It may be “a display including a display indicating that an effect of operating the operation means is performed (or being performed)”.

(D) Only one of the above (a) to (c) or a combination of two or more (two or all) may be displayed.

(E) The display may not include display of one of the above ((a) to (c), or a combination of two or more (two or all)).

  Further, “at least the visibility is lowered” may indicate that “at least a part or all of the first display is at least difficult to see in the second state”. . Alternatively, it may indicate that “in the second state, at least a part or all of the first display is at least invisible”.

  In addition, “when the first display is in the second state, the visibility is at least lower than that in the first state” means that “at least part of the first display or all of the first display. It may indicate that the visibility is at least lowered. Alternatively, it may indicate that “the visibility of at least some or all of two or more of the plurality of displays is reduced”. The “two or more displays” may indicate “two or more displays including the first display”.

  The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a second display (for example, an effect display 704), and the second state means that at least a part of the second display is the first display. It is good also as a thing which is the state which overlaps at least one part.

  According to such a configuration, the second display may be conspicuous.

  The “state where at least a part of the second display overlaps at least a part of the first display” means the following state.

(A) It may indicate a state where “at least a part of the second display is preferentially displayed over at least a part of the first display”.

(B) “At least a part of the second display is displayed in front (front) of at least a part of the first display” (for example, “at the front side of the layer on which the first display is displayed) "A state displayed on a layer" or "a state displayed before the first display in the same layer"). Here, the “front side” may indicate the “player (closer) side”.

(C) It may indicate a state in which “at least a part of the second display is displayed overlapping (overlapping with) at least a part of the first display”.

(D) Only one of the above (a) to (c) or a combination of two or more (two or all) may be indicated.

(E) One of the above (a) to (c), or a combination of two or more (two or all) may not be displayed.

  The first state may be a state in which at least a part of the second display does not overlap with at least a part of the first display.

  According to such a configuration, there is a case where the second display does not overlap with at least a part of the first display, thereby giving the player a sense of discomfort and allowing the player to concentrate more on the game. is there.

  The state where at least part of the second display does not overlap with at least part of the first display means that the second display is not displayed and the second display is displayed. However, it shall include any state where the first display is not hidden. That is, “a state in which at least a part of the second display does not overlap with at least a part of the first display” means the following state.

(A) "The state where the second display is not displayed on the display means" may be indicated.

(B) "The state where a part of the second display is displayed at a position where it does not overlap with a part or all of the first display" may be indicated.

(C) It may indicate “a state in which the entire second display is displayed at a position that does not overlap a part or all of the first state”.

(D) One or two or more (two or all) of the above (a) to (c) may not be shown.

  The first display is a display including at least a meter display (for example, a first state notification image SG1), and the meter display has at least a display mode of the meter display according to an operation of the operation means. The display may be changeable.

  According to such a configuration, by reducing the visibility of the meter display, it may be difficult for the player to understand the operating status of the operating means and to prompt the player to operate the operating means.

  The gaming machine may be a pachinko machine or a slot machine, and the second display may be an effect display (for example, an effect display 704).

  According to such a configuration, there is a case where the effect display can be made conspicuous.

  Further, at least a part of the first display overlapping the second display may be an image that is not displayed, and the display unit may not draw the image that is not displayed.

  With such a configuration, the drawing processing load may be reduced.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the above-described embodiment is a gaming table including a display unit (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) and an operation unit (for example, a chance button 136). The display unit is a unit capable of displaying at least a first display (for example, a first elapsed time notification image TG1, a first state notification image SG1), and the first display is the operation unit. Display related to the operation (for example, operation reception period, operation state display), the first display is the establishment of the change condition (for example, the start of the operation reception period, during the operation reception period) When there is an operation means operation, continuous hit or long press of the operation means, etc., the display mode of the first display is a display that can be changed at least (for example, a decrease display or an increase display of a meter scale), Previous When the first display is in the second state (for example, the execution state of the “hot” production), the first display is more visible than the first state (for example, the non-execution state of the “hot” production). A display that is at least low in performance, and the first display is a display that continues the change in the display mode of the first display in the second state. It is a stand.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize a game machine having a display characteristic. In addition, it may be possible to guide the line of sight to the hot notice so that the player does not overlook that the operation reception time of the operation means is short. Further, since the visibility of the first display may be lowered, it may be possible to concentrate the player's line of sight on the display means. Further, the player's line of sight can be directed around the first display, and the player may be prompted to operate the operation means.

  The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a second display (eg, an effect display 704, a notification display 706, etc.), and the second state is at least a part of the second display. May be in a state of overlapping at least a part of the first display.

  According to such a configuration, the second display may be conspicuous.

  The first state may be a state in which at least a part of the second display does not overlap with at least a part of the first display.

  According to such a configuration, there is a case where the second display does not overlap, so that the player can feel a sense of incongruity and can concentrate more on the game.

  The first display may be a display including at least a meter display (for example, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 and a first state notification image SG1).

  According to such a configuration, by reducing the visibility of the meter display, it may be difficult for the player to understand the change state of the meter display and prompt the operation means to operate.

  The second display may be an effect display (for example, an effect display 704, a notification display 706, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, there is a case where the effect display can be made conspicuous.

  The gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine, and the display mode of the first display is a display mode that can be changed at least from the first mode to the second mode, and the requirement that the change condition is satisfied The above may be a requirement that includes at least that the first time has elapsed since the display of the first aspect.

  According to such a configuration, the visibility of the change in the change mode with the passage of time may be reduced, thereby making it difficult to understand the passage of the operation reception time and further prompting the operation of the operation means.

  Further, at least a part of the first display overlapping the second display may be an image that is not displayed, and the display unit may not draw the image that is not displayed.

  With such a configuration, the drawing processing load may be reduced.

  Moreover, the 1st area | region in a 1st display is good also as what is a visibility area | region lower than a 1st state, when it is a 2nd state.

  The second area in the first display may be an area having higher visibility than the first area when in the second state.

  The first region and the second region may be the following regions.

(A) The first region may be a region including a part (for example, a part of a meter display) or the whole of a region whose display mode changes according to the operation of the operation unit. Here, the meter (display) refers to a display (for example, the first state notification image SG1 or the first elapsed time notification image TG1) in which the scale increases or decreases with the passage of time or a change in state.

(B) The first region may be a region that does not include a part or all of the region whose display mode changes according to the operation of the operation unit.

(C) The first region may be a region including a part (for example, a part of a button image) or the whole of a region whose display mode does not change according to the operation of the operation unit. Here, the button image refers to an operation means (an image imitating the chance button 136 (for example, the first operation means image BG1).

(D) The first region may be a region that does not include a part or all of the region in which the display mode does not change according to the operation of the operation unit.

(E) The first region may have a configuration in which two or more of the above (a) to (d) are combined. For example, (a) and (c), (a) and (d), (b) and (c) can be combined.

(A ′) The second region may be a region including a part (for example, a part of a meter display) or the whole of a region whose display mode changes according to the operation of the operation unit.

(B ′) The second region may be a region that does not include a part or all of the region whose display mode changes according to the operation of the operation unit.

(C ′) The second region may be a region including a part (for example, a part of the button image) or the whole of the region whose display mode does not change according to the operation of the operation unit.

(D ′) The second region may be a region that does not include a part or all of the region in which the display mode does not change according to the operation of the operation unit.

(E ′) The second region may have a configuration in which two or more (or all) of (a ′) to (d ′) are combined. For example, (a ′) and (c ′), (a ′) and (d ′), (b ′) and (c ′) can be combined.

  The second display may be a display related to a game. As an example of “game-related display”, error display, operation request notification, alert display, presentation display, notice display, original mode display (menu display, mission display, volume / brightness adjustment display), demo display, power-on Display (power-on, power-returning, etc.).

  The display means may not display at least a part of the first display (for example, a button image) when reception of the operation of the operation means is completed.

  The display unit may be a unit that does not display a part of the first display when the reception of the operation of the operation unit is completed. Here, the “part of the first display” may have the following configuration.

(A) It may be a display showing all or part of a button image (such as the first operation means image BG1).

(B) It may be a display showing all or part of a meter display (such as the first state notification image SG1 or the first elapsed time notification image TG1).

(C) It may be a display showing all or part of a display prompting an operation (for example, a character display).

(D) It may be a combination of two or more of the above (a) to (c) or all displays.

(E) Only one of the displays (a) to (c) may be displayed.

  The display unit may be a unit that does not display all of the first display when reception of the operation of the operation unit is completed. Here, “the whole of the first display” may have the following configuration.

(A) A display indicating a meter display (such as the first state notification image SG1 or the first elapsed time notification image TG1) may be used.

(B) A plurality of displays including a meter display (for example, a button image or a display prompting an operation (for example, a character display)) may be indicated.

  The display unit is a unit that does not display at least a part of the first display (for example, a button image) when the second time has elapsed since the reception of the operation of the operation unit started. May be.

  The display means may continuously display a part or all of the first display when the reception of the operation means is completed.

  Further, the display means may be means for continuously displaying the meter display when reception of the operation of the operation means is completed. The display means continuously displays the meter display when the acceptance of the operation means is completed, and the meter display is displayed when the condition for deleting the meter display is satisfied (for example, the end of the effect display). May be terminated.

  The display mode of the first display may be changeable from the first mode to the second mode. The first display mode can be changed from the first mode to the third mode, and can be changed from the third mode to the second mode. That is, it is not limited to one that changes from the first mode to the second mode, but may change from the first mode to the second mode via a plurality of other modes (third mode). .

  Further, the “effect display” in the above-described embodiment includes the following. For example, an effect display of a notice display system (prefetch (hold icon, notice effect, decoration pattern, etc.), an effect display of the change (hold icon, notice effect, decoration pattern, etc.), non-notice system (tutorial, demo, user mode, Hold display, 4th symbol, jackpot display, decoration symbol, etc. In addition, other notice effect display, jackpot effect display, user mode display, demo display, tutorial display, effect using decoration symbol It may be a display or an effect display using a hold icon.

  In addition, regarding the transmittance of the second display described with reference to FIG. 228, the transmittance of at least part or all of the second display may not be 100%.

  Further, the transmittance of at least a part or all of the second display may not be 0% (may be transmitted).

  Further, the transmittance of at least a part or all of the second display may be 0% (not necessarily transmitted).

  The transmittance of at least a part of the second display may be a first value, and the “first value” may be a value exceeding 0% and less than 100%.

  Further, the transmittance of at least a part or all of the second display may change stepwise. The “step change” means that the transmittance is the first value, the second value, the third value, The first value, the second value, and the third value may be different from each other.

  Further, the transmittance of at least a part or all of the second display may be continuously changed. The “continuous change” means that the transmittance passes from the first value to the second value. The first value, the second value, and the third value may be different from each other.

  Further, the transmittance of at least a part or all of the second display may change only from one of the two values of the highest value and the lowest value to the other.

  In addition, regarding the transmittance of the first display described with reference to FIG. 228, the transmittance of at least a part or all of the first display may not be 100%.

  Further, the transmittance of at least a part or all of the first display may not be 0% (may be transmitted).

  Further, the transmittance of at least a part or all of the first display may be 0% (not necessarily transmitted).

  The transmittance of at least a part of the first display may be a first value, and the “first value” may be a value exceeding 0% and less than 100%.

  Further, the transmittance of at least a part or all of the first display may change stepwise. The “step change” means that the transmittance is the first value, the second value, the third value, The first value, the second value, and the third value may be different from each other.

  Further, the transmittance of at least a part or all of the first display may be continuously changed. The “continuous change” means that the transmittance passes from the first value to the second value. The first value, the second value, and the third value may be different from each other.

  Further, the transmittance of at least a part or all of the first display may change only from one of the two values of the highest value and the lowest value to the other.

  In the above embodiment, the first display (or the second display) may include at least a display imitating the operation means. Here, “at least including a display imitating the operation means” may indicate only a display imitating the operation means (for example, the first operation means image BG1). “At least including a display imitating the operation means” means a display (for example, the first display displayed in a period overlapping with a period in which the display imitating the operation means and the display imitating the operation means are displayed. It may indicate both a meter (or gauge) indicating an operation reception period such as the elapsed time notification image TG1, a character display such as “Press the button!”, An effect, and the like.

  The first display (or the second display) may include at least a notification that prompts the operation unit to operate. Here, “including at least a notification for prompting operation of the operation means” is only a notification for prompting the operation of the operation means (for example, a display such as “Press the button!” Or an image / animation for operating the button). May be shown. In addition, a period that overlaps a period in which a notification that prompts the operation of the operation unit (for example, a display of an image or animation that operates a character or a button such as “Press the button!”) Or the operation unit is displayed. It is also possible to show both the display (background image, effect, meter (gauge), etc.) displayed on the screen.

  Further, the first display (or the second display) may be displayable at least when display control is executed. Here, the “display control” may be executed at least when a condition including the operation of the operation means is satisfied. The “display control” may be displayed when a command is transmitted from the second control means (first sub control unit or second sub control unit).

  In the above embodiment, an example described as “display with high visibility” may be applied to “display with low visibility”, and an example described as “display with low visibility” is “ It may be applied to “a display with high visibility”.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, "at least one part" means that only one part may be sufficient and all (all) may be sufficient.

  In addition, the contents described in each of the above embodiments can be combined with other embodiments with respect to each configuration in each embodiment.

  In the sixth embodiment, the requirement that the change condition is satisfied is a requirement that includes at least the operation of the operation means. Here, the “operation of the operation means” may have the following configuration.

(A) It may indicate that “the operating means has been detected by the detecting means (sensor of the operating means)”.

(B) “The command has been transmitted to the first (second) sub-control unit by the detecting means” may be indicated.

(C) It may indicate that “the first (second) sub-control unit has received the command transmitted by the detecting means”.

(D) Any one or two or more (two or all) of the above (a) to (c) may be indicated.

  The change in the first display mode may be the following configuration. That is, it may be changed from the first mode to the second mode by one operation of the operating means. Moreover, it may change from a 1st aspect to a 2nd aspect by having operated the operation means in multiple times. Moreover, it may change from a 1st aspect to a 2nd aspect by the total of the time which the operation means is operated continuously (you may release | release a hand once from an operation means). Moreover, it may change from a 1st aspect to a 2nd aspect with the time (it will be complete | finished if it releases a hand once from an operation means) while operating the operation means continuously.

  Further, the first display may be configured such that the display mode of the first display can be changed at least in accordance with the operation of the operation means, and the first display is performed only when the display mode change condition is satisfied. The display mode of one display may be changed, and the display mode of the first display may not be changed when the display mode change condition is not satisfied.

  The first display may include a portion that does not change the display mode of the first display in accordance with the operation of the operation means.

  The first display and the second display are respectively a start display and end display of a privilege game (for example, AT), a remaining number display of a privilege game (for example, a remaining number display that is always displayed, A game in which a privilege game is performed by displaying one or a plurality of character displays such as 20G, for example, when the number of remaining games is reduced and the number of bonus games is displayed. It may be an effect indicating that the number has increased, or a push order notification for notifying the order of pressing the stop button. Here, AT indicates an AT (assist time) gaming state, and may be a period during which notification (for example, push order notification) for assisting the player's operation is executed.

  Further, the display means may be configured by a decorative symbol display device 208. The display means may execute the first display only when the first display condition is satisfied, and displays the second display only when the second display condition is satisfied. It may be executed, the first display may be displayed without fail, the second display may be displayed without fail, and the first display and the second display may be displayed without fail. . Further, the operation means may be configured with a chance button 136.

  A plurality of display means may be provided. In this case, the first display means of the plurality of display means may be a special symbol display device, and the second display means may be a decorative symbol display device.

  The first display means may be a first decorative symbol display device, and the second display means may be a second decorative symbol display device. In that case, the first decorative symbol display device or the second decorative symbol display device may correspond to the decorative symbol display device 208.

At least one or both of the first display means and the second display means may be provided on the movable means, or only one of them may be provided on the movable means.

The first display means may be provided in front of the second display means.

  The first display means displays a first display (for example, a first elapsed time notification image TG1), and the second display means displays a second display (for example, an effect display 704). This embodiment also applies to a case where the first display displayed on the first display means is overlapped by the second display displayed on the second display means and the visibility is lowered. Is applicable.

  In addition, the first display (first operation means image BG1 and / or the first display) overlaps with (in front of) a third display (for example, a background image or an effect display (including the second display)). 1), the first display is erased in response to the operation of the chance button 136 (non-display) when it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the third display. The third display may be visible to the player.

  Further, when the operation means is operated by the player while the operation means image and the elapsed time notification image are being displayed (during the reception period of the operation means), the elapsed time notification image is the same image as the end of the reception period (remaining time). (0 second) may be displayed and then deleted. Alternatively, the operation means image may be erased after the progress notification image is erased first.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the above-described embodiment is a gaming table provided with operation means (for example, chance button 136) and display means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208). The display means can display at least a first display (for example, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 of FIGS. 80 and 81, the elapsed time notification image of FIG. 92, or the remaining time notification image). The display means is means capable of displaying at least a second display (for example, an effect accompanying the common map change display of FIG. 80 or the hold icon PI3 of FIG. 81), and the first display and Is a display related to the operation means, and the first display is a display capable of changing at least a display mode over time, and the change in the display mode in the first display is: In the second state, the change is at least lower in visibility than in the first state, and the second state is a state in which at least a part of the second display is at least one of the first display. It is the state which has overlapped with the part.

  The first state may be a state where at least the second display is not displayed on the display means.

  The first state may be a state in which at least a part of the second display is displayed at a position overlapping at least a part of the first display.

  By adopting such a configuration, the player may be able to focus on the first display and the second display that overlap each other and focus on the game. In some cases, the player can be further prompted to operate the operation means. Further, it may be possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the display relating to the operation means whose display mode changes with the passage of time, and to prompt the player to operate the game means. In addition, the player can watch the display means carefully and concentrate on the game, and can judge whether or not the operation is necessary, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  The first display is a display including at least a first image (for example, the first operation means image BG1 in FIG. 81), and the first display is a third image (for example, FIG. 81 is a display including at least the first elapsed time notification image TG1), and the second display is a display including at least a second image (for example, the hold icon PI3 in FIG. 81). The third image is a display whose display mode can be changed at least according to the passage of time, and the second state is a state in which the second image overlaps the third image. It is good also as a thing.

  By adopting such a configuration, there are cases where the player can be focused on the second image and the third image that overlap each other and can concentrate on the game. In some cases, the player can be further prompted to operate the operation means. Further, it may be possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the third image relating to the operation means whose display mode changes with the passage of time, and to prompt the player to operate the game means. In addition, the player can watch the display means carefully and concentrate on the game, and can judge whether or not the operation is necessary, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  The second image may be an image that overlaps at least a part of the third image in the second state.

  By adopting such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the third image relating to the operation means whose display mode changes with the passage of time, compared with the first image. There are cases where the operation of the means can be further encouraged. In addition, the player can watch the display means carefully from the difference in the visual aspect of the first image and the third image, and can concentrate on the game, and can judge whether or not the operation is necessary. There are cases where interest can be improved.

  The second display may be a display that overlaps only a part of the first display in the second state.

  In addition, at least a part of the first display may be a display that is at least difficult to visually recognize in the second state.

  By adopting such a configuration, the player can change the visual appearance of a part of the first display (overlapping area) and the other area (non-overlapping area), and the player can There are cases where the operation can be further encouraged. In addition, the player can watch the display means carefully because of the difference in the visual appearance of the first display, and can concentrate on the game, can judge whether or not the operation is necessary, and improve the interest of the game May be possible.

  The display unit may be a unit that does not display at least the first display when reception of the operation of the operation unit is completed.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the above-described embodiment is capable of executing at least a plurality of types of display and operation means (for example, chance button 136) provided at least at a position where the player can operate. A display device (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), wherein at least one of the plurality of types of display is a first type of display (for example, the first type of display in FIG. 78). Operating means image BG1, first elapsed time notification image TG1), and at least one of the plurality of types of display is a display of a second type (for example, a variation icon CI in FIG. 78), The display of the first type is a display related to the operation means, and the display of the first type is configured to be displayable at least when receiving an operation of the operation means. The first type of display is a display including at least a first display (for example, the first operation means image BG1 in FIG. 78), and the first type of display is a second display (for example, 78 is a display including at least the first elapsed time notification image TG1) in FIG. 78, and the second display is a display capable of changing the display mode from the start position to the end position according to the passage of time. The second type display is a display including at least a third display (for example, the fluctuation icon CI in FIG. 78), the second type display is an effect display, and the third type display The display is displayed with priority over the first display, the third display is displayed with priority over the second display, and the second display is displayed. The start position of the third display is greater than the second display. By displaying preferentially, it becomes more difficult for the player to see than when the third display is not displayed, and the change in the display mode of the second display is more than that of the second display. Since the third display is preferentially displayed, it is more difficult for the player to see than the third display. The first type of display is the second type of display. The second type of display may be displayed at least on the display means prior to the first type of display.

  The display means may be capable of displaying at least one of the first type display and the second type display.

  Further, the first display may include a display simulating the operation means.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. When the second display (a part of the elapsed time notification image TG1) is used to notify the remaining time of the reception period of the operation means with a display that decreases from the start position, the start position of the second display is set to the second display. By displaying the third display (effect display) preferentially over the display of the player, it becomes more difficult for the player to see than when the third display is not displayed, and from the start position of the second display By changing the display mode toward the end position, the third display is displayed with priority over the second display, so that it is more difficult for the player to see than the third display. In some cases, it may be difficult for a player to visually recognize that the operation period of the operation means is being accepted, and the player may be further encouraged to operate the game means. In some cases, the player can focus more on the display mode hidden by the player and concentrate on the game. Further, in order to make it difficult to visually recognize the display mode at the start position of the second display (at the start of accepting the operation) and the change in the display mode from the start position to the end position of the second display. In some cases, the player can watch the display means carefully and concentrate on the game, can judge whether the operation is necessary, and can improve the interest of the game.

  Further, the effect display may include at least a jackpot notice.

  By adopting such a configuration, in the event of a big hit notice, the player can watch the display means carefully, concentrate on the game, can judge whether or not the operation is necessary, and improve the interest of the game May be possible.

  The display means may not display at least the first type of display when acceptance of the operation of the operation means is completed.

In the following, we will add that we have explained so far. In addition, the following description is applicable suitably to the game machine demonstrated in this specification including 1st Embodiment-6th Embodiment.
(Appendix A1)

A first entrance through which a game ball can enter, start information deriving means for deriving start information based on the game ball entering the first entrance, and start information acquired by the start information acquiring means And a second entrance where a predetermined profit is generated based on the entry of the game ball. The game means is characterized by changing the predetermined performance based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entrance during the predetermined performance.
(Appendix A2)

The gaming table according to appendix A1, further comprising: a profit granting unit that grants a predetermined profit to the player based on a game ball entering the second entrance, wherein the effect unit is the predetermined game unit A game table characterized in that a specific effect that affects the predetermined effect is performed based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entrance during the effect.
(Appendix A3)

The gaming machine according to appendix A1 or A2, wherein the presentation means includes display means for performing a predetermined display, and the display means has entered a game ball into the second entrance during the predetermined presentation. On the basis of this, a game table characterized in that a part of the display effect based on the predetermined effect is covered with a part of the display effect based on the specific effect.
(Appendix A4)

The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A3, wherein the first entrance and the second entrance are the game balls that have entered the first entrance and the second entrance A game stand characterized by being placed at a position where it can enter the mouth.
(Appendix A5)

The gaming machine according to appendix A2, comprising a winning device that is advantageous to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the specific performance is highly likely to satisfy the predetermined condition A game stand characterized by a directing effect.
(Appendix A6)

A game value giving means for giving a game value to a player when a game value giving condition is established; a first entry area where the game value giving condition is not met even if the game ball passes; and a game ball A second entry area in which the game value provision condition is satisfied based on the entry of the ball, a determination unit that can determine whether or not the determination is true, and a determination of success / failure by the determination unit The pattern mode corresponding to the result includes at least notification means capable of stopping display after performing the variable display of the pattern, and image display means capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and is configured separately from the notification means. In a gaming machine provided with production means and production control means capable of controlling the production means, the success / failure determination condition includes at least that a game ball has passed to the first entry area. Yes, the production The control means is capable of causing the image display means to display a symbol fluctuation display for performing a stop display of a symbol corresponding to the result of the success / failure judgment by the success / failure judgment means after starting the symbol fluctuation display. The second approach area is one in which at least a game ball can enter when the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination means is a specific result of the success / failure determination. It is possible to cause the effect means to execute at least a jackpot notice for notifying whether or not, and the jackpot is generated based on at least one condition that a game ball has entered the second entry area. The effect control means may make it difficult for the player to visually recognize at least a part of the symbol variation display during the display of the symbol variation display by the image display means. It is possible to cause the effect means to at least make the big hit announcement, and it is difficult for the player to visually recognize at least a part of the symbol fluctuation display by the image display means. A game stand that is easily visible to the player during the period.
(Appendix A7)

The gaming table according to appendix A6, wherein the effect control means displays the jackpot notice so that at least a part of the symbol is difficult to see from a player during the stop display of the symbol by the image display unit. It is possible for at least the effect means to perform the symbol stop display by the notifying means, even if at least a part of the symbol stop display by the image display means is difficult for the player to visually recognize. A game table characterized by being easily visible.
(Appendix A8)

The gaming table according to appendix A6 or A7, wherein the effect control means is configured such that when a game ball enters the second entry area while the image display means is displaying the symbol variation display, the symbol is displayed. An effect that does not make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the variable display can be performed at least by the effect means, and the jackpot notice does not make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the effect. Stand.
(Appendix A9)

The gaming table according to any one of appendices A6 to A8, wherein the determination result includes a first determination result and a second determination result, and the notification means includes the determination result Can be stopped and displayed when the result is the first determination result, and when the determination result is the second determination result, what is the first design aspect? A game table characterized by being capable of stopping and displaying different second symbol patterns.
(Appendix A10)

  The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A6 to A9, wherein the rendering means includes at least one of a first position where the symbol change display by the image display means is not covered from the front and the symbol change display. A movable body that is movable to a plurality of positions including a second position that covers the part from the front, wherein the effect control means moves the movable body from the first position to the second position, thereby moving the movable body to the second position. A game table characterized in that it is possible to cause the movable body to make a big hit notice.

Note that the above description can be appropriately applied to the game tables described in other appendices and the game tables described in this specification.
(Appendix A11)

  A plurality of entry areas into which a game ball can enter and a determination of whether or not the game ball can be executed at least when a game ball enters a predetermined entry area including at least the first entry area among the plurality of entry areas. And means for determining whether or not the assisting ball can be determined when the game ball enters a second approaching area different from the predetermined approaching area among the plurality of approaching areas; After performing the display, after performing the symbol variation display, the first informing means capable of at least performing the first symbol variation display to stop display the symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the auxiliary success / failure determination, A second notifying unit capable of executing at least a second symbol variation display for stopping and displaying a symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the auxiliary success / failure determination, an effect unit including at least the second notifying unit, and at least the A game table comprising: production control means capable of controlling the exit means; and time reduction control means capable of controlling at least a time reduction state and a non-time reduction state in which a game ball is likely to enter at least the first entry area. In the first approach area, after the first symbol variation display is performed and the symbol mode corresponding to the result of the specific auxiliary success / failure determination among the results of the success / failure determination is stopped and displayed, the game ball The effect control means is capable of causing the effect means to at least execute a predetermined effect related to the result of the determination of success and the second symbol variation display, The effect control means executes at least the predetermined effect on the effect means so that at least a part of the second symbol change display is difficult to view during a predetermined period during execution of the second symbol change display. Let The first symbol variation display is easier to see even during the predetermined period, and the second symbol variation display is executed in the non-time reduction state than in the time reduction state. A game stand that is easy to be played.

The first entry area here is, for example, an electric Chu, and the predetermined entry areas are, for example, the second special figure start port 232 (electric Chu) and the first special figure start opening 230, and the second entry. The region is, for example, the general symbol start port 228, and the first symbol variation display is, for example, a common symbol variation display performed by the universal symbol display device 210 controlled by the main control unit 300, and the second symbol variation is displayed. The display is, for example, a normal decorative pattern variation display performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the sub-control units 400 and 500.
(Appendix A12)

  The gaming table according to appendix A11, wherein the second notification unit is an image display unit, and the predetermined effect can be executed at least by the image display unit, and the image display unit Has at least a predetermined display area in which the second symbol variation display can be executed, and the effect control means has at least a non-execution period of the second symbol variation display in the predetermined display region. A game table, wherein a display effect different from the second symbol variation display can be executed in a period including a part.

Here, the effect control means may be capable of causing the effect means to execute at least the predetermined effect so that at least a part of the different display effects is difficult to visually recognize.
(Appendix A13)

  The gaming machine according to appendix A12, wherein the different display effects that can be executed in the predetermined display area include at least one of a jackpot notice display and a game information display.

The jackpot notice display here includes a so-called prefetch notice. In addition, the game information display includes, for example, the number of time reductions, the number of consecutive games, the number of acquired game balls, the number of simulated consecutive times, and the like.
(Appendix A14)

  The gaming machine according to appendix A13, wherein the production control means is capable of executing at least the jackpot notice during the non-execution period of the second symbol variation display in the non-time-saving state, The gaming table characterized in that at least the gaming information display can be executed during the non-execution period of the second symbol variation display in the time-shortening state. (Appendix A15)

  The gaming table according to appendix A14, wherein the specific second symbol variation display of the second symbol variation display includes a symbol related to the result of the auxiliary success / failure determination and a symbol related to the jackpot notice. A game table characterized by being capable of executing a second symbol variation display.

  The predetermined period in the game machine described in Supplementary Notes A11 to A15 may be a period including at least a part of the second symbol variation display being executed. The predetermined performance may include a jackpot notice that can at least tell whether or not a jackpot will occur. Further, the effect control means may not execute the second symbol variation display in the non-time-short state. In the predetermined display area, at least a notice regarding the symbol variation display of the special symbol 2 out of the second symbol variation display may be executed. Even if the special symbol 2 is interrupted during the execution of the second symbol variation display and the different symbol display is possible, the second symbol variation display can be performed with priority. Good. The notification during the electric chew operation can be executed, and the notification during the electric chew operation may be different depending on whether or not the second symbol variation display is executed. For example, the lamp control near the electric Chu may be different with and without the second symbol variation display. Specifically, the notification may be flashy with the second symbol variation display. The flashing notification here includes a long production period. The second symbol variation display may vary only the symbol related to the result of the auxiliary success / failure determination. Further, it may be a gaming machine that performs right-handed and left-handed, and the second symbol variation display may be more easily performed when left-handed. Further, the gaming machine may be left-handed in the non-electric support state and right-handed in the electric support state. The open pattern of the electric chew includes at least a first open pattern and a second open pattern, and the second open pattern is more advantageous than the first open pattern, and the second pattern The variable display may be executed at least when the second opening pattern is set.

Note that the above description can be appropriately applied to the game tables described in other appendices and the game tables described in this specification.
(Appendix A16)

It is equipped with electric Chu, winning / failing determining means (special figure), auxiliary winning / failing determining means (common figure), and jackpot game control means, and main common figure variation display (first symbol variation display) and sub-variable figure variation display. A game machine capable of performing (second symbol variation display), wherein the sub ordinary variation is difficult to see due to the second effect, and the main ordinary variation is the sub ordinary variation. A gaming table characterized in that even if it is difficult to visually recognize due to the second performance, it is easy to visually recognize, and the sub-normal variation is more likely to be performed outside of the big hit game than during the big hit game.
(Appendix A17)

The gaming machine according to appendix A16, wherein the specific sub-common figure variation among the sub-normal figure fluctuations is more likely to be performed outside the big hit game than during the big hit game. Amusement stand.
(Appendix A18)

The gaming machine according to appendix A17, wherein the sub-normal variation is executable at least in a first variation time and a second variation time, and the second variation time is greater than the first variation time. The game table is characterized in that the variation time of is longer and the specific sub-normal variation is executable at a variation time including at least the second variation time.
(Appendix A19)

The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A16 to A18, wherein the opening pattern of the electric chew includes at least a first opening pattern and a second opening pattern, The second opening pattern is more advantageous for the player than the opening pattern (for example, a game ball is easy to enter), and at least the electric chew is released by the second opening pattern. A game stand, characterized in that it can be executed in some cases.
(Appendix A20)

  The gaming machine according to appendix A18 or A19, wherein the sub-normal game variation is executable during the jackpot game at a variation time including at least the first variation time. Stand.

  The specific sub-normal change in the game machine described in Supplementary Notes A16 to A20 may not be performed in the first fluctuation time. In addition, the sub-normal change except the specific sub-normal change may not be performed in the second change time. In addition, the sub-normal map change performed in the first change time may be capable of performing an effect of notifying only the result of the auxiliary success / failure determination. In addition, the sub-usual change may not be performed during the jackpot game. Further, at least a part of the sub-normal variation may be a symbol variation display including a big hit notice. Furthermore, during the jackpot game, it may be possible to execute only the opening notification effect of electric Chu. Further, it may be a gaming machine that performs right-handed and left-handed, and a predetermined firing strength (for example, right-handed) may be easier to execute the sub-normal variation. Further, it may be a gaming table that can be played at the predetermined firing strength (right-handed) at least during a big hit game.

Note that the above description can be appropriately applied to the game tables described in other appendices and the game tables described in this specification.
(Appendix A21)

It includes a determination unit (special drawing), an auxiliary determination unit (general figure), a production unit capable of at least performing a pre-reading notice, and a production control unit capable of controlling at least the production unit. A gaming machine capable of performing a variable display (first symbol variation display) and a sub-normal symbol variation display (second symbol variation display), wherein the effect control means includes the pre-reading notice and the sub-normal diagram. It is possible to cause the effecting means to execute at least a change display, and when the sub-normal figure change is executed during execution of the pre-reading notice, the sub-normal figure change is at least one of the pre-reading notices. A game table characterized in that it is difficult to see the part.
(Appendix A22)

The gaming machine as set forth in appendix A21, wherein at least a part of the sub-common figure variation is capable of executing symbol variation display including a jackpot notice.
(Appendix A23)

  The game stand according to appendix A21 or A22, wherein the rendering means includes at least an image display means, and at least the image display means is capable of executing the sub-common figure variation and the prefetching notice, The display means has a predetermined display area in which the sub-normal variation can be executed, and the image display means has a pre-reading notice display area, and the predetermined sub-normal variation is included in the sub-normal variation. When a figure change is performed, the sub-normal figure change can be displayed beyond the predetermined display area, enters the prefetch notice display area, and makes at least a part of the prefetch notice difficult to view. A characteristic game stand.

The pre-reading notice is a holding change notice, and the image display means has a holding display area. When a predetermined sub-normal change is performed among the sub-normal changes, the sub-normal notice is displayed. The figure variation may be able to be displayed beyond the predetermined display area, enter the hold display area, and make at least a part of the hold prefetch notice difficult to view.
(Appendix A24)

The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A21 to A23, wherein the gaming machine is a special figure 2 priority changing machine, and includes a reserved display area of special figure 1 and a reserved display area of special figure 2 And both reserved display areas are provided across a predetermined display area, and the sub-normal display variation can make it difficult to see at least a part of both reserved display areas. A gaming machine characterized in that only one of the pre-reading notice of FIG. 1 and the pre-reading notice of FIG.
(Appendix A25)

  The game stand according to any one of appendices A21 to A24, wherein the stage can be executed so that at least a part of the sub-normal variation is difficult to visually recognize. A game table.

  The sub-common figure fluctuation in the game tables described in appendix A21 to appendix A25 is at least a part of the pending display area (for example, the first pending display area with the oldest winning timing) among the plurality of the reserved display areas. Some may make it difficult to view. Moreover, you may make the 1st hold | maintenance of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 hold display area difficult to visually recognize. Further, it may be difficult to visually recognize other hold such as the second hold. Further, when the electric chew is released and the special figure 2 is interrupted during the non-electric support state, at least a part of the suspension of the special figure 2 may be difficult to visually recognize due to the electric chew release notification effect. Further, during the non-electric support state, it is possible to (at least) make it difficult to visually recognize the reserved pre-reading notice in FIG. It may be possible. In addition, a specific reserved display area that is difficult to view due to the change of the sub-normal figure can perform the reserved display of special figure 1 and the special figure 2 in a winning order changing game machine. The function may be switched for each special figure change (during the non-electric support state). In addition, when the pre-reading hold display and the sub-normal figure change are performed at the same time, when the production (for example, super reach) is started during the special symbol decoration display, the sub-normal change May be left, and the pre-read hold display may be hidden, the sub-transition fluctuation and the pre-read hold display may be both hidden, the pre-read hold display may be left, The variation may be in a non-display mode.

In addition, even if it is the structural requirement contained only in each description of each embodiment and additional remarks demonstrated above, you may apply the structural requirement to other embodiment and additional remarks.
(Appendix A26)

It is provided with a main design variation display (first symbol variation display) including a determination unit (special drawing), an auxiliary determination unit (general drawing), a production unit, and a production control unit capable of controlling at least the production unit. ) And sub-general variation display (second symbol variation display) can be performed so that at least a part of the sub-general variation is difficult to see. An image display means and an effect movable means, wherein the effect move means is operable at least as the effect, and the sub-normal variation is at least performed by the image display means. In the image display means, the effect can display at least an image related to the operation of the effect moving means, and at least one of the effect moving means and the image operated as the effect. Amusement machine wherein a sub Hiroshizu difficult viewing the variation, characterized in that the.
(Appendix A27)

In the case of the game stand according to appendix A26, in the case where the sub-normal variation has been made first, the sub-normal variation has been made difficult to visually recognize in the production, and the production has been made first. The game machine is characterized in that the sub-normal variation using the image display means is not executed.
(Appendix A28)

The gaming table according to appendix A26 or A27, wherein the image display means has a holding display area, and the effect makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the holding display area. A characteristic game stand.
(Appendix A29)

The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A26 to A28, wherein the sub-common figure fluctuation is more likely to be performed during non-big hit games than during big hit games. Stand.
(Appendix A30)

  The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A26 to A29, wherein the sub-normal change is more likely to be performed in a non-electric support state than in an electric support state.

  The effect in the game machine described in Supplementary Notes A21 to A25 may include at least a jackpot notice. Further, the effect moving means may be operable at least as a jackpot notice. Further, the effect moving means may be capable of at least an operation toward the front side (player side) of the image display means as the effect.

In addition, even if it is the structural requirement contained only in each description of each embodiment and additional remarks demonstrated above, you may apply the structural requirement to other embodiment and additional remarks.
(Appendix A31)

  An electric Chu, a win / fail judgment means (special drawing), an auxiliary success / failure judgment means (common figure), an effect means, and an effect control means capable of controlling at least the effect means, and a main common map fluctuation display (first) And a sub-general variation display (second symbol variation display), wherein the effect control means provides the effect means with at least the effect and the sub-general fluctuation. It is possible to execute the effect so that it becomes difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the electric chew release notification effect after the sub-normal change, the electric chew release notification effect While running, it is allowed to enter the electric chew, and while the electric chew release notification effect is being performed with the effect in the special figure variation display based on entering the electric chew, it is difficult to see , Said Mei Hiroshizu variation is easy viewing, amusement machine, characterized in that. (Appendix A32)

The gaming table according to appendix A31, wherein a special figure 1 symbol fluctuation display means capable of executing at least the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 1 and a special figure 2 symbol fluctuation display capable of executing at least the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 2 A game stand characterized in that it makes it difficult to visually recognize a running electric-chu release notification effect by the effect during the symbol variation display of the special figure 2.
(Appendix A33)

The game table according to appendix A31 or A32, wherein the special figure 2 is more likely to receive a big hit that is more advantageous.
(Appendix A34)

  This game machine is a special figure 2 priority change machine, and includes at least a prefetch notice means capable of executing the prefetch notice of special figure 1 and executes at least the sub-normal figure change display during execution of the prefetch notice of special figure 1. It is possible, the electrification variation is won and the electric chew is released, and the prefetching notice is given even if the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is interrupted, and the electric chew release notification effect is visually recognized by the prefetching notice effect display. A game stand characterized by difficulty.

  In the special figure 2 priority variation machine, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the electric chew release notification effect being executed with the effect in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 according to the entry into the electric chew. In addition, in the winning order variation machine, the electric chew release notification effect that is being executed in the state where the number of special symbols on hold is less than a predetermined number (less or zero) and the special symbol variation display is stopped is It may be difficult to view due to the effect in the symbol variation display of the special figure corresponding to the entry into the chew. In addition, during the non-electric support, the special figure 137 can be won almost alternately, while in the electric support state, the game stand that can continuously win the special figure 2 by the electric Chu release through the normal fluctuation is running The electric chew release notification effect may be difficult to visually recognize with the effect in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 corresponding to the winning. By doing so, it may be possible to notify that there is a possibility that the advantageous symbol variation display of FIG. Also, the attacker has a first big hit (unfavorable big hit) with a relatively short opening time, and a relatively long second big hit (advantageous big hit). The second jackpot may be more likely to appear than the second jackpot, or the first jackpot may not appear.

In addition, even if it is the structural requirement contained only in each description of each embodiment and additional remarks demonstrated above, you may apply the structural requirement to other embodiment and additional remarks.
(Appendix A35)

  A first entry area in which a game ball can enter; a second entry area in which a game ball can enter; When the second determination result is satisfied, the second determination unit that can execute the second determination, and the first determination unit after starting the symbol variation display. A game machine comprising: a notifying unit capable of executing a symbol variation display for performing a stop display of a symbol corresponding to the first determination result, and an effect unit including at least a display unit capable of executing the display. At least one of the requirements for establishment of the first condition includes at least the entry of a game ball into the first entry area, and the second entry area is the first success / failure determination result. If the result is a specific success / failure determination result, the time allowed for entry is limited. A game ball is allowed to enter, and at least one of the requirements for establishing the second condition includes at least that the game ball enters the second entry area, and the display The means is capable of displaying at least an effect display when the third condition is established, and the effect display includes at least a result display regarding the result of the first success / failure determination, The display means can display the effect display while the symbol variation display is being executed, and the display means can display the result display while the symbol stop display is being executed. The effect display is displayed over an effect time longer than the first effect time, and the first effect time is shorter than the display time of the symbol variation display. Features Gaming table.

Note that the first entry area is, for example, the ordinary map starting port 228, the second entry area is, for example, electric chew, and the first success / failure determination is, for example, the determination of whether or not the usual figure is present (usual drawing lottery), The second determination of success / failure is, for example, determination of success / failure of special figure (special drawing lottery).
(Appendix A36)

The gaming table according to appendix A35, wherein the gaming state is configured to be able to transition to any of a plurality of states, and the plurality of states include at least a first state, and the plurality of states are: The second state includes at least a second state, and the second state has a higher probability that the first success / failure determination result becomes the specific success / failure determination result than the first state, and the display The means is characterized in that the effect display is easier to display during the period of the first state than the period of the second state.
(Appendix A37)

The gaming machine according to appendix A36, wherein the symbol variation display is performed over any one of a plurality of display times, and the plurality of display times includes at least a first display time. The plurality of display times include at least a second display time, the second display time is longer than the first display time, and the first state is The game table is characterized in that the display time is more likely to be the second display time than the second state.
(Appendix A38)

The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A35 to A37, wherein the result display indicates that the second entry area is when the first success / failure determination result is a specific success / failure determination result. The game table is characterized in that it includes at least an entry enable indication indicating that a game ball can enter.
(Appendix A39)

The game machine according to any one of appendices A35 to A38, wherein the presentation means is capable of executing at least a jackpot notice for notifying whether or not a jackpot will occur, It is generated on the basis of at least one condition that a game ball has entered the second entry area, and the effect unit is configured to display at least a part of the effect display during the display of the effect display by the display unit. The jackpot notice can be executed at least so that it is difficult to see from the player, and the change display of the symbol by the notification means is difficult for the player to see at least part of the effect display by the display means. A game stand that is easily visible to the player during the period.
(Appendix A40)

  A first entry area in which a game ball can enter; a second entry area in which a game ball can enter; When the second determination result is satisfied, the second determination unit that can execute the second determination, and the first determination unit after starting the symbol variation display. A game machine comprising: a notifying unit capable of executing a symbol variation display for performing a stop display of a symbol corresponding to the first determination result, and an effect unit including at least a display unit capable of executing the display. At least one of the requirements for establishment of the first condition includes at least the entry of a game ball into the first entry area, and the second entry area is the first success / failure determination result. If the result is a specific success / failure determination result, the time allowed for entry is limited. A game ball is allowed to enter, and at least one of the requirements for establishing the second condition includes at least that the game ball enters the second entry area, and the display The means is capable of displaying at least an effect display when the third condition is established, and the effect display includes at least a result display regarding the result of the first success / failure determination, The directing means is capable of at least executing a jackpot notice for notifying whether or not a jackpot will occur, and the jackpot is generated based on at least one condition that a game ball has entered the second entry area. The effect display started when the jackpot notice is being executed is better than the effect display started when the jackpot notice is not executed. Serial in which production time tends to be shorter, the amusement machine, characterized in that.

In this case as well, the first entry area is, for example, the general map starting port 228, the second entry area is, for example, the electric chew, and the first success / failure determination is, for example, the determination of whether or not the normal figure is correct (normal map lottery). ), The second success / failure determination is, for example, determination of whether or not a special figure is present (special drawing lottery).
(Appendix A41)

  The gaming machine according to appendix A40, wherein the effect means displays at least the jackpot notice so that at least a part of the effect display is difficult for a player to view during display of the effect display by the display means. The symbol variation display by the notifying means is easy to see from the player even during a period when at least a part of the effect display by the display means is difficult to see from the player. A game table that features

  In addition, it may be a gaming machine according to the supplementary notes A35 to A41, and the non-electric support may be a game stand in which the electric chew can be selected with a shorter opening time than during the electrical support. In other words, the possible entry time of the second approach area is any one of a plurality of times including at least a first time and a second time longer than the first time, The state may be such that the possible entry time is more likely to be the first time than the second state. By doing so, it may be possible to have an expectation that it will be a time other than the first time in the first state.

  In addition, the ordinary drawing effect may be performed more easily when the electric Chu long is opened than when the electric Chu short is opened. In other words, the display means is more likely to execute the effect display when the approachable time is the second time than when the accessible time is the first time. In this case, there may be a case where expectation can be given for the second time.

  Further, the time for the short normal drawing effect may be longer than the time for the short normal map change display. That is, the second state is such that the display time is likely to be the first display time than the first state, and the first effect time is longer than the first display time. There may be. Moreover, the said approach possible display may be displayed during the said approach possible time.

  Further, the display means has a display area capable of executing at least display, the display area includes at least a first display area, and the display means displays the effect display in the first display area. It may be possible to display in at least a part of the display area.

  Further, the display means may be capable of executing a notice display regarding the result of the second success / failure determination in at least a part of the first display area (example shown in FIG. 189). Further, at least a part of the effect display and at least a part of the notice display may be common. For example, the relationship between the variation display pattern shown in FIG. 165 (b) (a) and the variation display pattern shown in FIG.

  In addition, when performing a special drawing when the special figure is unchanged, the jackpot notice (for example, “Hatsuatsu”) may not be stopped, or even when the special drawing is not changed, A change display including a big hit notice (for example, “super hot”) may be displayed.

  Further, the ordinary drawing effect may be performed only during non-electric support, or may be performed only during a non-hit state.

  The effect display includes at least a first display (for example, variable display), and the effect display includes at least a second display (for example, a result display and an effect image display may be included). Yes, the effect display may include at least a third display (for example, an approachable display). Here, the third display may have a display area larger than the first display, may have a display area larger than the second display, The display area may be larger than the display.

In addition, even if it is the structural requirement contained only in each description of each embodiment and additional remarks demonstrated above, you may apply the structural requirement to other embodiment and additional remarks.
(Appendix A42)

  Symbol display means capable of performing at least symbol variation display, hold display means capable of displaying a hold icon, and first control means capable of at least performing display control of the symbol display means; And a second control means capable of at least controlling display of the hold icon by the hold display means, wherein the symbol variation display is performed after the symbol variation display is performed. The symbol pattern corresponding to the result of the determination of success / failure is stopped and displayed. The first symbol display means of the symbol display means is configured to display the symbol variation when the first symbol variation condition is satisfied. The second symbol display means of the symbol display means can perform at least the symbol variation display when the second symbol variation condition is satisfied. The first symbol variation condition includes at least that there is a ball in the first starting region of the starting region, and the second symbol variation condition is the starting It includes at least that there was a ball in the second starting area of the area, and the holding display means is a holding icon corresponding to the symbol fluctuation display in relation to the start of the symbol fluctuation display. It is possible to at least perform a first display relating to a certain digest pending icon, and the pending display means is a pending icon that does not correspond to the symbol variation display in association with the start of the symbol variation display. It is possible to perform at least a second display relating to the hold icon, and the hold display means is capable of displaying at least an undigested hold icon equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit number. The hold display means can display at least a plurality of undigested hold icons, and the first control means sends a command signal to the second control means in relation to the start of the symbol variation display. The second control means is capable of at least starting the first display in response to the reception of the command signal; and The control means is capable of at least starting the second display in response to the reception of the command signal, and the hold display means has at least a first display area. And the hold display means has at least a second display area, and the first display has a small amount of the digest hold icon from the first display area to the second display area. At least movement (hereinafter referred to as first movement). ), The digestion pending icon is erased in the second display area, and the second display displays the display position of the undigested suspension icon separately in the first display area. At least to the position (hereinafter referred to as second movement), and when the first hold increase condition is satisfied, the hold display means sets the first hold icon as the hold icon. The hold display means can display at least a second hold icon as the hold icon when the second hold increase condition is satisfied. The first hold increase condition includes at least that the first start area has been entered, and the second hold increase condition includes the second start area entry. There is a sphere If the first hold icon is the undigested hold icon, the first hold icon is displayed in the first symbol display means display area of the first display area. And when the second pending icon is the undigested pending icon, the second pending icon is displayed in the second symbol display means display area of the first display area, The display area for one symbol display means is a display area different from the display area for the second symbol display means, and the display area where the erasure is performed for the first hold icon is the second hold icon The first display is completed in a longer time than the second display, and the hold display means is an effect display by the undigested hold icon. The hold display means can also perform an effect display by the digestion hold icon, and at least all the undigested in the display area for the second symbol display means The hold icon completes the second movement at a second time, and at least the digestion hold icon in the display area for the second symbol display means has the first movement at the first time. The game table is characterized in that the first time is a time different from the second time. In addition, even if it is the structural requirement contained only in each description of each embodiment and additional remarks demonstrated above, you may apply the structural requirement to other embodiment and additional remarks.

  The configuration of the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the structure of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first to sixth embodiments. For example, the gaming machine according to the present invention is limited to the pachinko machine. For example, a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols, a start lever for instructing the rotation of the reels, and each reel are provided, and the rotation of the reels is individually stopped. A lottery means for determining whether or not an internal winning of a plurality of types of winnings is won by lottery, a reel stop control means for performing stop control for stopping rotation of the reel based on a lottery result of the lottery means, and lottery Determining means for determining whether or not the symbol combination displayed by the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the means is a symbol combination determined in advance corresponding to the winning combination internally; If stop mode is a predetermined winning mode, it is also suitable, such as a slot machine and a dispensing control means for paying out game media payout processing game media corresponding to a predetermined winning mode.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, the “enclosed game machine” is one that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in the game machine. That is, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine, and this enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball, The ball payout may be executed by credit.

  In addition, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured as a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to allow bidirectional communication. Good. Moreover, while enabling bidirectional communication between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, in some cases, the content described in one configuration among a plurality of configurations described in the embodiments may be applied to other configurations to further widen the game.

  The game machine according to the present invention can be applied to game machines represented by a spinning machine (slot machine) and a ball game machine (pachinko machine).

100 Pachinko machine 136 Chance button 208 First decorative symbol display device 224 Production movable body 226 General winning opening 228, 229 General drawing starting opening 230 Special drawing 1 starting opening 232 Special drawing 2 starting opening 232a Blade member 234 Variable winning opening 234a Door member 700 爺 710, 810 Yoshimune 720 Reach image 730 Effect image 740, 740a, 740b, 740c, 790, 800 Chance button image 750, 750a, 750b, 750c PUSH image 760, 760a, 760b, 760c Gauge image 770, 780 Villager

Claims (8)

A symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display;
Display means capable of performing multiple types of display;
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of display is a display (hereinafter, referred to as “pre-reception display”) performed before the operation reception by the player.
The display means is a means capable of displaying one image showing the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “first operation part image”),
The display means is a means capable of displaying one image showing the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “second operation part image”),
The first operation unit image and the second operation unit image are different display modes,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a first pre-reception animation including a first scene as the pre-reception display,
The first pre-reception animation may include a second scene,
The first scene is a scene in which the first operation unit image is displayed and the second operation unit image is not displayed.
The second scene is a scene in which the second operation unit image is displayed and the first operation unit image is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
The operation means indicated by the first operation part image and the operation means indicated by the second operation part image are the same operation means.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 2,
One of the plurality of types of display is a display that is performed during operation reception by the player (hereinafter referred to as “display during reception”).
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second pre-reception animation including the first scene as the pre-reception display,
The first pre-reception animation may not include the second scene,
The second pre-reception animation may include the second scene,
The second pre-reception anime may not include the second scene,
The one effect display in the second pre-reception animation is an effect display that is not performed in the first pre-reception animation,
When the second scene is displayed as the pre-reception display, the second scene is displayed after the first scene is displayed,
The probability that the second pre-reception animation including the second scene is displayed is higher than the probability that the first pre-reception animation including the second scene is displayed.
When the pre-reception display that does not include the second scene is performed, a display including the first operation unit image (hereinafter referred to as a “first reception display”) is performed as the reception display. Is configured to be
When the pre-reception display including the second scene is performed, a display including the second operation unit image (hereinafter, referred to as “second reception in progress”) is performed as the reception display. Is configured as
In the symbol variation display, the second receiving display is displayed and the first receiving display is displayed rather than the case where the first receiving display is displayed and the second receiving display is not displayed. If it is not displayed, it is easier to confirm the jackpot symbol form after the symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 3,
The display during reception is a display performed immediately after the display before reception.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 4,
When the second scene is displayed as the pre-reception display, after the first scene is displayed, another one or more scenes are displayed, and then the second scene is displayed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
The first operation unit image is an image including a part of the operation means,
The second operation section image is an image including a part of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 6,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 6,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

Images